31B-169 (4) 4M
Renovations to Parsons Annex
Smith College
Northampton,Massachusetts
A. Work Included: Provide labor, materials, and equipment necessary to complete the
work including, but not limited to, the following:
1. Fire safing at all penetrations through fire barriers.
2. Fire safing at all penetrations through smoke barriers.
aw 3. Extent of fire and smoke barriers as indicated on the Architectural
Drawings.
on 4. Fire safing at all penetrations through floors, shafts, corridor walls,
stairway walls, mechanical rooms, electrical rooms, vaults, storage rooms,
kitchen, machine rooms, outdoor storage rooms, and receiving rooms.
B. Safing Insulation
1. Fire safing insulation shall be Thermafiber as manufactured by USG
Interiors, Inc.,or Architect-Engineer approved equal, 4" minimum thickness by
the required full length and width, or as indicated on the Drawings.
2. Provide incidental galvanized steel clip anchors.
C. Seal Compound: At "poke-through" openings, apply "Firecode" seal compound as
manufactured by USG Interiors, Inc., or approved equal, over Thermafiber fire
safing.
D. Preparation
1. At all fire rated assemblies, prepare all penetrations for pipes.
E. Application
1. Install approved fire safing insulation of proper size, leaving no voids.
Compress and friction fit fire safing and use attachment clips where
necessary.
2. Seal completely around all openings and over the fire safing insulation with
sealing compound.
END OF SECTION
Project No. 00058 16100 Electrical-23
.a
Renovations to Parsons Annex
Smith College
Northampton,Massachusetts
D. Conduit connections to motor frames shall have minimum of 18" of flexible steel conduit to A
eliminate vibrations and noise being transferred to other parts of the building, with cable
jumper across greenfield and fittings. This flexible conduit shall also be installed at ceiling
mounted lighting fixtures to facilitate alignment of fixtures.
3.04 OUTLET AND JUNCTION BOXES
A. Receptacle boxes, unless otherwise noted, shall be approximately 18" above finished floor,
aligned above or below closest block course, except at locations where wall mounted
equipment precludes this mounting height. At such locations, receptacle height shall be as
directed by the Architect. Switch outlets shall be 48" above finished floor, unless aligned *�
above or below closest block course. The Electrical Contractor shall check with the
Architectural and Structural Plans for interferences.
B. Junction and outlet boxes, where exposed to the weather and wet locations, shall be of the
threaded hub type and provided with watertight screw-on cover and gasket.
C. Pull boxes shall be adequate size to accommodate the conductors installed therein without
excessive bending of the conductors,which would damage the conductor insulation.
D. All outlet boxes installed in masonry shall be so set that their outer edges are 1/4" back of
finished surface.
E. Outlet boxes shall not be supported by the conduit. Suitable means shall be provided to •
support the outlet box to take the weight of the fixture.
F. Fixture outlet boxes used as junction boxes or outlets not used, shall be provided with covers.
3.05 EQUIPMENT INSTALLATION
A. All equipment furnished under this Section shall be installed in accordance with its
manufacturer's printed installation instructions, whether so shown on the Drawings or not,
and all labor and materials required to accomplish this shall be furnished by the Electrical
Contractor and be included in his bid.
3.06 TESTING
A. Balancing Loads:
1. Circuits shall be connected to the panelboards so that the total load is distributed
equally between each line and neutral to within ten percent. Branch circuits shall be
balanced on their own panelboards, and feeder loads balanced on the main
distribution panel. Reasonable load testing shall be arranged for verification if
requested by the Public Works Department. .�
3.07 FIRE SAFING
Project No. 00058 16100 Electrical-22
40
Renovations to Parsons Annex
Smith College
Northampton,Massachusetts
D. The locations of outlets, apparatus, and equipment are approximate only and the runs of
feeders, mains, and branches are not necessarily to be made exactly as shown on the plans.
The exact locations of such work shall be determined after full consideration has been given
to work of other trades and without changes in the design of the systems. The entire
installation shall conform to the latest issue of the Massachusetts Electrical Code and local
inspection authorities.
E. Electrical equipment, such as junction and pull boxes, control, and apparatus, shall be made
accessible.
F. All wiring shall be concealed in finished spaces,except as otherwise specified.
3.02 GROUNDING
A. Except where specifically indicated otherwise,all exposed non-current carrying metallic parts
of electrical equipment, metallic raceway systems, grounding conductor in non-metallic
raceways and neutral conductor of the wiring system shall be grounded. The ground
connection shall be made at the main service equipment.
B. The Electrical Contractor shall furnish and install all material required for the grounding
and/or bonding in the building of all equipment, power and lighting systems installed under
40 this Contract.
C. The Electrical Contractor shall make tight and proper all metallic components and equipment
w to one another and to ground, using a positive foolproof system of connections. Provide and
install bonding and grounding conductors with approved termination where required,
conforming with the latest Massachusetts Electrical Code and other applicable specification
standards.
D. A #12 AWG insulated equipment ground conductor shall be installed in each length of
flexible metallic conduit connection to motors,recessed lighting fixtures and other equipment
components for continuity. Positive ground connections with the ground wire shall be made
at each outlet box, lighting fixture, motor and other equipment components by means of
positively secured ground clamp in each.
4
3.03 CONDUIT AND FITTINGS
A. All conduit shall be installed so as to provide the straightest possible run with not more than
the equivalent of three 90° bends in a single run. Where more bends are necessary, the
Electrical Contractor shall provide suitable pull boxes.
B. Conduit shall be fished and cleaned and dry before pulling wires and shall be suitably
protected against entrance of dirt and moisture during construction.
C. Ends of all conduits shall be reamed and all joints made waterproof. Connections to junction
boxes shall be double locknut and bushing, using insulated bushings on conduit 1-1/4" or
larger. Grounding bushings shall be provided at all panel connections.
Project No. 00058 16100 Electrical-21
I"
Im
Renovations to Parsons Annex
Smith College
Northampton,Massachusetts
a. Test all cables for length, impedance, resistance,capacitance,attenuation,
next loss,and inverted pairs with a Wirescope 350 or approved equal. +*
Verify that that testing device is acceptable to owner or approved equal.
Verify that testing device is acceptable to owner prior to commencing
testing.All points shall pass the test for Category 5E standards. Submit
printed test data to owner and A/E at least 7 days prior to connection of
system equipment.All testing shall comply with EIA/TIA 67 Standards.
b. Test reports shall incorporate the labeling convention described in 3.5 A. 1
(E.G. EG007-A-1,EGO07 A-2.....EG007-13-24)
C. Test Telephone cables for proper mapping and terminations.
2.14 EMERGENCY CALL-FOR-AID SYSTEM(Handicap Toilet)
..
A. The building's Emergency Call-For-Aid System will be furnished and installed (including
cabling)by the Electrical Contractor.
B. Each Emergency Call Station shall consist of a single gang box with blank plate and a call
switch. Call switch shall be Simplex 5001 series.
C. The call station switch shall be long-life, positive acting mounted on a stainless steel plate
marked "Emergency". The unit shall include a six foot(6)long nylon pull cord.
D. The combination chime/light station shall be a single bulb dome lamp with soft chime tone;
flame retardant ABS panel with snap-in lens. Provide lamps, chime, and all required
transformers.
E. Activation of system shall cause dome to illuminate and chime to tone. Signal cancellation
must be made at the point of origin. ,
PART 3-INSTALLATION
3.01 GENERAL INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS
A. The Electrical Contractor shall endeavor to layout and perform his work in such a manner as
to cause no delay in the construction by other trades.
B. The Electrical Contractor shall verify all measurements and shall be responsible for the „
correctness of same. No allowance will be made for differences between actual
measurements and those shown on plans.
C. If, in laying out his work, the Electrical Contractor finds that the work of other trades might
interfere with his,the Architect shall be notified.
Project No. 00058 16100 Electrical -20
Renovations to Parsons Annex
Smith College
Northampton, Massachusetts
e. Organize cabling in D rings or other support brackets designed for the
+� purpose. Provide D rings for crosswire to incoming house circuit pairs.
f. Provide min. 4' service loop supported by closed D rings on backboard. In
all cases, service loop shall be long enough to allow cable to reach either
voice or data termination blocks.
3. Grounding
a. Bond all metal conduits, racks and panels. All grounding shall
comply with ANS/TIA/EIA 607 Grounding and Bonding Standard.
4. Pull Cords
a. Install a fish cord in all empty conduits smaller than 1- '/z". Install a 1/8 "
nylon pull cord in all conduits 1-1/2"and larger.
em 5. Identification
a. Patch panels and device plates shall be labeled according to the following:
W 1- Each patch panel shall be alphabetically labeled in sequence, e.g
A,B,C, etc.with the pre-assigned B&G building number as a prefix.
W 2- The number on the patch panel shall correspond to the number on the
device plate in the room.
OR 3- The device plate shall be numbered with patch panel letter and port
number, e.g A-1, B-1,C-1, etc.
4- All labels shall be machine made and shall be 3/8"high. Hand written
labels are not acceptable.
b. Cable marker tags to be consecutively numbered. Provide system diagram
at each patch panel with outlet identifications indicated on 8 ''/2"X 11"
floor plan which has been mounted in a protective frame securely attached
to the wall.
C. For major building renovations, provide system diagram on Autocad
Release 14, or as approved by owner.
au
6. Testing
.A
Project No. 00058 16100 Electrical-19
am
Renovations to Parsons Annex
Smith College
Northampton,Massachusetts
e. Maintain existing 2 pr communications cable for card reader system where
applicable.
f. Existing head end equipment, including fiber optic data and telephone ..
equipment mounted on existing backboard in basement,and in IDF
closets shall be removed from job site,delivered to ITS for storage and
returned to job site at new locations.
g. New outlet locations,as shown on Drawings, shall consist of standard
size outlet box,and cover plates(smooth phenolic ivory),with 3 ports;
(1)for data,(1)for telephone,and(1)for future expansion.
h. The work in this Section shall be performed by a Contractor who has been
pre-qualified by the College. Acceptable Contractor is Hogan and HAAS
Electric for final terminations and testing.
i. Work of this Section shall include the installation,termination, and testing of
all data and telephone wiring from the outlets indicated on the Contract
Drawings to the appropriate Data/Telephone Room as indicated on the
Drawings as MDF and IDF..
j. All data runs must be installed without cross-connects between wall
jack and patch panel terminations in Telephone Room.
2. Wiring
a. Where wiring is concealed in building construction, install in min. 3/4" w
conduit. Cable may be bundled on messenger cable with velcro wraps in
accessible ceiling space. Do not use tie wraps to bundle or support cable,
except at patch panels. Use only hangers designed and approved for the
required application.
b. Maintain a minimum 12" spacing from power and lighting circuits.
C. Protect all cable from physical damage.Avoid micro bends and maintain ,..
proper radius. Support riser cable uniformly to prevent undue stress on
cable or bends.
d. Label each index strip with the corresponding jack number as marked on
the wall plate and 8X11 map.
Project No. 00058 16100 Electrical-18
ear
Renovations to Parsons Annex
Smith College
Northampton,Massachusetts
5. Twisted pair Distribution Cable(Voice&Data)
a. DATA: 4 pair,AWG solid bare copper conductors, Category 5E extended
distance, extended frequency, cellular polyethylene insulated,UL CM and
MP flame retardant PVC jacket. Provide UL CMP fluoropolymer jacket in
air handling spaces and type CMR when passing through floors.Use blue
cable for data.
b. VOICE: Use gray cable Cat 5 PVC or plenum.
6. Raceway System
a. Provide a complete raceway and outlet box system.
b. Conduit sizes: Minimum 1" size, except that conduits to wall outlets may
be 3/4" size. Provide larger sizes as indicated.
C. Outlet Boxes: Minimum 4" square by 2-1/2"deep. Provide single-gang
extension ring for each flush-mounted outlet box. In non fire rated walls,
"old work"plaster rings only are preferred.
7. Telecommunications Back Boards
a. New type AC or MDO plywood,3/4"thick 4' wide by 8' high,primed and
painted with flame retardant gray paint. Provide wall coverage as indicated
on plans.
C. EXECUTION
1. General
a. Install raceway and outlet box system as indicated, with not more
than two quarter bends(180 degrees total)between accessible
pulling locations. Cable bend radius shall not be less that 8
"* diameter.All pull boxes shall be straight through.
b. Terminate conduits at telecommunications back boards, outlets or as
indicated.
C. Install outlets where shown on plans.Install,wire and connect all
termination equipment per manufacturer's instructions for satisfactory
operation.
d. For new renovation projects; deactivate old cable and provide cross wire to
new punch down blocks,remove all abandoned cable,jacks, face plates,
and wireway.
Project No. 00058 16100 Electrical-17
Renovations to Parsons Annex
Smith College
Northampton,Massachusetts
b. Acceptable manufacturer: Hubbell PC7024B (24 port)and PC7048B(48
port) ..
C. Rack mount shall be equipped with cable support bars.
d. Do not use fluorescent fixtures in data closets or within 15' of data patch
panels.
2. Telephone Punch Down Blocks `
a. Provide AT&T 110 quick connecting terminating system. Units to be
comprised of one-piece molded plastic 4-pair connecting blocks with
horizontal color-coded index strips secured to mounting frame organizing
25 pairs(22 to 26 gauge). Configure units in 300 pair blocks at each
backboard.
b. Provided protector blocks at building service entrance as required by NEC
70,Article 830-C and as manufactured by AT&T Type 188 Building
Entrance Protectors w/4B-EW Series Protectors. Verify clamping voltage
with Williams Telco Office.
3. Telephone/Data Wall Outlets
a. As a minimum provided voice and data jacks as follows:
Dorms—in each sleeping room-1 voice and 1 data per bed. •e•
Commons Rooms-min. of 1 voice and 1 data outlet spaced so that
no point on any wall space is more than 20' away from the outlet where
measured along continuous wall surface.
And in all cases, as noted on drawings.
b. Each outlet shall house the required number of Category 5E, 8-wire
RJ45 jacks designed for termination of 22-26 AWG unshielded cable.
Jacks to be of single modular design,color-coded for ease of
identification; Voice-office white,Data-black. Mount devices in a labeled
modular face plate, HBL# FPL12,13 or 14 as required.
C. Acceptable Manufacturer: Voice Outlet; Hubbell HD58A6(Office White);
conforming to PDS—T568B AT&T standards; Data Outlet,
Hubbell HD5EB5 (Black)conforming to PDS-T568B standards.
4. Telephone Riser Cable
a. AR Series,NEC type CMR. Level 3,UL listed cable constructed of color-
coded,24 AWG solid copper pairs insulated with PVC skin over expanded
polyethylene insulated,UL CM and MP flame retardant PVC jacket.
Provide quantity of pairs indicated from telephone entrance room.
Project No. 00058 16100 Electrical-16
Renovations to Parsons Annex
Smith College
Northampton,Massachusetts
a. Systems connector interface and pair assignments to be compliant with
EIA/TIA 568A for voice& data transmission on UPT cable. Wiring and
connectors to comply with EIA/TIA TSB-36 and TSB-40 requirements for
w. category 5E high speed transmission rates up to 100 Mbps.All work shall
comply with N.E.0 70, 1996 and testing shall be in accordance with
TIA/EIA TSB-67.
3. Submittals
a. Product Data: Manufacturer's descriptive literature for each type of device
of equipment, and wire/cable to be used on the project indicating
compliance with special requirements.
b. Shop Drawings:
1) Provided complete schematic and field wiring diagrams, indicating
all devices and equipment.
4. Cabling Contractor
a. The local area network wiring system shall be installed by a Hubbell
Certified cabling contractor with at least 5 years experience in the
installation,testing, and adjustment of systems similar to the system
a specified herein.
5. Guarantee
a. Parts, labor and travel to replace defective materials and workmanship for
a period of one year after final acceptance and the Hubbell 25 year
warranty.
B. PART 2-PRODUCTS
1. Data Patch Panels
a. Multi Port sized as needed,with IDC terminations on rear of panel and
Category 5E RJ45 modular jacks on front.Panels to comply with all FCC,
ISO,UL and CSA requirements,be suitable for termination of 22-26 AWG
cables, be equipped with wiring saddles for each row of termination
blocks,and be sized for each standard 19"equipment rack and contain a
minimum of 24 ports and a maximum of 48 ports(P6704813) . Provide
hinged wall mount rack or full size relay rack as required by owner,
Hubbell#CR1976.
Project No. 00058 16100 Electrical-15
40
Renovations to Parsons Annex
Smith College
Northampton, Massachusetts
F. A circuit directory frame and card with a clear plastic covering shall be provided on the
inside of the door. The directory card shall provide a space at least 1/4" high by 3" long or
equivalent for each circuit. The directory shall be typed to identify the load fed by each
circuit.
G. Each panelboard, as a complete unit, shall have a short circuit current rating equal to or .R
greater than 10,000 amps.
H. Panelboards shall be listed by Underwriters'Laboratories and bear the UL label. Panelboards
shall be Square D, "NQOD" series for 120/208 volts. No substitutions will be allowed.
2.11 FIRE ALARM SYSTEM (Furnished by Owner; Installed by Electrical Contractor)
A. The Electrical Contractor shall install a complete fire alarm system as shown on Drawings.
All fire alarm equipment shall be furnished by the Owner and shall be a Simplex 4005 system
complete with all peripherals, including auto dialer to Campus Security as directed by the
Owner.
B. All wiring in conduit shall be furnished and installed by the Electrical Contractor.
C. The building shall be wired on a "zone per floor" basis unless otherwise indicated by the
Owner.
2.12 ELECTRIC SERVICE
A. Electric service is 200 ampere,208Y/120 volt,3 phase,4 wire to remain.
B. The Electrical Contractor shall provide new feeders (sized as shown on Plans) from existing ,
disconnect switch as directed by the Owner. Connect existing service entrance equipment to
new distribution panelboard.
C. The system shall be properly grounded as required by the Massachusetts Electrical Code. "
Ground cable shall be secured to the water service with an approved clamp; bond water pipe
sections as required by Section 250-81 MEC.
2.13 TELEPHONE/DATA WIRING SYSTEM
A. PART 1-GENERAL •+
1. Description of work
a. Provided a telephone and data wiring system including patch panels,
protector blocks, punch down blocks,wiring, conduit, outlets, and other
miscellaneous hardware required for a complete system. Telephone switch,
handsets and data distribution and control equipment are not in contract.
2. Reference Standards
Project No. 00058 16100 Electrical-14
Renovations to Parsons Annex
Smith College
Northampton, Massachusetts
C. Circuit breakers shall be equipped with individually insulated, braced and protected
connectors. The front faces of all circuit breakers shall be flush with each other. Large
permanent, individual circuit numbers shall be affixed to each breaker in a uniform position.
Tripped indication shall be clearly shown by the breaker handle taking a position between
"ON" and "OFF". Provisions for additional breakers shall be such that no additional
connectors will be required to add breakers.
D. Each panelboard, as a complete unit, shall have a short circuit rating equal to 42,000 amps.
E. Panelboard assembly shall be enclosed in a steel cabinet. The rigidity and gauge of steel to
be as specified in UL Standard 50 for cabinets. The size of wiring gutters shall be in
* accordance with UL Standard 67. Cabinets to be equipped with latch and tumbler lock on
door of trim. Doors over 48" long shall be equipped with three-point latch and vault lock.
All locks shall be keyed alike. End walls shall be removable. Front trim shall be hinged.
w
F. The panelboard interior assembly shall be dead front with panelboard front removed. Main
lugs shall be barriered on five sides. The barrier in front of the main lugs shall be hinged to
no be fixed part of the interior. The end of the bus structure opposite the mains shall be
barriered.
G. Panelboards shall be listed by UL and shall bear the UL label. Panelboard shall be Square D
I-LINE. No Substitutions Accepted.
4
2.10 PANELBOARDS
A. Furnish and install circuit breaker lighting and receptacle panelboards as required and where
shown on the Plans. Panelboards shall be equipped with thermal-magnetic molded case
circuit breakers with frame and trip ratings as required.
B. Circuit breakers shall be quick-make, quick-break, thennal-magnetic, trip indicating, and
have common trip on all multi-pole breakers. Trip indication shall be clearly shown by the
breaker handle taking position between "On" and "Off' when the breaker is tripped.
Connections to the bus shall be bolt-on.
C. Bus bar connections to the branch circuit breaker shall be the "distributed phase" or "phase
sequence"type. All current-carrying parts of the bus assembly shall be plated.
D. Tenninals for feeder conductors to the panelboard mains and neutral shall be UL listed as
40 suitable for the type of conductor specified. Terminals for branch circuit wiring,both breaker
and neutral, shall be UL listed as suitable for the type of conductor specified.
E. Panelboard circuit numbering shall be such that starting at the top,odd numbers shall be used
4W in sequence down the left-hand side and even numbers shall be used in sequence down the
right-hand side.
Project No. 00058 16100 Electrical -13
Renovations to Parsons Annex
Smith College
Northampton, Massachusetts .®
1. Across-the-line magnetic starters shall be equipped with double break silver alloy
contacts. All contacts shall be replaceable without removing power wiring or
removing starter from panel.
2. Coils shall be of molded construction, replaceable from the front without removing
the starter from the panel.
3. Overload relays shall be the melting alloy type with a replaceable control circuit
module. Thermal units shall be of one-piece construction and interchangeable. The
starter shall be inoperative if the thermal unit is removed.
a. All three phase magnetic starters shall have "Hand-Off-Auto" selector
switch, three-pole, three-phase of NEMA size applicable, with three melting
alloy overload relays and three-position H-O-A switch in cover of general
purpose enclosure. To be Allen-Bradley Bulletin 522. No
substitutions will be allowed.
b. All single phase magnetic starters shall be single pole magnetic contactor
without overload protection, with "Hand-Off-Auto' selector switch in cover
of general purpose enclosure. To be Allen-Bradley Bulletin 509. No
substitutions will be allowed.
C. A control transformer shall be furnished and installed in each starter, fused,
with 24 volt secondary. Starter coils shall be 24 volt.
d. Furnish a minimum of one auxiliary contact in each starter for use by others
for interlocking purposes.
2.09 DISTRIBUTION PANELS
A. Furnish and install distribution/power panelboards where shown on the Plans. Panelboards
shall be equipped with thermal-magnetic, molded case circuit breakers of frame and trip
ratings as required.
B. Panelboard bus structure and main lugs shall have current ratings as required. Such ratings
shall be established by heat rise tests with maximum hot spot temperature on any connector
or bus bar not to exceed 50°C above ambient. Heat rise tests shall be conducted in
accordance with Underwriters Laboratories Standard UL 67. The use of conductor
dimensions will not be accepted in lieu of actual heat tests. Buses shall be copper.
Project No. 00058 16100 Electrical-12
Renovations to Parsons Annex
Smith College
!+� Northampton,Massachusetts
B. Fluorescent ballasts shall be solid state electronic type, approvable for use on their system by
the Massachusetts Electric Co. Fixture/lamp combinations for which electronic ballasts are
not available shall be high power factor, energy efficient magnetic type, complete with
automatic reset thermal protector,and shall be CBM certified.
C. All fixtures shall be installed complete with lamps of the stated type and size. T-8 lamps
shall be 3500 K. Compact fluorescent PL lamps shall be 3,500 K.
D. All fixtures to be independently supported from building structure.
E. Fixtures are identified by letter on the Fixture Schedule and by corresponding letter on
Drawings. Manufacturers'names and catalogue numbers are listed to show type and standard
of quality. Complete schedule of lighting fixtures shall be submitted to and approved by the
Architect and Owner.
2.08 MOTOR STARTERS AND SWITCHES
A. Furnish and install motor starting,protecting,and controlling devices for motors.
B. Furnish and install heavy duty fused safety switches as required.
1. All switches shall have switch blades which are fully visible in the "Off' position
with the door open. All current-carrying parts shall be plated to resist corrosion and
promote cool operation.
2. Switches shall be quick-made and quick-break such that,during normal operation of
the switch, the operation of the contacts shall not be capable of being restrained by
the operating handle after the closing or opening action of the contacts has started.
The handle and mechanism shall be an integral part of the box, not the cover, with
positive pad-locking provisions in the "Off'position.
on 3. Switches shall be furnished in NEMA 1 general purpose enclosures unless NEMA
3R(rainproof) is required. Enclosures shall have gray enamel, electro-deposited on
cleaned phosphatized steel.
4. Switches shall be horsepower rated for 240 volts AC.
5. Fuses shall be as required.
6. Switches shall be Square D, heavy duty type in NEMA 1 or NEMA 3R enclosure.
C. Disconnect switches for 120 volt, single phase motors shall be single or double pole toggle
switches as specified,or required.
D. Motor starters shall be across-the-line magnetic type rated in accordance with NEMA
Standards, sizes and horsepower ratings. Starters shall be mounted in general purpose
enclosures unless otherwise indicated on the Plans.
Project No. 00058 16100 Electrical-11
an
Renovations to Parsons Annex
Smith College
Northampton,Massachusetts
1. Duplex Receptacles - 20 amp, 125 volt with grounding screw, side and back wired.
To be Leviton Cat.No. 5352-I,or equal. ..
2. Ground fault interrupting receptacles shall be Leviton Cat.No. 6898-HGI,or equal.
3. Weatherproof cover for receptacles shall be lockable,vertical,UL Listed,with Lexan
base and lid,4 screw attachment,Tay Mac Cat.No. 20-3-5-0,or equal.
4. Duplex receptacles, isolated ground-20 A, 125 V, side and back wired,Leviton Cat.
No. 5362-IG,or equal.
5. Light Switches, Single Pole - 20 amp, 120/277 volt, back and side wired, Leviton
Cat.No. 1221-2,or equal.
6. Light Switches,3 Way-20 amp, 120/277 volt,back and side wired,Leviton Cat.No.
1223-2,or equal.
7. Light Switches,4 Way-20 amp, 120/277 volt,back and side wired,Leviton Cat.No.
1224-2,or equal.
8. Switch and Pilot Light - 20 amp, 120 volt, side and back wired, red handle, Leviton
Cat.No. 1221-PLR,or equal.
9. Power receptacles shall be flush type, of NEMA configuration shown,with matching ••R
cord and cap,Leviton,or equal,as follows:
a. Type"R"-50 amp, 125/250 volt,3 pole,4 wire,Leviton Cat.No.279.
b. Type "D" -30 amp, 125/250 volt,3 pole,4 wire,Leviton Cat.No.278.
10. Clock hanger outlet with single receptacle and strong hook for hanging heavy clocks,
Leviton Cat. No. 688-I, ivory finish, or equal. Clocks shall be Simplex, style as
chosen by Architect.
11. Wall plates shall be smooth molded urea or phenolic plastic, ivory with matching
screws. To be Leviton Cat.No. 86000 series,or equal.
.p
2.07 LIGHTING FIXTURES
A. Furnish and install lighting fixtures on all light outlets shown on plans. All lighting fixtures no
to have label of Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. Fixtures to be complete in all respects with
all required glassware and lamps. All lamps to be new. Furnish and install all required
hardware to fit in all type ceilings. Fixtures are to be cleaned after lamps and diffusers are
installed. Any chipped,cracked or otherwise defective material shall be replaced.
Project No. 00058 16100 Electrical-10
go
Renovations to Parsons Annex
Smith College
Northampton,Massachusetts
F. Wire and cable for special systems shall be as specified in those specification sections.
G. Wire and Cable to be by Cerro, Southwire,Triangle/PWC,or equal.
2.04 OUTLET AND JUNCTION BOXES
A. Outlet boxes and covers shall be galvanized or sheradized pressed steel unless otherwise
noted or required by the National Electrical Code,and shall be as required for their use.
B. Junction and outlet boxes, where exposed to weather and wet locations shall be of the cast
aluminum,threaded hub type and provided with watertight screw-on cover and gasket.
C. Outlet boxes shall be of sizes and types to accommodate:
1. structural conditions.
2. size and number of raceways and conductors or cables entering.
3. device of fixture for which required.
D. Boxes occurring at plastered surfaces shall have a suitable plaster ring installed.
E. Where multiple devices are located at one point, gang type boxes shall be used.
F. Pull and junction boxes,whether surface or flush, shall be galvanized code gauge.
G. Pull boxes and wireways shall be standard NEMA-1 enclosures with cover plates and screws,
,. bonderized paint finished.
H. Pull and splice boxes not indicated on the Drawings shall be provided as required by the
National and the Massachusetts Electrical Codes.
I. Outlet boxes and covers shall be as manufactured by Steel City electrical Company, General
Electric Company,Raco,or approved equal.
2.05 NAMEPLATES
A. Furnish and install nameplates identifying all apparatus, controls,panels and safety switches.
The nameplates shall be Seton style 2060 engraved plastic, or equal, screw attached. Submit
schedule of nameplate lettering for approval.
ass
2.06 WIRING DEVICES
A. The Electrical Contractor shall install devices where shown on the plans. Where two or more
devices occur at one location, they shall be provided with a gang plate. All unused boxes to
be furnished with blank plates.
Project No. 00058 16100 Electrical-9
Renovations to Parsons Annex
Smith College
Northampton,Massachusetts *"
2.01 RACEWAYS
A. Rigid galvanized steel or intermediate steel conduit shall be used for all raceway runs
concealed in concrete, run under slabs, run in trenches or pits, exposed below 6' above floor,
and for service entrance conductor sweeps. Conduit shall comply with the latest applicable
Federal Specifications.
B. Electrical metallic tubing may be used for all homerun raceways run in walls or partitions,
raceways run exposed inside the building, or run concealed in or above furred spaces unless
otherwise specified above. Electrical metallic tubing shall comply with the latest applicable
requirements of the National Electrical Manufacturers Association. Couplings, connectors, �..
and fittings for electrical metallic tubing may be of the set screw type.
C. Electrical metallic tubing shall be used for all homeruns.
D. Flexible Steel Conduit shall be used for final connections to motors, or other movable
equipment to facilitate removal and connections.
E. Raceway run underground outside the buildings may be scheduled 40 PVC with solvent
welded fittings.
2.02 WIREWAYS
A. Wireways shall be made to accommodate conductors as required in accordance with
applicable rules of the National Electrical Code. To be of code gauge steel and supported as
required by Code. Wireways shall be furnished and installed complete with the necessary
complement of fittings, connectors, and accessory parts. Wireways shall be of the "lay-in"
type with standard knockouts and with screw covers for full channel access. All sheet metal
parts shall be coated with a rust inhibitor and finished in grey baked enamel. All hardware
shall be plated to prevent corrosion.
2.03 CONDUCTORS
A. Conductors shall be 98% conductivity copper, with 600 volt insulation, and shall be of types ..
indicated below unless otherwise shown on the plans. Aluminum conductors shall not be
used.
B. Conductors#10 AWG and smaller,Type THWN,solid.
C. Conductors#4 AWG through#8 AWG,Type THWN,stranded.
D. Conductors 93 AWG and larger,Type THW, stranded.
E. Branch circuit wiring located above lay in tile ceilings or fished in stud partitions may be
Type MC cable; single and multi-circuit home runs shall be raceway and wire as specified.
Project No. 00058 16100 Electrical-8
Renovations to Parsons Annex
Smith College
! + Northampton, Massachusetts
1.17 ALTERNATES
A. See Section 01030 for a general description of the Base and Alternate Bids. Work of the
Electrical Subcontractor is more specifically described below.
B. The Base Bid shall be the lump sum price for all labor and materials necessary for and
reasonably incidental to providing all work specified and shown on the Drawings.
C. Schedule of Alternates
1. Alternate Item furnish and install magnetic starter, disconnect switch, feeder, and
circuit breaker for make-up air unit(MAU-I)as shown on drawings.
1.18 CUTTING AND PATCHING
A. Cutting and/or drilling of all openings and holes 4" in diameter or smaller, required for the
installation of electrical apparatus in the building, shall be performed by the Electrical
' Contractor. All work and materials shall be installed in such a manner and at such time to
keep cutting and patching to a minimum. Cutting and/or drilling of structural supports (ie.
beams or joists) is not allowed without written approval by the Architect. Location for
openings, etc. shall be checked by the Plumbing Contractor, and error due to failure to co-
ordinate work with other divisions shall be the responsibility of the Electrical Contractor
failing to co-ordinate,who shall make the corrections at his own expense.
go
B. All holes larger than 4" in diameter shall be provided by the General Contractor.
C. Work shall include furnishing and locating sleeves or inserts required before the new walls
are built, or be responsible for the cost of cutting and patching required for conduit and
equipment where sleeves were not installed or where incorrectly located. The Electrical
Contractor shall do all drilling required for the installation of hangers.
D. Patching of all holes, after installation of piping or equipment, shall be performed by the
General Contractor or appropriate tradesmen.
E. All pipe cutting or threading shall be done in a location approved by the Owner.
F. No pipe cutting or threading shall be done in areas where completed concrete floor slab is to
remain in finishes or be painted later. Should this area be necessary,the Electrical Contractor
shall cover the entire working area with canvas tarpaulins in an approved manner.
1.19 RECORD DRAWINGS
A. Submit Record Drawings as specified in Division 1.
PART 2—MATERIALS
.A Project No. 00058 16100 Electrical-7
Renovations to Parsons Annex
Smith College
Northampton, Massachusetts '
B. Furnish the Architect, for his approval, three (3) copies of an Operation and Maintenance
Manual. Inscribe the following identification on the cover: the words, "Operation and
Maintenance Manual", the name and location of the equipment or the building, the name of
the Contractor,and the Contract number. The manual shall have a Table of Contents with tab
sheets placed before each Section. The instructions shall be legible and easily read, with
large sheets of Drawings folded in. The manuals shall be bound in hard binders or an
approved equivalent.
C. The manual shall include the following information: 4W
1 Description of systems.
MR
2. Description of start up, operation, and shutdown procedures for each item of
equipment.
3. Winter/summer changeover procedures.
4. Schedule of adjustment,care,and routine maintenance for each item of equipment.
.R
5. Lubrication chart.
6. Wiring and control diagrams with data to explain detailed operation and control of
each item of equipment.
7. Valve chart,if applicable. ■w
8. List of recommended spare parts.
9. Copies of all service contracts.
10. Performance curves for pumps,fans,etc.
11. List of all names, addresses, and phone numbers of all Contractors as well as the
local representative for each item of equipment.
1.16 GUARANTEE
A. The Electrical Contractor shall guarantee the satisfactory operation of his work in all parts ,.
for a period of one(1)year after date of final acceptance, and shall agree to promptly
repair or replace any items of his work which are found to be defective during this period.
B. The Electrical Contractor shall pay for repair of damage to the building caused by defects in .�.
his work and for repair to plaster, wood, and other materials or equipment caused by
replacement or repairs to the entire satisfaction of the Architect.
C. Any part of the work installed under this Contract requiring excessive maintenance shall be
considered as being defective.
Project No. 00058 16100 Electrical-6
Renovations to Parsons Annex
Smith College
Northampton,Massachusetts
B. The Specifications are complementary and anything called for, or reasonably implied, in the
Plans and not in the Specifications, or vice versa, shall be considered as called for or
reasonably implied in both.
.� C. The Electrical Contractor shall not scale the Drawings.
D. Because of the small scale of the Drawings, it is not possible to indicate all offsets, fittings
and accessories that may be required. The Electrical Contractor shall carefully investigate the
structural and finish conditions affecting all his work and shall arrange such work
accordingly, furnishing such accessories as may be required to meet such conditions, at no
additional cost.
1.12 PRODUCT HANDLING
A. The Electrical Contractor shall provide for the delivery of all his materials and fixtures to the
building site when required, so as to carry on his work efficiently and to avoid delaying his
work and that of other trades.
1.13 ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS
A. All necessary tools machinery, scaffolding, and transportation for completion of his Contract
shall be provided by the individual Contractor.
B. The Electrical Contractor shall provide his own portable extension lines and obtain 120 volt,
+0 60 cycle, single phase electric energy from the General Contractor to drive his machines and
light his work. He shall provide his own light bulbs,plugs,sockets,etc.
C. All broken or waste material,rags,packing, etc., resulting from his work shall be removed by
the individual Contractor.
1.14 WORK CONCEALED
A. All piping, duct work, cable, and raceway shall be installed concealed in all areas except
storage rooms,closets,and mechanical or electrical equipment rooms.
B. Exposed runs shall be run straight and level, parallel or perpendicular to the lines of the
building.
1.15 OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS
A. After all final tests and adjustments have been completed, fully instruct the proper Owner's
representative in all details of operation for equipment installed. Supply qualified personnel
to operate equipment for sufficient length of time to assure that Owner's representative is
properly qualified to take over operation and maintenance procedures.
Project No. 00058 16100 Electrical-5
Renovations to Parsons Annex
Smith College
Northampton,Massachusetts
1.07 SUBMITTALS
A. Before ordering materials shipped to the job, the Electrical Contractor shall submit to the
Architect six(6) sets of catalogue cuts, manufacturers' data sheets, or Shop Drawings, giving
all details,dimensions,capacities,etc. of all materials to be furnished.
B. The Electrical Contractor shall check the Shop Drawings thoroughly for compliance with the
Plans and Specifications before submitting them to the Architect for review, making any and
all changes which may be required.
C. The review of Shop Drawings by the Architect shall not relieve the Electrical Contractor
from any obligation to perform the work strictly in accordance with the Contract Drawings
and Specifications. The responsibility for errors in Shop Drawings shall remain with the
Contractor. ••
D. In the event that materials are being delivered to or installed on the job for which Shop
Drawings or samples have not been approved and/or which are not in accordance with the
Specifications, the Electrical Contractor will be required to remove such materials and
substitute approved materials at his own expense and as directed by the Architect.
1.08 PERMITS,FEES,AND INSPECTIONS
A. The Electrical Contractor shall secure all permits and pay all fees required for his work. He
shall be required to secure all other permits and pay all other fees and charges incidental to
the proper carrying out of the Contract. He is to assume all responsibility regarding the
observance of the rules and regulations so far as they relate to his part of the work.
B. The Electrical Contractor shall arrange and pay for all required inspections of his work.
1.09 TEMPORARY HOOK-UPS
A. The General Contractor will provide any temporary hook-ups required for the use of water or
sanitary for construction purposes and testing out apparatus as specified in Division 1.
1.10 TEMPORARY LIGHT AND POWER
A. The General Contractor will furnish and install temporary light and power as specified in
Division 1.
1.11 PLANS AND SPECIFICATIONS
A. The Electrical Contractor shall refer to the Architectural Drawings of interior details, plans,
elevations, and structural layout in preparing his estimate. These documents are intended to
supplement the Mechanical and Electrical Plans and Specifications and any applicable work
indicated or implied thereon is to be considered a part of the Contract requirements.
Project No. 00058 16100 Electrical-4
Renovations to Parsons Annex
Smith College
Northampton, Massachusetts
E. The arrangement of all piping, duct work, conduit,wire and cable indicated on the Drawings
is diagrammatic only, and indicates the minimum requirements of this work. Conditions at
the building shall determine the actual arrangement of runs, bends, offsets, etc. The
Electrical Contractor shall lay out all his work and be responsible for the accuracy thereof.
Conditions at the building shall be the determining factor for all measurements.
F. All work shall be laid out and installed so as to require the least amount of cutting and
patching. Drilling of all holes required for the installation of pipes, conduit, and cable runs
shall be performed by the Electrical Contractor installing such items.
G. The Electrical Contractor shall be responsible for the proper protection of his work and
aw materials from injury or loss at the hands of others and shall make good such loss or injury at
his own expense. All pipes left open during the progress of the work shall be capped or
plugged at all times. All instruments and operating apparatus shall be protected by suitable
means.
H. The Electrical Contractor shall be responsible for all equipment and materials installed under
this Section until the final acceptance of the project by the Owner.
L Before submitting his bid, the Electrical Contractor shall visit the site with the Drawings and
Specifications and shall become thoroughly familiar with all conditions affecting his work
since the Electrical Contractor will be held responsible for any assumption he may make in
regard thereto.
J. The Electrical Contractor shall check the Architectural Plans and Specifications before
ordering any materials and the installation of work. Any discrepancies shall be called to the
attention of the Architect before proceeding with the work.
�w
1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Equality of materials or articles other than those named or described in this Section will be
detennined in accordance with the provisions of the General Requirements, except that
substitutions will only be considered for items where the words, "or equal" appear in product
specifications and as approved by the Architect and Owner.
B. The Electrical Contractor shall agree to accept as final the results of tests secured by a
qualified testing laboratory engaged by the Owner. Tests will be conducted in accordance
in with the General Requirements.
1.06 PRODUCTS
A. With the exception of items specifically noted other-wise, all materials used shall be U.S.
made, new, full weight, and first class in every respect, without defects, and designed to
function properly in that portion of the work for which they are intended, and with the same
brand of manufacturers for each class of material or equipment. Electrical materials and
equipment of types for which there are Underwriters Laboratories standard requirements,
listings,or labels shall conform to their requirements and be so labeled.
Project No. 00058 16100 Electrical-3
on
Renovations to Parsons Annex
Smith College
Northampton,Massachusetts
13. Disconnect and remove existing electrical equipment made obsolete by new
construction. All removed equipment shall be the property of the Owner and
delivered to such places as designated by the Owner.
14. All existing electrical systems and equipment, which are to remain in operation, and
which interfere with new construction shall be relocated and reconnected as required.
1.03 CODES,ORDINANCES AND INSPECTIONS
A. All materials and the installation thereof shall conform to the requirements of the
Massachusetts State Building Code, Massachusetts Electrical Code, and local laws, rules,
regulations, and codes pertaining thereto. Where provisions of the Contract Documents •.
conflict with any codes, rules or regulations, the latter shall govern. Where the Contract
requirements are in excess of applicable codes, rules or regulations, the Contract provisions
shall govern unless the Architect rules otherwise.
B. The Electrical Contractor shall comply with the Local Code Enforcement Officials'
instructions at no additional cost to the Owner.
1.04 INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS
A. The Electrical Contractor shall employ only competent and experienced workmen at a regular
schedule in harmony with the other tradesmen on the job. He shall also exercise care and
supervision of his employees in regard to proper and expeditious laying out of his work.
.s
B. The Electrical Contractor shall have a Foreman or Superintendent assigned to the Project who
shall be authorized to make decisions and receive instructions exactly as if the Electrical
Contractor himself were present. The Foreman or Superintendent shall not be removed or
replaced without the express approval of the Architect after construction work begins.
C. The Electrical Contractor shall be held responsible for any injuries or damage done to the
building premises or adjoining property or to other Contractors' work resulting from the
execution of his part of the work in any manner whatsoever; and in case of dispute arising as
to the extent or share of responsibility incurred by the Electrical Contractor, it is agreed
between the Owner and the Electrical Contractor that such liability and extent of damage
shall be finally determined by the Architect whose decision shall be final and binding on both
parties to the Contract for the work in question.
D. The Electrical Contractor shall co-operate to the fullest extent with all other trades in order to
expedite the progress of the work. He shall furnish all information pertaining to his materials
as to sizes, locations, and means of support, to all other trades requiring such information.
The Electrical Contractor shall also furnish all sleeves, frames, beams, supports, inserts, etc.,
hereinafter specified so that the General Contractor may build them in place. In case of
failure on the part of the Electrical Contractor to give proper information as above,he will be
required to bear the extra expense involved due to such failure.
Project No. 00058 16100 Electrical-2
!�u
Renovations to Parsons Annex
Smith College
Northampton, Massachusetts
SECTION 16100-ELECTRICAL
PART 1 -GENERAL
1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Include General Conditions, Supplementary General Conditions, and applicable parts of
Division 1,as part of this Section.
B. Examine all other Sections of the Specifications for requirements which affect work under
this Section whether or not such work is specifically mentioned in this Section.
ws
C. Co-ordinate work with that of all other trades affecting, or affected by the work of this
Section. Co-operate with such trades to assure steady progress of all work under the
Contract.
1.02 SCOPE OF WORK
A. Furnish all labor, materials, plant, equipment and services necessary for and reasonably
incidental to the complete installation of all electrical work specified herein and/or indicated
on the Drawings, including,but not limited to,the following:
1. The Electric Service Entrance is existing to remain.
2. Branch Circuit Wiring and Conduit.
3. Feeders.
4. Panelboards.
5. Lighting Fixtures and Lamps.
6. Telephone/Data System
7. Fire Alarm System.
8. Emergency Call For Aid System
9. Wiring devices and plates.
10. Power wiring to motors and equipment furnished by other trades or Owner including
final connections to equipment.
11. Arrange for inspections and perform tests.
12. Guarantee and instructions.
Project No. 00058 16100 Electrical-1
om
Renovations to Parsons Annex
ow
Smith College
Northampton, Massachusetts
END OF SECTION "
.A
Project No. 00058 15600 HVAC-52
Renovations to Parsons Annex
Smith College
Northampton,Massachusetts
C. Fan Belts: This Contractor shall provide one(1)spare fan belt of each size furnished.
w D. Furnish a typewritten certificate confirming the above and stating the Owner designated
location to which the spare parts have been delivered. Delivery of parts shall be
confirmed by the Owner's representative,who shall countersign the Certificate.
w�.
3.12 FIRE SAFING
A. Work Included: Provide labor, materials, and equipment necessary to complete the work
including,but not limited to,the following:
go 1. Fire safing at all penetrations through fire barriers.
2. Fire safing at all penetrations through smoke barriers.
3. Extent of fire and smoke barriers as indicated on the Architectural Drawings.
4. Fire safing at all penetrations through floors, shafts,corridor walls,stairway walls,
on mechanical rooms, electrical rooms, vaults, storage rooms, kitchen, machine
rooms,outdoor storage rooms,and receiving rooms.
B. Safing Insulation
1. Fire safing insulation shall be Thennafiber as manufactured by USG Interiors,
+o Inc.,or Architect-Engineer approved equal, 4"minimum thickness by the required
full length and width,or as indicated on the Drawings.
2. Provide incidental galvanized steel clip anchors.
C. Seal Compound: At "poke-through" openings, apply "Firecode" seal compound as
manufactured by USG Interiors,Inc.,or approved equal,over Thermafiber fire safing.
D. Preparation
1. At all fire rated assemblies,prepare all penetrations for pipes.
E. Application
1. Install approved fire safing insulation of proper size, leaving no voids. Compress
and friction fit fire safing and use attachment clips where necessary.
2. Seal completely around all openings and over the fire safing insulation with
■* sealing compound.
Project No. 00058 15600 HVAC-51
Renovations to Parsons Annex
Smith College
Northampton, Massachusetts
B. At the completion of all work, all equipment on the project shall be checked and
thoroughly cleaned including coils, plenums, under equipment and any and all other areas
around or in equipment provided under this Section. Any filters used during construction
shall be replaced with new filters during final clean-up.
C. At the completion of all work, all equipment on the project shall be checked for painting
damage, and any factory finished paint that has been damaged shall be repaired to match
the adjacent areas.
D. Any metal or especially covered areas that have been deformed shall be replaced with new
material and repainted to match the adjacent areas.
3.10 IDENTIFICATION ..
A. All piping, valves, controls and equipment on the project shall be identified as specified
herein. All marks of identification shall be easily visible from the floor or usual point of
vision.
B. All piping shall be identified as to the service of the pipe and the normal direction of flow.
The letters shall be I" high and the flow arrows shall be at least 6" long. The letters and
flow arrows shall be made by precut stencils and black oil base paint with aerosol can or
snap-on, pre-printed plastic labels. Install identification in each room and additionally so
that markers are not over 50 feet on center.
C. Each valve,except runout valves,but including control valves, shall be tagged with a brass
disc 1-1/2" in diameter. The disc shall contain a number,and a valve list shall be provided
under glass in the Boiler Room showing the location of the valve,the service and the valve
and any pertinent remarks regarding the operation of the valve. Securely fasten the discs .■
to the valves with brass "S"hooks or chains.
D. All panel mounted controls and instruments, and all equipment shall be identified by
engraved nameplates mounted just under the control or instrument. The engraved
nameplates shall be engraved on "Lamacoid", or approved equal plastic which will be
black and show white letters when engraved. Letters shall be 1/2"high. ,
E. No identification shall be done until all painting required under the Architectural section
of these Specifications has been accomplished.
3.11 SPARE PARTS
A. Filters: Each fan coil unit, and cabinet type unit heaters shall be provided with three (3)
extra sets of filters for each unit. One (1) set shall be installed by this Contractor after
substantial completion is issued and the two (2) remaining sets shall be delivered to the
Owner.
B. Fan Coil Unit Motors: This Contractor shall provide one(1) spare fan coil unit motor for
each size installed on the project. Spare motors shall be delivered to the Owner.
Project No. 00058 15600 14VAC-50
Renovations to Parsons Annex
Smith College
Northampton,Massachusetts
E. The HVAC Contractor shall not add any water treatment chemicals, or at any time "stop-
leak"compounds to the system.
3.6 WATER AND AIR FLOW BALANCE AND TESTS
A. After completion of the installation of the heating, ventilating, and exhaust systems, and
i prior to acceptance by the Owner, all systems and appurtenances applicable to the above
systems shall be adjusted and balanced to deliver the water and air quantities as specified,
indicated on the Drawings,or as directed.
B. Balancing shall be performed by an independent contractor hired directly by the Owner.
3.7 INSULATION
A. All pipe and duct insulation shall be installed by an independent insulation contractor
regularly engaged in that business.
B. Insulation shall not be omitted on piping in walls nor on branches running through radiator
covers. Longitudinal seams on jackets shall be located so that they are not visible from the
floor. Remove all stickers from covering.
C. Insulation shall be applied over clean pipe with all joints butted firmly together and sealed
with butt strips. Insulation shall run through all hangers, sleeves, and have an 18 gauge
sheet metal saddle equal to three times the pipe diameter in length. All pipes
over 2" in diameter shall be supported through insulation by fitting a protection saddle to
the thickness of the insulation inside the vapor barrier jacket.
D. All fittings, valves, etc. shall be insulated with the proper factory pre-cut insulation. The
ends of the insulation shall be tucked snugly into the throat of the fitting and the edge
eel adjacent to the pipe covering tufted and tucked into fully insulated pipe fitting. The one
piece PVC fitting cover shall then be secured by taping the ends of the adjacent pipe
covering.
3.8 EQUIPMENT INSTALLATION
A. All equipment furnished under this Section shall be installed in accordance with its
manufacturer's printed installation instructions,whether so shown on the Drawings or not,
and all labor and materials required to accomplish this shall be furnished by the HVAC
Contractor and be included in his bid.
3.9 SYSTEM TESTS AND CLEAN-UP
A. The entire Heating and Ventilating system shall be tested at completion of the building,
and it shall be established that all controls are calibrated accurately and performing
satisfactorily and that all units are heating and ventilating satisfactorily. The systems shall
be checked for vibration and excessive noise and all such conditions corrected.
Project No. 00058 15600 HVAC-49
Renovations to Parsons Annex
Smith College
Northampton,Massachusetts
C. Subject piping system to a hydrostatic test pressure which at every point in the system is
not less than 1.5 times the design pressure. The test pressure shall not exceed the
maximum pressure for any vessel, pump, valve, or other component in the system under
test. Make a check to verify that the stress due to pressure at the bottom of vertical runs ••D
does not exceed either 90% of specified minimum yield strength, or 1.7 times the "SE"
value in Appendix A of ASME B31.9, Code for Pressure Piping, Building Services
Piping.
D. After the hydrostatic test pressure has been applied for at least 10 minutes, examine
piping, joints, and connections for leakage. Eliminate leaks by tightening, repairing, or
replacing components as appropriate,and repeat hydrostatic test until there are no leaks.
E. After system has been determined to be leak-free, the Engineer shall be notified and the
test shall be repeated in his or his representative's presence.
F. When delicate control mechanisms are installed in the piping system, they shall be
removed during the tests to prevent shock damage. This does not apply to control valves.
G. Leaks developing subsequent to these tests shall not be repaired by mastic or other
temporary means. All leaks shall be repaired by removal of the valve, fitting,joint, or
section that is leaking and reinstalling new material with joints as specified herein before.
3.5 CLEANING AND FLUSHING
A. All water circulating systems for the project shall be thoroughly cleaned before placing in
operation to rid the system of dirt, piping compound, mill scale, oil, and any and all other
material foreign to the water being circulated. Clean all strainers. °
B. Extreme care shall be exercised during construction to prevent all dirt and other foreign
matter from entering the pipe or other parts of the system. Pipe stored on the project shall
have the open ends capped and equipment shall have all openings fully protected. Before
erection, each piece of pipe, fitting, or valve shall be visually examined and all dirt
removed. ...
C. After system is complete, the Heating & Ventilating Contractor shall add trisodium
phosphate in an aqueous solution to the system at the proportion of one pound per fifty
gallons of water in the system. After the system is filled with this solution, the system
shall be brought up to temperature and allowed to circulate for two hours. The system
shall then be drained completely and refilled with fresh water. The Engineer shall be
given notice of this cleaning operation and he or his representative shall be present to
observe the cleaning operation, and, if he deems it necessary, the cleaning operation shall
be repeated.
D. After the system has been completely cleaned as specified herein, it shall be tested by
litmus paper or other dependable method and shall be left on the slightly alkaline side(ph
=7.5 plus or minus). If the system is found to be still on the acid side,the cleaning by the
use of trisodium phosphate shall be repeated.
Project No.00058 15600 HVAC-48
4
Renovations to Parsons Annex
Smith College
Northampton,Massachusetts
w
B. Where screwed fittings are used, bushings shall not be used from branch connections or
reducers. Connections to equipment shall be full size of tappings. Reductions in the run
of pipe shall be made with eccentric or concentric reducers as required for draining and
venting.
w C. All piping shall be run concealed throughout finished spaces either in furred spaces,
shafts,chases,or above hung ceilings.
D. Special care must be taken throughout the equipment rooms, vertical pipe shafts, above
hung ceilings, and elsewhere throughout all floors to maintain maximum headroom and
clearances for access to other equipment and to avoid conflict with electrical conduits,
lighting fixtures,other piping,ducts,and equipment of other trades.
E. Connections to equipment shall be made with unions or flanges to permit future
replacement,removal and servicing of equipment. Flexible connections where required to
isolate movement of equipment from piping system or of piping system from equipment,
shall be as specified.
F. Before any part of the various piping systems is placed in operation, blow out piping with
compressed air and/or water to remove all chips and scale and flush and drain until all
traces of dirt, scale and other foreign matter have disappeared. Refer to other sections for
additional requirements.
ox G. Vent all high points and drain all low points throughout the system.
H. Connections and tie-ins to existing piping systems shall be coordinated with the Owner.
*■ The HVAC Contractor is responsible for draining, flushing, re-filling (adding glycol if
required) and air removal of the existing system. System shall be fully restored and
operational.
3.4 PIPING SYSTEM TESTS
A. All piping installed on the project, unless specifically shown otherwise, shall be
hydraulically tested as specified herein. The HVAC Contractor shall provide all
equipment required to make the tests specified herein. Piping may be tested a section at a
time in order to facilitate the construction.
B. The HVAC Contractor shall fill the section of pipe to be tested with water and bring the
section up to pressure with a test pump. These tests shall be conducted before any
insulation is installed and any insulation installed prior to these tests shall be removed.
Gauges used in the tests shall have been recently calibrated with a dead weight tester.
Project No. 00058 15600 HVAC-47
Renovations to Parsons Annex
Smith College
Northampton,Massachusetts
A. Steam pressure reducing valves shall be Spence Regulating Company Model "ED" with
pilot operator.
go
PART'I -INS TALLATION
am
3.1 CLEANING AIR SYSTEM
A. No air handling units shall be run for temporary heating,ventilating, testing, or otherwise
without filters in place and permission from the Owner.
B. Upon completion of construction and before testing, the interior of all air handling units
and plenums shall be vacuum cleaned to remove all construction dirt, dust, etc. before the
units are turned on,and clean filters shall be installed.
3.2 CUTTING,PATCHING AND DRILLING
A. Drilling of all holes 2" diameter and smaller required for the installation of heating and
ventilating piping and equipment shall be performed by the HVAC Contractor. Cutting
and patching shall be performed by the General Contractor in accordance with the General
Conditions. All work and materials shall be installed in such a manner and at such time to
keep cutting and patching to a minimum. Location for chases, openings, etc. shall be
checked by the HVAC Contractor, and error due to failure to co-ordinate work with other
Divisions shall be the responsibility of the 1 VAC Contractor, who shall make the
corrections as his own expense.
B. Work shall include furnishing and locating inserts required before the floors and walls are
built, or be responsible for the cost of cutting and patching required for pipes where
sleeves and inserts were not installed, or where incorrectly located. The HVAC
Contractor shall do all drilling required for the installation of hangers. Patching of all
holes, after installation of piping or equipment shall be performed by the General
Contractor.
C. As the work nears completion, all pipe cutting and threading, etc. shall be done in a
location approved by the Engineer.
D. No pipe cutting or threading shall be done in areas where completed concrete floor slab is
to remain as finished or be painted later. Should use of such an area be necessary, the
HVAC Contractor shall cover the working area with canvas tarpaulins in an approved
manner.
3.3 PIPE INSTALLATION
A. All piping shall be run true and straight at proper pitch without strain and shall be firmly •�
supported throughout. Provision for expansion and contraction shall be made with offsets
or expansion loops. All pipe shall be cut off clean and threaded with sharp dies, reamed
and burrs removed.
Project No. 00058 15600 HVAC-46
40
Renovations to Parsons Annex
"W Smith College
Northampton,Massachusetts
B. Units shall consist of modular fan and coil sections, filter section, internal face and bypass
sections where called for, adjustable motor bases for high efficiency, totally enclosed
NEMA frame motors, and OSHA approved belt guards. Casing shall be of complete
frame with removable panels, modular, flush mounted into the unit framework with
properly located access panels. Casing shall be double wall insulated with a 1 in.
minimum thickness fiberglass insulation with a density of not less than 1-1/2 lbs.
accordance with NFPA Bulletin No. 90A. Insulation shall be secured to casing with
waterproof adhesive and permanent fasteners. All cabinet surfaces shall be galvanized.
C. Fans shall be centrifugal type, double inlet, double width. They shall be of the forward
curved, low speed type on all sizes. Fan housing shall be equipped with adjustable cut-off.
All fans shall be statically and dynamically balanced and tested at rated speed after being
installed in factory assembled units. Bearings shall be self-aligning, grease lubricated ball
bearings sized to provide minimum average bearing life of 200,000 hours. Lubrication
fittings shall be extended to the exterior cabinet. Fan shafts shall be solid, cold finish
steel, turned, grout ground, and polished to insure trouble-free operation and tolerances
within the recommendations of bearing manufacturers. Fan motors shall be mounted to an
adjustable pivot base in optional position external to the unit. Fan V-belt drive shall be of
the variable pitch type. Fan belt guard shall be furnished by the unit manufacturer, easily
removable, and made of solid steel with tachometer openings. Inlet vanes shall be
furnished where so called for on the schedule.
D. Coil sections shall be constructed of heavy gauge steel with removable panels and shall be
arranged for the removal of the coil from either end of the unit. Combination hot
water/chiller coils shall consist of 5/8 in. o.d. copper tubing on 1-1/2 centers arranged in a
w� staggered pattern with respect to circulation of airflow. They shall be bonded to the tubes
by hydraulic expansion of tubes and the coils tested with 300-1bs. pneumatic pressure
under water.
E. The heating coil shall be of the continuous aluminum plate fin and copper tubes type,
assembled in a zinc coated steel frame. The coil shall be pitched in the unit casing for
proper drainage the coil shall be tested at 250 psig air pressure under water. Coils shall be
of the steam distributing, "non-freeze"type.
F. All units furnished with DX coils shall have drain pans pitched for even flow of
condensate with side drain connections on both sides of unit. Provide copper tube "P"trap
with cleanout in condensate drain piping, "P"traps shall be equal to unit pressure.
G. Provide,where noted on schedules, internal face and bypass dampers with full size coils.
H. High capacity mixing section shall be furnished with properly located access doors
equipped with handles. Internal slides shall be provided for filter racks. Filters shall be
removable from either end of Section.
+*� I. Bag filter and pre-filter sections shall be provided with all units. Each unit shall be
furnished with three(3) sets of pre and final filters.
2.28 STEAM PRESSURE REDUCING VALVES
Project No. 00058 15600 HVAC-45
Renovations to Parsons Annex
Smith College
Northampton, Massachusetts
a. Preliminary set up and calibration per Specifications and Shop Drawings. 4W
b. Physical checkout of all components for completeness and accuracy,
simultaneously with mechanical system balancing.
C. Review of system with Engineer.
d. Functional test for Owner's benefit, instruction,and acceptance.
e. Not less than 30 or more than 60 days after systems have been in full
operation, review problems with Owner, recheck all adjustments, and
recalibrate as required.
4. The Control Manufacturer shall provide a complete instructional manual covering
the function and operation of all control and management system components on
the job, which shall include a trouble-shooting and operating procedure. This
manual shall be furnished to the Owner's operating personnel and shall show the
total integrated control system. Competent technicians shall be provided for
instruction purposes. The Control Manufacturer shall furnish schematic systems
control diagrams to be delivered to the Owner on AutoCAD disks.
5. Control and management systems shall neither be considered complete nor
acceptable until all conditions of the Sequence of Operation have been attained,
all temperatures are maintained within specified limits of all operating conditions,
and all systems damper leakage of controlled within specified limits.
J. Service and Guarantee:
1. The complete installation, including all equipment, shall be guaranteed free from ,.
defects in workmanship and material for a period of 12 months from date of
acceptance in writing by the Owner. Provide at no cost to the Owner, all
necessary service,adjusting,and checking during the 12 month guarantee period.
2. During warranty period,the ATC Contractor shall update and implement all latest
revisions of software offered by the Contractor that applies to this Project.
2.27 AIR HANDLING UNITS(MAU-1) Alternate Bid Item
A. Furnish and install, where shown on the Drawings, central station draw-through units of
the types, sizes, and capacities as scheduled on the Drawings. All units shall be
factory-assembled and tested and shall be as manufactured by the Trane Company, York
International or McQuay. No substitutions will be allowed.
Project No. 00058 15600 HVAC-44
Renovations to Parsons Annex
Smith College
Northampton,Massachusetts
A duct type smoke detector (furnished by the Electrical Subcontractor)
located downstream of the unit filters shall shut down the unit fans on
sensing smoke.
C. Unoccupied Cycle: The AHU-2 system shall remain off,except that space
sensor shall cycle unit fans with outside air damper closed, and shall
w cycle zone hot water pump to maintain reduced temperature.
AHU-1 and its respective fan shall run continuously as described in the
occupied cycle.
d. For systems AHU-1 and AHU-2, a space humidity sensor set between
35%and 50%relative humidity shall energize ventilation cycle of
outdoor damper and exhaust fan to introduce 100% outdoor air and
exhaust high humidity air. Increased space heating load as sensed by
�. space temperature sensor shall automatically reset zone discharge
temperature through microprocessor controller to open heating coil valve,
and open steam valve on steam injection humidifier. Space humidity
requirements shall be maintained as described above. Injection
humidifiers shall be interlocked with an airflow-proving switch and high
limit discharge sensor.
e. Occupied Cycle(Summer Mode)
Fans shall run continuously with outdoor air and exhaust air
dampers open to minimum position. Percentage of outdoor air
shall be displayed set and adjusted at console. Room temperature
sensors shall automatically reset discharge temperature to control
the coil valve through microprocessor controller to satisfy
occupied cycle summer mode setpoints.
I. Adjustment and Calibration:
W 1. On completion of the job,the ATC Contractor shall completely calibrate,test,and
adjust, ready for use, all electronic controls, thermostats, valves, damper motors,
and relays provided under his contract and be present for functional tests on
systems. The Building Management System shall be completely checked, test
run,and adjusted.
2. Before the Engineer is asked to witness the functional tests,the entire control and
management system must be complete, controls calibrated. The controlled
devices will be physically inspected and checked to assure that these terminal
devices are, in fact, under proper control and working smoothly over their entire
range of operation.
3. The adjustment procedure shall include the following steps:
Project No. 00058 15600 HVAC-43
Renovations to Parsons Annex
Smith College
Northampton,Massachusetts
3. Radiators and Unit Heaters
a. Each radiator and unit heater shall be subject to a 2-way electric activated
control valve. On a call for heat the control valve shall open and when
temperature set point is satisfied the valve shall close.
4. Exhaust Fans
a. Each new toilet exhaust fan (EF-1) shall be controlled in the following
mannaer. Humidstats located in each shower room shall vary in speed of
the fan (through VFD drive furnished by this Contractor) to maintain
space humidity at 50%to 60%.
5. Make Up Air Unit(Alternate Bid Item)
Air Handling Units: The systems shall be indexed between occupied,and
unoccupied cycles of operation by Energy Management System.
a. Warm-up Cycle: The unit supply fan shall be started from the time clock
and shall run continuously. Units MAU-1, shall run continuously. The
return air fans shall remain off during the wann-up cycle with the return
air exhaust damper closed. The outside air damper shall remain closed,
the coil face and bypass dampers shall operate in 'occupied" mode, and
the exhaust fan shall remain off. The unit shall remain in the warm-up
cycle until the return air temperature reaches 68°F at which time it shall
revert to the occupied cycle. 4
b. Occupied Cycle(Winter Mode):
Supply and return fans shall run continuously with outdoor air and
exhaust air dampers open to minimum position. Room sensor shall
automatically reset discharge setpoint to control heating coil valve
through microprocessor controller. Where face and bypass dampers are
called for,the integrated controls shall be as follows: above 40 degrees F.,
the face and bypass dampers are wide open and the valve shall modulate;
below 40 degrees F.,the valve shall be wide open and the face and bypass
dampers shall modulate. Note: Apply PID control to these sequences to
provide closer control when spaces go through rapid occupancy changes.
As space is demanded for heating drops, the coil valve shall be .�
modulated closed to finally a closed position. When space demands for
ventilation increases, the outdoor and exhaust dampers shall be
modulated open past the minimum percentage and the return damper shall
close correspondingly.
The low temperature sensor shall open the face damper full to the coil
and close the outside air damper if it senses a temperature below its set
point.
Project No. 00058 15600 HVAC-42
Renovations to Parsons Annex
Smith College
Northampton,Massachusetts
(1) In the occupied mode, only one (1) pump shall run unless the
energy management system decides both pumps are necessary in
order to maintain temperature. This contractor shall furnish and
install a variable frequency drive for each heating pump. Speed
of pump shall vary in response to building heat requirements as
sensed by the room sensor/control valve position.
e. Unoccupied Pump Control:
(1) The hot water and hot water/chilled water pumps shall remain off
(both pumps) when outside temperature is above 58 degrees.
When outside temperature falls below 58 degrees, one pump
shall cycle on/off subject to the night sensor. When outside
temperature falls below 40 degrees, one pump shall run
continuously and the second pump shall cycle subject to the night
sensor. In the cooling mode, one pump shall cycle on/off to
maintain higher setting.
2. Fan Coil Control/Cabinet Heaters:
a. Winter Occupied Cycle:
(1) Room sensor through microprocessor controller shall modulate
the coil valve in a direct acting fashion to maintain heating
requirement for room. Fan shall be under control of three speed
Wa manual switch furnished on the fan coil unit.
b. Winter Unoccupied Cycle:
(1) Room sensor through microprocessor controller shall modulate
the coil valve in a direct acting fashion to maintain lowered set
point of room. Fan shall be de-energized.
c. Summer Occupied Cycle:
(1) Room sensor through microprocessor controller shall modulate
the coil valve in a reverse acting fashion to add chilled water on a
rise in space demand. Fan shall be under control of three speed
manual switch furnished on the fan coil unit.
d. Summer Unoccupied Cycle:
(1) Room sensor through microprocessor controller shall modulate
the coil valve in a reverse acting fashion, however, no chiller
water will be available. Fan shall be de-activated. Should room
temperature exceed 80 degrees. The coil valve shall open in the
fan run.
Project No. 00058 15600 HVAC-41
Renovations to Parsons Annex
Smith College .�
Northampton,Massachusetts
2. Each category of software shall consist of interactive software modules. Each "*
module shall have an associated priority level and shall execute as determined by
the program controller as defined in the real time operating system.
3. The central site shall allow receipt of alarms and messages while in a functional
mode other than energy management, i.e., incoming alarms shall be displayed
while the operator is in a word processing, spreadsheet, or other operating mode.
The system must automatically switch from a non-energy management mode,
respond to an alarm,and return to the exact position left in the previous functional
mode.
4. The building operator shall be able to communicate and direct all control .�
functions through the use of a 2-button "mouse" operator interface to monitor and
control all functions and sequences within the system.
H. Sequences of Operation:
Following are the typical sequences of operation for HVAC equipment provided by
Automated Logic's System 20/20. Within each section, each paragraph describes a
specific control sequence for a component of the equipment; start/stop, status, etc. Each
specific control sequence will require appropriate 1/0 points, which are scheduled on the
Drawings.
l. Pump Control
a. The building shall be served by two inline pumped distribution and for
heating only.
b. Heat distribution shall be supplied by pumps P-1 and P-2(one spare).
C. The steam to water heat exchanger shall be controlled as follows:
(1) (HX-1) Sensors located in the water supply and water return
shall have its set point automatically and inversely reset from
outdoor temperature by modulating each steam control valve to
maintain the following schedule:
Hot Water
0 degrees= 160 degrees HCS
65 degrees= 90 degrees HCS
d. Occupied Pump Control: The temperature control system shall control
pumps in the following manner.
Project No.00058 15600 HVAC-40
+W
Renovations to Parsons Annex
4W Smith College
Northampton, Massachusetts
5. Local Site Communication Network
a. The modules shall communicate within their respective network with a
token passing technique. This network shall be consistent with the IEEE
RS-485 standard, including a minimum baud rate of 9,600 BPS
maintained at a minimum of 10,000 feet. The Contractor shall provide all
wiring required for the local site network.
F. Software
1. The Contractor shall provide all software required for efficient operation of all
the functions required by this specification. Software shall be modular in design
for flexibility in expansion or revision of the system. The software shall, as a
on minimum, include:
a. Complete database entry
b. Configuration of all application programs to provide the sequence of
operation indicated
C. Graphics of each system as shown on the UO Summary Tables
d. Alarm limits and alarm messages for all critical and non-critical alarms
e. Configuration of all reports and point summaries indicated
G. Systems Software
1. The central site shall display graphically, in up to 256 different colors, the
following system information:
General area maps shall show locations of controlled buildings in relation to local
landmarks.
Floor plan maps shall show heating and cooling zones throughout the buildings in
a range of colors which provide a visual display of temperature relative to their
respective setpoints. The colors shall be updated dynamically as zones' comfort
condition change. Locations of space sensors shall also be shown for each zone.
Setpoint adjustment and color band displays shall be provided.
Mechanical system graphics shall show the type of mechanical system
components serving any zone through the use of a pictorial representation of
on components. It shall also provide a current status of all 1/0 points being
controlled and applicable to each piece of equipment including analog readouts in
appropriate engineering units at appropriate locations on the graphic
++ representation.
Project No. 00058 15600 FWAC-39
Renovations to Parsons Annex
Smith College ..
Northampton,Massachusetts
d. Watt-hour Transducers: Watt-hour transducers shall have an accuracy of
+0.25% for kW and kWh outputs from full lag to full lead power factor.
Input ranges for kW and kWh transducers shall be selectable without •
requiring the changing of current or potential transformers,and shall have
dry contact pulse accumulation.
e. Voltage-to-Digital Alarm Relays: Relays shall monitor status of boiler or
chiller safeties and overloads and shall be sized and connected so as not
to impede the function of the monitored contacts. Switch shall have self-
wiping, snap-acting Form C contacts rated for the application, equal to
Veris Industries,Inc.Hawkeye 735.
f. Humidity Sensors: Sensors shall have an accuracy of+5% over a range
of 20%to 95%RH,Visala Mod.HMW-40U.
g. Current Sensing Relays: Relays shall monitor status of motor loads.
Switch shall have self-wiping, snap-acting Form C contacts rated for the
application. The setpoint of the contact operation shall be field
adjustable.
h. Control Relays: Control relay contacts shall be rated for 150% of the
loading application, with self-wiping, snap-acting Form C contacts,
enclosed in dustproof enclosure. Relays shall have silver cadmium
contacts with a minimum life span rating of one million operations.
Relays shall be equipped with coil transient suppression devices.
i. Solid State Relays (SSR): Input/output isolation shall be greater than 10
billion ohms with a breakdown voltage of 15 V root mean square, or
greater, at 60 Hz. The contact operating life shall be 10 million
operations or greater. The ambient temperature range of SSRs shall be
20°F-140 0F. Input impedance shall be greater than 500 ohms. Relays
shall be rated for the application. Operating and release time shall be 10
milliseconds or less. Transient suppression shall be provided as an
integral part of the relays.
j. Freezestat shall be capillary type equal to Johnson Control, Model
A70HA-1C.
k. Control valves shall be DDC modulating type. All two-way valves shall
be Spartan two position valves. All three-way valves shall be Barber
Colman with Belimo Actuators,Model AF24-S.
1. All control dampers shall be opposed blade type with edge and jam seals
and internal linkage. Damper operators shall be provided for all dampers *�
equal to Belimo AF24-S with AV10-18 or 2G-JSA shaft extensions
where required.
Project No.00058 15600 HVAC-38
on
Renovations to Parsons Annex
Smith College
Northampton,Massachusetts
a�.
a. Temperature Sensors: Sensors shall be of the type and have accuracy
ratings as indicated and/or required for the application and shall permit
accuracy rating of within 1% of the temperature range of their intended
use.
1) Sensors used for mixed air application shall be the averaging type
and have an accuracy of+1°F. Kele Precon Model ST-FZ.
2) OA temperature sensors shall have a minimum range of-52°F to
152°F and an accuracy of within +1 OF in this temperature range.
Kele Precon Model ST-O.
3) Room temperature sensors shall have an accuracy, of+0.25°F in
the range of 45°F to 96°F, ALC Model BA-10K-2-RSO-RLC
Type 3 with network connector, warm/cool adjustment, override
switch and LED Occupied/Unoccupied indicator.
4) Chilled water sensors shall have an accuracy of+0.25°F in their
range of application.
5) Hot water temperature sensors shall have an accuracy of+0.75°F
over the range of their application.
b. Pressure Instruments
1) Differential Pressure and Pressure Sensors. Sensors shall have a
4-20 MA output proportional signal with provisions for field
° ! checking. Sensors shall withstand up to 150% of rated pressure,
without damaging the device. Accuracy shall be within +2% of
full scale. Sensors shall be manufactured by MANIAC No. PR-
272-2-XX-B-1-2-2.
2) Pressure Switches. Pressure switches shall have a repetitive
accuracy of+ 2% of range and withstand up to 150% of rated
pressure. Sensors shall be diaphragm or bourdon tube design.
Switch operation shall be adjustable over the operating pressure
range. The switch shall have an application rated Form C, snap-
acting, self-wiping contact of platinum alloy, silver alloy, or gold
plating. Switches shall be manufactured by Johnson Controls,
Model P-74FA-5-C.
C. Flow Switches: Flow switches shall have a repetitive accuracy of+ 1%
of their operating range. Switch actuation shall be adjustable over the
operating flow range. Switches shall have snap-acting Form C contacts
rated for the specific electrical application.
on
Project No. 00058 15600 HVAC-37
Renovations to Parsons Annex
Smith College
Northampton,Massachusetts
b. Each T-Line controller shall communicate with the Cmnet through the
Tnet Interface Module (TNI). The TNI shall provide one RS485 port for
a Cmnet connection and one RS485 port for the Tnet connection. In
addition, a direct connect RS485 port shall also be provided for
connection of a laptop computer.
C. In the event of a loss of communication with the TNI, each T-Line ,..
controller shall store a default algorithm which maintains the space
temperature until communication with the TNI is restored.
d. Each TNI shall execute application programs, calculations, and
commands via a microcomputer resident in the TNI. The database and all
application programs for each T-Line shall be stored in read/writable non-
volatile memory within the TNL All non-volatile memory shall have a
battery backup of at least five years.
e. The TNI shall contain both software and hardware to perform full
DDC/PID control loops. T-Line shall be able to provide normal binary
type output.
f. Each T-Line shall be able to support various type of zone temperature
sensors, such as: temperature sensor only, temperature sensor with built-
in local override switch,with setpoint adjustment switch.
g. Each T-Line for VAV application shall have a built-in air flow transducer
for accurate air flow measurement in order to provide the Pressure
Independent VAV operation.
h. Each T-Line and TNI shall have LED indication for visual status of
communication,power,and all outputs.
i. Each TNI shall be software programmable for communicating at 9600
baud to 38.4 Kbps. Circuits shall be optically isolated.
3. Terminal Control Devices-T-Line
a. Digital outputs: These outputs shall be 24VAC or VDC maximum, 3
amp maximum current. Each configurable as normally open or normally
closed,and either dry contact or bussed.
b. Universal inputs: Thermistor, dry contacts or 0-5VDC with 0-100K Ohm
input impedance.
C. Enhanced Zone Sensor Input: The input shall provide one thermistor
input, one local setpoint adjustment, one timed local override switch and *E
an occupancy LED indicator.
4. Instrumentation and Control
Project No. 00058 15600 HVAC-36
Renovations to Parsons Annex
Smith College
Northampton,Massachusetts
E. Field Hardware: Field hardware must be of a modular design to ensure reliability and
system performance.
1. Global Network Controller-LANgate
a. The LANgate shall be a microprocessor-based communications device
which acts as a gateway between the System Control Module Network
(CMnet)and the Global Network(Lgnet).
b. Both the Cmnet and the Lgnet shall be "peer-to-peer" networks which
allow all control modules to communicate with equal authority.
C. Each LANgate shall support a Cmnet on which may reside any
combination of up to 100 zone controllers,rooftop unit controllers,and/or
Control Modules.
d. The LANgate shall be responsible for routing global information from the
various Cmnets which may be installed throughout a building.
e. The Lgnet may configure as RS485 (38.4 Kbps), ARCnet(2.5 Mbps), or
Ethernet (10 Mbps), or Token Ring (16Mbps) all of which may be
implemented over fiber optic,twisted pair,or coaxial cable.
am
f. Each Cmnet shall support up to 100 controllers.
g. Multiple LANgates can be added to the Lgnet if the projects require more
than 100 controllers.
h. Up to a total of 60 LANgates can be added to the Lgnet, each supporting
up to 100 controllers(total capacity exceeds 500,000 points per Lgnet).
i. The LANgate shall provide two RS232 ports which can be connected to
Central Site Workstations,portable computers,or modems.
j. LANgate shall provide full arbitration between multiple users, whether
they are communicating through the same LANgate or different ones.
2. Terminal Control Modules-T-Line
a. Terminal Control Modules shall be capable of providing the Direct
Digital Control of single zone terminal HVAC units; air handling units,
fan coil units,exhaust fans,unit ventilators,etc.
A
Project No. 00058 15600 HVAC-35
Renovations to Parsons Annex
Smith College ""M
Northampton,Massachusetts
6. The Contractor shall be able to simulate the operation of all software application Ow
programs to ensure they are free from design errors and that they accurately
accomplish the application sequence of operations. The simulation must show
each output value and how it varies in relation to an artificial time clock. The
time clock may run at normal time increments, increased increments(fast motion)
or decreased increments(slow motion).
D. Wiring: All temperature control wiring will be installed and terminated by the ATC
Contractor. Control wiring shall be as follows:
1. All circuits which are activated or deactivated by temperature control system
components, such as, but not limited to, PE's and high and low limit protective
devices.
2. All circuits which activate or deactivate temperature control system components,
such as solenoid air valve.
3. All temperature control panel wiring to terminal strips and field wiring from
terminal strips to field mounted devices.
4. All wiring to the "Auto" side of hand-off auto switches on units being controlled
by the ATC Contractor.
5. Wiring of all electro-mechanical devices required to be located on or in
temperature control panels.
6. All wiring to the temperature control panels shall be by the ATC subcontractor
from sources provided by the Electrical Contractor specifically for that purpose.
7. All wiring shall comply with national, state, and local electrical codes. All power
wiring will be installed and terminated by the Electrical Contractor. Power wiring
shall be defined as follows:
a. Wiring of all devices and circuits carrying voltages greater than 120 volt
(except for power to the temperature control panels).
b. Wiring of power feeds to disconnects, starters,and electric motors.
C. Wiring of 120V AC power feeds to all temperature control panels where
required.
d. Installation of and wiring of line power to fused disconnects for each air
compressor.
e. Power wiring to 120V single phase motors.
f. Wiring from disconnects to compressor motor starters and from
compressor motor starters to compressor motor.
Project No. 00058 15600 HVAC-34
Renovations to Parsons Annex
Smith College
Northampton, Massachusetts
h. Note: Where two or more codes conflict,the most restrictive shall apply.
Nothing in these plans and specifications shall be construed to permit
work not conforming to applicable codes.
C. Submittals,Documentation and Acceptance
w. 1. Shop Drawings. A minimum of six (6) copies of Shop Drawings shall be
submitted and shall consist of a complete list of equipment and materials,
including manufacturer's descriptive and technical literature, catalog cuts, and
installation instructions. Shop Drawings shall also contain complete wiring,
routing, schematic diagrams, tag number of devices, software descriptions,
calculations, and any other details required to demonstrate that the system will
function properly. Drawings shall show proposed layout and installation of all
equipment and the relationship to other parts of the work.
2. Shop Drawings shall be approved by the Engineer and the College before any
equipment is installed. Therefore, Shop Drawings must be submitted in time for
review so that all installations can be completed per the project's completion
schedule.
on
3. All Drawings shall be reviewed after the final system checkout and updated or
corrected to provide "as-built" Drawings to show exact installation. The system
will not be considered complete until the "as-built" Drawings have received their
final approval. The Contractor shall deliver three(3)sets of"as-built"Drawings,
and one(1)CADD disk of these Drawings.
4. Before final configuration, the Contractor shall provide 1/0 Summary forms that
include:
a. Description of all points.
b. Listing of binary and analog hardware required to interface to the
equipment for each function.
C. Listing of all application programs associated with each piece of
equipment.
d. Failure modes for control functions to be performed in case of failure
5. Provide an accurate graphic flow diagram for each software program proposed to
be used on the project as part of the submittal process. Revisions made as a result
of the submittal process, during the installation, start-up or acceptance portion of
the project, shall be accurately reflected in the "as-built" graphic software flow
diagrams herein required by this specification.
aiw
Project No. 00058 15600 HVAC-33
Renovations to Parsons Annex
Smith College
Northampton, Massachusetts
2. The Contractor shall furnish and install all necessary hardware,wiring,pneumatic
tubing,computing equipment and software as defined in this specification.
3. All material and equipment used shall be standard components, regularly
manufactured and available and not custom designed especially for this project.
All systems and components, except site specific software, shall have previously
been thoroughly tested and proven in actual use prior to installation on this •
project.
4. The system architecture shall be fully modular permitting expansion of
application software, system peripherals,and field hardware.
5. The system, upon completion of the installation and prior to acceptance of the
project, shall perform all operating functions as detailed in this Specification.
6. Provide the following system hardware: ,
a. Central Site(s)and Control Modules
b. All sensing devices and necessary transducers to perform the functions
listed in 1/0 Summary Tables.
C. All relays, switches, indicating devices, and transducers required to
perform the functions listed in 1/0 Summary Tables.
d. All monitoring and control wiring and air tubing.
e. All modems and accessories.
7. Provide all software identified in Part 3 of this Specification. The database
required for implementation of these specification shall be provided by the
Contractor, including: point descriptor, alarm limits, calibration variables,
graphics,reports and point summaries.
8. The system as specified shall monitor, control, and calculate all of the points and
perform all the function as listed in 1/0 Summary Tables attached to the end of
this specification.
9. Codes and Regulations. All electrical equipment and material and its installation
shall conform to the current requirements of the following authorities:
a. Occupational Safety and Health Act(OSHA)
b. National Electric Code(NEC)
C. National Fire Code
d. Uniform Building Code
e. Uniform Mechanical Code
f. Uniform Plumbing Code
g. UL916 '
Project No. 00058 15600 HVAC-32
Renovations to Parsons Annex
Smith College
Northampton, Massachusetts
1. All components of the system shall be furnished and installed by Automated
Logic.
2. The controls shall be a direct expansion of the Campus' existing energy
management system as manufactured by automated Logic System 20/20,and shall
®• be extended from the existing communication lines located in The Physical Plant.
It is mandatory that the installed system be properly interfaced with the existing
central site (CS) computer hardware ALC 20/20 configuration and the existing
master central site software library, located at the HVAC Department Building. It
will be the Contractor's responsibility to develop site specific operating
parameters, building name, general area maps, floor plans, mechanical system
graphics,thermal graphs,all to be displayed graphically at the central site(CS)via
the existing software programs.
3. All components of the direct digital controllers shall be manufactured by
Automated Logic, or equal, with peripheral electric/electronic devices
manufactured by Barber Colman.
4. All components of the system shall be furnished and installed by Automated
Logic, i.e. Yankee Technology, Inc., of Ludlow, MA. The system shall be a
properly integrated system installed by competent mechanics regularly employed
W in the profession of temperature control. Unless specified to the contrary, all
equipment shall be fully proportioning. The control system shall be complete in
all respects, including room thermostats, immersion thermostats, switches, relays,
*!� valves, cabinets and other accessory equipment, and a complete system of control
wiring for integration into existing remaining reused controls where specified, all
connected and properly integrated to the control system.
5. The temperature control system shall be DDC and shall utilize electric/electronic
power for the control dampers and valves. The control systems Lans connection
shall be extended from the existing system.
6. All wiring, conduit, junction boxes, fittings, etc., necessary for the temperature
control system shall be furnished and installed by the ATC Contractor and shall
conform to all standards and codes as described under Section 16000 - Electrical
Work. Wiring shall be in metal raceways where required by prevailing codes.
7. Provide nameplates for all control devices. Devices on panels to have "Lamicoid"
nameplates,isolated control valves,relays,etc.to be marked with stamped tape.
B. Scope of Work
1. All temperature control work shall be performed by Yankee Technology, Inc. of
Ludlow, MA. It is the responsibility of this Contractor to co-ordinate all HVAC
work with the Temperature Control Contractor prior to submitting a bid.
Project No. 00058 15600 HVAC-31
aO
Renovations to Parsons Annex
Smith College
Northampton, Massachusetts
B. Strainers for steam and condensate systems over 50 psig. shall be 250 lb. class. Strainers
for other systems shall be 125 lb. class. Strainers shall be Illinois, Barnes and Jones,
Armstrong, or equal, and shall be so installed as to permit ready removal of basket. Each
strainer 2-1/2" and larger shall be provided with hose end globe valve on blow-off. *�
2.24 FAN COIL UNITS
A. General: Unit shall include chassis, coil, fan board, fan wheel(s), housing(s), motor, and
insulation. Chassis shall be galvanized steel wrap-around structural frame with all edges
flanged. Insulation shall be faced,heavy density glass fiber.
B. Water Coils: Water coils shall be 5/8 in. O.D. seamless copper tubes mechanically
bonded to configurated aluminum fins with continuous fin collars and sleeved coil end
supports. Maximum working pressure 300 psig, factory burst test 450 psig(air), and leak
test 300 prig (air under water). Maximum entering water temperature 275 degrees F.
Supply and return connections on side of units as designated on the Contract Drawings.
C. Fans: Fan wheels centrifugal, forward-curved, double width of non-corrosive, molded,
fiberglass-reinforced thermo-plastic material on all units. Fan houses of formed sheet
metal. All units shall be complete with three speed fan switch tappings for multi-speed
control from a central processor.
D. Motors: All motors shall have integral thermal overload protection and start at 78 percent
of rated voltage. Motors operate satisfactorily at 90 percent of rated voltage on all speed
settings and at 10 percent over voltage without undue magnetic noise. Temperature rise
by winding resistance method does not exceed 50 C. (PSC motors) on high speed. All •�
motors factory run tested assembled in unit prior to shipping. All motors shall be
complete with motor cords,which are quickly detachable at junction box by locking prong
connector. "
E. Filters: Filters shall be removable from cabinet without removing front panel; filters shall
be I"throw away type. Two extra sets of filters shall be provided for each unit.
F. Electrical Perfonnance: All cataloged model wires in accordance with National Electric
Code and UL listed.
G. Fan coil unit shall be Trane,McQuay or International. No substitutions will be allowed.
2.25 ACCESS PANELS
A. Furnish and install access panels at all valves, volume dampers, tec. installed above
plastered ceilings, in walls, and all other non-accessible spaces. Access panels in
plastered ceilings shall be Karp Type DSC-214 PL (12"x 12"); access panels in walls
shall be Karp type DSC-21 I "Universal" (12"x 12").
2.26 AUTOMATIC TEMPERATURE CONTROL
A. General Requirements "
Project No. 00058 15600 HVAC-30
Renovations to Parsons Annex
Smith College
Northampton, Massachusetts
19. Brazing Materials: Except as otherwise indicated, provide brazing materials as
determined by Installer to comply with installation requirements. Comply with
SFA-5.8, Section II, ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code for brazing filler
metal materials.
20. Gaskets for Flanged Joints: ANSI B16.21; full-faced for cast-iron flanges; raised-
face for steel flanges,unless otherwise indicated.
21. Note: Grooved piping will NOT be allowed.
2.22 PACKLESS EXPANSION JOINTS
A. General: Provide packless expansion joints where indicated for piping systems, with
materials and pressure/temperature ratings selected by Installer to suit intended service.
Select packless expansion joints to provide 200%absorption capacity of piping expansion
N. between anchors.
B. Expansion Compensators: Pressure rated for 60 psi for low pressure systems, 2-ply
phosphor bronze bellows, brass shrouds and end fittings for copper piping systems, or 2-
ply stainless steel bellows, carbon steel shrouds and end fittings for steel piping systems.
Provide internal guides and anti-torque devices, and removable end clip for proper
positioning.
C. Manufacturer: Subject to compliance with requirements,provide expansion compensators
of one of the following:
W
Flexonics Div.; UOP,Inc.
Hyspan Precision Products,Inc.
w Keflex,Inc.
Metraflex Co.
Vibration Mountings and Controls,Inc.
D. Provide pipe alignment guides on both sides of expansion joints, and elsewhere as
indicated. Construct with 4-finger spider traveling inside guiding sleeve, with provision
for anchoring to building substrate.
1. Manufacturer: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide pipe alignment
guides of the following:
Hyspan Precision Products,Inc.
Metraflex Co.
2.23 STRAINERS
A. Pipeline strainers shall be full size, iron body, "Y" pattern and shall be installed on the
inlet side of each steam trap, and elsewhere as indicated on the Drawings. Strainers 2"
and smaller shall have screwed ends;2-1/2" and larger shall have flanged ends.
Project No. 00058 15600 HVAC-29
Renovations to Parsons Annex
Smith College
Northampton,Massachusetts
4. Steel Flanges/Fittings: ANSI B16.5, including bolting and gasketing of the
following material group, end connection and facing except as otherwise
indicated,Class 150 for Schedule 40 piping, Class 300 for Schedule 80.
a. Material Group: Group 1.1
b. End Connections: Buttwelding
C. Facings: Raised-face
5. Wrought-Steel Buttwelding Fittings: ANSI B16.9,except ANSI B16.28 for short-
radius elbows and returns; rated to match connected pipe.
6. Yoloy Steel Buttwelding Fittings: ASTM A714.
7. Forged Branch Connection Fittings: Except as otherwise indicated, provide type
as determined by Installer to comply with installation requirements, Bonney
"Weldolets"or"Threadolets",or equal.
8. Pipe Nipples: Fabricated from same pipe as used for connected pipe; except do
not use less than Schedule 80 pipe where length remaining unthreaded is less than
1-1/2" and where pipe size is less than 1-1/2", and do not thread nipples full
length(no close-nipples).
9. Copper Tube: ASTM B88; Type as indicated for each service; hard-drawn
temper for water piping; soft temper for oil piping.
10. DWV Copper Tube: ASTM B306.
11. ACR Copper Tube: ASTM B280. .�
12. Wrought-Copper Solder-Joint Fittings: ANSI B 16.22.
13. Cast-Copper Solder-Joint Drainage Fittings: ANSI B 16.23.
14. Wrought-Copper Solder-Joint Drainage Fittings: ANSI B 16.29.
15. Red Brass Pipe: ASTM B43.
16. Cast-Bronze Threaded Fittings: ANSI B 16.15.
17. Welding Materials: Except as otherwise indicated, provide welding materials as
determined by Installer to comply with installation requirements. Comply with
Section 11,Part C,ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code for welding materials.
18. Soldering Materials: Except as otherwise indicated,provide soldering materials as
determined by Installer to comply with installation requirements.
Project No. 00058 15600 14VAC-28
go
Renovations to Parsons Annex
Smith College
Northampton,Massachusetts
C. Runouts 1-1/4 in.to 2 in.: 2 in.
d. Runouts 2-1/2 in.to 4 in.: 2 in.
2.21 PIPE AND FITTINGS
A. General
1. Reference is made to specifications of recognized authorities to establish quality.
Latest editions of their publications at time of bidding shall be in force.
� s
2. All piping shall have manufacturer's name or trademark rolled into each and every
length of pipe.
3. All threads for screwed joints shall be National Taper Pipe Thread conforming to
ANSI B2.1-1968.
4. Qualify welding procedures, welders and operators in accordance with ASME
B31.1, or ASME B31.9, as applicable, for shop and project site welding of piping
work.
B. Application
1. Hot and Dual Temperature Water Supply and Return and Steam Supply and
Condensate Return: Black steel pipe, Schedule 40, size 2" and smaller threaded,
2-1/2" and larger welded, or Type "L" copper for hot and dual temperature water.
2. Boiler Trim: Brass Pipe, Schedule 40,threaded,cast bronze fittings.
3. Refrigerant: Type ACR copper, wrought copper fittings, AWS class BAgI silver
solder.
4. Condensate Drain (from cooling coils): Type M or DWV copper tube with cast
or wrought drainage fittings in lieu of copper PVC drains may be used in fan
room equipment and connection to existing lines.
C. Materials
1. Black Steel Pipe : ASTM A53,A106 or A120;except comply with ASTM A53 or
A106 where close coiling or bending is required.
2. Malleable-Iron Threaded Fittings: ANSI B16.3; plain or galvanized as indicated.
Class 150 for Schedule 40 piping,Class 300 for Schedule 80.
3. Yoloy Steel Pipe: ASTM A714; Class 4; Grade IV.
w.
Project No. 00058 15600 HVAC-27
Renovations to Parsons Annex
Smith College
Northampton,Massachusetts
1. All insulation including covering shall be fire resistant and fire retardant and shall
have a flame spread rating not exceeding 25, smoke developed rating not
exceeding 50, all complying with NFPA 225 and/or U.L. 723. Adhesives used for
applying and sealing jackets shall also conform to these same fire retardant and •°
smoke ratings.
2. On exposed insulation, all longitudinal seams shall be kept at the top of the pipe •
and circumferential joints shall be kept to a minimum. Raw ends of insulation
shall be concealed by neatly folding in the ends of the jackets. Fittings, valve
bodies, and flanges shall be furnished with the same jacket materials used on
adjoining insulation.
3. Covering shall not be applied until all parts of the work have been tested by the
Contractor and approved by the Engineer.
4. A vapor barrier shall be installed on all new hot water/chilled water piping. It
shall be applied in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions to maintain the
integrity of the vapor barrier.
5. Attention is called for to the fact that on all hot water/chilled water, refrigerant,
and condensate drain piping, oversized pipe hangers shall be furnished and pipe
insulation shall be applied continuous along the pipe passing inside the hanger.
6. Pipe insulation shall be closed cell Armaflex insulation as manufactured by
Gustin-Bacon,Manville,or other approved equal.
7. All hot water, chilled water, condensate drains, refrigerant piping, and make up
water piping shall be insulated with Armaflex, closed cell pipe insulation, or
approved equal. The insulation shall have an average thermal conductivity not to ow
exceed .25 BTU in. per sq. ft. per F. per hour at a mean temperature of 75 degrees
F. Thickness of the insulation shall be as scheduled below. The insulation shall
be applied over clean dry pipe with all joints firmly together. Longitudinal jacket
laps and the butt strips shall be smoothly secured with Benjamin Foster 85-20
adhesive. Note: All refrigerant piping run outdoors shall be covered with an
aluminum jacket and secured with stainless steel bands.
8. Insulation of all steam and condensate piping shall be fiberglass with jacketed
cover,thickness to be as listed below.
G. Insulation thickness shall be as follows:
Minimum Pipe Insulation Required:
1. Hot Water/Steam Condensate Return:
a. Runouts up to 2 in.: 1-1/2 in.
b. Runouts 1 in. and less: 1-1/2 in.
Project No. 00058 15600 HVAC-26
w0
Renovations to Parsons Annex
Smith College
Northampton,Massachusetts
B. For all pipe 2-1/2"and larger-Grinnell Figure No.20,at 10'intervals.
C. For all other suspended piping-Grinnell Figure 70 at 6' intervals for tubing 1-1/4" or less,
10'intervals for piping at 1-1/2"and larger.
D. All hangers directly in contact with non-ferrous pipe or tubing shall be copper plated or
plastic coated.
E. Hangers or supports shall be placed within 1' of each horizontal elbow. Vertical runs of
pipe not over 5' in length shall be supported on hangers placed not over 12" from the
elbow on the connecting horizontal run.
„w F. Install Figure 167 insulation shield between hanger and insulation on all piping;hangers to
be installed outside pipe insulation.
w G. Vertical risers shall be supported with Grinnell Figure CT-121C plastic coated riser
clamp;to be installed immediately below a coupling.
2.20 INSULATION
A. All air supply,return, and fresh air ducts shall be insulated. Insulation for concealed ducts
shall be 1-1/2 in. thick, 1-pound density glass fiber(flexible) duct insulation with factory
applied reinforced aluminum foil jacket equal to Manville Type FSK. Secure to duct with
Benjamin Foster No. 85-20 adhesive. Lap jacket 2 in. at all seams and secure flaps with
staples and adhesive to provide complete vapor barrier. In addition, this concealed duct
40 insulation shall be tied 18 in. o.c. with 18 gauge aluminum or copper wire where ducts
exceed 24 in. in width.
40 B. All concealed air ducts from the fresh air intakes to the air handling units shall be
insulated in the same manner as for the ductwork for concealed supply ducts.
40 C. All exposed fresh air ducts from the fresh air intakes to the air handling units and all
exposed supply and return air ducts, or where so noted, shall be insulated with 1 in. thick,
6 pound density, rigid glass fiberboard with Manville Type EAF vaporseal facing. Attach
board to ducts with double prong stick clips. Seal at joints to maintain vapor barrier. All
edges and angles shall be reinforced with corner beads. Finish shall consist of tackboard
of Benjamin Foster No. 30-36 Sealfas, embedded Manville Duramesh 205, and a heavy
finish coat of Benjamin Foster No. 30-35 Sealfas, all applied according to manufacturer's
recommendations.
D. Acoustical Insulation: Duct lining acoustical insulation shall be shop installed by the Sheet
' Metal Contractor. Liner shall be 1-in. thick, 3-pound density, non-combustible glass fiber
with U.L. approved neoprene coating on air side. Acoustical lining shall be installed
where shown on Drawings. All lined ductwork shall be insulated as listed above unless
otherwise noted.
F. Pipe Insulation
Project No. 00058 15600 HVAC-25
.®
Renovations to Parsons Annex
no
Smith College
Northampton, Massachusetts
C. Air Vents: Air vents shall be provided where shown and at all other high points, where
shown or not. Vents shall be of the manual type and shall be full line size, but_� in no case
shall they be less than 2 in_ steel pipe. Chambers shall be a minimum of 12 in. high.
Drain tubing shall be extended in such a manner that the globe valve and end of drain line
are readily accessible. Air vents for radiation shall be installed in the return side of each
loop of radiation before piping drops down to return main. These vents to be key or screw
type equal to Dole or Taco.
D. Automatic Make-Up Water Valve: Provide with three valve bypass for water system shall
be Bell&Gossett, Cash, Taco, or Watts equal to Bell &Gossett No. B-3 Reducing Valve
set for approximately 60 psig inlet and 21 psig outlet, field adjustable. Install backflow
preventer piped to drain in inlet to automatic valve. Bypass to be 1 in. size with globe ,
valve and one check valve in series. Strainers shall be as specified in other paragraphs of
this Section of the Specifications.
E. Furnish and install all temperature-pressure relief valves for all hot water heater systems.
All to be ASME rated and similar to that manufactured by WATTS.
2.16 STEAM TO WATER HEAT EXCHANGERS
A. Furnish and install where shown on the Drawings, steam to water, shell and tube U-bend
removable tube bundle, steam in shell,water in tube exchangers. The heat exchanger shall
include a cast iron bonnet,copper tubes, steel shell and baffles and be ASME stamped.
B. HX- - Shall be capable of heating 38 gpm from 1600 to 1800 with 5-psi steam pressure. *
Total heat load is 380,000 Btuh, 395 pounds per hour capacity. Velocity shall not exceed
4 ft/sec. with a pressure drop of 1 foot of water. The shell and tube shall be rated for 150-
psi design pressure and 375 °design temperature. Bell&Gossett Model No. SU62-4. �.
2.18 STEAM TRAPS
A. Furnish and install float and thermostatic steam traps where indicated on the Drawings.
B. The trap shall be of the mechanical lever ball float type having a ductile iron body with ..
horizontal inline screwed connections and shall incorporate a balanced pressure
thermostatic air vent. Valve mechanism shall be stainless steel and attached to a
removable cover for easy maintenance. The cover shall be 180 degrees reversible to
permit flow in either direction.
C. Stearn traps shall be as manufactured by Tunstall Associates. No substitutions will be
allowed.
2.19 HANGERS
A. Hangers shall be as manufactured by Grinnell Company, Carpenter & Paterson, Fee &
Mason, or equal.
Project No. 00058 15600 HVAC-24
on
Renovations to Parsons Annex
"° Smith College
Northampton, Massachusetts
40 B. The centrifugal water pumps shall be flange mounted on the receiver. Pumps shall be
close coupled vertical design, permanently aligned, bronze fitted and be equipped with
stainless steel shaft, enclosed bronze impeller, and renewable bronze case ring.
on Carbon/ceramic mechanical seals shall be rated for 250°F for maximum life. Each pump
shall be close coupled to a vertical drip proof motor. Pump capacities, motor HP and
RPM,electrical characteristics,and receiver shall be as scheduled on the Drawings.
C. The unit manufacturer shall furnish, mount on the unit, and wire a NEMA 2 control
cabinet with drip lip and piano hinged door enclosing the following:
0"
• (2) Combination magnetic starters (each having 3 overload relays)with fused
disconnect and cover interlock for each motor.
of • (1)Electrical alternator.
• (2)"Auto-Off Hand"selector switches.
• (1)Numbered terminal strip.
• (1) Fused control circuit transformer for each motor when the motor voltage
exceeds 230 volts.
40 All control cabinet components shall be UL listed or recognized and NEMA rated. The
control panel assembly shall be listed by Underwriters' Laboratories,Inc.
Each pump control circuit shall be completely independent of the other. The electrical
alternator shall change the operating sequence automatically after each cycle.
Simultaneous operation under peak load conditions, and operating of the second pump,
"4" should the first pump or its control fail, shall be provided by the lag float switch.
D. All factory installed wiring shall be numbered for easy identification and the numbers
aX shall coincide with those shown on the wiring diagrams. All interconnecting wiring
between the pump, control panel shall be enclosed in liquid tight flexible conduit.
we The unit shall be factory tested as a complete unit. The pump manufacture shall furnish
complete elementary and connection wiring diagrams, piping diagrams, installation and
operation instructions.
Im
Unit shall be Domestic Series CC as manufactured by Bell&Gossett or approved equal.
a" 2.15 HOT WATER SPECIALTIES AND VALVES
A. Expansion tanks shall be ASME pre-charged diaphragm tanks, stamped 125 psi working
pressure. Tanks shall be supplied with a heavy-duty butyl diaphragm, ring base, lifting
rings, and an NPT system connection. An air charging valve connection shall be provided
to facilitate adjusting pre-charged pressure to meet system conditions.
B. Air removal fitting shall be in-line type, welded steel, with internal circuiting causing
entrained air to be separated from the water. To be Spiro Vent "Air Separator", line size,
with drain valve and strainer. No substitutions will be allowed.
Project No. 00058 15600 HVAC-23
Renovations to Parsons Annex
Smith College
Northampton,Massachusetts
1. Ashcroft-#1018, 3-1/2" dial,red tipped pointer with scale range such that normal
operating pressure is approximately at mid-scale.
2.12 UNIONS
A. Unions shall be of the same class and material as the pipe and fittings of the system in •�
which they are installed. In black steel piping systems, they shall be 200 lb. black
malleable iron with brass ground joint equal to Dart Figures 0832, 0834, 0835, 0836 or
0838. In copper and brass piping,they shall be 125 lb.bronze or brass with ground joint.
B. Flanged unions for welded pipe shall be weld neck, 150 lb. raised face. Flanged joints
shall be packed with impregnated asbestos gaskets placed inside the bolt circle with
graphite applied to both faces.
C. Dielectric unions shall be provided between ferrous and non-ferrous piping to prevent
galvanic corrosion. The dielectric unions shall meet the requirements for tensile strength
of pipe fittings in accordance with Federal Specification WW-U-531 and shall be suitable
for temperatures and pressures encountered. The ends shall be threaded, flanged, brazed,
or soldered to match adjacent piping. The metal parts of the union shall be separated so
that the electrical current is below I percent of the galvanic current, which would exist
with metal to metal contact.
2.13 PIPE SLEEVES
A. Standard IPS steel or wrought iron sleeves shall be provided wherever exposed pipes pass +
through masonry walls or partitions. Pipe sleeves are to be two pipe sizes larger than line
size. Insulated piping sleeves shall be sized to allow insulation to pass through the sleeve
without gouging.
2.14 DUPLEX CONDENSATE PUMPS
A. Furnish and install according to plans and manufacture's instructions a duplex condensate
units as shown on the Drawings. The unit shall consist of(1)cast iron receiver, (2)water
pumps,(2)float switches and all accessories as hereafter specified.
The condensate receiver shall be of close grained cast iron construction and shall be
equipped with (2) externally adjustable 2-pole float switches, water level gauge, dial
thermometer, (2) pressure gauges for pump discharge, (2) bronze fitted isolation valves
between pumps and recover,and(2) lifting eye bolts.
A cast iron inlet strainer with vertical self-cleaning bronze screen and large dirt pocket
shall be mounted on the receiver. The screen shall be easily removable for cleaning,
requiring no additional floor space for servicing.
Project No. 00058 15600 HVAC-22
40
Renovations to Parsons Annex
no Smith College
Northampton,Massachusetts
F. Gate and/or globe valves shall not be used as substitutes for the following valves when
used as balance valves.
G. Balance and/or shut-off valves 4 in. and larger-Tour&Anderson Series STAF,neoprene
seat, semi-steel body, with stainless steel or bronze top and bottom bushings, 150 psig
working pressure, 125 pound ANSI flanges, Figure 101F or I I8F, G6-HI2. Provide open
position stop on all valves. Provide hand operators for all valves which are 6 ft. or more
above the floor.
s H. Balance and/or shut-off valves 2-1/2 in. and 3 in. sizes - Tour& Anderson Series STAF,
lever operated, faced plug, neoprene seat, semi-steel body with stainless steel or bronze
top and bottom bushings, 150 psig working pressure, Figure 118. Provide open position
,® stops for all valves.
I. For 2 in. and smaller-Balancing valves shall be Tour&Anderson Figure STAD or STA-
�. D, semi-steel body, bronze plug with neoprene or Teflon resilient face, bronze top and
bottom bushings, complete with lever. Provide open position stop and plastic cap on all
valves, which are labeled "Balance Valves" on the Drawings. All valves at fan coil unit
shall be furnished with drain kit.
J. Pump discharge check valves shall be Muessco, Williams&Hager, or Smolensky equal to
Muessco 105-DT silent type, steel body, stainless steel trim and spring, renewable seat,
150 psig ASME rated.
2.10 THERMOMETERS
A. Thermometers shall be Moeller, Palmer, Taylor, Trerice or Weiss, equal to Taylor
30EJ31009 with aluminum case, industrial glass,red reading mercury,9" scale length,2°F
subdivisions. Stem length shall be sufficient to assure accurate and fast response but in no
case less than 3-1/2" nor less than one-third of pipe diameter in which installed. Each
thermometer shall be provided with a brass, monel, or stainless steel separable socket of
matching length, and with lagging extension when installed in insulated pipe.
Thermometers shall be adjustable angle type, positioned as required to be easily seen and
read from normal operator's position.
B. Ranges shall be manufacturer's standard closest to the following:
1. Hot water heating system: 25-240T
2.11 PRESSURE GAUGES
A. Gauges shall be Ashcroft, Marsh, U.S. Gauge Company or Trerice equal to Ashcroft
"Quality" line gauges, Grade A, 1% accuracy. Each gauge shall be installed with a
pulsation damper (Ashcroft #1106B) and a brass lever handle gauge cock (Ashcroft
#1095).
B. Model number, size and range to be as follows:
Project No. 00058 15600 HVAC-21
Renovations to Parsons Annex
Smith College
Northampton,Massachusetts
D. Motor shall be nominal integrated variable frequency drive totally enclosed fan cooled
1750 rpm and shall be especially selected for quit operation. The horse power of the
motor shall be of such size as to insure non-overloading of the motor throughout the pump
curve without the use of motor service factor. Pump motors shall be premium efficiency.
Provide steel base.
E. Pumps shall be Grundfos Series L. No substitutions will be allowed.
2.09 VALVES
A. All valves shall be of the same make except as noted below for special valves and shall be
Crane, Watts, Walworth, or Tour & Anderson manufacture based on the following
Stockham valves. All ball valves shall be Watts, and all balancing valves shall be ..
Tour and Anderson. No substitutions will be allowed.
B. All water valves installed in copper tube piping shall be, in general, solder end pattern, all
bronze with iron hand wheel,rated for not less than 200 pounds non-shock water pressure.
In general,all line service valves are to be gate valves,manual vents are to be globe type.
Op
C. Solder end valves are as follows:
1. Gate Valves- Stockham Figure B-109.
2. Globe Valves-Stockham B-14T.
3. Check Valves-Stockham B-309.
4. Drain Valves-Watts No. B-6000 ball valve with hose adapter,cap and chain.
5. Ball Valves-Watts Series B-6001-SS-XH.
D. Screw end and flanged valves shall be as follows:
1. Gate: 2-1/2 in. and smaller- Stockham Figure B-120; 3 in. and larger- Stockham
Figure G-620 or G-623.
2. Globe: 2-1/2 in. and smaller - Stockham Figure B-120 or 752; 3 in. and larger-
Stockham Figure G-609 or G-613.
3. Check: 2-1/2 in. and smaller - Stockham Figure B-319; 3 in. and larger -
Stockham Figure G-931.
4. Ball Valves: Watts Series 600-SS-SH.
E. All shut-off valves 2-1/2 in. and larger shall be Watts Series G-4000, cast iron body, 316, .�
steel disc and shaft,Nordel EPT seat,designed for bubbletight shutoff. Valves to be fitted
with lever operator for two position operation.
Project No. 00058 1560014VAC-20
go
Renovations to Parsons Annex
4" Smith College
Northampton,Massachusetts
E. The convectors shall be finished with factory baked enamel finish in color to be
selected by the Architect from manufacturer's standard colors. All fasteners shall be
tamper-proof.
F. Convector A - Type SW-A: Type SW-A cabinets shall be constructed from not less
than 14 gauge CRS front and top and No. 16 gauge CRS back and sides. The front shall
wrap around the sides of the cabinet and shall fasten at sides with vandal proof screws.
Air outlet louvers of venetian type shall be in slope top. Type SW-A air inlet shall be
through open bottom. Back shall be provided with holes for mounting on wall.
G. Dampers: Provide factory installed Allen Head operated dampers for all convectors.
The damper operator shall have two free wheeling clutches for automatic engagement at
the beginning (closing or opening) position and shall position the damper blade at any
intermediate point between full closed and full open; at the full open and full closed
position, the clutch shall disengage allowing the die-formed, unbreakable nylon damper
knob to be turned beyond the full closed or open position without jamming or distorting
the damper assembly. The operator is to be 5/8 in. machined aluminum screw and zinc
die-cast iron and escutcheon plate. The escutcheon plate shall be fastened through the
enclosure to a 3/32 in. back-up plate with countersunk sheet metal screws.
H. Access Doors: Convectors shall be provided with one access door. Access door shall
" be 5-1/8 in. by 4-1/8 in. and shall be located in the inlet louver area. Access doors shall
be hinged on side with straight shaft type hinge and shall fasten with cam-type locking
device with Allen Head operator.
I. End Pockets: Where noted, convectors shall be provided with 4 in. end pockets, both
ends. End pocket shall consist of the cabinet extended in length as noted with No. 20
gauge CRS baffle spot welded to back of cabinet extruding from heating element to air
outlet louvers.
2.08 CIRCULATING PUMPS (In Line Type)
A. The pumps shall be of the centrifugal in-line coupled type, especially designed and
constructed for quiet operation. Capacity shall be as shown on the Drawings.
B. Pump end shall be of the in-line, single stage design with close-coupled motor. The pump
models shall be furnished as shown on the plans and installed in accordance with the
manufacture's recommendations. The pump shall be capable of operating continuously at
temperatures from 5°F to 250° (-15°C to 121°C) and working pressures of 175 PSI (12
Bars). Pump flanges shall be ANSI B16.1, 125-1b.flat face.
C. The pump housing, motor stool, and shaft coupling shall be constructed of close-grained
cast iron. The impeller, impeller seal ring,and pump shaft shall be constructed of stainless
steel. The impeller shall be secured to the splined pump shaft end by means of a stainless
steel lock nut and locking washer. The seal faces shall be if tungsten carbide/carbon with
other mechanical seal parts constructed of stainless steel.
Project No. 00058 15600 HVAC-19
Renovations to Parsons Annex
Smith College
Northampton, Massachusetts
C. Fan housing shall be constructed of steel sheet and all parts shall be bonderized and
then coated with baked primer-finisher especially formulated to meet stringent
corrosion resistance standards. The fan scroll shall be attached to the side plates by
means of continuous lock seam or welded seam construction. Intermittent spot welded
type construction will not be acceptable.
D. The fan wheels shall be of the backwardly inclined non-overloading type.
E. The shaft shall be constructed of C1040 ground and polished steel.
F. The bearings shall be of the ball bearing type and shall be especially
constructed for quiet operation. Bearings shall be of the self-aligning
grease pack, pillow block type, selected for a minimum L50 life in excess of 200,000 .�
hours.
G. Motor and drive shall be belt drive with adjustable motor sheave. Motor nameplate
horsepower shall exceed brake horsepower by a minimum of 5%. Belts shall be of the
oil resistant type. Motor shall be especially designed for quiet operation.
H. A factory wired non-fused disconnect switch shall be located under the housing of the
unit. Provide spring vibration isolators for each fan.
I. Fan shall be Greenheck Model SWB or equal by Loren-Cook or Jenn Air.
2.7 CONVECTORS
A. Convectors shall be of the wall mounted or semi-recessed type as shown on Drawings
for heating with hot water. Unit shall have a capacity as shown on the drawings and
shall be rated in accordance with Code CS 140-47 of the National Bureau of Standards.
B. Convector elements shall be of suitable type for use with hot water and shall consist of
round seamless copper tubes, non-ferrous fins, cast iron headers, steel element end
supports and fin tube supports all suitably protected against corrosion. All tubes shall
be mechanically expanded into fin collars. Tubes shall be expanded and rolled into
headers with contact strengthened by tapered brass bushings so inserted as to prevent
tubes from loosening or pulling out by continued expansion. No soldered or welded
joints or compression couplings shall be permitted.
C. All cabinets shall be reinforced where necessary to provide stiffness. Cabinets shall be
constructed of 16 gage quality steel. Fronts shall be secured in place by quick opening
fasteners with vandal proof heads. Cabinets and fronts shall be phosphatized and
painted inside and outside with one coat of grey primer. Complete cabinets and
convector elements are to be manufactured by the same company. A horizontal channel
stiffener shall be installed on the inside of the front panel of all units' 36" or longer.
D. The convectors shall be securely attached to the building structure and shall be set dead
level in both directions. All convectors shall be mounted one block course (8") above
finished floor.
Project No. 00058 15600 HVAC-18
Renovations to Parsons Annex
Smith College
Northampton, Massachusetts
w
D. System Requirements
RX I. Installations: Radiant tubing systems shall be installed in accordance with the
manufacturer's instructions and recommendations. All relevant information
shall be included relating to the following:
a. tube handling
b. tube measuring
C. tube cutting
d. tube bending
e. tube repairing
f. tube connections
g. tube solvent sensitivity
h. tube UV light sensitivity
w i. tube capacity and pressure drop
j. tube loop layout patterns
k. tube fastening procedures
1. manifold assembly instructions
" m. manifold location
n. fitting assembly instructions
o. insulation practices
40 P. installation method by construction type
q. control applications
r. system start-up procedures
W
2. Drawings: All drawings or design plans of the radiant tubing system shall be in
accordance with manufacturer recommended procedures for the products
es utilized.
3. Components: All product components of the radiant tubing system shall be
supplied by one company, including: PEX tubing, fittings,manifolds, and other
recommended and required hardware to assure a compatible and a complete
radiant tubing system.
2.6 UTILITY FAN
` A. The utility vent set shall be of the centrifugal fan type completely assembled with fan,
fan scroll, motor, belt drive, motor mount and motor housing. The capacity shall be as
shown on the Drawings and certified performance tests by AMCA shall be submitted
with the Shop Drawings.
B. The fan shall be mounted and supported as shown by the detail on the Drawings. The
mounting shall be complete with vibration isolators as recommended by the
manufacturer. The unit shall be provided with weather protection.
Project No. 00058 15600 HVAC-17
Renovations to Parsons Annex
Smith College
Northampton,Massachusetts
a. Modular Design: This eliminates the need for multiple manifold
configurations and allows for future expansion.
b. Venting: Each supply and return vent/temperature module shall have
an automatic integrated air vent.
C. Temperature Measurements: Each supply and return manifold shall ..
have a thermometer integrated to indicate supply and return water
temperatures. Temperature readouts will assist in the diagnostics and
set up of a radiant heating system.
d. Flow Measurements: Each loop return block shall have incremental
adjustment and flow rate indication. Temperature and flow readouts w.
will assist in the diagnostics and set up of a radiant heating system.
e. Balancing Valves: Each return block will provide a balancing valve
and a visual flow meter for proper balancing of the radiant heating
system allowing different loop lengths and tube sizes to be connected to
the same manifold. Each valve shall be able to fully close to allow
ow
complete loop isolation.
f. Supply/Return Indication: Each loop supply module shall be red to
indicate incoming hot water, and each return loop module shall be blue '
to indicate cooler return water.
g. Loop Isolation: Each loop supply and return module shall have a means *�
of fully isolating the loop from the rest of the system.
h. Piping Inlet/Outlet Size: All manifold inlets/outlets shall be 1-1/4" •
NPT female, to fit maximum size plumbing and greater system
adaptability.
3. Fittings
a. Fitting Composition: Brass compression fittings consisting of nut,
ferrule and insert with a ring for connecting PEX or copper tubing to
manifold.
b. Fitting Types: Manifold to PEX tubing sizes 3/8", 1/2", 5/8" 3/4"
Manifold to 1/2" copper tubing
Hose Bib
Manifold Cap
C. Required Features: Well fitting, easily installed. Copper tubing should
not require soldering.
Project No. 00058 15600 HVAC-16
Renovations to Parsons Annex
Smith College
Northampton,Massachusetts
j. Environmental Stress Cracking: "There shall be no loss of pressure in
the tubing when tested in accordance with 7.9" (paragraph of ASTM
F876).
k. Degree of Crosslinking: "When tested in accordance with 7.9,
(paragraph of ASTM F876), the degree of crosslinking for PEX tubing
material shall be within the range of 65%to 89% inclusive."
1. Stabilizer Migration Resistance: "When tested in accordance with 7.10
(paragraph of ASTM F876), the time tz (t2 = time to failure of boiled
sample) shall be at least 50% of the time, ti" (tl = time to failure of
.. unboiled sample).
M. Bend Radius: The minimum bend radius for cold bending of the tube
shall not be more than six (6) times the outside diameter for up to a 90
degree bend. For 180 degree bends, the minimum bend radius shall be
as follows:
3/8" tubing 3.0" radius
1/2" tubing 3.75" radius
5/8"tubing 4.5" radius
3/4"tubing 5.75" radius
n. Marking: All PEX tubing shall be marked at intervals of not more than
w. five(5) feet in accordance with ASTM F876 as follows:
1. Nominal tubing size.
2. Type of plastic tubing material.
3. Standard dimension Ratio, SDR9.
4. Pressure rating for water and temperature for which the pressure
rating is valid.
5. ASTM designation,ASTM F876.
6. Manufacturer's name and production code.
Additional Marking
a� 1. Date of manufacturing.
2. Oxygen diffusion protection to DIN4726.
3. Length indications in five (5) foot intervals, for ease of measuring
the tubing.
2. Manifolds: Manifolds used in PEX tubing installation shall consist of
individual loop control and adaptation utilizing modular Polyacrylamide
thermoplastic components ready for assembly. The manifold should also
include the following feawres:
Project No. 00058 15600 HVAC-15
Renovations to Parsons Annex
Smith College
Northampton,Massachusetts
d. Physical Properties: As supplied by Embassy Industries, Inc., all PEX
tubing shall conform to ASTM F876 "American Society of Testing and
materials, Standard Specification F876 entitled, "Crosslinked
Polyethylene (PEX) Tubing", and German Standard DIN 4726 for *�
"Oxygen Permeation" as related to the following paragraphs:
C. Tubing: The tubing shall be homogeneous throughout and essentially
uniform in color, opacity, density, and other properties. The inside and
outside surfaces shall be matte or glossy in appearance. the tubing
walls shall be free of cracks, holes, blisters, voids, foreign inclusion, or
other defects that are visible to the naked eye and that may affect the
wall integrity.
f. Dimensions and Tolerances
Nominal Average Outside Minimum
Tubing Size Diameter Wall Thickness
3/8" 0.500" 0.070"
1/2" 0.625" 0.070"
5/8" 0.750" 0.083"
3/4" 0.875" 0.097"
g. Density: The crosslinked polyethylene tubing material shall have a
density in the range from 0.926 to 0.949 Mg/m3.
h. Sustained Pressure:
Nominal Tube Minimum Burst Pressure Minimum �.
Burst Pressure
Size psi @ 180T psi @ 180T
3/8" 250 210
1/2" 195 165
5/8" 190 165
3/4" 190 165
i. Burst Pressure: The minimum burst pressure for PEX plastic tubing
shall be as given.
Nominal Tube Minimum Burst Pressure Minimum
Burst Pressure
Size psi @ 180T psi @ 180T
3/8" 275 235
1/2" 215 185
5/8" 210 180
3/4" 210 180 .�
Project No. 00058 15600 HVAC-14
Renovations to Parsons Annex
Smith College
Northampton, Massachusetts
E. Bottom Return Register (BRR) - Titus Model 1707, double reflection register with
opposed blade damper.
2.4 LOUVERS
A. All wall louvers shall be extruded aluminum construction, equal to the following Ruskin
Mfg.Co.model.
1. Type "A"-No.ELF375D with box frame,extended sill, 1/2" aluminum mesh bird
�s screen,and Kynar 500 finish.
2.5 RADIANT HEATING SYSTEM
.� A. Scope of Work
1. This Specification is to provide relevant product data for a radiant tubing
system consisting of PEX tubing with oxygen permeation protection,
distribution manifolds and associated fittings.
B. References
1. American Society of Testing and Materials, Standard Specification F876,
entitled "Crosslinked Polyethylene (PEX)Tubing".
2. American Society of Testing and Materials, Standard Specification F877
entitled, "Crosslinked Polyethylene (PEX) Plastic Hot and Cold Water
Distribution Systems".
3. German Standard DIN 4726, "Pipelines of plastic materials used in warm water
floor heating systems".
C. Materials
1. Tube
a. Tube Composition: Crosslinked Polyethylene (PEX) in accordance
with ASTM F876.
b. Manufacturing Method: All PEX tubing shall be manufactured using
the "electron beam method of crosslinking, performed at ambient
temperature and pressure.
C. Working Pressure/Temperature: The minimum continuous working
pressure rating of the PEX tubing shall be 100 psi @ 180 F working
■• temperature and 80 psi @ 200 F working temperature.
Project No. 00058 15600 HVAC-13
Renovations to Parsons Annex
Smith College
Northampton, Massachusetts
2. Flexible duct shall be manufactured from fully annealed aluminum and formed
into a multiple corrugated construction, then encased with 1 inch, 3/4 lb. density
fiberglass blanket and sheathed with a vinyl vapor barrier. The duct shall have an
inside-bending radius of not more than 3/4 inch I.D. It must comply with the
latest NFPA Bulletin 90A and be listed as Class 1 air duct, UL Standard 181.
Duct shall have published pressure ratings of not less than 10 ft. S.A. positive
pressure, .5 inch W.A. negative pressure. Duct shall also be UL rated for �•
velocities up to 6,500 F.P.M.E.
R. Flexible Connections: Provide, in each duct connection to every air handling unit and fan,
30 ounce double neoprene coated woven glass fabric flexible connection not less than 4"
long securely held to retaining clamps.
.R
S. All exhaust ducts serving shower shall be aluminum.
2.2 DUCTWORK SHOP DRAWINGS ow
A. Layout and details shall clearly indicate compliance with the above Specifications. Any
variations in design details, fittings, or accessory items for which approval is requested
shall be specifically marked on the Drawings, as shall any major variations from the
Drawing (minor variations are assumed to be field conditions). Drawings for Fan Room
shall be at 3/8 in.= 1 ft. 0 in. scale.
B. The Drawings shall not be submitted to the Engineer for approval until the ductwork has
been coordinated with all other trades. The Sheet Metal Contractor shall assume the
responsibility for and bear the cost of any alterations required after approval because of
inaccurate Shop Drawings or lack of proper coordination, and also for any changes in
sheet metal erected prior to approval of Shop Drawings.
2.3 AIR DIFFUSERS,GRILLES,AND REGISTERS
A. Diffusers, grilles, and registers shall be Anemostat-Waterloo, Titus, or Barber Colman,
equal to those specified in the Following paragraphs. See Drawings for sizes, cfm's,
locations, and qualities of various types. In general, all units shall be installed with face
bars parallel to floor or nearest wall. All volume control dampers shall be key operated.
Finish for all diffusers, grilles, and registers to be factory finished with color selected by
the Engineer.
B. Ceiling Exhaust Register (CER) - Titus Model 350FL/AG-15 aluminum deflected blade
register, off-white finish,with opposed blade damper.
C. Top Exhaust Register(TER) - Titus Model 271FL/AG-15 aluminum construction, double
deflection,white finish,with opposed blade damper.
D. Top Supply Registers(TSR)-Titus Model CT-980 Fixed Aluminum Bar with 1/4"spacing
and type-]1 border.
Project No. 00058 15600 HVAC-12
Renovations to Parsons Annex
' Smith College
Northampton,Massachusetts
K. Hangers are to be placed on not greater than 8'-0" centers or closer where required so that
the ductwork can support the weight of a man at any point.
L. Wherever sound insulation lining is called for, the sheet metal duct size shown on the
Drawings must be increased to provide the clear inside dimensions or cross sectional area
shown on the Drawings.
M. Duct joint sealing, reinforcing, flanges, etc. for rectangular sheet metal ducts shall be
based on maintaining airtight ducts at 2" WG Maximum static pressure with maximum
leakage of 5% of total fan capacity; 1/2 of 1% for round and oval ducts. All joints in
ductwork shall be sealed with U.L. classified United Duct Sealer,or equal.
N. Duct systems shall have sufficient volume dampers, whether or not shown, to control and
adjust the total volume of each system, each zone, in each branch and at each diffuser or
grille. The HVAC Contractor shall consult with the College's Balancing Contractor for
the proper placement of volume dampers prior to installation. Volume dampers shall be of
the butterfly type with 18 gauge galvanized iron blade. All dampers shall be equipped
with Duro-Dyne Type UNXLD locking quadrant. All dampers shall be provided with
damper bearings on each end of shaft mounted on a 2" x 3" x 1/8" plate held to duct with
sheet metal screws. Maximum width of single blades shall be 14". Splitter dampers shall
not be used.
O. Provide where shown or indicated on the Drawings fire and/or smoke dampers with a UL
label for not less than 1-1/2 hour fire protection rating in accordance with UL-555
vw continuing inspection service. Blades and frame shall be galvanized steel construction
with blades of an interlocking design, having two folded guides which serve as stops.
Fusible links shall be equal to Grinnell Fig. 1351, 20 pounds, issue A. Dampers shall be
+w installed according to latest edition of NFPA-90A, mounted with 1-1/2" x 1-1/2" x 1/8"
returning angles on both sides of partition, wall, or floor, and sleeves as per the UL test
under which the damper fire rating was obtained. Angles shall completely close the wall
opening and provide anchorage to the dampers. Damper blade stack shall not reduce duct
free area.
P. Where called for on Drawings, final connections to diffusers and registers shall be made
with flexible ductwork, UL listed, Class 1. To be Thermaflex S-LP-10 for exhaust/return,
M-KA for supply, or equal. Joints shall be sealed with duct tape and Thermaflex duct
straps. Connection to rigid ductwork shall be made with spun conical taps.
Q. Flexible Air Duct:
1. Flexible air duct shall be Wiremold, Thermoflex,Cleveflex,or equal,and shall be
equal to Wiremold Type CRK Vanguard Duct.
Project No. 00058 15600 HVAC-11
an
Renovations to Parsons Annex
Smith College
Northampton,Massachusetts
D. Duct sizes shall be strictly followed and no changes in shape or dimensions shall be made
by the HVAC Contractor without first obtaining approval from the Engineer, except that
duct shall be offset as required to clear structural members and to co-ordinate with other
trades and any duct changes must meet the latest ASHRAE and SMACNA standards.
E. The center line radius of all duct elbows where shown on the Drawings shall be at least
one and one-half times the width of the duct. Where building conditions do not allow for
this radius or where square turns are shown, manufactured double walled duct turns equal
to Aero-Dyne or Tuttle & Bailey shall be used in the supply or exhaust air ducts and
"Sonotru" acoustical attenuating turns as manufactured by South Control Products Co. .�
shall be used in any air ducts where acoustical insulation is included.
F. Duct sections 1'-6" wide or less shall be butted together and jointed with flat drive cleats
2-1/8" wide. Top and bottom cleats shall be cut flush with duct and side cleats bent over
to make a tight joint. Standing bar slips as specified for ducts over 18" may be used at the
HVAC Contractor's option.
G. Ducts from 18"to 30"wide shall be jointed with 1/2" standing bar slips made of metal the
same as or heavier than duct sheets. Joints in ducts with either dimension over 30 shall
have I" standing bar slips on those sides over 30". Where sides are over 42",the standing
bar slips will be reinforced with 1-1/2" x 1-1/2" x 1/8" angles. Additional angle stiffeners
not over 60" apart shall be provided between joints. Ducts over 60" in width shall be .�
jointed with 1-1/2" x 1/8" angle irons riveted to ductwork on all sides with 1/8" rivets at
not more than 4-1/2" on centers, sections bolted with 3/16" stove bolts at not over 6"
centers, sheets turned over angles into joint at least 1/4".
H. Sheet metal screws 3/4" #10 may be used to attach stiffener angles to ductwork to secure
seams, spaced not over 12" on centers and not less than two per side of 12" or more,
except where specified otherwise. Button punching shall not be used except for pre-
erection attachment of fittings.
I. Provide hinged galvanized steel access and inspection doors opposite each manual
damper, reheat coil, steam injection humidifier at each fire damper, and at every duct
mounted control device. Doors shall be equal to Buensod-Stacey Type S-2 of rigid
construction with cast type rotary latches. Where space limitations do not allow for full
swing of the access door,two rotary type latches shall be used. Doors located in insulated
ducts shall be furnished with extended frames to serve as a stop for insulation. Insulate
doors located in insulated ductwork. All doors shall be gasketed. Door shall be 12" by
12" minimum except where limited by duct width and shall be larger where necessary for
access to fire damper fusible links or other devices.
J. Hangers for all rectangular ducts 4 sq. ft. in area or above shall be round bar type fastened
to 1-1/4" x 1-1/4"x 1/8" angles under the ducts. Ducts less than 4 sq. ft. in area shall be
hung with black V x 1/16" strap iron bent I" under bottom side of the duct and fastened to +
the duct with sheet metal screws, using not less than two screws per side and as many
more so that they are not greater than 6"centers.
Project No. 00058 15600 HVAC-10
in
Renovations to Parsons Annex
MR Smith College
Northampton, Massachusetts
F. No pipe cutting or threading shall be done in areas where completed concrete floor slab is
to remain in finishes or be painted later. Should this area be necessary, the HVAC
Contractor shall cover the entire working area with canvas tarpaulins in an approved
manner.
1.19 RECORD DRAWINGS
A. Submit Record Drawings as specified in Division 1.
.� B. Record Drawings shall reflect all changes from the Contract Drawings whether by change
order or by field conditions. Principal dimensions of concealed work, fire dampers,
volume dampers, control dampers and control valves, and for piping installation, valve
numbers shall be added to these Drawings prior to submittal to the Engineer. In addition
" to the above all revised areas shall be clearly marked with a revision bubble.
1.20 ALTERNATES
A. See Section 01030 for a general description of the Base and Alternate Bids. Work of the
HVAC Subcontractor is more specifically described below.
B. The Base Bid shall be the lump sum price for all labor and materials necessary for and
4" reasonably incidental to providing all HVAC work specified and shown on the Drawings,
less the cost of all extra work described in the Alternates.
C. Refer to section 01230 alternates the following schedule and the contract Drawings for a
description of alternatives.
D. Alternate Bid Item. 1: Furnish and install make up air unit (MAU-1) and all associated
ductwork,piping,and controls.
PART 2-MATERIALS
2.1 SHEET METAL WORK
A. All duct runs shall be checked for clearances before installation of any ductwork. Above
hung ceilings, duct locations and elevations must be co-ordinated with work of other
trades to avoid conflicts with structure,piping,conduit and light fixtures.
B. All sheet metal ducts shall be constructed of galvanized steel sheet of bend forming
* quality.
C. Duct construction shall be in accordance with best practices and latest ASHRAE or
SMACNA requirements for metal gauges,joints, reinforcing and supports. All exposed
ductwork shall be constructed and hung to provide a neat, smooth, finished appearance.
Cadmium plated sheet metal screws shall be used on all exposed ductwork. Ducts shall be
free from thumping or rattling when fans are turned on or off.
Project No. 00058 15600 HVAC-9
.*
Renovations to Parsons Annex
Smith College OR
Northampton, Massachusetts
D. Equipment and material stored on the job site shall be protected from the weather,
vehicles, dirt, and/or damage by workmen or machinery. Insure that all electrical or
absorbent equipment or material is protected from moisture during storage.
1.17 CLEANING
A. The Contractor shall thoroughly clean and flush all piping, ducts, and equipment of all ..
foreign substances inside and out before being placed in operation. Thoroughly flush all
piping of any oils, burrs, solder, and flux. Replace strainers and filters at completion of
cleaning.
B. If any part of a system should be stopped or damaged by any foreign matter after being
placed in operation, the system shall be disconnected, cleaned, and reconnected at no
additional cost to the Owner.
C. During the course of construction, all ducts and pipes shall be capped to insure adequate
protection against the entrance of foreign matter.
D. Keep the job site free from the accumulation of waste material and rubbish. Upon
completion of all work under the Contract,the Contractor shall remove from the premises
all rubbish, debris, and excess materials left over from his work. Any oil or grease stains
on floor areas caused by the Contractor shall be removed and floor areas left clean.
1.18 CUTTING AND PATCHING
A. Cutting and/or drilling of all openings and holes 4" in diameter or smaller,required for the
installation of plumbing in the building, shall be performed by the Plumbing Contractor.
All work and materials shall be installed in such a manner and at such time to keep cutting
and patching to a minimum. Cutting and/or drilling of structural supports (ie. beams or
joists) is not allowed without written approval by the Engineer.Location for openings,etc.
shall be checked by the HVAC Contractor, and error due to failure to co-ordinate work
with other divisions shall be the responsibility of the HVAC Contractor failing to co-
ordinate,who shall make the corrections at his own expense.
B. All holes larger than 4" in diameter shall be provided by the General Contractor. .�
C. Work shall include furnishing and locating sleeves or inserts required before the new walls
are built, or be responsible for the cost of cutting and patching required for pipes where
sleeves were not installed or where incorrectly located. The HVAC Contractor shall do all
drilling required for the installation of hangers.
D. Patching of all holes, after installation of piping or equipment, shall be performed by the
General Contractor or appropriate tradesmen.
E. All pipe cutting or threading shall be done in a location approved by the Owner.
Project No. 00058 15600 HVAC-8
Renovations to Parsons Annex
"a Smith College
Northampton, Massachusetts
2. Description of start up, operation, and shutdown procedures for each item of
equipment..
3. Winter/summer changeover procedures.
4. Schedule of adjustment, care, and routine maintenance for each item of
equipment.
5. Lubrication chart.
6. Wiring and control diagrams with data to explain detailed operation and control of
■w
each item of equipment.
7. Valve chart.
8. List of recommended spare parts.
9. Copies of all service contracts.
10. Performance curves for pumps, fans, etc.
11. List of all names, addresses, and phone numbers of all Contractors as well as the
local representative for each item of equipment.
D. See the "Automatic Temperature Control' paragraphs of this Section for additional
requirements.
1.16 PROTECTION
A. Work under each Section shall include protecting the work and material of all other
Sections from damage by work or workmen, and shall include making good all damage
thus caused.
B. The Contractor shall be responsible for work and equipment until finally inspected,tested,
and accepted; protect work against theft, injury, or damage; and carefully store material
and equipment received on site which is not immediately installed. Close open ends of
work with temporary covers or plugs during construction to prevent entry of obstructing or
foreign material.
C. Work under each Section includes receiving, unloading, uncrating, storing, protecting,
setting in place, and connecting-up completely any equipment supplied under each
Section. Work under each Section shall also include exercising special care in handling
and protecting equipment and fixtures, and shall include the cost of replacing any of the
equipment and fixtures which are missing or damaged by reason of mishandling or failure
to protect on the part of the HVAC Contractor.
Project No. 00058 15600 HVAC-7
,w
Renovations to Parsons Annex
MW
Smith College
Northampton,Massachusetts
C. All broken or waste material,rags, packing, etc.,resulting from his work shall be removed
by the HVAC Contractor.
1.13 WORK CONCEALED
A. All piping and ductwork shall be installed concealed in all areas except storage rooms,
closets, and mechanical or electrical equipment rooms, unless specifically noted otherwise
on the Drawings.
B. Piping containing water shall not be installed concealed in walls having an exterior
exposure above grade.
1.14 GUARANTEE
A. The HVAC Contractor shall guarantee the satisfactory operation of his work in all parts
for a period of one (1) year after date of substantial completion, and shall agree to
promptly repair or replace any items of his work which are found to be defective during
this period.
B. The HVAC Contractor shall pay for repair of damage to the building caused by defects in
his work and for repair to plaster, wood, and other materials or equipment caused by
replacement or repairs to the entire satisfaction of the Engineer.
C. Any part of the work installed under this Contract requiring excessive maintenance shall
be considered as being defective.
aw
1.15 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS
A. After all final tests and adjustments have been completed, fully instruct the proper
Owner's representative in all details of operation for equipment installed. Supply qualified
personnel to operate equipment for sufficient length of time to assure that Owner's
representative is properly qualified to take over operation and maintenance procedures.
This Contractor shall video tape the instruction procedures and deliver three (3) copies of
the tape with the Operation and Maintenance Manuals.
B. Furnish the Engineer, for approval, three (3) copies of an Operation and Maintenance
Manual. Inscribe the following identification on the cover: the words OPERATION
AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL, the name and location of the equipment or the ..
building, the name of the Contractor, and the Contract number. The manual shall have a
Table of Contents with tab sheets placed before each section. The instructions shall be
legible and easily read, with large sheets of drawings folded in. The manuals shall be
bound in hard binders or an approved equivalent.
C. The manual shall include the following information:
or
1. Description of systems.
ow
Project No. 00058 156001 VAC-6
Renovations to Parsons Annex
ON Smith College
Northampton, Massachusetts
A. The HVAC Contractor shall refer to all the Drawings of interior details, plans, elevations,
and structural layout in preparing his estimate. These documents are intended to
supplement the Mechanical and Electrical Plans and Specifications and any applicable
work indicated or implied thereon is to be considered a part of the Subcontract
requirements.
B. The Plans and Specifications are complementary and anything called for, or reasonably
implied, in the Plans and not in the Specifications, or vice versa, shall be considered as
called for or reasonably implied in both.
C. The HVAC Contractor shall assume all responsibility in scaling measurements from the
Drawings.
D. Because of the small scale of the Drawings, it is not possible to indicate all offsets, fittings
and accessories that may be required. The HVAC Contractor shall carefully investigate
the structural and finish conditions affecting all his work and shall arrange such work
accordingly, furnishing such fittings, traps, offsets, valves, and accessories as may be
required to meet such conditions,at no additional cost.
E. The HVAC Contractor shall consult the College's Temperature Control and Balancing
on Contractor to co-ordinate work of these trades and to have a full comprehension of the
work to be done as well as to determine the conditions affecting the location and
placement of all equipment and materials.
1.11 PRODUCT HANDLING
A. Delivery: The HVAC Contractor shall provide for the delivery of all his materials and
fixtures to the building site when required so as to carry on his work efficiently and to
avoid delaying his work and that of other trades. Delivery and storage of materials and
ON equipment must be co-ordinated with the Smith College Physical Plant, and is limited to
areas designated by the College.
B. Storage and Handling: The HVAC Contractor shall,at all times,fully protect his work and
materials from injury or loss by others. Any injury or loss, which may occur, shall be
made good without expense to the Owner. The HVAC Contractor shall be responsible for
the proper protection of all his materials until the building is accepted by the Owner.
1.12 ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS
A. All necessary tools machinery, scaffolding, and transportation for completion of his
Subcontract shall be provided by the HVAC Contractor.
B. The HVAC Contractor shall provide his own portable extension lines and obtain 120 volt,
60 cycle, single phase electric power from the General Contractor to drive his machines
and light his work. He shall provide his own light bulbs,plugs, sockets,etc.
Project No. 00058 15600 HVAC-5
Renovations to Parsons Annex
Smith College
Northampton, Massachusetts
1.6 PRODUCTS
A. With the exception of items specifically noted otherwise, all materials shall be new, full *"
weight, and first class in every respect, without defects, and designed to function properly
in that portion of the work for which they are intended, and with the same brand of
manufacturer for each class or category of material or equipment. Electrical materials and ++�•
equipment of types for which there are Underwriters Laboratories standard requirements,
listings,or labels shall conform to their requirements and be so labeled.
1.7 SUBMITTALS
A. Before ordering materials shipped to the job, the HVAC Contractor shall submit to the
Engineer six (6) sets of catalogue cuts, manufacturers' data sheets, or Shop Drawings,
giving all details, dimensions, capacities, etc. of all materials to be furnished on the
project. In addition to the above, one (1) set of Shop Drawings shall be submitted to the
College's HVAC Department for review and approval.
B. The HVAC Contractor shall check the Shop Drawings thoroughly for compliance with the
Plans and Specifications before submitting them to the Engineer for review, making any
and all changes which may be required.
C. The review of Shop Drawings by the Engineer shall not relieve the Contractor from any
obligation to perform the work strictly in accordance with the Contract Drawings and
Specifications. The responsibility for errors in Shop Drawings shall remain with the
HVAC Contractor.
D. In the event that materials are being delivered to or installed on the job for which Shop !
Drawings or samples have not been approved and/or which are not in accordance with the
Specifications, the Contractor will be required to remove such materials and substitute
approved materials at his own expense and as directed by the Engineer.
1.8 PERMITS,FEES AND INSPECTIONS
A. The HVAC Contractor shall secure all permits and pay all fees required for his work. He
shall be required to secure all other permits and pay all other fees and charges incidental to
the proper carrying out of the Contract. He is to assume all responsibility regarding the
observance of the rules and regulations so far as they relate to his part of the work.
B. The HVAC Contractor shall arrange and pay for all required inspections of his work.
1.9 TEMPORARY HOOK-UPS
A. The General Contractor will provide any temporary hook-ups required for the use of water
or sanitary for construction purposes and testing out apparatus as specified in Division 1.
1.10 PLANS AND SPECIFICATIONS
Project No. 00058 15600 HVAC-4
Renovations to Parsons Annex
'! Smith College
Northampton,Massachusetts
D. The HVAC Contractor shall co-operate to the fullest extent with all other trades in order
to expedite the progress of the work. He shall furnish all information pertaining to his
materials as to sizes, locations, and means of support, to all other trades requiring such
information. The HVAC Contractor shall also furnish all sleeves, frames, beams,
supports, inserts, etc., hereinafter specified so that the General Contractor may build them
in place. In case of failure on the part of the HVAC Contractor to give proper information
W as above,he will be required to bear the extra expense involved due to such failure.
E. The arrangement of all piping, ductwork, conduit, wire and cable indicated on the
w Drawings is diagrammatic only, and indicates the minimum requirements of this work.
Conditions at the building shall determine the actual arrangement of runs, bends, offsets,
etc. The HVAC Contractor shall lay out all his work at the site and be responsible for the
accuracy thereof. Conditions at the building shall be the determining factor for all
measurements.
F. All work shall be laid out and installed so as to require the least amount of cutting and
patching. Drilling of all holes required for the installation of pipes, conduit, and cable
runs shall be performed by the Contractor installing such items.
G. The HVAC Contractor shall be responsible for the proper protection of his work and
materials from injury or loss at the hands of others and shall make good such loss or injury
at his own expense. All pipes left open during the progress of the work shall be capped or
W plugged at all times. All instruments and operating apparatus shall be protected by
suitable means.
H. The HVAC Contractor shall be responsible for all equipment and materials installed under
this Section until the final acceptance of the project by the Owner.
I. The HVAC Contractor shall check the Plans and Specifications before ordering any
materials and the installation of work. Any discrepancies shall be called to the attention of
the Engineer before proceeding with the work.
J. Before submitting his bid,the HVAC Contractor shall visit the site with the Drawings and
Specifications and shall become thoroughly familiar with all conditions affecting his work
since the HVAC Contractor will be held responsible for any assumption he may make in
regard thereto.
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Equality of materials or articles other than those named or described in this Section will be
determined in accordance with the provisions of the General Requirements. No
substitution will be allowed for the Trane, York, or McQuay air handling units and
condensing unit, Trane, McQuay or International fan coil units, Watts ball valves,
Grundfos pumps,Tour and Anderson balancing valves,Tunstall steam traps.
B. The HVAC Contractor shall agree to accept as final the results of tests secured by a
qualified testing laboratory engaged by the Owner. Tests will be conducted in accordance
with the General Requirements.
Project No. 00058 15600 14VAC-3
Renovations to Parsons Annex
Smith College
Northampton,Massachusetts
12. Instructions.
13. Record Drawings.
14. Demolition, removal from site and legal disposal of all existing heating and
ventilating systems and equipment, made obsolete by new construction. All +•
piping and equipment shall be the property of the College and shall be delivered
to such places designated by the College.
1.3 CODES,ORDINANCES AND INSPECTIONS
A. All materials and the installation thereof shall conform to the requirements of the
Massachusetts State Building Code, Electrical Code, Fuel Gas and Plumbing Code and
local laws, rules, regulations, and codes pertaining thereto. Where provisions of the
Contract Documents conflict with any codes, rules or regulations, the latter shall govern.
Where the Contract requirements are in excess of applicable codes, rules or regulations,
the Contract provisions shall govern unless the Engineer rules otherwise.
B. The HVAC Contractor shall comply with the Local Code Enforcement Officials' '
instructions at no additional cost to the Owner.
1.4 INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS ow
A. The HVAC Contractor shall employ only competent and experienced workmen at a
regular schedule in harmony with the other tradesmen on the job. He shall also exercise OF
care and supervision of his employees in regard to proper and expeditious laying out of his
work.
on
B. The HVAC Contractor shall have a Foreman or Superintendent assigned to the Project
who shall be authorized to make decisions and receive instructions exactly as if the HVAC
Contractor himself were present. The Foreman or Superintendent shall not be removed or am
replaced without the express approval of the Engineer after construction work begins.
C. The HVAC Contractor shall be held responsible for any injuries or damage done to the go
building premises or adjoining property or to other Contractors' work resulting from the
execution of his part of the work in any manner whatsoever; and in case of dispute arising
as to the extent or share of responsibility incurred by the HVAC Contractor, it is agreed owl
between the Owner and the HVAC Contractor that such liability and extent of damage
shall be finally determined by the Engineer whose decision shall be final and binding on
both parties to the Contract for the work in question. MR
.s
Project No.00058 15600 HVAC-2
Renovations to Parsons Annex
Smith College
Northampton, Massachusetts
SECTION 15600-HEATING,VENTILATING AND AIR CONDITIONING (HVAC)
PART 1 -GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Include General Conditions, Supplementary General Conditions, applicable parts of
Division 1,and conditions of the Contract as part of this Section.
B. Examine all other Sections of the Specifications for requirements, which affect work
under this, Section whether or not, such work is specifically mentioned in this Section.
C. Co-ordinate work with that of all other trades affecting, or affected by the work of this
Section. Co-operate with such trades to assure steady progress of all work under the
Contract.
1.2 SCOPE OF WORK
A. Furnish all labor, materials, plant, equipment and services necessary for and reasonably
incidental to the complete installation of all HVAC work specified herein and/or indicated
on the Drawings, including,but not limited to,the following;
1. Steam to water heat exchanger.
2. Unit heaters and radiators.
3. Pex tubing system and manifold.
4. Piping systems for hot water, steam supply and condensate return, including
pumps,heat exchanger valves,and specialties.
5. Duct systems for and exhaust, including fire dampers, registers, louvers, and
terminal boxes.
6. Exhaust fans.
7. Insulation for piping,ductwork,and equipment.
8. Energy management (building automation) system. All temperature control
work shall be by Yankee Technology,Inc.
9. Installation of and connection to equipment furnished by others.
10. Air and water balance,tests, start-up. All water and air testing and balancing shall
be preformed by "Wings Testing and Balancing, Inc and billed directly to the
College."
11. Guarantee.
Project No. 00058 15600 HVAC-1
Renovations to Parsons Annex
"I Smith College
Northampton,Massachusetts
3.11 WATER SERVICE
A. The Plumbing Contractor shall make all necessary arrangements to have a new water meter
installed by the Northampton Water Department. The Plumbing Contractor shall order the
new meter,and the College shall be billed direct for all charges.
3.12 FIRE SAFING
±w
A. Work Included: Provide labor, materials, and equipment necessary to complete the work
including,but not limited to,the following:
1. Fire safing at all penetrations through fire barriers.
an 2. Fire safing at all penetrations through smoke barriers.
3. Extent of fire and smoke barriers as indicated on the Architectural Drawings.
am
4. Fire safing at all penetrations through floors, shafts, corridor walls, stairway walls,
mechanical rooms, electrical rooms, vaults, storage rooms, kitchen, machine
an rooms,outdoor storage rooms,and receiving rooms.
B. Safing Insulation
1. Fire safing insulation shall be Thermafiber as manufactured by USG Interiors,Inc.,
or Architect-Engineer approved equal, 4" minimum thickness by the required full
length and width,or as indicated on the Drawings.
2. Provide incidental galvanized steel clip anchors.
C. Seal Compound: At "poke-through" openings, apply "Firecode" seal compound as
manufactured by USG Interiors,Inc.,or approved equal,over Thermafiber fire safing.
wr D. Preparation
1. At all fire rated assemblies,prepare all penetrations for pipes.
+tee
E. Application
1. Install approved fire safing insulation of proper size, leaving no voids. Compress
and friction fit fire safing and use attachment clips where necessary.
2. Seal completely around all openings and over the fire safing insulation with sealing
compound.
END OF SECTION
Project No. 00058 15400 Plumbing-19
Renovations to Parsons Annex
Smith College ..
Northampton,Massachusetts
A. The Plumbing Contractor shall furnish and set all sleeves required. All water piping
passing through masonry walls shall be provided with standard weight steel pipe, or
Schedule 40 PVC pipe sleeves, inside diameter to be slightly larger than pipe passing
through same. Center pipe in sleeve.
B. Provide chromium plated escutcheons where un-insulated pipes pass through walls.
3.7 INSPECTION AND TESTS
A. Tests for Plumbing Systems: Soil, waste, vent and water piping shall be tested by the
Plumbing Contractor and approved before acceptance. Underground piping shall be tested
prior to backfilling. Equipment required for tests shall be furnished by the Plumbing Con-
tractor at no additional cost to the Owner. All tests shall be witnessed and approved by the
Local Plumbing Inspector,and shall be performed as required by the Plumbing Code.
3.8 CLEANING UP
A. After all the fixtures have been set and ready for use, and before leaving the job,thoroughly
clean all fixtures installed under this Contract,removing all plaster, stickers,rust stains,and
any foreign matter or discoloration of fixtures, leaving every part in perfect condition and
ready for use.
3.9 EQUIPMENT INSTALLATION
A. All equipment furnished under this Section shall be installed in accordance with its
manufacturer's printed installation instructions, whether so shown on the Drawings or not,
and all labor and materials required to accomplish this shall be furnished by the Plumbing
Contractor and be included in his Bid.
3.10 DISINFECTION
A. Flush out entire system.
B. Introduce chlorine or solution of calcium hypochlorite or sodium hypochlorite. Fill lines
slowly and apply agent at rate which will produce 50 parts per million of chloride as
determined by residual chlorine tests at end of lines. Open and close valves and hydrants
while system is being chlorinated.
C. After twenty-four (24) hours, test for residual chlorine. If more than 5 ppm are present,
flush out system until all traces are removed.
D. After disinfection, flush treated water from system through its extremities. Continue
flushing until samples of water are satisfactory to local authorities having jurisdiction.
Repeat flushing if samples taken daily over next three(3)days indicate that quality of water
is not being maintained. Do not draw samples from hydrants and undisinfected hose.
E. Submit test results to Owner.
Project No. 00058 15400 Plumbing-18 ,�,
Renovations to Parsons Annex
W Smith College
Northampton, Massachusetts
D. Joint Adapters: Make joints between PVC pipe and other type of pipe with standard
manufactured PVC adapters and fittings.
E. Lay conduit beginning at low point of system, true to grades and alignment indicated with
unbroken continuity of invert.
3.3 WATER PIPE FITTINGS AND CONNECTIONS
A. Mains, Branches and Runoffs: Piping shall be installed as indicated. Pipe shall be cut
accurately to measurements established at the building by the Plumbing Contractor and
shall be worked into place without springing or forcing. Care shall be taken not to weaken
structural portions of the building. Above ground piping shall be run parallel with the lines
of the building unless otherwise indicated. Branch pipes from service lines may be taken
from top, bottom or side of main, using such crossover fittings as may be required by
structural or installation conditions. Supply pipes, valves and fittings shall be kept a
sufficient distance from other work and other services to pen-nit not less than 1/2" between
finished covering on the different services.
B. Expansion and Contraction of Pipe: Allowance shall be made throughout for expansion
"" and contraction of pipe.
3.4 CUTTING AND PATCHING
A. Drilling of all holes required for the installation of plumbing shall be performed by the
Plumbing Contractor. All work and materials shall be installed in such a manner and at
such time to keep cutting and patching to a minimum.
B. Cutting of openings larger than those that can be drilled will be performed by the General
Contractor.
C. Patching of all holes, after installation of piping or equipment, will be performed by the
General Contractor.
3.5 INSULATION
A. Insulation shall be applied by an independent Insulation Contractor regularly engaged in
that business.
B. Insulation shall not be omitted on piping in walls. Covering shall be applied before
masonry proceeds.
C. Insulation shall be applied over clean pipe with all joints butted firmly together and sealed.
3.6 SLEEVES AND ESCUTCHEONS
Project No. 00058 15400 Plumbing-17
Renovations to Parsons Annex
Smith College
Northampton, Massachusetts
shall
be responsible for delivering and/or properly disposing of all obsolete equipment to such
places as designated by the Owner.
PART 3 -EX1=Ci JTION
3.1 SOIL,WASTE,DRAIN AND VENT PIPING
A. Installation:
1. Drainage and Vent Pipes: Horizontal soil,rain leaders and waste pipes shall have a
minimum grade of 1/4" per foot for piping 3" and less and 1/8" per foot for piping .•
larger than 3". Horizontal waste lines receiving the discharge from two or more
fixtures shall be provided with end vents unless separate venting of fixtures is
noted.
2. Fittings: Changes in pipe size on soil, waste, and drain lines shall be made with
reducing fittings. Changes in direction shall be made by the appropriate use of 45°
wyes, long or short sweep 1/4 bends, 1/6, 1/8, or 1/16 bends, or by a combination
of those or equivalent fittings. Single and double sanitary tees and 1/4 bends may
be used in drainage lines only where the direction of flow is from horizontal to
vertical.
3. Union Connections: Slip joints will be permitted only in trap seals or on the inlet
side of the traps. Use of bushings will not be permitted.
B. Joints: Installation of pipe and fittings shall be made in accordance with the manufacturer's
recommendations. Mitering of joints for elbows and notching of straight runs of pipe for
tees will not be permitted. Threaded joints shall have American National taper pipe threads
conforming to National Bureau of Standards Handbook H28, with graphite or inert filler
and oil, with an approved graphite compound, or with polytetrafluorethylene tape applied
to the male threads.
3.2 INSTALLATION OF SEWER PIPE .•
A. Bedding for the pipe shall provide full and stable support, with recesses excavated for pipe
bells. All pipe shall be laid to the specified line and grade, with a firm bearing throughout
each length and with the bell ends uphill.
B. Pipe Joints: The flexible water tight rubber gaskets shall be installed in accordance with
the directions of the manufacturer.
C. Plastic Pipe: Install plastic piping in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. At
minimum, envelope all PVC pipe in 6" of screened gravel. Clear interior of conduit of dirt
and debris as work progresses. Maintain swab or drag in line and pull past each joint as it
is completed.
Project No. 00058 15400 Plumbing-16 ,.,
Renovations to Parsons Annex
"M Smith College
Northampton,Massachusetts
flow and drain functions, loose tee key to be furnished with each hydrant. NO
substitutions shall he made_
N. Hose Bibb(P-9)
1. Woodford Model No. 24P,with vacuum breaker and loose key.
O. Floor Drain(P-10)
1. Wade Model No. 1100 w/FC7 Strainer.
P. Floor Drain(P-lOA)
1. Mechanical room floor drains to be Zurn 415 with type`B"strainer.
Q. Laundry Tub(P-11)
A.
1. Basin-Fiat Model L-2 single tub with base unit.
w 2. Faucet-Chicago Model 895-317, 8"center with E-12 aerator.
3. Trim-Fiat Model 327A strainer and tail piece.
2.14 WATER HEATER SYSTEM(Haven House)
A. Existing electric water heater with storage tank, consisting of one (1) Bradford White
generators,shall remain and be re-piped to new Viessman Tanks.
B. Furnish and install circulation pump CP-2 to deliver 45 GPM min. at 20 ft. head, with '/2
a' HP,208 volt motor,Taco pump and relocate flow switch.
C. Furnish and install thermal expansion absorber, as manufactured by Amtrol Model AST-
us 180, with 36 gallon acceptance volume, 77 gallon tank volume, ASME tank pre-charge
tank with butyl-diaphragm liner,FOA approved.
D. Indirect Steam-Fired Storage Water Heaters: Furnish and install four (1) Viessmann
Horicell-HG 450-120 gallon indirect fired storage water heaters. New water heater shall
have a steam heat exchange capable of delivering 125 gph at 100° F. temperature
difference.
E. Plumbing Subcontractor shall be responsible to provide an angle iron support frame to
support heater(4 in. by 4 in. by 3/8 in. angle iron)min. of 36 in. high. Actual height to be
coordinated with Heating Contractor to allow proper installation of steam traps.
2.15 DEMOLITION
A. Removal of all obsolete fixtures, drains, piping, etc., not to be re-used shall be removed by
this Contractor and shall become the property of the Owner. The Plumbing Contractor
Project No.00058 15400 Plumbing-15
Renovations to Parsons Annex
Smith College
Northampton, Massachusetts
and volume control and adjustable stop screw to limit handle turn. Consisting of
tub spout and Clear-Flo shower head with arm and flange, wall/hand shower with
flexible metal hose and 30"slide bar.
3. Fittings—Gerber Model No. 41-812 waste and overflow.
I. Shower Stall&Drying Stall
1. Shower Stall — Aquarius Model No. B3672SPF double compartment shower
receptor with two (2) drains set in place and flashed by the General Contractor.
Shower doors shall be Universal-Rundal Model No. "Tritons"No. 9645 complete
with '/4" thick laminated white glass and full length S/S hinge. This Contractor
shall be responsible to install shower drains and perform all piping. Note: This
contractor shall protect shower basins throughout the course of construction and ..
shall be responsible for all, or any,damage to showers.
2. Shower Valve — Symmons Safetymix Shower System Model 1-100-X, pressure-
balancing mixing valve with lever handle and adjustable screw stop to limit handle
turn. Consisting of Valve 4-500, Super shower head with Nu-Arm head bracket
No.4-131-M-301.
J. Mop Receptor(P-5)
1. Basin-Fiat No. 2424 molded stone,24"x 24" x 10" high mop basin.
2. Faucet — Chicago Faucet Model 540-LD-897S-WXF, 8" centers, with vacuum
breaker spout, 369 handles, WXF non-adjustable inlet centers, polished chrome
plate only,ADA compliant.
3. Trim - Fiat No. 87A drain, No. 889CC mop hanger, No. 832AA hose and
bracket, and No. 1453-BB strainer.
K. Single bowl sink(P-6)
1. Sink to be Elkay Model LR 2219 with Delta Model No. 2476 faucet with spray
and Aqua Pure Model No.AP-DWS1000 water filter.
L. Washing Machine Connection(P-7)
1. Symmons Laundry-Mate No. W-602-X supply and drain unit with ''/2" supplies and
2"drain with integral stops and recessed wall plate.
M. Wall Hydrant(P-8)
1. Woodford Model B65 Series concealed type, automatic draining with anti-siphon
vacuum breaker, 3/4" hose thread nozzle, one piece valve plunger to control both
Project No. 00058 15400 Plumbing-14 ,�
Renovations to Parsons Annex
Smith College
Northampton,Massachusetts
3. Seat - Church Model 9400KNSSC white solid plastic, extra heavy, open front
seat, less over, with self-sustaining hinge.
E. Water Closet(P-1B)
1. Closet — American Standard "Neolo" Model 2529.016, wall outlet elongated
vitreous china, siphon jet action with 1 '/2"top spud and 1.6 gallon flush.
2. Flush Valve-Sloan "Royal" 111-YO with 1" angle stop,vacuum breaker,wall and
spud flanges.
3. Seat - Church Model 9400KNSSC white solid plastic, extra heavy, open front
w seat, less over,with self-sustaining hinge.
F. Lavatory(P-2)
®. 1. Basin — laminated lavatories are to be furnished and installed by the General
Contractor. Furnish and Install the supply and waste piping and fittings.
2. Faucet—American Standard "Monterrey" Model 5500.140, 4" centers with lever
handles.
3. Fittings - Provide grid strainer and tailpiece, Brass Craft No. CS400A stops and
risers, Sanitary Dash No. R370-17 polished chrome-plated trap with cleanout plug.
G. Lavatory(P-2A)Handicapped
1. Basin — laminated lavatories are to be furnished and installed by the General
Contractor. Furnish and Install the supply and waste piping and fittings.
2. Supply Fitting- 5-60-G-H Symmons Scot metering faucet,4"center, self-closing
with temperature adjustment, temperature limit stops, time limit stop with flow,
blade handle and grid strainer, Brass Craft No. CS400A stops and risers.
3. Fittings — Provide chrome plated offset "P" trap with cleanout and tailpiece
offset with loose key stops, and insulate all drains and stops with "Truebro
Handi Lav-Guard"molded vinyl insulation.
H. Bath Tub/Shower(P-3)
1. Tub basin — American Standard "Americast" Princeton Model 2392.202 or
2393.202,recessed bath,white non-slip.
2. Control Valve — Symmons Temptrol Valve and Shower Head, Model No. 5-96-
600-B30-L-V, Pressure balancing mixing valve with combination integral diverter
�w
Project No. 00058 15400 Plumbing-13
Renovations to Parsons Annex
Smith College .�
Northampton,Massachusetts
masonry walls, plastered or gypsum wallboard walls or ceilings, shall be furnished by the
Plumbing Contractor and installed by tradesmen of wall or ceiling finish. Access panels in
plastered ceilings shall be Karp Type DSC-214 PL(12"x 12" min.); in walls, shall be Karp
type DSC-214M "Universal" (12" x 12"); for drywall ceilings, shall be Karp Sesame Slim
Trim Access Hatches,Type KSTDW/CAD(12"x 12" min.)with screwdriver type lock.
B. Access panels shall be Karp Associates, Inc., Inryco, Inc., Milcor Division, Birmingham
Ornamental Iron,or equal.
2.13 PLUMBING FIXTURES AND FIXTURE TRIMMINGS
A. General Requirements: Reference made herein to numbers of plumbing fixtures to
establish type and quality of materials. Angle stops, straight stops, stops integral with the
faucets, or concealed type of lock shield, loose key pattern stops for supplies shall be w.
furnished and installed with fixtures. Exposed traps and supply pipes for all fixtures and
equipment shall be chrome plated and connected to the rough piping systems at the wall.
Wall escutcheons shall be chromium plated or nickel plated brass with polished, bright
surfaces.
B. The Plumbing Contractor shall furnish all supports, brackets, bolts, etc. for proper
installation of all fixtures requiring support. They shall be in accordance with the
manufacturer's recommendations, and, if necessary, shall be built into place as the building
progresses. This Contractor shall be held responsible for the stability and proper support of Om
all plumbing fixtures.
C. Water Closet(P-1)
1. Closet—American Standard "Madera" Model 2234.015, elongated vitreous china,
siphon jet action with 1 '/2"top spud and 1.6 gallon flush.
2. Flush Valve- Sloan "Royal" 111-YO with 1" angle stop,vacuum breaker,wall and
spud flanges.
3. Seat - Church Model 9400KNSSC white solid plastic, extra heavy, open front
seat, less cover,with self-sustaining hinge.
4. Mounting to be floor mounted with bee's wax seal
D. Water Closet(P-IA)Handicapped „
1. Closet—American Standard "Madera" 171-1 Model 3043.102, elongated vitreous
china, siphon jet action with 1 '/2"top spud and 1.6 gallon flush.
2. Flush Valve - Sloan "Royal" 111-YO-ADA with 1" angle stop, vacuum breaker,
wall and spud flanges.
Project No. 00058 15400 Plumbing-12 ..,,
w
Renovations to Parsons Annex
Smith College
Northampton, Massachusetts
2.8 HOT WATER CIRCULATING PUMP
A. New recirculation pumps shall be as follows:
1. CP-1: Taco Model 007 Cartridge aquastat, operation to deliver 3 gpm at 10'-0"
head, 1/25 hp, 115 volt, 10.
2. CP-2: Taco Model 1612 Series in-line pump, operation to deliver 45 gpm at 20%
0"head, 1/2 hp,208 volt,30.
3. CP-3: Taco Model 007 Cartridge aquastat, operation to deliver 3 gpm at 10'-0"
head, 1/25 hp, 115 volt, 10.
B. This Contractor shall furnish and install pump aquastat for pump. Wiring of pump and
aquastat shall be by the Electrical Contractor.
C. Circulating pump shall be Taco Cartridge circulators. No substitutions will be allowed_
2.9 THERMOSTATIC MIXING VALVE ASSEMBLY
A. Furnish and install in Haven House one Leonard Valve Co.'s Model TM 186-8015-30TA-
PRV-RF-O Thermostatic Water Mixing Valve, inlet checkstops, outlet volume/shut-off
on valve, dial thermometer (range: 0 to 140 degrees F.), rough bronze finish, complete with
unions and interconnected copper piping, solid bi-metal corrosion resistant thermostat
element.
B. Unit shall be factory assembled, tested, and shall consist of a 1 '/4" main valve and a '/4"
min. flow valve. Unit is sized for 0 gpm.At a l01b. P.D,minimum flow 10 gpm.
C. No substitutions will he allowed.
D. See Drawings for size and model number for each building.
2.10 WATER METER
�w A. Existing water meter to remain.
2.11 WATER HAMMER ARRESTERS
A. Where indicated on the Drawings, furnish and install Precision Plumbing Products, Inc.
SC-Series type shock absorbers, sizes as shown on Drawings, or as required. No
substitutions will he allowed_
2.12 ACCESS PANELS
A. Access panel doors for all concealed inaccessible valves, balancing fittings, or cleanouts in
„u Project No. 00058 15400 Plumbing-11
Renovations to Parsons Annex
Smith College ..
Northampton, Massachusetts
A. Where cleanouts occur in finished floors throughout the building, they shall be Zurn
ZN-1405-2,nickel-bronze for concrete finish floor;Zurn ZN-1405-7 nickel-bronze recessed
for resilient floors;Zurn ZN-1405-7 for ceramic tile floors;ZN-1405-14 for carpeted floors;
or equal by J.R. Smith or Wade.
2.5 INSULATION
A. All water piping shall be insulated with Armaflex closed cell pipe insulation with self-
sealing lap, 1"thick for hot water,and return hot water 1/2"thick for cold water. Insulation
shall be one piece snap-on type. All exposed piping within 10'-0" of finished floor shall be
insulated as noted above and shall be fully jacketed with a PVC cover.
B. Fittings shall be insulated with mitered cut insulation applied over fittings with joints taped.
Cold water piping shall also have mastic applied to all overlapping surfaces to form a
vapor barrier.
C. Insulation and fitting jackets shall be installed according to the manufacturer's
recommendations. Any gaps or fishmouths shall be remade.
D. Install a twelve (12") inch length of wood blocking at each hanger; insulation shall run
continuous through the hanger. Jacket shall match adjacent insulation jacket.
E. All exposed drain and water piping at handicapped lavatories shall be insulated with
Truebro "Nandi Lav-Guard", or equal,molded insulation kit.
2.6 THERMOMETERS
A. Thermometers shall be Jay, Moeller, Palmer, Taylor, Trerice, or Weiss, equal to Trerice
80700 with aluminum case, industrial glass, dial type, 4-1/2" diameter, 2°F subdivisions.
Stem length shall be sufficient to assure accurate and fast response,but in no case less than ""
3-1/2" nor less than one-third of pipe diameter in which installed. Each thermometer shall
be provided with a brass, monel, or stainless steel separable socket of matching length, and
with lagging extensions when installed in insulated pipe. Thermometers shall be adjustable
angle type, positioned as required to be easily seen and read from normal operator's
position.
B. Ranges shall be manufacturer's standard closest to the following:
1. Hot water: 30T- 180T. .,.
C. Provide at inlet and outlet hot water heater and at mixing valve.
2.7 PRESSURE GAUGES
A. 4-1/2" dial, double-spring with soft copper tubing loop and pet cock. Operating range shall
be in the center of the scale. To be U.S. Gage Co.,or approved equal. .�
B. Provide at water entrance,on both sides of pressure reducing valve.
Project No. 00058 15400 Plumbing-10
40
Renovations to Parsons Annex
w Smith College
Northampton, Massachusetts
2. Balancing valves shall be Tour&Anderson.
E. Check Valves
1. Check valves shall be furnished and installed where indicated on the Drawings.
Checks up to 2" shall be Class 125. Solder ends, body and caps shall be ASTM
B62 cast bronze composition, swing type disc, Stockham Figure B-309.
w
2. Check valves 2-1/2" and larger shall be iron body, bronze mounted with body and
cap conforming to ASTM A126, Class B cast iron, flanged, swing type disc,
Stockham Figure G-931.
3. Check valves shall be as manufactured by Stockham, Jenkins, Lunkenheimer, or
equal.
F. Vacuum relief valves shall be Watts Model 36A-3/4".
G. Globe valves shall be as manufactured by Hammond IB-418 or I13-440.
H. Pressure Reducing Valves
1. Pressure reducing valves (PRV) shall be as manufactured by Watts Regulator Co.,
Model U5B-GG 1 ''/2" set to provide 50 psi to building with thermal bypass. Watts
Regulator Co. Model U58B-GG 3/4" with thermal bypass in parallel. No substitu-
tions shall he allowed.
2. Furnish and install, where indicated on the Drawings, Ametek/U.S. Gauge Co.'s
Figure P500,2"diameter,0 lb.to 100 lbs.
2.3 HANGERS
A. Hangers shall be as manufactured by Grinnell Company, Carpenter & Paterson, Fee &
?�w Mason,or equal.
B. For cast iron pipe - Grinnell Fig. 260, one to each length of cast iron pipe; at twelve foot
(12) intervals for threaded piping.
C. For hot, cold, and return water piping- Grinnell Fig. 70 at six foot(6) intervals for copper
w tubing 1-1/4" or less;ten foot(10') intervals for piping at 1-1/2" and larger. Install Fig. 167
insulation shield between hanger and insulation. Hangers to be installed outside the insula-
tion. Hangers for gas piping shall be installed at eight foot(8')intervals.
D. Hangers or supports shall be placed within one foot(1') of each horizontal elbow. Vertical
runs of pipe not over five feet (5') in length shall be supported on hangers placed not over
1/2" from the elbow on the connecting horizontal run.
2.4 CLEANOUTS
Project No. 00058 15400 Plumbing-9
Renovations to Parsons Annex
Smith College
Northampton, Massachusetts
"Clamp-All". No substitutions will he allowed_ All soil, waste, and vent below slab shall
be service weight, cast iron pipe with oakum and lead, sealed gas and watertight. In lieu of
lead and oakum joint piping,below slab may be service weight with push-on rubber rings.
B. In lieu of cast iron piping, pipe sizes 3" and smaller shall be Type "L" copper pipe with
solder fittings.
C. All waste lines 2" and smaller shall be Type "L" copper. All vent lines 2"and smaller shall
be type "M"copper.
D. All hot, cold and re-circulating hot water piping within the building shall be hard copper
Type "L" seamless draw tubing, assembled with sweat fittings. All solders used shall be
lead free, cadmium free, "Silberbrite-100", or equal, complying with the latest issue of
ANSI A-5.8 publications. All exposed runs to all toilet fixtures and sinks shall be chrome
plated.
2.2 BALL VALVES
A. On water lines inside the building, ball valves shall be as manufactured by Watts Series
B6001. No substitutions will he allowed_ Valves shall be provided with stainless steel ball,
reinforced teflon seats and seals, bronze body, 400 psi wog, positive 100% shut-off. All
valves to be furnished with valve handle extension sized to match pipe insulation thickness.
B. Drain valves at all low points shall be 1/2" or 3/4" solder by 3/4" hose end with attached
cap and chain.
C. Gate Valves:
1. Where indicated on the Drawings, all gate valves 4" and larger, shall be Class 125
iron body bronze mounted with body and bonnet conforming to 200 psi wog non-
shock cast iron, flanged ends, with Teflon packing, two-piece packing gland
assembly,Hammond Figure 1R1138, Stockman,or equal.
2. Valves 3" and smaller where indicated on the Drawings shall be Class 125. Body
and bonnets shall be of ASTM B62 cast bronze composition, solid disc, copper .•►
silicone alloy stem,brass packing gland,Teflon packing,and malleable handwheel,
solder end, Stockham Figure B-104,Hammond 1R1138, or equal.
3. Valves shall be as manufactured by Stockham, Hammond, American Valve, or
equal.
D. Balancing Valves:
1. Where indicated on the Drawings, furnish and install balance circuit setter, with
calibrated scale, with bronze body and disc and connections for differential
pressure meter.
Project No. 00058 15400 Plumbing-8 ..
Renovations to Parsons Annex
Smith College
Northampton,Massachusetts
2. Description of start-up, operation,and shutdown.
' 3. Schedule of adjustment,care,and routine maintenance for each item of equipment.
4. Lubrication chart.
5. Wiring and control diagrams with data to explain detailed operation and control of
each item of equipment.
6. Valve chart.
7. List of recommended spare parts.
8. Copies of all service contracts.
9. Performance curves for pumps,etc.
10. List of all names, addresses, and phone numbers of all Subcontractors as well as
±+ the local representative for each item of equipment.
1.17 GUARANTEE
A. The Plumbing Contractor shall guarantee the satisfactory operation of his work in all parts
for a period of one (1) year after the date of final acceptance, and shall agree to promptly
repair or replace any items of his work which are found to be defective during this period.
B. The Plumbing Contractor shall pay for repair of damage to the building caused by defects
in his work and for repair to plaster, wood, and other materials or equipment caused by
replacement or repairs to the entire satisfaction of the Architect.
C. Any part of the work installed under this Contract requiring excessive maintenance shall be
considered as being defective.
1.18 ALTERNATES
A. See Section 01030 for a general description of the Base and Alternate Bids. Work of the
Plumbing Subcontractor is more specifically described below.
B. The Base Bid shall be the lump sum price for all labor and materials necessary for and
reasonably incidental to providing all fire Protection work specified and shown on the
go Drawings,less the cost of all extra work described in the Alternates.
C. Refer to section 01230 alternates, and the following schedule, and all contract Drawings.
for a description of alternatives.
1.19 RECORD DRAWINGS
A. Submit Record Drawings as specified in Project Closeout, Section 01700.
PART 2-PRODI JOTS
2.1 PIPING MATERIALS
A. All soil, waste, and vent piping in accessible areas 2-1/2" and larger, shall be cast iron "no
hub", ASA Group 022 pipe and fittings,joined with cast iron clamps as manufactured by
Project No. 00058 15400 Plumbing-7
Renovations to Parsons Annex
Smith College ..
Northampton,Massachusetts
B. All holes larger than 4" in diameter shall be provided by the General Contractor.
C. Work shall include furnishing and locating sleeves or inserts required before the new walls
are built, or be responsible for the cost of cutting and patching required for pipes where
sleeves were not installed or where incorrectly located. The Plumbing Contractor shall do
all drilling required for the installation of hangers.
D. Patching of all holes, after installation of piping or equipment, shall be performed by the
General Contractor or appropriate tradesmen.
E. All pipe cutting or threading shall be done in a location approved by the Owner.
F. No pipe cutting or threading shall be done in areas where completed concrete floor slab is
to remain in finishes or be painted later. Should this area be necessary, the Plumbing
Contractor shall cover the entire working area with canvas tarpaulins in an approved
manner.
1.15 WORK CONCEALED
A. All piping, hangers and supports shall be installed concealed in all areas except storage
rooms,closets, and mechanical or electrical equipment rooms.
B. Piping containing water shall not be installed concealed in walls having an exterior
exposure above grade, unless specifically so shown on the Drawings. When pipes are
indicated to be installed in exterior walls, the Plumbing Contractor shall be responsible for
ensuring that wall and pipe insulation is properly installed to protect them from freezing.
1.16 OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS
A. After all final tests and adjustments have been completed, fully instruct the proper Owner's
representative in all details of operation of equipment installed. Supply qualified personnel
to operate equipment for sufficient length of time to assure that Owner's representative is *�^
properly qualified to take over operation and maintenance procedures. This Subcontractor
shall video tape the instruction procedures an deliver two (2) copies of the tape with the
Operation and Maintenance Manuals.
B. Furnish the Architect, for his approval, three (3) copies of an Operation and Maintenance
Manual. Inscribe the following identification on the cover: the words, "Operation and
Maintenance Manual",the name and location of the equipment or the building,the name of
the Subcontractor, and the Contract number. The manual shall have a Table of Contents
with tab sheets placed before each section. The instructions shall be legible and easily
read,with large sheets of drawings folded in. the manuals shall be bound in hard binders or
an approved equivalent.
C. The Manual shall include the following information:
1. Description of systems.
Project No. 00058 15400 Plumbing-6 ..,,
Renovations to Parsons Annex
Smith College
Northampton, Massachusetts
1.11 DELIVERY, STORAGE,AND HANDLING
A. Delivery: The Plumbing subcontractor shall provide for the delivery of all his materials
NO and fixtures to the building site when required so as to carry on his work efficiently and to
avoid delaying his work and that of other trades. All delivery and storage must he co-
ordianted with the Smith College Physical Plant Department y The Plumbing Contractor
shall take delivery of all pre-purchased plumbing fixtures and equipment, and shall be
responsible for the proper handling, storage, and protection of these materials from that
point on. Any damage or loss of these materials after delivery shall be the responsibility of
+■. this Contractor.
B. Storage and Handling: The Plumbing Contractor shall, at all times, fully protect his work
on and materials from injury or loss by others. Any injury or loss which may occur shall be
made good without expense to the Owner. The Plumbing Contractor shall be responsible
for the proper protection of all his materials until the building is accepted by the Owner.
,w.
1.12 ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS
A. All necessary tools machinery, scaffolding, and transportation for completion of his
Contract shall be provided by the Plumbing Contractor.
B. The Plumbing Contractor shall provide his own portable extension lines and obtain 120
volt, 60 cycle, single phase electric energy from the General Contractor to drive his
machines and light his work. He shall provide his own light bulbs,plugs, sockets,etc.
No
C. All broken or waste material, rags, packing, etc., resulting from his work shall be removed
by the Plumbing Contractor.
1.13 PROTECTION
A. The Plumbing Contractor shall, at all times, fully protect his work and materials from
injury or loss by others. Any injury or loss which may occur shall be made good without
expense to the Owner. The Plumbing Contractor shall be responsible for the proper
protection of all his materials until the building is accepted by the Owner.
1.14 CUTTING AND PATCHING
A. Cutting and/or drilling of all openings and holes 4" in diameter or smaller, required for the
installation of plumbing in the building, shall be performed by the Plumbing Contractor.
All work and materials shall be installed in such a manner and at such time to keep cutting
and patching to a minimum. Cutting and/or drilling of structural supports (ie. beams or
joists) is not allowed without written approval by the Architect. Location for openings,etc.
shall be checked by the Plumbing Contractor, and error due to failure to co-ordinate work
with other divisions shall be the responsibility of the Plumbing Contractor failing to co-
ordinate,who shall make the corrections at his own expense.
ma Project No. 00058 15400 Plumbing-5
Renovations to Parsons Annex
Smith College
Northampton,Massachusetts
B. The Plumbing Contractor shall check the Shop Drawings thoroughly for compliance with
the Plans and Specifications before submitting them to the Architect for review, making
any and all changes which may be required.
C. The review of Shop Drawings by the Architect shall not relieve the Plumbing Contractor
from any obligation to perform the work strictly in accordance with the Contract Drawings
and Specifications. The responsibility for errors in Shop Drawings shall remain with the
Plumbing Contractor.
D. In the event that materials are being delivered to or installed on the job for which Shop !
Drawings or samples have not been approved and/or which are not in accordance with the
Specifications,the Plumbing Contractor will be required to remove such materials and sub-
stitute approved materials at his own expense and as directed by the Architect.
1.8 PERMITS,FEES AND INSPECTIONS
A. The Plumbing Contractor shall secure all permits and pay all fees required for his work. He
shall be required to secure all other permits and pay all other fees and charges incidental to
the proper carrying out of the Contract. He is to assume all responsibility regarding the
observance of the rules and regulations so far as they relate to his part of the work.
B. The Plumbing Contractor shall arrange and pay for all required inspections of his work.
1.9 TEMPORARY HOOK-UPS
A. The General Contractor will provide any temporary hook-ups required for the use of water
or sanitary for construction purposes and testing out apparatus as specified in Section
01500.
1.10 PLANS AND SPECIFICATIONS
A. The Plumbing Contractor shall refer to the Architectural Drawings of interior details,plans,
elevations, and structural layout in preparing his estimate. These documents are intended
to supplement the Mechanical and Electrical Plans and Specifications and any applicable
work indicated or implied thereon is to be considered a part of the Contract requirements.
B. The Specifications complementary and anything called for, or reasonably implied, in the
Plans and not in the Specifications, or vice versa, shall be considered as called for or w,
reasonably implied in both.
C. The Plumbing Contractor shall not scale the Drawings.
D. Because of the small scale of the Drawings, it is not possible to indicate all offsets, fittings
and accessories that may be required. The Plumbing Contractor shall carefully investigate
the structural and finish conditions affecting all his work and shall arrange such work
accordingly, furnishing such fittings, traps, offsets, valves, and accessories as may be
required to meet such conditions,at no additional cost.
Project No. 00058 15400 Plumbing-4 ,,,�
Renovations to Parsons Annex
Smith College
Northampton, Massachusetts
E. The arrangement of all piping, duct work, conduit, wire and cable indicated on the
W, Drawings is diagrammatic only, and indicates the minimum requirements of this work.
Conditions at the building shall determine the actual arrangement of runs, bends, offsets,
etc. The Plumbing Contractor shall lay out all his work and be responsible for the accuracy
thereof. Conditions at the building shall be the determining factor for all measurements.
F. All work shall be laid out and installed so as to require the least amount of cutting and
patching. Drilling of all holes required for the installation of pipes, conduit, and cable runs
shall be performed by the Subcontractor installing such items.
G. The Plumbing Contractor shall be responsible for the proper protection of his work and
materials from injury or loss at the hands of others and shall make good such loss or injury
at his own expense. All pipes left open during the progress of the work shall be capped or
plugged at all times. All instruments and operating apparatus shall be protected by suitable
means.
H. The Plumbing Contractor shall be responsible for all equipment and materials installed
under this Section until the final acceptance of the project by the Owner.
I. The Plumbing Contractor shall check all of the Architectural Plans and Specifications
' before ordering any materials and the installation of work. Any discrepancies shall be
called to the attention of the Architect before proceeding with the work.
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Equality of materials or articles other than those named or described in this Section will be
? determined in accordance with the provisions of the General Requirements, except that
substitutions will only be considered for items where the words, "or equal" appear in the
product specification,and as approved by the Architect and Owner.
B. The Plumbing Contractor shall agree to accept as final the results of tests secured by a
qualified testing laboratory engaged by the Owner. Tests will be conducted in accordance
40 with the General Requirements.
1.6 PRODUCTS
A. With the exception of items specifically noted otherwise, all materials used shall be U.S.
made, new, full weight, and first class in every respect, without defects, and designed to
function properly in that portion of the work for which they are intended,and with the same
brand of manufacturer for each class of material or equipment. Electrical materials and
equipment of types for which there are Underwriters Laboratories standard requirements,
listings,or labels shall conform to their requirements and be so labeled.
1.7 SUBMITTALS
A. Before ordering materials shipped to the job, the Plumbing Contractor shall submit to the
Architect six (6) sets of catalogue cuts, manufacturers' data sheets, or Shop Drawings,
giving all details, dimensions,capacities,etc.of all materials to be furnished.
Project No. 00058 15400 Plumbing-3
Renovations to Parsons Annex
Smith College
Northampton,Massachusetts
designated by the Owner. Removal from the site of all obsolete material after the
Owner's review shall be by this Contractor.
B. Refer to appropriate Division-2 Sections for trenching and backfill required in conjunction
with plumbing piping;not work of this Section.
1.3 CODES, ORDINANCES AND INSPECTIONS
A. All materials and the installation thereof shall conform to the requirements of the
Massachusetts State Building Code, Electrical Code, Fuel Gas and Plumbing Code and
local laws, rules, regulations, and codes pertaining thereto. Where provisions of the
Contract Documents conflict with any codes, rules or regulations, the latter shall govern.
Where the Contract requirements are in excess of applicable codes,rules or regulations,the
Contract provisions shall govern unless the Architect rules otherwise.
B. The Plumbing Contractor shall comply with the Local Code Enforcement Officials'
instructions at no additional cost to the Owner.
1.4 INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS
A. The Plumbing Contractor shall employ only competent and experienced workmen at a
regular schedule in harmony with the other tradesmen on the job. He shall also exercise
care and supervision of his employees in regard to proper and expeditious laying out of his
work.
B. The Plumbing Contractor shall have a Foreman or Superintendent assigned to the Project
who shall be authorized to make decisions and receive instructions exactly as if the
Plumbing Contractor himself were present. The Foreman or Superintendent shall not be
removed or replaced without the express approval of the Architect after construction work
begins.
C. The Plumbing Contractor shall be held responsible for any injuries or damage done to the
building premises or adjoining property or to other Subcontractors'work resulting from the
execution of his part of the work in any manner whatsoever; and in case of dispute arising
as to the extent or share of responsibility incurred by the Plumbing Contractor, it is agreed
between the Owner and the Plumbing Contractor that such liability and extent of damage
shall be finally determined by the Architect whose decision shall be final and binding on
both parties to the Contract for the work in question.
D. The Plumbing Contractor shall co-ordinate to the fullest extent with all other trades in order
to expedite the progress of the work. He shall furnish all information pertaining to his
materials as to sizes, locations, and means of support, to all other trades requiring such ..
information. The Plumbing Contractor shall also furnish all sleeves, frames, beams,
supports, inserts, etc., hereinafter specified so that the General Contractor may build them
in place. In case of failure on the part of the Plumbing Contractor to give proper
information as above, he will be required to bear the extra expense involved due to such '
failure.
Project No. 00058 15400 Plumbing-2 ,..
40
Renovations to Parsons Annex
on Smith College
Northampton,Massachusetts
SECTION 15400-PLUMBING
PART 1 -GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Include General Conditions, Supplementary General Conditions, and applicable parts of
Division 1,as part of this Section.
B. Examine all other Sections of the Specifications for requirements,which affect work under
this Section whether or not such work is specifically mentioned in this Section.
C. Co-ordinate work with that of all other trades affecting, or affected by the work of this
Section. Co-operate with such trades to assure steady progress of all work under the
Contract.
1.2 SCOPE OF WORK
A. Furnish all labor, materials, plant, equipment and services necessary for and reasonably
incidental to the complete installation of all plumbing work specified herein and/or
indicated on the Drawings, including,but not limited to,the following:
1. Water service entrance with meter connecting to water supply line located in
' basement.
2. Sanitary waste and venting systems inside the building, connecting to drainage
systems within the building or on the site. Furnish piping, traps, flanges, seals,
cleanouts, fixtures, drains, supports,and roof terminals.
3. Water service and sanitary sewer connecting to existing lines within the building or
on site. Provide valve, boxes, fittings and all required components for a complete
installation.
4. Hot, cold and return hot water distribution systems. Furnish piping, fittings,
insulation,supports,valves,water heater,and pump.
5. Plumbing fixtures and supports.
6. Arrange for inspections and perform cleaning and testing.
7. All final connections to all items of equipment furnished by others requiring water,
gas,drain,and waste connections.
8. The disconnecting and removal of all existing piping systems, fixtures, and
equipment interfering with, or made obsolete by, new construction. All piping,
fixtures, and equipment (i.e. co pp er and brass piping, fittings and valves flush
valves, mixing valves, water heaters and pumps, heat exchangers, and controls) to
be removed is the property of the Owner and shall be delivered to such places
Project No. 00058 15400 Plumbing-1
Renovations to Parsons Annex *■
Smith College
Northampton, Massachusetts
2. Fire safing at all penetrations through smoke barriers.
3. Extent of fire and smoke barriers as indicated on the Architectural Drawings.
4. Fire safing at all penetrations through floors, shafts, corridor walls, stairway walls,
mechanical rooms,electrical rooms,vaults, storage rooms,kitchen,machine rooms,outdoor
storage rooms,and receiving rooms.
B. Safmg Insulation
wr
1. Fire safing insulation shall be Thennafiber as manufactured by USG Interiors, Inc., or
Architect-Engineer approved equal, 4" minimum thickness by the required full length and
width,or as indicated on the Drawings.
2. Provide incidental galvanized steel clip anchors.
C. Seal Compound: At"poke-through" openings, apply"Firecode" seal compound as manufactured by
USG Interiors,Inc.,or approved equal,over Thermafiber fire safmg.
D. Preparation
1. At all fire rated assemblies,prepare all penetrations for pipes.
E. Application
1. Install approved fire safing insulation of proper size, leaving no voids. Compress and
friction fit fire safmg and use attachment clips where necessary.
2. Seal completely around all openings and over the fire safing insulation with sealing
compound.
END OF SECTION
Project No. 00058 15300 Fire Protection-26
Renovations to Parsons Annex
Smith College
Northampton,Massachusetts
J. Threaded Joints: Conform to ANSI 131.20.1, tapered pipe threads for field cut threads.
Join pipe, fittings, and valves as follows.
K. Flanged Joints: Align flanged surfaces parallel. Assemble joints by sequencing bolt
tightening to make initial contact of flanges and gaskets as flat and parallel as possible.
Use suitable lubricants on bolt threads. Tighten bolts gradually and uniformly to
appropriate torque specified by the bolt manufacturer.
L. Mechanical Grooved Joints: Cut or roll grooves on pipe ends dimensionally compatible
' with the couplings.
M. End Treatment:After cutting pipe lengths,remove burrs and fins from pipe ends.
3.4 VALVE INSTALLATIONS
A. General: Install fire protection specialty valves, fittings, and specialties in accordance
with the manufacturer's written instructions,NFPA 13 and 14, and the authority having
jurisdiction.
B. Gate Valves: Install supervised open gate valves so located to control all sources of
water supply except fire department connections. Where there is more than one control
valve, provide permanently marked identification signs indicating the portion of the
system controlled by each valve.
C. Alarm Check Valves: Install valves in the vertical position in proper direction of flow
including the bypass check valve and retard chamber drain line connection.
Install valve trim in accordance with the valve manufacturer's appropriate trim diagram.
Test valve for proper operation.
3.5 FINAL CLOSEOUT
A. Identification: Apply signs to control, drain, test, and alarm valves identifying there
purpose and function. Provide lettering size and style selected by Architect/Engineer
from NFPA's suggested styles.
B. Adjustments: Place the system in operation with controls functioning. Adjust controls
and apparatus for proper operation. Test thermometers and gauges for accuracy over
the entire range. Remove and replace items found defective.
3.06 FIRE SAFING
A. Work Included: Provide labor, materials, and equipment necessary to complete the work including,
but not limited to,the following:
1. Fire safing at all penetrations through fire barriers.
Project No. 00058 15300 Fire Protection-25
WM
Renovations to Parsons Annex *�
Smith College
Northampton, Massachusetts
E. Application
1. Install approved fire safing insulation of proper size leaving no voids.
Compress and friction fit fire safing and use attachment clips where necessary.
2. Seal completely around all openings and over the fire safing insulation with
sealing compound.
3. Install fire safing around all pipe penetrations and sleeves passing through fire
walls, ceilings, floors,etc.
3.3 INTERIOR PIPING INSTALLATION nil
A. Install sprinkler piping to provide for system drainage in accordance with NFPA 13.
B. Use approved fittings to make all changes in direction,branch takeoffs from mains, and
reductions in pipe sizes.
C. Install unions in pipes 2" and smaller adjacent to each valve. Unions are not required
on flanged devices or in piping installations using grooved mechanical couplings.
D. Install flanges or flange adapters on valves, apparatus, and equipment having 2-1/2 and �.
larger connections.
E. Hangers and Supports: Comply with the requirements of NFPA 13 and NFPA 14.
Hanger and support spacing and locations for piping joined with grooved mechanical
couplings shall be in accordance with the grooved mechanical coupling manufacturer's
written instructions for rigid systems. .�
F. Make connections between underground and above ground piping using an approved
transition piece strapped or fastened to prevent separation.
G. Install sleeve at pipe penetrations in basement and foundation walls. Refer to Division
15 Section, "Basic Materials and Methods".
H. Install test connections sized and located in accordance with NFPA 13 complete with
shutoff valve. Test connections may also serve as drain pipes.
I. Install pressure gauge on the riser or feed main at or near each test connection. Provide
gauge with a connection not less than 1/4" and having a soft metal seated globe valve
arranged for draining pipe between gauge and valve. Install gauges to permit removal
and where they will not be subject to freezing.
Project No. 00058 15300 Fire Protection-24 �*
O
Renovations to Parsons Annex
Smith College
Northampton,Massachusetts
B. After flushing system,test fire sprinkler piping hydrostatically, for period of 2 hours,at
not less than 200 psi or at 50 psi in excess of maximum static pressure when maximum
static pressure is in excess of 150 psi. Check system for leakage of joints. Measure
hydrostatic pressure at low point of each system of zone being tested. Test dry-pipe
hydrostatically except, in freezing conditions, test with air at pressures not less than 50
psi, for period of 2 hours. Check system for leakage. Leave differential dry-valve
clappers open during test,to prevent damage.
C. Repair or replace piping system as required to eliminate leakage in accordance with
ANSI/NFPA standards for "little or no leakage", and retest as specified to demonstrate
compliance. Do not use chemicals, stop-leak compounds, mastics, or other temporary
repair methods.
3.2 FIRE SAFING
■. A. Work Included: Provide labor, materials, and equipment necessary to complete the
work including,but not limited to the following:
1. Fire safing at all penetrations through fire barriers, including all penetrations
through existing plaster ceiling for the installation of Attic sprinklers.
2. Fire safing at all penetrations through smoke barriers.
3. Extent of fire and smoke barriers as indicated on the Architectural Drawings.
4. Fire safing at all penetrations through floors, shafts, corridor walls, stairway
walls, mechanical rooms, electrical rooms, vaults, storage rooms, kitchen, and
machine rooms.
B. Safing Insulation
1. Fire safing insulation shall be Thermafiber as manufactured by USG Interiors,
Inc. or Architect-Engineer approved equal, 4" minimum thickness by the
required full length and width,or as indicated on the Drawings.
2. Provide incidental galvanized steel clip anchors.
C. Seal Compound: At "poke-through" openings, apply "Firecode" seal compound as
manufactured by USG Interiors,Inc.,or approved equal,over Thermafiber fire safing.
D. Preparation
*� 1. At all fire rated assemblies,prepare all penetrations for pipes and perimeters.
Project No. 00058 15300 Fire Protection-23
Renovations to Parsons Annex
Smith College
Northampton, Massachusetts
1. Flush mounted Fire Department pumper connection shall be wall
mounted cast brass body, dual drop clappers, brass plugs with chains,
all with rough chrome-plated finish and lettering on escutcheon
reading, "Automatic Sprinkler", equal to Potter-Roemer. Hose
connection sizes and threads shall match Northampton Fire Department
standards.
M. Automatic ball drips, as manufactured by Potter-Roemer shall be Fig. .�
5982, size 3/4", of straight design in case brass. Install in horizontal
position only.
n. Swing Check valve shall be equal to Central, Model "80" with tapping
for automatic ball drip, size as required.
o. Double check valve assembly w/metered bypass as noted on plans, to
be furnished and installed by the Sprinkler Subcontractor, DEP
approved for backflow prevention, Watts Model 709DDC. Provide test
kits Model TK-7-BFP, and two repair kits.
p. Swing check valve shall be equal to Central, Model "80" with tapping
for automatic ball drip size as required.
q. Gamewell dry pipe kit shall include all necessary equipment as shown
in Gamewell Bulletin 6010, typical piping diagram for dry pipe
watchman's kit, Model No. M2700-13. Shall include S-1, S-2, S-3
switches, air maintenance compressor, and supervisory panel, Model
M2011-14.
r. System fill compressor shall be equal to Ingersoll-Rand—3/4 HP, 208V,
3 phase N ith 100 gallon receiver. �.
PART 3 -EXECUTION
3.1 CLEANING AND TESTING
A. Prior to connecting sprinkler risers for flushing, flush water feed mains, lead-in
connections and control portions of sprinkler piping. After fire sprinkler-piping instal-
lation has been completed and before piping is placed in service, flush entire sprinkler
system, as required to remove foreign substances, under pressure as specified in
ANSI/NFPA 13. Continue flushing until water is clear, and check to ensure that debris
has not clogged sprinklers. we
Project No. 00058 15300 Fire Protection-22
M
on Renovations to Parsons Annex
Smith College
Northampton,Massachusetts
1. Provide fire protection specialties, UL listed, in accordance with the following
listing. Provide sizes and types, which mate and match piping and equipment
connections.
a. Upright sprinkler heads shall be Viking Corp., Model "M" standard
upright sprinkler head, rough brass. Temperature rating 165°F or as re-
quired by the insurance underwriter.
b. Semi-recessed dry pendant sprinkler heads shall be Viking Model "M"
chrome plated head with Type "F-1" recessed escutcheon, rated at
165°F unless otherwise noted;to be installed in all occupied spaces.
C. Spare sprinklers shall be provided in one 12-head cabinet equal to
Viking, Model A-1 cabinet. Each cabinet shall have an assortment of
heads as used on the job and also an approved type sprinkler head
wrench; mount cabinet in alarm check valve area.
W d. Head guards shall be equal to Central Model 1 for upright sprinklers in
areas specified on drawings.
e. Drain and test connections shall be equal to AGF Model 1000 with
sight glass,and test orifice.
f. Horizontal sidewall sprinkler heads shall be Star Model "E" with
white finish,temperature 165°F unless noted otherwise
g. Dry horizontal sidewall shall be equal to Central Model H-1, V NPT,
1650F.
h. Dry pendent sprinkler shall be equal to Central Model A-1 recessed
type with white cover, extended dry pendent, l"NPT, 165°F.
i. Tamper switches shall be equal to Potter Electrical Signal Company,
Model OSYS-B, small case, and shall be installed on all control
valves for the sprinkler system.
40
j. Subject to compliance with requirements, provide fire protection
specialties of the following Grinnell Fire Protection Systems, Co.,
Inc.,Viking Corporation,or equal.
4
k. Dry Pipe alarm valve shall be equal to Viking "Model E" system
complete with alarm valve, solenoid valve, 1/2 H.P. air compressor,
"" and air maintenance device accelerator and air maintenance
compressor mounted on riser.
""' Project No. 00058 15300 Fire Protection-21
Renovations to Parsons Annex *■
Smith College
Northampton,Massachusetts
b. Provide handwheels, fastened to valve stem, for valves other than
quarter-turn.
2. Gate Valves
a. Threaded End, 2" and Smaller: FM, UL-listed, 175 psi, bronze body,
solid wedge,outside screw and yoke,rising stem.
Crane: 459
Fairbanks: 0222
Hammond: IB681
Jenkins: 275U
Stockham: B-133
Walworth: 904
b. Flanged End, 2-1/2" and Larger: FM, UL listed, 175 psi, iron body
bronze mounted, solid wedge,outside screw and yoke,rising stem.
Crane: 467
Fairbanks: 0412
Hammond: IR1154
Jenkins: 825-A
Stockham: G-634
Walworth: 8713-F
3. Check Valves
a. 2-1/2" and Larger: FM, 175 psi, iron body bronze mounted, renewable
composition disc and bronze seat ring, bolted cover, flanged ends.
Fairbanks: 0711
Jenkins: 729
Stockham: G-940
Walworth: 8883-LT
4. Install valves where required for proper operation of piping and equipment,
including valves in branch lines where necessary to isolate sections of piping.
Locate valves so as to be accessible and so that separate support can be
provided when necessary.
5. Install valves with stems pointed up, in vertical position where possible, but in
no case with stems pointed downward from horizontal plane unless
unavoidable.
F. Fire Protection Specialties
Project No. 00058 15300 Fire Protection-20 ""
Renovations to Parsons Annex
Smith College
Northampton,Massachusetts
Fee &Mason Mfg. Co.
ITT Grinnell Corp.
5. Install building attachments at required locations on structural steel for proper
piping support. Space attachments within maximum piping span length
indicated on MSS SP-69. Install additional building attachments where support
is required for additional concentrated loads, including valves, flanges, guides,
strainers,expansion joints,and at changes in direction of piping.
6. Install hangers, supports, clamps and attachments to support piping properly
from building structure; comply with MSS SP-69. Arrange for grouping of
parallel runs of horizontal piping to be supported together on trapeze type
hangers where possible. Install supports with maximum spacing complying
with MSS SP-69. Where piping of various sizes is to be supported together by
trapeze hangers, space hangers for smallest pipe size or install intermediate
supports for smaller diameter pipe. Do not use wire or perforated metal to
support piping, and do not support piping from other piping.
7. Support sprinkler piping independently of other piping.
8. Install hangers and supports to allow controlled movement of piping systems
and to permit freedom of movement between pipe anchors and to facilitate
action of expansion joints, expansion loops, expansion bends and similar units.
9. Pipe Slopes: Install hangers and supports to provide pipe slopes and so that
maximum pipe deflections allowed to ANSI B31 Pressure Piping Codes are not
exceeded.
10. Hanger Adjustments: Adjust hangers so as to distribute loads equally on
attachments.
E. Valves
1. Provide factory-fabricated valves recommended by manufacturer for use in
service indicated. Provide valves of types and pressure ratings indicated;
provide proper selection as determined by Installer to comply with installation
requirements. Provide end connections, which properly mate with pipe, tube,
and equipment connections. Where more than one type is indicated, selection
is Installer's option.
a. Unless otherwise indicated, provide valves of same size as upstream
pipe size.
+* Project No. 00058 15300 Fire Protection-19
Renovations to Parsons Annex
Smith College
Northampton,Massachusetts
a. Adjustable Steel Clevis Hangers: MSS Type 1, for piping larger than
4"
b. Adjustable Steel Band Hangers: MSS Type 7,for piping 4" and less.
C. Two-Bolt Riser Clamps: MSS Type 8. ,s,R
2. Provide factory-fabricated hanger-rod attachments complying with MSS SP-58,
of one of the following MSS types listed, selected by Installer to suit horizontal
piping hangers and building attachments, in accordance with MSS SP-69 and
manufacturers published product information. Use only one type by one
manufacturer for each piping service. Select size of hanger-rod attachments to
suit hanger rods.
a. Steel Turnbuckles: MSS Type 13.
b. Swivel Turnbuckles: MSS Type 15.
C. Malleable Iron Sockets: MSS Type 16.
d. Steel Weldless Eye Nuts: MSS Type 17.
3. Provide factory-fabricated building attachments complying with MSS SP-58, of
one of the following types listed, selected by Installer to suit building substrate
conditions, in accordance with MSS SP-69 and manufacturer's published ..
product information. Select size of building attachments to suit hanger rods.
a. Top Beam C-Clamps: MSS Type 19.
b. Side Beam or Channel Clamps: MSS Type 20.
C. C-Clamps: MSS Type 23.
d. Side Beam Clamps: MSS Type 27.
e. Malleable Beam Clamps: MSS Type 30.
4. Subject to compliance with requirements, provide hangers and supports of one
of the following:
B-Line Systems Inc.
Carpenter and Patterson,Inc.
Corner&Lada Co.,Inc.
Elcen Metal Products Co.
Project No. 00058 15300 Fire Protection-18 *"°
wa
• Renovations to Parsons Annex
Smith College
Northampton, Massachusetts
C. Install pipe sleeves of types indicated where piping passes through
walls, floors, ceilings and roofs. Do not install sleeves through
structural members of work, except as detailed on drawings, or as
reviewed by Architect. Install sleeves so that piping will have free
movement in sleeve, including allowance for thermal expansion; but
„w not less than 2 pipe sizes larger than piping run. Install length of sleeve
equal to thickness of surface; except floor sleeves. Extend floor sleeves
1/4" above level floor finish, and 3/4" above floor finish sloped to
drain. Provide temporary support of sleeves during placement of con-
crete and other work around sleeves, and provide temporary closure to
prevent concrete and other materials from entering sleeves.
d. Sleeve Seals: Install in accordance with the following: Fill and pack annular
space between sleeve and pipe with oakum, caulk with lead, on both sides.
2. Provide pipe escutcheons as specified herein with inside diameter closely fitting
pipe outside diameter or outside of pipe insulation where pipe is insulated.
Select outside diameter of escutcheon to completely cover pipe sleeve and
extension, if any. Furnish pipe escutcheons with nickel or chrome finish for
occupied areas;prime paint finish for unoccupied areas.
a. Pipe Escutcheons for all areas: Provide chrome plated sheet steel
escutcheons, solid or split hinged.
b. Subject to compliance with requirements, provide pipe escutcheons of
one of the following:
Chicago Specialty Mfg. Co.
Producers Specialty&Mfg. Co.
Sanitary-Dash Mfg. Co.
C. Install pipe escutcheons on each pipe penetration through floors, walls,
partitions, and ceilings where penetration is exposed to view; and on
exterior of building. Secure escutcheon to pipe so escutcheon covers
penetration hole,and is flush with adjoining surface.
D. Supports,Anchors,and Seals
1. Provide factory-fabricated piping hangers and supports complying with MSS
SP-58, of one of the following MSS types listed, selected by Installer to suit
piping systems, in accordance with MSS SP-69 and manufacturer's published
product information. Use only one type by one manufacturer for each piping
service. Select size of hangers and supports to exactly fit pipe size.
"" Project No. 00058 15300 Fire Protection-17
Renovations to Parsons Annex
Smith College
Northampton, Massachusetts
E. Electrical Equipment Spaces: Do not run piping through transformer vaults, Elevator w,
Machine Room, and other electrical or electronic equipment spaces and enclosures
unless unavoidable. Install drip pan under piping that must be run through electrical
spaces. Any piping intended to be run through electrical spaces shall be reviewed by
the Architect prior to installation.
F. Thread pipe in accordance with ANSI B2.1; cut threads full and clean using sharp dies.
Ream threaded ends to remove burrs and restore full inside diameter. Apply pipe joint
compounder pipe joint tape (Teflon)where recommended by pipe/fitting manufacturer,
on male threads at each joint and tighten joint to leave not more than 3 threads exposed.
G. Flanged Joints: Match flanges within piping system, and at connections with valves and
equipment. Clean flange faces and install gaskets. Tighten bolts to provide uniform .o
compression of gaskets.
H. Grooved Pipe Joints: Comply with fitting manufacturer's instructions for making
grooves in pipe ends. Remove burrs and ream pipe ends. Assemble joints in
accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
1. Clean exterior surfaces of installed piping systems of superfluous materials, and prepare
for application of specified coatings(if any).
J. Provide temporary equipment for testing, including pump and gages. Test each natural
section of each piping system independently, but do not use piping system valves to
isolate sections where test pressures exceed valve pressure rating. Fill each section
with water and pressurize for indicated pressure and time.
1. Pipe Sleeves: Provide pipe sleeves of one of the following:
a. Steel Pipe: Fabricate from schedule 40 galvanized steel pipe; remove
burrs.
b. Sleeve Seals: Provide sleeve seals for sleeves located in foundation
walls below grade, or in exterior walls, caulked between sleeve and
pipe.
Project No. 00058 15300 Fire Protection-16 •M
Renovations to Parsons Annex
Smith College
Northampton, Massachusetts
B. Piping above ground and within the building shall conform to all requirements of
NFPA 13 and shall be as follows:
1. Exposed sprinkler piping, subject to vandalism (stair halls and similar areas),
shall be Schedule 40 black steel pipe, welded, suitable for 175 psi. working
.w water pressure.
2. All concealed piping and all exposed sprinkler piping in Mechanical
�. Equipment Rooms 1-1/2" and smaller, shall be at the option of the Fire Protec-
tion Subcontractor, either Schedule 40 black steel pipe with screwed fittings or
standard weight roll grooved pipe with grooved fittings.
3. All exposed sprinkler piping, 1-1/2" and smaller, shall be Schedule 40 black
steel pipe with screwed fittings.
4. Schedule 40 seamless red brass pipe with brass screwed fittings suitable for 175
psi.working water pressure.
5. Type "L" seamless drawn hard copper tubing with solder joint pressure fittings,
where noted on the drawings.
C. Install pipes and pipe fittings in accordance with recognized industry practices which
will achieve permanently leak proof piping systems, capable of performing each
indicated service without piping failure. Install each run with minimum joints and
couplings, but with adequate and accessible unions for disassembly and
maintenance/replacement of valves and equipment. Reduce sizes (where indicated) by
use of reducing fittings. Align piping accurately at connections,within 1/16" misalign-
ment tolerance. Comply with ANSI B31 Code for Pressure Piping.
D. Locate piping runs, except as otherwise indicated, vertically and horizontally (pitched
to drain) and avoid diagonal runs wherever possible. Orient horizontal runs parallel
with walls and column lines. Locate runs as shown or described by diagrams, details
and notations or, if not otherwise indicated, run piping in shortest route which does not
obstruct usable space or block access for servicing building and its equipment.
Hold piping close to walls, overhead construction, columns and other structural and
permanent-enclosure elements of building. Wherever possible in finished and occupied
spaces, conceal piping from view, by locating in column enclosures, in hollow wall
construction or above suspended ceilings; do not encase horizontal runs in solid parti-
tions,except as indicated.
Project No. 00058 15300 Fire Protection-15
Renovations to Parsons Annex
Smith College
Northampton,Massachusetts
(3) Coupling Housings Description: Grooved mechanical type,
which engages grooved or shouldered pipe ends, encasing an
elastomeric gasket which bridges pipe ends to create seal. Cast
in two or more parts, secure together during assembly with nuts
and bolts. Permit degree of contraction and expansion as speci-
fied in manufacturer's latest published literature. ,
(4) Gaskets: Mechanical grooved coupling design, pressure
responsive so that internal pressure serves to increase seal's
tightness, constructed of elastomers having properties as
designated by ASTM D 2000.
(5) Bolts and Nuts: Heat-treated carbon steel, ASTM A 183,
minimum tensile 1 10,000-psi.
(6) Branch Stub-Ins: Upper housing with full locating collar for
rigid positioning engaging machine-cut hole in pipe, encasing
elastomeric gasket conforming to pipe outside diameter around
hole, and lower housing with positioning lugs, secured together
during assembly with nuts and bolts.
(7) Fittings: Grooved or shouldered end design to accept grooved
mechanical couplings.
Malleable Iron: ASTM A 47.
Ductile Iron: ASTM A 536.
(8) Flanges: Conform to Class 125 cast iron and Class 150 steel
bolt hole alignment.
Malleable Iron: ASTM 47.
Ductile Iron: ASTM A 536.
(9) Grooves: Conform to the following:
Standard Steel: Square cut.
Lightweight Steel: Roll grooved.
(10) Manufacturer: Subject to compliance with requirements,
provide grooved piping products of the following:
ITT Grinnell Corp.
Victaulic Co.
Project No. 00058 15300 Fire Protection-14 '"
Renovations to Parsons Annex
Smith College
Northampton,Massachusetts
e. Mount valve schedule frames and schedules in rooms where indicated
or, if not otherwise indicated,where directed by Architect.
f. Furnish complete chart and flow diagram of entire system listing the
valve number, fluid controlled, and zone reference location for all
valves corresponding to the tag numbers. The chart shall be framed
under glass and hung in the Fire Protection Equipment Room where
directed. Furnish two(2)extra copies of the chart to the Architect.
g. Furnish and install a laminated red phenolic plate with engraved white
lettering for each zone control flow switch and isolation valve.
Nameplates shall be located adjacent to all exposed and concealed
valves,approximately 12"below finished ceiling.
2.2 PIPE, TUBE,AND FITTINGS
A. Interior Piping
` 1. Black Steel Pipe: ASTM A 53, A 106 or A 120: except comply with ASTM A
53 or A 106 where close coiling or bending is required.
a. Pipe Weight: Schedule 40.
b. Fittings: Class 125, cast-iron threaded, ANSI B16.4, or flanged, ANSI
B16.1.
C. Fittings: Mechanical grooved pipe couplings and fittings; cut-groove
type for piping 2-1/2" and larger only.
(1) Electric-Resistance-Welded Steel Pipe:ASTM A 135.
(2) Pipe Weight: Schedule 10 for 5" and smaller; 0.134" wall
thickness for 6".
(3) Fittings: Mechanical grooved pipe couplings and fittings; roll-
groove or mechanical locking type.
d. Grooved Piping Products(for use on pipes 2-1/2" and larger)
(1) Coupling Housings: Malleable iron conforming to ASTM A 47.
(2) Coupling Housing: Ductile iron conforming to ASTM A 536.
Project No. 00058 15300 Fire Protection-13
Renovations to Parsons Annex
Smith College
Northampton,Massachusetts
2. Provide manufacturer's standard pre-printed, semi-rigid, snap-on, color-coded
pipe markers,complying with ANSI A13.1.
a. For external diameters less than 6",provide full-band pipe markers,
extending 360°around pipe at each location, fastened as follows:
Snap-on application of pre-tensioned, semi-rigid plastic pipe marker.
b. Lettering: Manufacturer's standard pre-printed nomenclature, which
best describes piping system in each instance, as selected by Architect.
C. Locate pipe markers as follows:
(1) Near each valve and control device.
(2) Spaced intermediately at maximum spacing of 50' along each
piping run, except reduce spacing to 25' in congested areas of
piping and equipment.
(3) Branch piping need not be marked.
3. Provide manufacturer's standard solid brass valve tags with printed enamel
lettering, with piping system abbreviation in approximately 3/16" high letters
and sequenced valve numbers approximately 3/8" high, and with 5/32" hole for
fastener. Provide tags on all valves and control devices.
a. Provide 1-1/8" sq. brass tags with black lettering.
b. Provide manufacturer's standard solid brass chain (wire link or beaded
type), or solid brass S-hooks of the sizes required for proper attachment
of tags to valves,and manufactured specifically for that purpose.
C. Submit valve schedule for piping system, typewritten and reproduced
on 8-1/2" x 11" bond paper. Tabulate valve number, piping system,
system abbreviation (as shown on tag), location of valve (room or
space), and variations for identification (if any). Mark valves, which
are intended for emergency shut-off and similar special uses, by special
"flags", in margin of schedule. In addition to mounted copies, furnish
extra copies for Maintenance Manuals as specified in Division 1.
d. For each page of valve schedule, provide glazed display frame, with
screws for removable mounting on masonry walls. Provide frames
of finished hardwood or extruded aluminum, with SSB-grade sheet
glass.
Project No. 00058 15300 Fire Protection-12 .�
Renovations to Parsons Annex
Smith College
Northampton,Massachusetts
7. Piping work that is installed under this Contract which interferes with the
architectural design or building structure, shall be changed as directed by the
Architect, and all costs incidental to such changes shall be paid by this
Subcontractor at no additional cost to the Owner.
,. 1.18 ALTERNATES
A. See Section 01030 for a general description of the Base and Alternate Bids. Work of
the Fire Protection Subcontractor is more specifically described below.
B. The Base Bid shall be the lump sum price for all labor and materials necessary for and
reasonably incidental to providing all fire Protection work specified and shown on the
Drawings, less the cost of all extra work described in the Alternates.
�. C. Refer to section 01230 alternates, and the following schedule, and all contract
Drawings. for a description of alternatives.
D. Schedule of Alternates
1. Alternate No. 7 shall be the total replacement of the existing sprinkler system in
its entirety. Refer to Alternate No. 7 Fire Protection Plans for full extent of
work.
PART 2 -MATERIALS
2.1 FIRE PROTECTION PIPING MATERIALS AND PRODUCTS
A. Provide piping materials and factory-fabricated piping P roducts of sizes, types,pressure
ratings, temperature ratings, and capacities as indicated. Where not indicated, provide
proper selection as determined by Installer to comply with installation requirements.
Provide sizes and types matchin g piping and equipment connections; P rovide fittings of
materials, which match pipe materials used in fire protection piping systems. Where
more than one type of material or product is indicated, selection is Installer's option.
B. Basic Identification
1. Subject to compliance with requirements, provide mechanical identification
materials of one of the following:
Allen Systems,Inc.
Brady(W. H.)Co., ; Signmark Div.
Industrial Safety Supply Co., Inc.
Seton Name Plate Corp.
'!"� Project No. 00058 15300 Fire Protection-11
Renovations to Parsons Annex
Smith College
Northampton, Massachusetts
B. Record Drawings shall reflect all changes from the Contract Drawings whether by
change order or by field conditions. Principal dimensions shall be indicated of
concealed work, fire protection lines,valves, and zone flow switches. All changes must
be clearly marked with a bubble drawn around the area of work effected by the change.
C. Co-ordination of Trades .�
1. The Fire Protection Subcontractor shall give full co-operation to the
Subcontractors of other trades, and shall furnish any information necessary to
permit the work of all trades to be installed satisfactorily and with least possible
interference or delay.
2. In areas where conflicts may occur, if so directed by the Architect, this
Subcontractor shall prepare composite sketches at a suitable scale, not less than
1/4" = F-0", clearly showing how his work is to be installed in relation to the .�
work of other trades.
3. Piping and other equipment shall not be installed in congested and possible ..
problem areas by this Subcontractor without first coordinating the installation
of same with other trades and the Architect. This Subcontractor, at his own ex-
pense, shall relocate all uncoordinated piping and other equipment installed
should they interfere with the proper installation and mounting of electrical
equipment, ductwork, piping, hung ceilings, and other structural finishes
installed by other trades.
4. This Subcontractor shall co-ordinate the elevations of all piping and equipment
in hung ceilings for the installation of recessed lighting fixtures, duct boxes, etc.
Conflicts shall be brought to the attention of the Architect for a decision before
the piping and/or equipment of other trades is installed.
5. In areas where, due to construction conditions, more than one trade is required
to use common openings in chases, shafts and sleeves for the passage of
conduits, raceways, piping, ductwork and other materials, this Subcontractor
must plan and locate the positions of equipment to be furnished under this
Section so that all items including piping and/or equipment of other trades may
be accommodated within the space available. Location and positioning shall be
done prior to installation of same and to the satisfaction of the Architect.
6. This Subcontractor, before installing his work, shall see that it does not
interfere with the clearances required for finished columns, pilasters, partitions
or walls, as shown on the Contract Architectural or Structural Drawings
showing foundations, floor plans,roof plans,and details.
Project No. 00058 15300 Fire Protection-10 """
go
Renovations to Parsons Annex
Smith College
Northampton, Massachusetts
1. Description of systems.
40
2. Description of start-up,operation,and shutdown.
3. Schedule of adjustment, care, and routine maintenance for each item of
equipment.
4. Lubrication chart.
5. Wiring and control diagrams with data to explain detailed operation and control
of each item of equipment.
w
6. Valve chart.
7. List of recommended spare parts.
8. Copies of all service contracts.
9. Performance curves for pumps,etc.
10. Lists of all names, addresses, and phone numbers of all Subcontractors as well
as the local representative for each item of equipment.
1.16 GUARANTEE
A. The Fire Protection Subcontractor shall guarantee the satisfactory operation of his work
in all parts for a period of one (1)year after the date of final acceptance, and shall agree
to promptly repair or replace any items of his work which are found to be defective
during this period.
B. The Fire Protection Subcontractor shall pay for repair of damage to the building caused
by defects in his work and for repair to plaster, wood, and other materials or equipment
caused by replacement or repairs to the entire satisfaction of the Architect.
C. Any part of the work installed under this Contract requiring excessive maintenance
shall be considered as being defective.
1.17 RECORD DRAWINGS
" A. Refer to Division 1 for Record Drawings.
"" Project No. 00058 15300 Fire Protection-9
Renovations to Parsons Annex
Smith College
Northampton,Massachusetts
1.12 PRODUCT HANDLING
A. The Fire Protection Subcontractor shall provide for the delivery of all his materials and
equipment to the building site when required, so as to carry on his work efficiently and
to avoid delaying his work and that of other trades.
1.13 ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS
A. All necessary tools machinery, scaffolding, and transportation for completion of his
Contract shall be provided by the Fire Protection Subcontractor.
B. The Fire Protection Subcontractor shall provide his own portable extension lines and
obtain 120 volt, 60 cycle, single phase electric energy from the General Contractor to
drive his machines and light his work. He shall provide his own light bulbs, plugs,
sockets, etc. ..
C. All broken or waste material, rags, packing, etc., resulting from his work shall be
removed by the individual Subcontractor.
1.14 WORK CONCEALED
A. All piping shall be installed exposed except where piping is to be installed above new
acoustic ceilings. Where ceilings are installed sprinklers shall be installed above and
below the ceiling.
B. Piping containing water shall not be installed concealed in walls having an exterior
exposure above grade.
1.15 OPERATING AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS
A. After all final tests and adjustments have been completed, fully instruct the proper
Owner's representative in all details of operation of equipment installed. Supply
qualified personnel to operate equipment for sufficient length of time to assure that
Owner's representative is properly qualified to take over operation and maintenance
procedures.
B. Furnish the Architect, for his approval, three (3) copies of an Operation and
Maintenance Manual. Inscribe the following identification on the cover: the words,
"Operation and Maintenance Manual", the name and location of the equipment or the
building, the name of the Subcontractor, and the Contract number. The manual shall
have a Table of Contents with tab sheets placed before each section. The instructions
shall be legible and easily read, with large sheets of drawings folded in. The manuals
shall be bound in hard binders or an approved equivalent.
C. The Manual shall include the following information:
Project No. 00058 15300 Fire Protection-8 ""
Renovations to Parsons Annex
Smith College
Northampton, Massachusetts
5. Submit certificate upon completion of fire protection piping work, which
go indicates that work has been tested in accordance with ANSI/NFPA 13, and
also that system is operational,complete,and has no defects.
"M 1.9 PERMITS, FEES AND INSPECTIONS
A. The Fire Protection Subcontractor shall secure all permits and pay all fees required for
his work. He shall be required to secure all other permits and pay all other fees and
charges incidental to the proper carrying out of the Contract. He is to assume all
responsibility regarding the observance of the rules and regulations so far as they relate
to his part of the work.
B. The Fire Protection Subcontractor shall arrange and pay for all required inspections of
his work.
1.10 TEMPORARY HOOK-UPS
A. The General Contractor will provide any temporary hook-ups required for the use of
water or sanitary for construction purposes and testing out apparatus as specified in
40 Division 1.
1.11 PLANS AND SPECIFICATIONS
A. The Fire Protection Subcontractor shall refer to the Architectural Drawings of interior
details, plans, elevations, and structural layout in preparing his Bid. These documents
are intended to supplement the Mechanical and Electrical Plans and Specifications and
any applicable work indicated or implied thereon is to be considered a part of the
Contract requirements.
B. The Specifications and Plans are complementary and anything called for, or reasonably
implied, in the Plans and not in the Specifications, or vice versa, shall be considered as
called for or reasonably implied in both.
C. The Fire Protection Subcontractor shall not scale the drawings.
D. Because of the small scale of the drawings, it is not possible to indicate all offsets,
fittings and accessories that may be required. The Fire Protection Subcontractor shall
carefully investigate the structural and finish conditions affecting all his work and shall
40 arrange such work accordingly, furnishing such fittings, traps, offsets, valves, and
accessories as may be required to meet such conditions,at no additional cost.
" !' Project No. 00058 15300 Fire Protection-7
Renovations to Parsons Annex
Smith College
Northampton, Massachusetts
.i.
J. The Fire Protection Subcontractor shall check all of the Architectural Plans and
Specifications and shall field verify all existing conditions before ordering any
materials and the installation of work. Any discrepancies shall be called to the ..
attention of the Architect before proceeding with the work.
1.7 PRODUCTS
A. With the exception of items specifically noted otherwise, all materials used shall be
U.S. made, new, full weight, and first class in every respect, without defects, and
designed to function properly in that portion of the work for which they are intended,
and with the same brand of manufacturers for each class of material or equipment.
Electrical materials and equipment of types for which there are Underwriters
Laboratories standard requirements, listings, or labels shall conform to their
requirements and be so labeled.
1.8 SUBMITTALS
A. Before ordering materials shipped to the job, the Fire Protection Subcontractor shall
submit to the Architect eight (8) sets of catalogue cuts or manufacturers' data sheets,
giving all details, dimensions,capacities, etc.of all materials to be furnished.
B. Submit hydraulic calculations and scaled layout drawings for fire protection pipe and
fittings including, but not necessarily limited to, pipe and tube sizes, locations,
elevations and slopes of horizontal runs, wall and floor penetrations, and connections. .�
Show interface and spatial relationship between piping and proximate equipment.
1. Shop Drawings are subject to review and will require approval by Owner's
insurer's rating organization (IRI Incorporated) and the Northampton Fire
Department prior to submitting to the Architect for approval.
2. The Fire Protection Subcontractor shall check the shop drawings thoroughly for
compliance with the Plans and Specifications before submitting them to the
Architect for review, making any and all changes,which may be required.
3. The review of shop drawings by the Architect shall not relieve the Fire
Protection Subcontractor from any obligation to perform the work strictly in
accordance with the Contract Drawings and Specifications. The responsibility
for errors in shop drawings shall remain with the individual Subcontractor.
4. In the event that materials are being delivered to or installed on the job for
which shop drawings or samples have not been approved and/or which are not
in accordance with the Specifications,the Fire Protection Subcontrac for will
be required to remove such materials and substitute approved materials at his ""
own expense and as directed by the Architect.
Project No. 00058 15300 Fire Protection-6 '""
Renovations to Parsons Annex
Smith College
Northampton, Massachusetts
C. The Fire Protection Subcontractor shall be held responsible for any injuries or damage
done to the building premises or adjoining property or to other Subcontractors' work
resulting from the execution of his part of the work in any manner whatsoever; and in
case of dispute arising as to the extent or share of responsibility incurred by the Fire
Protection Subcontractor, it is agreed between the Owner and the Fire Protection
Subcontractor that such liability and extent of damage shall be finally determined by
the Architect whose decision shall be final and binding on both parties to the Contract
for the work in question.
D. The Fire Protection Subcontractor shall co-operate to the fullest extent with all other
trades in order to expedite the progress of the work. He shall furnish all information
pertaining to his materials as to sizes, locations, and means of support, to all other
trades requiring such information. The Fire Protection Subcontractor shall also furnish
all sleeves, frames, beams, supports, inserts, etc., hereinafter specified so that the
General Contractor may build them in place. In case of failure on the part of the Fire
Protection Subcontractor to give proper information, as above, he will be required to
bear the extra expense involved due to such failure.
E. The arrangement of all piping, ductwork, conduit, wire and cable indicated on the
drawings is diagrammatic only, and indicates the minimum requirements of this work.
Conditions at the building shall determine the actual arrangement of runs, bends,
offsets, etc.
F. The Fire Protection Subcontractor shall lay out all his work and be responsible for the
accuracy thereof. Conditions at the building shall be the determining factor for all
measurements. In no case shall piping be installed laterally in thickness of slab or deck.
G. All work shall be laid out and installed so as to require the least amount of cutting and
patching. Drilling of all holes required for the installation of pipes, conduit, and cable
runs shall be performed by the Subcontractor installing such items. All piping shall be
installed concealed in finished spaces.
H. The Fire Protection Subcontractor shall be responsible for the proper protection of his
work and materials from injury or loss at the hands of others and shall make good such
loss or injury at his own expense. All pipes left open during the progress of the work
shall be capped or plugged at all times. All instruments and operating apparatus shall
be protected by suitable means.
1. The Fire Protection Subcontractor shall be responsible for all equipment and materials
installed under this Section until the final acceptance of the project by the Owner.
** Project No. 00058 15300 Fire Protection-5
Renovations to Parsons Annex
Smith College
Northampton, Massachusetts
H. Equality of materials or articles other than those named or described in this Section will
be determined in accordance with the provisions of the General Requirements, except
that substitutions will only be considered for items where the words, "or equal" appear
in the product specification.
1. The Fire Protection Subcontractor shall agree to accept as final the results of tests
secured by a qualified testing laboratory engaged by the Owner. Tests will be
conducted in accordance with the General Requirements.
1.5 CODES, ORDINANCES AND INSPECTIONS
A. All materials and the installation thereof shall conform to the requirements of the
Massachusetts State Building Code, Electrical Code, Fuel Gas and Plumbing Code and
local laws, rules, regulations, and codes pertaining thereto. Where provisions of the
Contract Documents conflict with any codes, rules or regulations, the latter shall
govern.Where the Contract requirements are in excess of applicable codes, rules or
regulations,the Contract provisions shall govern unless the Architect rules otherwise.
B. The Fire Protection Subcontractor shall comply with the Local Code Enforcement
Officials' instructions at no additional cost to the Owner. Review proposed system with
said officials prior to commencing work.
1.6 INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS
A. The Fire Protection Subcontractor shall employ only competent and experienced
workmen at a regular schedule in harmony with the other tradesmen on the job. He
shall also exercise care and supervision of his employees in regard to proper and
expeditious laying out of his work.
B. The Fire Protection Subcontractor shall have a Foreman or Superintendent assigned to
the Project who shall be authorized to make decisions and receive instructions exactly
as if the Fire Protection Subcontractor himself were present. The Foreman or
Superintendent shall not be removed or replaced without the express approval of the
Architect after construction work begins.
Project No. 00058 15300 Fire Protection-4
Renovations to Parsons Annex
Smith College
Northampton, Massachusetts
C. Design Criteria: Pipe sizing and sprinkler head layout shown on the drawings is
provided to indicate a suggested pipe routing, zoning, and sprinkler head location, and
shall not be used for estimating purposes. Location of piping and heads shall be co-
ordinated with all other trades. Actual pipe sizing, types of heads, and layout shall be
based on a hydraulically designed system in accordance with the requirements of NFPA
13,the Northampton Fire Department, and the Insurance Underwriter(I.R.I.). Location
of sprinkler heads, in relation to the ceiling light hazard occupancy. The Fire Protection
Subcontractor shall prepare working drawings and hydraulic calculations per NFPA 13
and shall obtain Northampton Fire Department and the Colleges Insurance Underwriter
approval prior to start of work. The Fire Protection Subcontractor shall perform water
flow tests or obtain water flow data in writing from local authority. Co-ordinate work
of this Section with all trades to avoid interference with ductwork, HVAC and
plumbing, piping, electrical work, structure, etc. Final sprinkler head locations shall be
subject to Architect's approval.
The number of heads and pipe sizes may be increased or reduced due to hydraulic cal-
culations or the installation of revised heads, provided the revised heads are UL listed
and F.M. approved and meet NFPA 13, Northampton Fire Department, and (IRI)
Insurance Underwriter's criteria. Additionally, all heads shall be in accordance with
NFPA 13 recommendations.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Manufacturers: Firms regularly engaged in manufacture of fire protection piping
systems products, of types, materials, and sizes required, whose products have been in
satisfactory use in similar service for not less than five (5)years.
B. NFPA Code: Comply with ANSI/NFPA 13, "Installation of Sprinkler System".
C. FM Compliance: Comply with Factory Mutual "Approval Guide".
D. FM Labels: Provide sprinkler products bearing FM approval labels.
E. UL Labels: Provide fire sprinkler piping products, which have been approved and
labeled by Underwriters Laboratories.
F. Local Fire Department/Marshall Regulations: Comply with governing regulations
pertaining to fire sprinkler piping. Review proposed system with said officials prior to
commencing work.
G. Final installation of system is subject to approval by Owner's insurer's rating
organization and local Fire Department.
"'*' Project No. 00058 15300 Fire Protection-3
..
Renovations to Parsons Annex 4W
Smith College
Northampton, Massachusetts
ap
7. Disconnect and remove all existing sprinkler heads and piping made obsolete
by or interfering with new construction.
8. Submit plans and calculations to the colleges Insurance Underwriter (IRI
Insurance company C/o HSB Industrial Risk Insurers, 85 Woodland Street, PO
Box 5010,Hartford Ct. (Attn: Mr.David M. Goush)for review and approval.
9. Extend all existing test connection to first floor.
B. Related work, to be performed under other sections of his Specification shall include
the following:
1. Wiring of flow switches, tamper switches, electric bell and control panel back
to the fire alarm panel shall be by the Electrical Subcontractor, coordinated and
as directed by the Fire Protection Subcontractor.
2. Cutting and patching.
1.3 SYSTEM DESIGN
A. The Fire Protection Subcontractor shall perform a water flow test, and with this
information, shall calculate pipe sizes and sprinkler head configuration and orifice sizes �.
in accordance with NFPA 13.
B. Sprinkler head and pipe run locations, as shown on the drawings, are to be interpreted
as diagrammatic only. The Fire Protection Subcontractor shall produce a design based
on actual available water pressure and submit it to the Architect for approval before
beginning fabrication and installation.
Project No. 00058 15300 Fire Protection-2 ""
ON
4W Renovations to Parsons Annex
Smith College
Northampton,Massachusetts
SECTION 15300 -FIRE PROTECTION
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Include General Conditions, Supplementary General Conditions, applicable parts of
Division 1, and conditions of the Contract as part of this Section.
B. Examine all other Sections of the Specifications for requirements, which affect work
under this, Section whether or not, such work is specifically mentioned in this Section.
C. Co-ordinate work with that of all other trades affecting, or affected by the work of this
Section. Co-operate with such trades to assure steady progress of all work under the
Contract.
1.2 SCOPE OF WORK
A. Furnish all labor, materials, appurtenances and services necessary for, and reasonably
incidental to, the complete installation of all fire protection work specified herein
and/or indicated on the drawings, including,but not limited to,the following:
1. Fire protection service piping from the existing service line located in the
basement and the installation of a new service line.
2. Complete dry pipe automatic sprinkler system. System shall be installed in all
spaces, unless otherwise noted, including renovation to existing building
sprinkler system.
3. The Fire Protection Subcontractor shall furnish all labor and materials required
for his own hoisting, rigging, and scaffolding during the entire course of the
project.
4. Provide and install double check valve backflow preventer assembly per DEP
requirements.
5. Dry pipe alarm check valve stations complete with, but not necessarily limited
to, line size valve, retarding chamber, electric and hydraulic alarms, full
indicating, control, drain trim, and air compressor.
6. Complete dry pipe automatic sprinkler system. System shall be installed in all
spaces, unless otherwise noted, with Fire Department connection and system
test and drain connections.
"'" Project No. 00058 15300 Fire Protection-1
of
Renovations to Parsons Annex
Smith College
Northampton, Massachusetts
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. General: Comply with manufacturer's written installation instructions applicable to products and
applications indicated, except where more stringent requirements apply.
1. Enclose wiring within housings of units or building construction. Do not use conduit
exposed to view in finished spaces.
B. Alignment: Coordinate runway gates with platform travel and positioning, for accurate
w alignment and minimum clearance between platforms, runway gates, sills, and gate frames.
C. Position sills accurately, raised slightly above adjoining floor surfaces to minimize intrusion of dirt and spillage into runway. Fill space under sills solidly with nonshrink, nonmetallic grout.
D. Adjust stops for accurate leveling at each landing,within specified tolerances.
No
1. Leveling Tolerance: 1/4 inch (6 mm) up or down, regardless of load and direction of
travel.
E. Lubricate operating parts of lift, including drive mechanism,guide rails, gates, safety devices, and
hardware.
3.2 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Acceptance Testing: Upon nominal completion of each lift installation, and before permitting
the use of lifts, perform acceptance tests as required and recommended by the "Code" and by
authorities having jurisdiction.
B. In addition to above testing, test operate lift continuously between lowest and highest landings
served, lifting full-rated capacity load for a minimum period of 30 minutes. Readjust stops and
other devices and signal equipment for accurate landings and operation of system.
3.3 DEMONSTRATION
A. Instruct Owner's maintenance personnel in the proper use, operation, and maintenance of lifts.
s. Review emergency provisions, including access and procedures to be followed in checking for
sources of operational failures or malfunctions. Confer with Owner on requirements for a
complete maintenance program.
B. Check each lift operation with Owner's maintenance personnel present before time of Substantial
Completion. Determine that control system, operating components, and safety devices are
functioning properly.
w
END OF SECTION 14420
Project No. 00058 14420 WHEELCHAIR LIFTS-5
am
Renovations to Parsons Annex
Smith College
Northampton, Massachusetts
1. System Control Voltage: 24 VAC.
D. Manual Lowering: Provide means to manually lower units in case of malfunction or power loss.
E. Concealed Wiring: Enclose wiring within housings of units. Do not use conduit exposed to
view.
F. Self-Supporting Units: Support vertical loads of units only at base, with lateral support only at
landing levels.
G. Runway Enclosure: Rectangular steel-tube frame with flush steel-sheet panels.
1. Gates: Rectangular steel-tube frames with flush steel-sheet panels.
H. Platform: 0.123-inch-(3.1-mm-) thick, galvanized steel sheet.
1. Size: 36 inches by 54 inches minimum.
I. Platform Sides: Rectangular steel-tube frames with flush steel-sheet panels.
J. Provide unit for pit installation without the need for ramps or inclines.
2.4 FINISHES
A. General: Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal Products"
for recommendations relative to application and designations of finishes.
B. Steel and Iron Finishes: Prepare and finish iron and steel, including galvanized steel, as follows:
1. Prepare uncoated ferrous-metal surfaces to comply with SSPC-SP 3, "Power Tool Cleaning," �+!
or SSPC-SP 6, "Commercial Blast Cleaning," followed by a conversion coating of type
suited to organic coating applied over it.
2. Prepare galvanized steel surfaces by removing dirt,grease, and other contaminants followed e
by a conversion coating of type suited to organic coating applied over it. Clean welds,
mechanical connections, and abraded areas; and apply galvanizing repair paint to comply
with ASTM A 780. ,.
3. Powder-Coated Finish: Immediately after cleaning and pretreating, apply manufacturer's
standard, polyester, powder coating complying with AAMA 605.2.
eee
PART 3-EXECUTION
Project No. 00058 14420 WHEELCHAIR LIFTS-4
no
Renovations to Parsons Annex
Smith College
Ox Northampton, Massachusetts
A. Steel Plates, Shapes, and Bars: ASTM A 36 (ASTM A 36M).
B. Steel Tubing: Either cold-or hot-formed steel tubing.
1. Cold-Formed Steel Tubing: ASTM A 500.
2. Hot-Formed Steel Tubing: ASTM A 501.
C. Steel Pipe: ASTM A 53; standard weight(Schedule 40), unless otherwise indicated or required by
.w structural loads.
D. Carbon-Steel Sheet: Either cold-or hot-rolled, commercial-quality carbon steel.
W 1. Cold Rolled: ASTM A 366 (ASTM A 366M).
2. Hot Rolled: ASTM A 569 (ASTM A 569M).
on E. Aluminum: Alloy and temper recommended by aluminum producer and finisher for type of use
and finish indicated, and with not less than strength and durability properties of alloy and temper
designated below for each aluminum form required.
1. Extruded Aluminum: ASTM B 221 (ASTM B 221M), 6063-T6.
2. Aluminum Sheet: ASTM B 209 (ASTM B 209M), 5005-H15.
F. Glass: Comply with requirements of Division 8 Section"Glazing."
G. Inserts: Furnish required concrete and masonry inserts and similar anchorage devices for
installing structural members, guide rails, machines, and other lift components where installation
of devices is specified in another Specification Section.
H. Expansion Anchors: Anchor-bolt-and-sleeve assembly of material indicated below with capability
to sustain,without failure, a load equal to 10 times the load imposed as determined by testing per
ASTM E 488 conducted by a qualified independent testing agency.
1. Material: Carbon-steel components, zinc plated to comply with ASTM B 633,
Class Fe/Zn 5.
1. Nonshrink, Nonmetallic Grout: Factory-packaged, nonstaining, noncorrosive, nongaseous grout
complying with ASTM C 1107.
2.3 VERTICAL WHEELCHAIR LIFTS
A. Systems and Machinery: Provide manufacturer's standard preengineered lift systems as indicated
in published product literature and as follows:
1. Rated Capacity: 750 lb.
2. Rated Speed: 9 fpm.
B. Power Supply: 120 V, 60 Hz, 1 phase.
C. Control System: Provide key-operated control complying with ASME A17.1.
Project No. 00058 14420 WHEELCHAIR LIFTS-3
4X
Renovations to Parsons Annex
Smith College
Northampton, Massachusetts
similar information. Submit for Owner's information at Project Closeout as specified in
Division 1 Sections.
so
E. Inspection and Acceptance Certificates: Include operating permits as required by governing
authorities for normal, unrestricted use of lifts.
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Installer Qualifications: Engage the lift manufacturer or an installer approved by the lift
manufacturer who has completed lift installations similar in material, design, and extent to that
indicated for this Project and with a record of successful in-service performance.
B. Regulatory Requirements: In addition to local governing regulations, comply with Part XX of
ASME A17.1, "Safety Code for Elevators and Escalators," hereafter, the"Code."
n
1.6 WARRANTY
A. Standard Warranty: Provide warranty executed by lift manufacturer for drive components, parts
and assemblies for a period of three (3)years.
1.7 MAINTENANCE SERVICE
A. Maintenance: Beginning at Substantial Completion, provide 12 months' full maintenance by
skilled employees of the lift Installer. Include quarterly preventive maintenance, repair or
replacement of worn or defective components, lubrication, cleaning, and adjusting as required for ow
proper lift operation at rated speed and capacity. Provide parts and supplies as used in the
manufacture and installation of original equipment.
PART 2-PRODUCTS
■
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering
products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
1. Vertical Wheelchair Lifts:
a. Access Industries, Inc.
b. Concord Elevator, Inc.
C. Garaventa Ltd..
d. National Wheel-O-Vator Co, Inc.
■p
2.2 MATERIALS
No
Project No. 00058 14420 WHEELCHAIR LIFTS-2
ew
Renovations to Parsons Annex
Smith College
Northampton, Massachusetts
SECTION 14420-WHEELCHAIR LIFTS
PART 1 -GENERAL
..w
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
on A. This Section includes the following:
1. Vertical wheelchair lifts.
B. Related Sections include the following:
1. Division 3 Section "Cast-in-Place Concrete" for setting sleeves, inserts, and anchoring
devices in concrete.
2. Division 4 Section "Unit Masonry" for setting sleeves, inserts, and anchoring devices in
masonry.
3. Division 16 Sections for electrical service to lifts, including fused disconnect switches.
awr
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. Lift: Complete lift assembly including drive system, guide rails, buffers(if any), platform, runway
enclosures and gates, access panels, signals, control system, electrical wiring, and devices necessary
to provide specified or"Code"-required performance, operations, safety, and security.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of lift indicated. Include rated capacities, dimensions,
performances, operations, safety features, controls, and finishes.
B. Shop Drawings: For each lift. Show plans, elevations, and details. Show interfaces with other
work, including loading on structure, together with indication of required clearances.
C. Samples: Of exposed finishes for platforms, gates, runways, and control devices; 3 inches (75
mm) square for sheet materials; and 4 inches (100 mm) long for running-trim members.
D. Maintenance Manuals: For each different lift. Include operating and maintenance instructions,
parts list with sources indicated, recommended parts inventory list, emergency instructions, and
w
Project No. 00058 14420 WHEELCHAIR LIFTS-1
Renovations to Parsons Annex
Smith College
Northampton, Massachusetts
C. Replace damaged roller shades that cannot be repaired, in a manner approved by Architect,
before time of Substantial Completion.
no
END OF SECTION 12494
ow
om
.w
Project No. 00058 12494 ROLLER SHADES-4
Renovations to Parsons Annex
Smith College
Northampton, Massachusetts
2.3 ROLLER SHADE FABRICATION
A. Product Description: Roller shade consisting of a roller, a means of supporting the roller, a
flexible sheet or band of material carried by the roller, a means of attaching the material to the
roller, a bottom bar, and an operating mechanism that lifts and lowers the shade.
B. Unit Sizes: Obtain units fabricated in sizes to fill window and other openings as follows,
measured at 74 deg F(23 deg C):
1. Shade Units Installed Outside Jambs: Width and length as indicated, with terminations
between shades of end-to-end installations at centerlines of mullion or other defined
vertical separations between openings.
go C. Installation Brackets: Designed for easy removal and reinstallation of shade, for supporting roller,
and operating hardware and for hardware position and shade mounting method indicated.
wo D. Installation Fasteners: Not fewer than two fasteners per bracket, fabricated from metal
noncorrosive to shade hardware and adjoining construction; type designed for securing to
supporting substrate; and supporting shades and accessories under conditions of normal use.
ww
PART 3 -EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with
requirements for installation tolerances, operational clearances, and other conditions affecting
performance. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 ROLLER SHADE INSTALLATION
A. Install roller shades level, plumb, square, and true according to manufacturer's written
instructions, and located so shade band is not closer than 2 inches (50 mm) to interior face of
glass. Allow clearances for window operation hardware.
3.3 ADJUSTING
A. Adjust and balance roller shades to operate smoothly, easily, safely, and free from binding or
malfunction throughout entire operational range.
3.4 CLEANING AND PROTECTION
A. Clean roller shade surfaces after installation, according to manufacturer's written instructions.
B. Provide final protection and maintain conditions, in a manner acceptable to manufacturer and
Installer, that ensure that roller shades are without damage or deterioration at time of Substantial
Completion.
on
Project No. 00058 12494 ROLLER SHADES-3
go
..
Renovations to Parsons Annex
Smith College
Northampton, Massachusetts '®
1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE,AND HANDLING
A. Deliver shades in factory packages, marked with manufacturer and product name and location of
installation using same room designations indicated on Drawings and in a window treatment
schedule.
1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Environmental Limitations: Do not install roller shades until construction and wet and dirty
finish work in spaces, including painting, is complete and ambient temperature and humidity
conditions are maintained at the levels indicated for Project when occupied for its intended use.
B. Field Measurements: Where roller shades arc indicated to fit to other construction, verify
dimensions of other construction by field measurements before fabrication and indicate
measurements on Shop Drawings. Allow clearances for operable glazed units' operation hardware
throughout the entire operating range. Notify Architect of discrepancies. Coordinate fabrication
schedule with construction progress to avoid delaying the Work.
PART 2- PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
1. Dutton
..a
2.2 ROLLER SHADES
A. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:
1. Pentaflex-12 *�
a. Color: Fawn
b. Fabric: 12oz.sq/yd fiberglass black-out shade .�
B. Rollers: Hardwood of diameter required to support and fit internal components of operating
system and the weight and width of shade band material without sagging; designed to be easily
removable from support brackets; with manufacturer's standard method for attaching shade
material.
C. Mounting Brackets: Galvanized or zinc-plated steel with wood screws.
D. Shade Operation: Manual; with spring roller lift operator.
1. Pull: Crocheted ring.
Project No. 00058 12494 ROLLER SHADES-2
40
Renovations to Parsons Annex
Smith College
40 Northampton, Massachusetts
SECTION 12494-ROLLER SHADES
OR
PART 1 -GENERAL
on
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
"M A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
�. A. This Section includes roller shades.
B. Related Sections include the following:
1. Division 6 Section "Miscellaneous Carpentry" for wood blocking and grounds for
mounting roller shades and accessories.
40
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include styles, material descriptions,
40 construction details, dimensions of individual components and profiles, features, finishes, and
operating instructions.
no B. Samples for Verification:
1. Complete, full-size operating unit not less than 16 inches (400 mm) wide for each type of
roller shade indicated.
2. For the following products:
a. Shade Material: Not less than 3 inches (80 mm) square, with specified treatments
applied. Mark face of material.
b. Pull: Full-size sample.
C. Maintenance Data: For roller shades to include in maintenance manuals. Include the following:
1. Precautions about cleaning materials and methods that could be detrimental to fabrics,
finishes, and performance.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Installer Qualifications: An experienced installer who has completed installation of roller shades
similar in material, design, and extent to that indicated for this Project and whose work has
resulted in construction with a record of successful in-service performance.
B. Source Limitations: Obtain roller shades through one source from a single manufacturer.
so
Project No. 00058 12494 ROLLER SHADES-1
go
Renovations to Parsons Annex
Smith College
Northampton, Massachusetts
A. Examine substrates, and floor conditions for compliance with requirements for location, sizes,
affecting installation of floor mats and frames.
w
1. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
w
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Install surface-type units to comply with manufacturer's written instructions at locations
A. indicated; coordinate with entrance locations and traffic patterns.
3.3 PROTECTION
A. After completing frame installation and concrete work, provide temporary filler of plywood or
•+ fiberboard in recesses and cover frames with plywood protective flooring. Maintain protection
until construction traffic has ended and Project is near Substantial Completion.
B. Defer installation of floor mats until Project is near Substantial Completion.
�w END OF SECTION 12484
op
ON
go
+tee
Project No. 00058 12484 FLOOR MATS AND FRAMES-3
on
Renovations to Parsons Annex
Smith College
Northampton, Massachusetts
PART 2- PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering
products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
B. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
1. Carpet-Type Mats:
a. Balco, Inc.
b. Bonar Floors.
C. Construction Specialties, Inc.
d. Mats Incorporated.
e. Musson, R. C. Rubber Co. (The).
f. Pawling Corporation.
g. Sbenco International, Inc.
h. Tennessee Mat Company, Inc.
2.2 FLOOR MATS
A. General: Provide colors, patterns, and profiles of materials, including metals and metal finishes
indicated or specified. If not indicated, provide colors, patterns, and profiles selected by Architect
from manufacturer's standards.
B. Carpet-Type Mats: Polypropylene carpet bonded to 1/8-to 1/4-inch- (3-to 6-min-) thick, flexible
vinyl backing to form mats 3/8 or 7/16 inch(9.5 or 11 mm)thick with nonraveling edges.
2.3 FABRICATION
A. General: Where possible,verify sizes by field measurement before shop fabrication.
B. Floor Mats: Shop fabricate units to greatest extent possible in sizes as indicated. If not otherwise
indicated, provide single unit for each mat installation; do not exceed manufacturer's
recommended maximum sizes for units that are removed for maintenance and cleaning. Where
joints in mats are necessary, space symmetrically and away from normal traffic lanes. Miter corner
joints in framing elements with hairline joints or provide prefabricated corner units without
joints.
we
PART 3 -EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
Project No. 00058 12484 FLOOR MATS AND FRAMES-2
Renovations to Parsons Annex
Smith College
Northampton, Massachusetts
SECTION 12484-FLOOR MATS AND FRAMES
PART 1 -GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
go
1.2 SUMMARY
go A. This Section includes the following:
1. Carpet-type mats.
no B. Related Sections include the following:
1. Division 9 Section"Carpet' for tufted and woven carpet and cushions.
an 1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Include manufacturer's specifications and installation instructions, construction
om details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual components and profiles, and finishes for
each type of floor mat and frame specified.
u B. Samples for Initial Selection: For each type of floor mat and frame indicated.
C. Maintenance Data: For cleaning and maintaining floor mats to include in maintenance manuals.
on
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Source Limitations: Obtain floor inats and frames through one source from a single
manufacturer.
1.5 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Field Measurements: Verify blocked-out openings in floors by field measurements before
fabrication and indicate measurements on Shop Drawings.
W 1. Established Dimensions: Where field measurements cannot be made without delaying the
Work, establish opening dimensions and proceed with fabricating floor mats and frames
without field measurements. Coordinate floor construction to ensure that actual opening
no dimensions correspond to established dimensions.
Project No. 00058 12484 FLOOR MATS AND FRAMES-1
so
OR
Renovations to Parsons Annex
Smith College
M* Northampton, Massachusetts
L Gaggenau: Model EB 180 hinged on left side of unit.
C. Microwave Oven: Freestanding microwave oven, 1100 watts, 1.3cu.ft. capacity, listed by UL, and
complying with requirements.
1. Amana: Model F1331E
w.
D. Top-Mount Refrigerator/Freezer: Freestanding, two-door refrigerator with top-mounted freezer,
listed by UL,black finish,
1. Amana: Model TX118VE
E. Dishwasher: Built-in, undercounter, automatic dishwasher, sized to replace 24-inch- (610-mm-)
base cabinet, listed by UL.
1. Fisher-Paykel: Model DD602 BK double dish-drawer.
PART 3 -EXECUTION
+ 3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine roughing-in for plumbing, mechanical, and electrical services, with Installer present, to
verify actual locations of services before residential appliance installation.
1. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. General: Comply with manufacturer's written instructions.
B. Built-in Equipment: Securely anchor units to supporting cabinets or countertops with concealed
+ fasteners. Verify that clearances are adequate for proper functioning and rough openings are
completely concealed.
40 C. Freestanding Equipment: Place units in final locations after finishes have been completed in
each area. Verify that clearances are adequate to properly operate equipment.
D. Utilities: Refer to Divisions 15 and 16 for plumbing and electrical requirements.
3.3 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING
A. Test each item of residential appliances to verify proper operation. Make necessary adjustments.
"" B. Verify that accessories required have been furnished and installed.
C. Remove packing material from residential appliances and leave units in clean condition, ready for
+o operation.
END OF SECTION 11451
go
Project No. 00058 11451 RESIDENTIAL APPLIANCES-3
Wo
Renovations to Parsons Annex
Smith College
Northampton, Massachusetts
E. ARAM Standards: Provide appliances that comply with the following AHAM standards:
1. Refrigerators and Freezers: Total volume and shelf area ratings certified according to
ANSI/ARAM HRF-1.
F. Energy Ratings: Provide residential appliances that carry labels indicating energy-cost analysis Rw
(estimated annual operating costs) and efficiency information as required by the Federal Trade
Commission.
1.5 DELIVERY
A. Deliver appliances only after utility rough-in is complete and construction in the spaces to receive .�
appliances is substantially complete and ready for installation.
1.6 WARRANTIES
A. General Warranty: Special warranties specified in this Article shall not deprive Owner of other +•�.
rights Owner may have under other provisions of the Contract Documents and shall be in
addition to, and run concurrent with, other warranties made by Contractor under requirements
of the Contract Documents.
B. Special Warranties: Written warranties, executed by manufacturer of each appliance specified
agreeing to repair or replace residential appliances or components that fail in materials or
workmanship within specified warranty period.
1. Induction Cook-tops: Five-year limited warranty for on-site service on surface-burner
elements.
2. Microwave Oven: 10-year limited warranty for on-site service on defects in the magnetron
tube.
3. Refrigerator/Freezer: Five-year limited warranty on the sealed refrigeration system.
4. Dishwasher: 10-year warranty against deterioration of tub and door liner.
PART 2- PRODUCTS
2.1 PRODUCTS AND MANUFACTURERS
A. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements,provide the appliances indicated.
2.2 RESIDENTIAL APPLIANCES
A. Electric Cooktops: Built-in, countertop-mounted, induction cook-top.
1. Spring Switzerland USA; Model SR-1151B
B. Electric Wall Oven: Built-in, electric wall oven with broiler unit, listed by UL, side hinged door
for mounting in 24 inch cabinet, black glass front.
Project No. 00058 11451 RESIDENTIAL APPLIANCES-2
Renovations to Parsons Annex
Smith College
s Northampton, Massachusetts
SECTION 11451 -RESIDENTIAL APPLIANCES
on
PART 1 -GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
W A. This Section includes the following:
1. Cooking equipment, including ranges, cooktops, and wall ovens and microwave ovens.
on 2. Refrigerator/freezers.
3. Dishwashers.
B. Related Sections include the following:
'"'"' 1. Division 15 Section for plumbing connections to residential appliances.
2. Division 16 Section for services and connections to residential appliances.
4W
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each appliance type required indicating compliance with requirements.
Include complete operating and maintenance instructions for each appliance.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
qW A. Installer Qualifications: An experienced installer who is an authorized representative of the
residential appliance manufacturer for both installation and maintenance of appliances required
for this Project.
on
B. Product Options: Drawings indicate sizes, profiles, and dimensional requirements of residential
appliances and are based on the specific types and models indicated. Other manufacturers'
appliances with equal performance characteristics may be considered. Refer to Division 1 Section
"Substitutions."
*o C. Electrical Appliances: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, Article 100, by a testing agency
acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.
W D. UL and NEMA Compliance: Provide electrical components required as part of residential
appliances that are listed and labeled by UL and that comply with applicable NF-MA standards.
w
Project No. 00058 11451 RESIDENTIAL APPLIANCES-1
on
Renovations to Parsons Annex
Smith College
!' Northampton, Massachusetts
END OF SECTION 10801
on
w
go
on
on
w
Project No. 00058 10801 TOILET AND BATH ACCESSORIES-7
Renovations to Parsons Annex
Smith College
Northampton, Massachusetts
1. Frameless, Stainless-Steel Mirror: Minimum nominal 0.0312-inch- (0.8-mm-) thick, Type
430 stainless steel with bright finish and 1/4-inch (6-mm) return at edges; bonded to 1/4-
inch- (6-mm-) thick, tempered hardboard backing and secured with tamper-resistant,
stainless-steel fasteners.
G. Shower Curtain Rod: Where this designation is indicated, provide heavy duty stainless-steel
shower curtain rod with 3-inch (75-mm) stainless-steel flanges designed for exposed fasteners, in
length required for shower opening indicated, and complying with the following:
1. Products: Bobrick; B-6047
2. Heavy-Duty Rod: 1-1/4-inch (32-mm) OD; fabricated from nominal 0.05-inch- (1.3-mm-)
thick stainless steel.
H. Shower Curtain: Provide shower curtain complying with the following:
1. Antibacterial Shower Curtain: Minimum 10-oz. (284-g), nylon-reinforced vinyl or 0.008-
inch-(0.2-mm-) thick vinyl material with integral antibacterial agent and corrosion-resistant
grommets at minimum 6 inches (152 mm) o.c. through top hem.
a. Size: Minimum 12 inches (300 mm) wider than opening by 72 inches (1828 mm)
high.
b. Color: White.
2. Shower Curtain Hooks: Chrome-plated or stainless-steel, spring wire curtain hooks with
snap fasteners, sized to accommodate specified curtain rod. Provide one hook per curtain
grommet.
.me
I. Soap Dish: Where this designation is indicated, provide stainless-steel soap dish complying with
the following:
so
1. Products: Bobrick; B-973 vandal-resistant, polished chrome on cast bronze.
2. Mounting: Surface mounted, with rectangular wall bracket and backplate for concealed
mounting.
J. Robe Hook: Provide robe hook complying with the following:
1. Products: H.B. Ives, No. 582, MB26D finish.
2. Double-Prong Unit: Stainless-steel, double-prong robe hook for surface mounting.
K. Mop and Broom: Where-indicated, 9rovide mop and broom holder complying with the "
following: {,
1. Products: Bobrick; B-224
2. Mop and Broom Holder: 30-inch- (750-mm-) long unit fabricated of minimum nominal
l8ga. (1.2-mm-)thick, stainless-steel hat channel with three spring-loaded, rubber, cam-type,
mop/broom holders with shelf and rag hooks op
L. Shower Doors: Where indicated, provide shower doors complying with the following: /
1. Products: Triton, model 964S pivot door-n-panel.
Project No. 00058 10801 TOILET AND BATH ACCESSORIES-6
Se'14
w
Renovations to Parsons Annex
Smith College
Northampton, Massachusetts
C. Clean and polish exposed surfaces according to manufacturer's written recommendations.
"'a
3.3 TOILET AND BATH ACCESSORY SCHEDULE
No A. Paper Towel Dispenser: Install unit provided by Owner.
1. Surface-Mounted Type: Sized for minimum of 300 C-fold or 400 multifold paper towels
without using special adapters;with hinged front equipped with tumbler lockset; and with
refill indicators that are pierced slots at sides or front.
B. Toilet Tissue Dispenser: Where this designation is indicated, provide toilet tissue dispenser
complying with the following:
1. Products: Bobrick B-76867
!+� 2. Type: Double-roll dispenser.
3. Mounting: Surface mounted with concealed anchorage except Partition mounted serving
two adjacent toilet compartments.
4. Material: Stainless steel.
5. Operation: Noncontrol delivery with mfr's standard spindle.
6. Capacity: Designed for 4-1/2-or 5-inch-(114-or 127-mm-) diameter-core tissue rolls
C. Soap Dispenser: Install soap dispenser provided by Owner.
1. Liquid Soap Dispenser, Horizontal-Tank Type: Surface-mounted type, minimum 40-oz.
(1182.9-mL) capacity tank with stainless-steel piston, springs, and internal parts designed to
dispense soap in measured quantity by pump action; and stainless-steel cover with
unbreakable window-type refill indicator.
D. Grab Bar (Towel Bars): Provide stainless-steel grab bar complying with the following:
1. Stainless-Steel Nominal Thickness: Minimum 0.05 inch (1.3 mm).
2. Mounting: Concealed with manufacturer's standard flanges and anchors.
3. Gripping Surfaces: Smooth, satin finish.
4. Outside Diameter: 1-1/4 inches (32 mm) for medium-duty applications.
E. Sanitary Napkin Disposal: Where indicated, provide vinyl sanitary napkin disposal unit
complying with the following:
1. Products: Rubbermaid
2. Surface-Mounted Type: With seamless exposed walls; self-closing top cover; and
removable, reusable receptacle.
F. Mirror Unit: Where indicated, provide mirror unit complying with the following:
Project No. 00058 10801 TOILET AND BATH ACCESSORIES-5
Renovations to Parsons Annex
Smith College
Northampton, Massachusetts
C. Framed Glass-Minor Units: Fabricate frames for glass-mirror units to accommodate glass edge
protection material. Provide mirror backing and support system that permits rigid, tamper-
resistant glass installation and prevents moisture accumulation.
1. Provide galvanized steel backing sheet, not less than 0.034 inch (0.85 mm) and full mirror
size, with nonabsorptive filler material. Corrugated cardboard is not an acceptable filler
material.
D. Mirror-Unit Hangers: Provide mirror-unit mounting system that permits rigid, tamper-and theft-
resistant installation, as follows:
1. One-piece, galvanized steel, wall-hanger device with spring-action locking mechanism to
hold mirror unit in position with no exposed screws or bolts.
2. Heavy-duty wall brackets of galvanized steel, equipped with concealed locking devices
requiring a special tool to remove. .�
E. Key Operation: Provide accessories which DO NOT require key operation for servicing and
resupplying.
.w
F. SHOWER DOORS
1. Chromium/Silver finished frame with stainless steel fasteners and reversible door .
a. Door: Full length pull with full length magnetic catch and continuous hinge with
stainless steel pin.
b. Glass: 1/a" Laminated White Glass
PART 3-EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Install accessories according to manufacturers'written instructions, using fasteners appropriate to
substrate indicated and recommended by unit manufacturer. Install units level, plumb, and
firmly anchored in locations and at heights indicated.
B. Secure mirrors to walls in concealed, tamper-resistant manner with special hangers, toggle bolts,
or screws. Set units level, plumb, and square at locations indicated, according to manufacturer's
written instructions for substrate indicated. "'
C. Install grab bars to withstand a downward load of at least 250 lbf(1112 N),when tested according
to method in ASTM F 446. w
3.2 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING MP
A. Adjust accessories for unencumbered, smooth operation and verify that mechanisms function
properly. Replace damaged or defective items. .�
B. Remove temporary labels and protective coatings.
Project No. 00058 10801 TOILET AND BATH ACCESSORIES-4
Renovations to Parsons Annex
Smith College
Northampton, Massachusetts
d. McKinney/Parker Washroom Accessories Corp.
3. Shower Doors:
a. Universal Rundle, Inc.
B. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be incorporated
into the Work include, but are not limited to, those indicated in the Toilet and Bath Accessory
Schedule at the end of Part 3.
2.2 MATERIALS
A. Stainless Steel: ASTM A 666, Type 304, with No. 4 finish (satin), in 0.0312-inch (0.8-mm)
minimum nominal thickness, unless otherwise indicated.
me
B. Brass: ASTM B 19, leaded and unleaded flat products;ASTM B 16 (ASTM B 16M), rods, shapes,
forgings, and flat products with finished edges;ASTM B 30, castings.
C. Sheet Steel: ASTM A 366/A 366M, cold rolled, commercial quality, 0.0359-inch (0.9-mm)
minimum nominal thickness; surface preparation and metal pretreatment as required for applied
finish.
D. Galvanized Steel Sheet: ASTM A 653/A 653M, G60 (Z180).
E. Chromium Plating: ASTM B 456, Service Condition Number SC 2 (moderate service), nickel
plus chromium electrodeposited on base metal.
F. Baked-Enamel Finish: Factory-applied,gloss-white,baked-acrylic-enamel coating.
G. Mirror Glass: ASTM C 1036, Type I, Class 1, Quality q2, nominal 6.0 mm thick,with silvering,
electroplated copper coating, and protective organic coating complying with FS DD-M-411.
H. Galvanized Steel Mounting Devices: ASTM A 153/A 153M, hot-dip galvanized after fabrication.
■w
L Fasteners: Screws, bolts, and other devices of same material as accessory unit, tamper and theft
resistant when exposed, and of galvanized steel when concealed.
2.3 FABRICATION
A. General: One, maximum 1-1/2-inch- (38-mm-) diameter, unobtrusive stamped manufacturer
logo, as approved by Architect, is permitted on exposed face of accessories. On interior surface
not exposed to view or back surface of each accessory, provide printed, waterproof label or
stamped nameplate indicating manufacturer's name and product model number.
B. Surface-Mounted Toilet Accessories: Unless otherwise indicated, fabricate units with tight seams
and joints, and exposed edges rolled. Hang doors and access panels with continuous stainless-
steel hinge. Provide concealed anchorage where possible.
on
Project No. 00058 10801 TOILET AND BATH ACCESSORIES-3
Renovations to Parsons Annex
Smith College
Northampton, Massachusetts
A. Product Options: Accessory requirements, including those for materials, finishes, dimensions,
capacities, and performance, are established by specific products indicated in the Toilet and Bath
Accessory Schedule. "P
1. Products of other manufacturers listed in Part 2 with equal characteristics, as judged solely
by Architect, may be provided.
2. Do not modify aesthetic effects, as judged solely by Architect, except with Architects
approval. Where modifications are proposed, submit comprehensive explanatory data to
Architect for review.
1.5 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate accessory locations with other work to prevent interference with clearances required
for access by disabled persons, proper installation, adjustment, operation, cleaning, and servicing
of accessories.
B. Deliver inserts and anchoring devices set into concrete or masonry as required to prevent delaying
the Work.
1.6 WARRANTY
A. General Warranty: Special warranty specified in this Article shall not deprive Owner of other
rights Owner may have under other provisions of the Contract Documents and shall be in
addition to, and run concurrent with, other warranties made by Contractor under requirements
of the Contract Documents.
B. Manufacturer's Mirror Warranty: Written warranty, executed by mirror manufacturer agreeing to
replace mirrors that develop visible silver spoilage defects within minimum warranty period
indicated.
1. Minimum Warranty Period: 15 years from date of Substantial Completion.
PART 2-PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide accessories by one of the
following:
1. Robe Hooks:
a. H.B. Ives, Co.
2. Toilet and Bath Accessories:
a. A&J Washroom Accessories, Inc.
b. American Specialties, Inc.
C. Bobrick Washroom Equipment, Inc.
Project No. 00058 10801 TOILET AND BATH ACCESSORIES-2
on
Renovations to Parsons Annex
Smith College
Northampton, Massachusetts
SECTION 10801 -TOILET AND BATH ACCESSORIES
PART 1 -GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
W A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the following:
1. Toilet and bath accessories.
2. Shower Doors
B. Related Sections include the following:
no 1. Division 8 Section"Mirrored Glass" for frameless mirrors.
2. Division 10 Section'Toilet Compartments" for compartments and screens.
40
1.3 SUBMITTALS
WN A. Product Data: Include construction details, material descriptions and thicknesses, dimensions,
profiles, fastening and mounting methods, specified options, and finishes for each type of
accessory specified.
ON
B. Samples: For each accessory item to verify design, operation, and finish requirements.
MR 1. Approved full-size Samples will be returned and may be used in the Work.
C. Setting Drawings: For cutouts required in other work; include templates, substrate preparation
instructions, and directions for preparing cutouts and installing anchoring devices.
4M
D. Product Schedule: Indicating types, quantities, sizes, and installation locations by room of each
accessory required. Use designations indicated in the Toilet and Bath Accessory Schedule and
room designations indicated on Drawings in product schedule.
E. Maintenance Data: For accessories to include in maintenance manuals specified in Division 1.
Provide lists of replacement parts and service recommendations.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
me
Project No. 00058 10801 TOILET AND BATH ACCESSORIES-1
Renovations to Parsons Annex
Smith College
Northampton, Massachusetts
1. Remove or blend tool and die marks and stretch lines into finish.
2. Grind and polish surfaces to produce uniform, directional textured, polished finish
indicated, free of cross scratches. Run grain with long dimension of each piece.
B. Finish: Manufacturer's standard No. 3 or No. 4 directional polish.
C. Protect mechanical finishes on exposed surfaces from damage by applying a strippable, temporary
protective covering before shipment.
w
PART 3-EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. General: Comply with manufacturer's written installation instructions. Install units rigid,
straight, plumb, and level. Provide clearances of not more than 1/2 inch (13 mm) between
pilasters and panels and not more than 1 inch (25 mm)between panels and walls. Secure units in
position with manufacturer's recommended anchoring devices. *W
1. Secure panels to walls and panels with not less than 2 stirrup brackets attached near top
and bottom of panel. Locate wall brackets so holes for wall anchors occur in masonry or �..
tile joints. Align brackets at pilasters with brackets at walls.
B. Overhead-Braced-and-Floor-Anchored Compartments: Secure pilasters to floor and level, plumb,
and tighten. Secure continuous head rail to each pilaster with not less than 2 fasteners. Hang
doors and adjust so tops of doors are parallel with overhead brace when doors are in closed
position.
3.2 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING
A. Hardware Adjustment: Adjust and lubricate hardware according to manufacturer's written
instructions for proper operation. Set hinges on in-swinging doors to hold open approximately
30 degrees from closed position when unlatched. Set hinges on out-swinging doors and swing
doors in entrance screens to return to fully closed position.
B. Provide final protection and maintain conditions that ensure toilet compartments and screens are .�.
without damage or deterioration at the time of Substantial Completion.
END OF SECTION 10155
Project No. 00058 10155 TOILET COMPARTMENTS-4
Renovations to Parsons Annex
Smith College
Northampton, Massachusetts
J. Anchorages and Fasteners: Manufacturer's standard exposed fasteners of stainless steel or
chrome-plated steel or brass, finished to match hardware, with theft-resistant-type heads. Provide
no sex-type bolts for through-bolt applications. For concealed anchors, use hot-dip galvanized or
other rust-resistant, protective-coated steel.
2.3 FABRICATION
A. General: Provide standard doors, panels, screens, and pilasters fabricated for compartment
s system. Provide units with cutouts and drilled holes to receive compartment-mounted hardware,
accessories, and grab bars, as indicated.
on 1. Provide internal reinforcement in metal units for compartment-mounted hardware,
accessories, and grab bars, as indicated.
B. Solid-Plastic, Polymer-Resin Compartments and Screens: Provide aluminum heat-sink strips at
exposed bottom edges of HDPE units to prevent burning.
C. Overhead-Braced-and-Floor-Anchored Compartments: Provide manufacturer's standard
corrosion-resistant supports, leveling mechanism, fasteners, and anchors at pilasters to suit floor
conditions. Make provisions for setting and securing continuous head rail at top of each pilaster.
Provide shoes at pilasters to conceal supports and leveling mechanism.
1. Provide manufacturer's standard 4-inch-(100-mm-) high, overhead cross bracing.
w
D. Doors: Unless otherwise indicated, provide 24-inch- (610-mm-) wide in-swinging doors for
standard toilet compartments and 36-inch- (914-mm-) wide out-swinging doors with a minimum
32-inch-(813-mm-)wide clear opening for compartments indicated to be handicapped accessible.
1. Hinges: Manufacturer's standard self-closing type that can be adjusted to hold door open
at any angle up to 90 degrees.
no 2. Latch and Keeper: Recessed latch unit designed for emergency access and with
combination rubber-faced door strike and keeper. Provide units that comply with
accessibility requirements of authorities having jurisdiction at compartments indicated to
be handicapped accessible.
3. Coat Hook: Manufacturer's standard combination hook and rubber-tipped bumper, sized
to prevent door from hitting compartment-mounted accessories.
4. Door Bumper: Manufacturer's standard rubber-tipped bumpers at out-swinging doors or
entrance screen doors.
5. Door Pull: Manufacturer's standard unit that complies with accessibility requirements of
authorities having jurisdiction at out-swinging doors. Provide units on both sides of doors
at compartments indicated to be handicapped accessible.
s
2.4 STAINLESS-STEEL SHEET FINISHES
A. General: Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal Products"
for recommendations relative to applying and designating finishes.
ew
Project No. 00058 10155 TOILET COMPARTMENTS-3
No
Renovations to Parsons Annex
Smith College
Northampton, Massachusetts
PART 2-PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
1. Compression Polymers Group; Comtec Industries.
2. Santana Products, Inc. 4W
2.2 MATERIALS
MR
A. General: Provide materials that have been selected for surface flatness and smoothness. Exposed
surfaces that exhibit pitting, seam marks, roller marks, stains, discolorations, telegraphing of core
material, or other imperfections on finished units are unacceptable. '"
B. Stainless-Steel Sheet: ASTM A 666, Type 302 or 304, that is leveled to stretcher-leveled flatness,
finished on exposed faces as indicated in the "Stainless-Steel Sheet Finishes" Article, and of the
following minimum thicknesses:
1. Pilasters (Overhead Braced): 0.0375 inch (0.95 mm). .
2. Tapping Reinforcement: 0.0781 inch (2.0 mm).
C. Solid-Plastic HDPE: Solid high density polyethylene polymer resins.
1. Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range of colors.
D. Pilaster Shoes and Sleeves (Caps): ASTM A 666, Type 302 or 304 stainless steel, not less than we
0.0312 inch (0.8 mm) thick and 3 inches (75 mm) high, finished to match hardware.
1. For solid-plastic, polymer-resin pilasters, in lieu of stainless-steel pilaster shoes and sleeves,
manufacturer's standard plastic pilaster shoes and sleeves may be provided.
E. Stirrup Brackets: Manufacturer's standard ear or U-brackets for attaching panels and screens to
walls and pilasters of the following material:
1. Material: Stainless steel.
F. Hardware and Accessories: Manufacturer's standard design, heavy-duty operating hardware and
accessories of the following material:
1. Material: Stainless steel.
G. Hinges: Provide manufacturers integral concealed self closing hinges.
1-1. Overhead Bracing: Manufacturer's standard continuous, extruded-aluminum head rail with
antigrip profile in manufacturer's standard finish.
I. Heat-Sink Strip: Manufacturer's standard continuous, extruded-aluminum strip in manufacturer's
standard finish.
Project No. 00058 10155 TOILET COMPARTMENTS-2
vp
Renovations to Parsons Annex
Smith College
MR Northampton, Massachusetts
SECTION 10155-TOILET COMPARTMENTS
PART 1-GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes toilet compartments and screens as follows:
1. Type: Solid-plastic.
2. Compartment Style: Overhead braced and floor anchored.
�w
B. Related Sections include the following:
1. Division 10 "Toilet and Bath Accessories" for toilet paper holders,grab bars,purse shelves,
■s
and similar accessories.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
go
A. Product Data: For each type and style of toilet compartment and screen specified. Include details
of construction relative to materials, fabrication, and installation. Include details of anchors,
hardware, and fastenings.
B. Shop Drawings: For fabrication and installation of toilet compartment and screen assemblies.
W Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other work.
1. Show locations of reinforcement and cutouts for compartment-mounted toilet accessories.
C. Samples for Initial Selection: Manufacturer's color charts consisting of sections of actual units
showing the full range of colors, textures, and patterns available for each type of compartment or
screen indicated.
1.4 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Field Measurements: Verify dimensions in areas of installation by field measurements before
fabrication and indicate measurements on Shop Drawings. Coordinate fabrication schedule with
construction progress to avoid delaying the Work.
1. Established Dimensions: Where field measurements cannot be made without delaying the
w Work, establish dimensions and proceed with fabricating units without field
measurements. Coordinate supports, adjacent construction, and fixture locations to
ensure actual dimensions correspond to established dimensions.
Project No. 00058 10155 TOILET COMPARTMENTS-1
to
Renovations to Parsons Annex
Smith College
qN Northampton, Massachusetts
3.2 PREPARATION
1
! A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for surface preparation.
B. Clean substrates of substances that could impair wall covering's bond, including mold, mildew,
oil, grease, incompatible primers, and dirt.
C. Prepare substrates to achieve a smooth, dry, clean surface free of flaking, unsound coatings,
cracks, and defects.
1. Allow new plaster to cure. Treat areas of high alkalinity.
3.3 INSTALLATION, GENERAL
A. General: Comply with wall coverings manufacturers' written installation instructions applicable
W to products and applications indicated, except where more stringent requirements apply.
B. Scribe and fit panels full height. Apply wall adhesive and lap joints minimum of 2 inches. Roll
No panels for even distribution of adhesive.
C. Install panels vertical and plumb at least 6 inches (150 mm) from outside corners and 3 inches
ON (75 mm) from inside corners. No horizontal seams.
D. Apply trim edges around outside corners with tight closure at seams and edges.
an
E. Clean and prime all surfaces with silicone primer. Apply sealant to all seams, joints, plumbing
trim and accessories. Where panels terminate against surfaces to receive paint finish, apply bead
an of latex sealant.
3.4 CLEANING
A. Remove excess adhesive at finished seams, perimeter edges, and adjacent surfaces.
B. Use cleaning methods recommended by wall covering manufacturer.
C. Remove all excess and waste materials. Dispose of properly.
END OF SECTION 09950
on
Project No. 00058 09950 WALL COVERINGS-3
0
Renovations to Parsons Annex
Smith College
Northampton, Massachusetts
1.5 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Space Enclosure and Environmental Limitations: Do not install wall covering until space is
enclosed and weatherproof, wet-work in space is completed and nominally dry, work above
ceilings is complete, and ambient temperature and humidity conditions are and will be
continuously maintained at values near those indicated for final occupancy.
B. Lighting: Do not install wall covering until a lighting level of not less than 15 foot-candles (160
lux) is provided on the surfaces to receive wall covering.
C. Ventilation: Provide continuous ventilation during installation and for not less than the time
recommended by the wall covering manufacturer for full drying or curing.
PART 2-PRODUCTS
wem
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by Universal Bath Systems.
2.2 PANELS
A. High Molecular PVC.
1. Thickness: 0.090
2. Color: Bone
3. Trim: Shapes and styles to provide watertight enclosure
2.3 ADHESIVES
A. General: Watertight, mildew-resistant, nonstaining adhesive, for use with substrate application,
as recommended by wall covering manufacturer.
2.4 ACCESSORIES
A. Sealant: Mildew-resistant silicone
1. Dow Corning 784, 786 or GE-SCS-1702
PART 3-EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine substrates for compliance with requirements for moisture content and other conditions
affecting performance of Work of this Section. Do not proceed with installation until
unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
Project No. 00058 09950 WALL COVERINGS-2
Renovations to Parsons Annex
Smith College
40 Northampton, Massachusetts
SECTION 09952 - PVC WALL COVERINGS
PART 1 -GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions, of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
!+ A. This Section includes the following:
1. PVC wall panels.
B. Related Sections: The following Sections contain requirements that relate to this Section:
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. General: Submit each item in this Article according to the Conditions of the Contract and
Division 1 Specification Sections.
B. Product Data for each type of product specified. Include data on physical characteristics,
"w durability, fade resistance, and flame-resistance characteristics.
C. Shop Drawings showing location and extent of each wall covering type. Indicate seams and
40 termination points.
D. Samples for initial selection in the form of manufacturer's color charts consisting of actual units
ON or sections of units showing the full range of colors, textures, and patterns available.
E. Schedule of wall coverings using same room designations indicated on Drawings.
No F. Product certificates signed by manufacturers of wall coverings certifying that their products
comply with specified requirements.
'o G. Maintenance data for wall covering to include in the operation and maintenance manual
specified in Division 1.
an
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
an A. Installer Qualifications: Engage an experienced installer who has completed 5 projects similar in
material, design, and extent to that indicated for this Project and with a record of successful in-
service performance.
Project No. 00058 09950 WALL COVERINGS-1
Renovations to Parsons Annex
Smith College
Northampton, Massachusetts
D. Match pattern 72 inches(1830 mm)above finish floor.
E. Install seams vertical and plumb at least 6 inches (150 mm) from outside corners and 3 inches (75
MITI) from inside corners. No horizontal seams.
F. Remove air bubbles,wrinkles,blisters, and other defects.
G. Trim edges for color uniformity,pattern match, and tight closure at seams and edges. Butt seams. ..
3.4 CLEANING
A. Remove excess adhesive at finished seams,perimeter edges, and adjacent surfaces.
B. Use cleaning methods recommended by wall covering manufacturer.
C. Replace strips that cannot be cleaned.
END OF SECTION 09950
Project No. 00058 09950 WALL COVERINGS-4
Renovations to Parsons Annex
Smith College
Northampton, Massachusetts
A. Wall Liner: Nonwoven, synthetic underlayment and adhesive as recommended by wall covering
manufacturer.
PART 3-EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine substrates for compliance with requirements for moisture content and other conditions
affecting performance of Work of this Section. Do not proceed with installation until
unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for surface preparation.
B. Clean substrates of substances that could impair wall covering's bond, including mold, mildew,
oil,grease, incompatible primers, and dirt.
C. Prepare substrates to achieve a smooth, dry, clean surface free of flaking, unsound coatings,
cracks, and defects.
1. Painted Surfaces: Treat areas susceptible to pigment bleeding.
2. Moisture Content: Maximum of 5 percent on new plaster, concrete, and concrete masonry
units when tested with an electronic moisture meter.
3. Allow new plaster to cure. Treat areas of high alkalinity.
D. Check painted surfaces for pigment bleeding. Sand gloss, semigloss, and eggshell finishes with
fine sandpaper.
E. Install wall liner, with no gaps or overlaps, where required by wall covering manufacturer. Form
smooth wrinkle-free surface for finished installation. Do not begin wall covering installation until
wall liner has dried.
F. Acclimatize wall covering materials by removing them from packaging in the installation areas not
less than 24 hours before installation.
3.3 INSTALLATION, GENERAL
A. General: Comply with wall coverings manufacturers' written installation instructions applicable
to products and applications indicated, except where more stringent requirements apply.
B. Cut wall covering panels in roll number sequence. Change run numbers at partition breaks and
so, corners only.
C. Install wall covering with no gaps or overlaps.
Project No. 00058 09950 WALL COVERINGS-3
Renovations to Parsons Annex
Smith College
Northampton, Massachusetts
B. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: Provide wall coverings with the following surface-burning
characteristics as determined by testing identical products per ASTM E 84 by UL or another
testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.
1. Flame Spread: 25 or less. **
2. Smoke Developed: 450 or less.
1.5 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Space Enclosure and Environmental Limitations: Do not install wall covering until space is
enclosed and weatherproof, wet-work in space is completed and nominally dry, work above
ceilings is complete, and ambient temperature and humidity conditions are and will be
continuously maintained at values near those indicated for final occupancy.
B. Lighting: Do not install wall covering until a lighting level of not less than 15 foot-candles (160
lux) is provided on the surfaces to receive wall covering.
C. Ventilation: Provide continuous ventilation during installation and for not less than the time
recommended by the wall covering manufacturer for full drying or curing.
1.6 EXTRA MATERIALS
ow
A. Furnish extra materials described below, before installation begins, that match products installed,
are packaged with protective covering for storage, and are identified with labels describing
contents.
w
1. Rolls of Wall Covering Material: Full-size units equal to 5 percent of amount of each type
installed.
PART 2-PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following products:
1. Public Areas: Lanark, Bevan Type II
2. Bedrooms: Essex 54,Stoneacre I, Type I.
2.2 ADHESIVES
A. General: Mildew-resistant, nonstaining adhesive, for use with specific wood veneer wall covering
and substrate application, as recommended by wall covering manufacturer.
2.3 ACCESSORIES
Project No. 00058 09950 WALL COVERINGS-2
Renovations to Parsons Annex
Smith College
Northampton, Massachusetts
SECTION 09950-WALL COVERINGS
PART 1 -GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
w
A. This Section includes the following:
1. Vinyl wall covering.
B. Related Sections: The following Sections contain requirements that relate to this Section:
1. Division 9 Section"Painting" for sealing and priming wall surfaces.
aA
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. General: Submit each item in this Article according to the Conditions of the Contract and
Division 1 Specification Sections.
B. Product Data for each type of product specified. Include data on physical characteristics,
durability, fade resistance, and flame-resistance characteristics.
go
C. Samples for verification in sets for each color, texture, and pattern specified, showing the full
range of variations expected in these characteristics.
1. Wall Covering Material: Full-width sample, not less than 36 inches (914 mm) long, from
dye lot used for the Work.
go a. Show complete pattern repeat.
D. Maintenance data for wall covering to include in the operation and maintenance manual
specified in Division 1.
go
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Installer Qualifications: Engage an experienced installer who has completed 5 projects similar in
material, design, and extent to that indicated for this Project and with a record of successful in-
"""' service performance.
Project No. 00058 09950 WALL COVERINGS-1
Renovations to Parsons Annex
Smith College
Northampton, Massachusetts
1) Moore: Moore's Interior Wood Finishes Quick-Dry Satin Sanding Sealer
#413.
G. Ferrous Metal: Provide the following finish systems over ferrous metal:
1. Semigloss,Alkyd-Enamel Finish: 2 finish coats over an enamel undercoater and a primer. ..
a. Primer: Quick-drying, rust-inhibitive, alkyd-based or epoxy-metal primer, as
recommended by the manufacturer for this substrate, applied at spreading rate
recommended by the manufacturer to achieve a total dry film thickness of not less
than 1.5 mils (0.038 mm).
1) Moore: IronClad Retardo Rust-Inhibitive Paint#163.
b. Undercoat: Alkyd, interior enamel undercoat or semigloss, interior, alkyd-enamel
finish coat, as recommended by the manufacturer for this substrate, applied at
spreading rate recommended by the manufacturer to achieve a total dry film
thickness of not less than 1.2 mils (0.031 mm).
1) Moore: Moore's Alkyd Enamel Underbody#217.
C. Finish Coats: Odorless, semigloss, alkyd, interior enamel applied at spreading rate
recommended by the manufacturer to achieve a total dry film thickness of not less
than 1.4 mils (0.036 mm).
1) Moore: Satin Impervo#235.
w�
END OF SECTION 09900
.a
Project No. 00058 09900 PAINTING-14
Renovations to Parsons Annex
Smith College
Northampton, Massachusetts
2. Low-Luster,Acrylic-Enamel Finish (Bathrooms and Kitchen): 2 finish coats over a primer.
a. Primer: Alkali-resistant, alkyd- or latex-based, interior primer, as recommended by
the manufacturer for this substrate, applied at spreading rate recommended by the
manufacturer to achieve a total dry film thickness of not less than 1.2 mils (0.031
mm).
1) Moore: Regal First Coat Interior Latex Primer& Underbody#216.
.,. b. First and Second Coats: Low-luster (eggshell or satin), acrylic-latex, interior enamel
applied at spreading rate recommended by the manufacturer to achieve a total dry
film thickness of not less than 2.8 mils (0.071 mm).
1) Moore: Moore's Regal AquaVelvet#319.
C. Epoxy Wear Finish: Above counters in kitchen and laundry over second coat of
go finish:
1) Moore: Acrylic Epoxy Clear Gloss Coating M43-00.
aw
E. Woodwork and Hardboard: Provide the following paint finish systems over interior wood
surfaces:
1. Low-Luster,Acrylic-Enamel Finish: 2 finish coats over a primer.
a. Undercoat: Alkyd- or acrylic-latex-based, interior wood undercoater, as
recommended by the manufacturer for this substrate, applied at spreading rate
recommended by the manufacturer to achieve a total dry film thickness of not less
than 1.2 mils (0.031 mm).
1) Moore: Moore's Alkyd Enamel Underbody#217.
ww
b. First and Second Coats: Low-luster (eggshell or satin), acrylic-latex, interior enamel
applied at spreading rate recommended by the manufacturer to achieve a total dry
film thickness of not less than 2.8 mils (0.071 mm).
1) Moore: Moore's Regal AquaVelvet#319.
F. Stained Woodwork: Provide the following stained finishes over new, interior woodwork:
1. Alkyd-Based, Satin-Varnish Finish: 2 finish coats of an alkyd-based, clear-satin varnish over
a sealer coat and an alkyd-based, interior wood stain. Wipe wood filler before applying
stain.
a. Filler Coat: Paste-wood filler applied at spreading rate recommended by the
manufacturer.
1) Moore: Benwood Paste Wood Filler#238.
b. Stain Coat: Alkyd-based, interior wood stain applied at spreading rate
recommended by the manufacturer.
1) Moore: Benwood Penetrating Stain#234.
C. Sealer Coat: Clear sanding sealer applied at spreading rate recommended by the
manufacturer.
Project No. 00058 09900 PAINTING-13
am
Renovations to Parsons Annex
Smith College
Northampton, Massachusetts
a. Primer: Alkali-resistant, acrylic-latex, interior primer applied at spreading rate
recommended by the manufacturer to achieve a total dry film thickness of not less
than 1.0 mil(0.025 mm).
1) Moore: Regal First Coat Interior Latex Primer&Underbody#216.
b. First and Second Coats: Flat, latex-based, interior paint applied at spreading rate
recommended by the manufacturer to achieve a total dry film thickness of not less
than 2.5 mils (0.064 mm).
1) Moore: Regal Wall Satin#215.
B. Concrete Masonry Units: Provide the following finish systems over interior concrete masonry
block units:
1. Flat Acrylic Finish: 2 finish coats over a block filler.
a. Block Filler: High-performance, latex-based, block filler applied at spreading rate
recommended by the manufacturer to achieve a total dry film thickness of not less
than 5.0 mils (0.13 mm).
1) Moore: Moorcraft Interior& Exterior Block Filler#173. w.
b. First and Second Coats: Flat, latex-based, interior paint applied at spreading rate
recommended by the manufacturer to achieve a total dry film thickness of not less
than 2.5 mils (0.064 mm).
1) Moore: Regal Wall Satin#215.
or
C. Plaster: Seal existing interior plaster surfaces scheduled for paint finish and new plaster surfaces
in toilet rooms equipped with a shower:
1. Sealer: 1 coat denatured alcohol-based sealer at existing plaster walls.
a. Kilz
b. B-I-N ®.
D. Plaster: Provide the following finish systems over new and existing interior plaster surfaces:
1. Flat Acrylic Finish: 2 finish coats over a primer .p
a. Primer: Alkali-resistant, acrylic-latex, interior primer applied at spreading rate
recommended by the manufacturer to achieve a total dry film thickness of not less
than 1.4 mils (0.036 mm).
1) Moore: Regal First Coat Interior Latex Primer&Underbody#216.
b. First and Second Coats: Flat, acrylic-latex, interior paint applied at spreading rate
recommended by the manufacturer to achieve a total dry film thickness of not less
than 2.5 mils (0.064 mm). Provide medium or deep-tint bases as required to match
architects sample.
1) Moore: Regal Wall Satin#215.
Project No. 00058 09900 PAINTING-12
n
Renovations to Parsons Annex
Smith College
Northampton, Massachusetts
1) Moore: 112 Porch& Floor Enamel
2) Broadcast non-slip aggregate during first coat of application.
uw
C. Existing door with natural wood finish: Provide the following stain finish systems over exterior
wood:
1. High Gloss Finish: Phenolic modified tung, linseed castor oil.
W a. First and Second Coat: Clear, exterior varnish applied at spreading rate
recommended by the manufacturer.
1) Moore: Impervo 440 Spar Varnish
D. Ferrous Metal: Provide the following finish systems over exterior ferrous metal. Primer is not
required on shop-primed items.
+fir
1. Semi-Gloss,Alkyd-Enamel Finish: 2 finish coats over a rust-inhibitive primer.
a. Primer: Rust-inhibitive metal primer applied at spreading rate recommended by the
manufacturer to achieve a total dry film thickness of not less than 1.3 mils (0.033
mm).
1) Moore: IronClad Retardo Rust-Inhibitive Paint#163.
�w
b. First and Second Coats: Semi-gloss, exterior, alkyd enamel applied at spreading rate
recommended by the manufacturer to achieve a total dry film thickness of not less
than 3.0 mils (0.076 mm).
1) Moore: Alkyd Semi-gloss Enamel M24.
E. Zinc-Coated Metal: Provide the following finish systems over exterior zinc-coated (galvanized)
metal surfaces:
1. Semi-Gloss,Alkyd-Enamel Finish: 2 finish coats over a galvanized metal primer.
a. Primer: Galvanized metal primer applied at spreading rate recommended by the
manufacturer to achieve a total dry film thickness of not less than 1.2 mils (0.031
mm).
1) Moore: IronClad Galvanized Metal Latex Primer#155.
b. First and Second Coats: Semi-gloss, exterior, alkyd enamel applied at spreading rate
recommended by the manufacturer to achieve a total dry film thickness of not less
than 2.6 mils (0.066 mm).
1) Moore: Alkyd Semi-gloss Enamel M24.
3.7 INTERIOR PAINT SCHEDULE
A. Concrete and Masonry (Other than Concrete Masonry Units): Provide the following paint
systems over interior concrete and brick masonry surfaces:
1. Flat Acrylic Finish: 2 finish coats over a primer.
ww
Project No. 00058 09900 PAINTING-11
no
Renovations to Parsons Annex
Smith College
Northampton, Massachusetts
3.6 EXTERIOR PAINT SCHEDULE
A. Smooth Wood: Provide the following finish systems over smooth wood siding and other smooth,
exterior wood surfaces:
1. New and existing siding: 2 coats flat acrylic finish over a primer. Spot prime existing
surfaces after preparation.
a. Primer: Exterior, alkyd or latex, wood primer, as recommended by the
manufacturer for this substrate, applied at spreading rate recommended by the
manufacturer to achieve a total dry film thickness of not less than 1.5 mils (0.038
mm).
1) Moore: Moorwhite Primer#100.
b. First and Second Coats: Flat, exterior, acrylic-emulsion paint applied at spreading
rate recommended by the manufacturer to achieve a total dry film thickness of not
less than 2.2 mils(0.056 mm).
1) Moore: MoorLife Latex House Paint#105.
2. New and existing trim: 2 coats low-luster acrylic finish over a primer. Spot prime existing
surfaces after preparation.
ws
a. Primer: Exterior, alkyd or latex, wood primer, as recommended by the
manufacturer for this substrate, applied at spreading rate recommended by the
manufacturer to achieve a total dry film thickness of not less than 1.5 mils (0.038
mm).
1) Moore: Moorwhite Primer#100.
b. First and Second Coats: Low-sheen (eggshell or satin), exterior, latex paint applied
at spreading rate recommended by the manufacturer to achieve a total dry film
thickness of not less than 2.3 mils (0.058 mm). ,
1) Moore: MoorGard Latex House Paint#103.
3. New wood doors: 2 coats semi-gloss, acrylic-enamel finish over a primer.
a. Primer: Exterior, alkyd or latex, wood primer, as recommended by the
manufacturer for this substrate, applied at spreading rate recommended by the
manufacturer to achieve a total dry film thickness of not less than 1.5 mils (0.038
mm).
1) Moore: Moorwhite Primer#100.
b. First and Second Coats: Semigloss, waterborne, exterior, acrylic enamel applied at
spreading rate recommended by the manufacturer to achieve a total dry film
thickness of not less than 2.4 mils(0.061 mm).
1) Moore: MoorGlo Latex House&Trim Paint#096.
B. Wood Decking: Provide the following finish system over existing and new wood decks: �.
1. High Gloss Finish: 3 coats urethane modified alkyd finish.
a. First, Second and Third Coats:
Project No. 00058 09900 PAINTING-10
Renovations to Parsons Annex
Smith College
Northampton, Massachusetts
2. Insulation.
3. Accessory items.
W
G. Electrical items to be painted include,but are not limited to, the following:
40 1. Conduit and fittings.
2. Switchgear.
3. Panelboards.
W
H. Prime Coats: Before applying finish coats, apply a prime coat of material, as recommended by the
manufacturer, to material that is required to be painted or finished and that has not been prime
coated by others. Recoat primed and sealed surfaces where evidence of suction spots or unsealed
areas in first coat appears, to ensure a finish coat with no burn through or other defects due to
insufficient sealing.
1. Pigmented (Opaque) Finishes: Completely cover surfaces as necessary to provide a smooth,
opaque surface of uniform finish, color, appearance, and coverage. Cloudiness, spotting,
holidays, laps, brush marks, runs, sags, ropiness, or other surface imperfections will not be
acceptable.
J. Transparent (Clear) Finishes: Use multiple coats to produce a glass-smooth surface film of even
luster. Provide a finish free of laps, runs, cloudiness, color irregularity, brush marks, orange peel,
nail holes, or other surface imperfections.
1. Provide satin finish for final coats.
K. Completed Work: Match approved samples for color, texture, and coverage. Remove, refinish,
or repaint work not complying with requirements.
3.4 CLEANING
A. Cleanup: At the end of each workday, remove empty cans, rags, rubbish, and other discarded
paint materials from the site.
1. After completing painting, clean glass and paint-spattered surfaces. Remove spattered
paint by washing and scraping. Be careful not to scratch or damage adjacent finished
an surfaces.
3.5 PROTECTION
A. Protect work of other trades,whether being painted or not, against damage by painting. Correct
damage by cleaning, repairing or replacing, and repainting, as approved by Architect.
B. Provide "Wet Paint" signs to protect newly painted finishes. Remove temporary protective
wrappings provided by others to protect their work after completing painting operations.
1. At completion of construction activities of other trades, touch up and restore damaged or
defaced painted surfaces. Comply with procedures specified in PDCA P1.
Project No. 00058 09900 PAINTING-9
Renovations to Parsons Annex
Smith College
Northampton, Massachusetts
5. Paint surfaces behind movable equipment and furniture the same as similar exposed
surfaces. Before the final installation of equipment, paint surfaces behind permanently
fixed equipment or furniture with prime coat only.
6. Paint interior surfaces of ducts with a flat, nonspecular black paint where visible through
registers or grilles.
7. Paint back sides of access panels and removable or hinged covers to match exposed
surfaces.
8. Finish exterior doors on tops, bottoms, and side edges the same as exterior faces.
9. Finish interior of wall and base cabinets and similar field-finished casework as indicated. w
10. Sand lightly between each succeeding enamel or varnish coat.
B. Scheduling Painting: Apply first coat to surfaces that have been cleaned, pretreated, or otherwise
prepared for painting as soon as practicable after preparation and before subsequent surface
deterioration.
1. The number of coats and the film thickness required are the same regardless of application
method. Do not apply succeeding coats until the previous coat has cured as recommended
by the manufacturer. If sanding is required to produce a smooth, even surface according
.A
to manufacturer's written instructions, sand between applications.
2. Omit primer on metal surfaces that have been shop primed and touchup painted.
3. If undercoats, stains, or other conditions show through final coat of paint, apply additional
coats until paint film is of uniform finish, color, and appearance. Give special attention to ■
ensure edges, corners, crevices, welds, and exposed fasteners receive a dry film thickness
equivalent to that of flat surfaces.
4. Allow sufficient time between successive coats to permit proper drying. Do not recoat
surfaces until paint has dried to where it feels firm, does not deform or feel sticky under
moderate thumb pressure, and where application of another coat of paint does not cause
the undercoat to lift or lose adhesion.
C. Application Procedures: Apply paints and coatings by brush, roller, spray, or other applicators
according to manufacturer's written instructions.
1. Brushes: Use brushes best suited for the type of material applied. Use brush of
appropriate size for the surface or item being painted. �+
2. Rollers: Use rollers of carpet,velvet back, or high-pile sheep's wool as recommended by the
manufacturer for the material and texture required.
3. Spray Equipment: Use airless spray equipment with orifice size as recommended by the .�
manufacturer for the material and texture required.
D. Minimum Coating Thickness: Apply paint materials no thinner than manufacturer's
recommended spreading rate. Provide the total dry film thickness of the entire system as
recommended by the manufacturer.
E. Mechanical and Electrical Work: Painting of mechanical and electrical work is limited to items
exposed in equipment rooms and in occupied spaces.
F. Mechanical items to be painted include, but are not limited to, the following:
1. Piping, pipe hangers, and supports.
Project No. 00058 09900 PAINTING-8
ar
Renovations to Parsons Annex
Smith College
Northampton, Massachusetts
5. Galvanized Surfaces: Clean galvanized surfaces with nonpetroleum-based solvents so
surface is free of oil and surface contaminants. Remove pretreatment from galvanized
sheet metal fabricated from coil stock by mechanical methods.
6. Veneer plaster: Dust and wipe down with damp cloth. Note any imperfections and have
corrected before applying prime coat or sealer.
7. Existing finishes: Scrape loose paint, fill voids, sand and wash painted wood surfaces.
sue.
8. Existing composite exterior and interior details and ornament: Strip front porch column
capitals and interior painted mantelpieces with water soluble paint stripper. Test sample
W area for compatibility.
9. Existing natural finish wood and natural wood casework: Wash, lightly sand, steel wool
an and wash again.
10. Strip existing wall coverings, patch walls if necessary, restore plaster and wash.
go 11. Do not begin painting operations over unprepared surfaces.
D. Materials Preparation: Mix and prepare paint materials according to manufacturer's written
on instructions.
1. Maintain containers used in mixing and applying paint in a clean condition, free of foreign
as materials and residue.
2. Stir material before application to produce a mixture of uniform density. Stir as required
during application. Do not stir surface film into material. If necessary, remove surface
film and strain material before using.
3. Use only thinners approved by paint manufacturer and only within recommended limits.
E. Tinting: Tint each undercoat a lighter shade to simplify identification of each coat when multiple
coats of the same material are applied. Tint undercoats to match the color of the finish coat, but
provide sufficient differences in shade of undercoats to distinguish each separate coat.
3.3 APPLICATION
A. General: Apply paint according to manufacturer's written instructions. Use applicators and
techniques best suited for substrate and type of material being applied.
1. Surface treatments, and finishes are indicated in the schedules.
2. Do not paint over dirt, rust, scale, grease, moisture, scuffed surfaces, or conditions
detrimental to formation of a durable paint film.
3. Provide finish coats that are compatible with primers used.
4. The term "exposed surfaces" includes areas visible when permanent or built-in fixtures,
convector covers, covers for finned-tube radiation, grilles, and similar components are in
place. Extend coatings in these areas, as required, to maintain the system integrity and
provide desired protection.
on Project No. 00058 09900 PAINTING-7
OW
Renovations to Parsons Annex
Smith College
Northampton, Massachusetts
impossible because of the size or weight of the item, provide surface-applied protection before
surface preparation and painting.
1. After completing painting operations in each space or area, reinstall items removed using
workers skilled in the trades involved.
B. Cleaning: Before applying paint or other surface treatments, clean the substrates of substances
that could impair the bond of the various coatings. Remove oil and grease before cleaning.
4W
1. Schedule cleaning and painting so dust and other contaminants from the cleaning process
will not fall on wet, newly painted surfaces.
C. Surface Preparation: Clean and prepare surfaces to be painted according to manufacturer's
written instructions for each particular substrate condition and as specified.
1. Provide barrier coats over incompatible primers or remove and reprime.
2. Existing siding: Power-wash existing siding to remove dust, dirt and loose paint. Use care
to protect existing composite column capitals, and ornamental wood details.
a. After washing, hand scrape and spot prime bare wood.
b. Re-nail or replace loose or damaged siding.
C. Seal around windows and trim with exterior paintable caulking.
3. Wood: Clean surfaces of dirt, oil, and other foreign substances with scrapers, mineral
spirits, and sandpaper, as required. Sand surfaces exposed to view smooth and dust off. ..
a. Scrape and clean small, dry, seasoned knots, and apply a thin coat of white shellac or
other recommended knot sealer before applying primer. After priming, fill holes
and imperfections in finish surfaces with putty or plastic wood filler. Sand smooth
when dried.
b. Prime, stain, or seal wood to be painted immediately on delivery. Prime edges, ends,
faces, undersides, and backsides of wood, including cabinets, counters, cases, and
paneling.
C. When transparent finish is required, backprime with spar varnish.
d. Backprime paneling on interior partitions where masonry, plaster, or other wet wall
construction occurs on backside.
e. Seal tops, bottoms, and cutouts of unprimed wood doors with a heavy coat of
varnish or sealer immediately on delivery. .�
4. Ferrous Metals: Clean ungalvanized ferrous-metal surfaces that have not been shop coated;
remove oil, grease, dirt, loose mill scale, and other foreign substances. Use solvent or
mechanical cleaning methods that comply with the Steel Structures Painting Council's
(SSPQ recommendations.
a. Treat bare and sandblasted or pickled clean metal with a metal treatment wash coat
before priming.
b. Touch up bare areas and shop-applied prime coats that have been damaged. Wire-
brush, clean with solvents recommended by paint manufacturer, and touch up with "!
the same primer as the shop coat.
Project No. 00058 09900 PAINTING-6
.R
.W
Renovations to Parsons Annex
Smith College
Northampton, Massachusetts
3. Benjamin Moore& Co. (Moore).
4. PPG Industries, Inc. (PPG).
so 5. Pratt& Lambert, Inc. (P& Q.
6. Sherwin-Williams Co. (S-W).
2.2 PAINT MATERIALS, GENERAL
A. Material Compatibility: Provide block fillers, primers, undercoats, and finish-coat materials that
are compatible with one another and the substrates indicated under conditions of service and
application, as demonstrated by manufacturer based on testing and field experience.
B. Material Quality: Provide manufacturer's best-quality paint material of the various coating types
specified. Paint-material containers not displaying manufacturer's product identification will not
w
be acceptable.
1. Proprietary Names: Use of manufacturer's proprietary product names to designate colors
or materials is not intended to imply that products named are required to be used to the
exclusion of equivalent products of other manufacturers. Furnish manufacturer's material
data and certificates of performance for proposed substitutions.
an C. Colors: Provide custom colors of the finished paint systems to match the Architect's samples.
PART 3-EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with the Applicator present, under which painting will
be performed for compliance with paint application requirements.
1. Do not begin to apply paint until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected and
surfaces receiving paint are thoroughly dry.
2. Start of painting will be construed as the Applicator's acceptance of surfaces and conditions
within a particular area.
*� B. Coordination of Work: Review other Sections in which primers are provided to ensure
compatibility of the total system for various substrates. On request, furnish information on
characteristics of finish materials to ensure use of compatible primers.
1. Notify the Architect about anticipated problems using the materials specified over
substrates primed by others.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. General: Remove hardware and hardware accessories, plates, machined surfaces, lighting fixtures,
and similar items already installed that are not to be painted. If removal is impractical or
Project No. 00058 09900 PAINTING-5
+•
Renovations to Parsons Annex
Smith College
Northampton, Massachusetts
1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE,AND HANDLING
A. Deliver materials to the Project Site in manufacturer's original, unopened packages and
containers bearing manufacturer's name and label, and the following information:
1. Product name or title of material.
2. Product description(generic classification or binder type).
3. Manufacturer's stock number and date of manufacture.
4. Contents by volume, for pigment and vehicle constituents.
5. Thinning instructions.
6. Application instructions.
7. Color name and number.
8. VOC content.
B. Store materials not in use in tightly covered containers in a well-ventilated area at a minimum
ambient temperature of 45 deg F (7 deg Q. Maintain containers used in storage in a clean
condition, free of foreign materials and residue.
1. Keep storage area neat and orderly. Remove oily rags and waste daily. Take necessary '
measures to ensure that workers and work areas are protected from fire and health hazards
resulting from handling, mixing, and application.
1.7 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Apply water-based paints only when the temperature of surfaces to be painted and surrounding
air temperatures are between 50 and 90 deg F(10 and 32 deg Q.
B. Apply solvent-thinned paints only when the temperature of surfaces to be painted and
surrounding air temperatures are between 45 and 95 deg F(7.2 and 35 deg Q.
C. Do not apply paint in snow, rain, fog, or mist; or when the relative humidity exceeds 85 percent;
or at temperatures less than 5 deg F(3 deg C)above the dew point; or to damp or wet surfaces.
1. Painting may continue during inclement weather if surfaces and areas to be painted are
enclosed and heated within temperature limits specified by manufacturer during
application and drying periods.
..R
PART 2-PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Available Products: Products listed in schedule represent a single manufacturer's system with
acceptable products for the finish indicated. Subject to compliance with requirements,
manufacturer's products that may be incorporated into the Work are limited to the following:
.,r
I. Devoe& Raynolds Co. (Devoe).
2. Fuller-O'Brien Paints(Fuller).
Project No. 00058 09900 PAINTING-4
as
Renovations to Parsons Annex
Smith College
we Northampton, Massachusetts
1. Flat refers to a lusterless or matte finish with a gloss range below 15 when measured at an
85-degree meter.
an 2. Eggshell refers to low-sheen finish with a gloss range between 5 and 20 when measured at a
60-degree meter.
3. Satin refers to low-sheen finish with a gloss range between 15 and 35 when measured at a
'! 60-degree meter.
4. Semigloss refers to medium-sheen finish with a gloss range between 30 and 65 when
measured at a 60-degree meter.
an 5. Full gloss refers to high-sheen finish with a gloss range more than 65 when measured at a
60-degree meter.
OR
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each paint system specified. Include block fillers and primers.
1. Material List: Provide an inclusive list of required coating materials. Indicate each
material and cross-reference specific coating, finish system, and application. Identify each
W material by manufacturer's catalog number and general classification.
2. Manufacturer's Information: Provide manufacturer's technical information, including
label analysis and instructions for handling, storing, and applying each coating material
" proposed for use.
3. Certification by the manufacturer that products supplied comply with local regulations
controlling use of volatile organic compounds (VOCs).
B. Color Samples: Provide samples of formulations used to match Architect's custom color
selections.
1. Provide 12 inch square samples of wall colors.
2. Provide 12 inch long samples of wood finishes to match existing finishes.
C. Mockups for Verification: 4 foot by 4 foot veneer plaster field samples each color and material to
be applied, with texture to simulate actual conditions, on representative Samples of the actual
substrate.
1. Provide stepped Samples, defining each separate coat, including fillers and primers. Use
representative colors when preparing Samples for review. Repaint until required sheen,
color, and texture are achieved.
2. Place samples in actual room for verification.
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Applicator Qualifications: Engage an experienced applicator who has completed painting system
applications similar in material and extent to that indicated for this Project with a record of
successful in-service performance.
an
B. Source Limitations: Obtain block fillers, primers, and undercoat materials for each coating
system from the same manufacturer as the finish coats.
go
Project No. 00058 09900 PAINTING-3
4W
go
Renovations to Parsons Annex
Smith College
Northampton, Massachusetts
2. Concealed surfaces include walls or ceilings in the following generally inaccessible spaces:
a. Foundation spaces.
b. Furred areas.
C. Ceiling plenums.
d. Utility tunnels. .■
e. Pipe spaces.
f. Duct shafts.
3. Finished metal surfaces include the following:
a. Anodized aluminum.
b. Stainless steel.
C. Chromium plate.
d. Copper.
e. Bronze and brass.
4. Operating parts include moving parts of operating equipment and the following:
a. Valve and damper operators.
b. Linkages.
C. Sensing devices.
d. Motor and fan shafts.
5. Labels: Do not paint over Underwriters Laboratories (UL), Factory Mutual (FM), or other
code-required labels or equipment name, identification, performance rating, or
nomenclature plates.
D. Related Sections include the following:
1. Division 5 Section"Metal Fabrications" for shop priming ferrous metal.
2. Division 6 Section "Exterior Architectural Woodwork" for shop priming exterior ,
architectural woodwork.
3. Division 6 Section "Interior Architectural Woodwork" for shop priming interior
architectural woodwork.
4. Division 8 Section"Steel Doors and Frames" for shop priming steel doors and frames.
5. Division 8 Section"Wood Windows" for shop priming wood windows.
6. Division 9 Section"Wall Coverings" for substrate sealer under wall coverings. ,
7. Divisions 15 and 16: Painting of mechanical and electrical work is specified in Divisions
15 and 16, respectively.
E. Alternates: Refer to Division 1 Section "Alternates" for description of Work in this Section
affected by alternates.
op
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. General: Standard coating terms defined in ASTM D 16 apply to this Section. .p
Project No. 00058 09900 PAINTING-2
w
Renovations to Parsons Annex
Smith College
go Northampton, Massachusetts
SECTION 09900-PAINTING
W
PART 1 -GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
W A. This Section includes surface preparation and field painting of the following:
1. Exposed exterior items and surfaces including:
a. Existing and new siding and trim in separate colors.
b. Special restorative treatment to composite column capitals.
C. Existing and new metal railings, doors, shutters and latticework.
2. Exposed new and existing interior items and surfaces.
3. Surface preparation, priming, and finish coats specified in this Section are in addition to
shop priming and surface treatment specified in other Sections.
B. Paint exposed surfaces, except where the paint schedules indicate that a surface or material is not
to be painted or is to remain natural. If the paint schedules do not specifically mention an item
or a surface, paint the item or surface the same as similar adjacent materials or surfaces whether
or not schedules indicate colors. If the schedules do not indicate color or finish, the Architect
will select from standard colors and finishes available.
1. Painting includes field painting of exposed bare and covered pipes and ducts (including
color coding), hangers, exposed steel and iron work, and primed metal surfaces of
mechanical and electrical equipment.
C. Do not paint prefinished items, concealed surfaces, finished metal surfaces, operating parts, and
labels.
4M
1. Prefinished items include the following factory-finished components:
a. New architectural casework.
b. Metal toilet enclosures.
C. Kitchen appliances.
d. Chair lift doors and frames.
e. Chair lift equipment.
f. Plumbing fixtures and trim.
g. Finished mechanical and electrical equipment.
h. Light fixtures.
i. Distribution cabinets.
Project No. 00058 09900 PAINTING-1
+sua
Renovations to Parsons Annex
Smith College
Northampton, Massachusetts
A. Perform the following operations immediately after installing carpet:
* 1. Remove excess adhesive, seam sealer, and other surface blemishes using cleaner
recommended by carpet manufacturer.
2. Remove yarns that protrude from carpet surface.
•W 3. Vacuum carpet using commercial machine with face-beater element.
B. Protect installed carpet to comply with CRI 104, Section 15, "Protection of Indoor Installations."
C. Protect carpet against damage from construction operations and placement of equipment and
fixtures during the remainder of construction period. Use protection methods indicated or
go recommended in writing by carpet manufacturer.
END OF SECTION 09680
w.
.w
Project No. 00058 09680 CARPET-5
w
Renovations to Parsons Annex
Smith College
Northampton, Massachusetts
2. Underlayment surface is free of irregularities and substances that may interfere with
adhesive bond or show through surface.
C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. General: Comply with CRI 104, Section 6.2, "Site Conditions; Floor Preparation," and carpet
manufacturer's written installation instructions for preparing substrates indicated to receive carpet
installation.
B. Use trowelable leveling and patching compounds, according to manufacturer's written
instructions, to fill cracks, holes, and depressions in substrates.
C. Remove coatings, including curing compounds, and other substances that are incompatible with
adhesives and that contain soap, wax, oil, or silicone, without using solvents. Use mechanical
methods recommended in writing by the following:
1. Carpet manufacturer.
D. Broom and vacuum clean substrates to be covered immediately before installing carpet. After
cleaning, examine substrates for moisture, alkaline salts, carbonation, or dust. Proceed with
installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.3 INSTALLATION
A. Direct-Glue-Down Installation: Comply with CRI 104, Section 8, "Direct Glue-Down ..
Installation."
B. Stair Installation: Comply with CRI 104, Section 12, "Carpet on Stairs."
C. Comply with carpet manufacturer's written recommendations for seam locations and direction of
carpet; maintain uniformity of carpet direction and lay of pile. At doorways, center seams under
the door in closed position.
D. Cut and fit carpet to butt tightly to vertical surfaces, permanent fixtures, and built-in furniture
including cabinets, pipes, outlets, edgings, thresholds, and nosings. Bind or seal cut edges as
recommended by carpet manufacturer.
ap
E. Extend carpet into toe spaces, door reveals, closets, open-bottomed obstructions, removable
flanges, alcoves, and similar openings.
F. Maintain reference markers, holes, and openings that are in place or marked for future cutting by
repeating on finish flooring as marked on subfloor. Use nonpermanent, nonstaining marking
device.
3.4 CLEANING AND PROTECTION
Project No. 00058 09680 CARPET-4
XW
Renovations to Parsons Annex
Smith College
IN Northampton, Massachusetts
PART 2-PRODUCTS
W
2.1 CARPET
�. A. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the following:
1. J&J Commercial; Center Stage.
a. Color and Pattern: As scheduled
b. Backings:
w
1) Lifespan MG thermoplastic polyurethane.
2) Endure attached cushion @ first floor except stair runner.
2.2 INSTALLATION ACCESSORIES
A. Trowelable Leveling and Patching Compounds: Latex-modified, hydraulic-cement-based
formulation provided by or recommended by the following:
1. Carpet manufacturer.
�w
B. Adhesives: Water-resistant, mildew-resistant, nonstaining type to suit products and subfloor
conditions indicated, that complies with flammability requirements for installed carpet and that is
recommended by the following:
1. Carpet manufacturer.
C. Edge Binding: Manufacturers standard edge binding where edges will be exposed.
D. Seaming Cement: Hot-melt adhesive tape or similar product recommended by carpet
manufacturer for taping seams and butting cut edges at backing to form secure seams and to
prevent pile loss at seams.
PART 3-EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions for compliance with requirements for maximum
moisture content, alkalinity range, installation tolerances, and other conditions affecting carpet
performance. Verify that substrates and conditions are satisfactory for carpet installation and
comply with requirements specified.
B. For wood subfloors,verify the following:
ON 1. Underlayment over subfloor complies with requirements specified in Division 6 Section
"Rough Carpentry."
no
Project No. 00058 09680 CARPET-3
40
Renovations to Parsons Annex
Smith College
Northampton, Massachusetts
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Installer Qualifications: An experienced installer who is certified by the Floor Covering
Installation Board or who can demonstrate compliance with its certification program
requirements.
1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE,AND HANDLING
A. General: Comply with CRI 104,Section 5, "Storage and Handling."
1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. General: Comply with CRI 104,Section 6.1, "Site Conditions;Temperature and Humidity."
B. Environmental Limitations: Do not install carpet until wet work in spaces is complete and dry,
and ambient temperature and humidity conditions are maintained at the levels indicated for
Project when occupied for its intended use.
C. Do not install carpet over concrete slabs until slabs have cured and are sufficiently dry to bond
with adhesive and concrete slabs have pH range recommended by carpet manufacturer.
D. Where demountable partitions or other items are indicated for installation on top of carpet,
install carpet before installing these items. ,
1.7 WARRANTY
A. General Warranty: Special warranty specified in this Article shall not deprive Owner of other
rights Owner may have under other provisions of the Contract Documents and shall be in
addition to, and run concurrent with, other warranties made by Contractor under requirements
of the Contract Documents.
B. Special Carpet Warranty: Written warranty, signed by carpet manufacturer agreeing to replace
carpet that does not comply with requirements or that fails within specified warranty period.
Warranty does not include deterioration or failure of carpet due to unusual traffic, failure of
substrate,vandalism, or abuse. Failures include, but are not limited to, more than 10 percent loss
of face fiber, edge raveling, snags, runs, and delamination.
1. Warranty Period: 10 years from date of Substantial Completion.
C. Special Carpet Cushion Warranty: Written warranty, signed by carpet cushion manufacturer
agreeing to replace carpet cushion that does not comply with requirements or that fails within ,
specified warranty period. Warranty does not include deterioration or failure of carpet cushion
due to unusual traffic, failure of substrate, vandalism, or abuse. Failure includes, but is not
limited to, permanent indentation or compression.
1. Warranty Period: 10 years from date of Substantial Completion.
Project No. 00058 09680 CARPET-2
ON
Renovations to Parsons Annex
Smith College
Northampton, Massachusetts
SECTION 09680-CARPET
PART 1 -GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
ws
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
■w
1.2 SUMMARY
*" A. This Section includes the following:
1. Woven carpet.
2. Carpet cushion.
go
B. Related Sections include the following:
1. Division 2 Section"Selective Demolition" for removing existing floor coverings.
2. Division 9 Section "Resilient Wall Base and Accessories" for resilient wall base and
accessories installed with carpet.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include manufacturer's written data on
physical characteristics, durability, and fade resistance. Include installation recommendations for
each type of substrate required.
B. Samples: For each of the following products and for each color and texture required. Label each
Sample with manufacturer's name, material description, color, pattern, and designation indicated
on Drawings and in schedules.
1. Carpet: 12-inch-(300-mm-)square Sample.
w 2. Exposed Edge Stripping and Accessory: 12-inch-(300-mm-)long Samples.
3. Carpet Cushion: 6-inch-(150-mm-)square Sample.
C. Seaming Diagrams: Provide seaming diagrams for stair 100 ST1 and 200 ST1.
D. Maintenance Data: For carpet to include in maintenance manuals specified in Division 1.
Include the following:
1. Methods for maintaining carpet, including cleaning and stain-removal products and
'M procedures and manufacturer's recommended maintenance schedule.
2. Precautions for cleaning materials and methods that could be detrimental to carpet.
Project No. 00058 09680 CARPET-1
Renovations to Parsons Annex
Smith College
Northampton, Massachusetts
C. Clean floor surfaces not more than 4 days before dates scheduled for inspections intended to
establish date of Substantial Completion in each Project area. Clean floor coverings according to
manufacturer's written recommendations.
1. After cleaning, restore polish finish according to floor covering manufacturer's written
recommendations. .R
3.7 LINOLEUM FLOOR COVERING SCHEDULE
A. Linoleum Sheet Flooring: Provide linoleum sheet flooring complying with the following:
1. Forbo Industries: Marmoleum "Dual".
B. Linoleum Tile Flooring: Provide linoleum tile flooring complying with the following:
1. Forbo Industries: Marmoleum "Dual" in two colors.
END OF SECTION 09654
Project No. 00058 09654 LINOLEUM FLOOR COVERINGS-6
1w
Renovations to Parsons Annex
Smith College
"" Northampton, Massachusetts
A. Lay out tiles from center marks established with principal walls, discounting minor offsets, so tiles
at opposite edges of room are of equal width. Adjust as necessary to avoid using cut widths that
equal less than one-half of a tile at perimeter.
1. Lay tiles at a 45-degree angle with room axis, unless otherwise indicated.
on B. Match tiles for color and pattern by selecting tiles from cartons of the same batch and mixing tiles
as recommended in writing by manufacturer. Cut tiles neatly around all fixtures. Discard
broken, cracked, chipped, or deformed tiles.
1. Lay tiles in checkerboard pattern with grain direction alternating in adjacent tiles.
2. Lay tiles in pattern of colors and sizes indicated on Drawings.
IF
3.5 SHEET FLOORING INSTALLATION
A. Lay out sheet flooring to comply with the following requirements:
1. Maintain uniformity of floor covering direction.
2. Arrange for a minimum number of seams and place them in inconspicuous and low-traffic
areas, and not less than 6 inches(150 mm) away from parallel joints in flooring substrates.
3. Match edges of sheet flooring for color shading and pattern at seams according to
manufacturer's written recommendations.
4. Avoid cross and butt seams.
5. Eliminate deformations that result from hanging method used during the drying process
(stove bar marks) according to manufacturer's written recommendations.
3.6 CLEANING AND PROTECTING
A. Perform the following operations immediately after installing flooring products:
1. Remove adhesive and other surface blemishes using cleaner recommended in writing by
floor covering manufacturer.
2. Sweep and vacuum floor thoroughly.
3. Do not wash floor until after time period recommended in writing by floor covering
manufacturer.
4. Damp-mop floor to remove marks and soil using method and cleaner recommended in
writing by floor covering manufacturer.
B. Protect flooring against mars, marks, indentations, and other damage from construction
to operations and placement of equipment and fixtures during the remainder of construction
period. Use protection methods indicated or recommended in writing by floor covering
manufacturer.
1. Apply protective floor polish to floor surfaces that are free from soil, adhesive, and surface
blemishes.
a. Use commercially available product recommended in writing by floor covering
manufacturer.
b. Coordinate selection of floor polish with Owner's maintenance service.
�s
Project No. 00058 09654 LINOLEUM FLOOR COVERINGS-5
Renovations to Parsons Annex
Smith College
Northampton, Massachusetts
A. General: Comply with linoleum floor covering manufacturer's written installation instructions
for preparing substrates indicated to receive linoleum floor coverings.
B. Use trowelable leveling and patching compounds, according to manufacturer's written
instructions, to fill cracks, holes, and depressions in substrates.
C. Remove coatings, including curing compounds, and other substances that are incompatible with
flooring adhesives and that contain soap, wax, oil, or silicone, using mechanical methods
recommended by manufacturer. Do not use solvents.
D. Broom and vacuum clean substrates to be covered immediately before product installation. After
cleaning, examine substrates for moisture, alkaline salts, carbonation, or dust. Do not proceed
with installation until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.3 FLOOR COVERING INSTALLATION, GENERAL XW
A. Comply with manufacturer's written installation instructions.
am
B. Scribe, cut, and fit floor coverings to butt neatly and tightly to vertical surfaces and permanent
fixtures, including built-in furniture, cabinets, pipes, outlets, edgings, door frames, thresholds,
and nosings. am
C. Extend floor coverings into toe spaces, door reveals, closets, and similar openings.
D. Maintain reference markers, holes, and openings that are in place or marked for future cutting by
repeating on finish flooring as marked on subfloor. Use chalk or other nonpermanent,
nonstaining marking device. '■,
E. Install floor coverings on covers for telephone and electrical ducts and similar items in finished
floor areas. Maintain overall continuity of color and pattern with pieces of flooring installed on
covers. Tightly adhere edges to perimeter of substrate around covers and to covers.
F. Adhere floor coverings to substrates using a full spread of adhesive applied to substrate to comply
with adhesive and floor covering manufacturers' written instructions, including those for trowel
notching, adhesive mixing, and adhesive open and working times.
1. Provide completed installation without open cracks, voids, raising and puckering at joints,
telegraphing of adhesive spreader marks, and other surface imperfections.
G. Roll floor coverings according to floor covering manufacturer's written instructions.
H. Heat-Welded Seams: Rout joints and heat weld with welding bead, permanently fusing sections
into a seamless floor covering. Prepare, weld, and finish seams according to manufacturer's
written instructions and ASTM F 1516 to produce surfaces flush with adjoining floor covering
surfaces.
3.4 TILE INSTALLATION
Project No. 00058 09654 LINOLEUM FLOOR COVERINGS-4
on
Renovations to Parsons Annex
Smith College
4W Northampton, Massachusetts
2.2 PRODUCTS
W A. Linoleum Floor Coverings: Consisting of oxidized linseed or other vegetable drying oil and rosin,
mixed with ground cork or wood flour, mineral filler, and pigments. Mixture is bonded and
keyed to a burlap(jute) or other suitable fibrous backing so that backing is partially embedded in
mixture. Patterns and colors extend through entire floor covering thickness.
B. Trowelable Leveling and Patching Compounds: Latex-modified, portland-cement-based
formulation provided or approved by floor covering manufacturer for applications indicated.
C. Adhesives: Water-resistant type recommended in writing by floor covering manufacturer for
products and substrate conditions indicated.
D. Heat-Welding Bead: Solid-strand product of floor covering manufacturer for heat-welding
linoleum seams.
1. Color: Match field color of floor covering.
PART 3 ,EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions where installation of linoleum floor coverings will
occur, with Installer present, for compliance with manufacturer's requirements. Verify that
substrates and conditions are satisfactory for floor covering installation and comply with
requirements specified.
B. Concrete Substrates: Verify that concrete slabs comply with ASTM F 710 and the following:
1. Slab substrates are dry and free of curing compounds, sealers, hardeners, and other
materials that may interfere with adhesive bond. Determine adhesion and dryness
characteristics by performing bond, moisture, and pH tests recommended in writing by
floor covering manufacturer.
2. Substrates are free of cracks, ridges, depressions, scale, and foreign deposits.
C. For wood subfloors,verify the following:
1. Underlayment over subfloor complies with requirements specified in Division 6 Section
me "Rough Carpentry."
2. Underlayment surface is free of irregularities and substances that may interfere with
adhesive bond, show through surface, or stain floor covering.
D. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 PREPARATION
Project No. 00058 09654 LINOLEUM FLOOR COVERINGS-3
Renovations to Parsons Annex
Smith College
Northampton, Massachusetts
B. Source Limitations: Obtain each type, color, and pattern of linoleum floor covering specified
from one source with resources to provide products of consistent quality in appearance and
physical properties without delaying the Work.
1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE,AND HANDLING
A. Deliver linoleum floor coverings and related products to Project site in manufacturer's original,
unopened cartons and containers, each bearing names of product and manufacturer, Project
identification, and shipping and handling instructions.
B. Store products in dry spaces protected from the weather with ambient temperatures maintained ow
between 50 and 90 deg F(10 and 32 deg Q.
C. Store tiles on flat surfaces.
w�
D. Store rolls upright.
E. Move linoleum floor coverings and related products into spaces where they will be installed at
least 72 hours in advance of installation.
.m
1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Maintain a temperature of not less than 70 deg F (21 deg C) or more than 95 deg F(35 deg C) in ow
spaces to receive linoleum floor coverings for at least 72 hours before installation, during
installation, and for at least 72 hours after installation. After postinstallation period, maintain a
temperature of not less than 55 deg F(13 deg C) or more than 95 deg F(35 deg Q. ow
B. Do not install linoleum floor coverings until they are at the same temperature as the space where
they are to be installed.
aw
C. Maintain relative humidity in spaces to receive linoleum floor coverings before, during, and after
installation within the range recommended in writing by manufacturer.
D. Close spaces to traffic during flooring installation and for time period after installation
recommended in writing by manufacturer.
E. Install linoleum floor coverings after other finishing operations, including painting and ceiling
installation, have been completed.
am
PART 2-PRODUCTS
ow
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the products indicated for aw
each designation in the Linoleum Floor Covering Schedule at the end of Part 3.
1W
Project No. 00058 09654 LINOLEUM FLOOR COVERINGS-2
WP
40
Renovations to Parsons Annex
Smith College
W Northampton, Massachusetts
SECTION 09654-LINOLEUM FLOOR COVERINGS
yew
PART 1 -GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
on A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
W,
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the following:
1. Linoleum floor tile.
2. Linoleum sheet flooring.
B. Related Sections include the following:
1. Division 9 Section "Resilient Wall Base and Accessories" for resilient wall base, reducer
strips, and other accessories installed with linoleum floor coverings.
a�
1.3 SUBMITTALS
! A. Product Data: For each type of product specified.
B. Samples for Verification: In manufacturer's standard size, but not less than 6-by-9-inch (150-by-
+�e 230-mm) sections of each color and pattern of linoleum floor covering specified, showing the full
range of variations expected in these characteristics.
C. Heat-Welded Seam Samples: Of each heat-welding bead and flooring product, color, and pattern
combination required, with seam running lengthwise and in center of 6-by-9-inch (150-by-230-
mm) sample made and applied to a rigid backing by Installer for this Project.
D. Installer Certificates: Signed by manufacturer certifying that installers comply with specified
requirements.
E. Maintenance Data: For linoleum floor coverings to include in the maintenance manuals
specified in Division 1.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
ON A. Installer Qualifications: Engage an experienced installer to perform work of this Section who has
specialized in installing linoleum floor coverings similar to those required for this Project and
with a record of successful in-service performance.
Project No. 00058 09654 LINOLEUM FLOOR COVERINGS-1
Renovations to Parsons Annex
Smith College
on Northampton, Massachusetts
C. Rubber Accessory Molding: Provide appropriate rubber accessory moldings complying with the
following:
1. Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range of colors produced for
rubber accessory molding complying with requirements indicated.
2. Product Descriptions: Carpet bar for tackless installations. Carpet edge for glue-down
applications. Carpet nosing. Nosing for rubber tile. Reducer strip for resilient flooring.
END OF SECTION 09653
w
Project No. 00058 09653 RESILIENT WALL BASE AND ACCESSORIES-5
4W
Renovations to Parsons Annex
Smith College
Northampton, Massachusetts
C. Apply resilient products to stairs as indicated and according to manufacturer's written installation
instructions.
wr
3.4 CLEANING AND PROTECTING
A. Perform the following operations immediately after installing resilient products:
1. Remove adhesive and other surface blemishes using cleaner recommended by resilient ,
product manufacturers.
2. Sweep or vacuum horizontal surfaces thoroughly.
3. Do not wash resilient products until after time period recommended by resilient product
manufacturer.
4. Damp-mop or sponge resilient products to remove marks and soil.
B. Protect resilient products against mars, marks, indentations, and other damage from construction
operations and placement of equipment and fixtures ,during the remainder of construction
period. Use protection methods indicated or recommended in writing by resilient product
manufacturer.
1. Apply protective floor polish to vinyl resilient products installed on floors and stairs that
are free from soil, visible adhesive, and surface blemishes, if recommended by
manufacturer.
a. Use commercially available product acceptable to resilient product manufacturer. .�.
b. Coordinate selection of floor polish with Owner's maintenance service.
2. Cover resilient products installed on floors and stairs with undyed, untreated building
paper until inspection for Substantial Completion.
C. Clean resilient products not more than 4 days before dates scheduled for inspections intended to
establish date of Substantial Completion in each area of Project. Clean products according to ..
manufacturer's written recommendations.
1. Before cleaning, strip protective floor polish that was applied to vinyl products on floors aw
and stairs after completing installation only if required to restore polish finish and if
recommended by resilient product manufacturer.
2. After cleaning, reapply polish on vinyl products on floors and stairs to restore protective
floor finish according to resilient product manufacturer's written recommendations.
Coordinate with Owner's maintenance program.
tee,
3.5 RESILIENT WALL BASE AND ACCESSORY SCHEDULE
A. Rubber Stair Treads with integral risers: Nora Flooring: Nora Grano, hammered finish.
B. Rubber Nosings: Nora Flooring;T 5019 E
1. Color: As selected from standard colors.
Project No. 00058 09653 RESILIENT WALL BASE AND ACCESSORIES-4
Renovations to Parsons Annex
Smith College
Northampton, Massachusetts
2.4 INSTALLATION ACCESSORIES
on A. Trowelable Leveling and Patching Compounds: Latex-modified, portland-cement-based
formulation provided or approved by resilient product manufacturer for applications indicated.
B. Stair-Tread-Nose Filler: Two-part epoxy compound recommended by resilient tread manufacturer
to fill nosing substrates that do not conform to tread contours.
C. Adhesives: Water-resistant type recommended by manufacturer to suit resilient products and
substrate conditions indicated.
PART 3 -EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions where installation of resilient products will occur, with
Installer present, for compliance with manufacturer's requirements, including those for maximum
moisture content. Verify that substrates and conditions are satisfactory for resilient product
installation and comply with requirements specified. Do not proceed with installation until
„ unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. General: Comply with manufacturer's written installation instructions for preparing substrates
indicated to receive resilient products.
B. Use trowelable leveling and patching compounds, according to manufacturer's written
instructions, to fill cracks, holes, and depressions in substrates.
C. Use stair-tread-nose filler, according to resilient tread manufacturer's written instructions, to fill
nosing substrates that do not conform to tread contours.
D. Remove coatings, including curing compounds, and other substances that are incompatible with
adhesives and that contain soap, wax, oil, or silicone, using mechanical methods recommended
by manufacturer. Do not use solvents.
E. Broom and vacuum clean substrates to be covered immediately before installing resilient
products. After cleaning, examine substrates for moisture, alkaline salts, carbonation, or dust.
Do not proceed with installation until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
as 3.3 INSTALLATION
A. General: Install resilient products according to manufacturer's written installation instructions.
w�
B. Place resilient products so they are butted to adjacent materials and bond to substrates with
adhesive. Install reducer strips at edges of flooring that would otherwise be exposed.
Project No. 00058 09653 RESILIENT WALL BASE AND ACCESSORIES-3
Renovations to Parsons Annex
Smith College
Northampton, Massachusetts
B. Store products in dry spaces protected from the weather, with ambient temperatures maintained
between 50 and 90 deg F(10 and 32 deg Q.
C. Move products into spaces where they will be installed at least 48 hours before installation, unless
longer conditioning period is recommended in writing by manufacturer.
■p
1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Maintain a temperature of not less than 70 deg F (21 deg C)or more than 95 deg F (35 deg C) in ,.
spaces to receive resilient products for at least 48 hours before installation, during installation,
and for at least 48 hours after installation, unless manufacturer's written recommendations
specify longer time periods. After postinstallation period, maintain a temperature of not less than
55 deg F(13 deg C)or more than 95 deg F(35 deg Q.
B. Do not install products until they are at the same temperature as the space where they are to be
installed.
C. For resilient products installed on traffic surfaces, close spaces to traffic during installation and
for time period after installation recommended in writing by manufacturer.
D. Coordinate resilient product installation with other construction to minimize possibility of
damage and soiling during remainder of construction period. Install resilient products after other
finishing operations, including painting, have been completed.
PART 2-PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the products indicated for
each designation in the Resilient Wall Base and Accessory Schedule at the end of Part 3.
2.2 RESILIENT STAIR ACCESSORIES
A. Rubber Stair Treads: Products of style suitable for use indicated and complying with FS RR-T-
650, Composition A and with requirements specified in the Resilient Wall Base and Accessory
Schedule.
B. Risers: Products of same manufacturer as stair treads and complying with requirements specified
in the Resilient Wall Base and Accessory Schedule.
ow
2.3 RESILIENT ACCESSORIES
A. Rubber Accessories: Products complying with requirements specified in the Resilient Wall Base 1W
and Accessory Schedule.
a,
Project No. 00058 09653 RESILIENT WALL BASE AND ACCESSORIES-2
..
Renovations to Parsons Annex
Smith College
M Northampton, Massachusetts
SECTION 09653-RESILIENT WALL BASE AND ACCESSORIES
in
PART 1 -GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
�w
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the following:
1. Resilient stair accessories.
2. Resilient flooring accessories.
w 3. Resilient carpet accessories.
B. Related Sections include the following:
1. Division 9 Section"Resilient Tile Flooring."
2. Division 9 Section"Sheet Vinyl Floor Coverings."
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product specified.
B. Samples for Verification: In manufacturer's standard sizes, but not less than 12 inches (300 mm)
long, of each product color and pattern specified.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Installer Qualifications: Engage an experienced installer to perform work of this Section who has
specialized in installing resilient products similar to those required for this Project and with a
record of successful in-service performance.
B. Source Limitations: Obtain each type and color of product specified from one source with
resources to provide products of consistent quality in appearance and physical properties without
delaying the Work.
w
1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE,AND HANDLING
A. Deliver products to Project site in manufacturer's original, unopened cartons and containers, each
bearing names of product and manufacturer, Project identification, and shipping and handling
instructions.
Project No. 00058 09653 RESILIENT WALL BASE AND ACCESSORIES-1
Renovations to Parsons Annex
Smith College
Northampton, Massachusetts
3.4 CLEANING AND PROTECTING
A. Perform the following operations immediately after installing sheet vinyl floor coverings:
1. Remove adhesive and other surface blemishes using cleaner recommended by floor
covering manufacturer.
2. Sweep or vacuum floor thoroughly.
3. Do not wash floor covering until after time period recommended by floor covering
manufacturer.
4. Damp-mop floor to remove marks and soil.
W B. Protect flooring against mars, marks, indentations, and other damage from construction
operations and placement of equipment and fixtures during the remainder of construction
period. Use protection methods indicated or recommended in writing by floor covering
manufacturer.
1. Apply protective floor polish to sheet vinyl floor covering surfaces that are free from soil,
wiu
visible adhesive, and surface blemishes, if recommended in writing by manufacturer.
a. Use commercially available product acceptable to floor covering manufacturer.
b. Coordinate selection of floor polish with Owner's maintenance service.
w
2. Cover sheet vinyl floor coverings with undyed, untreated building paper until inspection
for Substantial Completion.
" 3. Do not move heavy and sharp objects directly over sheet vinyl floor coverings. Place
plywood or hardboard panels over floor coverings and under objects while they are being
moved. Slide or roll objects over panels without moving panels.
C. Clean sheet vinyl floor coverings not more than 4 days before dates scheduled for inspections
intended to establish date of Substantial Completion in each area of Project. Clean floor
coverings according to manufacturer's written recommendations.
1. Before cleaning, strip protective floor polish that was applied after completing installation
only if required to restore polish finish and if recommended by floor covering
manufacturer.
3.5 SHEET VINYL FLOOR COVERING SCHEDULE
A. Forbo Industries,Smaragd.
on
END OF SECTION 09652
Project No. 00058 09652 SHEET VINYL FLOOR COVERINGS-5
Renovations to Parsons Annex
Smith College
Northampton, Massachusetts ■�
A. General: Comply with sheet vinyl floor covering manufacturer's written installation instructions.
B. Unroll sheet vinyl floor coverings and allow them to stabilize before cutting and fitting, if
recommended in writing by manufacturer.
C. Lay out sheet vinyl floor coverings to comply with the following requirements: *"
1. Maintain uniformity of sheet vinyl floor covering direction.
2. Arrange for a minimum number of seams and place them in inconspicuous and low-traffic
areas, and not less than 6 inches(150 mm) away from parallel joints in flooring substrates.
3. Match edges of sheet vinyl floor coverings for color shading and pattern at seams according
to manufacturer's written recommendations.
4. Avoid cross seams.
D. Scribe, cut, and fit sheet vinyl floor coverings to butt neatly and tightly to vertical surfaces and ,
permanent fixtures, including built-in furniture, cabinets, pipes, outlets, edgings, door frames,
thresholds, and nosings.
E. Integral Flash Cove Base: Where indicated, cut sheet vinyl floor coverings to form integral base
of height indicated at vertical surfaces.
F. Extend sheet vinyl floor coverings into toe spaces, door reveals, closets, and similar openings.
G. Maintain reference markers, holes, and openings that are in place or marked for future cutting by
repeating on finish flooring as marked on subfloor. Use chalk or other nonpermanent,
nonstaining marking device.
H. Install sheet vinyl floor coverings on covers for telephone and electrical ducts, and similar items in ..
finished floor areas. Maintain overall continuity of color and pattern with pieces of flooring
installed on covers. Tightly adhere edges to perimeter of floor around covers and to covers.
1. Adhere sheet vinyl floor coverings to flooring substrates to comply with floor covering
manufacturer's written instructions, including those for trowel notching, adhesive mixing, and
adhesive open and working times.
1. Produce completed installation without open cracks, voids, raising and puckering at joints,
telegraphing of adhesive spreader marks, and other surface imperfections.
2. Form integral flash cove base by flashing floor covering up vertical surfaces. Support floor w�
covering at horizontal and vertical junction with cove strip. Butt floor covering at top of
base against cap strip.
■
J. Heat-Welded Seams: Rout joints and heat weld with welding bead, permanently fusing sections
into a seamless floor covering. Prepare, weld, and finish seams according to manufacturer's
written instructions and ASTM F 1516 to produce surfaces flush with adjoining floor covering
surfaces.
K. Hand roll sheet vinyl floor coverings in both directions from center out to embed floor coverings *
in adhesive and eliminate trapped air. At walls, door casings, and other locations where access by
roller is impractical, press floor coverings firmly in place with flat-bladed instrument.
Project No. 00058 09652 SHEET VINYL FLOOR COVERINGS-4
10
Renovations to Parsons Annex
Smith College
we Northampton, Massachusetts
2.3 INSTALLATION ACCESSORIES
A. Trowelable Leveling and Patching Compounds: Latex-modified, portland-cement-based
formulation provided or approved by floor covering manufacturer for applications indicated.
B. Adhesives: Water-resistant type recommended by manufacturer to suit sheet vinyl floor covering
and substrate conditions indicated.
C. Heat-Welding Bead: Solid-strand product of floor covering manufacturer for heat-welding seams.
1. Color: Match field color of sheet vinyl floor covering.
D. Cove Strip: 1-inch- (25.4-mm-) radius support for integral flash cove base provided or approved
by floor covering manufacturer.
PART 3-EXECUTION
00 3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions where installation of sheet vinyl floor coverings will
occur, with Installer present, for compliance with manufacturer's requirements. Verify that
substrates and conditions are satisfactory for floor covering installation and comply with
requirements specified.
B. For wood subfloors,verify the following:
1. Underlayment over subfloor complies with requirements specified in Division 6 Section
"Rough Carpentry."
2. Underlayment surface is free of irregularities and substances that may interfere with
adhesive bond, show through surface, or stain sheet vinyl floor coverings.
C. Do not proceed with installation until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
4
3.2 PREPARATION
A. General: Comply with sheet vinyl floor covering manufacturer's written installation instructions
for preparing substrates indicated to receive sheet vinyl floor coverings.
B. Use trowelable leveling and patching compounds, according to manufacturer's written
instructions, to fill cracks, holes, and depressions in substrates.
C. Broom and vacuum clean substrates to be covered immediately before installing sheet vinyl floor
coverings. After cleaning, examine substrates for moisture, alkaline salts, carbonation, or dust.
Do not proceed with installation until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
w
3.3 INSTALLATION
on
Project No. 00058 09652 SHEET VINYL FLOOR COVERINGS-3
Renovations to Parsons Annex
Smith College
Northampton, Massachusetts
1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE,AND HANDLING
A. Deliver sheet vinyl floor coverings and installation accessories to Project site in manufacturer's
original, unopened cartons and containers, each bearing names of product and manufacturer,
Project identification, and shipping and handling instructions.
B. Store products in dry spaces protected from the weather, with ambient temperatures maintained
between 50 and 90 deg F(10 and 32 deg Q.
or
C. Store rolls upright.
D. Move sheet vinyl floor coverings and installation accessories into spaces where they will be
installed at least 48 hours before installation, unless longer conditioning periods are
recommended in writing by manufacturer.
1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Maintain a temperature of not less than 70 deg F (21 deg C)or more than 95 deg F (35 deg C) in
spaces to receive sheet vinyl floor coverings for at least 48 hours before installation, during
installation, and for at least 48 hours after installation, unless manufacturer's written
recommendations specify longer time periods. After postinstallation period, maintain a
temperature of not less than 55 deg F(13 deg C)or more than 95 deg F(35 deg Q.
B. Do not install sheet vinyl floor coverings until they are at the same temperature as the space ..
where they are to be installed.
C. Close spaces to traffic during sheet vinyl floor covering installation and for time period after
installation recommended in writing by manufacturer.
D. Install sheet vinyl floor coverings and accessories after other finishing operations, including
painting, have been completed.
PART 2-PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the products indicated for
each designation in the Sheet Vinyl Floor Covering Schedule at the end of Part 3.
2.2 SHEET VINYL FLOOR COVERINGS
A. Unbacked Sheet Vinyl Floor Coverings: Products complying with ASTM F 1303, Type 11, except
for wear-layer binder content and backing requirements, and with requirements specified in the
Sheet Vinyl Floor Covering Schedule.
Project No. 00058 09652 SHEET VINYL FLOOR COVERINGS-2
Renovations to Parsons Annex
Smith College
Northampton, Massachusetts
SECTION 09652-SHEET VINYL FLOOR COVERINGS
PART 1 -GENERAL
w
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
ear A. This Section includes the following:
1. Sheet vinyl floor coverings without backing.
�w
B. Related Sections include the following:
1. Division 9 Section "Resilient Wall Base and Accessories" for resilient wall base, reducer
strips, and other accessories installed with sheet vinyl floor coverings.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product specified.
B. Samples for Verification: In manufacturer's standard size, but not less than 6-by-9-inch (150-by-
230-mm) sections of each different color and pattern of sheet vinyl floor covering specified,
showing the full range of variations expected in these characteristics.
1. For heat-welding bead, manufacturer's standard-size samples, but not less than 9 inches
(230 mm)long, of each color specified.
C. Maintenance Data: For sheet vinyl floor coverings to include in the maintenance manuals
specified in Division 1.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Installer Qualifications: Engage an installer who is competent in the technique required by
manufacturer for heat-welding seams.
1. Engage installers who are certified by floor covering manufacturer for heat-welded seam
installation.
ws B. Source Limitations: Obtain each type, color, and pattern of sheet vinyl floor covering specified
from one source with resources to provide products of consistent quality in appearance and
physical properties without delaying the Work.
an
Project No. 00058 09652 SHEET VINYL FLOOR COVERINGS-1
Renovations to Parsons Annex
Smith College
Northampton, Massachusetts
F. Accessories: Nail shoe molding or other trim to baseboard; do not nail to flooring.
3.3 PROTECTION
A. Cover installed wood flooring to protect it from damage or deterioration, before and after
finishing, during remainder of construction period. Use heavy kraft-paper or other suitable
covering. Do not use plastic sheet or film that could cause condensation.
1. Do not cover site-finished floors with kraft paper, or any other material, until finish
reaches full cure, but not less than seven days after applying last coat.
END OF SECTION 09640
Project No. 00058 09640 WOOD FLOORING-4
Renovations to Parsons Annex
Smith College
Northampton, Massachusetts
7. Random Lengths: Provide standard random-length strips complying with applicable
grading rules.
2.2 FINISHING MATERIALS
A. Manufacturer's standard acrylic impregnation finish system with 15 year wear warranty.
2.3 ACCESSORY MATERIALS
A. Building Paper Underlayment: Red rosin paper slip sheet.
B. Fasteners: As recommended by manufacturer, but not less than that recommended in NOFMA's
"Installing Hardwood Flooring."
C. Wood Trim: In same species and grade as wood flooring, unless otherwise indicated.
1. Base Shoe Molding: 1/2 by 3/4 inch(13 by 19 mm).
2. Threshold: Tapered on each side and routed at bottom of one side to accommodate wood
flooring.
w
PART 3 -EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with
on requirements, installation tolerances, and other conditions affecting performance of wood
flooring. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
on
3.2 INSTALLATION
+�s A. General: Comply with flooring manufacturer's written instructions, but not less than
recommendations in NOFMA's "Installing Hardwood Flooring," as applicable to flooring type.
B. Pattern: Lay wood flooring 90 degrees to existing board subfloors.
C. Expansion Space: Provide expansion space at walls and other obstructions and terminations of
flooring of not less than 1/2 inch (13 mm), unless otherwise indicated on Drawings.
1. Fully conceal with trim.
D. Felt Underlayment: Where strip or plank flooring is nailed to solid-wood subfloor, install
flooring over a layer of rosin paper.
** E. Solid-Wood Strip and Plank Flooring: Blind nail or staple flooring to substrate according to
NOFMA's written recommendations.
w
Project No. 00058 09640 WOOD FLOORING-3
Renovations to Parsons Annex
Smith College
Northampton, Massachusetts
C. Warranty: Provide manufacturer's standard warranty for finish, but, not less than 15 years and
lifetime structural warranty. Provide products that allow refinishing up to three times over the
life of the project. ..�
D. Hardwood Flooring: Comply with NOFMA grading rules for species, grade, and cut.
1. Certification: Provide flooring that carries NOFMA grade stamp on each bundle or piece.
1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE,AND HANDLING
A. Deliver wood flooring materials in unopened cartons or bundles.
B. Protect wood flooring from exposure to moisture. Do not deliver wood flooring until after
concrete, masonry, plaster, ceramic tile, and similar wet-work is complete and dry.
C. Store wood flooring materials in a dry,warm,well-ventilated,weathertight location.
D. Move wood flooring into spaces where it will be installed, at least seven days before installation.
1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Conditioning: Maintain relative humidity planned for building occupants and an ambient
temperature between 65 and 75 deg F (18 and 24 deg C) in spaces to receive wood flooring for at
least seven days before installation, during installation, and for at least seven days after
installation. After post-installation period, maintain relative humidity and ambient temperature
planned for building occupants.
w.
1. For unfinished products, open sealed packages to allow wood flooring to acclimatize.
2. Do not install flooring until it adjusts to the relative humidity of and is at the same
temperature as the space where it is to be installed. WR
3. Close spaces to traffic during flooring installation and for time period after installation
recommended in writing by flooring and finish manufacturers.
PART 2-PRODUCTS
2.1 SOLID-WOOD STRIP AND PLANK FLOORING
A. Strip and Plank Flooring: Provide kiln-dried wood flooring as follows: A.
1. Species: Red oak or Maple.
2. Grade: Clear.
3. Thickness: 3/4 inch(19 mm).
4. Face Width: 2-1/4 inches (57 mm).
5. Matching: Tongue and groove, and end matched.
6. Backs: Channeled (kerfed) for stress relief.
Project No. 00058 09640 WOOD FLOORING-2
wee
Renovations to Parsons Annex
Smith College
on Northampton, Massachusetts
SECTION 09640-WOOD FLOORING
PART 1 -GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
Ru A. This Section includes the following:
1. Solid-wood strip or plank flooring.
B. Related Sections include the following:
1. Division 6 Section "Rough Carpentry" for wood substrates, including sleepers and
subflooring.
2. Division 6 Section"Finish Carpentry" for wood decking.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated.
B. Samples for Initial Selection: Manufacturer's color charts showing the full range of colors and
on finishes available for wood flooring.
C. Samples for Verification: For each type of wood flooring and accessory, with stain color and
finish required, approximately 12 inches (300 mm) long and of same thickness and material
indicated for the Work. Include sample sets showing the full range of normal color and texture
variations expected.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Installer Qualifications: An experienced installer who has completed wood flooring similar in
material, design, and extent to that indicated for this Project and whose work has resulted in
wood flooring installations with a record of successful in-service performance.
w
B. Source Limitations: Obtain each type of material and product from one source with resources to
provide materials and products of consistent quality in appearance and physical properties.
Project No. 00058 09640 WOOD FLOORING-1
Renovations to Parsons Annex
Smith College
Northampton, Massachusetts
3.4 CLEANING
A. Clean exposed surfaces of acoustical panel ceilings, including trim, edge moldings, and
suspension system members. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for cleaning and
touchup of minor finish damage. Remove and replace ceiling components that cannot be
successfully cleaned and repaired to permanently eliminate evidence of damage. w
END OF SECTION 09511
ap
4W
ow
Project No. 00058 09511 ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS-6
40
Renovations to Parsons Annex
Smith College
go Northampton, Massachusetts
1. Install hangers plumb and free from contact with insulation or other objects within ceiling
plenum that are not part of supporting structure or of ceiling suspension system.
2. Splay hangers only where required to miss obstructions; offset resulting horizontal forces by
bracing, countersplaying, or other equally effective means.
3. Where width of ducts and other construction within ceiling plenum produces hanger
!* spacings that interfere with location of hangers at spacings required to support standard
suspension system members, install supplemental suspension members and hangers in
form of trapezes or equivalent devices. Size supplemental suspension members and
s hangers to support ceiling loads within performance limits established by referenced
standards and publications.
4. Secure wire hangers to ceiling suspension members and to supports above with a minimum
of three tight turns. Connect hangers directly either to structures or to inserts, eye screws,
or other devices that are secure; that are appropriate for substrate; and that will not
deteriorate or otherwise fail due to age, corrosion, or elevated temperatures.
5. Space hangers not more than 48 inches (1200 mm) o.c. along each member supported
directly from hangers, unless otherwise indicated; and provide hangers not more than 8
inches (200 mm) from ends of each member.
C. Secure bracing wires to ceiling suspension members and to supports with a minimum of four
tight turns. Suspend bracing from building's structural members as required for hangers.
D. Install edge moldings and trim of type indicated at perimeter of acoustical ceiling area and where
necessary to conceal edges of acoustical panels.
1. Apply acoustical sealant in a continuous ribbon concealed on back of vertical legs of
moldings before they are installed.
2. Screw attach moldings to substrate at intervals not more than 16 inches (400 mm) o.c. and
not more than 3 inches (75 mm) from ends, leveling with ceiling suspension system to a
tolerance of 1/8 inch in 12 feet (3 mm in 3.6 m). Miter corners accurately and connect
securely.
' 3. Do not use exposed fasteners, including pop rivets, on moldings and trim.
E. Install suspension system runners so they are square and securely interlocked with one another.
M Remove and replace dented,bent, or kinked members.
F. Install acoustical panels with undamaged edges and fitted accurately into suspension system
go runners and edge moldings. Scribe and cut panels at borders and penetrations to provide a neat,
precise fit.
1. Arrange directionally patterned acoustical panels as follows:
a. Install panels with pattern running in one direction parallel to short axis of space.
2. For reveal-edged panels on suspension system runners, install panels with bottom of reveal
in firm contact with top surface of runner flanges.
3. Paint cut panel edges remaining exposed after installation; match color of exposed panel
surfaces using coating recommended in writing for this purpose by acoustical panel
manufacturer.
4. Protect lighting fixtures and air ducts to comply with requirements indicated for fire-
resistance-rated assembly.
Project No. 00058 09511 ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS-5
Renovations to Parsons Annex
Smith College
Northampton, Massachusetts
A. Acoustical Sealant for Exposed and Concealed Joints: Manufacturer's standard nonsag,
paintable, nonstaining latex sealant complying with ASTM C 834 and the following
requirements:
1. Product is effective in reducing airborne sound transmission through perimeter joints and
openings in building construction as demonstrated by testing representative assemblies
according to ASTM E 90.
B. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:
1. Acoustical Sealant for Exposed and Concealed joints:
a. PL Acoustical Sealant; Chemrex, Inc., Contech Brands.
b. AC-20 FTR Acoustical and Insulation Sealant; Pecora Corp.
C. SHEETROCK Acoustical Sealant; United States Gypsum Co.
PART 3-EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine substrates and structural framing to which acoustical panel ceilings attach or abut, with
Installer present, for compliance with requirements specified in this and other Sections that affect
ceiling installation and anchorage, and other conditions affecting performance of acoustical panel
ceilings.
1. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. ,
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Inspection: Review conditions prior to installing ceiling grid. Verify clearances for intended
ceiling heights. Report conflicts that will impede installation. Do not proceed until remedial
work is complete.
B. Measure each ceiling area and establish layout of acoustical panels to balance border widths at
opposite edges of each ceiling. Avoid using less-than-half-width panels at borders, and comply *■
with layout shown on reflected ceiling plans.
ww
3.3 INSTALLATION
A. General: Install acoustical panel ceilings to comply with publications referenced below per
manufacturer's written instructions and CISCA's "Ceiling Systems Handbook."
1. Standard for Ceiling Suspension System Installations: Comply with ASTM C 636.
B. Suspend ceiling hangers from building's structural members and as follows:
Project No. 00058 09511 ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS-4
Renovations to Parsons Annex
Smith College
Northampton, Massachusetts
B. Acoustical Panel Colors and Patterns:
1. Armstrong World Industries; "Cirrus," angled, tegular, 24x24x3/4 panels with
HumiGuard Plus performance and 15 year warranty.
C. Antimicrobial Treatment: Provide acoustical panels treated with manufacturer's standard
+ * antimicrobial solution consisting of a synergistic blend of substituted ammonium salts of
alkylated phosphoric acids admixed with free alkylated phosphoric acid that inhibits fungus,
mold, mildew, and gram-positive and gram-negative bacteria.
2.2 METAL SUSPENSION SYSTEMS, GENERAL
A. Metal Suspension System Standard: Provide manufacturer's standard direct-hung metal
suspension systems of types, structural classifications, and finishes indicated that comply with
applicable ASTM C 635 requirements.
B. Products: Armstrong World Industries; Type-1, concealed, 15/16 Prelude Plus; hot dip
galvanized or aluminum.
C. Finishes and Colors, General: Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural
and Metal Products" for recommendations for applying and designating finishes. Provide
manufacturer's standard factory-applied finish for type of system indicated.
1. High-Humidity Finish: Comply with ASTM C 635 requirements for "Coating
Classification for Severe Environment Performance" where high-humidity finishes are
indicated.
D. Attachment Devices: Size for five times design load indicated in ASTM C 635, Table 1, Direct
Hung, unless otherwise indicated.
E. Wire Hangers, Braces, and Ties: Provide wires complying with the following requirements:
1. Zinc-Coated Carbon-Steel Wire: ASTM A 641/A 641M, Class 1 zinc coating, soft temper.
2. Size: Select wire diameter so its stress at three times hanger design load (ASTM C 635,
Table 1, Direct Hung)will be less than yield stress of wire, but provide not less than 0.106-
inch-(2.69-mm-) diameter wire.
F. Sheet-Metal Edge Moldings and Trim: Type and profile indicated or, if not indicated,
manufacturer's standard moldings for edges and penetrations that fit acoustical panel edge details
and suspension systems indicated; formed from sheet metal of same material and finish as that
used for exposed flanges of suspension system runners.
1. For lay-in panels with reveal edge details, provide stepped edge molding that forms reveal
of same depth and width as that formed between edge of panel and flange at exposed
suspension member.
2. For circular penetrations of ceiling, provide edge moldings fabricated to diameter required
wr to fit penetration exactly.
2.3 ACOUSTICAL SEALANT
Project No. 00058 09511 ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS-3
Renovations to Parsons Annex
Smith College
Northampton, Massachusetts
C. Source Limitations for Suspension System: Obtain each suspension system from one source with
resources to provide products of consistent quality in appearance and physical properties without
delaying the Work.
1. Obtain both acoustical ceiling panels and suspension system from the same manufacturer.
1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE,AND HANDLING
A. Deliver acoustical panels and suspension system components to Project site in original, unopened
packages and store them in a fully enclosed space where they will be protected against damage
from moisture, direct sunlight, surface contamination, and other causes. s„
B. Before installing acoustical panels, permit them to reach room temperature and a stabilized
moisture content.
A.
C. Handle acoustical panels carefully to avoid chipping edges or damaging units in any way.
1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Environmental Limitations: Do not install acoustical panel ceilings until spaces are enclosed and
weatherproof, wet-work in spaces is complete and dry, work above ceilings is complete, and
ambient temperature and humidity conditions are maintained at the levels indicated for Project
when occupied for its intended use.
1.7 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate layout and installation of acoustical panels and suspension system with other
construction that penetrates ceilings or is supported by them, including light fixtures, HVAC
equipment, fire-suppression system, and partition assemblies.
1.8 EXTRA MATERIALS
A. Furnish extra materials described below that match products installed, are packaged with
protective covering for storage, and are identified with labels describing contents. •
1. Acoustical Ceiling Units: Full-size units equal to 2.0 percent of amount installed.
PART 2-PRODUCTS
2.1 ACOUSTICAL PANELS, GENERAL
A. Acoustical Panel Standard: Provide manufacturer's standard panels of configuration indicated
that comply with ASTM E 1264 classifications as designated by types, patterns, acoustical ratings,
and light reflectances, unless otherwise indicated.
Project No. 00058 09511 ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS-2
Renovations to Parsons Annex
Smith College
Northampton, Massachusetts
SECTION 09511 -ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS
w
PART 1-GENERAL
ON
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
on A. This Section includes ceilings consisting of acoustical panels and exposed suspension systems.
W 1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product specified.
B. Samples for Initial Selection: Manufacturer's color charts consisting of actual acoustical panels or
sections of acoustical panels, suspension systems, and moldings showing the full range of colors,
textures, and patterns available for each type of ceiling assembly indicated.
C. Qualification Data: For firms and persons specified in "Quality Assurance" Article to
demonstrate their capabilities and experience. Include lists of completed projects with project
names and addresses, names and addresses of architects and owners, and other information
specified.
D. Product Test Reports: Indicate compliance of acoustical panel ceilings and components with
requirements based on comprehensive testing of current products.
M E. Research/Evaluation Reports: Evidence of acoustical panel ceiling's and components' compliance
with building code in effect for Project, from a model code organization acceptable to authorities
having jurisdiction.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Installer Qualifications: Engage an experienced installer who has completed acoustical panel
ceilings similar in material, design, and extent to that indicated for this Project and with a record
of successful in-service performance.
B. Source Limitations for Ceiling Units: Obtain each acoustical ceiling panel from one source with
resources to provide products of consistent quality in appearance and physical properties without
delaying the Work.
+wi
Project No. 00058 09511 ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS-1
w
Renovations to Parsons Annex
Smith College
Northampton, Massachusetts
A. Above-Ceiling Observation: Before Contractor installs gypsum base panels on ceiling support
framing, Architect will conduct an above-ceiling observation and report deficiencies in the Work
no observed. Do not proceed with installation of panels to ceiling support framing until deficiencies
have been corrected.
1. Before notifying Architect, complete the following in areas to receive gypsum veneer plaster
"° ceilings:
a. Installation, insulation, and leak and pressure testing of water piping systems.
b. Installation of air-duct systems.
C. Installation of air devices.
d. Installation of mechanical system control-air tubing.
e. Installation of ceiling support framing.
aAw
END OF SECTION 09215
W
Project No. 00058 09215 GYPSUM VENEER PIASTER-7
Renovations to Parsons Annex
Smith College
Northampton, Massachusetts .�
2. On partitions/walls, apply gypsum base panels vertically(parallel to framing or horizontally
(perpendicular to framing), as required by fire-resistance-rated assembly, and minimize end
joints.
a. Stagger abutting end joints not less than one framing member in alternate courses of
panels.
b. At stairwells and other high walls, install panels horizontally, unless otherwise
indicated or required by fire-resistance-rated assembly.
B. Single-Layer Fastening Methods: Apply gypsum base panels to supports with steel drill screws.
3.4 INSTALLING TRIM ACCESSORIES
A. General: For trim with back flanges intended for fasteners, attach to framing with same fasteners
used for panels. Otherwise, attach trim according to manufacturer's written instructions.
3.5 INSTALLING JOINT REINFORCEMENT
A. Gypsum Base for Veneer Plaster: Reinforce interior angles and flat joints with joint tape and
embedding material to comply with ASTM C 843 and gypsum veneer plaster manufacturer's
written recommendations.
3.6 GYPSUM VENEER PLASTERING
A. Gypsum Veneer Plaster Application: Comply with ASTM C 843 and veneer plaster
manufacturer's written recommendations.
1. Where gypsum veneer plaster abuts metal door frames,windows, and other units in veneer
plaster,groove finish coat to eliminate spalling.
2. Do not apply veneer plaster to gypsum base if face paper has faded from exposure to light.
Before applying veneer plaster, use remedial methods to restore bonding capability to faded
face paper according to manufacturer's written recommendations and as approved by '
Architect.
B. Concealed Surfaces: Omit gypsum veneer plaster in the following areas where veneer plaster will
be concealed from view in the completed Work, unless otherwise indicated or required to
maintain fire-resistance rating. Do not omit veneer plaster behind cabinets, furniture,
furnishings, and similar removable items.
1. Above suspended ceilings, except fire tape rated assemblies.
2. Behind wood paneling and other permanently applied wall or ceiling finishes.
C. Gypsum Veneer Plaster Finish: Smooth-troweled finish.
3.7 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
Project No. 00058 09215 GYPSUM VENEER PLASTER-6
w.
Renovations to Parsons Annex
Smith College
' Northampton, Massachusetts
3.2 APPLYING PANELS, GENERAL
"` A. Gypsum Base for Veneer Plaster: Apply according to ASTM C 844, unless manufacturer's written
recommendations are more stringent.
1. Do not allow gypsum base to fade from exposure to light.
2. Erection Tolerance: No more than 1/16-inch (1.6-mm) offsets between planes of gypsum
base faces, and 1/8 inch in 8 feet(3 mm in 2.4 m) for level, plumb,warp, and bow.
B. Install sound attenuation blankets before installing gypsum base for veneer plaster, unless
blankets are readily installed after panels have been installed on one side.
+w.
C. Install ceiling panels across framing to minimize the number of abutting end joints and to avoid
abutting end joints in the central area of each ceiling. Stagger abutting end joints of adjacent
panels not less than one framing member.
D. Install panels with face side out. Butt panels together for a light contact at edges and ends with
not more than 1/16 inch (1.5 mm)of open space between panels. Do not force into place.
w
E. Locate edge and end joints over supports, except in ceiling applications where intermediate
supports or back-blocking is provided behind end joints. Do not place tapered edges against cut
edges or ends. Stagger vertical joints on opposite sides of partitions. Do not make joints other
than control joints at corners of framed openings.
.W F. Attach panels to framing provided at openings and cutouts.
G. Do not attach panels across the flat grain of wide-dimension lumber, including floor joists and
headers. Float panels over these members using resilient channels, or provide control joints to
counteract wood shrinkage.
H. Form control and expansion joints with space between edges of adjoining panels.
I. Floating Construction: Where feasible, including where recommended in writing by
go manufacturer, install panels over wood framing,with floating internal corner construction.
J. Fastener Spacing: According to referenced gypsum base for gypsum veneer plaster application
standard, manufacturer's written recommendations, and fire-resistance-rating requirements.
ON
1. Space screws a maximum of 12 inches(304.8 mm) o.c. for vertical applications.
2. Space fasteners in panels that are tile substrates a maximum of 8 inches (203.2 mm) o.c.
Im
3.3 PANEL APPLICATION METHODS
.o
A. Single-Layer Application:
40 1. On ceilings, apply gypsum base panels before wall/partition panels to the greatest extent
possible and at right angles to framing, unless otherwise indicated.
Project No. 00058 09215 GYPSUM VENEER PIASTER-5
Renovations to Parsons Annex
Smith College
Northampton, Massachusetts
1. Acoustical Sealant for Exposed and Concealed Joints:
a. Pecora Corp.;AC-20 FTR Acoustical and Insulation Sealant.
b. United States Gypsum Co.; SHEETROCK Acoustical Sealant.
C. Acoustical Sealant for Exposed and Concealed Joints: Nonsag, paintable, nonstaining, latex
sealant complying with ASTM C 834 that effectively reduces airborne sound transmission
through perimeter joints and openings in building construction as demonstrated by testing
representative assemblies according to ASTM E 90. ..�
D. Acoustical Sealant for Concealed Joints: Nondrying, nonhardening, nonskinning, nonstaining,
gunnable, synthetic-rubber sealant recommended for sealing interior concealed joints to reduce Wo
airborne sound transmission.
2.6 AUXILIARY MATERIALS an
A. General: Provide auxiliary materials that comply with referenced installation standards and
manufacturer's written recommendations.
B. Bonding Compound for Gypsum Veneer Plaster: ASTM C 631.
C. Steel Drill Screws: ASTM C 1002, unless otherwise indicated.
1. Use screws complying with ASTM C 954 for fastening panels to steel members from 0.033 ..
to 0.112 inch(0.84 to 2.84 mm)thick.
D. Sound Attenuation Blankets: ASTM C 665, Type I (blankets without membrane facing), ®,
produced by combining thermosetting resins with mineral fibers manufactured from glass, slag
wool, or rock wool.
1. Fire-Resistance-Rated Assemblies: Comply with mineral-fiber-type requirements of
assembly.
2.7 GYPSUM VENEER PLASTER MIXES
A. Mechanically mix gypsum veneer plaster materials to comply with ASTM C 843 and with gypsum
veneer plaster manufacturer's written recommendations.
PART 3-EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine areas and substrates, with Installer present, and including welded hollow-metal frames,
cast-in anchors, and structural framing, for compliance with requirements and other conditions
affecting performance. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been
corrected.
Project No. 00058 09215 GYPSUM VENEER PIASTER-4
Renovations to Parsons Annex
Smith College
Northampton, Massachusetts
2.2 PANEL PRODUCTS
RM A. Panel Size: Provide in maximum lengths and widths available that will minimize joints in each
area and correspond with support system indicated.
±w B. Gypsum Base for Veneer Plaster: ASTM C 588 and products of same manufacturer as plaster.
1. Regular Type: 5/8 inch(16mm)thick.
2. Type X: 5/8 inch(16 mm)thick.
a. Location: Where required for fire-resistance-rated assembly.
2.3 TRIM ACCESSORIES
A. Standard Trim: ASTM C 1047, provided or approved by manufacturer for use in gypsum veneer
plaster applications indicated.
1. Material: Galvanized or aluminum-coated steel sheet or rolled zinc except Plastic at wet
locations.
R. 2. Shapes: Provide trim units designed with bead to receive plaster.
a. Cornerbead: Use at outside corners, unless otherwise indicated.
so b. LC-Bead (J-Bead): Use at exposed panel edges.
2.4 JOINT REINFORCING MATERIALS
A. General: Comply with joint strength requirements in ASTM C 587 and with gypsum veneer
plaster manufacturer's written recommendations for each application indicated.
B. Joint Tape:
1. Gypsum Base for Veneer Plaster: In material recommended by gypsum veneer plaster
manufacturer for applications indicated.
wo C. Embedding Material for Joint Tape:
1. Gypsum Base for Veneer Plaster: Material produced and recommended by gypsum veneer
me plaster manufacturer for use with joint tape material and gypsum veneer plaster
applications indicated.
"" 2.5 ACOUSTICAL SEALANT
A. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be incorporated
4" into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
B. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:
Project No. 00058 09215 GYPSUM VENEER PIASTER-3
am
Renovations to Parsons Annex
Smith College
Northampton, Massachusetts
according to ASTM E 119 by an independent testing and inspecting agency acceptable to
authorities having jurisdiction.
1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE,AND HANDLING
ow
A. Deliver materials in original packages, containers, or bundles bearing brand name and
identification of manufacturer or supplier.
B. Store materials inside under cover and keep them dry and protected against damage from
weather, direct sunlight, surface contamination, corrosion, construction traffic, and other causes.
1. Gypsum Base for Veneer Plaster: Stack panels flat to prevent sagging.
1.7 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Environmental Limitations: Comply with ASTM C 843 requirements or gypsum veneer plaster
manufacturer's written recommendations,whichever are more stringent.
B. Avoid conditions that result in gypsum veneer plaster drying too rapidly.
1. Distribute heat evenly; prevent concentrated or uneven heat on veneer plaster.
2. Maintain relative humidity levels for prevailing ambient temperature that produces normal
drying conditions.
3. Ventilate building spaces in a manner that prevents drafts of air from contacting surfaces
during veneer plaster application and until it is dry.
w.
PART 2-PRODUCTS
2.1 GYPSUM VENEER PLASTER MATERIALS
A. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be incorporated '
into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
B. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements,provide one of the following: or
1. High-Strength, One-Component Gypsum Veneer Plaster:
aw
a. National Gypsum Company; Uni-Kal 3000 Plaster.
b. United States Gypsum Co.; IMPERIAL Finish Plaster.
C. High-Strength, One-Component Gypsum Veneer Plaster: ASTM C 587, ready-mixed, smooth, No
finish-coat veneer plaster containing mill-mixed, fine silica sand; with a compressive strength of
3000 psi (20 MPa) when tested according to ASTM C 472; and formulated for application
directly over substrate indicated without use of separate base-coat material.
Project No. 00058 09215 GYPSUM VENEER PLASTER-2
on
Renovations to Parsons Annex
Smith College
Northampton, Massachusetts
SECTION 09215-GYPSUM VENEER PLASTER
PART 1 -GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
an
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the following:
1. Gypsum veneer plaster and gypsum base for veneer plaster.
B. Related Sections include the following:
1. Division 6 Section"Rough Carpentry" for wood framing and furring.
2. Division 7 Section "Building Insulation" for thermal insulation installed in gypsum veneer
plaster assemblies.
an 1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. Terminology: Refer to ASTM C 11 for definitions of terms for gypsum veneer plaster assemblies
ON not defined in this Section or in other referenced standards.
to 1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated.
B. Samples: For the following products:
w
1. Trim Accessories: Full-size Sample in 12-inch (300-mm) length for each trim accessory
indicated.
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Source Limitations for Gypsum Veneer Plaster Products: Obtain gypsum veneer plaster products,
• including gypsum base, joint reinforcing tape, embedding material, and plasters, from a single
manufacturer.
an B. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: For gypsum veneer plaster assembles with fire-resistance
ratings, provide materials and construction identical to those tested in assembly indicated
Project No. 00058 09215 GYPSUM VENEER PLASTER-1
►d
o.
09950 Wallcoverings
o Vinyl wallcovering 2nd&3rd floor stairs and Lanark, Bevan Type II Raffia 1-2-BY-20
CD halls
0
0
Vinyl wallcovering Bedrooms Essex 54,Stoneacre I, White Sand 38
Type I
10155 Toilet
Compartments
Solid plastic toilet partitions Toilet rooms Comtec Industries S202 Desert Beige o
0
K
12484 Floor Mats& o
Frames 0
Berber Carpeting Entry mats C/S Group Burgandy Q 0
W
a
x
Note
The Color Schedule summarizes product selections and specifies color selections. Please refer to the Specification manual for further
CD product data and installation information. Also, refer to the constructions documents for detailed material locations.
0
0
0
C�
O
t~
O
n
x
r�
d
�d
o.
09900 Painting
o Wall Paint PT-1 Stair 2(exterior walls),all Manufacturer TBD- Contractor to submit samples Match Donald Kaufman DKC-17
o toilet rooms and interior Match Architect's sample to architect and color to be (dark red)
o (back and sides)of built-in approved on site by Architect
00 bookcases at 100P Parlor,
Verify with architect
Wall Paint PT-2 Kitchen 100K, Hall 100H, Manufacturer TBD- Contractor to submit samples Match Duron 7754M Safari Tan
Laundry 100L,and parlor Match Architect's sample and color to be approved on Provide expoxy paint at back splash
100P, &Study 100S, Stair site by Architect areas in kitchen and laundry.
2(interior stair partial o C
walls)Verify w/Architect 9� o
w
0 :.
Wall Paint PT-3 Vestibule 100V, Entry Manufacturer TBD- Contractor to submit samples Match Duron 8655D Pinedale 0
two n
Lobby 100E, Stair 1 (up to Match Architect's sample and color to be approved on (Green) ° A
rA
second floor),tackboard site by Architect CO
frames,door from Stair 2
into Hall 100H,interiors of
relocated hutches.Verify y
with architect.
o
°o Trim&Wall Paint PT-4 Trim, moldings, Manufacturer TBD- Contractor to submit samples Match.Duron 8211W Sandy Lane(off
nwainscotting, interior doors Match Architect's sample and color to be approved on white)
O (u.n.o.)bedroom closets site by Architect
p and housekeeping closets.
7�
mCeiling Paint PT-5 Typical throughout Manufacturer TBD- Contractor to submit samples Match Duron 821OW Whispering
d Match Architect's sample and color to be approved on Birch(white)
r site by Architect
w
b
o.
CD 09651 Resilient Tile
a
o Flooring
o Rubber floor tiles,stair treads Stair 2 Norament Flooring, Nora 1591 Mustard
°o and risers Grano, hammered finish
00
09652 Sheet Vinyl
Flooring
Sheet Vinyl Toilet rooms and Forbo Industries, 6313 Marble(Gold)
housekeeping closets Smaragd
z �
09654 Linoleum Flooring o
Linoleum Tiles-LINO A&B Kitchen, Hall, Stair 2 @ 1st Forbo Industries, 772 Coral Beige Checkerboard pattern on 45 degree �n o
floor landing and Laundry Marmoleum"Dual" 598 Burgandy angle. Refer to CD dwgs for location o y
approximately 13"x13" and pattern details. n
►d
tiles
C7 y
Linoleum Sheet-LINO. C Bedrooms Forbo Industries, 772 Coral Beige Refer to RFS for locations as some a
Marmoleum"Dual" rooms have refinished hard wood
CD
floors
0 09680 Carpet
C) Broadloom Carpet Typical throughout J&J Commercial, Center 2859 Catwalk
n Stage 2655
tTj
O '
C"
O
70
n
x
d
r
N
11 � ! � � i ■ # � � !1
b �
o. C7
z Color Schedule z
0
o
o
o
o Section / Product Location Product Color/Style Notes
i
6402 Interior Arch. n
O
Woodwork r"
Plastic Laminate Laundry 100L Nevamar ARP Surface Charcoal Fusion FN-6-1T Countertops
n
Plastic Laminate All Toilet rooms Nevamar ARP Surface Paper Soleil PR-2-1T Counter apron d
� z �
Solid Surface Countertops All Toilet Rooms and Cohan Moss Countertops and backsplashes. °
Kitchen 100K Window sills @ toilet rooms only ig �*
ig
0 �.
Solid Surface sink bowls All Toilet Rooms Cohan Vanilla Integral sink bowls n o
t;;O o �
CD
CD
Tack Boards Kitchen 100K&Hall 100H Forbo Tack 2166(Tan) Frames to be painted PT-3(green)
a
CD
Custom wood cabinets Kitchen 100K&Laundry Millwork Millworker to match wood
100L species and antiqued finish
0 of existing millwork. Submit
o samples for architects
°o approval
C�
O
r 09511 Acoustical Panel
O
Ceilings
Angled Tegular 2424 ACT Typical Armstrong, (Refer to White
spec)
d
r
Renovations to Parsons Annex
Smith College
Northampton, Massachusetts
3.3 GLAZING
A. General: Install mirrored glass units to comply with written instructions of mirrored glass
manufacturer and with referenced GANA and NAAMM publications. Mount mirrored glass
accurately in place in a manner that avoids distorting reflected images.
B. Provide space for air circulation between back of mirrored glass units and face of mounting
surface.
00
C. Mastic Spot Installation System: Install mirrored glass units with mastic as follows:
1. Apply barrier coat to mirrored glass backing where approved in writing by manufacturers of
mirrored glass and backing material.
2. Apply mastic in spots to comply with mastic manufacturer's written instructions for
coverage and to allow air circulation between back of mirrored glass units and face of
mounting surface.
3. After mastic is applied, align mirrored glass units and press into place while maintaining a
Wo minimum air space of 1/8 inch (3 mm) between back of mirrored glass and mounting
surface.
D. Install owner-supplied mirrors to student closet doors.
3.4 PROTECTION AND CLEANING
A. Protect mirrored glass from breakage and contaminating substances resulting from construction
operations.
1. Do not permit edges of silvered mirrored glass to be exposed to standing water.
2. Maintain environmental conditions that will prevent silvered mirrored glass from being
exposed to moisture from condensation or other sources for continuous periods of time.
B. Wash mirrored glass not more than four days before date scheduled for inspections intended to
establish date for Substantial Completion. Wash mirrored glass by methods recommended in
NAAMM publication and in writing by mirrored glass manufacturer. Use water and glass
cleaners free from substances capable of damaging mirrored glass edges or coatings.
END OF SECTION 08814
�x
Project No. 00058 08814 MIRRORED GLASS-5
Renovations to Parsons Annex
Smith College
Northampton, Massachusetts
A. Mirrored Glass Sizes: Cut mirrored glass to final sizes and shapes to suit Project conditions.
B. Mirrored Glass Edge Treatment: Treat edges as indicated below.
1. Flat polished edge.
2. Seal edges of silvered mirrored glass after edge treatment to prevent chemical or � •
atmospheric penetration of glass coating.
C. Vinyl-Backed Safety Mirrored Glass: Apply vinyl backing with pressure-sensitive adhesive coating
over glass coating as recommended by vinyl-backing manufacturer to produce a surface free of
bubbles, blisters, and other imperfections. Use adhesives and vinyl backing compatible with
mirrored glass as certified by organic coating manufacturer.
2.5 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS
A. Setting Blocks: Neoprene, 70 to 90 Shore A hardness.
B. Edge Sealer: Coating compatible with glass coating and approved by mirrored glass manufacturer
for use in protecting against silver deterioration at mirrored glass edges.
C. Mirror Mastic: An adhesive setting compound, produced specifically for setting mirrored glass by
spot application, certified by both mirrored glass manufacturer and mastic manufacturer as
compatible with glass coating and substrates on which mirrored glass will be installed.
D. Mirror Clips: Provide top and bottom clips for door mounted units.
E. Fasteners: Fabricated of same basic metal and alloy as fastened metal and matching it in finished .�
color and texture where fasteners are exposed.
PART 3-EXECUTION .A
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine substrates, over which mirrored glass units are to be mounted, with Installer present, for
compliance with installation tolerances, substrate preparation, and other conditions affecting .�
performance.
1. Verify compatibility with and suitability of substrates, including compatibility of mirror �.
mastic with existing finishes or primers.
2. Proceed with mirrored glass installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been
corrected and surfaces are dry. ,
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Comply with mastic manufacturer's written installation instructions for preparation of substrates,
including coating surfaces with mastic manufacturer's special bond coating where applicable.
Project No. 00058 08814 MIRRORED GLASS-4
Renovations to Parsons Annex
Smith College
00 Northampton, Massachusetts
1.9 WARRANTY
A. General Warranty: Special warranty specified in this Article shall not deprive Owner of other
rights Owner may have under other provisions of the Contract Documents and shall be in
addition to, and run concurrent with, other warranties made by Contractor under requirements
of the Contract Documents.
B. Manufacturer's Special Warranty for Silvered Mirrored Glass: Written warranty, made out to
Owner and signed by mirrored glass manufacturer agreeing to replace silvered mirrored glass
units that deteriorate as defined in "Definitions" Article, f.o.b. the nearest shipping point to
Project site,within specified warranty period indicated below:
1. Warranty Period: Five years from date of Substantial Completion.
PART 2-PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering
on products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
1. Carolina Mirror Company.
2. Gardner Glass Products.
ow 3. Lenoir Mirror Company.
4. Sunshine Mirror.
5. Virginia Mirror Co., Inc.
6. VVP America, Inc.; Binswanger Mirror Products.
7. Walker Glass Co., Ltd.
' 2.2 FLOAT GLASS
A. Annealed Float Glass: ASTM C 1036, Type I (transparent glass, flat), class, quality, and other
"" properties as indicated below:
1. Clear Annealed Float Glass: Class 1 (clear), Quality q2(mirror).
a. Thickness: 5 mm.
+w
2.3 MIRRORED GLASS
A. Silvered Mirrored Glass: Annealed, clear float glass with successive layers of chemically deposited
silver, electrically or chemically deposited copper, and manufacturer's standard organic protective
coating applied to second glass surface to produce a coating system complying with FS DD-M-411.
2.4 FABRICATION
Project No. 00058 08814 MIRRORED GLASS-3
Renovations to Parsons Annex
Smith College
Northampton, Massachusetts
B. Warranties: Special warranties specified in this Section.
1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Installer Qualifications: An experienced installer who has completed glazing similar in material,
design, and extent to that indicated for this Project; whose work has resulted in mirrored glass
installations with a record of successful in-service performance; and who employs glass installers
for this Project who are certified under the National Glass Association's Glazier Certification
Program as Level 2(Senior Glaziers)or Level 3 (Master Glaziers).
B. Installer Qualifications: An experienced installer who has completed mirrored glass installations
similar in material, design, and extent to that indicated for Project and whose work has resulted
in construction with a record of successful in-service performance.
C. Source Limitations for Mirrored Glass: Obtain mirrored glass from one source for each type of
mirrored glass indicated.
D. Source Limitations for Glazing Accessories: Obtain glazing accessories from one source for each
type of accessory indicated.
E. Glazing Publications: Comply with published recommendations in GANA's "Glazing Manual," **
unless more stringent requirements are indicated. Refer to this publication for definitions of
glass and glazing terms not otherwise defined in this Section or in referenced standards.
F. NAAMM's Publication: For silvered mirrored glass, comply with recommendations in NAAMM's
"Mirrors, Handle with Extreme Care, Tips for the Professional on the Care and Handling of
Mirrors." .�►
G. Safety Glass: Category II materials complying with testing requirements in 16 CFR 1201 and
ANSI Z97.1.
1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE,AND HANDLING
A. Protect glazing materials according to mirrored glass manufacturer's written instructions and as
needed to prevent damage to glass and glazing materials from condensation, temperature changes,
direct exposure to sun, or other causes.
B. For silvered mirrored glass, comply with mirrored glass manufacturer's written instructions for
shipping, storing, and handling mirrored glass as needed to prevent deterioration of silvering, *•�
damage to edges, and abrasion of glass surfaces and applied coatings. Store indoors, protected
from moisture including condensation.
1.8 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Environmental Limitations: Do not install mirrored glass until ambient temperature and
humidity conditions are maintained at levels indicated for final occupancy.
Project No. 00058 08814 MIRRORED GLASS-2
A
w
Renovations to Parsons Annex
Smith College
M Northampton, Massachusetts
SECTION 08814-MIRRORED GLASS
PART 1 -GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the following:
1. Silvered mirrored glass.
2. Safety(vinyl-backed) mirrored glass.
B. Related Sections include the following:
on 1. Division 1 Section "Summary" for Owner supplied mirror units installed under this
section.
on 1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. Deterioration of Silvered Mirrored Glass: Defects developed from normal use that are
attributable to the manufacturing process and not to causes other than glass breakage and
practices for maintaining and cleaning silvered mirrored glass contrary to mirrored glass
manufacturer's written instructions. Defects include discoloration, black spots, and clouding of
the silver film.
1.4 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. Provide mirrored glass that will not fail under normal usage. Failure includes glass breakage and
on deterioration attributable to defective manufacture, fabrication, and installation.
1.5 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For the following:
*� 1. Silvered mirrored glass. Include description of materials and process used to produce
mirrored glass that indicates source of glass, glass coating components, edge sealer, and
quality-control provisions.
•* 2. Mirror mastic.
3. Mirror hardware.
Project No. 00058 08814 MIRRORED GLASS-1
Renovations to Parsons Annex
Smith College
Northampton, Massachusetts
Heading 6 (Kitchen)
1 DL4011 deadbolt
1 Stanley BB 159 double acting floor hinge
w 2 push/pull plates
2 10" kickplates
ors Heading 7 & 7a (Student Closets)
1 ML2210 passage set(NSM @ a)
1 DL 4011 deadlock
w. 1 1/z pr FBB 179 butts
Heading 8 (1"FLR Bath&Toilet)
,,,,, 1 ML2230 lockset
1 1/z pr FBB 191 butts
1 Ives 447/448 stop
on 1 10" kickplate
1 closer
an
Heading 9 (Housekeeping)
1 ML2251
1 1/z pr FBB 179 butts
1 Ives 447/448 stop
Heading 10 (Student Rooms)
1 ML2265 lockset
1 1/z pr FBB 179 butts
1 Ives 447/448 stop
Heading 11 (2❑d& 3rd FLR Toilets)
1 Hager push plate
1 Hager pull
1 Closer
1 1/z pr FBB 199 butts
1 Ives 449 stop w/holder
END OF HARDWARE SCHEDULE
END OF SECTION 08711
Project No. 00058 08711 DOOR HARDWARE-13
Renovations to Parsons Annex
Smith College
Northampton, Massachusetts
3.6 DOOR HARDWARE SCHEDULE
HARDWARE SCHEDULE
Heading 1 &. la(Porch Doors)
1 ML2257 lockset
1 closer
1 set Weatherstripping 45041DP
1 Threshold 271AK
1 Sweep 18100 DP *�
1 '/2 pr FBB 223 butts
1 Ives 447/448 (Stop w/hook @ a)
1 10" kickplate
Heading 2 (Bmt Stair)
1 ML2210 passage
1 set Weatherstripping
1 Threshold 271AK
1 Sweep 18100
1 closer
1 1/2 pr FBB 168 butts
1 10"kickplate
Heading 3 (Bmt Partitions)
1 DL 4011 Deadlock
1 Ives 410 Cast Aluminum
1 1/2 pr T strap hinges
Heading 4 (New Entry)
1 ML 2242 lockset
1 closer
1 set Weatherstripping
1 Threshold
1 Sweep
1 1003 x Trim Plate Electric Strike (H.E.S)
1 1/2 pr FBB 223 butts
1 Ives 447/448 stop
1 10" kickplate
Heading 5 & 5a(Stairs and Parlors)
1 ML2210 latchset
1 closer(concealed closer @ a)
1 997 magnetic hold open device
1 1/2 pr FBB 168 butts (FBB223 @ a)
1 Ives 447/448 stop
Project No. 00058 08711 DOOR HARDWARE-12
40
Renovations to Parsons Annex
Smith College
Northampton, Massachusetts
B. Install each door hardware item to comply with manufacturer's written instructions. Where
cutting and fitting are required to install door hardware onto or into surfaces that are later to be
painted or finished in another way, coordinate removal, storage, and reinstallation of surface
protective trim units with finishing work specified in Division 9 Sections. Do not install surface-
mounted items until finishes have been completed on substrates involved.
w
1. Set units level, plumb, and true to line and location. Adjust and reinforce attachment
substrates as necessary for proper installation and operation.
w 2. Drill and countersink units that are not factory prepared for anchorage fasteners. Space
fasteners and anchors according to industry standards.
C. Thresholds: Set thresholds for exterior and acoustical doors in full bed of sealant complying with
requirements specified in Division 7 Section"Joint Sealants."
3.4 ADJUSTING
A. Initial Adjustment: Adjust and check each operating item of door hardware and each door to
ensure proper operation or function of every unit. Replace units that cannot be adjusted to
operate as intended. Adjust door control devices to compensate for final operation of heating
and ventilating equipment and to comply with referenced accessibility requirements.
1. Spring Hinges: Adjust to achieve positive latching when door is allowed to close freely
from an open position of 30 degrees.
on 2. Electric Strikes: Adjust horizontal and vertical alignment of keeper to properly engage lock
bolt.
3. Door Closers: Adjust sweep period so that, from an open position of 70 degrees, the door
•w will take at least 3 seconds to move to a point 3 inches (75 mm) from the latch, measured
to the leading edge of the door.
go B. Six-Month Adjustment: Approximately six months after date of Substantial Completion, Installer
shall perform the following:
no 1. Examine and readjust each item of door hardware as necessary to ensure function of doors,
door hardware, and electrified door hardware.
2. Consult with and instruct Owner's personnel on recommended maintenance procedures.
go 3. Replace door hardware items that have deteriorated or failed due to faulty design,
materials, or installation of door hardware units.
3.5 CLEANING AND PROTECTION
A. Clean adjacent surfaces soiled by door hardware installation.
B. Clean operating items as necessary to restore proper function and finish.
C. Provide final protection and maintain conditions that ensure door hardware is without damage or
deterioration at time of Substantial Completion.
Project No. 00058 08711 DOOR HARDWARE-11
Renovations to Parsons Annex
Smith College
Northampton, Massachusetts
B. Protect mechanical finishes on exposed surfaces from damage by applying a strippable, temporary
protective covering before shipping.
.r�
C. Appearance of Finished Work: Variations in appearance of abutting or adjacent pieces are
acceptable if they are within one-half of the range of approved Samples. Noticeable variations in
the same piece are not acceptable. Variations in appearance of other components are acceptable
if they are within the range of approved Samples and are assembled or installed to minimize
contrast.
ww
D. BHMA Designations: Comply with base material and finish requirements indicated by the
following:
L. BHMA 612: Satin bronze, clear coated, over bronze base metal.
PART 3-EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine doors and frames, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for
installation tolerances, labeled fire door assembly construction, wall and floor construction, and
other conditions affecting performance. '*!"
B. Examine roughing-in for electrical power systems to verify actual locations of wiring connections
before electrified door hardware installation.
C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Steel Doors and Frames: Comply with DHI A115 series.
1. Surface-Applied Door Hardware: Drill and tap doors and frames according to SDI 107.
B. Wood Doors: Comply with DHI A115-W series.
3.3 INSTALLATION
A. Mounting Heights: Mount door hardware units at heights indicated in following applicable
publications, unless specifically indicated or required to comply with governing regulations:
1. Standard Steel Doors and Frames: DHI's "Recommended Locations for Architectural
Hardware for Standard Steel Doors and Frames."
2. Custom Steel Doors and Frames: DHI's "Recommended Locations for Builders' Hardware
for Custom Steel Doors and Frames."
3. Wood Doors: DHI WDHS.3, "Recommended Locations for Architectural Hardware for
Wood Flush Doors."
Project No. 00058 08711 DOOR HARDWARE-10
ao
Renovations to Parsons Annex
Smith College
40 Northampton, Massachusetts
2.11 THRESHOLDS
A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering
products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
1. National Guard Products, Inc. (NGP).
** 2. Pemko Manufacturing Co., Inc. (PEM).
3. Reese Enterprises, Inc. (RE).
4. Zero International, Inc. (ZRO).
B. Standard: Comply with BHMA A156.21.
2.12 FABRICATION
A. Manufacturer's Nameplate: Do not provide manufacturers' products that have manufacturer's
name or trade name displayed in a visible location (omit removable nameplates) except in
conjunction with required fire-rated labels and as otherwise approved by Architect.
" 1. Manufacturer's identification will be permitted on rim of lock cylinders only.
B. Base Metals: Produce door hardware units of base metal, fabricated by forming method
indicated, using manufacturer's standard metal alloy, composition, temper, and hardness.
Furnish metals of a quality equal to or greater than that of specified door hardware units and
BHMA A156.18 for finishes. Do not furnish manufacturer's standard materials or forming
we methods if different from specified standard.
C. Fasteners: Provide door hardware manufactured to comply with published templates generally
on prepared for machine, wood, and sheet metal screws. Provide screws according to commercially
recognized industry standards for application intended. Provide Phillips flat-head screws with
finished heads to match surface of door hardware, unless otherwise indicated.
1. Concealed Fasteners: For door hardware units that are exposed when door is closed,
except for units already specified with concealed fasteners. Do not use through bolts for
installation where bolt head or nut on opposite face is exposed unless it is the only means
of securely attaching the door hardware. Where through bolts are used on hollow door
and frame construction, provide sleeves for each through bolt.
2. Steel Machine or Wood Screws: For the following fire-rated applications:
a. Mortise hinges to doors.
b. Strike plates to frames.
C. Closers to doors and frames.
3. Fasteners for Wood Doors: Comply with requirements of DHI WDHS.2, "Recommended
Fasteners for Wood Doors."
2.13 FINISHES
on
A. Standard: Comply with BHMA A156.18.
Project No. 00058 08711 DOOR HARDWARE-9
Renovations to Parsons Annex
Smith College
Northampton, Massachusetts `
2. Door Silencers: BHMA A156.16.
C. Stops and Bumpers: BHMA [Grade 11 [Grade 2] [Grade 1, unless Grade 2 is indicated].
D. Floor Stops: For doors, unless wall or other type stops are scheduled or indicated. Do not mount
floor stops where they will impede traffic.
1. Where floor or wall stops are not appropriate, provide overhead holders.
E. Silencers for Wood Door Frames: BHMA Grade 1; neoprene or rubber, minimum 5/8 by 3/4
inch(16 by 19 mm); fabricated for drilled-in application to frame.
F. Silencers for Metal Door Frames: BHMA Grade 1; neoprene or rubber, minimum diameter 1/2
inch (13 mm); fabricated for drilled-in application to frame.
2.10 DOOR GASKETING
A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering
products that may be incorporated into the Work include,but are not limited to, the following:
1. Door Gasketing: w
a. National Guard Products, Inc. (NGP).
b. Pemko Manufacturing Co., Inc. (PEM).
C. Reese Enterprises, Inc. (RE). ..
d. Zero International, Inc. (ZRO).
2. Door Bottoms:
a. National Guard Products, Inc. (NGP).
b. Pemko Manufacturing Co., Inc. (PEM).
C. Reese Enterprises, Inc. (RE).
d. Zero International, Inc. (ZRO).
B. Standard: Comply with BHMA A156.22.
C. General: Provide continuous weather-strip gasketing on exterior doors and provide smoke, light,
or sound gasketing on interior doors where indicated or scheduled. Provide noncorrosive
fasteners for exterior applications and elsewhere as indicated.
1. Perimeter Gasketing: Apply to head and jamb, forming seal between door and frame.
2. Door Bottoms: Apply to bottom of door, forming seal with threshold when door is closed.
D. Air Leakage: Not to exceed 0.50 cfm per foot (0.000774 cu. m/s per m) of crack length for
gasketing other than for smoke control, as tested according to ASTM E 283.
E. Replaceable Seal Strips: Provide only those units where resilient or flexible seal strips are easily
replaceable and readily available from stocks maintained by manufacturer.
F. Gasketing Materials: Comply with ASTM D 2000 and AAMA 701/702.
Project No. 00058 08711 DOOR HARDWARE-8
go
Renovations to Parsons Annex
Smith College
' Northampton, Massachusetts
2.7 OPERATING TRIM
A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering
products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
1. Hager Companies (HAG).
eau 2. Ives: H. B. Ives (IVS).
3. Rockwood Manufacturing Company(RM).
40 B. Standard: Comply with BHMA A156.6.
C. Materials: Fabricate from brass or bronze.
D. Push-Pull Design: Rockwood 107x70B or equal.
on 2.8 CLOSERS
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
** following:
1. Surface-Mounted Closers:
go a. LCN Closers; an Ingersoll-Rand Company(LCN).
2. Concealed Closers:
go a. LCN Closers; an Ingersoll-Rand Company(LCN).
B. Standards: Comply with the following:
1. Closers: BHMA A156.4.
C. Certified Products: Provide door closers listed in BHMA's "Directory of Certified Door Closers."
D. Size of Units: Unless otherwise indicated, comply with manufacturer's written recommendations
for size of door closers depending on size of door, exposure to weather, and anticipated frequency
* of use. Provide factory-sized closers, adjustable to meet field conditions and requirements for
opening force.
2.9 STOPS AND HOLDERS
A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering
products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
1. Hager Companies (HAG).
2. Hiawatha, Inc. (HIA).
3. Ives: H. B. Ives (IVS).
4. Rockwood Manufacturing Company(RM).
on B. Standards: Comply with the following:
1. Stops and Bumpers: BHMA A156.16.
Project No. 00058 08711 DOOR HARDWARE-7
Renovations to Parsons Annex
Smith College
Northampton, Massachusetts
E. Construction Keying: Comply with the following:
1. Construction Master Keys: Install temporary cylinders with feature that permits voiding of
construction keys without cylinder removal. Provide 10 construction master keys.
a. Replace construction cores with permanent cores, as directed by Owner.
F. Keying System: Unless otherwise indicated, provide a factory-registered keying system complying
with the following requirements:
1. Existing System: Master key or grand master key locks to Owner's existing system.
2. Stamping: Permanently inscribe each key with a visual key control number and include the
following notation:
a. Notation: Information to be furnished by Owner.
3. Quantity: In addition to one extra blank key for each lock, provide the following:
a. Cylinder Change Keys: Three.
b. Master Keys: Five.
C. Grand Master Keys: Five.
d. Great-Grand Master Keys: Five.
2.6 STRIKES
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
1. Electric Strikes:
a. Hanchett Entry Systems, Inc. (HES).
B. Standards: Comply with the following:
1. Strikes for Mortise Locks and Latches: BHMA A156.13.
2. Strikes for Auxiliary Deadlocks: BHMA A156.5.
3. Dustproof Strikes: BHMA A156.16.
4. Electric Strikes: BHMA A156.5.
C. Strikes: Provide manufacturer's standard strike with strike box for each latch or lock bolt, with
curved lip extended to protect frame, finished to match door hardware set, unless otherwise
indicated, and as follows: 4W
1. Flat-Lip Strikes: For locks with three-piece antifriction latchbolts, as recommended by
manufacturer. am
2. Extra-Long-Lip Strikes: For locks used on frames with applied wood casing trim.
Project No. 00058 08711 DOOR HARDWARE-6
Renovations to Parsons Annex
Smith College
w Northampton, Massachusetts
3. Interconnected Locks: BHMA A156.12.
E. Lock Throw: Comply with testing requirements for length of bolts to comply with labeled fire
door requirements, and as follows:
aw 1. Bored Locks: Minimum 1/2-inch (12.7-mm) latchbolt throw.
2. Mortise Locks: Minimum 3/4-inch (19-mm)latchbolt throw.
3. Deadbolts: Minimum 1-inch (25-mm)bolt throw.
o
F. Backset: 2-3/4 inches (70 mm), unless otherwise indicated.
2.4 ELECTRIFIED LOCKS AND LATCHES
A. Electromagnetic Locks: Electrically powered locks of strength and configuration indicated; with
electromagnet attached to frame and strike plate attached to door. Comply with the following:
1. Strength Ranking: 1500 lbf(6672 N)as tested according to BHMA A156.23.
so 2. Inductive Kickback: Not more than 53-V peak voltage, as tested according to
BHMA A156.23.
3. Residual Magnetism: Not more than 0 lbf(0 N) to separate door from magnet, as tested
*o according to BHMA A156.23.
B. Electromechanical Locks: Motor-operated locks of types and grades indicated;with electromagnet
attached to frame and strike plate attached to door. Comply with the following:
1. BHMA Grade: Grade 1, unless Grade 2 is indicated.
No
2.5 CYLINDERS AND KEYING
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
1. Cylinders: Same manufacturer as for locks and latches.
B. Standards: Comply with the following:
1. Cylinders: BHMA A156.5.
®„ C. Cylinders: Manufacturer's standard tumbler type, constructed from brass or bronze, stainless
steel, or nickel silver, and complying with the following:
1. Master Ring Cylinders.
D. Permanent Cores: Manufacturer's standard; finish face to match lockset; complying with the
following:
1. Removable Cores: Core insert, removable by use of a special key, and for use with only the
core manufacturer's cylinder and door hardware.
Project No. 00058 08711 DOOR HARDWARE-5
Renovations to Parsons Annex
Smith College
Northampton, Massachusetts
E. Hinge Options: Comply with the following where indicated in the Door Hardware Schedule or
on Drawings:
1. Nonremovable Pins: Provide set screw in hinge barrel that, when tightened into a groove
in hinge pin, prevents removal of pin while door is closed; for the following applications:
a. Outswinging exterior doors.
b. Outswinging corridor doors with locks.
2. Corners: Square
F. Fasteners: Comply with the following:
1. Machine Screws: For metal doors and frames. Install into drilled and tapped holes.
2. Wood Screws: For wood doors and frames.
3. Threaded-to-the-Head Extra Long Wood Screws: For fire-rated wood doors.
4. Screws: Finish screw heads to match surface of hinges.
2.3 LOCKS AND LATCHES
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
1. Mechanical Locks and Latches:
a. Corbin Russwin Architectural Hardware; Div. of Yale Security Inc. (CR).
2. Electromagnetic Locks and Latches:
a. Rixson-Firemark, Inc.; Div. of Yale Security Inc. (RIX).
b. Von Duprin, Inc.; an Ingersoll-Rand Company(VD).
3. Electromechanical Locks and Latches:
a. Corbin Russwin Architectural Hardware; Div. of Yale Security Inc. (CR).
B. Certified Products: Provide door hardware listed in the following BHMA directories:
1. Mechanical Locks and Latches: BHMA's "Directory of Certified Locks & Latches."
2. Electromagnetic Locks: BHMA's "Directory of Certified Electromagnetic& Delayed Egress
Locks."
3. Delayed-Egress Locks: BHMA's "Directory of Certified Electromagnetic& Delayed Egress
Locks."
C. Lock Trim: Comply with the following:
1. Lever: Newport NSA except NSM where indicated. aw
D. Lock Functions: Function numbers and descriptions indicated in the Door Hardware Schedule
comply with the following: am
1. Bored Locks: BHMA A156.2.
2. Mortise Locks: BHMA A156.13.
.m
Project No. 00058 08711 DOOR HARDWARE-4
am
Renovations to Parsons Annex
Smith College
40 Northampton, Massachusetts
PART 2-PRODUCTS
2.1 SCHEDULED DOOR HARDWARE
as A. Designations: Requirements for design, grade, function, finish, size, and other distinctive
qualities of each type of door hardware are indicated in the Door Hardware Schedule at the end
of Part 3. Products are identified by using door hardware designations, as follows:
1. Named Manufacturer's Products: Product designation and manufacturer are listed for
each door hardware type required for the purpose of establishing minimum requirements.
Manufacturers' names are abbreviated in the Door Hardware Schedule.
2. References to BHMA Standards: Provide products complying with these standards and
requirements for description, quality, and function.
2.2 HINGES AND PIVOTS
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
4" 1. Hinges:
a. Stanley Commercial Hardware; Div. of The Stanley Works (STH).
2. Pivots and Pivot Hinges:
a. Stanley Commercial Hardware; Div. of The Stanley Works (STH).
B. Standards: Comply with the following:
1. Butts and Hinges: BHMA A156.1.
2. Template Hinge Dimensions: BHMA A156.7.
3. Self-Closing Hinges and Pivots: BHMA A156.17.
4. Pivots: BHMA A156.4.
C. Size: Provide the following, unless otherwise indicated, with hinge widths sized for door
thickness and clearances required:
ON
Maximum Door Size (inches) Hinge Standard Heavy
Height Weight Weight
(inches)
36 by 84 by 1-3/4 4-1/2 0.134 0.180
42 by 90 by 1-3/4 4-1/2 0.134 0.180
48 by 120 by 1-3/4 5 0.146 0.190
*� D. Template Requirements: Except for hinges and pivots to be installed entirely (both leaves) into
wood doors and frames, provide only template-produced units.
Project No. 00058 08711 DOOR HARDWARE-3
w
Renovations to Parsons Annex
Smith College
Northampton, Massachusetts
A. Inventory door hardware on receipt and provide secure lock-up for door hardware delivered to
Project site.
w.
B. Tag each item or package separately with identification related to the final Door Hardware
Schedule, and include basic installation instructions with each item or package.
C. Deliver keys to manufacturer of key control system.
1.6 COORDINATION
A. Templates: Obtain and distribute to the parties involved templates for doors, frames, and other
work specified to be factory prepared for installing door hardware. Check Shop Drawings of
other work to confirm that adequate provisions are made for locating and installing door
hardware to comply with indicated requirements.
wse
B. Electrical System Roughing-in: Coordinate layout and installation of electrified door hardware
with required systems connections.
1.7 WARRANTY(included for Owner's RFP's)
A. General Warranty: Special warranties specified in this Article shall not deprive Owner of other
rights Owner may have under other provisions of the Contract Documents and shall be in
addition to, and run concurrent with, other warranties made by Contractor under requirements
of the Contract Documents.
B. Special Warranty: Written warranty, executed by manufacturer agreeing to repair or replace
components of door hardware that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty
period. Failures include, but are not limited to, the following:
1. Structural failures including excessive deflection, cracking, or breakage.
2. Faulty operation of operators and door hardware.
3. Deterioration of metals, metal finishes, and other materials beyond normal weathering.
C. Warranty Period: Three years.
D. Warranty Period for Electromagnetic Locks: Five years from date of Substantial Completion.
E. Warranty Period for Manual Closers: 10 years from date of Substantial Completion.
1.8 MAINTENANCE SERVICE
A. Maintenance Service: Beginning at Substantial Completion, provide six months' full
maintenance by skilled employees of door hardware Installer including replacement of worn or
defective components, lubrication, cleaning, and adjusting as required for proper door hardware
operation. Provide parts and supplies as used in the manufacture and installation of original
products.
Project No. 00058 08711 DOOR HARDWARE-2
Renovations to Parsons Annex
Smith College
"" Northampton, Massachusetts
SECTION 08711 -DOOR HARDWARE
PART 1 -GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
00 A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes 17VSTALLATIONof the following:
1. Commercial door hardware provided by the owner for the following:
w
a. Swinging doors.
2. Electrified door hardware.
3. Final replacement cores provided by Owner.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Owner's agent will provide templates for preparing doors and frames for installation and product
data with installation details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual components and
' profiles, and finishes.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Installer Qualifications: An experienced installer who has completed door hardware similar in
material, design, and extent to that indicated for this Project and whose work has resulted in
construction with a record of successful in-service performance.
B. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site to comply with requirements in
Division 1 Section"Project Meetings." Review methods and procedures related to electrified door
hardware including, but not limited to, the following:
1. Inspect and discuss electrical roughing-in and other preparatory work performed by other
trades.
2. Review sequence of operation for each type of electrified door hardware.
3. Review and finalize construction schedule and verify availability of materials, Installer's
personnel, equipment, and facilities needed to make progress and avoid delays.
4. Review required testing, inspecting, and certifying procedures.
1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE,AND HANDLING
Project No. 00058 08711 DOOR HARDWARE-1
Renovations to Parsons Annex
Smith College
Northampton, Massachusetts
2. Coordinate window installation with wall flashings and other built-in components.
3. Field measure all existing openings for sizing of replacement window units.
4. Prepare schedule of windows by type and location. Include interior finish requirements.
.. 3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions and recommendations for installing window
units, hardware, operators, accessories, and other components of the Work.
B. Set window units level, plumb, true to line, without warp or rack of frames or sash. Provide
w
proper support and anchor securely in place.
C. Set sill members in a bed of sealant or with joint fillers or gaskets, as indicated, to provide
weathertight construction.
on
D. Provide interior wood trim scribed to existing returns to compensate for variations in existing
frame and new frames.
1. Where possible, use existing sash stops for interior trim in replacement windows.
2. For new windows, match installation details for replacement windows.
+.w E. Seal entire perimeter at exterior with sealant. Provide foam-in-place sealant bead over packed
fiberglass backing material at gaps on interior before applying scribed trim.
w
3.3 ADJUSTING
A. Adjust operating sash and hardware to provide a tight fit at contact points and weather stripping
for smooth operation and a weathertight closure. Lubricate hardware and moving parts.
3.4 CLEANING
A. Clean interior and exterior surfaces immediately after installation. Exercise care to avoid damage
am to protective coatings and finishes. Remove excess glazing and sealants, dirt, and other
substances.
s„ B. Clean glass of factory-glazed units immediately after installing windows. Wash and polish glass on
both faces before Substantial Completion. Comply with manufacturer's recommendations for
final cleaning and maintenance. Remove nonpermanent labels from glass surfaces.
+iw
C. Remove and replace glass that has been broken, chipped, cracked, abraded, or damaged during
the construction period.
3.5 PROTECTION
am A. Protect window units from damage or deterioration until the time of Substantial Completion.
END OF SECTION 08550
on
Project No. 00058 08550 WOOD WINDOWS-7
Renovations to Parsons Annex
Smith College
Northampton, Massachusetts
2.8 FABRICATION
A. General: Fabricate wood window units to comply with indicated standards. Include a complete
system for assembly of components and anchorage of window units.
1. Comply with requirements of NWWDA I.S. 2 for moisture content of lumber at time of ..�
fabrication.
B. Fabricate windows to produce units that are reglazable without dismantling sash framing. Provide ,
openings and mortises precut,where possible, to receive hardware and other items.
1. Provide weather stripping at perimeter of each operating sash.
a. For double-hung sash, provide weather stripping only at horizontal rails of operable
sash.
2. Provide removable insect screen for each operating sash, with location determined by
manufacturer.
3. Provide glazing stops, nailed or snap-on type, coordinated with glass selection and glazing
system indicated.
4. Factory-Glazed Window Units: Except for light sizes in excess of 100 united inches (2500
mm width plus length), glaze window units in the factory before delivery, unless factory
glazing is not available from manufacturer. Comply with requirements of Division 8
Section"Glazing" of these Specifications and NWWDA I.S. 2.
5. Provide obscure (frosted)glass in units located in bath and toilet rooms.
6. Provide tempered glass where required for type of installation, glass size over 9 square feet
and where indicated.
C. Complete fabrication, assembly, finishing, hardware application, and other work before shipment
to the Project site, to the maximum extent possible. Disassemble components only as necessary
for shipment and installation. Where necessary for fitting at site, provide ample allowance for
scribing, trimming, and fitting.
2.9 FINISHES
A. Wood Finish: Provide the following finishes on exposed wood in units:
1. Shop-Primed Units: Provide shop-prime coat on interior wood surfaces only.
PART 3-EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine openings before installation.
1. Wood frame walls shall be dry, clean, sound, well-nailed, free of voids, and without offsets
at joints. Ensure that nail heads are driven flush with surfaces in opening and within 3
inches (75 mm) of corner.
Project No. 00058 08550 WOOD WINDOWS-6
Renovations to Parsons Annex
Smith College
Northampton, Massachusetts
A. Insect Screens: Provide insect screens for each operable exterior sash or ventilator. Locate
screens on inside or outside of window sash or ventilator, depending on window type. Design
windows and hardware to accommodate screens in a tight-fitting, removable arrangement, with a
minimum of exposed fasteners and latches.
W 1. Screen Frames: Fabricate frames of tubular-shaped, extruded- or formed-aluminum
members of 0.040-inch-(1-mm-)minimum wall thickness,with mitered or coped joints and
concealed mechanical fasteners. Provide removable PVC spline/anchor concealing edge of
W screen frame. Comply with SMA 1004. Provide with retention clips.
a. Finish: Match window members.
B. True Divided Lites: Provide patterns to match existing windows.
2.5 DOUBLE-HUNG WINDOWS
A. Window Grade: Comply with requirements of NWWDA Performance Grade DP15.
on
1. Provide window units with tilt-in feature permitting both sides of the sash to be cleaned
from interior.
B. Hardware: Provide the following equipment and operating hardware:
,., 1. Sash Balances: Manufacturer's standard, concealed, counterbalancing-mechanism-type sash
balances (two per sash).
2. Sash Lock: Cam-action sweep lock and keeper on meeting rail.
3. Lift Handle: Applied sash lifts on bottom rail of lower sash (two per sash).
2.6 FIXED WINDOWS
A. Window Grade: Comply with requirements of NWWDA Performance Grade DP15.
B. Provide primed wood frames and sash only for installation in interior borrowed lite openings.
2.7 CASEMENT WINDOWS
A. Window Grade: Comply with requirements of NWWDA Performance Grade DP15.
B. Hardware: Provide the following equipment and operating hardware:
1. Operating Device: Gear-type rotary operator located on jamb at sill.
2. Hinges: Concealed four-bar friction hinges with adjustable slide shoe (two per ventilator).
3. Hinges: Heavy-duty, two-knuckle butt hinges (two per ventilator, minimum).
4. Lock: Lift-type, cam-action lock.
a. Retain limit device below unless windows are operated only for cleaning.
5. Limit Device: Stay bar with an adjustable hold-open device.
Project No. 00058 08550 WOOD WINDOWS-5
Renovations to Parsons Annex
Smith College
Northampton, Massachusetts '
F. Compression-Type Weather Stripping: Provide compressible weather stripping designed for
permanently resilient sealing under bumper or wiper action, and completely concealed when sash
is closed.
1. Weather-Stripping Material: Molded PVC gaskets complying with ASTM D 2287.
2. Weather-Stripping Material: Molded, expanded, EPDM or neoprene gaskets complying
with ASTM C 509, Grade 4.
G. Sliding-Type Weather Stripping: Provide woven-pile weather stripping of wool, polypropylene, or
nylon pile and resin-impregnated backing fabric. Comply with AAMA 701.2. .•e
1. Provide weather stripping with integral, centerline barrier fin of semirigid, plastic,
polypropylene sheet. ,.
H. Wire-Fabric Insect Screen: 18-by-14 (1.2-by-1.6-mm) or 18-by-16 (1.2-by-1.4-mm) mesh of 0.013-
inch-(0.3-mm-) diameter, coated aluminum wire, complying with FS RR-W-365, Type VII.
I. Glass and Glazing Materials: Provide manufacturer's standard Maximizer Plus argon filled,
sealed, insulating glazing material that complies with Division 8 Section"Glazing."
J. Glazing Seal: Provide manufacturer's standard extruded, vinyl, or butyl glazing gasket providing
weathertight seal.
2.3 HARDWARE
A. General: Provide manufacturer's standard hardware, necessary to operate, tightly close, and
securely lock windows. Do not use aluminum in frictional contact with other metals.
1. Provide solid white metal hardware with a special coating finish and plated steel or
brass/bronze operating bars and rods.
B. Four-Bar Friction Hinges: Comply with AAMA 904.1.
1. Friction Shoes: Nylon or other nonabrasive, nonstaining, noncorrosive, durable material.
.A
C. Gear-Type Rotary Operators: Comply with AAMA 901.1 for rotary operators. Comply with
ASTM E 405, Method A, when subjected to operating moments and closing torques indicated in
AAMA 101.
D. Operator shall operate all ventilators simultaneously, securely closing them at both jambs without
using additional manually controlled locking devices. �.
E. Counterbalancing Mechanism: Comply with AAMA 902.2.
1. Sash-Balance Type: Concealed block-and-tackle type of size and capacity to hold sash
stationary at any open position.
o
2.4 ACCESSORIES
am
Project No. 00058 08550 WOOD WINDOWS-4
No
Renovations to Parsons Annex
Smith College
Northampton, Massachusetts
1. Structural failures, including excessive deflection, water leakage, air infiltration, or
condensation.
2. Faulty operation of sash and hardware.
3. Deterioration of finishes and other materials beyond normal weathering.
o C. Warranty Period for Insulating Glass: 20 years from date of Substantial Completion.
go PART 2-PRODUCTS
.w
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Manufacturer: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide window units the following:
1. Aluminum-Clad and Wood Window Units:
a. Eagle Window Corp.
w
b. Marvin Windows
w�
2.2 MATERIALS
A. General: Comply with NWWDA I.S. 2.
B. Wood: Clear ponderosa pine or other suitable fine-grain lumber, kiln dried to a moisture
content of 6 to 12 percent at time of fabrication and free of visible finger joints, blue stain, knots,
pitch pockets, and surface checks larger than 1/32 inch (0.8 mm)wide by 2 inches (51 mm) long.
1. Lumber shall be water-repellent preservative treated after machining per NWWDA I.S. 4.
C. Aluminum Cladding: Manufacturer's standard aluminum formed sheet or extruded cladding
mechanically bonded to exterior wood sash and frame members.
w 1. Trim Members: Provide aluminum-clad wood, hollow-aluminum extrusions, or roll-
formed aluminum trim members.
2. Finish: Factory-applied, baked-on enamel finish.
a. Color: Custom Color to match Architect's sample(off-white/cream tint).
w�
D. Anchors, Clips, and Accessories: Fabricate anchors, clips, and window accessories of aluminum,
nonmagnetic stainless steel, or hot-dip zinc-coated steel or iron complying with requirements of
ASTM B 633 for SC 3 (severe) service condition; provide sufficient strength to withstand design
pressure indicated.
E. Fasteners: Comply with NWWDA I.S. 2 for fabrication and with manufacturer's
recommendations and standard industry practices for type and size of installation fasteners.
1. Use zinc-coated or nonferrous nails and screws for window fabrication and installation.
2. Use brass screws for hardware and accessory installation.
Project No. 00058 08550 WOOD WINDOWS-3
.m
Renovations to Parsons Annex
Smith College
Northampton, Massachusetts N"
A. Product Data: For each type of wood window required. Include the following:
1. Construction details and fabrication methods.
2. Profiles and dimensions of individual components.
B. Shop Drawings: For each type of window required. Include information not fully detailed in .+
manufacturer's standard Product Data and the following:
1. Layout and installation details, including anchors.
1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Source Limitations: Obtain wood window units through one source from a single manufacturer.
B. Product Options: Drawings indicate size, profiles, dimensional requirements, and aesthetic
effects of wood windows and are based on the specific window types and models indicated.
Other manufacturers' products with equal performance characteristics may be considered
provided deviations in size, profile, and dimensions are minor and do not alter the aesthetic
effect. Refer to Division 1 Section"Substitutions."
C. Safety Glass Standard: Provide products complying with testing requirements of 16 CFR,
Part 1201 for Category II materials.
1. Subject to compliance with requirements, provide safety glass permanently marked with
the certification label of the Safety Glazing Certification Council or another certification
agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.
D. Glazing Standards: Comply with recommendations of GANA's "Glazing Manual" and "Sealant
Manual," unless more stringent requirements are indicated.
1.7 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Field Measurements: Verify window openings by field measurements before fabrication and
indicate measurements on Shop Drawings. Coordinate fabrication schedule with construction
progress to avoid delaying the Work.
1.8 WARRANTY
A. General Warranty: The special warranty specified in this Article shall not deprive the Owner of
other rights the Owner may have under other provisions of the Contract Documents and shall be
in addition to, and run concurrent with, other warranties made by the Contractor under
requirements of the Contract Documents.
B. Special Warranty: Submit a written warranty, executed by wood window manufacturer, agreeing
to repair or replace window components that fail in materials or workmanship within the "
specified warranty period. Failures include, but are not limited to, the following:
Project No. 00058 08550 WOOD WINDOWS-2
.w
Renovations to Parsons Annex
Smith College
4W Northampton, Massachusetts
SECTION 08550-WOOD WINDOWS
PART 1 -GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the following wood-window types:
1. Double-hung windows.
2. Nonoperative(fixed) interior windows.
w 3. Casement windows.
B. Related Sections include the following:
1. Division 6 Section "Finish Carpentry" for interior and exterior wood trim not included as
part of wood window units.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. Performance-grade number, included as part of the window designation system, is the actual
design pressure in pounds force per square foot (pascals) used to determine the structural test
pressure and water test pressure.
1. Structural test pressure,wind-load test, is equivalent to 150 percent of the design pressure.
2. Water-leakage-resistance test pressure is equivalent to 10 percent of the design pressure
with 2.86 lbf/sq. ft. (137 Pa) as a minimum.
1.4 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. General: Provide wood windows engineered, fabricated, and installed to withstand normal
thermal movement, wind loading, and impact loading without failure, as demonstrated by testing
manufacturer's standard window assemblies representing types, grades, and sizes required for this
Project according to test methods indicated.
B. Standards: Performance requirements for operating force air infiltration water penetration,
structural performance, and forced-entry resistance for wood windows are those specified in
NWWDA I.S. 2, "Industry Standard for Wood Window Units."
1.5 SUBMITTALS
w
Project No. 00058 08550 WOOD WINDOWS-1
Renovations to Parsons Annex
Smith College
Northampton, Massachusetts ..
A. Doors for Opaque Finish: Shop prime exposed portions of doors for paint finish with one coat
of wood primer specified in Division 9 Section"Painting."
PART 3-EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine openings before installing door frame.
1. Examine doors and frames.
2. Reject doors with defects.
B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Hardware: For installation, see Division 8 Section"Door Hardware."
B. Manufacturer's Written Instructions: Install wood doors to comply with manufacturer's written
instructions, referenced quality standard, and as indicated.
C. Factory-Fitted Doors: Align in frames for uniform clearance at each edge.
D. Field-Finished Doors: Refer to the following for finishing requirements:
1. Division 9 Section"Painting."
3.3 ADJUSTING AND PROTECTING
A. Operation: Rehang or replace doors that do not swing or operate freely.
B. Finished Doors: Refinish or replace doors damaged during installation.
C. Protect doors as recommended by door manufacturer to ensure that wood doors are without
damage or deterioration at the time of Substantial Completion.
END OF SECTION 08212
Project No. 00058 08212 STILE AND RAIL WOOD DOORS-4
on
Renovations to Parsons Annex
Smith College
Northampton, Massachusetts
1. Stile and Rail Widths: As indicated.
2. Molding Profile: Match Existing.
3. Panel Design: As indicated.
4. Glass for Openings: Uncoated, insulating-glass units made from two lites of 3.0-mm-thick,
clear, fully tempered glass with 1/4-inch (6.4-mm) airspace.
C. Interior Doors: Comply with the following requirements:
1. Stile and Rail Widths: As indicated.
2. Molding Profile: Match existing.
3. Flat Panel Thickness: 1/2 inch(13 mm).
u„ 4. Panel Design: As indicated.
5. Glass for Openings: Uncoated, clear, fully tempered float glass, 5.0 mm thick.
2.3 FABRICATION
A. Factory fit doors to suit frame-opening sizes indicated, with the following uniform clearances and
bevels, unless otherwise indicated:
1. Clearances: Provide 1/8 inch (3.2 mm) at heads, jambs, and between pairs of doors.
Provide 1/2 inch (13 mm) from bottom of door to top of decorative floor finish or
covering. Where threshold is shown or scheduled, provide 3/8 inch (10 mm) from bottom
of door to top of threshold.
2. Bevel non-fire-rated doors 1/8 inch in 2 inches (3-1/2 degrees) at lock and hinge edges.
B. Factory machine doors for hardware that is not surface applied. Locate hardware to comply with
DHI-WDHS-3. Comply with final hardware schedules, door frame Shop Drawings, DHI Al 15-W
series standards, and hardware templates.
on
1. Coordinate measurements of hardware mortises in metal frames to verify dimensions and
alignment before factory machining.
C. Glazed Openings: Trim openings indicated for glazing with solid wood moldings of profile
indicated,with one side removable.
go D. Shop-Fit Doors: Align and fit doors in frames with uniform clearances and bevels as indicated
below; do not trim stiles and rails in excess of limits set by manufacturer or permitted with fire-
rated doors. Machine doors for hardware. Seal cut surfaces after fitting and machining.
1. Clearances below are based on customary clearances for flush wood doors; revise to suit
Project if required.
2. Clearances: Provide 1/8 inch (3.2 mm) at heads, jambs, and between pairs of doors.
Provide 1/8 inch (3.2 mm) from bottom of door to top of decorative floor finish or
covering. Where threshold is shown or scheduled, provide 1/4 inch (6.4 mm) from
bottom of door to top of threshold.
2.4 SHOP PRIMING
Project No. 00058 08212 STILE AND RAIL WOOD DOORS-3
am
Renovations to Parsons Annex
Smith College am
Northampton, Massachusetts
C. Safety Glass: Provide products complying with ANSI Z97.1 and testing requirements of 16 CFR,
Part 1201, for Category II materials, unless those of Category I are expressly indicated and
permitted.
1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE,AND HANDLING
A. Protect doors during transit, storage, and handling to prevent damage, soiling, and deterioration.
Comply with requirements of referenced standard and manufacturer's written instructions. ,
1. Individually package doors in cardboard cartons and wrap bundles of doors in plastic
sheeting.
B. Mark each door with individual opening numbers used on Shop Drawings. Use removable tags
or concealed markings.
1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Environmental Limitations: Do not deliver or install doors until building is enclosed, wet-work is
complete, and HVAC system is operating and will maintain temperature and relative humidity at
occupancy levels during the remainder of the construction period.
PART 2-PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
1. Stile and Rail Doors of Special Design and Construction: `
a. Artistic Doors and Windows.
b. ENJO Doors and Windows.
C. Maiman Company(The).
d. Pinecrest.
e. Woodtech Trading Company.
2.2 STILE AND RAIL DOORS OF SPECIAL DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION ®,
A. Construction, General: Comply with the following requirements:
1. Grade of Doors for Opaque Finish: Premium.
2. Stile and Rail Construction for Opaque Finish: Clear softwood; may be edge glued for
width or finger jointed.
3. Flat Panel Construction for Opaque Finish: Veneered,wood-based panel product.
B. Exterior Doors: Comply with the following requirements:
Project No. 00058 08212 STILE AND RAIL WOOD DOORS-2
Renovations to Parsons Annex
Smith College
Northampton, Massachusetts
SECTION 08212-STILE AND RAIL WOOD DOORS
on
PART 1 -GENERAL
on
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
on A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the following:
1. Interior stile and rail wood doors with flat panels.
2. Interior stile and rail wood doors with louvered panels.
.iw 3. Shop priming stile and rail wood doors.
B. Related Sections include the following:
1. Division 6 Section"Interior Architectural Woodwork" for wood door frames.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of door. Include details of construction and glazing.
B. Shop Drawings: Indicate location, size, and hand of each door; elevation of each kind of door;
construction details not covered in Product Data, including those for stiles, rails, panels, and
moldings (sticking); and other pertinent data.
1. Indicate dimensions and locations of mortises and holes for hardware.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Source Limitations: Obtain stile and rail wood doors through one source from a single
manufacturer.
B. Quality Standard: Comply with the following standard:
1. NWWDA Quality Standard: NWWDA I.S.6, "Industry Standard for Wood Stile and Rail
Doors."
on
a. Mark, label, or otherwise identify stile and rail wood doors as complying with
NWWDA I.S.6.
2. AWI Quality Standard: AWI's "Architectural Woodwork Quality Standards" for grade of
door, construction, finish, and other requirements.
Project No. 00058 08212 STILE AND RAIL WOOD DOORS-1
Renovations to Parsons Annex
Smith College
Northampton, Massachusetts
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Hardware: For installation, see Division 8 Section"Door Hardware."
B. Manufacturer's Written Instructions: Install doors to comply with manufacturer's written
instructions, referenced quality standard, and as indicated. .•
1. Install fire-rated doors in corresponding fire-rated frames according to NFPA 80.
C. Job-Fitted Doors: Align and fit doors in frames with uniform clearances and bevels as indicated
below; do not trim stiles and rails in excess of limits set by manufacturer or permitted for fire-
rated doors. Machine doors for hardware. Seal cut surfaces after fitting and machining.
1. Clearances: Provide 1/8 inch (3.2 mm) at heads, jambs, and between pairs of doors.
Provide 1/8 inch (3.2 mm) from bottom of door to top of decorative floor finish or
covering. Where threshold is shown or scheduled, provide 1/4 inch (6.4 mm) from
bottom of door to top of threshold.
a. Comply with NFPA 80 for fire-rated doors.
2. Bevel fire-rated doors 1/8 inch in 2 inches (3-1/2 degrees) at lock edge; trim stiles and rails
only to extent permitted by labeling agency.
3.3 ADJUSTING
A. Operation: Rehang or replace doors that do not swing or operate freely.
B. Finished Doors: Replace doors that are damaged or do not comply with requirements. Doors
may be repaired or refinished if work complies with requirements and shows no evidence of
repair or refinishing.
END OF SECTION 08211
Project No. 00058 08211 FLUSH WOOD DOORS-4
Renovations to Parsons Annex
Smith College
Northampton, Massachusetts
1. Construction: Five or seven plies with stiles and rails bonded to core, then entire unit
abrasive planed before veneering.
B. Fire-Rated Doors:
1. Construction: Construction and core specified above for type of face indicated or
manufacturer's standard mineral-core construction as needed to provide fire rating
indicated.
w 2. Blocking: For mineral-core doors, provide composite blocking with improved screw-
holding capability approved for use in doors of fire ratings indicated as follows:
a. 5-inch (125-mm)top-rail blocking.
b. 5-inch (125-mm)bottom-rail blocking, in doors indicated to have protection plates.
C. 4-1/2-by40-inch (114-by-250-mm) lock blocks.
3. Edge Construction: At hinge stiles, provide manufacturer's standard laminated-edge
construction with improved screw-holding capability and split resistance and with outer
stile matching face veneer.
2.4 FABRICATION
A. Fabricate doors in sizes indicated for Project-site fitting.
B. Factory fit doors to suit frame-opening sizes indicated, with the following uniform clearances and
bevels, unless otherwise indicated:
1. Comply with clearance requirements of referenced quality standard for fitting. Comply
with requirements in NFPA 80 for fire-rated doors.
C. Factory machine doors for hardware that is not surface applied. Locate hardware to comply with
DHI-WDHS-3. Comply with final hardware schedules, door frame Shop Drawings, DHI Al 15-W
series standards, and hardware templates.
on 1. Coordinate measurements of hardware mortises in metal frames to verify dimensions and
alignment before factory machining.
ws
PART 3 -EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine doors and installed door frames before hanging doors.
1. Verify that frames comply with indicated requirements for type, size, location, and swing
characteristics and have been installed with level heads and plumb jambs.
' 2. Reject doors with defects.
B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
Project No. 00058 08211 FLUSH WOOD DOORS-3
Renovations to Parsons Annex
Smith College
Northampton, Massachusetts
A. Environmental Limitations: Do not deliver or install doors until building is enclosed, wet work is
complete, and HVAC system is operating and will maintain temperature and relative humidity at
occupancy levels during the remainder of the construction period. .w
1.7 WARRANTY
A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form, signed by manufacturer, Installer, and
Contractor, in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace doors that are defective in materials
or workmanship, have warped (bow, cup, or twist) more than 1/4 inch (6.4 mm) in a 42-by-84-
inch (1067-by-2134-mm) section, or show telegraphing of core construction in face veneers
exceeding 0.01 inch in a 3-inch (0.25 mm in a 75-mm)span.
1. Warranty shall also include installation and finishing that may be required due to repair or
replacement of defective doors.
2. Warranty shall be in effect during the following period of time from date of Substantial
Completion:
a. Solid-Core Interior Doors: Life of installation.
PART 2-PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
1. Flush Wood Doors:
a. Algoma Hardwoods Inc. .�.
b. Eggers Industries;Architectural Door Division.
C. IPIK Door Company.
d. Mohawk Flush Doors, Inc.
e. Oshkosh Architectural Door Co.
f. Weyerhaeuser Company.
2.2 DOOR CONSTRUCTION, GENERAL
A. Doors for Opaque Finish:
1. Grade: Premium.
2. Faces: Any closed-grain hardwood
2.3 SOLID-CORE DOORS
A. Interior Veneer-Faced Doors:
Project No. 00058 08211 FLUSH WOOD DOORS-2
cep
Renovations to Parsons Annex
Smith College
Northampton, Massachusetts
SECTION 08211 -FLUSH WOOD DOORS
PART 1 -GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the following:
1. Solid-core doors with wood-veneer faces.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of door. Include details of core and edge construction, and trim for
openings. Include factory-finishing specifications.
sw
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Source Limitations: Obtain flush wood doors through one source from a single manufacturer.
B. Quality Standard: Comply with NWWDA I.S.1 A, "Architectural Wood Flush Doors."
C. Fire-Rated Wood Doors: Doors complying with NFPA 80 that are listed and labeled by a testing
and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, for fire ratings indicated,
based on testing according to NFPA 252 or UBC Standard 7-2.
D. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site to comply with requirements in
Division 1 Section"Project Management and Coordination."
1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE,AND HANDLING
A. Comply with requirements of referenced standard and manufacturer's written instructions.
so B. Package doors individually in plastic bags or cardboard cartons and wrap bundles of doors in
plastic sheeting.
ew C. Mark each door on top and bottom rail with opening number used on Shop Drawings.
w. 1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS
Project No. 00058 08211 FLUSH WOOD DOORS-1
Renovations to Parsons Annex
Smith College
Northampton, Massachusetts
A. General: Install steel doors, frames, and accessories according to Shop Drawings, manufacturer's
data, and as specified.
B. Placing Frames: Comply with provisions in SDI 105, unless otherwise indicated. Set frames
accurately in position, plumbed, aligned, and braced securely until permanent anchors are set.
After wall construction is completed, remove temporary braces and spreaders, leaving surfaces
smooth and undamaged.
ew. 1. Except for frames located in existing walls or partitions, place frames before construction of
enclosing walls and ceilings.
2. For in-place wood and plaster partitions, install knock-down, drywall slip-on frames.
3. Install fire-rated frames according to NFPA 80.
4. For openings 90 inches (2286 mm) or more in height, install an additional anchor at hinge
and strike jambs.
C. Door Installation: Comply with ANSI A250.8. Fit hollow-metal doors accurately in frames,
within clearances specified in ANSI A250.8. Shim as necessary to comply with SDI 122 and
w
ANSI/DHI A115.1G.
1. Fire-Rated Doors: Install within clearances specified in NFPA 80.
3.2 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING
A. Prime-Coat Touchup: Immediately after installation, sand smooth any rusted or damaged areas
of prime coat and apply touch up of compatible air-drying primer.
qW B. Protection Removal: Immediately before final inspection, remove protective wrappings from
doors and frames.
END OF SECTION 08110
.w
q.
a.
me
Project No. 00058 08110 STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES-5
No
Renovations to Parsons Annex
Smith College
Northampton, Massachusetts
1. Cold-rolled steel sheet.
C. Core Construction: Manufacturer's standard core construction that produces a door complying
with SDI standards.
D. Clearances for Fire-Rated Doors: As required by NFPA 80.
E. Single-Acting, Door-Edge Profile: Square Edge.
F. Tolerances: Comply with SDI 117, "Manufacturing Tolerances for Standard Steel Doors and
Frames."
G. Fabricate concealed stiffeners, reinforcement, edge channels, louvers, and moldings from either
cold-or hot-rolled steel sheet.
H. Exposed Fasteners: Unless otherwise indicated, provide countersunk flat or oval heads for
exposed screws and bolts.
I. Hardware Preparation: Prepare doors and frames to receive mortised and concealed hardware
according to final door hardware schedule and templates provided by hardware supplier. Comply
with applicable requirements in ANSI A250.6 and ANSI Al 15 Series specifications for door and
frame preparation for hardware.
1. For concealed overhead door closers, provide space, cutouts, reinforcement, and provisions
for fastening in top rail of doors or head of frames, as applicable.
J. Frame Construction: Fabricate frames to shape shown.
1. Fabricate frames with mitered or coped and continuously welded corners and seamless face
joints, except slip-on frames.
2. Fabricate knock-down, drywall slip-on frames for in-place wood and plaster partitions.
3. For interior applications, fabricate knock-down frames with mitered corners, for field
assembly.
K. Reinforce doors and frames to receive surface-applied hardware. Drilling and tapping for surface-
applied hardware may be done at Project site.
L. Locate hardware as indicated on Shop Drawings or, if not indicated, according to ANSI A250.8. R
2.6 FINISHES ■*
A. Prime Finish: Manufacturer's standard, factory-applied coat of rust-inhibiting primer complying
with ANSI A250.10 for acceptance criteria.
PART 3 -EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
up
Project No. 00058 08110 STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES-4
go
Renovations to Parsons Annex
Smith College
on Northampton, Massachusetts
A. Hot-Rolled Steel Sheets: ASTM A 569/A 569M, Commercial Steel (CS), Type B; free of scale,
pitting, or surface defects; pickled and oiled.
on
B. Cold-Rolled Steel Sheets: ASTM A 366/A 366M, Commercial Steel (CS), or
ASTM A 620/A 620M, Drawing Steel(DS), Type B; stretcher-leveled standard of flatness.
C. Metallic-Coated Steel Sheets: ASTM A 653/A 653M, Commercial Steel (CS), Type B, with an
A40 (ZF120) zinc-iron-alloy(galvannealed) coating; stretcher-leveled standard of flatness.
D. Electrolytic Zinc-Coated Steel Sheet: ASTM A 591/A 591M, Commercial Steel (CS), Class B
coating; mill phosphatized; suitable for unexposed applications; stretcher-leveled standard of
W flatness where used for face sheets.
OR
2.3 DOORS
A. General: Provide doors of sizes, thicknesses, and designs indicated.
B. Interior Doors: Provide doors complying with requirements indicated below by referencing
ANSI 250.8 for level and model and ANSI A250.4 for physical-endurance level:
1. Level 1 and Physical Performance Level C, (Standard Duty), Model 1 Full Flush.
2.4 FRAMES
A. General: Provide steel frames for doors, transoms, sidelights, borrowed lights, and other
openings that comply with ANSI A250.8 and with details indicated for type and profile. Conceal
fastenings, unless otherwise indicated.
B. Frames of 0.053-inch-(1.3-mm-)thick steel sheet for:
1. Level 1 steel doors.
2. Wood doors,where indicated.
C. Door Silencers: Except on weather-stripped frames, fabricate stops to receive three silencers on
strike jambs of single-door frames and two silencers on heads of double-door frames.
D. Inserts, Bolts, and Fasteners: Manufacturer's standard units. Where zinc-coated items are to be
built into exterior walls, comply with ASTM A 153/A 153M, Class C or D as applicable.
.A
2.5 FABRICATION
A. General: Fabricate steel door and frame units to comply with ANSI A250.8 and to be rigid, neat
in appearance, and free from defects including warp and buckle. Where practical, fit and
assemble units in manufacturer's plant. Clearly identify work that cannot be permanently factory
go assembled before shipment, to assure proper assembly at Project site.
B. Interior Door Faces: Fabricate exposed faces of doors and panels, including stiles and rails of
nonflush units, from the following material:
Project No. 00058 08110 STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES-3
Renovations to Parsons Annex
Smith College
Northampton, Massachusetts .�
D. Oversize Construction Certificates: For door assemblies required to be fire-protection rated and
exceeding size limitations of labeled assemblies.
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Steel Door and Frame Standard: Comply with ANSI A 250.8, unless more stringent
requirements are indicated.
B. Fire-Rated Door Assemblies: Assemblies complying with NFPA 80 that are listed and labeled by a
testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, for fire-protection
ratings indicated, based on testing according to NFPA 252.
1. Oversize Fire-Rated Door Assemblies: For units exceeding sizes of tested assemblies,
provide certification by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction that
doors comply with standard construction requirements for tested and labeled fire-rated w.
door assemblies except for size.
1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE,AND HANDLING
A. Deliver doors and frames cardboard-wrapped or crated to provide protection during transit and
job storage. Provide additional protection to prevent damage to finish of factory-finished doors
and frames.
B. Inspect doors and frames on delivery for damage, and notify shipper and supplier if damage is
found. Minor damages may be repaired provided refinished items match new work and are
acceptable to Architect. Remove and replace damaged items that cannot be repaired as directed.
C. Store doors and frames at building site under cover. Place units on minimum 4-inch- (100-mm-)
high wood blocking. Avoid using nonvented plastic or canvas shelters that could create a
humidity chamber. If door packaging becomes wet, remove cartons immediately. Provide
minimum 1/4-inch(6-mm)spaces between stacked doors to permit air circulation.
PART 2-PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following: . •'
1. Steel Doors and Frames:
a. Ceco Door Products; a United Dominion Company. ,
b. Pioneer Industries Inc.
C. Republic Builders Products.
d. Steelcraft; a division of Ingersoll-Rand.
2.2 MATERIALS
Project No. 00058 08110 STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES-2 ow
Renovations to Parsons Annex
Smith College
Northampton, Massachusetts
SECTION 08110-STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES
PART 1 -GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
g. A. This Section includes the following:
1. Fire-rated door and frame assemblies.
w B. Related Sections include the following:
1. Division 8 Section"Flush Wood Doors" for wood doors installed in steel frames.
2. Division 8 Section "Door Hardware (Scheduled by Naming Products)" for door hardware
and weather stripping.
3. Division 9 Section"Painting" for field painting factory-primed doors and frames.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
on A. Steel Sheet Thicknesses: Thickness dimensions, including those referenced in ANSI A250.8, are
minimums as defined in referenced ASTM standards for both uncoated steel sheet and the
uncoated base metal of metallic-coated steel sheets.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
no A. Product Data: For each type of door and frame indicated, include door designation, type, level
and model, material description, core description, construction details, label compliance, sound
and fire-resistance ratings, and finishes.
B. Shop Drawings: Show the following:
�. 1. Elevations of each door design.
2. Details of doors including vertical and horizontal edge details.
3. Frame details for each frame type including dimensioned profiles.
4. Details and locations of reinforcement and preparations for hardware.
5. Details of anchorages, accessories, joints, and connections.
C. Door Schedule: Use same reference designations indicated on Drawings in preparing schedule
for doors and frames.
on
Project No. 00058 08110 STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES-1
Renovations to Parsons Annex
Smith College
Northampton, Massachusetts
A. Acoustical Sealant for Exposed and Concealed Joints: Where joint sealants of this type are
indicated, provide products complying with the following:
1. Products: Available products include the following:
40 a. AC-20 FTR Acoustical and Insulation Sealant; Pecora Corporation.
b. SHEETROCK Acoustical Sealant; USG Corp.,United States Gypsum Co.
qW, 2. Applications: All perimeter joints of new partitions at dissimilar materials
END OF SECTION 07920
■w
Project No. 00058 07920 JOINT SEALANTS-9
MR
Renovations to Parsons Annex
Smith College
Northampton, Massachusetts a`
e. PSI-611; Polymeric Systems, Inc.
f. Tremsil 600 White;Tremco.
2. Type and Grade: S (single component) and NS (nonsag).
3. Class: 25.
4. Use Related to Exposure: NT (nontraffic).
5. Uses Related to Joint Substrates: G,A, and, as applicable to joint substrates indicated, O.
6. Applications: Interior wet locations (bath and toilet rooms).
C. Single-Component Pourable Urethane Sealant: Where joint sealants of this type are indicated,
provide products complying with the following:
1. Products: Available products include the following:
a. Chem-Calk 950; Bostik Inc.
b. Vulkem 45; Mameco International.
C. Vulkem Nova 300 SSL; Mameco International.
d. NR-201; Pecora Corporation.
e. Flexiprene PSI-951; Polymeric Systems, Inc.
f. SL 1; Sonneborn Building Products Div., ChemRex Inc..
2. Type and Grade: S (single component) and P (pourable).
3. Class: 25.
4. Use[s] Related to Exposure: T (traffic).
5. Uses Related to Joint Substrates: M,A, and, as applicable to joint substrates indicated, O.
6. Applications: Horizontal interior and exterior joints. .u.
3.7 LATEX JOINT-SEALANT SCHEDULE
A. Latex Sealant : Where joint sealants of this type are indicated, provide products complying with
the following:
1. Products: Available products include the following:
a. Chem-Calk 600; Bostik Inc.
b. NuFlex 330; NUCO Industries, Inc.
C. LC 160 All Purpose Acrylic Caulk; Ohio Sealants, Inc.
d. AC-20; Pecora Corporation. !
e. PSI-701; Polymeric Systems, Inc.
f. Sonolac; Sonneborn Building Products Div., ChemRex, Inc.
g. Tremflex 834;Tremco.
2. Applications: All interior applications subject to painting, except bath and toilet rooms
3.8 ACOUSTICAL JOINT-SEALANT SCHEDULE
Project No. 00058 07920 JOINT SEALANTS-8
Renovations to Parsons Annex
Smith College
Northampton, Massachusetts
3.4 CLEANING
A. Clean off excess sealants or sealant smears adjacent to joints as the Work progresses by methods
and with cleaning materials approved in writing by manufacturers of joint sealants and of
products in which joints occur.
on
3.5 PROTECTION
A. Protect joint sealants during and after curing period from contact with contaminating substances
and from damage resulting from construction operations or other causes so sealants are without
deterioration or damage at time of Substantial Completion. If, despite such protection, damage
or deterioration occurs, cut out and remove damaged or deteriorated joint sealants immediately
so installations with repaired areas are indistinguishable from the original work.
No
3.6 ELASTOMERIC JOINT-SEALANT SCHEDULE
no
A. Single-Component Nonsag Polysulfide Sealant: Where joint sealants of this type are indicated,
provide products complying with the following:
■ 1. Products: Available products include the following:
a. Deck-O-Seal One Step;W.R. Meadows, Inc.
b. Thiokol 1P; Morton International, Inc.
C. GC-9 Synthacalk; Pecora Corporation.
d. PSI-7000; Polymeric Systems, Inc.
2. Type and Grade: S (single component) and NS (nonsag).
3. Class: 25.
4. Use Related to Exposure: NT(nontraffic).
5. Uses Related to Joint Substrates: M, G, A, and, as applicable to joint substrates indicated,
O.
a. Use O Joint Substrates: Coated glass, color anodic aluminum, aluminum coated
with a high-performance coating, galvanized steel, brick,granite, marble, and wood.
6. Applications: All exterior applications except horizontal joints.
B. Mildew-Resistant Silicone Sealant: Where joint sealants of this type are indicated, provide
products formulated with fungicide that are intended for sealing interior ceramic tile joints and
other nonporous substrates that are subject to in-service exposures of high humidity and
temperature extremes, and that comply with the following:
1. Products: Available products include the following:
a. 786 Mildew Resistant; Dow Corning.
b. Sanitary 1700; GE Silicones.
C. NuFlex 302; NUCO Industries, Inc.
d. 898 Silicone Sanitary Sealant; Pecora Corporation.
Project No. 00058 07920 JOINT SEALANTS-7
Renovations to Parsons Annex
Smith College
Northampton, Massachusetts ..
C. Masking Tape: Use masking tape where required to prevent contact of sealant with adjoining
surfaces that otherwise would be permanently stained or damaged by such contact or by cleaning
methods required to remove sealant smears. Remove tape immediately after tooling without
disturbing joint seal.
3.3 INSTALLATION OF JOINT SEALANTS
A. General: Comply with joint sealant manufacturer's written installation instructions for products
and applications indicated, unless more stringent requirements apply.
B. Sealant Installation Standard: Comply with recommendations of ASTM C 1193 for use of joint ..
sealants as applicable to materials, applications, and conditions indicated.
C. Acoustical Sealant Application Standard: Comply with recommendations of ASTM C 919 for
use of joint sealants in acoustical applications as applicable to materials, applications, and w�
conditions indicated.
D. Install sealant backings of type indicated to support sealants during application and at position
required to produce cross-sectional shapes and depths of installed sealants relative to joint widths
that allow optimum sealant movement capability.
1. Do not leave gaps between ends of sealant backings.
2. Do not stretch, twist, puncture, or tear sealant backings.
3. Remove absorbent sealant backings that have become wet before sealant application and �*
replace them with dry materials.
E. Install bond-breaker tape behind sealants where sealant backings are not used between sealants
and back of joints.
F. Install sealants by proven techniques to comply with the following and at the same time backings
are installed:
1. Place sealants so they directly contact and fully wet joint substrates.
2. Completely fill recesses provided for each joint configuration. ..
3. Produce uniform, cross-sectional shapes and depths relative to joint widths that allow
optimum sealant movement capability.
.w
G. Tooling of Nonsag Sealants: Immediately after sealant application and before skinning or curing
begins, tool sealants according to requirements specified below to form smooth, uniform beads of
configuration indicated; to eliminate air pockets; and to ensure contact and adhesion of sealant
with sides of joint.
1. Remove excess sealants from surfaces adjacent to joint.
2. Use tooling agents that are approved in writing by sealant manufacturer and that do not
discolor sealants or adjacent surfaces.
3. Provide concave joint configuration per Figure 5A in ASTM C 1193, unless otherwise ..�
indicated.
Project No. 00058 07920 JOINT SEALANTS-6
an
Renovations to Parsons Annex
Smith College
Northampton, Massachusetts
joint substrates and adjacent nonporous surfaces in any way, and formulated to promote
optimum adhesion of sealants with joint substrates.
C. Masking Tape: Nonstaining, nonabsorbent material compatible with joint sealants and surfaces
adjacent to joints.
PART 3-EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine joints indicated to receive joint sealants, with Installer present, for compliance with
requirements for joint configuration, installation tolerances, and other conditions affecting joint-
sealant performance.
B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
ass
3.2 PREPARATION
W A. Surface Cleaning of Joints: Clean out joints immediately before installing joint sealants to
comply with joint sealant manufacturer's written instructions and the following requirements:
1. Remove all foreign material from joint substrates that could interfere with adhesion of
joint sealant, including dust, paints (except for permanent, protective coatings tested and
approved for sealant adhesion and compatibility by sealant manufacturer), old joint
.� sealants, oil,grease,waterproofing,water repellents,water, surface dirt, and frost.
2. Clean porous joint substrate surfaces by brushing, grinding, blast cleaning, mechanical
abrading, or a combination of these methods to produce a clean, sound substrate capable
of developing optimum bond with joint sealants. Remove loose particles remaining from
above cleaning operations by vacuuming or blowing out joints with oil-free compressed air.
Porous joint surfaces include the following:
a. Concrete.
b. Masonry.
we 3. Remove laitance and form-release agents from concrete.
4. Clean nonporous surfaces with chemical cleaners or other means that do not stain, harm
substrates, or leave residues capable of interfering with adhesion of joint sealants.
40
a. Metal.
b. Glass.
B. Joint Priming: Prime joint substrates where recommended in writing by joint sealant
manufacturer, based on joint-sealant-substrate tests or prior experience. Apply primer to comply
40 with joint sealant manufacturer's written instructions. Confine primers to areas of joint-sealant
bond; do not allow spillage or migration onto adjoining surfaces.
on
Project No. 00058 07920 JOINT SEALANTS-5
Renovations to Parsons Annex
Smith College
Northampton, Massachusetts
undergone testing according to ASTM C 1248 and have not stained porous joint substrates
indicated for Project.
C. Suitability for Contact with Food: Where elastomeric sealants are indicated for joints that will
come in repeated contact with food, provide products that comply with 21 CFR 17 7.2600.
2.4 LATEX JOINT SEALANTS
A. Latex Sealant Standard: Comply with ASTM C 834 for each product of this description
indicated in the Latex Joint-Sealant Schedule at the end of Part 3.
2.5 ACOUSTICAL JOINT SEALANTS
A. Acoustical Sealant for Exposed and Concealed Joints: For each product of this description
indicated in the Acoustical Joint-Sealant Schedule at the end of Part 3, provide manufacturer's
standard nonsag, paintable, nonstaining latex sealant complying with ASTM C 834 and the
following:
1. Product effectively reduces airborne sound transmission through perimeter joints and
openings in building construction as demonstrated by testing representative assemblies "
according to ASTM E 90.
w�
2.6 JOINT-SEALANT BACKING
A. General: Provide sealant backings of material and type that are nonstaining; are compatible with
joint substrates, sealants, primers, and other joint fillers; and are approved for applications
indicated by sealant manufacturer based on field experience and laboratory testing.
B. Cylindrical Sealant Backings: ASTM C 1330, of type indicated below and of size and density to
control sealant depth and otherwise contribute to producing optimum sealant performance:
1. Type C: Closed-cell material with a surface skin.
C. Bond-Breaker Tape: Polyethylene tape or other plastic tape recommended by sealant
manufacturer for preventing sealant from adhering to rigid, inflexible joint-filler materials or joint
surfaces at back of joint where such adhesion would result in sealant failure. Provide self-adhesive
tape where applicable.
2.7 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS
A. Primer: Material recommended by joint sealant manufacturer where required for adhesion of
sealant to joint substrates indicated, as determined from preconstruction joint-sealant-substrate
tests and field tests.
nip
B. Cleaners for Nonporous Surfaces: Chemical cleaners acceptable to manufacturers of sealants and
sealant backing materials, free of oily residues or other substances capable of staining or harming
ow
Project No. 00058 07920 JOINT SEALANTS4
no
no
Renovations to Parsons Annex
Smith College
no Northampton, Massachusetts
B. Store and handle materials in compliance with manufacturer's written instructions to prevent
their deterioration or damage due to moisture, high or low temperatures, contaminants, or other
causes.
w 1.7 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Environmental Limitations: Do not proceed with installation of joint sealants under the
following conditions:
1. When ambient and substrate temperature conditions are outside limits permitted by joint
sealant manufacturer.
2. When ambient and substrate temperature conditions are outside limits permitted by joint
sealant manufacturer or are below 40 deg F(4.4 deg Q.
3. When joint substrates are wet.
B. Joint-Width Conditions: Do not proceed with installation of joint sealants where joint widths are
less than those allowed by joint sealant manufacturer for applications indicated.
C. Joint-Substrate Conditions: Do not proceed with installation of joint sealants until contaminants
capable of interfering with adhesion are removed from joint substrates.
PART 2-PRODUCTS
2.1 PRODUCTS AND MANUFACTURERS
A. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the products indicated for
each type in the sealant schedules at the end of Part 3.
2.2 MATERIALS, GENERAL
A. Compatibility: Provide joint sealants, backings, and other related materials that are compatible
with one another and with joint substrates under conditions of service and application, as
demonstrated by sealant manufacturer based on testing and field experience.
B. Colors of Exposed Joint Sealants: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range for this
characteristic.
2.3 ELASTOMERIC JOINT SEALANTS
A. Elastomeric Sealant Standard: Comply with ASTM C 920 and other requirements indicated for
each liquid-applied chemically curing sealant in the Elastomeric Joint-Sealant Schedule at the end
of Part 3, including those referencing ASTM C 920 classifications for type, grade, class, and uses.
an
B. Stain-Test-Response Characteristics: Where elastomeric sealants are specified in the Elastomeric
Joint-Sealant Schedule to be nonstaining to porous substrates, provide products that have
Project No. 00058 07920 JOINT SEALANTS-3
am
Renovations to Parsons Annex
Smith College
Northampton, Massachusetts
3. Division 9 Section "Acoustical Panel Ceilings" for sealing edge moldings at perimeters of
acoustical ceilings.
go
1.3 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
Im
A. Provide elastomeric joint sealants that establish and maintain watertight and airtight continuous
joint seals without staining or deteriorating joint substrates.
OR
B. Provide joint sealants for interior applications that establish and maintain airtight and water-
resistant continuous joint seals without staining or deteriorating joint substrates.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each joint-sealant product indicated.
B. Samples for Initial Selection: Manufacturer's color charts consisting of strips of cured sealants
showing the full range of colors available for each product exposed to view.
C. Product Certificates: Signed by manufacturers of joint sealants certifying that products furnished
comply with requirements and are suitable for the use indicated.
D. SWRI Validation Certificate: For each elastomeric sealant specified to be validated by SWRI's
Sealant Validation Program.
E. Qualification Data: For firms and persons specified in "Quality Assurance" Article to
demonstrate their capabilities and experience. Include lists of completed projects with project
names and addresses, names and addresses of architects and owners, and other information
specified.
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Installer Qualifications: An experienced installer who has specialized in installing joint sealants "'
similar in material, design, and extent to those indicated for this Project and whose work has
resulted in joint-sealant installations with a record of successful in-service performance.
B. Source Limitations: Obtain each type of joint sealant through one source from a single
manufacturer.
C. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site to comply with requirements in
Division 1 Section"Project Meetings."
ow
1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE,AND HANDLING
A. Deliver materials to Project site in original unopened containers or bundles with labels indicating ow
manufacturer, product name and designation, color, expiration date, pot life, curing time, and
mixing instructions for multicomponent materials.
we
Project No. 00058 07920 JOINT SEALANTS-2 am
Renovations to Parsons Annex
Smith College
Northampton, Massachusetts
SECTION 07920-JOINT SEALANTS
PART 1-GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes sealants for the following applications, including those specified by
reference to this Section:
w B. This Section includes sealants for the following applications:
1. Exterior joints in the following vertical surfaces and nontraffic horizontal surfaces:
a. Control and expansion joints in cast-in-place concrete.
b. Joints between metal panels.
C. Joints between different materials listed above.
d. Perimeter joints between materials listed above and frames of doors and windows.
e. Control and expansion joints in ceiling and overhead surfaces.
f. Other joints as indicated.
2. Exterior joints in the following horizontal traffic surfaces:
a. Control, expansion, and isolation joints in cast-in-place concrete slabs.
" b. Joints between different materials listed above.
C. Other joints as indicated.
3. Interior joints in the following vertical surfaces and horizontal nontraffic surfaces:
a. Control and expansion joints on exposed interior surfaces of exterior walls.
! b. Perimeter joints of exterior openings where indicated.
C. Vertical control joints on exposed surfaces of interior unit masonry and concrete
walls and partitions.
ww d. . Perimeter joints between interior wall surfaces and frames of interior doors and
windows.
e. Joints between plumbing fixtures and adjoining walls, floors, and counters.
o f. Other joints as indicated.
C. Related Sections include the following:
W 1. Division 8 Section"Glazing" for glazing sealants.
2. Division 9 Section "Gypsum Board Assemblies" for sealing perimeter joints of gypsum
board partitions to reduce sound transmission.
Project No. 00058 07920 JOINT SEALANTS-1
..
Renovations to Parsons Annex
Smith College
Northampton, Massachusetts .m
B. Class I, Clear Anodic Finish: AA-M 12C22A41 (Mechanical Finish: nonspecular as fabricated;
Chemical Finish: etched, medium matte; Anodic Coating: Architectural Class 1, clear coating
0.018 mm or thicker) complying with AAMA 607.1.
PART 3 - EXECUTION ..
3.1 INSTALLATION .,
A. General: Comply with manufacturer's written instructions. Coordinate installation of roof
accessories with installation of roof deck, roof insulation, flashing, roofing membranes, ..
penetrations, equipment, and other construction involving roof accessories to ensure that each
element of the Work performs properly and that combined elements are waterproof and
weathertight. Anchor roof accessories securely to supporting structural substrates so they are
capable of withstanding lateral and thermal stresses, and inward and outward loading pressures.
B. Install roof accessory items according to construction details of NRCA's "Roofing and
Waterproofing Manual," unless otherwise indicated,
C. Separation: Separate metal from incompatible metal or corrosive substrates, including wood, by
coating concealed surfaces, at locations of contact, with bituminous coating or providing other
permanent separation.
D. Flange Seals: Unless otherwise indicated, set flanges of accessory units in a thick bed of roofing
cement to form a seal.
E. Cap Flashing: Where required as component of accessory, install cap flashing to provide .,
waterproof overlap with roofing or roof flashing (as counterflashing). Seal overlap with thick
bead of mastic sealant.
F. Operational Units: Test-operate units with operable components. Clean and lubricate joints and
hardware. Adjust for proper operation.
G. Snow Guards: Install according to written installation instructions and recommendations of
manufacturer and NRCA's "Steep Roofing Manual." Locate snow guards at 24 inches (600 mm)
o.c. horizontally. Coordinate with slate roofing installation.
3.2 CLEANING AND PROTECTION
A. Clean exposed surfaces according to manufacturer's written instructions. Touch up damaged
metal coatings.
END OF SECTION 07720
Project No. 00058 07720 ROOF ACCESSORIES-4 aw
MR
Renovations to Parsons Annex
Smith College
W Northampton, Massachusetts
counterflashing), with welded or sealed mechanical corner joints. Provide double-wall cover (lid)
construction with 1- inch- (25-mm-) thick insulation core. Provide gasketing and equip with
o" corrosion-resistant or hot-dip galvanized hardware including pintle hinges, hold-open devices,
interior padlock hasps, and both interior and exterior latch handles.
B. Type: Single-leaf personnel access.
1. For Ladder Access: 30 by 36 inches (750 by 900 mm).
C. Material: Aluminum .
.w
1. Finish: Prime painted.
D. Sloping Roofs: Where slope or roof deck exceeds 1/4 inch per foot (1:48), fabricate hatch curbs
with height tapered to match slope to level tops of units.
2.4 SNOW GUARDS
A. General: Prefabricated, noncorrosive units designed to be installed without penetrating roof and
complete with predrilled holes, clamps, or hooks for anchoring.
1. Brackets: Prefabricated, copper or bronze and copper units, designed for use with type of
roof specified.
2. Metal Bar Type: Consisting of 3 bronze rods or bars held in place by supports designed for
use with type of roof specified.
2.5 FINISHES, GENERAL
A. Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal Products" for
recommendations for applying and designating finishes.
B. Protect mechanical finishes on exposed surfaces from damage by applying a strippable, temporary
"a protective covering before shipping.
C. Appearance of Finished Work: Variations in appearance of abutting or adjacent pieces are
*"* acceptable if they are within one-half of the range of approved Samples. Noticeable variations in
the same piece are not acceptable. Variations in appearance of other components are acceptable
if they are within the range of approved Samples and are assembled or installed to minimize
W contrast.
2.6 ALUMINUM FINISHES
A. Finish designations prefixed by AA comply with the system established by the Aluminum
Association for designating aluminum finishes.
�w
Project No. 00058 07720 ROOF ACCESSORIES-3
Renovations to Parsons Annex
Smith College
Northampton, Massachusetts
A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering
products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
1. Roof Hatches:
a. Babcock-Davis Hatchways, Inc. �*
b. Bilco Company.
C. Milcor, Inc.
d. Nystrom Products Co.
e. Roof Products&Systems Corp.
2. Snow Guards: .�
a. Sieger Snow Guards, Inc.
b. Vermont Slate and Copper Services, Inc.
C. Zaleski Snow-Guard and Roofing Specialties Inc.
2.2 MATERIALS, GENERAL
A. Aluminum Sheet: ASTM B 209 (ASTM B 209M) for alclad alloy 3005H25 or alloy and temper
required to suit forming operations,with mill finish,unless otherwise indicated.
B. Extruded Aluminum: ASTM B 221 (ASTM B 221M) alloy 6063-T52 or alloy and temper
required to suit structural and finish requirements,with mill finish, unless otherwise indicated.
C. Insulation: Manufacturer's standard rigid or semirigid glass-fiber board of thickness indicated.
D. Wood Nailers: Softwood lumber,pressure treated with waterborne preservatives for aboveground
use, complying with AWPA C2; not less than 1-1/2 inches (38 mm)thick.
E. Fasteners: Same metal as metals being fastened, or nonmagnetic stainless steel or other
noncorrosive metal as recommended by manufacturer. Match finish of exposed fasteners with
finish of material being fastened.
F. Gaskets: Manufacturer's standard tubular or fingered design of neoprene, EPDM, or PVC; or flat
design of foam rubber, sponge neoprene, or cork.
G. Elastomeric Sealant: Generic type recommended by unit manufacturer that is compatible with
joint surfaces; ASTM C 920, Type S, Grade NS, Class 25, and Uses NT, G,A, and, as applicable
to joint substrates indicated, O.
km
H. Roofing Cement: ASTM D 4586, nonasbestos, fibrated asphalt cement designed for trowel
application or other adhesive compatible with roofing system.
Wr
2.3 ROOF HATCHES
A. General: Fabricate units to withstand 40-lbf/sq. ft. (1.9-kPa) external and 20-lbf/sq. ft. (0.95-kPa)
internal loading pressure. Frame with minimum 9-inch- (225-mm-) high, integral-curb, double-
wall construction with 1-1/2-inch (38- mm) insulation, formed cants and cap flashing (roofing
Project No. 00058 07720 ROOF ACCESSORIES-2
a
Renovations to Parsons Annex
Smith College
Northampton, Massachusetts
SECTION 07720-ROOF ACCESSORIES
PART 1 -GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the following:
1. Roof hatches.
2. Snow guards.
B. Related Sections include the following:
1. Division 6 Section"Rough Carpentry" for roof sheathing,wood cants, and wood nailers.
an 2. Division 7 Section "Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim" for shop- and field-fabricated metal
flashing and counterflashing, scuppers, gutters and downspouts, fasciae, roof expansion-
joint covers,valleys, and miscellaneous sheet metal trim and accessories.
3. Division 7 Sections for roofing accessories included as part of roofing Work.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include construction details, materials,
dimensions of individual components and profiles, and finishes.
B. Shop Drawings: Show fabrication and installation details. Indicate dimensions, weights,
loadings, required clearances, method of field assembly, and components. Include plans,
elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other Work.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Standards: Comply with the following:
1. SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual" details for fabrication of units, including
flanges and cap flashing to coordinate with type of roofing indicated.
2. NRCA's"Roofing and Waterproofing Manual" details for installing units.
PART 2-PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
Project No. 00058 07720 ROOF ACCESSORIES-1
Renovations to Parsons Annex
Smith College
.w Northampton, Massachusetts
G. Conceal fasteners and expansion provisions where possible in exposed work and locate to
minimize possibility of leakage. Cover and seal fasteners and anchors as required for a tight
0M installation.
H. Tin uncoated copper surfaces at edges of sheets to be soldered, for a width of 1-1/2 inches (38
mm), using solder recommended for copper work. Where surfaces to be soldered are lead coated,
do not tin edges, but wire brush lead coating before soldering.
3.4 PROTECTION
no A. Provide final protection and maintain conditions, in a manner acceptable to manufacturer and
Installer, that ensure metal roofing is without damage or deterioration at the time of Substantial
Completion.
om
END OF SECTION 07610
._n
w�
4
Im
ON
Project No. 00058 07610 SHEET METAL ROOFING-5
Renovations to Parsons Annex
Smith College
Northampton, Massachusetts
A. Examine substrates and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements
indicated for conditions affecting performance of sheet metal roofing. Do not proceed with
installation until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Coordinate metal roofing with rain drainage work, flashing, trim, and construction of decks,
parapets, walls, and other adjoining work to provide a leakproof, secure, and noncorrosive e
installation.
B. Promptly remove protective film, if any, from exposed surfaces of metal roofing. Strip with care
to avoid damage to finish.
3.3 INSTALLATION, GENERAL
A. Install roofing to comply with sheet metal roofing manufacturer's written instructions, unless
otherwise indicated.
B. Separate dissimilar metals by painting each metal surface in area of contact with a bituminous
coating, by applying rubberized-asphalt underlayment to each metal surface, or by other
permanent separation as recommended by manufacturers of dissimilar metals.
C. Install felt underlayment and building's paper slip sheet on substrate under metal roofing, unless
otherwise recommended by sheet metal manufacturer. Use adhesive for temporary anchorage,
where possible, to minimize use of mechanical fasteners under metal roofing. Apply from eave to
ridge in shingle fashion and lap joints 2 inches (50 mm) minimum. .�
D. Form and fabricate sheets, seams, strips, cleats,valleys, ridges, edge treatments, integral flashings,
and other components of metal roofing to profiles, patterns, and drainage arrangements shown
and as required for leakproof construction. Provide for thermal expansion and contraction of the
Work. Seal joints as shown and as required for leakproof construction. Shop fabricate materials
to greatest extent possible.
E. Sealant-Type Joints: Where sealant-filled joints are used, embed hooked flanges of joint members
not less than 1 inch (25 mm) into sealant. Form joints to completely conceal sealant. When
ambient temperature is moderate, between 40 and 70 deg F (4 and 21 deg C), at time of
installation, set joint members for 50 percent movement either way. Adjust setting
proportionately for installation at higher ambient temperatures. Do not install sealant-type joints
at temperatures below 40 deg F(4 deg Q. Comply with requirements of Division 7 Section"Joint
Sealants" for handling and installing sealants.
F. Fabricate and install work with lines and corners of exposed units true and accurate. Form
exposed faces flat and free of buckles, excessive waves, and avoidable tool marks, considering
temper and reflectivity of metal. Provide uniform, neat seams with minimum exposure of solder,
welds, and sealant. Fold back sheet metal to form a hem on concealed side of exposed edges,
unless otherwise indicated.
Project No. 00058 07610 SHEET METAL ROOFING-4 �,
Renovations to Parsons Annex
go Smith College
Northampton, Massachusetts
B. Metal Accessories: Provide components matching sheet metal roofing in finish and material that
on are required for a complete roofing system, including the following:
1. Clips, flashings, and ridge closure strips.
2. Trim, copings and gutters.
C. Sealing Tape: Pressure-sensitive, 100 percent solids, polyisobutylene compound sealing tape with
release paper backing. Provide permanently elastic, nonsag, nontoxic, nonstaining tape.
�w
D. Elastomeric Joint Sealant: ASTM C 920, of base polymer, type, grade, class, and use
classifications required to produce joints in roofing that will remain weathertight and as
W recommended by the roofing manufacturer for installation indicated.
E. Bituminous Coating: Cold-applied asphalt mastic, SSPC-Paint 12, compounded for 15-mil (0.4-
e.e mm) dry film thickness per coat, unless otherwise indicated. Provide inert-type noncorrosive
compound free of asbestos fibers, sulfur components, and other deleterious impurities.
we 2.4 FABRICATION
A. General: Fabricate sheet metal roofing to comply with details shown, with metal roofing
manufacturer's written instructions, and with recommendations of SMACNA's "Architectural
Sheet Metal Manual" that apply to the design, dimensions, metal, and other characteristics of
installation indicated.
B. Fabricate sheet metal to allow for expansion in running work sufficient to prevent leakage,
damage, and deterioration of the Work. Brake-form exposed sheet metal work to fit substrates
.. without excessive oil canning, buckling, and tool marks, true to line and levels indicated, and
with exposed edges folded back to form hems. Machine formed panels are not acceptable.
C. Expansion Provisions: Where lapped or bayonet-type expansion provisions in the Work cannot
be used, or would not be sufficiently waterproof and weatherproof, form expansion joints of
intermeshing hooked flanges, not less than 1 inch (25 mm) deep, filled with sealant (concealed
within joints).
D. Sealant Joints: Where movable, nonexpansion-type joints are indicated or required to produce
go weathertight seams, form metal to provide for proper installation of elastomeric sealant, in
compliance with SMACNA standards.
E. Separations: Separate metal from noncompatible metal or corrosive substrates by coating
concealed surfaces at locations of contact with bituminous coating or other permanent separation
as recommended by manufacturer or fabricator.
PART 3-EXECUTION
on
3.1 EXAMINATION
Project No. 00058 07610 SHEET METAL ROOFING-3
Renovations to Parsons Annex
Smith College
Northampton, Massachusetts
B. Handling: Exercise care in unloading, storing, and erecting roofing materials to prevent bending,
warping, twisting, and surface damage.
C. Stack materials on platforms or pallets, covered with tarpaulins or other suitable weathertight and
ventilated covering. Store metal roof coils and panels to ensure dryness. Do not store coils or
panels in contact with other materials that might cause staining, denting, or other surface
damage.
PART 2-PRODUCTS
2.1 ROOFING SHEET METALS
A. Copper Sheet: ASTM B 370, cold-rolled copper sheet, H00 temper, unless otherwise indicated.
wb
1. Weight(Thickness): 20 oz./sq. ft. (0.7 mm), unless otherwise indicated. NO
B. Lead Sheet: ASTM B 749,Type L51121, copper-bearing lead sheet,with a minimum thickness of
0.0625 inch (1.6 mm), but not less than 0.0937 inch (2.4 mm) thick for applications where
burning(welding) is involved.
2.2 UNDERLAYMENT MATERIALS *�
A. Self-Adhering, Polymer-Modified, Bituminous Sheet Underlayment: ASTM D 1970, minimum
40 mils (1 mm) thick. Provide primer when recommended by underlayment manufacturer.
1. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be
incorporated into the Work include,but are not limited to, the following:
a. WinterGuard; CertainTeed Corporation.
b. Bituthene Ice and Water Shield, Grace: W.R. Grace& Co.
C. Nordshield Ice and WaterGard; Nord Bitumi US, Inc.
d. F210; Northern Elastomeric, Inc.
e. Polyguard Deck Guard; Polyguard Products, Inc.
f. Weather Watch; GAF Building Materials Corporation.
B. Building Paper: Minimum 5 lb/100 sq. ft. (2.4 kg/sq. m), rosin sized.
2.3 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS
A. General: Provide materials and types of fasteners, solder, welding rods, protective coatings,
separators, sealants, and accessory items as required for a complete roofing system and as
recommended by sheet metal manufacturer and fabricator for metal roofing work, unless
otherwise indicated.
Project No. 00058 07610 SHEET METAL ROOFING-2
on
Renovations to Parsons Annex
Smith College
Northampton, Massachusetts
SECTION 07610-SHEET METAL ROOFING
PART 1 -GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the following:
1. Standing-seam metal roofing.
40 B. Related Sections include the following:
1. Division 6 Section"Rough Carpentry" for wood framing and decking.
1.3 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
No A. Install sheet metal roofing capable of withstanding normal thermal movement, wind loading,
structural movement, thermally induced movement, and exposure to weather without failure or
infiltration of water into the building interior.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each product indicated. Include details of construction relative to materials,
dimensions of individual components, profiles, and finishes.
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
W A. Installer Qualifications: Engage an experienced installer who has completed sheet metal roofing
similar in material, design, forming method, and extent to that indicated for this Project and with
a record of successful in-service performance.
B. Industry Standard: Unless otherwise shown or specified, comply with the Sheet Metal and Air
Conditioning Contractors National Association's (SMACNA) "Architectural Sheet Metal
Manual." Conform to dimensions and profiles shown.
1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE,AND HANDLING
A. Deliver metal coils, panels, and other roofing materials so they will not be damaged or deformed.
Package roofing materials for protection against transportation damage.
w
Project No. 00058 07610 SHEET METAL ROOFING-1
Renovations to Parsons Annex
Smith College
a Northampton, Massachusetts
3.9 PROTECTING AND CLEANING
A. Protect sheet membrane roofing from damage and wear during remainder of
construction period. When remaining construction will not affect or endanger roofing,
inspect roofing for deterioration and damage, describing its nature and extent in a
written report,with copies to Architect and Owner.
B. Correct deficiencies in or remove roofing that does not comply with requirements,
repair substrates, reinstall roofing, and repair sheet flashings to a condition free of
damage and deterioration at the time of Substantial Completion and according to
warranty requirements.
C. Clean overspray and spillage from adjacent construction using cleaning agents and
procedures recommended by manufacturer of affected construction.
END OF SECTION 07531
Project No. 00058 07531 EPDM SINGLE-PLY MEM. ROOFING-9
Renovations to Parsons Annex
Smith College
Northampton, Massachusetts
I. Apply epichlorohydrin sheet over EPDM sheet at locations indicated according to
roofing system manufacturers written instructions.
3.5 SEAM INSTALLATION
A. Clean both faces of splice areas, apply splicing cement, and firmly roll side and end laps
of overlapping sheets according to manufacturer's written instructions to ensure a
watertight seam installation. Apply lap sealant and seal exposed edges of sheet
terminations.
B. Clean and prime both faces of splice areas, apply splice tape, and firmly roll side and
end laps of overlapping sheets according to manufacturer's written instructions to �•.
ensure a watertight seam installation. Apply lap sealant and seal exposed edges of
sheet terminations.
C. Repair tears,voids, and lapped seams in roofing that does not meet requirements.
3.6 FLASHING INSTALLATION
A. Install sheet flashings and preformed flashing accessories and adhere to substrates
according to roofing system manufacturer's written instructions.
B. Apply bonding adhesive to substrate and underside of flashing sheet at required rate
and allow to partially dry. Do not apply bonding adhesive to seam area of flashing. .�
C. Flash penetrations and field-formed inside and outside corners with cured or uncured
sheet flashing as recommended by manufacturer.
D. Clean splice areas, apply splicing cement, and firmly roll side and end laps of
overlapping sheets according to manufacturer's written instructions to ensure a
watertight seam installation. Apply lap sealant and seal exposed edges of sheet flashing
terminations.
E. Terminate and seal top of sheet flashings.
F. Terminate and seal top of sheet flashings and mechanically anchor to substrate through
termination bars.
3.7 WALKWAY INSTALLATION ,
A. Walkways: Install walkway products in locations indicated. Adhere walkway products
to substrate with compatible adhesive according to roofing system manufacturer's
written instructions.
3.8 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Final Roof Inspection: Arrange for roofing system manufacturer's technical personnel
to inspect roofing installation on completion and submit report to Architect.
Project No. 00058 07531 EPDM SINGLE-PLY MEM. ROOFING-8
Renovations to Parsons Annex
Smith College
Northampton, Massachusetts
3.3 INSULATION INSTALLATION
A. Coordinate installing roofing system components so insulation is not exposed to
precipitation or left exposed at the end of the workday.
B. Comply with roofing system manufacturer's written instructions for installing roof
insulation.
C. Install insulation with long joints of insulation in a continuous straight line with end
joints staggered between rows, abutting edges and ends between boards. Fill gaps
exceeding 1/4 inch(6 mm)with insulation.
1. Cut and fit insulation within 1/4 inch (6 mm) of nailers, projections, and
W penetrations.
D. Install cover boards over insulation with long joints in continuous straight lines with
end joints staggered between rows. Loosely butt cover boards together and fasten to
roof deck according to roofing manufacturer's written instructions.
E. Attached Insulation: Install each layer of insulation and secure to deck using
mechanical fasteners specifically designed and sized for fastening specified board-type
roof insulation to deck type indicated.
3.4 ADHERED SHEET INSTALLATION
A. Install EPDM sheet over area to receive roofing according to roofing system
manufacturer's written instructions. Unroll sheet and allow to relax for a minimum of
30 minutes.
B. Start installation of sheet in presence of roofing system manufacturer's technical
personnel.
W C. Accurately align sheets and maintain uniform side and end laps of minimum
dimensions required by manufacturer. Stagger end laps.
D. Apply bonding adhesive to substrate and underside of sheet at rate required by
manufacturer and allow to partially dry. Do not apply bonding adhesive to splice area
of sheet.
E. Apply solid mopping of hot roofing asphalt to substrate at rate required by
manufacturer and install fabric-backed sheet. Do not apply asphalt to splice area of
sheet.
F. Mechanically or adhesively fasten sheet securely at terminations and perimeter of
roofing.
G. Apply roofing sheet with side laps shingled with slope of roof deck where possible.
MM H. Install adhered EPDM sheet and auxiliary materials to tie in to existing roofing.
Project No. 00058 07531 EPDM SINGLE-PLY MEM. ROOFING-7
Renovations to Parsons Annex
Smith College
Northampton, Massachusetts *
B. Fasteners: Factory-coated steel fasteners and metal or plastic plates meeting
corrosion-resistance provisions of FM 4470, designed for fastening roof insulation to
substrate, and acceptable to roofing system manufacturer. .,.
C. Cover Board: Cellulosic-fiber insulating board, ASTM C 208,Type II, Grade 2, 1/2 inch
thick.
D. Protection Mat: Woven or nonwoven polypropylene, polyolefin, or polyester fabric
mat, water permeable and resistant to ultraviolet degradation, type and weight as
recommended by roofing system manufacturer for application.
2.6 WALKWAYS
A. Walkway Pads or rolls: Factory-formed, nonporous, heavy-duty, solid-rubber, slip-
resisting, surface-textured walkway pads, approximately 3/16 inch (5 mm) thick, and
acceptable to roofing system manufacturer.
PART 3 -EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions under which roofing will be applied, with
Installer present,for compliance with requirements. ••
B. Verify that roof openings and penetrations are in place and set and braced and that roof
drains are properly clamped into position.
C. Verify that wood nailers are in place and secured and match thicknesses of insulation
required.
D. Do not proceed with installation until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Clean substrate of dust, debris, and other substances detrimental to roofing installation
according to roofing system manufacturer's written instructions. Remove sharp
projections.
B. Prevent materials from entering and clogging roof drains and conductors and from
spilling or migrating onto surfaces of other construction. Remove roof-drain plugs
when no work is taking place or when rain is forecast.
C. Complete terminations and base flashings and provide temporary seals to prevent
water from entering completed sections of the roofing system at the end of the workday
or when rain is forecast. Remove and discard temporary seals before beginning work
on adjoining roofing.
Project No. 00058 07531 EPDM SINGLE-PLY MEM. ROOFING-6
Renovations to Parsons Annex
Smith College
Northampton, Massachusetts
2. Ultimate Elongation: 200 percent;ASTM D 412.
3. Tear Resistance: 150 lbf/in. (26.3 kN/m);ASTM D 412.
4. Brittleness Temperature: Minus 20 deg F(Minus 29 deg C);ASTM D 746.
5. Resistance to Ozone Aging: No cracks after 168 hours' exposure of 50 percent
elongated sample at 104 deg F (4o deg C) and loo-pphm (loo-MPa) ozone;
ASTM D 1149•
6. Resistance to Oil Aging: 15 percent maximum mass change after 168 hours'
immersion in diesel fuel No. 2 at 158 deg F(7o deg C);ASTM D 471.
D. Bonding Adhesive: Manufacturer's standard bonding adhesive.
E. Splice Adhesive and Cleaner: Single-component butyl splicing adhesive and solvent-
`" based splice cleaner.
F. Splice Primer and Tape: Manufacturer's standard synthetic rubber polymer primer
and 3-inch-(75-mm-)wide minimum,butyl splice tape with release film.
G. Lap Sealant: Manufacturer's standard single-component sealant.
H. Water Cutoff Mastic: Manufacturer's standard butyl mastic sealant.
I. Metal Termination Bars: Manufacturer's standard aluminum bars, approximately 1
inch(25 mm)wide, roll formed and prepunched.
J. Fasteners: Factory-coated steel fasteners and metal or plastic plates meeting
corrosion-resistance provisions of FM 4470, designed for fastening sheet to substrate,
and acceptable to roofing system manufacturer.
K. Miscellaneous Accessories: Provide pourable sealers, preformed cone and vent sheet
flashings, preformed inside and outside corner sheet flashings, T joint covers, in-seam
sealants, termination reglets, and other accessories recommended by roofing system
manufacturer for intended use.
2.4 INSULATION MATERIALS
A. General: Provide preformed roof insulation boards that comply with requirements,
selected from manufacturer's standard sizes and of thicknesses indicated.
B. Polyisocyanurate Board Insulation: Rigid, cellular polyisocyanurate thermal insulation
with core formed by using HCFCs as blowing agents to comply with ASTM C 1289,
classified by facer type as follows:
1. Facer Type: Type II,felt or glass-fiber mat on both major surfaces.
2.5 INSULATION ACCESSORIES
A. General: Furnish roof insulation accessories recommended by insulation manufacturer
for intended use and compatible with sheet roofing material.
"' Project No. 00058 07531 EPDM SINGLE-PLY MEM. ROOFING-5
.w
Renovations to Parsons Annex
Smith College
Northampton, Massachusetts ow
C. Special Project Warranty: Submit roofing Installer's warranty,on warranty form at end
of this Section, signed by Installer, covering Work of this Section, including membrane
roofing, sheet flashing, roof insulation, fasteners, and vapor retarders, if any, for the
following warranty period:
1. Warranty Period: 2 years from date of Substantial Completion. on
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
am
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of
the following:
1. EPDM Sheet:
a. Carlisle Syntec Systems; Carlisle Corp.
2. Polyisocyanurate Board Insulation:
a. Apache Products Co.
b. Atlas Roofing Corporation.
C. Celotex Corp. (The).
d. NRG Barriers, Inc.
2.2 EPDM SHEET
A. EPDM Sheet: Uniform,flexible sheet formed from a terpolymer of ethylene-propylene-
diene, complying with ASTM D 4637, Type 1, of the following grade, class, thickness,
backing, and exposed face color:
1. Grade and Class: Grade 1 or 2 and Class SR, scrim or fabric internal reinforced.
2. Thickness: 6o mils (1.5 mm), nominal.
3. Exposed Face Color: Manufacturer's standard.
2.3 AUXILIARY MATERIALS
A. General: Furnish auxiliary materials recommended by roofing system manufacturer
for intended use and compatible with EPDM membrane roofing.
1. Furnish liquid-type auxiliary materials that meet VOC limits of authorities having
jurisdiction.
B. Sheet Flashing: 6o-mil- (1.5-mm-) thick EPDM, uncured or cured, according to
application.
C. Epichlorohydrin Sheet: 6o-mil- (1.5-mm-) thick, unreinforced flexible sheet with the "■"
following properties as determined per ASTM test method indicated:
1. Tensile Strength: 1500 psi(10.3 MPa);ASTM D 412.
Project No. 00058 07531 EPDM SINGLE-PLY MEM. ROOFING-4 °
Renovations to Parsons Annex
Smith College
Northampton, Massachusetts
representative; deck Installer; and installers whose work interfaces with or affects
roofing, including installers of roof accessories and roof-mounted equipment.
+ + 2. Review flashings, special roofing details, roof drainage, roof penetrations,
equipment curbs, and condition of other construction that will affect roofing.
3. Review temporary protection requirements for roofing system during and after
installation.
4. Review roof observation and repair procedures after roofing installation.
1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE,AND HANDLING
A. Deliver roofing materials to Project site in original containers with seals unbroken and
labeled with manufacturer's name, product brand name and type, date of manufacture,
and directions for storing and mixing with other components.
B. Store liquid materials in their original undamaged containers in a clean, dry, protected
location and within the temperature range required by roofing system manufacturer.
Protect stored liquid material from direct sunlight.
1. Discard and legally dispose of liquid material that cannot be applied within its
stated shelf life.
C. Protect roof insulation materials from physical damage and from deterioration by
sunlight, moisture, soiling, and other sources. Store in a dry location. Comply with
insulation manufacturer's written instructions for handling, storing, and protecting
during installation.
D. Handle and store roofing materials and place equipment in a manner to avoid
permanent deflection of deck.
1.7 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Weather Limitations: Proceed with roofing work only when existing and forecasted
weather conditions permit roofing to be installed according to manufacturers' written
instructions and warranty requirements.
1.8 WARRANTY
A. General Warranty: The warranties specified in this Article shall not deprive the Owner
of other rights the Owner may have under other provisions of the Contract Documents
and shall be in addition to, and run concurrent with, other warranties made by the
Contractor under requirements of the Contract Documents.
B. Standard Roofing Manufacturer's Warranty: Submit a written warranty, without
monetary limitation, signed by roofing system manufacturer agreeing to promptly
repair leaks resulting from defects in materials or workmanship for the following
warranty period:
1. Warranty Period: 10 years.
"' Project No. 00058 07531 EPDM SINGLE-PLY MEM. ROOFING-3
Renovations to Parsons Annex
Smith College
Northampton, Massachusetts
D. Roofing System Design: Provide a roofing system that complies with roofing system
manufacturer's written design instructions and with the following:
1. SPRI's "Wind Design Guide for Adhered Roofing Systems."
E. Product Data: For each type of roofing product specified. Include data substantiating
that materials comply with requirements.
F. Shop Drawings: Include plans, sections, and details of the following:
1. Base flashings and membrane terminations.
G. Installer Certificates: Signed by roofing system manufacturer certifying that Installer is •
approved, authorized, or licensed by manufacturer to install specified roofing system.
H. Manufacturer Certificates: Signed by roofing manufacturer certifying that the roofing
system complies with requirements specified in the "Performance Requirements"
Article. Upon request,submit evidence of meeting requirements.
I. Maintenance Data: For roofing system to include in the maintenance manuals "
specified in Division 1.
J. Warranty: Sample copy of standard roofing system manufacturer's warranty stating
obligations, remedies,limitations, and exclusions of warranty.
K. Inspection Report: Copy of roofing system manufacturer's inspection report of w
completed roofing installation.
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Installer Qualifications: Engage an experienced installer to perform work of this
Section who has specialized in installing roofing similar to that required for this Project
and who is approved, authorized, or licensed by the roofing system manufacturer to
install manufacturer's product.
B. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: Provide roofing materials with the fire-test-
response characteristics indicated as determined by testing identical products per test
method indicated below by UL, FM, or another testing and inspecting agency
acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. Identify materials with appropriate
markings of applicable testing and inspecting agency.
1. Exterior Fire-Test Exposure: Class A; ASTM E io8, for application and slopes
indicated.
C. Preinstallation Conference: Before installing roofing system, conduct conference at
Project site to comply with requirements of Division 1 Section "Project Meetings."
Notify participants at least 5 working days before conference.
1. Meet with Owner;Architect; Owner's insurer, if applicable; testing and inspecting
agency representative; roofing Installer; roofing system manufacturer's
Project No. 00058 07531 EPDM SINGLE-PLY MEM. ROOFING-2 A
Renovations to Parsons Annex
Smith College
Northampton, Massachusetts
SECTION 07531-EPDM SINGLE-PLY MEMBRANE ROOFING
PART 1 -GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the following:
1. Adhered sheet roofing.
2. Roof insulation.
3. Walkway pads.
B. Related Sections include the following:
1. Division 6 Section "Rough Carpentry" for wood nailers, curbs, and blocking; and
wood-based, structural-use roof deck panels.
2. Division 7 Section "Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim" for metal roof penetration
flashings, flashings, and counterflashings.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. Roofing Terminology: Refer to ASTM D 1079 for definition of terms related to roofing
work not otherwise defined in this Section.
■""' 1.4 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. General: Install sheet membrane roofing and base flashing that are watertight; will not
permit the passage of liquid water; and will withstand wind loads, thermally induced
movement, and exposure to weather without failure.
B. Material Compatibility: Provide roofing materials that are compatible with one
another under conditions of service and application required, as demonstrated by
roofing system manufacturer based on testing and field experience.
C. FM Listing: Provide sheet membrane, base flashings, and component materials that
meet requirements of FM 445o and FM 447o as part of a roofing system and that are
listed in FM's "Approval Guide" for Class 1 or noncombustible construction, as
'! applicable. Identify materials with FM markings.
1. Roofing system shall comply with the following:
a. Fire/Windstorm Classification: Class 1A-9o.
"" Project No. 00058 07531 EPDM SINGLE-PLY MEM. ROOFING-1
w
Renovations to Parsons Annex
Smith College
Northampton, Massachusetts
1. Fabricate metal flashings at open valleys with a minimum 1-inch- (25-mm-) high standing
rib at center of valley to break force of water flow. Extend metal flashing a minimum of 12
ow inches (300 mm) onto roof deck on each side of valley.
2. Where flashings occur perpendicular to slope, return sheet metal a minimum of 4 inches
(100 mm)under shingles.
No 3. If open valley length exceeds 12 feet (3.6 m), taper valleys by increasing width of valley
flashing by 2 inches (50 mm), for 1 inch (25 mm) on each side, for each 96 inches (2400
mm) of valley.
e
B. Felt Underlayment Installation: Apply one layer of felt over entire roof surface, beginning at
eaves, with courses perpendicular to slope of roof. Lap succeeding courses 2 inches (50 mm)
minimum, with 6-inch- (150-mm-) minimum end laps. Fasten with sufficient nails to hold in
place until slate shingles are installed.
C. Perimeter Underlayment: From eaves, apply modified bituminous underlayment to a minimum
of 36 inches (900 mm) inside the inside face of exterior wall line.
.w. 1. In addition to eaves, apply minimum 24-inch- (600-mm-) wide layer at entire perimeter of
surfaces to receive roofing slate, including ridges,valleys, and rakes.
2. Shingle over underlayment same day or cover with felt.
D. Slate Shingle Installation: Beginning at eaves, install slate shingles according to written
recommendations of manufacturer and details and recommendations of NRCA's "Steep Roofing
on Manual." Unless otherwise indicated, provide at least a 3-inch (75-mm) head lap between
succeeding courses of slate shingles and break (stagger) joints between courses a minimum of 3
inches (75 mm). Provide a 2-inch (50-mm) projection of slate at eaves and 1-inch (25-mm)
projection at gables. Cut and fit slate neatly around roof vents, pipes, ventilators, and other
projections through roof.
1. Nail slate shingles so nail heads just touch slate lightly. Do not drive nails home drawing
slates downward or leave nail head protruding enough to interfere with overlapping shingle
above.
2. Install ridge and hip covers according to manufacturer's written instructions.
3. Cut slate at valleys to form open valleys with a straight border. Taper valleys from a 2-inch
(50-mm) exposure of metal flashing on each side of valley at top and increase exposure by 1
inch (25 mm)(each side)per 96 inches (2400 mm) of valley length.
E. Coordinate installation of snow guards as field slate is being installed.
3.4 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING
A. Remove and replace damaged or broken slates.
B. Remove excess slate and debris from Project site.
END OF SECTION 07315
go
Project No. 00058 07315 SLATE SHINGLES-5
.a
Renovations to Parsons Annex
Smith College
Northampton, Massachusetts
1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:
a. Chem-Calk 300; Bostik Inc.
b. BC-158; Pecora Corporation.
C. Sonneborn Multi-Purpose Sealant; Sonneborn Building Products, Div. of ChemRex,
Inc. .
d. Tremco Butyl Sealant 505;Tremco, Inc.
B. Joint Sealant: One-part elastomeric polyurethane, polysulfide, or silicone-rubber sealant as
recommended in writing by shingle manufacturer. Where sealant will be exposed, provide in
color matching shingle.
C. Snow Guards: Prefabricated, copper or bronze and copper units, designed for use with slate
shingles and complete with predrilled holes or hooks for anchoring.
D. Ridge and Hip Covers: Roll ridge covers and brake form hip covers from 20 oz./sq. ft. cold rolled
copper.
1. Accessories: Fabricate flashing, splices, end caps, and other accessories from matching
metal according to SMACNA procedures and details.
PART 3 -EXECUTION or
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine substrate and conditions under which slate shingle Work is to be performed; notify
Contractor in writing of unsatisfactory conditions. Proceed with slate shingle Work only after
unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
B. Cover or otherwise plug drains to prevent entrance of slate shingle trimmings and debris.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Substrate: Proceed with slate shingle installation only after substrate construction, vent stacks,
and other penetrating work is complete and when substrate materials are dry.
3.3 INSTALLATION
A. Sheet Metal Flashing Installation: Install sheet metal flashing, vent flashing, and edge protection
as indicated and in compliance with details and recommendations of NRCA's "Steep Roofing
Manual."
Project No. 00058 07315 SLATE SHINGLES-4
Renovations to Parsons Annex
Smith College
Northampton, Massachusetts
2. Thickness: Nominal 1/4 inch(6 mm).
3. Length: 18 inches(450 mm); 7-1/2-inch(190-mm)exposure with 3-inch(75-mm) lap.
4. Width: 10 inches (225 mm).
5. Butt Shape: Standard square cut.
6. Weather-Exposure Color Change: Permanent or unfading.
7. Color: Match existing color range(similar to Buckingham Gray).
2.3 SHEET METAL FLASHING
A. Copper Flashing: ASTM B 370, temper H00 (cold rolled), unless temper 060 is required for
forming; 20 oz./sq. ft., except 24 oz./sq. ft. at valleys.
2.4 UNDERLAYMENTS
A. Felt Underlayment: ASTM D 226, Type 11, No. 30 asphalt-saturated organic roofing felt;
minimum 36-inch-(900-mm-)wide rolls.
B. Modified Bituminous Underlayment: ASTM D 1970, self-adhering, polymer-modified,
bituminous sheet; 40 mils (1 mm)thick. Provide primer when recommended by manufacturer.
1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:
a. Nonreinforced: Polyethylene backed.
1) CCW 707; Carlisle Coatings and Waterproofing.
2) WinterGuard; CertainTeed Corporation.
3) Grace Ice and Water Shield,W.R. Grace&Co.
4) Polyguard Deck Guard; Polyguard Products, Inc.
5) Nordshield Ice and WaterGard; Schuller International, Inc.
on
2.5 FASTENERS
an A. Roofing Nails: 0.1055-inch- (2.7-mm-) diameter-shank, hot-dip galvanized steel, smooth-shank
roofing nails; minimum 3/8-inch-(9-mm-) diameter head, and long enough to penetrate 3/4 inch
(19 mm)into solid decking or to penetrate through plywood sheathing.
B. Slating Nails: Nonferrous-metal, large flat-head smooth-shank slating nail long enough to
penetrate either completely through or at least 3/4 inch (19 mm) into sheathing.
1. Minimum Nail Length for Shingles More Than 3/16 Inch (5 mm) Thick: Two times the
shingle thickness plus 1 inch(25 mm).
2.6 ACCESSORIES
A. Plastic Cement: ASTM C 1085, one-part, nonsag, nonstaining, solvent-release-curing,
polymerized butyl sealant formulated with minimum of 75 percent solids;with a tack-free time of
24 hours or less.
Project No. 00058 07315 SLATE SHINGLES-3
..
Renovations to Parsons Annex
Smith College
Northampton, Massachusetts
1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE,AND HANDLING
A. Deliver slate shingles to Project site and store as close as possible to the point of installation to *+�
minimize damage while handling.
B. Store and handle roofing materials to prevent breakage and ensure dryness. Store in a dry, well- ,.
ventilated, weathertight place. Store rolls of felt and other sheet materials on end on pallets or
another raised surface.
C. Do not leave unused felts on roof overnight or when roofing work is not in progress unless
protected from weather or other moisture sources.
D. Handle and store materials and equipment in a manner to avoid significant or permanent
deflection of deck.
.p
1.6 EXTRA MATERIALS
A. Furnish extra materials described below that match products installed and that are packaged with 1W
protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents.
1. Slate Shingles: Full-size units equal to 2 percent of amount installed. am
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide slate shingles by one of the
following:
1. Buckingham-Virginia Slate Corp. *m
2. New England Slate Co., Inc.
3. Vermont Structural Slate Company, Inc.
.w
2.2 SHINGLES
A. Slate Shingles: Hard, dense, sound rock, machine punched or drilled for two nails located for 0W_
proper head lap. No broken or cracked slates, no broken exposed corners, and no broken corners
on covered ends that could sacrifice nailing strength or laying of a watertight roof. No ribbons in
exposed portion of shingle, and curvature not to exceed 1/8 inch per 12 inches (3 mm per 300
mm).
1. Classification: ASTM C 406.
a. Grade S 1: Expected service life more than 75 years.
Project No. 00058 07315 SLATE SHINGLES-2
wi
Renovations to Parsons Annex
Smith College
"_ Northampton, Massachusetts
SECTION 07315-SLATE SHINGLES
we
PART 1 -GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
w
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes slate shingles for standard-slate roofs.
B. Related Sections include the following:
1. Division 6 Section"Rough Carpentry" for roof deck, cant strips, battens, and nailers.
2. Division 7 Section"Roof Accessories" for snow guards.
®, 3. Division 7 Section"Joint Sealants" for field-applied sealants.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Include construction details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual
components and profiles, and finishes for each type of product indicated.
B. Shop Drawings: Include plans, elevations, and sections at hips, gables, ridges, valleys, and eaves;
component details; accessories; and attachments to other Work.
on
C. Samples for Initial Selection: Manufacturer's color charts consisting of units or sections of units
showing the full range of colors, textures, and patterns available for each type of slate shingle
indicated.
D. Samples for Verification: Full-size units for each type of slate shingle indicated; in sets for each
color, texture, shape, and size specified, showing the full range of variations expected. Prepare
Samples from the same material to be used for the Work.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Source Limitations for Slate: Obtain each variety of slate from one source with resources to
provide materials of consistent quality in appearance and physical properties.
B. Warranty: Provide Installer's warranty for slate for 5 years after time of Final Completion.
' 1. Inspect for defects and replace broken or missing slate on annual basis; more often if
required.
o
Project No. 00058 07315 SLATE SHINGLES-1
Renovations to Parsons Annex
Smith College
Northampton, Massachusetts
B. Seal vertical joints in vapor retarders over framing by lapping not less than two wall studs. Fasten
vapor retarders to framing at top, end, and bottom edges; at perimeter of wall openings; and at
lap joints. Space fasteners 16 inches(406 mm)o.c.
C. Firmly attach vapor retarders to substrates with mechanical fasteners or adhesives as
recommended by vapor-retarder manufacturer.
D. Seal joints caused by pipes, conduits, electrical boxes, and similar items penetrating vapor
retarders with vapor-retarder tape to create an airtight seal between penetrating objects and vapor *
retarder.
E. Repair any tears or punctures in vapor retarders immediately before concealment by other work.
Cover with vapor-retarder tape or another layer of vapor retarder.
3.7 PROTECTION
A. Protect installed insulation and vapor retarders from damage due to harmful weather exposures,
physical abuse, and other causes. Provide temporary coverings or enclosures where insulation is
subject to abuse and cannot be concealed and protected by permanent construction immediately
after installation.
END OF SECTION 07210
Project No. 00058 07210 BUILDING INSULATION-6
No
Renovations to Parsons Annex
Smith College
Northampton, Massachusetts
1. If not indicated, extend insulation a minimum of 24 inches (6 10 mm) below exterior grade
line.
�r
B. Protect below-grade insulation on vertical surfaces from damage during backfilling by applying
protection board. Set in adhesive according to insulation manufacturer's written instructions.
C. Protect top surface of horizontal insulation from damage during concrete work by applying
protection board.
.s
3.5 INSTALLATION OF GENERAL BUILDING INSULATION
no
A. Apply insulation units to substrates by method indicated, complying with manufacturer's written
instructions. If no specific method is indicated, bond units to substrate with adhesive or use
mechanical anchorage to provide permanent placement and support of units.
B. Seal joints between closed-cell (nonbreathing) insulation units by applying adhesive, mastic, or
sealant to edges of each unit to form a tight seal as units are shoved into place. Fill voids in
qW completed installation with adhesive, mastic, or sealant as recommended by insulation
manufacturer.
1. Tape joints and ruptures in vapor retarder, and seal each continuous area of insulation to
surrounding construction to ensure airtight installation.
C. Install mineral-fiber blankets in cavities formed by framing members according to the following
requirements:
W 1. Use blanket widths and lengths that fill the cavities formed by framing members. If more
than one length is required to fill cavity, provide lengths that will produce a snug fit
between ends.
to 2. Place blankets in cavities formed by framing members to produce a friction fit between
edges of insulation and adjoining framing members.
W D. Place loose-fill insulation into spaces and onto surfaces as shown, either by pouring or by machine
blowing to comply with ASTM C 1015. Level horizontal applications to uniform thickness as
indicated, lightly settle to uniform density, but do not compact excessively.
on E. Stuff glass-fiber, loose-fill insulation into miscellaneous voids and cavity spaces where shown.
Compact to approximately 40 percent of normal maximum volume equaling a density of
approximately 2.5 lb/cu. ft. (40 kg/cu. m).
3.6 INSTALLATION OF VAPOR RETARDERS
A. General: Extend vapor retarder to extremities of areas to be protected from vapor transmission.
Secure in place with adhesives or other anchorage system as indicated. Extend vapor retarder to
,, cover miscellaneous voids in insulated substrates, including those filled with loose-fiber
insulation.
Project No. 00058 07210 BUILDING INSULATION-5
Renovations to Parsons Annex
Smith College
Northampton, Massachusetts
2.4 AUXILIARY INSULATING MATERIALS
A. Eave Ventilation Troughs: Preformed, rigid fiberboard or plastic sheets designed and sized to fit
between roof framing members and to provide cross ventilation between insulated attic spaces
and vented eaves.
PART 3 -EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine substrates and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for .�
Sections in which substrates and related work are specified and other conditions affecting
performance.
B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Clean substrates of substances harmful to insulations or vapor retarders, including removing
projections capable of puncturing vapor retarders or of interfering with insulation attachment.
3.3 INSTALLATION, GENERAL .�
A. Comply with insulation manufacturer's written instructions applicable to products and
application indicated.
B. Install insulation that is undamaged, dry, and unsoiled and that has not been left exposed at any
time to ice and snow.
C. Extend insulation in thickness indicated to envelop entire area to be insulated. Cut and fit
tightly around obstructions and fill voids with insulation. Remove projections that interfere with
placement.
D. Water-Piping Coordination: If water piping is located on inside of insulated exterior walls,
coordinate location of piping to ensure that it is placed on warm side of insulation and insulation
encapsulates piping.
.s
E. Apply single layer of insulation to produce thickness indicated, unless multiple layers are
otherwise shown or required to make up total thickness.
3.4 INSTALLATION OF PERIMETER AND UNDER-SLAB INSULATION
A. On vertical surfaces, set units in adhesive applied according to manufacturer's written
instructions. Use adhesive recommended by insulation manufacturer.
Project No. 00058 07210 BUILDING INSULATION-4
Renovations to Parsons Annex
Smith College
Northampton, Massachusetts
a. Fibrex Insulations Inc.
b. Owens Corning.
C. Thermafiber.
2.2 INSULATING MATERIALS
A. General: Provide insulating materials that comply with requirements and with referenced
standards.
1. Preformed Units: Sizes to fit applications indicated; selected from manufacturer's standard
W thicknesses,widths, and lengths.
B. Extruded-Polystyrene Board Insulation: ASTM C 578, of type and density indicated below, with
maximum flame-spread and smoke-developed indices of 75 and 450, respectively:
1. Type IV, 1.60 lb/cu. ft. (26 kg/cu. m), unless otherwise indicated.
C. Foil-Faced, Polyisocyanurate Board Insulation: ASTM C 1289, Type I, Class 1 or 2, with
maximum flame-spread and smoke-developed indices of 75 and 450, respectively, based on tests
performed on unfaced core on thicknesses up to 4 inches (101 mm).
D. Unfaced, Flexible Glass-Fiber Board Insulation: ASTM C 612, Type IA; ASTM C 553, Types 1,
II, and III; or ASTM C 665,Type 1;with maximum flame-spread and smoke-developed indices of
ee 25 and 50, respectively; and of the following properties:
1. Nominal density of not less than 1.5 lb/cu. ft. (24 kg/cu. m) nor more than 1.7 lb/cu. ft.
(26 kg/cu. m), thermal resistivity of 4 deg F x h x sq. ft./Btu x in. at 75 deg F (27.7 K x
m/W at 24 deg Q.
2. Combustion Characteristics: Passes ASTM E 136.
IN E. Unfaced Mineral-Fiber Blanket Insulation: ASTM C 665, Type I (blankets without membrane
facing); consisting of fibers manufactured from glass, slag wool, or rock wool; with maximum
flame-spread and smoke-developed indices of 25 and 50, respectively; passing ASTM E 136 for
I'm combustion characteristics.
F. Glass-Fiber Loose-Fill Insulation: ASTM C 764 for type(method of application) indicated below;
4W
maximum flame-spread and smoke-developed indices of 5, and as follows:
1. Type 1 for pneumatic application.
2.3 VAPOR RETARDERS
■A A. Reinforced-Polyethylene Vapor Retarders: 2 outer layers of polyethylene film laminated to an
inner reinforcing layer consisting of either nylon cord or polyester scrim and weighing not less
than 25 lb/1000 sq. ft. (12 kg/100 sq. m), with maximum permeance rating of 0.0507 perm (2.9
ng/Pa x s x sq. m).
B. Vapor-Retarder Tape: Pressure-sensitive tape of type recommended by vapor-retarder
�. manufacturer for sealing joints and penetrations in vapor retarder.
Project No. 00058 07210 BUILDING INSULATION-3
Renovations to Parsons Annex
Smith College
Northampton, Massachusetts
B. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: Provide insulation and related materials with the fire-test-
response characteristics indicated, as determined by testing identical products per test method
indicated below by UL or another testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having
jurisdiction. Identify materials with appropriate markings of applicable testing and inspecting
agency.
so
1. Surface-Burning Characteristics: ASTM E 84.
2. Fire-Resistance Ratings: ASTM E 119.
3. Combustion Characteristics: ASTM E 136. .,
1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE,AND HANDLING o,
A. Protect insulation materials from physical damage and from deterioration by moisture, soiling,
and other sources. Store inside and in a dry location. Comply with manufacturer's written
instructions for handling, storing, and protecting during installation. �.
B. Protect plastic insulation as follows:
1. Do not expose to sunlight, except to extent necessary for period of installation and
concealment.
2. Protect against ignition at all times. Do not deliver plastic insulating materials to Project
site before installation time.
3. Complete installation and concealment of plastic materials as rapidly as possible in each
area of construction. •�
PART 2-PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
1. Extruded-Polystyrene Board Insulation:
a. DiversiFoam Products. no
b. Dow Chemical Company.
C. Owens Corning.
d. Tenneco Building Products. .�
2. Glass-Fiber Insulation:
a. CertainTeed Corporation.
b. Johns Manville Corporation.
C. Knauf Fiber Glass.
d. Owens Corning. ..
3. Slag-Wool-/Rock-Wool-Fiber Insulation:
Project No. 00058 07210 BUILDING INSULATION-2
40
Renovations to Parsons Annex
Smith College
W Northampton, Massachusetts
SECTION 07210-BUILDING INSULATION
PART 1 -GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
on
1.2 SUMMARY
w A. This Section includes the following:
1. Insulation under slabs-on-grade.
o 2. Foundation wall insulation(supporting backfill).
3. Cavity wall insulation.
4. Concealed building insulation.
5. Vapor retarders.
B. Related Sections include the following:
1. Division 3 Section"Cast-in-Place Concrete."
2. Division 4 Section "Unit Masonry Assemblies" for insulation installed in cavity walls and
masonry cells.
3. Division 6 Section"Rough Carpentry" for foam-plastic board sheathing over wood framing.
4. Division 7 Section "Cold Fluid-Applied Waterproofing" for insulation installed with
waterproofing.
5. Division 7 Section "EPDM-Single-Ply Membrane Roofing" for insulation specified as part
of roofing construction.
6. Division 15 Sections for Duct Insulation and Pipe Insulation.
es
1.3 SUBMITTALS
■. A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated.
B. Product Test Reports: Based on evaluation of comprehensive tests performed by a qualified
au testing agency, for insulation products.
C. Research/Evaluation Reports: For foam-plastic insulation.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Source Limitations: Obtain each type of building insulation through one source.
Project No. 00058 07210 BUILDING INSULATION-1
Renovations to Parsons Annex
Smith College
W Northampton, Massachusetts
D. Mix materials and apply waterproofing by spray, roller, notched squeegee, trowel, or other
application method suitable to slope of substrate.
1. Apply one or more coats of waterproofing to obtain a seamless membrane free of
entrapped gases, with an average dry film thickness of 60 mils (1.5 mm) and a minimum
dry film thickness of 50 mils (1.3 mm) at any point.
2. Apply waterproofing to prepared wall terminations and vertical surfaces.
3.5 CURING, PROTECTING,AND CLEANING
A. Cure waterproofing according to manufacturer's written recommendations, taking care to prevent
contamination and damage during application stages and curing.
B. Protect waterproofing from damage and wear during remainder of construction period.
no
C. Clean spillage and soiling from adjacent construction using cleaning agents and procedures
recommended by manufacturer of affected construction.
go
END OF SECTION 07141
Project No. 00058 07141 COLD FLUID-APPLIED WATERPROOFING-5
am,
Renovations to Parsons Annex
Smith College
Northampton, Massachusetts wo
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with
requirements and other conditions affecting performance.
1. Verify that concrete has cured and aged for minimum time period recommended by
waterproofing manufacturer.
2. Verify that substrate is visibly dry and free of moisture. Test for capillary moisture by
plastic sheet method according to ASTM D 4263. .®
3. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 SURFACE PREPARATION
A. Clean and prepare substrate according to manufacturer's written recommendations. Provide
clean, dust-free, and dry substrate for waterproofing application.
B. Mask off adjoining surfaces not receiving waterproofing to prevent spillage or overspray affecting
other construction. aw
C. Remove grease, oil, bitumen, form-release agents, paints, curing compounds, and other
penetrating contaminants or film-forming coatings from concrete.
D. Remove fins, ridges, and other projections and fill honeycomb, aggregate pockets, and other
voids.
3.3 PREPARATION AT TERMINATIONS AND PENETRATIONS
A. Prepare vertical and horizontal surfaces at terminations and penetrations through waterproofing
and at expansion joints, drains, and sleeves according to ASTM C 898 and manufacturer's written
instructions.
B. Prime substrate, unless otherwise instructed by waterproofing manufacturer.
C. Apply a double thickness of waterproofing and embed a joint reinforcing strip in preparation coat
when recommended by waterproofing manufacturer.
1. Provide sealant cants around penetrations and at inside corners of deck-to-wall butt joints
when recommended by waterproofing manufacturer.
am
3.4 WATERPROOFING APPLICATION
aw
A. Apply waterproofing according to ASTM C 898 and manufacturer's written instructions.
B. Start installing waterproofing in presence of manufacturer's technical representative.
C. Apply primer over prepared substrate.
Project No. 00058 07141 COLD FLUID-APPLIED WATERPROOFING-4
s
Renovations to Parsons Annex
Smith College
OR Northampton, Massachusetts
C. Mameco International, Inc.;Vulkem 201.
d. T. C. Miradri;Miraseal.
"' e. Neogard, Div. of Jones-Blair; Neogard 7403/7405.
f. Pacific Polymers, Inc.; Elasto Deck B.T.
g. Pecora Corporation; Duramem 500.
h. Sonneborne, Div. of ChemRex Inc.; HLM 5000.
i. Tremco; Tremproof 60.
j. United Coatings; Elastall 1000.
2.2 WATERPROOFING MATERIALS
A. General: Provide waterproofing materials recommended by manufacturer to be compatible with
one another and able to develop bond to substrate under conditions of service and application, as
demonstrated by waterproofing manufacturer based on testing and field experience.
1. Produce waterproofing materials suitable for application to vertical, horizontal, and sloped
w
substrates, as applicable.
2. Provide waterproofing materials with not less than 90 percent solids.
B. Cold Fluid Applied Waterproofing: Comply with ASTM C 836, with manufacturer's written
physical requirements, and as follows:
1. Single-component, modified polyurethane waterproofing.
2.3 AUXILIARY MATERIALS
A. Primer: Manufacturer's standard, factory-formulated polyurethane or epoxy primer.
B. Sheet Flashing: 50-mil-(1.3-mm-) minimum, nonstaining uncured sheet neoprene.
1. Adhesive: Manufacturer's recommended contact adhesive.
C. Reinforcing Strip: Manufacturer's recommended fiberglass mesh or polyester fabric.
D. Joint Sealant: Multicomponent polyurethane sealant, compatible with waterproofing, complying
with ASTM C 920 Type M, Class 25; Grade NS for sloping and vertical applications or Grade P
for deck applications; Use NT exposure; and as recommended by manufacturer for substrate and
joint conditions.
1. Backer Rod: Closed-cell polyethylene foam.
E. Protection Course: Unfaced, extruded-polystyrene board insulation; ASTM C 578 Type X, 1/2
inch (6 mm)thick.
PART 3 -EXECUTION
Project No. 00058 07141 COLD FLUID-APPLIED WATERPROOFING-3
Renovations to Parsons Annex
Smith College
Northampton, Massachusetts
1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE,AND HANDLING
A. Deliver liquid materials to Project site in original containers with seals unbroken, labeled with
manufacturer's name, product brand name and type, date of manufacture, shelf life, and
directions for storing and mixing with other components.
B. Store liquid materials in their original undamaged containers in a clean, dry, protected location
and within the temperature range required by waterproofing manufacturer.
WX
C. Remove and replace liquid materials that cannot be applied within their stated shelf life.
D. Protect stored materials from direct sunlight.
1.7 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Environmental Limitations: Apply waterproofing within the range of ambient and substrate
temperatures recommended by waterproofing manufacturer. Do not apply waterproofing to a
damp or wet substrate, when relative humidity exceeds 85 percent, or when temperatures are less
than 5 deg F(3 deg C) above dew point.
1. Do not apply waterproofing in snow, rain, fog or mist, or when such weather conditions *"
are imminent during application and curing period.
B. Maintain adequate ventilation during application and curing of waterproofing materials.
1.8 WARRANTY
s
A. Special Manufacturer's Warranty: Written warranty, signed by waterproofing manufacturer
agreeing to repair or replace waterproofing that does not comply with requirements or that does
not remain watertight within specified warranty period.
1. Warranty does not include failure of waterproofing due to failure of substrate prepared
and treated according to requirements or formation of new joints and cracks in substrate ow
that exceed 1/16 inch(1.6 mm) in width.
2. Warranty Period: Five years after date of Substantial Completion.
PART 2-PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be incorporated
into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
1. Single-Component, Modified Polyurethane Waterproofing:
a. Carlisle Corporation, Carlisle Coatings& Waterproofing Div.; CCW 525.
b. Karnak Corporation; One-Kote System.
Project No. 00058 07141 COLD FLUID-APPLIED WATERPROOFING-2
4"
Renovations to Parsons Annex
Smith College
Northampton, Massachusetts
SECTION 07141-COLD FLUID APPLIED WATERPROOFING
PART 1 -GENERAL
a
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the following:
1. Single-component, modified polyurethane waterproofing.
so
B. Related Sections include the following:
1. Division 4 Section "Unit Masonry Assemblies" for parging masonry walls to receive
waterproofing.
2. Division 7 Section"Joint Sealants' for joint-sealant materials and installation.
1.3 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. Provide waterproofing membrane that prevents the passage of water.
an
1.4 SUBMITTALS
OR
A. Product Data: Include manufacturer's written instructions for evaluating, preparing, and treating
substrate, technical data, and tested physical and performance properties of waterproofing.
B. Installer Certificates: Signed by manufacturers certifying that installers comply with
requirements.
C. Sample Warranty: Copy of special waterproofing manufacturer's warranty stating obligations,
remedies, limitations, and exclusions before starting waterproofing.
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Installer Qualifications: A qualified installer who is acceptable to waterproofing manufacturer to
install manufacturer's products.
+ B. Source Limitations: Obtain waterproofing materials through one source from a single
manufacturer.
Project No. 00058 07141 COLD FLUID-APPLIED WATERPROOFING-1
am
Renovations to Parsons Annex
Smith College
Northampton, Massachusetts
G. Countertops: Anchor securely by screwing through corner blocks of base cabinets or other
supports into underside of countertop.
1. Align adjacent solid-surfacing-material countertops and form seams to comply with
manufacturer's written recommendations using adhesive in color to match countertop.
Carefully dress joints smooth, remove surface scratches, and clean entire surface.
2. Install countertops with no more than 1/8 inch in 96-inch (3 mm in 2400-mm) sag, bow,
or other variation from a straight line.
3. Secure backsplashes to tops and to walls with adhesive. *■
4. Calk space between backsplash and wall with sealant specified in Division 7 Section "Joint
Sealants."
H. Paneling: Anchor paneling to supporting substrate with adhesive. Do not use face fastening,
unless covered by trim.
1. Install flush paneling with no more than 1/16 inch in 96-inch (1.5 mm in 2400-mm)
vertical cup or bow and 1/8 inch in 96-inch (3 mm in 2400-mm)horizontal variation from
a true plane.
I. Stairwork and Rails: Support wall railings on indicated metal brackets securely fastened to wall
framing.
1. Install stairwork with treads and risers no more than 1/8 inch (3 mm) from indicated
position and no more than 1/16 inch (1.5 mm) out of position for adjacent treads and
risers. Install rails with no more than 1/8 inch in 96-inch (3 mm in 2400-mm) variation
from a straight line.
J. Complete the finishing work specified in this Section to extent not completed at shop or before
installation of woodwork. Fill nail holes with matching filler where exposed. Apply specified
finish coats, including stains and paste fillers if any, to exposed surfaces where only sealer/prime
coats were applied in shop. +�
K. Refer to Division 9 Sections for final finishing of installed architectural woodwork.
3.3 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING
A. Repair damaged and defective woodwork, where possible, to eliminate functional and visual
defects;where not possible to repair, replace woodwork. Adjust joinery for uniform appearance.
B. Clean, lubricate, and adjust hardware.
C. Clean woodwork on exposed and semiexposed surfaces. Touch up shop-applied finishes to
restore damaged or soiled areas.
END OF SECTION 06402
Project No. 00058 06402 INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK-12
Renovations to Parsons Annex
Smith College
Northampton, Massachusetts
PART 3 -EXECUTION
no
3.1 PREPARATION
in A. Condition woodwork to average prevailing humidity conditions in installation areas before
installation.
„® B. Before installing architectural woodwork, examine shop-fabricated work for completion and
complete work as required, including removal of packing and backpriming.
�OF 3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Quality Standard: Install woodwork to comply with AWI Section 1700 for the same grade
specified in Part 2 of this Section for
p type of woodwork involved.
B. Install woodwork level, plumb,true, and straight. Shim as required with concealed shims. Install
level and plumb (including tops)to a tolerance of 1/8 inch in 96 inches (3 mm in 2400 mm).
C. Scribe and cut woodwork to fit adjoining work, and refinish cut surfaces and repair damaged
finish at cuts.
D. Anchor woodwork to anchors or blocking built in or directly attached to substrates. Secure with
W countersunk, concealed fasteners and blind nailing as required for complete installation. Use
fine finishing nails or finishing screws for exposed fastening, countersunk and filled flush with
woodwork and matching final finish if transparent finish is indicated.
E. Standing and Running Trim: Install with minimum number of joints possible, using full-length
pieces (from maximum length of lumber available) to greatest extent possible. Do not use pieces
less than 96 inches (2400 mm)long, except where shorter single-length pieces are necessary. Scarf
running joints and stagger in adjacent and related members.
1. Fill gaps, if any, between top of base and wall with plastic wood filler, sand smooth, and
finish same as wood base, if finished.
2. Install wall railings on indicated metal brackets securely fastened to wall framing.
3. Install standing and running trim with no more variation from a straight line than 1/8
inch in 96 inches (3 mm in 2400 mm).
F. Cabinets: Install without distortion so doors and drawers fit openings properly and are accurately
aligned. Adjust hardware to center doors and drawers in openings and to provide unencumbered
operation. Complete installation of hardware and accessory items as indicated.
aw 1. Install cabinets with no more than 1/8 inch in 96-inch (3 mm in 2400-mm) sag, bow, or
other variation from a straight line.
2. Maintain veneer sequence matching of cabinets with transparent finish.
no 3. Fasten wall cabinets through back, near top and bottom, at ends and not more than 16
inches (400 mm) o.c. with No. 10 wafer-head screws sized for l-inch (25-mm) penetration
into wood framing, blocking, or hanging strips.
.w
Project No. 00058 06402 INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK-11
Renovations to Parsons Annex
Smith College
Northampton, Massachusetts
D. Receive doors from door manufacturer and hardware from hardware supplier. Pre-hang door on
hinges and attach saddle. Deliver to job-site ready for installation as a unit. Mark each door with
designations indicated on drawings. "
2.14 EXISTING CASEWORK
A. General: Receive salvaged casework in shop for reconditioning and modification. Catalogue
profiles, species and finishes for matching new work. Note damaged components and
recommend remedial measures.
B. Prepare new carcass for cabinet faces as indicated.
C. Modify, reinforce and recondition existing carcasses to be relocated with face frames.
D. Adjust hardware, add drawer glides to existing drawers, add new hardware for glass shelves and
make modifications necessary to recondition existing casework indicated.
2.14 SHOP FINISHING
E. Quality Standard: Comply with AWI Section 1500,unless otherwise indicated.
1. Grade: Provide finishes of same grades as items to be finished.
F. General: Shop finish transparent finished interior architectural woodwork at fabrication shop as
specified in this Section. Refer to Division 9 Section 'Painting" for finishing opaque finished
architectural woodwork.
G. Preparations for Finishing: Comply with referenced quality standard for sanding, filling
countersunk fasteners, sealing concealed surfaces, and similar preparations for finishing
architectural woodwork, as applicable to each unit of work.
1. Backpriming: Apply one coat of sealer or primer, compatible with finish coats, to
concealed surfaces of woodwork. Apply two coats to back of paneling and to end-grain
surfaces. Concealed surfaces of plastic-laminate-clad woodwork do not require '
backpriming when surfaced with plastic laminate, backing paper, or thermoset decorative
overlay.
H. Transparent Finish: Comply with requirements indicated below for grade, finish system, staining,
and sheen,with sheen measured on 60-degree gloss meter per ASTM D 523:
1. Grade: Premium.
2. AWI Finish System TR-4: Conversion varnish.
3. Staining: Match approved sample for color.
4. Wash Coat for Stained Finish: Apply a vinyl wash coat to woodwork made from closed-
grain wood before staining and finishing.
5. Sheen: Satin, 30-50 gloss units.
Project No. 00058 06402 INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK-10
Renovations to Parsons Annex
Smith College
Northampton, Massachusetts
E. Fabricate tops in one piece with shop-applied backsplashes and edges, unless otherwise indicated.
Comply with solid-surfacing-material manufacturer's written recommendations for adhesives,
sealers, fabrication, and finishing.
F. Install integral sink bowls in countertops in shop.
2.11 FLUSH WOOD PANELING AND WAINSCOTS
A. Quality Standard: Comply with AWI Section 500 requirements for flush wood paneling.
B. Grade: Premium.
C. Wood Species and Cut: Any closed grain hardwood.
2.12 STAIRWORK AND RAILS
A. Quality Standard: Comply with AWI Section 800.
B. Grade: Premium.
40
C. Wood Species for Opaque Finish: Any closed-grain hardwood
D. Finishes for Stair Parts: As follows:
1. Treads: Unfinished.
2. Risers: Unfinished
on 3. Stringers: Opaque.
4. Handrails: Transparent.
5. Scotia, Cove, and Other Moldings: Opaque.
on
E. Fabricate stair stringers with let-in treads and risers in continuous straight runs for field
installation from landing platform to landing platform. Coordinate clearances with
"" miscellaneous steel supports where indicated. Provide intermediate stringers and blocking to
allow for applied finish to underside of each run. ,
F. Glue treads to risers, and glue and nail treads and risers to carriages. Glue and wedge treads and
risers to housed stringers.
on
2.13 INTERIOR FRAMES AND JAMBS FOR OPAQUE FINISH
A. Quality Standard: Comply with AWI Section 900.
B. Grade: Premium.
C. Wood Species: Any closed-grain hardwood.
Project No. 00058 06402 INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK-9
Renovations to Parsons Annex
Smith College
Northampton, Massachusetts
4. Veneer Matching within Room: Provide cabinet veneers in each room or other space from
a single flitch with doors, drawer fronts, and other surfaces matched in a sequenced set
with continuous match where veneers are interrupted perpendicular to the grain.
E. Semiexposed Surfaces: Provide surface materials indicated below:
1. Surfaces Other Than Drawer Bodies: Thermoset decorative overlay.
2. Drawer Sides and Backs: Thermoset decorative overlay.
3. Drawer Bottoms: Thermoset decorative overlay. �.
4. Painted Interiors: Where glass doors or open cabinets are shown with painted backs
and/or sides, provide board paneling or MDO plywood as indicated.
.w
F. Provide dust panels of 1/4-inch (6.4-mm) plywood or tempered hardboard above compartments
and drawers, unless located directly under tops.
2.9 PLASTIC-LAMINATE COUNTERTOPS ""
A. Quality Standard: Comply with AWI Section 400 requirements for high-pressure decorative
laminate countertops.
B. Grade: Premium.
C. High-Pressure Decorative Laminate Grade: HGS.
D. Colors, Patterns, and Finishes: Provide materials and products that result in colors and textures
of exposed laminate surfaces complying with the following requirements:
1. Match Architect's sample.
E. Edge Treatment: As indicated.
F. Core Material: Medium-density fiberboard made with exterior glue.
2.10 SOLID-SURFACING-MATERIAL COUNTERTOPS
A. Quality Standard: Comply with AWI Section 400 requirements for countertops.
B. Grade: Premium.
C. Solid-Surfacing-Material Thickness: 1/2 inch(13 mm).
D. Colors, Patterns, and Finishes: Provide materials and products that result in colors of solid-
surfacing material complying with the following requirements:
1. Match Architect's sample.
Project No. 00058 06402 INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK-8
Renovations to Parsons Annex
Smith College
Northampton, Massachusetts
F. Install glass to comply with applicable requirements in Division 8 Section "Glazing" and in
GANA's "Glazing Manual." For glass in wood frames, secure glass with removable stops.
2.6 INTERIOR STANDING AND RUNNING TRIM FOR TRANSPARENT FINISH
A. Quality Standard: Comply with AWI Section 300.
B. Grade: Premium.
C. For trim items wider than available lumber, use veneered construction. Do not glue for width.
D. For rails wider or thicker than available lumber, use veneered construction. Do not glue for
width or thickness.
am E. Backout or groove backs of flat trim members and kerf backs of other wide, flat members, except
for members with ends exposed in finished work.
+o F. Wood Species and Cut: Match existing species and cut.
„ 2.7 INTERIOR STANDING AND RUNNING TRIM FOR OPAQUE FINISH
A. Quality Standard: Comply with AWI Section 300.
B. Grade: Premium.
C. Backout or groove backs of flat trim members and kerf backs of other wide, flat members, except
for members with ends exposed in finished work.
D. Wood Species: Any closed-grain hardwood.
2.8 WOOD CABINETS FOR TRANSPARENT FINISH
so A. Quality Standard: Comply with AWI Section 400 requirements for wood cabinets.
B. Grade: Premium.
C. AWI Type of Cabinet Construction: Flush inset without face frame.
D. Wood Species and Cut for Exposed Surfaces: Match existing species and cut.
1. Grain Matching: Run and match grain horizontally for drawer fronts, and vertically for
doors, and fixed panels.
2. Vertical Matching of Veneer Leaves: End match.
3. Veneer Matching within Panel Face: Balance match.
Project No. 00058 06402 INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK-7
Im
Renovations to Parsons Annex
Smith College
Northampton, Massachusetts
2.4 INSTALLATION MATERIALS
A. Furring, Blocking, Shims, and Hanging Strips: Softwood or hardwood lumber, kiln-dried to less
than 15 percent moisture content.
B. Furring, Blocking, Shims, and Hanging Strips: Fire-retardant-treated softwood lumber, kiln-dried
to less than 15 percent moisture content.
C. Anchors: Select material, type, size, and finish required for each substrate for secure anchorage.
Provide nonferrous-metal or hot-dip galvanized anchors and inserts on inside face of exterior walls
and elsewhere as required for corrosion resistance. Provide toothed-steel or lead expansion
sleeves for drilled-in-place anchors.
2.5 FABRICATION, GENERAL
A. Interior Woodwork Grade: Provide Premium grade interior woodwork complying with the
referenced quality standard.
B. Wood Moisture Content: Comply with requirements of referenced quality standard for wood
moisture content in relation to ambient relative humidity during fabrication and in installation
areas.
C. Fabricate woodwork to dimensions,profiles, and details indicated. Ease edges to radius indicated
for the following:
1. Corners of Cabinets and Edges of Solid-Wood (Lumber) Members 3/4 Inch (19 mm)
Thick or Less: 1/16 inch (1.5 mm).
2. Edges of Rails and Similar Members More Than 3/4 Inch (19 mm) Thick: 1/8 inch (3
mm).
3. Corners of Cabinets and Edges of Solid-Wood (Lumber) Members and Rails: 1/16 inch
(1.5 mm).
D. Complete fabrication, including assembly, priming and finishing, and hardware application, to
maximum extent possible, before shipment to Project site. Disassemble components only as
necessary for shipment and installation. Where necessary for fitting at site, provide ample
allowance for scribing, trimming, and fitting.
1. Trial fit assemblies at fabrication shop that cannot be shipped completely assembled.
Install dowels, screws, bolted connectors, and other fastening devices that can be removed
after trial fitting. Verify that various parts fit as intended and check measurements of
assemblies against field measurements indicated on Shop Drawings before disassembling
for shipment.
E. Shop cut openings, to maximum extent possible, to receive hardware, appliances, plumbing
fixtures, electrical work, and similar items. Locate openings accurately and use templates or
roughing-in diagrams to produce accurately sized and shaped openings. Sand edges of cutouts to
remove splinters and burrs.
1. Seal edges of openings in countertops with a coat of varnish.
Project No. 00058 06402 INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK-6
Renovations to Parsons Annex
Smith College
no Northampton, Massachusetts
J. Adhesive for Bonding Plastic Laminate: Low VOC contact cement.
1. Adhesive for Bonding Edges: Same adhesive specified above for faces.
K. Solid-Surfacing Material: Homogeneous solid sheets of filled plastic resin complying with
aw material and performance requirements in ANSI Z124.3, for Type 5 or Type 6, without a
precoated finish.
1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:
a. Corian; DuPont Polymers.
2.2 TACK SURFACES
A. General: Provide wood framed tack-surfaces in locations indicated.
B. Product: Forbo Bulletin Board
1. Gauge: 1/4 inch.
2.3 CABINET HARDWARE AND ACCESSORIES
A. General: Provide cabinet hardware and accessory materials associated with architectural cabinets.
B. Hardware Standard: Comply with BHMA A156.9 for items indicated by referencing BHMA
numbers or items referenced to this standard.
C. Butt Hinges: 2-3/4-inch (70-mm), 5-knuckle steel hinges made from 0.095-inch- (2.4-mm-) thick
metal, and as follows:
1. Semiconcealed Hinges for Flush Doors: BHMA A156.9, B01361.
2. Semiconcealed Hinges for Overlay Doors: BHMA A156.9, 1301521.
D. Back-Mounted Pulls: BHMA A156.9, B02011.
E. Catches: Ball friction catches, BHMA A156.9, B03013.
F. Shelf Rests: BHMA A156.9, B04013.
on
G. Drawer Slides: Bottom-mounted, full-extension, zinc-plated steel drawer slides with steel ball
bearings, BHMA A156.9, B05091, and rated for the following loads:
on
1. Box Drawer Slides: 100 lbf(440 N).
H. Exposed Hardware Finishes: For exposed hardware, provide finish that complies with
BHMA A156.18 for BHMA finish number indicated.
1. Satin Brass, Blackened, Bright Relieved, Clear Coated: BHMA 610 for brass base;
BHMA 636 for steel base.
1. For concealed hardware, provide manufacturer's standard finish that complies with product class
requirements in BHMA A156.9.
Project No. 00058 06402 INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK-5
Renovations to Parsons Annex
Smith College
Northampton, Massachusetts
3. Existing profiles: Take samples of profiles to be matched for duplication and cutting of
knives for profiled trim.
1.8 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate sizes and locations of framing, blocking, furring, reinforcements, and other related
units of Work specified in other Sections to ensure that interior architectural woodwork can be
supported and installed as indicated.
PART 2-PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS
A. General: Provide materials that comply with requirements of the AWI quality standard for each
type of woodwork and quality grade specified, unless otherwise indicated.
B. General: Provide materials that comply with requirements of the WIC quality standard for each
type of woodwork and quality grade specified, unless otherwise indicated.
C. Wood Species and Cut for Transparent Finish: Confirm existing species and match.
D. Wood Species for Opaque Finish: Any closed-grain hardwood. s
E. Wood Products: Comply with the following:
1. Hardboard: AHA A135.4.
2. Medium-Density Fiberboard: ANSI A208.2, Grade MD-Exterior Glue.
3. Particleboard: ANSI A208.1, Grade M-2-Exterior Glue.
4. Softwood Plywood: DOC PS 1, Medium Density Overlay.
5. Hardwood Plywood and Face Veneers: HPVA HP-1.
F. Thermoset Decorative Overlay: Particleboard complying with ANSI A208.1, Grade M-2, or
medium-density fiberboard complying with ANSI A208.2, Grade MD, with surface of thermally
fused, melamine-impregnated decorative paper complying with LMA SAT-1.
G. Clear Tempered Float Glass for Doors: ASTM C 1048, Kind FT, Condition A, Type I, Class 1,
Quality q3; manufactured by horizontal(roller hearth)process,with exposed edges seamed before
tempering, 6 mm thick, unless otherwise indicated. „
H. Clear Tempered Float Glass for Shelves: ASTM C 1048, Kind FT, Condition A, Type I, Class 1,
Quality q3;with exposed edges seamed before tempering, 6 mm thick, unless otherwise indicated. .e
I. High-Pressure Decorative Laminate: NEMA LD 3, grades as indicated, or if not indicated, as
required by woodwork quality standard.
1. Manufacturer: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide high-pressure decorative
laminates to match architect's selections from any of the following:
a. International Paper; Decorative Products Div.
Project No. 00058 06402 INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK-4
on
Renovations to Parsons Annex
Smith College
"N Northampton, Massachusetts
C. Quality Standard: Unless otherwise indicated, comply with AWI's "Architectural Woodwork
Quality Standards" for grades of interior architectural woodwork, construction, finishes, and
other requirements.
1. Provide AWI Quality Certification Program certificate indicating that woodwork complies
with requirements of grades specified.
D. Mockups: Before fabricating and installing interior architectural woodwork, build mockups of
casework doors and finish required to verify selections made and to demonstrate aesthetic effects
and qualities of materials and execution. Build mockups to comply with the following
requirements, using materials indicated for the completed Work:
1. Build mockups of full size door face for stile and rail cabinet doors.
2. Demonstrate the proposed range of aesthetic effects and workmanship.
3. Obtain Architects approval of mockups before starting interior architectural woodwork
fabrication.
4. Maintain mockups during construction in an undisturbed condition as a standard for
judging the completed Work.
5. Approved mock-up may be incorporated into the work.
E. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site to comply with requirements in
Division 1 Section"Project Meetings."
+w 1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE,AND HANDLING
A. Do not deliver woodwork until painting and similar operations that could damage woodwork
have been completed in installation areas. If woodwork must be stored in other than installation
areas, store only in areas where environmental conditions comply with requirements specified in
"Project Conditions"Article.
1.7 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Environmental Limitations: Do not deliver or install woodwork until building is enclosed, wet
work is complete, and HVAC system is operating and maintaining temperature and relative
humidity at occupancy levels during the remainder of the construction period.
B. Field Measurements: Where woodwork is indicated to fit to other construction, verify
dimensions of other construction by field measurements before fabrication and indicate
measurements on Shop Drawings. Coordinate fabrication schedule with construction progress to
avoid delaying the Work.
a� 1. Locate concealed framing, blocking, and reinforcements that support woodwork by field
measurements before being enclosed and indicate measurements on Shop Drawings.
2. Established Dimensions: Where field measurements cannot be made without delaying the
Work, establish dimensions and proceed with fabricating woodwork without field
measurements. Provide allowance for trimming at site, and coordinate construction to
ensure that actual dimensions correspond to established dimensions.
Project No. 00058 06402 INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK-3
Renovations to Parsons Annex
Smith College
Northampton, Massachusetts
A. Interior architectural woodwork includes wood furring, blocking, shims, and hanging strips for
installing woodwork items, unless concealed within other construction before woodwork
installation.
..�
B. Rough carriages for stairs are a part of interior architectural woodwork. Platform framing,
headers, partition framing, and other rough framing associated with stairwork are specified in
Division 6 Section"Rough Carpentry."
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For medium-density fiberboard, high-pressure decorative laminate, adhesive for
bonding plastic laminate, thermoset decorative overlay, solid-surfacing material, cabinet hardware
and accessories, and finishing materials and processes.
B. Shop Drawings: Show location of each item, dimensioned plans and elevations, large-scale �.
details, attachment devices, and other components.
1. Show details half size.
2. Show locations and sizes of furring, blocking, and hanging strips, including concealed
blocking and reinforcement specified in other Sections.
3. Show locations and sizes of cutouts and holes for plumbing fixtures, faucets, and other
items installed in architectural woodwork.
C. Samples for Initial Selection: Manufacturer's color charts consisting of units or sections of units
showing the full range of colors, textures, and patterns available for each type of material
indicated.
1. Plastic laminates. OF
2. Thermoset decorative overlays.
3. Solid-surfacing materials.
no
D. Product Certificates: Signed by manufacturers of woodwork certifying that products furnished
comply with requirements.
go
E. Qualification Data: For firms and persons specified in "Quality Assurance" Article to
demonstrate their capabilities and experience. Include lists of completed projects with project
names and addresses, names and addresses of architects and owners, and other information
specified.
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Installer Qualifications: An experienced installer who has completed architectural woodwork
similar in material, design, and extent to that indicated for this Project and whose work has
resulted in construction with a record of successful in-service performance.
B. Fabricator Qualifications: A firm experienced in producing architectural woodwork similar to
that indicated for this Project and with a record of successful in-service performance, as well as
sufficient production capacity to produce required units.
Project No. 00058 06402 INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK 2
Renovations to Parsons Annex
Smith College
Northampton, Massachusetts
SECTION 06402-INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK
PART 1 -GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the following:
1. Interior standing and running trim.
2. Wood cabinets.
3. Plastic-laminate countertops.
4. Solid-surfacing-material countertops.
5. Flush wood paneling and wainscots.
,w 6. Interior ornamental work.
7. Tack surfaces.
8. Stairwork and rails.
9. Interior frames and jambs, including pre-hanging doors in shop for field delivery as a unit.
10. Shop finishing interior woodwork.
11. Modifying and reconditioning existing casework.
B. Related Sections include the following:
1. Division 5 Section "Ornamental Metal" for handrail brackets and metal work supporting
wood railings.
2. Division 6 Section "Rough Carpentry" for wood furring, blocking, shims, and hanging
on strips required for installing woodwork and concealed within other construction before
woodwork installation.
3. Division 6 Section "Finish Carpentry" for interior carpentry exposed to view that is not
specified in this Section.
4. Division 8 Section"Flush Wood Doors."
5. Division 8 Section"Stile and Rail Wood Doors."
6. Division 8 Section"Wood Windows" for stock wood windows.
7. Division 9 Section"Wood Flooring."
8. Division 9 Section"Painting" for field finishing of interior architectural woodwork.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
Project No. 00058 06402 INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK-1
Renovations to Parsons Annex
Smith College
Northampton, Massachusetts
B. Deliver concrete inserts and similar anchoring devices to be built into substrates well in advance
of time substrates are to be built.
C. Before installing architectural woodwork, examine shop-fabricated work for completion and
complete work as required, including removal of packing and backpriming.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Quality Standard: Install woodwork to comply with AW1 Section 1700 for the same grade
specified in Part 2 of this Section for type of woodwork involved.
B. Install woodwork true and straight with no distortions. Shim as required with concealed shims.
Install level and plumb to a tolerance of 1/8 inch in 96 inches (3 mm in 2400 mm).
an C. Scribe and cut woodwork to fit adjoining work, and refinish cut surfaces or repair damaged finish
at cuts.
an D. Preservative-Treated Wood: Where cut or drilled in field, treat cut ends and drilled holes
according to AWPA M4.
ON E. Anchor woodwork to anchors or blocking built in or directly attached to substrates. Secure to
grounds, stripping and blocking with countersunk, concealed fasteners and blind nailing. Use
fine finishing nails for exposed nailing, countersunk and filled flush with woodwork.
No
F. Standing and Running Trim: Install with minimum number of joints possible, using full-length
pieces (from maximum length of lumber available) to greatest extent possible. Do not use pieces
MR less than 36 inches (900 mm) long, except where shorter single-length pieces are necessary. Scarf
running joints and stagger in adjacent and related members.
MR 1. Install standing and running trim with no more variation from a straight line than 1/8
inch in 96 inches (3 mm in 2400 mm).
G. Complete the finishing work specified in this Section to extent not completed at shop or before
40 installation of woodwork. Fill nail and screw holes with matching filler where exposed.
H. Refer to Division 9 Sections for final finishing of installed architectural woodwork.
3.3 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING
A. Repair damaged and defective woodwork, where possible, to eliminate functional and visual
defects;where not possible to repair, replace woodwork. Adjust joinery for uniform appearance.
B. Clean woodwork on exposed and semiexposed surfaces. Touch up shop-applied finishes to
restore damaged or soiled areas.
END OF SECTION 06401
Project No. 00058 06401 EXTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK-5
Renovations to Parsons Annex
Smith College
Northampton, Massachusetts
B. Grade: Premium.
C. Backout or groove backs of flat trim members and kerf backs of other wide, flat members, except
for members with ends exposed in finished work.
D. Assemble casings in plant except where shipping limitations require field assembly.
E. Wood Species: Western Red Cedar.
1. Match existing profiles of trim, fascia, cornices and corner boards for new work.
2.5 EXTERIOR ORNAMENTAL WORK FOR OPAQUE FINISH
A. Quality Standard: Comply with AWI Section 700.
B. Grade: Premium.
C. Wood Species:Any closed-grain hardwood.
1. Match existing profiles and details of column pedestals, railings and balusters.
2.6 EXTERIOR FRAMES AND JAMBS FOR OPAQUE FINISH
A. Quality Standard: Comply with AWI Section 900.
B. Grade: Premium.
C. Wood Species: Any closed-grain hardwood. "
2.7 EXTERIOR SHUTTERS FOR OPAQUE FINISH M°
A. Quality Standard: Comply with AWI Section 1200.
B. Grade: Premium.
C. Wood Species: Eastern white pine, sugar pine, or western white pine.
1. Do not use plain-sawn lumber with exposed, flat surfaces more than 3 inches (75 mm)
wide.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 PREPARATION
A. Condition woodwork to average prevailing humidity conditions in installation areas before
installation.
Project No. 00058 06401 EXTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK-4
Renovations to Parsons Annex
Smith College
Northampton, Massachusetts
2.1 MATERIALS
A. General: Provide materials that comply with requirements of the AWI quality standard for each
type of woodwork and quality grade indicated and, where the following products are part of
exterior woodwork, with requirements of the referenced product standards that apply to product
W characteristics indicated:
1. Softwood Plywood: DOC PS 1, Exterior Medium Density Overlay.
2.2 INSTALLATION MATERIALS
W A. Blocking, Shims, and Nailers: Softwood or hardwood lumber, pressure-preservative treated, kiln-
dried to less than 15 percent moisture content.
�w
B. Nails: Aluminum, hot-dip galvanized, or stainless steel.
C. Screws: Aluminum, bronze, hot-dip galvanized, or stainless steel.
D. Anchors: Select material, type, size, and finish required for each substrate for secure anchorage.
Provide nonferrous-metal or hot-dip galvanized anchors and inserts, unless otherwise indicated.
Provide toothed-steel or lead expansion sleeves for drilled-in-place anchors.
2.3 FABRICATION, GENERAL
40
A. Wood Moisture Content: 10 to 15 percent.
B. Fabricate woodwork to dimensions, profiles, and details indicated. Ease edges to radius indicated
for the following:
1. Edges of Solid-Wood (Lumber)Members 3/4 Inch(19 mm)Thick or Less: 1/16 inch (1.5
mm).
2. Edges of Rails and Similar Members More Than 3/4 Inch (19 mm) Thick: 1/8 inch (3
mm).
C. Complete fabrication, including assembly, finishing, and hardware application, to maximum
extent possible, before shipment to Project site. Disassemble components only as necessary for
shipment and installation. Where necessary for fitting at site, provide ample allowance for
scribing, trimming, and fitting.
D. Shop-cut openings, to maximum extent possible, to receive hardware, electrical work, and similar
items. Locate openings accurately and use templates or roughing-in diagrams to produce
accurately sized and shaped openings. Smooth edges of cutouts and seal with a water-resistant
coating suitable for exterior applications.
2.4 EXTERIOR STANDING AND RUNNING TRIM FOR OPAQUE FINISH
A. Quality Standard: Comply with AWI Section 300.
Project No. 00058 06401 EXTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK-3
go
Renovations to Parsons Annex
Smith College
Northampton, Massachusetts
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Installer Qualifications: An experienced installer who has completed architectural woodwork No
similar in material, design, and extent to that indicated for this Project and whose work has
resulted in construction with a record of successful in-service performance.
B. Fabricator Qualifications: A firm experienced in producing architectural woodwork similar to
that indicated for this Project and with a record of successful in-service performance, as well as
sufficient production capacity to produce required units.
C. Source Limitations for Fabrication and Installation: Engage a qualified woodworking firm to
assume undivided responsibility for fabricating and installing woodwork specified in this Section. ,
D. Quality Standard: Unless otherwise indicated, comply with AWI's "Architectural Woodwork
Quality Standards" for grades of exterior architectural woodwork, construction, finishes, and .�
other requirements.
1. Provide AWI Quality Certification Program certificate indicating that woodwork complies
with requirements of grades specified.
1.5 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Weather Limitations: Proceed with installation of exterior woodwork only when existing and
forecasted weather conditions permit work to be performed and at least one coat of specified
finish to be applied without exposure to rain, snow, or dampness.
B. Field Measurements: Where woodwork is indicated to fit to other construction, verify
dimensions of other construction by field measurements before fabrication and indicate
measurements on Shop Drawings. Coordinate fabrication schedule with construction progress to
avoid delaying the Work.
1. Locate concealed framing, blocking, and reinforcements that support woodwork by field
measurements before being enclosed and indicate measurements on Shop Drawings.
2. Established Dimensions: Where field measurements cannot be made without delaying the
Work, establish dimensions and proceed with fabricating woodwork without field
measurements. Provide allowance for trimming at site, and coordinate construction to
ensure that actual dimensions correspond to established dimensions.
1.6 COORDINATION w`
A. Coordinate sizes and locations of framing, blocking, reinforcements, and other related units of
Work specified in other Sections to ensure that exterior architectural woodwork can be supported
and installed as indicated.
PART 2-PRODUCTS
Project No. 00058 06401 EXTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK-2
Renovations to Parsons Annex
Smith College
Northampton, Massachusetts
SECTION 06401 -EXTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK
PART 1 -GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
in A. This Section includes the following:
1. Exterior standing and running trim milled to match existing profiles.
2. Exterior ornamental work including the following:
a. Pilasters.
b. Balusters.
C. Railings.
3. Exterior frames and jambs and pre-hanging doors in shop ready for field installation as a
unit.
B. Related Sections include the following:
1. Division 6 Section"Rough Carpentry" for exposed framing.
2. Division 6 Section "Finish Carpentry" for exterior carpentry exposed to view that is not
specified in this Section.
3. Division 8 Section"Stile and Rail Wood Doors."
4. Division 8 Section"Wood Windows" for stock wood windows.
5. Division 9 Section"Painting" for field finishing of exterior architectural woodwork.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
on
A. Product Data: For each type of product and process specified and incorporated into items of
exterior architectural woodwork during fabrication, finishing, and installation.
1. Include data for wood-preservative treatment from chemical treatment manufacturer and
certification by treating plant that treated materials comply with requirements.
on
B. Shop Drawings: Show location of each item, dimensioned plans and elevations, large-scale
details, attachment devices, and other components.
1. Show details full size.
2. Show locations and sizes of blocking and nailers, including concealed blocking and
reinforcement specified in other Sections.
eA.
Project No. 00058 06401 EXTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK-1
Renovations to Parsons Annex
Smith College
Northampton, Massachusetts
1. Install in full lengths without end joints.
2. Stagger end joints in random pattern to uniformly distribute joints on each wall when runs
exceed 6 feet.
3. Select and arrange boards on each wall to minimize noticeable variations in grain character
and color between adjacent boards. Install with uniform tight joints between boards.
4. Fasten paneling by blind nailing through tongues.
5. Fasten paneling to gypsum wallboard with panel adhesive.
3.7 WIRE SHELVING INSTALLATION
A. Inspect wall construction to determine appropriate fastening hardware.
B. Cut shelves 3/4 to 1 inch shorter than actual dimensions of space and cap exposed ends.
C. Install units plumb and level in full compliance with manufacturers printed instructions and as
follows:
1. Place back clips at a maximum of 12" o.c.
2. Install end clips at side walls and support braces at open ends.
3. Install hang rods at 68" above finish floor.
■
3.8 ADJUSTING
A. Replace finish carpentry that is damaged or does not comply with requirements. Finish carpentry '
may be repaired or refinished if work complies with requirements and shows no evidence of
repair or refinishing. Adjust joinery for uniform appearance.
3.9 CLEANING
A. Clean finish carpentry on exposed and semi-exposed surfaces. Touch up factory-applied finishes
to restore damaged or soiled areas.
END OF SECTION 06200
Project No. 00058 06200 FINISH CARPENTRY-8
40
Renovations to Parsons Annex
Smith College
Northampton, Massachusetts
B. Install finish carpentry level, plumb, true, and aligned with adjacent materials. Use concealed
shims where necessary for alignment.
1. Scribe and cut finish carpentry to fit adjoining work. Refinish and seal cuts as
recommended by manufacturer.
W 2. Countersink fasteners, fill surface flush, and sand where face fastening is unavoidable.
3. Install to tolerance of 1/8 inch in 96 inches (3 mm in 2438 mm) for level and plumb.
Install adjoining finish carpentry with 1/32-inch (0.8-mm) maximum offset for flush
installation and 1/16-inch(1.5-mm) maximum offset for reveal installation.
4. Coordinate finish carpentry with materials and systems in or adjacent to it. Provide
cutouts for mechanical and electrical items that penetrate finish carpentry.
3.4 STANDING AND RUNNING TRIM INSTALLATION
A. Install with minimum number of joints practical, using full-length pieces from maximum lengths
of lumber available. Do not use pieces less than 24 inches (610 mm) long, except where
necessary. Stagger joints in adjacent and related standing and running trim. Cope at returns and
miter at corners to produce tight-fitting joints with full-surface contact throughout length of joint.
Use scarf joints for end-to-end joints. Plane backs of casings to provide uniform thickness across
joints,where necessary for alignment.
1. Match color and grain pattern across joints.
2. Install trim after gypsum board joint finishing operations are completed.
3. Drill pilot holes in hardwood before fastening to prevent splitting. Fasten to prevent
movement or warping. Countersink fastener heads on exposed carpentry work and fill
holes.
4. Fit exterior joints to exclude water. Apply flat grain lumber with bark side exposed to
weather.
3.5 SIDING INSTALIATION
w. A. Horizontal Lumber Siding: Apply starter strip along bottom edge of sheathing or sill. Install first
course of siding with lower edge at least 1/8 inch (3 mm) below starter strip and subsequent
courses lapped 1 inch (25 mm) over course below. Nail at each stud. Do not allow nails to
penetrate more than one thickness of siding.
B. Flashing: Install metal flashing as indicated on Drawings and as recommended by siding
manufacturer.
C. Finish: Apply finish within two weeks of installation.
D. Install siding to comply with manufacturer's warranty requirements.
W 3.6 PANELING INSTALLATION
A. Board Paneling: Install according to manufacturer's written instructions. Arrange in random-
,, width pattern suggested by manufacturer, unless boards or planks are of uniform width.
Project No. 00058 06200 FINISH CARPENTRY-7
am
Renovations to Parsons Annex
Smith College ow
Northampton, Massachusetts
C. Sealants: Comply with requirements in Division 7 Section "Joint Sealants" for materials required
for sealing siding work. No
2.10 FABRICATION
A. Wood Moisture Content: Comply with requirements of specified inspection agencies and with
manufacturer's written recommendations for moisture content of finish carpentry at relative
humidity conditions existing during time of fabrication and in installation areas.
B. Back out or kerf backs of the following members, except members with ends exposed in finished
work:
1. Exterior standing and running trim wider than 5 inches (125 mm).
2. Interior standing and running trim, except shoe and crown molds.
3. Wood board paneling.
C. Ease edges of lumber less than 1 inch(25 mm) in nominal thickness to 1/16-inch(1.5-mm)radius
and edges of lumber 1 inch (25 mm)or more in nominal thickness to 1/8-inch (3-mm) radius. °
PART 3 -EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine substrates, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation
tolerances and other conditions affecting performance. Proceed with installation only after .�
unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Clean substrates of projections and substances detrimental to application.
B. Before installing finish carpentry, condition materials to average prevailing humidity in
installation areas for a minimum of 24 hours.
C. Prime lumber for exterior applications to be painted, including both faces and edges. Cut to
required lengths and prime ends. Comply with requirements in Division 9 Section"Painting."
3.3 INSTALLATION, GENERAL
A. Do not use materials that are unsound, warped, improperly treated or finished, inadequately .�
seasoned, or too small to fabricate with proper jointing arrangements.
1. Do not use manufactured units with defective surfaces, sizes, or patterns.
Project No. 00058 06200 FINISH CARPENTRY-6
Renovations to Parsons Annex
Smith College
' ' Northampton, Massachusetts
3. Housekeeping closets: Shelf units: Provide 4 shelves spaced 12" o.c. where noted on
drawings.
C. Accessories and hardware:
1. Provide hardware recommended by manufacturer for each installation type. Include
W support braces, wall brackets, back clips, end clips, screws, anchors and other accessories as
required for complete and secure installation.
2.8 ORNAMENTAL WOOD COLUMNS
on A. Factory fabricate columns for opaque finish from clear, kiln-dried, western red cedar or eastern
white, Idaho white, lodgepole,ponderosa, or sugar pine. Column staves may be finger jointed.
B. Shafts: Built up from tongue-and-groove staves joined with waterproof glue. Lathe turn shafts to
provide indicated base diameter and true architectural entasis taper.
C. Capital and Base: Built-up from wood components with waterproof glue. Turn circular elements
on lathes.
D. Plinths: For exterior columns, provide wood sided plinths constructed to match existing plinths
and to ventilate the interior of column shaft.
E. Treatment and Finishing:
4M
1. Treat wood columns for opaque finish with water-repellant preservative by nonpressure
process.
Im 2. Coat inside of exterior column shafts with bituminous mastic.
3. Prime columns for opaque finish with two coats of exterior alkyd wood primer compatible
with specified topcoats.
2.9 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS
A. Fasteners for Exterior Finish Carpentry: Provide nails or screws of the following materials, in
sufficient length to penetrate minimum of 1-1/2 inches (38 mm) into substrate, unless otherwise
recommended by manufacturer:
1. Stainless steel.
2. Hot-dip galvanized steel.
3. Aluminum.
B. Fasteners for Interior Finish Carpentry: Nails, screws, and other anchoring devices of type, size,
material, and finish required for application indicated to provide secure attachment, concealed
where possible.
1. Where finish carpentry materials are exposed in areas of high humidity, provide stainless
steel fasteners and anchorages.
Project No. 00058 06200 FINISH CARPENTRY-5
am
Renovations to Parsons Annex
Smith College ow
Northampton, Massachusetts
A. Lumber Siding: Kiln-dried lumber siding complying with DOC PS 20.
1. Grade A western red cedar; NLGA,WCLIB, or WWPA.
2. Bevel Siding: S1S2E, actual overall dimensions of 5-1/2 by 11/16 inch, measured on the no
face and thick edge at 19 percent moisture content.
3. Beaded-Edge, Tongue-and-Groove Siding: Smooth-faced tongue-and-groove pattern with
beaded edge, actual face width (coverage) and thickness of 3-1/8 by 9/16 inch (79 by 14 am
mm), measured at 19 percent moisture content.
ow
2.5 INTERIOR STANDING AND RUNNING TRIM
A. Hardwood Lumber Trim for Transparent Finish (Stain or Clear Finish): Clear Grade A finish, ,
kiln-dried, white oak finished lumber MR selected for compatible grain and color similar to
existing natural finish wood trim.
B. Lumber Trim for Opaque Finish (Painted): Finished lumber (S4S), solid lumber, of one of the
following species and grades:
1. Grade A Finish alder, aspen, basswood, cottonwood, soft maple, sycamore, or yellow
poplar; NHLA.
C. Moldings: Made to patterns to match existing or approved stock pattern wood moldings made
from kiln-dried stock and graded under WMMPA WM 4.
1. Moldings for Opaque Finish (Painted): P-grade aspen, basswood, cottonwood, gum,
magnolia, soft maple, tupelo, or yellow poplar.
2.6 PANELING
A. Board Paneling: Interior wood board paneling.
1. Species: Eastern white, Idaho white, lodgepole, ponderosa, or sugar pine.
2. Grade: Clear No. 1.
3. Pattern: Beaded wainscot/ceiling to match existing.
2.7 WIRE SHELVING SYSTEMS
5W
A. Materials:
1. Steel Wire: Cold drawn, Grade C-1008,Tensile strength 100,000 psi.
2. Coating: 9 mil PVC resin or 3 mil powder coat epoxy-polyester finish. 'w,
B. Shelving: Provide type of shelving for locations as follows:
1. Student closets: Shelf and rod units: Deck wires spaced 1" o.c.with free -sliding hang rod.
a. Provide double shelf and single hang rod full width of closet.
2. Bathrooms: Shelf and hooks: Deck wires spaced 1" o.c.with hooks for towels/robes. „W
a. Provide 12 inches of shelf per student and one hook per student.
b. Mount as shown on drawings.
Project No. 00058 06200 FINISH CARPENTRY-4
ON
Renovations to Parsons Annex
Smith College
Northampton, Massachusetts
1. Warranty Period for Columns: Five years from date of Substantial Completion.
PART 2-PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering
products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
1. Wire shelving systems:
a. ClosetMaid; Clairson International.
b. LeeRowan; Newell Rubbermaid.
2. Ornamental Wood Columns:
a. Hartmann Sanders.
b. Schwerd,A. F. Manufacturing Co.
C. Somerset Door& Column Company.
2.2 MATERIALS, GENERAL
A. Lumber: DOC PS 20 and applicable grading rules of inspection agencies certified by the
American Lumber Standards' Committee Board of Review.
40
1. Factory mark each piece of lumber with grade stamp of inspection agency indicating grade,
species, moisture content at time of surfacing, and mill.
2. For exposed lumber, mark grade stamp on end or back of each piece, or omit grade stamp
and provide certificates of grade compliance issued by inspection agency.
B. Softwood Plywood: DOC PS 1.
C. Hardwood Plywood: HPVA HP-1.
D.
to 2.3 EXTERIOR STANDING AND RUNNING TRIM
A. Lumber Trim for Opaque-Stained or Painted Applications: Kiln-dried, solid lumber with
ON surfaced (smooth) face and of the following species and grade:
1. Grade A western red cedar; NLGA,WCLIB, or WWPA.
.w B. Moldings: Made to patterns from existing wood trim or approved match from stock wood
moldings made from kiln-dried stock..
1. Moldings for Opaque Finish (Painted): P-grade eastern white, Idaho white, lodgepole,
■er
ponderosa, or sugar pine.
2.4 SIDING
Project No. 00058 06200 FINISH CARPENTRY-3
Renovations to Parsons Annex
Smith College
Northampton, Massachusetts
A. Product Data: For each type of process and factory-fabricated product. Include construction
details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual components and profiles, textures, and
colors.
1. Include data for wood-preservative treatment from chemical treatment manufacturer and
certification by treating plant that treated materials comply with requirements. Indicate
type of preservative used, net amount of preservative retained, and chemical treatment
manufacturer's written instructions for handling, storing, installing, and finishing treated
material.
2. For products receiving a waterborne treatment, include statement that moisture content of
treated materials was reduced to levels specified before shipment to Project site.
3. Manufacturers catalogue data, detail sheets and specifications for ventilated shelving
systems.
w�
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Installer Qualifications: A qualified installer. .�
1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE,AND HANDLING
A. Protect materials against weather and contact with damp or wet surfaces. Stack lumber, plywood,
and other panels. Provide for air circulation within and around stacks and under temporary
coverings.
B. Deliver interior finish carpentry only when environmental conditions meet requirements
specified for installation areas. If finish carpentry must be stored in other than installation areas, *
store only where environmental conditions meet requirements specified for installation areas.
1.7 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Environmental Limitations: Do not deliver or install interior finish carpentry until building is
enclosed and weatherproof, wet work in space is completed and nominally dry, and HVAC
system is operating and maintaining temperature and relative humidity at occupancy levels during
the remainder of the construction period.
B. Weather Limitations: Proceed with installation only when existing and forecasted weather
conditions permit work to be performed according to manufacturer's written instructions and
warranty requirements and at least one coat of specified finish to be applied without exposure to
rain, snow, or dampness.
1.8 WARRANTY
A. Special Warranty for Columns: Manufacturer's standard form, signed by manufacturer, Installer,
and Contractor, in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace columns that fail in materials
or workmanship within specified warranty period.
Project No. 00058 06200 FINISH CARPENTRY-2
40
Renovations to Parsons Annex
"M Smith College
Northampton, Massachusetts
SECTION 06200-FINISH CARPENTRY
PART 1 -GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the following:
1. Exterior standing and running trim.
on 2. Exterior clapboard and shingle siding.
3. Exterior wood soffits.
4. Interior standing and running trim.
e�* 5. Interior board paneling.
6. Wire shelving systems
7. Ornamental wood columns.
B. Related Sections include the following:
1. Division 6 Section "Rough Carpentry" for furring, blocking, and other carpentry work not
exposed to view.
2. Division 6 Section "Exterior Architectural Woodwork" for shop-fabricated exterior
go woodwork.
3. Division 6 Section "Interior Architectural Woodwork" for shop-fabricated interior
woodwork.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
*" A. Inspection agencies, and the abbreviations used to reference them, include the following:
1. NELMA-Northeastern Lumber Manufacturers Association.
2. NHLA-National Hardwood Lumber Association.
3. NLGA-National Lumber Grades Authority.
4. SPIB-Southern Pine Inspection Bureau.
uw 5. WCLIB-West Coast Lumber Inspection Bureau.
6. WWPA-Western Wood Products Association.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
Project No. 00058 06200 FINISH CARPENTRY-1
Renovations to Parsons Annex
Smith College
Northampton, Massachusetts
B. Apply sheathing tape to joints between sheathing panels and at items penetrating sheathing.
Apply at upstanding flashing to overlap both flashing and sheathing.
END OF SECTION 06100
ow
Project No. 00058 06100 ROUGH CARPENTRY-12
Renovations to Parsons Annex
Smith College
Northampton, Massachusetts
B. Rafters: Notch to fit exterior wall plates and toe nail or use metal framing anchors. Double
rafters to form headers and trimmers at openings in roof framing, if any, and support with metal
hangers. Where rafters abut at ridge, place directly opposite each other and nail to ridge member
or use metal ridge hangers.
C. Provide special framing as indicated for eaves, overhangs, dormers, and similar conditions, if any.
3.8 STAIR FRAMING INSTALLATION
A. Provide stair framing members for landings of size, space, and configuration indicated.
1. Coordinate rough openings with requirements for prefabricated stair runs.
3.9 WOOD STRUCTURAL PANEL INSTALLATION
A. General: Comply with applicable recommendations contained in APA Form No. E30K, "APA
Design/Construction Guide: Residential & Commercial," for types of structural-use panels and
applications indicated.
B. Fastening Methods: Fasten panels as indicated below:
1. Combination Subfloor-Underlayment:
a. Glue and nail to wood framing.
2. Subflooring:
a. Glue and nail to wood framing.
b. Space panels 1/8 inch(3 mm)apart at edges and ends.
3. Sheathing:
a. Nail or staple to wood framing.
b. Space panels 1/8 inch(3 mm)apart at edges and ends.
4. Underlayment:
a. Nail or staple to subflooring.
b. Space panels 1/32 inch(0.8 mm) apart at edges and ends.
5. Plywood Backing Panels: Nail or screw to supports.
4W 3.10 BUILDING PAPER APPLICATION
A. Apply building paper horizontally with 2-inch (50-mm) overlap and 6-inch (150-mm) end lap;
fasten to sheathing with galvanized staples or roofing nails. Cover upstanding flashing with 4-
inch (102-mm)overlap.
Project No. 00058 06100 ROUGH CARPENTRY-11
Renovations to Parsons Annex
Smith College
Northampton, Massachusetts
mm) in width, and not less than 10-inch nominal (235-mm actual) depth for openings 10
to 12 feet(3 to 3.6 m) in width.
2. For load-bearing walls, provide double-jamb studs for openings 72 inches (1800 mm) and
less in width, and triple-jamb studs for wider openings. Provide headers of depth indicated
or if not indicated according to the One and Two Family Building Code,Article 36 of 780
CMR, Massachusetts State Building Code.
3.6 FLOOR JOIST FRAMING INSTALLATION
A. General: Install floor joists with crown edge up and support ends of each member with not less
than 1-1/2 inches (38 mm) of bearing on wood or metal, or 3 inches (76 mm) on masonry.
Attach floor joists as follows:
1. Where supported on wood members, by toe nailing or by using metal framing anchors. ..�
2. Where framed into wood supporting members, by using wood ledgers as indicated or, if
not indicated, by using metal joist hangers.
B. Frame openings with headers and trimmers supported by metal joist hangers; double headers and
trimmers where span of header exceeds 48 inches (1200 mm).
C. Do not notch in middle third of joists; limit notches to one-sixth depth of joist, one-third at ends.
Do not bore holes larger than 1/3 depth of joist; do not locate closer than 2 inches (50 mm) from
top or bottom.
D. Provide solid blocking of 2-inch nominal (38-mm actual) thickness by depth of joist at ends of
joists unless nailed to header or band.
E. Lap members framing from opposite sides of beams, girders, or partitions not less than 4 inches
(102 mm) or securely tie opposing members together. Provide solid blocking of 2-inch nominal
(38-mm actual) thickness by depth of joist over supports.
F. Anchor members paralleling masonry with 1/4-by-1-1/4-inch (6.4-by-32-mm) metal strap anchors
spaced not more than 96 inches (2438 mm) o.c., extending over and fastening to 3 joists. Embed
anchors at least 4 inches (102 mm) into grouted masonry with ends bent at right angles and
extending 4 inches (102 mm)beyond bend.
G. Provide solid blocking between joists under jamb studs for openings.
H. Under non-load-bearing partitions, provide double joists separated by solid blocking equal to
depth of studs above.
1. Steel bridging installed to comply with bridging manufacturer's written instructions.
3.7 CEILING JOIST AND RAFTER FRAMING INSTALLATION
A. Ceiling Joists: Install ceiling joists with crown edge up and complying with requirements
specified above for floor joists. Face nail to ends of parallel rafters.
Project No. 00058 06100 ROUGH CARPENTRY-10
Renovations to Parsons Annex
Smith College
Northampton, Massachusetts
3.4 WOOD FRAMING INSTALLATION, GENERAL
+" A. Framing Standard: Comply with AFPA's "Manual for Wood Frame Construction," unless
otherwise indicated.
!fir B. Framing with Engineered Wood Products: Install engineered wood products to comply with
manufacturer's written instructions.
C. Do not splice structural members between supports.
D. Where built-up beams or girders of 2-inch nominal- (38-mm actual-) dimension lumber or
engineered-lumber products on edge are required, fasten together with 2 rows of 20d (100-mm)
nails spaced not less than 32 inches (812 mm) o.c. Locate one row near top edge and other near
bottom edge.
1. For continuous members,locate end joints over supports.
3.5 WALL AND PARTITION FRAMING INSTALLATION
A. General: Arrange studs so wide face of stud is perpendicular to direction of wall or partition and
wo narrow face is parallel. Provide single bottom plate and double top plates using members of 2-
inch nominal (38-mm actual) thickness whose widths equal that of studs, except single top plate
may be used for non-load-bearing partitions. Anchor plates to supporting construction, unless
w„ otherwise indicated.
1. For exterior walls, provide 2-by-6-inch nominal-size wood studs spaced 24 inches o.c.,
unless otherwise indicated.
2. For interior partitions and walls, provide 2-by-4-inch nominal- (38-by-89-mm actual-) size
wood studs spaced 16 inches o.c., unless otherwise indicated.
B. Construct corners and intersections with three or more studs. Provide blocking and framing as
indicated and as required to support facing materials, fixtures, specialty items, and trim.
an 1. Provide continuous horizontal blocking at midheight of partitions more than 96 inches
(2438 mm) high, using members of 2-inch nominal (38-mm actual) thickness and of same
width as wall or partitions.
4W
C. Fire block concealed spaces of wood-framed walls and partitions at each floor level, in walls
adjacent to stair stringers and at ceiling line of top story. Where fire blocking is not inherent in
framing system used, provide closely fitted wood blocks of 2-inch nominal- (38-mm actual-) thick
lumber of same width as framing members.
D. Frame openings with multiple studs and headers. Provide nailed header members of thickness
equal to width of studs. Set headers on edge and support on jamb studs.
1. For non-load-bearing partitions, provide double-jamb studs with headers not less than 4-
inch nominal (89-mm actual) depth for openings 48 inches(1200 mm) and less in width, 6-
inch nominal (140-mm actual) depth for openings 48 to 72 inches (1200 to 1800 mm) in
w width, 8-inch nominal (184-mm actual) depth for openings 72 to 120 inches (1800 to 3000
Project No. 00058 06100 ROUGH CARPENTRY-9
Renovations to Parsons Annex
Smith College
Northampton, Massachusetts
B. Do not use materials with defects that impair quality of rough carpentry or pieces that are too
small to use with minimum number of joints or optimum joint arrangement.
C. Apply field treatment complying with AWPA M4 to cut surfaces of preservative-treated lumber
and plywood.
D. Securely attach rough carpentry work to substrate by anchoring and fastening as indicated,
complying with the following:
1. CABO NER 272 for power-driven fasteners.
2. Published requirements of metal framing anchor manufacturer.
3. Appendix C"Fastening Schedule," in 780 CMR-Massachusetts State Building Code. WR
E. Use common wire nails, unless otherwise indicated. Select fasteners of size that will not fully
penetrate members where opposite side will be exposed to view or will receive finish materials.
Make tight connections between members. Install fasteners without splitting wood; predrill as
required.
F. Use finishing nails for exposed work, unless otherwise indicated. Countersink nail heads and fill
holes with wood filler.
3.2 WOOD BLOCKING,AND NAILER INSTALLATION
A. Install where indicated and where required for attaching other work. Form to shapes indicated
and cut as required for true line and level of attached work. Coordinate locations with other
work involved.
B. Attach items to substrates to support applied loading. Recess bolts and nuts flush with surfaces,
unless otherwise indicated. Build anchor bolts into masonry during installation of masonry work.
Where possible, secure anchor bolts to formwork before concrete placement.
C. Provide permanent grounds of dressed, pressure-preservative-treated, key-beveled lumber not less
than 1-1/2 inches (38 mm) wide and of thickness required to bring face of ground to exact
thickness of finish material. Remove temporary grounds when no longer required. .�
3.3 WOOD FURRING INSTALLATION
A. Install level and plumb with closure strips at edges and openings. Shim with wood as required for
tolerance of finish work.
1. Fire block furred spaces of walls, at each floor level and at ceiling, with wood blocking or
noncombustible materials accurately fitted to close furred spaces.
B. Furring to Receive Plywood or Hardboard Paneling: Install 1-by-3-inch nominal- (19-by-63-mm
actual-) size furring vertically at 24 inches (610 mm) o.c.
C. Furring to Receive Gypsum Board: Install 1-by-2-inch nominal- (19-by-38-mm actual-) size furring
vertically at 16 inches (406 mm) o.c.
Project No. 00058 06100 ROUGH CARPENTRY-8
NO
Renovations to Parsons Annex
Smith College
Northampton, Massachusetts
1. Research/Evaluation Reports: Provide products acceptable to authorities having
jurisdiction and for which model code research/evaluation reports exist that show
compliance of metal framing anchors, for application indicated, with building code in
effect for Project.
2. Allowable Design Loads: Provide products with allowable design loads, as published by
manufacturer, that meet or exceed those indicated. Manufacturer's published values shall
be determined from empirical data or by rational engineering analysis and demonstrated by
comprehensive testing performed by a qualified independent testing agency.
B. Galvanized Steel Sheet: Hot-dip, zinc-coated steel sheet complying with ASTM A 653/A 653M,
G60 (Z180) coating designation.
�w
C. Joist Hangers: U-shaped joist hangers with 2-inch- (50-mm-) long seat and 1-1/4-inch- (32-mm-)
wide nailing flanges at least 85 percent of joist depth.
1. Thickness: 0.050 inch(1.3 mm).
D. Top Flange Hangers: U-shaped joist hangers, full depth of joist, formed from metal strap with
tabs bent to extend over and be fastened to supporting member.
1. Strap Width: 2 inches(50 mm).
2. Thickness: 0.050 inch(1.3 mm).
2.12 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS
A. Building Paper: Asphalt saturated organic felt complying with ASTM D 226, Type I (No. 15
„■ asphalt felt), unperforated.
B. Sill-Sealer Gaskets: Closed-cell neoprene foam, 1/4 inch (6.4 min) thick, selected from
manufacturer's standard widths to suit width of sill members indicated.
C. Adhesives for Field Gluing Panels to Framing: Formulation complying with APA AFG-01 or
ASTM D 3498 that is approved for use with type of construction panel indicated by both
adhesive and panel manufacturers.
D. Water-Repellent Preservative: NWWDA-tested and -accepted formulation containing 3-iodo-2-
"' propynyl butyl carbamate, combined with an insecticide containing chloropyrifos as its active
ingredient.
PART 3-EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION, GENERAL
A. Set rough carpentry to required levels and lines, with members plumb, true to line, cut, and
fitted. Fit rough carpentry to other construction; scribe and cope as needed for accurate fit.
Locate furring, nailers, blocking, and similar supports to comply with requirements for attaching
other construction.
Project No. 00058 06100 ROUGH CARPENTRY-7
ow
Renovations to Parsons Annex
Smith College
Northampton, Massachusetts
B. Underlayment, General: Provide underlayment in nominal thicknesses indicated or, if not
indicated, not less than 1/4 inch (6.4 mm) over smooth subfloors and not less than 3/8 inch (9.5
mm) over board or uneven subfloors.
C. Plywood Underlayment for Resilient Flooring: DOC PS 1, Multi-ply underlayment
recommended by resilient flooring manufacturer with fully sanded face.
2.9 PLYWOOD BACKING PANELS
A. Telephone and Electrical Equipment Backing Panels: DOC PS 1, Exposure 1, C-D Plugged, fire-
retardant treated, in thickness indicated or, if not indicated, not less than 1/2 inch (12.7 mm)
thick.
2.10 FASTENERS
A. General: Provide fasteners of size and type indicated that comply with requirements specified in
this Article for material and manufacture.
1. Where rough carpentry is exposed to weather, in ground contact, or in area of high relative
humidity, provide fasteners with hot-dip zinc coating complying with
ASTM A 153/A 153M.
B. Nails, Brads, and Staples: ASTM F 1667.
C. Power-Driven Fasteners: CABO NER-272.
D. Wood Screws: ASME B18.6.1.
E. Lag Bolts: ASME B 18.2.1. (ASME B 18.2.3.8M).
F. Bolts: Steel bolts complying with ASTM A 307, Grade A (ASTM F 568M, Property Class 4.6);
with ASTM A 563 (ASTM A 563M)hex nuts and,where indicated, flat washers.
G. Expansion Anchors: Anchor bolt and sleeve assembly of material indicated below with capability
to sustain, without failure, a load equal to 6 times the load imposed when installed in unit
masonry assemblies and equal to 4 times the load imposed when installed in concrete as
determined by testing per ASTM E 488 conducted by a qualified independent testing and
inspecting agency.
1. Material: Carbon-steel components, zinc plated to comply with ASTM B 633,
Class Fe/Zn 5.
2.11 METAL FRAMING ANCHORS
A. General: Provide framing anchors made from metal indicated, of structural capacity, type, and `
size indicated, and as follows:
Project No. 00058 06100 ROUGH CARPENTRY-6
MW
Renovations to Parsons Annex
Smith College
W Northampton, Massachusetts
C. For concealed boards, provide lumber with 15 percent maximum moisture content and any of the
following species and grades:
w
1. Mixed southern pine, No. 2 grade; SPIB.
2. Hem-fir or Hem-fir (north), Construction or 2 Common grade; NLGA, WCLIB, or
• WWPA.
3. Spruce-pine-fir (south) or Spruce-pine-fir, Construction or 2 Common grade; NELMA,
NLGA,WCLIB, or WWPA.
D. For furring strips for installing plywood or hardboard paneling, select boards with no knots
capable of producing bent-over nails and damage to paneling.
2.6 ENGINEERED WOOD PRODUCTS
A. Laminated Veneer Lumber: A composite of wood veneers with grain primarily parallel to
member lengths, manufactured with an exterior-type adhesive complying with ASTM D 2559.
Product has the following allowable design values as determined according to ASTM D 5456:
1. Extreme Fiber Stress in Bending, Edgewise: 2850 psi (19.7 MPa) for 12-inch nominal-
(286-mm actual-) depth members.
!+ " 2. Modulus of Elasticity, Edgewise: 2,000,000 psi(13 800 MPa).
B. Parallel-Strand Lumber: A composite of wood strand elements with grain primarily parallel to
member lengths, manufactured with an exterior-type adhesive complying with ASTM D 2559.
Product has the following allowable design values as determined according to ASTM D 5456:
1. Extreme Fiber Stress in Bending, Edgewise: 2900 psi (20 MPa) for 12-inch nominal- (286-
mm actual-) depth members.
2. Modulus of Elasticity, Edgewise: 2,000,000 psi(13 800 MPa).
2.7 SHEATHING
A. Plywood Wall and Roof Sheathing: Exterior, Structural I sheathing.
1. Span Rating: Not less than 32/16.
2. Thickness: Not less than 1/2 inch(13 mm), except 5/8 inch at new roof areas.
2.8 SUBFLOORING AND UNDERLAYMENT
A. Plywood Combination Subfloor-Underlayment: DOC PS 1,APA rated STURD-I-FLOOR single-
floor panels.
1. Span Rating: Not less than 24 oc.
a
2. Thickness: Not less than 3/4 inch.
3. Edge Detail: Tongue and groove.
4. Surface Finish: Fully sanded face.
Project No. 00058 06100 ROUGH CARPENTRY-5
Renovations to Parsons Annex
Smith College
Northampton, Massachusetts
3. Wood floor plates that are installed over concrete slabs directly in contact with earth.
"M
2.4 DIMENSION LUMBER
A. General: Provide dimension lumber of grades indicated according to the American Lumber *�
Standards Committee National Grading Rule provisions of the grading agency indicated.
B. Non-Load-Bearing Interior Partitions: Construction, Stud, or No.2 grade and any of the
following species:
1. Mixed southern pine; SPIB. s
2. Hem-fir or Hem-fir(north); NLGA,WCLIB, or WWPA.
3. Spruce-pine-fir(south) or Spruce-pine-fir; NELMA, NLGA,WCLIB, or WWPA.
C. Exterior and Load-Bearing Walls Framing Other Than Non-Load-Bearing Partitions: w�
Construction, Stud, or No. 2 grade and any of the following species:
1. Hem-fir;WCLIB or WWPA.
2. Hem-fir(north); NLGA. am
3. Southern pine; SPIB.
4. Mixed southern pine; SPIB.
5. Spruce-pine-fir(south); NELMA,WCLIB, or WWPA. so
6. Spruce-pine-fir; NLGA.
D. Joists, Rafters, and Other Framing Not Listed Above: Construction or No. 2 grade and any of
the following species:
1. Hem-fir;WCLIB or WWPA.
2. Hem-fir(north); NLGA. .r•
3. Southern pine; SPIB.
4. Spruce-pine-fir(south); NELMA,WCLIB, or WWPA.
5. Spruce-pine-fir; NLGA. ,..
2.5 MISCELLANEOUS LUMBER
A. General: Provide lumber for support or attachment of other construction, including the
following:
1. Blocking.
2. Cants.
3. Nailers.
4. Furring.
5. Grounds.
B. For items of dimension lumber size, provide Standard, Stud, or No. 3 grade lumber with 15
percent maximum moisture content and any of the following species:
1. Mixed southern pine; SPIB. e•►
2. Hem-fir or Hem-fir(north); NLGA,WCLIB, or WWPA.
3. Spruce-pine-fir(south) or Spruce-pine-fir; NELMA, NLGA, WCLIB, or WWPA.
Project No. 00058 06100 ROUGH CARPENTRY-4
Renovations to Parsons Annex
Smith College
Northampton, Massachusetts
2.2 WOOD PRODUCTS, GENERAL
A. Lumber: DOC PS 20 and applicable rules of lumber grading agencies certified by the American
Lumber Standards Committee Board of Review.
1. Factory mark each piece of lumber with grade stamp of grading agency.
2. Provide dressed lumber, S4S, unless otherwise indicated.
3. Provide dry lumber with 15 percent maximum moisture content at time of dressing for 2-
inch nominal (38-mm actual)thickness or less, unless otherwise indicated.
B. Engineered Wood Products: Provide engineered wood products acceptable to authorities having
jurisdiction and for which current model code research or evaluation reports exist that show
compliance with building code in effect for Project.
1. Allowable Design Stresses: Provide engineered wood products with allowable design
stresses, as published by manufacturer, that meet or exceed those indicated.
Manufacturer's published values shall be determined from empirical data or by rational
engineering analysis and demonstrated by comprehensive testing performed by a qualified
independent testing agency.
C. Wood Structural Panels:
1. Plywood: Either DOC PS 1 or DOC PS 2, unless otherwise indicated.
2. Oriented Strand Board: DOC PS 2.
3. Thickness: As needed to comply with requirements specified but not less than thickness
indicated.
4. Comply with "Code Plus" provisions in APA Form No. E30K, "APA Design/Construction
Guide: Residential& Commercial."
5. Factory mark panels according to indicated standard.
2.3 WOOD-PRESERVATIVE-TREATED MATERIALS
A. Preservative Treatment by Pressure Process: AWPA C2 (lumber) and AWPA C9 (plywood),
except that lumber that is not in contact with the ground and is continuously protected from
liquid water may be treated according to AWPA C31 with inorganic boron(SBX).
B. Kiln-dry material after treatment to a maximum moisture content of 19 percent for lumber. Do
not use material that is warped or does not comply with requirements for untreated material.
C. Mark each treated item with the treatment quality mark of an inspection agency approved by the
American Lumber Standards Committee Board of Review.
on D. Application: Treat items indicated on Drawings, and the following:
1. Wood cants, nailers, curbs, equipment support bases, blocking, stripping, and similar
members in connection with roofing, flashing,vapor barriers, and waterproofing.
2. Wood sills, sleepers, blocking, furring, stripping, and similar concealed members in contact
with masonry or concrete.
Project No. 00058 06100 ROUGH CARPENTRY-3
Renovations to Parsons Annex
Smith College
Northampton, Massachusetts
1. Include data for wood-preservative treatment from chemical treatment manufacturer and
certification by treating plant that treated materials comply with requirements. Indicate
type of preservative used, net amount of preservative retained, and chemical treatment
manufacturer's written instructions for handling, storing, installing, and finishing treated
material.
2. Include copies of warranties from chemical treatment manufacturers for each type of
treatment.
B. Material Certificates: For dimension lumber specified to comply with minimum allowable unit
stresses. Indicate species and grade selected for each use and design values approved by the
American Lumber Standards Committee Board of Review.
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Source Limitations for Engineered Wood Products: Obtain each type of engineered wood
product through one source from a single manufacturer.
1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE,AND HANDLING
A. Stack lumber, plywood, and other panels; place spacers between each bundle to provide air
circulation. Provide for air circulation around stacks and under coverings.
PART 2-PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
1. Laminated-Veneer Lumber:
a. Boise Cascade Corporation.
b. Georgia-Pacific Corporation.
C. Louisiana-Pacific Corporation.
d. Trus Joist MacMillan.
2. Parallel-Strand Lumber: .R
a. Trus Joist MacMillan.
3. Metal Framing Anchors:
a. Alpine Engineered Products, Inc.
b. Simpson Strong-Tie Company, Inc. w�
C. United Steel Products Company, Inc.
w
Project No. 00058 06100 ROUGH CARPENTRY-2
ow
an
Renovations to Parsons Annex
Smith College
Northampton, Massachusetts
SECTION 06100,ROUGH CARPENTRY
PART 1 -GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
' A. This Section includes the following:
1. Framing with dimension lumber.
2. Framing with engineered wood products.
3. Wood blocking, and nailers.
4. Wood furring.
5. Sheathing.
6. Subflooring and underlayment.
7. Plywood backing panels.
B. Related Sections include the following:
1. Division 6 Section "Finish Carpentry" for nonstructural carpentry items exposed to view
w and not specified in another Section.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. Rough Carpentry: Carpentry work not specified in other Sections and not exposed, unless
otherwise indicated.
B. Exposed Framing: Dimension lumber not concealed by other construction.
C. Lumber grading agencies, and the abbreviations used to reference them, include the following:
1. NELMA-Northeastern Lumber Manufacturers Association.
�s 2. NLGA-National Lumber Grades Authority.
3. SPIB-Southern Pine Inspection Bureau.
4. WCLIB-West Coast Lumber Inspection Bureau.
,A 5. WWPA-Western Wood Products Association.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of process and factory-fabricated product. Indicate component
materials and dimensions and include construction and application details.
Project No. 00058 06100 ROUGH CARPENTRY-1
Renovations to Parsons Annex
Smith College
Northampton, Massachusetts
3.4 PROTECTION
A. Protect finishes of ornamental metal from damage during construction period with temporary
protective coverings approved by ornamental metal fabricator. Remove protective covering at the
time of Substantial Completion.
B. Restore finishes damaged during installation and construction period so no evidence remains of
correction work. Return items that cannot be refinished in the field to the shop; make required
alterations and refinish entire unit, or provide new units.
END OF SECTION 05700
1W
Project No. 00058 05700 ORNAMENTAL METAL-8
Im
Renovations to Parsons Annex
Smith College
in Northampton, Massachusetts
D. Do not cut or abrade finishes that cannot be completely restored in the field. Return items with
such finishes to the shop for required alterations, followed by complete refinishing, or provide
new units as required.
E. Field Welding: Comply with applicable AWS specification for procedures of manual shielded
metal arc welding, for appearance and quality of welds, and for methods used in correcting
welding work. Weld connections that are not to be left as exposed joints but cannot be shop
welded because of shipping size limitations. Grind exposed welded joints smooth and restore
finish to match finish of adjacent surfaces.
3.2 INSTALLING HANDRAILS AND RAILINGS
A. Adjust handrails and railings before anchoring to ensure alignment at abutting joints.
B. Concrete-Anchored Posts in Sleeves: Insert posts in preset sleeves, cast into concrete, and fill
annular space between posts and sleeve with nonshrink, nonmetallic grout, mixed and placed to
comply with grout manufacturer's written instructions.
Or
1. Cover anchorage joint with flange or escutcheon plate attached to post after filling annular
space.
�w
C. Anchor posts to metal surfaces with fittings designed for this purpose.
D. Nonwelded Connections: Use mechanical or adhesive joints for permanently connecting railing
components. Use wood blocks and padding to prevent damage to railing members and fittings.
Seal recessed holes of exposed locking screws using plastic cement filler colored to match finish of
�,. handrails and railings.
E. Welded Connections: Use fully welded joints for permanently connecting railing components by
welding. Cope or butt components to provide 100 percent contact or use fittings designed for
this purpose.
go F. Anchor railing ends into concrete or masonry with fittings designed for this purpose.
G. Anchor railing ends to metal surfaces by welding.
H. Expansion Joints: Provide expansion joints at locations indicated or, if not indicated, at intervals
not to exceed 40 feet (12 m). Provide slip-joint internal sleeve extending 2 inches (50 mm)
beyond joint on either side, fasten internal sleeve securely to one side, and locate joint within 6
inches (150 mm) of post.
3.3 CLEANING
A. Touchup Painting: Immediately after erection, clean field welds, bolted connections, and
ow abraded areas of shop paint, and paint exposed areas with same material.
B. Galvanized Surfaces: Clean field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas and repair
galvanizing to comply with ASTM A 780.
Project No. 00058 05700 ORNAMENTAL METAL-7
s
Renovations to Parsons Annex
Smith College
Northampton, Massachusetts
2.5 FINISHES, GENERAL
A. Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal Products" for
recommendations for applying and designating finishes.
2.6 IRON AND STEEL FINISHES
A. Galvanizing: Hot-dip galvanize products made from rolled, pressed, and forged steel shapes,
castings, plates,bars, and strips indicated to be galvanized to comply with ASTM A 123.
1. Hot-dip galvanize iron and steel hardware indicated to be galvanized to comply with
ASTM A 153/A 153M.
B. Fill vent and drain holes that will be exposed in finished Work, unless indicated to remain as
weep holes,by plugging with zinc solder and filing off smooth.
C. Preparation for Shop Priming: After galvanizing, thoroughly clean ornamental metal of grease,
dirt, oil, flux, and other foreign matter, and treat with metallic-phosphate process.
D. Preparation for Shop Priming: Prepare uncoated ferrous-metal surfaces to comply with minimum
requirements indicated below for SSPC surface-preparation specifications and environmental
exposure conditions of installed ornamental metal:
1. Exteriors(SSPC Zone 111): SSPC-SP 6, "Commercial Blast Cleaning." ,
2. Interiors (SSPC Zone IA): SSPC-SP 7, "Brush-off Blast Cleaning."
E. Factory-Primed Finish: Apply air-dried primer immediately after cleaning and pretreatment, to
provide a minimum dry film thickness of 2 mils (0.05 mm) per applied coat, to surfaces that will
be exposed after assembly and installation, and to concealed, nongalvanized surfaces.
PART 3-EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION, GENERAL
A. Provide anchorage devices and fasteners where necessary for securing ornamental metal to in-
place construction.
B. Perform cutting, drilling, and fitting required to install ornamental metal. Set products accurately
in location, alignment, and elevation; measured from established lines and levels. Provide
temporary bracing or anchors in formwork for items to be built into concrete, masonry, or similar
construction.
C. Fit exposed connections accurately together to form tight,hairline joints or,where indicated,with
uniform reveals and spaces for sealants and joint fillers. Where cutting,welding, and grinding are
required for proper shop fitting and jointing of ornamental metal, restore finishes to eliminate
any evidence of such corrective work.
Project No. 00058 05700 ORNAMENTAL METAL-6
Im
Renovations to Parsons Annex
Smith College
Northampton, Massachusetts
A. Welded Connections: Fabricate handrails and railings for connecting members by welding.
Cope components at perpendicular and skew connections to provide close fit, or use fittings
designed for this purpose. Weld connections continuously to comply with the following:
1. Use materials and methods that minimize distortion and develop strength and corrosion
resistance of base metals.
2. Obtain fusion without undercut or overlap.
3. Remove flux immediately.
IM 4. At exposed connections, finish exposed surfaces smooth and blended so no roughness
shows after finishing and welded surface matches contours of adjoining surfaces.
5. Provide welded connections for ferrous handrails and railings.
B. Form changes in direction of railing members as follows:
�. 1. As detailed.
2. By radius bends of radius indicated.
3. By flush radius bends.
4. By bending.
5. By inserting prefabricated flush-elbow fittings.
6. By any method indicated above applicable to change of direction involved.
C. Form simple and compound curves by bending members in jigs to produce uniform curvature for
each repetitive configuration required; maintain profile of member throughout entire bend
without buckling, twisting, or otherwise deforming exposed surfaces of handrail and railing
components.
D. For handrails and railings with nonwelded connections that are exposed to exterior or to
on moisture from condensation or other sources, provide weep holes or another means to drain
water entrapped in hollow sections of railing members.
E. Provide wall returns at ends of wall-mounted handrails, unless otherwise indicated; close ends of
returns.
F. Close exposed ends of handrail and railing members with manufacturer's standard prefabricated
end fittings.
40 G. Brackets, Flanges, Fittings, and Anchors: Provide wall brackets, flanges, miscellaneous fittings,
and anchors to interconnect handrail and railing members to other work, unless otherwise
indicated.
1. Furnish inserts and other anchorage devices for connecting handrails and railings to
concrete or masonry work. Fabricate anchorage devices capable of withstanding loads
imposed by handrails and railings. Coordinate anchorage devices with supporting
structure.
2. For railing posts set in concrete, provide preset sleeves of steel, not less than 6 inches (150
mm) long and inside dimensions not less than 1/2 inch (13 mm) greater than outside
dimensions of post,with steel plate forming bottom closure.
on
Project No. 00058 05700 ORNAMENTAL METAL-5
Renovations to Parsons Annex
Smith College
Northampton, Massachusetts
installed in concrete as determined by testing per ASTM E 488 conducted by a qualified
independent testing agency.
1. Cast-in-place anchors.
2. Chemical anchors.
3. Expansion anchors.
D. Nonshrink, Nonmetallic Grout: Premixed, factory-packaged, nonstaining, noncorrosive,
nongaseous grout complying with ASTM C 1107. Provide grout specifically recommended by
manufacturer for interior and exterior applications.
E. Shop Primer for Ferrous Metal: Fast-curing, lead- and chromate-free, universal modified-alkyd
primer complying with performance requirements of FS TT-P-664; selected for good resistance to
normal atmospheric corrosion, compatibility with finish paint systems indicated, and capability to
provide a sound foundation for field-applied topcoats despite prolonged exposure.
F. Shop Primer for Galvanized Steel: Zinc-dust, zinc-oxide primer formulated for priming zinc-
coated steel and for compatibility with finish paint systems indicated, and complying with SSPC-
Paint 5.
2.3 FABRICATION, GENERAL
A. Form ornamental metal to required shapes and sizes, with true curves, lines, and angles. Provide
components in sizes and profiles indicated, but not less than that needed to comply with a*"
requirements indicated for structural performance.
B. Provide necessary rebates, lugs, and brackets to assemble units and to attach to other work. Drill
and tap for required fasteners, unless otherwise indicated. Use concealed fasteners where
possible.
C. Comply with AWS for recommended practices in shop welding and brazing. Provide welds and
brazes behind finished surfaces without distorting or discoloring exposed side. Clean exposed
welded and brazed joints of all flux, and dress all exposed and contact surfaces. ,.
D. Mill joints to a tight, hairline fit. Cope or miter corner joints. Form joints exposed to weather to
exclude water penetration.
E. Finish exposed surfaces to smooth, sharp,well-defined lines and arris.
F. Assemble items in the shop to greatest extent possible to minimize field splicing and assembly.
Disassemble units only as necessary for shipping and handling limitations. Clearly mark units for
reassembly and coordinated installation. Use connections that maintain structural value of
joined pieces.
2.4 FABRICATING HANDRAILS AND RAILINGS ■„
op
Project No. 00058 05700 ORNAMENTAL METAL-4
Renovations to Parsons Annex
Smith College
W Northampton, Massachusetts
1. Established Dimensions: Where field measurements cannot be made without delaying the
Work, establish dimensions and proceed with fabricating ornamental metal without field
measurements. Coordinate other construction to ensure that actual dimensions
correspond to established dimensions.
1.8 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate installation of anchorages for ornamental metal items. Furnish Setting Drawings,
templates, and directions for installing anchorages, including sleeves, concrete inserts, anchor
bolts, and items with integral anchors, that are to be embedded in concrete or masonry. Deliver
® such items to Project site in time for installation.
PART 2-PRODUCTS
sm
2.1 METALS
A. General: Provide metals free from surface blemishes where exposed to view in finished unit.
Exposed-to-view surfaces exhibiting pitting, seam marks, roller marks, stains, discoloration, or
other imperfections on finished units are not acceptable.
B. Steel and Iron: Provide steel and iron in form indicated to comply with the following
on requirements:
1. Tubing: Cold formed,ASTM A 500.
2. Steel Plate, Shapes, and Bars: ASTM A 36/A 36M.
3. Steel Sheet: Commercial-quality, cold-rolled, stretcher-leveled, carbon-steel sheet
complying with ASTM A 366/A 366M, Class I, matte finish.
4. Gray-Iron Castings: ASTM A 48, Class 30(ASTM A 48M, Class 200).
5. Malleable-Iron Castings: ASTM A 47 (ASTM A 47M), grade as recommended by
fabricator for type of use indicated.
2.2 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS
A. Welding Electrodes and Filler Metal: Type and alloy of filler metal and electrodes as
recommended by producer of metal to be welded, complying with applicable AWS specifications,
and as required for color match, strength, and compatibility in fabricated items.
B. Fasteners: Use fasteners of same basic metal as fastened metal, unless otherwise indicated. Do
not use metals that are corrosive or incompatible with materials joined.
1. Provide concealed fasteners for interconnecting ornamental metal components and for
attaching them to other work, unless exposed fasteners are unavoidable or are the standard
fastening method.
C. Cast-in-Place and Postinstalled Anchors: Anchors of type indicated below, fabricated from
corrosion-resistant materials with capability to sustain, without failure, a load equal to six times
the load imposed when installed in unit masonry and equal to four times the load imposed when
Project No. 00058 05700 ORNAMENTAL METAL-3
Renovations to Parsons Annex
Smith College
Northampton, Massachusetts
B. Shop Drawings: Show fabrication and installation of ornamental metal. Include plans,
elevations, component details, and attachments to other Work. Indicate materials and profiles of
each ornamental metal member, fittings, joinery, finishes, fasteners, anchorages, and accessory
items.
1. Include setting drawings, templates, and directions for installing anchor bolts and other
anchorages.
C. Welding Certificates: Copies of certificates for welding procedures and personnel.
D. Qualification Data: For firms and persons specified in "Quality Assurance" Article to
demonstrate their capabilities and experience. Include lists of completed projects with project
names and addresses, names and addresses of architects and owners, and other information
specified.
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Installer Qualifications: Arrange for installation of ornamental metal specified in this Section by
the same firm that fabricated it.
B. Fabricator Qualifications: A firm experienced in producing ornamental metal similar to that
indicated for this Project and with a record of successful in-service performance, as well as
sufficient production capacity to produce required units.
C. Welding Standards: Qualify procedures and personnel according to the following:
1. AWS D 1.1, "Structural Welding Code--Steel."
2. AWS D 1.2, "Structural Welding Code--Aluminum."
3. AWS D1.3, "Structural Welding Code--Sheet Steel."
D. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site to comply with requirements in ..
Division 1 Section"Project Meetings."
1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE,AND HANDLING
A. Store ornamental metal inside a well-ventilated area, away from uncured concrete and masonry,
and protected from weather, moisture, soiling, abrasion, extreme temperatures, and humidity.
B. Deliver and store cast-metal products in wooden crates surrounded by sufficient excelsior to ow
ensure that products will not be cracked or otherwise damaged.
Im
1.7 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Field Measurements: Where ornamental metal is indicated to fit to other construction, verify aw
dimensions of other construction by field measurements before fabrication and indicate
measurements on Shop Drawings. Coordinate fabrication schedule with construction progress to
avoid delaying the Work.
Project No. 00058 05700 ORNAMENTAL METAL-2
Renovations to Parsons Annex
Smith College
Northampton, Massachusetts
SECTION 05700-ORNAMENTAL METAL
PART 1 -GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
4w A. This Section includes the following:
1. Ornamental railings fabricated from stock shapes.
B. Related Sections include the following:
W 1. Division 5 Section"Metal Fabrications" for nonornamental metal fabrications.
1.3 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS FOR HANDRAILS AND RAILINGS
A. Structural Performance of Handrails and Railings: Provide handrails and railings complying with
requirements of ASTM E 985 for structural performance, based on testing performed according
" to ASTM E 894 and ASTM E 935.
B. Thermal Movements: Provide handrails and railings that allow for thermal movements resulting
from the following maximum change (range) in ambient and surface temperatures by preventing
buckling, opening of joints, overstressing of components, failure of connections, and other
detrimental effects. Base engineering calculation on surface temperatures of materials due to
both solar heat gain and nighttime-sky heat loss.
1. Temperature Change (Range): 120 deg F (67 deg C), ambient; 180 deg F (100 deg C),
material surfaces.
C. Control of Corrosion: Prevent galvanic action and other forms of corrosion by insulating metals
go and other materials from direct contact with incompatible materials.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
M
A. Product Data: For each product used in ornamental metal, including finishing materials and
methods.
.■
1. Include Product Data for grout and anchoring cement.
Wo
W
Project No. 00058 05700 ORNAMENTAL METAL-1
Renovations to Parsons Annex
Smith College
Northampton, Massachusetts
1. Use materials and methods that minimize distortion and develop strength and corrosion
resistance of base metals.
2. Obtain fusion without undercut or overlap.
3. Remove welding flux immediately.
4. At exposed connections, finish exposed welds and surfaces smooth and blended so no
roughness shows after finishing and contour of welded surface matches that of adjacent
surface.
3.2 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING
A. Touchup Painting: Immediately after erection, clean field welds, bolted connections, and
abraded areas of shop paint, and paint exposed areas with the same material as used for shop
painting to comply with SSPC-PA 1 for touching up shop-painted surfaces.
1. Apply by brush or spray to provide a minimum 2.0-mil(0.05-mm) dry film thickness.
B. Touchup Painting: Cleaning and touchup painting of field welds, bolted connections, and
abraded areas of shop paint are specified in Division 9 Section"Painting." '°
C. Galvanized Surfaces: Clean field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas and repair
galvanizing to comply with ASTM A 780.
END OF SECTION 05511
Project No. 00058 05511 METAL STAIRS-6
on
Renovations to Parsons Annex
Smith College
Northampton, Massachusetts
B. Metal Risers and Subtread Pans: Form to configurations shown from steel sheet of thickness
necessary to support indicated loads,but not less than 0.0677 inch (1.7 mm).
1. Steel Sheet: Uncoated cold-rolled steel sheet, unless otherwise indicated.
2. Attach risers and subtreads to stringers with brackets made of steel angles or bars. Weld
brackets to stringers and attach metal pans to brackets by welding, riveting, or bolting.
3. Shape metal pans to include nosing integral with riser.
2.7 FINISHES
A. Comply with NAAMM'S "Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal Products" for
recommendations for applying and designating finishes.
B. Finish metal stairs after assembly.
C. Preparation for Shop Priming: Prepare uncoated ferrous-metal surfaces to comply with minimum
requirements indicated below for SSPC surface-preparation specifications and environmental
exposure conditions of installed products:
1. Interiors (SSPC Zone IA): SSPC SP 3, "Power Tool Cleaning."
D. Apply shop primer to prepared surfaces of metal stair components, unless otherwise indicated.
Comply with SSPC-PA 1, "Paint Application Specification No. 1," for shop painting. Primer need
not be applied to surfaces to be embedded in concrete or masonry.
+ 1. Stripe paint corners, crevices,bolts,welds, and sharp edges.
w PART 3-EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION, GENERAL
A. Fastening to In-Place Construction: Provide anchorage devices and fasteners where necessary for
securing metal stairs to in-place construction. Include threaded fasteners for concrete and
masonry inserts, through-bolts, lag bolts, and other connectors.
B. Cutting, Fitting, and Placement: Perform cutting, drilling, and fitting required for installing
w metal stairs and handrails. Set units accurately in location, alignment, and elevation, measured
from established lines and levels and free from rack.
uw C. Provide temporary bracing or anchors in formwork for items that are to be built into concrete,
masonry, or similar construction.
on D. Fit exposed connections accurately together to form hairline joints. Weld connections that are
not to be left as exposed joints but cannot be shop welded because of shipping size limitations.
Do not weld, cut, or abrade surfaces of exterior units that have been hot-dip galvanized after
ON fabrication and are for bolted or screwed field connections.
E. Field Welding: Comply with the following requirements:
on
Project No. 00058 05511 METAL STAIRS-5
OR
Renovations to Parsons Annex
Smith College
Northampton, Massachusetts
A. Provide complete stair assemblies, including metal framing, hangers, struts, clips, brackets,
bearing plates, and other components necessary to support and anchor stairs and platforms on
supporting structure.
1. Join components by welding, unless otherwise indicated.
2. Use connections that maintain structural value of joined pieces. *"
B. NAAMM Stair Standard: Comply with "Recommended Voluntary Minimum Standards for
Fixed Metal Stairs" in NAAMM AMP 510, "Metal Stairs Manual," for class of stair designated,
unless more stringent requirements are indicated.
1. Commercial class, unless otherwise indicated.
C. Shop Assembly: Preassemble stairs in shop to greatest extent possible to minimize field splicing
and assembly. Disassemble units only as necessary for shipping and handling limitations. Clearly
mark units for reassembly and coordinated installation.
D. Form exposed work true to line and level with accurate angles and surfaces and straight sharp
edges. Shear and punch metals cleanly and accurately. Remove sharp or rough areas on exposed
surfaces.
E. Ease exposed edges to a radius of approximately 1/32 inch (1 mm), unless otherwise indicated.
Form bent-metal corners to smallest radius possible without causing grain separation or otherwise
impairing work.
F. Weld connections to comply with the following:
1. Use materials and methods that minimize distortion and develop strength and corrosion
resistance of base metals.
2. Obtain fusion without undercut or overlap.
3. Remove welding flux immediately.
4. Weld exposed corners and seams continuously, unless otherwise indicated.
5. At exposed connections, finish exposed welds and surfaces smooth and blended so no
roughness shows after finishing and contour of welded surface matches that of adjacent
surface.
G. Form exposed connections with hairline joints, flush and smooth, using concealed fasteners
where possible. Use exposed fasteners of type indicated or, if not indicated, Phillips flat-head
(countersunk) screws or bolts. Locate joints where least conspicuous.
H. Fabricate joints that will be exposed to weather in a manner to exclude water, or provide weep
holes where water may accumulate.
2.6 STEEL-FRAMED STAIRS
A. Stair Framing: Fabricate stringers of structural-steel channels, plates, or a combination of both, as
indicated. Provide closures for exposed ends of stringers.
Project No. 00058 05511 METAL STAIRS-4
Renovations to Parsons Annex
Smith College
Northampton, Massachusetts
A. Metal Surfaces, General: Provide metal free from pitting, seam marks, roller marks, and other
imperfections where exposed to view on finished units. Do not use steel sheet with variations in
flatness exceeding those permitted by referenced standards for stretcher-leveled sheet.
B. Steel Plates, Shapes, and Bars: ASTM A 36/A 36M.
C. Uncoated, Cold-Rolled Steel Sheet: Commercial quality, complying with ASTM A 366/A 366M;
or structural quality, complying with ASTM A 611, Grade A, unless another grade is required by
design loads.
D. Welding Rods and Bare Electrodes: Select according to AWS specifications for metal alloy
welded.
2.2 FASTENERS
A. General: Provide zinc-plated fasteners with coating complying with ASTM B 633, Class Fe/Zn 25
for exterior use, and Class Fe/Zn 5 where built into exterior walls. Select fasteners for type,
grade, and class required.
B. Lag Bolts: ASME B18.2.1 (ASME B 18.2.3.8M).
C. Expansion Anchors: Anchor bolt and sleeve assembly of material indicated below with capability
to sustain, without failure, a load equal to six times the load imposed when installed in unit
masonry and equal to four times the load imposed when installed in concrete, as determined by
testing per ASTM E 488, conducted by a qualified independent testing agency.
1. Material: Carbon-steel components zinc-plated to comply with ASTM B 633,
Class Fe/Zn 5.
2.3 PAINT
A. Shop Primer for Ferrous Metal: Fast-curing, lead- and chromate-free, universal modified-alkyd
primer complying with performance requirements in FS TT-P-664, selected for good resistance to
normal atmospheric corrosion, compatibility with finish paint systems indicated, and capability to
provide a sound foundation for field-applied topcoats despite prolonged exposure.
2.4 CONCRETE FILL AND REINFORCING MATERIALS
A. Concrete Materials and Properties: Comply with requirements in Division 3 Section "Cast-in-
Place Concrete." for normal-weight, ready-mixed concrete with a minimum 28-day compressive
strength of 3000 psi(20 MPa), unless higher strengths are indicated.
2.5 FABRICATION, GENERAL
so
Project No. 00058 05511 METAL STAIRS-3
Renovations to Parsons Annex
Smith College
Northampton, Massachusetts
A. Shop Drawings: Show fabrication and installation details for metal stairs. Include plans,
elevations, sections, and details of metal stairs and their connections. Show anchorage and
accessory items. Provide templates for anchors and bolts specified for installation under other
Sections.
1. For installed products indicated to comply with design loads, include structural analysis
data signed and sealed by the qualified professional engineer responsible for their
preparation.
.we
B. Welding Certificates: Copies of certificates for welding procedures and personnel.
C. Qualification Data: For firms and persons specified in "Quality Assurance" Article to
demonstrate their capabilities and experience. Include lists of completed projects with project
names and addresses, names and addresses of architects and owners, and other information
specified.
M,
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Installer Qualifications: Arrange for metal stairs specified in this Section to be fabricated and
installed by the same firm.
B. Professional Engineer Qualifications: A professional engineer who is legally qualified to practice
in jurisdiction where Project is located and who is experienced in providing engineering services
of the kind indicated. Engineering services are defined as those performed for installations of
metal stairs (including handrails and railing systems) that are similar to those indicated for this
Project in material, design, and extent.
C. Fabricator Qualifications: A firm experienced in producing metal stairs similar to those indicated
for this Project and with a record of successful in-service performance, as well as sufficient
production capacity to produce required units.
D. Welding: Qualify procedures and personnel according to AWS D1.1, "Structural Welding Code-
Steel," and AWS D 1.3, "Structural Welding Code--Sheet Steel."
1.6 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate installation of anchorages for metal stairs. Furnish setting drawings, templates, and
directions for installing anchorages, including sleeves, concrete inserts, anchor bolts, and items
with integral anchors, that are to be embedded in concrete or masonry. Deliver such items to
Project site in time for installation.
.R
PART 2-PRODUCTS
2.1 FERROUS METALS
.p
Project No. 00058 05511 METAL STAIRS-2
a.
IN
Renovations to Parsons Annex
Smith College
40 Northampton, Massachusetts
SECTION 05511 -METAL STAIRS
go
PART 1 -GENERAL
RM
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
on A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
W A. This Section includes the following:
1. Preassembled steel stairs with concrete-filled treads.
B. Related Sections include the following:
1. Division 3 Section"Cast-in-Place Concrete" for concrete fill for stair treads and platforms.
2. Division 5 Section "Ornamental Metal" for metal handrails attached to metal stairs.
3. Division 9 Section"Wood Flooring" for wood treads and landings.
A.
1.3 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. Structural Performance: Provide metal stairs capable of withstanding the following structural
loads without exceeding the allowable design working stress of the materials involved, including
anchors and connections. Apply each load to produce the maximum stress in each component of
metal stairs.
1. Treads and Platforms of Metal Stairs: Capable of withstanding a uniform load of 100
lbf/sq. ft. (4.79 kN/sq. m) or a concentrated load of 300 lbf(1.33 kN) on an area of 4 sq.
in. (25.8 sq. cm),whichever produces the greater stress.
"a 2. Stair Framing: Capable of withstanding stresses resulting from loads specified above in
addition to stresses resulting from railing system loads.
3. Limit deflection of treads, platforms, and framing members to L/360 or 1/4 inch (6.4
am mm),whichever is less.
B. Structural Performance of Handrails and Railings: Provide handrails and railings complying with
requirements in ASTM E 985 for structural performance, based on testing performed according
to ASTM E 894 and ASTM E 935.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
Project No. 00058 05511 METAL STAIRS-1
an
Renovations to Parsons Annex
Smith College
w� Northampton, Massachusetts
B. Touchup Painting: Cleaning and touchup painting of field welds, bolted connections, and
abraded areas of shop paint are specified in Division 9 Section"Painting."
C. Galvanized Surfaces: Clean field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas and repair
galvanizing to comply with ASTM A 780.
END OF SECTION 05500
No
W
qW
aw
w
Project No. 00058 05500 METAL FABRICATIONS-9
am
Renovations to Parsons Annex
Smith College
Northampton, Massachusetts No
3.2 SETTING BEARING AND LEVELING PLATES
A. Clean concrete and masonry bearing surfaces of bond-reducing materials, and roughen to
improve bond to surfaces. Clean bottom surface of plates.
B. Set bearing and leveling plates on wedges, shims, or leveling nuts. After bearing members have
been positioned and plumbed, tighten anchor bolts. Do not remove wedges or shims but, if
protruding, cut off flush with edge of bearing plate before packing with grout.
1. Use nonshrink nonmetalic grout, unless otherwise indicated.
2. Pack grout solidly between bearing surfaces and plates to ensure that no voids remain.
3.3 INSTALLING MISCELLANEOUS FRAMING AND SUPPORTS
A. General: Install framing and supports to comply with requirements of items being supported,
including manufacturers' written instructions and requirements indicated on Shop Drawings, if
any.
«eue
B. Anchor supports for operable partitions securely to and rigidly brace from building structure.
C. Support steel girders on solid grouted masonry, concrete, or steel columns. Secure girders with
anchor bolts embedded in grouted masonry or concrete or with bolts through top plates of pipe
columns.
D. Install columns on concrete footings with grouted baseplates. Position and grout column
baseplates as specified above for setting and grouting bearing and leveling plates.
1. Do not grout baseplates of columns supporting steel girders until girders are installed and
leveled.
3.4 INSTALLING NOSINGS,TREADS,AND THRESHOLDS
A. Install with anchorage system indicated to comply with manufacturer's written instructions.
B. Center nosings on tread widths.
C. For nosings embedded in concrete steps or curbs, align nosings flush with riser faces and level
with tread surfaces.
or
3.5 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING
A. Touchup Painting: Immediately after erection, clean field welds, bolted connections, and Wo
abraded areas of shop paint, and paint exposed areas with the same material as used for shop
painting to comply with SSPC-PA 1 for touching up shop-painted surfaces.
1. Apply by brush or spray to provide a minimum 2.0-mil(0.05-mm) dry film thickness.
Project No. 00058 05500 METAL FABRICATIONS-8
ox
Renovations to Parsons Annex
Smith College
Northampton, Massachusetts
1. ASTM A 123, for galvanizing steel and iron products.
2. ASTM A 153/A 153M, for galvanizing steel and iron hardware.
B. Preparation for Shop Priming: Prepare uncoated ferrous-metal surfaces to comply with minimum
requirements indicated below for SSPC surface-preparation specifications and environmental
exposure conditions of installed metal fabrications:
1. Exteriors(SSPC Zone 1B): SSPC-SP 6/NACE No. 3,"Commercial Blast Cleaning."
su 2. Interiors(SSPC Zone 1A): SSPC-SP 3, "Power Tool Cleaning."
C. Apply shop primer to uncoated surfaces of metal fabrications, except those with galvanized
finishes and those to be embedded in concrete, sprayed-on fireproofing, or masonry, unless
otherwise indicated. Comply with SSPC-PA 1, "Paint Application Specification No. 1," for shop
painting.
1. Stripe paint corners, crevices, bolts,welds, and sharp edges.
PART 3 -EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION, GENERAL
A. Fastening to In-Place Construction: Provide anchorage devices and fasteners where necessary for
securing metal fabrications to in-place construction. Include threaded fasteners for concrete and
masonry inserts,toggle bolts,through-bolts, lag bolts,wood screws, and other connectors.
W B. Cutting, Fitting, and Placement: Perform cutting, drilling, and fitting required for installing
metal fabrications. Set metal fabrications accurately in location, alignment, and elevation; with
edges and surfaces level, plumb, true, and free of rack; and measured from established lines and
levels.
C. Provide temporary bracing or anchors in formwork for items that are to be built into concrete,
masonry, or similar construction.
D. Fit exposed connections accurately together to form hairline joints. Weld connections that are
not to be left as exposed joints but cannot be shop welded because of shipping size limitations.
'" Do not weld, cut, or abrade surfaces of exterior units that have been hot-dip galvanized after
fabrication and are for bolted or screwed field connections.
No E. Field Welding: Comply with the following requirements:
1. Use materials and methods that minimize distortion and develop strength and corrosion
00 resistance of base metals.
2. Obtain fusion without undercut or overlap.
3. Remove welding flux immediately.
an 4. At exposed connections, finish exposed welds and surfaces smooth and blended so no
roughness shows after finishing and contour of welded surface matches that of adjacent
surface.
Project No. 00058 05500 METAL FABRICATIONS-7
No
Renovations to Parsons Annex
Smith College
Northampton, Massachusetts No
D. Fabricate steel columns for supporting steel girders and wood frame construction from steel pipe
or tube with steel baseplates and top plates as indicated. Drill baseplates and top plates for
anchor and connection bolts and weld to pipe with fillet welds all around. Make welds the same
size as pipe wall thickness, unless otherwise indicated.
1. Unless otherwise indicated, provide 1/2-inch (12-mm) baseplates with four 5/8-inch (16-
mm) anchor bolts and 1/4-inch(6-mm)top plates.
E. Galvanize miscellaneous framing and supports where indicated. , +
2.10 CAST NOSINGS,TREADS,AND THRESHOLDS
A. Fabricate units of metal indicated below in sizes and configurations indicated and in lengths
necessary to accurately fit openings or conditions. Provide units with an integral abrasive finish
consisting of aluminum oxide, silicon carbide, or a combination of both.
1. Metal: Cast gray iron, Class 20.
B. Configurations: Provide units in the following configurations, unless otherwise indicated:
1. Nosings: Cross-hatched units, 4 inches (100 mm)wide with 1-inch (25-mm) lip, for casting
into concrete steps.
C. Provide anchors for embedding units in concrete, either integral or applied to units, as standard
with manufacturer.
D. Apply bituminous paint to concealed bottoms, sides, and edges of units set into concrete.
E. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering
products that may be incorporated into the Work include,but are not limited to, the following:
1. American Safety Tread Co., Inc.
2. Balco/Metalines, Inc.
3. Granite State Casting Co.
4. Safe-T-Metal Co. "
2.11 FINISHES, GENERAL
A. Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal Products" for
recommendations for applying and designating finishes.
B. Finish metal fabrications after assembly.
2.12 STEEL AND IRON FINISHES
A. Galvanizing: Hot-dip galvanize items as indicated to comply with applicable standard listed WR
below:
no
Project No. 00058 05500 METAL FABRICATIONS-6
.W
go
Renovations to Parsons Annex
Smith College
Northampton, Massachusetts
1. Use materials and methods that minimize distortion and develop strength and corrosion
resistance of base metals.
2. Obtain fusion without undercut or overlap.
3. Remove welding flux immediately.
4. At exposed connections, finish exposed welds and surfaces smooth and blended so no
roughness shows after finishing and contour of welded surface matches that of adjacent
surface.
E. Provide for anchorage of type indicated; coordinate with supporting structure. Fabricate and
space anchoring devices to secure metal fabrications rigidly in place and to support indicated
loads.
F. Cut, reinforce, drill, and tap metal fabrications as indicated to receive finish hardware, screws,
and similar items.
on
G. Fabricate joints that will be exposed to weather in a manner to exclude water, or provide weep
holes where water may accumulate.
H. Remove sharp or rough areas on exposed traffic surfaces.
I. Form exposed connections with hairline joints, flush and smooth, using concealed fasteners
where possible. Use exposed fasteners of type indicated or, if not indicated, Phillips flat-head
(countersunk) screws or bolts. Locate joints where least conspicuous.
2.8 LOOSE BEARING AND LEVELING PLATES
A. Provide loose bearing and leveling plates for steel items bearing on masonry or concrete
construction. Drill plates to receive anchor bolts and for grouting.
B. Galvanize plates after fabrication.
2.9 MISCELLANEOUS FRAMING AND SUPPORTS
w
A. General: Provide steel framing and supports indicated and as necessary to complete the Work.
B. Fabricate units from structural-steel shapes, plates, and bars of welded construction, unless
otherwise indicated. Fabricate to sizes, shapes, and profiles indicated and as necessary to receive
adjacent construction retained by framing and supports. Cut, drill, and tap units to receive
hardware, hangers, and similar items.
C. Fabricate steel girders for wood frame construction from continuous steel shapes of sizes
a. indicated.
1. Provide bearing plates welded to beams where indicated.
2. Drill girders and plates for field-bolted connections where indicated.
3. Where wood nailers are attached to girders with bolts or lag screws, drill holes at 24 inches
(600 min) o.c.
Project No. 00058 05500 METAL FABRICATIONS-5
Renovations to Parsons Annex
Smith College
Northampton, Massachusetts
C. Anchor Bolts: ASTM F 1554, Grade 36.
D. Machine Screws: ASME B18.6.3 (ASME B18.6.7M). **
E. Lag Bolts: ASME B 18.2.1 (ASME B 18.2.3.8M).
F. Wood Screws: Flat head, carbon steel,ASME B 18.6.1.
G. Plain Washers: Round, carbon steel,ASME B18.22.1 (ASME B18.22M).
H. Lock Washers: Helical, spring type, carbon steel,ASME B18.21.1 (ASME B18.21.2M).
I. Expansion Anchors: Anchor bolt and sleeve assembly of material indicated below with capability
to sustain, without failure, a load equal to six times the load imposed when installed in unit
masonry and equal to four times the load imposed when installed in concrete, as determined by
testing per ASTM E 488, conducted by a qualified independent testing agency.
1. Material: Carbon-steel components zinc-plated to comply with ASTM B 633,
Class Fe/Zn 5.
2.5 GROUT
A. Nonshrink, Nonmetallic Grout: Factory-packaged, nonstaining, noncorrosive, nongaseous grout
complying with ASTM C 1107. Provide grout specifically recommended by manufacturer for
interior and exterior applications.
2.6 CONCRETE FILL
A. Concrete Materials and Properties: Comply with requirements in Division 3 Section "Cast-in-
Place Concrete" for normal-weight, air-entrained, ready-mix concrete with a minimum 28-day
compressive strength of 3000 psi(20 MPa), unless otherwise indicated.
2.7 FABRICATION, GENERAL
A. Shop Assembly: Preassemble items in shop to greatest extent possible to minimize field splicing
and assembly. Disassemble units only as necessary for shipping and handling limitations. Use
connections that maintain structural value of joined pieces. Clearly mark units for reassembly
and coordinated installation.
B. Shear and punch metals cleanly and accurately. Remove burrs.
C. Ease exposed edges to a radius of approximately 1/32 inch (1 mm), unless otherwise indicated.
Form bent-metal corners to smallest radius possible without causing grain separation or otherwise
impairing work.
D. Weld corners and seams continuously to comply with the following:
Project No. 00058 05500 METAL FABRICATIONS-4
Renovations to Parsons Annex
Smith College
Northampton, Massachusetts
2.2 FERROUS METALS
A. Steel Plates, Shapes, and Bars: ASTM A 36/A 36M.
B. Steel Tubing: Cold-formed steel tubing complying with ASTM A 500.
C. Steel Pipe: ASTM A 53, standard weight (Schedule 40), unless another weight is indicated or
required by structural loads.
D. Malleable-Iron Castings: ASTM A 47, Grade 32510(ASTM A 47M, Grade 22010).
E. Gray-Iron Castings: ASTM A 48, Class 30 (ASTM A 48M, Class 200), unless another class is
indicated or required by structural loads.
F. Cast-in-Place Anchors in Concrete: Anchors of type indicated below, fabricated from corrosion-
resistant materials capable of sustaining, without failure, the load imposed within a safety factor
of 4, as determined by testing per ASTM E 488, conducted by a qualified independent testing
agency.
1. Threaded or wedge type; galvanized ferrous castings, either ASTM A 47 (ASTM A 47M)
malleable iron or ASTM A 27/A 27M cast steel. Provide bolts, washers, and shims as
needed, hot-dip galvanized per ASTM A 153/A 153M.
G. Welding Rods and Bare Electrodes: Select according to AWS specifications for metal alloy
• welded.
2.3 PAINT
A. Shop Primer for Ferrous Metal: Fast-curing, lead- and chromate-free, universal modified-alkyd
primer complying with performance requirements in FS TT-P-664; selected for good resistance to
normal atmospheric corrosion, compatibility with finish paint systems indicated, and capability to
provide a sound foundation for field-applied topcoats despite prolonged exposure.
B. Galvanizing Repair Paint: High-zinc-dust-content paint for regalvanizing welds in steel, complying
with SSPC-Paint 20.
C. Bituminous Paint: Cold-applied asphalt mastic complying with SSPC-Paint 12, except containing
no asbestos fibers, or cold-applied asphalt emulsion complying with ASTM D 1187.
2.4 FASTENERS
A. General: Provide Type 304 or 316 stainless-steel fasteners for exterior use and zinc-plated
fasteners with coating complying with ASTM B 633, Class Fe/Zn 5, where built into exterior
walls. Select fasteners for type,grade, and class required.
B. Bolts and Nuts: Regular hexagon-head bolts, ASTM A 307, Grade A (ASTM F 568M, Property
Class 4.6);with hex nuts,ASTM A 563 (ASTM A 563M); and,where indicated, flat washers.
A.
Project No. 00058 05500 METAL FABRICATIONS-3
am
Renovations to Parsons Annex
Smith College
Northampton, Massachusetts aw
D. Qualification Data: For firms and persons specified in "Quality Assurance" Article to
demonstrate their capabilities and experience. Include lists of completed projects with project
names and addresses, names and addresses of architects and owners, and other information
specified.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Fabricator Qualifications: A firm experienced in producing metal fabrications similar to those W
indicated for this Project and with a record of successful in-service performance, as well as
sufficient production capacity to produce required units.
up
B. Welding: Qualify procedures and personnel according to the following:
1. AWS D1.1, "Structural Welding Code-Steel."
2. AWS D 1.3, "Structural Welding Code--Sheet Steel."
3. Certify that each welder has satisfactorily passed AWS qualification tests for welding
processes involved and, if pertinent, has undergone recertification.
1.5 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Field Measurements: Where metal fabrications are indicated to fit walls and other construction,
verify dimensions by field measurements before fabrication and indicate measurements on Shop
Drawings. Coordinate fabrication schedule with construction progress to avoid delaying the
Work.
1. Established Dimensions: Where field measurements cannot be made without delaying the ,.
Work, establish dimensions and proceed with fabricating metal fabrications without field
measurements. Coordinate construction to ensure that actual dimensions correspond to
established dimensions. Allow for trimming and fitting. ,W
1.6 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate installation of anchorages for metal fabrications. Furnish setting drawings, templates,
and directions for installing anchorages, including sleeves, concrete inserts, anchor bolts, and
items with integral anchors, that are to be embedded in concrete or masonry. Deliver such items
to Project site in time for installation.
PART 2-PRODUCTS
2.1 METALS, GENERAL
A. Metal Surfaces, General: For metal fabrications exposed to view in the completed Work, provide
materials with smooth, flat surfaces without blemishes. Do not use materials with exposed
pitting, seam marks, roller marks, rolled trade names, or roughness.
Project No. 00058 05500 METAL FABRICATIONS-2
go
Renovations to Parsons Annex
Smith College
go Northampton, Massachusetts
SECTION 05500-METAL FABRICATIONS
90
PART 1 ,GENERAL
No
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
Im A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
I'M
1.2 SUMMARY
** A. This Section includes the following:
1. Loose bearing and leveling plates.
2. Loose steel lintels.
3. Steel girders for supporting wood frame construction.
4. Steel pipe columns for supporting wood frame construction.
5. Steel framing and supports for countertops.
6. Steel framing and supports for applications where framing and supports are not specified
in other Sections.
7. Cast nosings and treads.
MR
B. Related Sections include the following:
1. Division 5 Section "Metal Stairs" for metal-framed stairs with metal pan, metal plate, or
grating treads.
2. Division 5 Section"Ornamental Metal" for ornamental metal items fabricated from custom
components.
3. Division 6 Section "Rough Carpentry" for metal framing anchors and other rough
hardware.
"' 1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For the following:
1. Cast nosings and treads.
2. Paint products.
3. Grout.
B. Shop Drawings: Detail fabrication and erection of each metal fabrication indicated. Include
plans, elevations, sections, and details of metal fabrications and their connections. Show
a anchorage and accessory items.
1. Provide templates for anchors and bolts specified for installation under other Sections.
C. Welding Certificates: Copies of certificates for welding procedures and personnel.
Project No. 00058 05500 METAL FABRICATIONS-1
rw
Renovations to Parsons Annex
Smith College
Northampton, Massachusetts rw
B. Excess Masonry Waste: Remove excess, clean masonry waste that cannot be used as fill, as
described above, and other masonry waste, and legally dispose of off Owner's property.
END OF SECTION 04810
Project No. 00058 04810 UNIT MASONRY ASSEMBLIES-10
Renovations to Parsons Annex
Smith College
Northampton, Massachusetts
D. Cut joints flush for masonry walls to receive plaster or other direct-applied finishes (other than
paint), unless otherwise indicated.
w
3.6 MASONRY JOINT REINFORCEMENT
A. General: Provide continuous masonry joint reinforcement as indicated. Install entire length of
longitudinal side rods in mortar with a minimum cover of 5/8 inch (16 mm) on exterior side of
walls, 1/2 inch(13 mm)elsewhere. Lap reinforcement a minimum of 6 inches (150 mm).
1. Space reinforcement not more than 16 inches (406 mm)o.c.
3.7 REPAIRING, POINTING,AND CLEANING
ow A. Remove and replace masonry units that are loose, chipped, broken, stained, or otherwise
damaged or that do not match adjoining units. Install new units to match adjoining units; install
in fresh mortar,pointed to eliminate evidence of replacement.
sm
B. Pointing: During the tooling of joints, enlarge voids and holes, except weep holes, and
completely fill with mortar. Point up joints, including corners, openings, and adjacent
4w construction, to provide a neat, uniform appearance. Prepare joints for sealant application.
C. In-Progress Cleaning: Clean unit masonry as work progresses by dry brushing to remove mortar
fins and smears before tooling joints.
D. Final Cleaning: After mortar is thoroughly set and cured, clean exposed masonry as follows:
on 1. Remove large mortar particles by hand with wooden paddles and nonmetallic scrape hoes
or chisels.
2. Test cleaning methods on sample wall panel; leave one-half of panel uncleaned for
comparison purposes. Obtain Architect's approval of sample cleaning before proceeding
with cleaning of masonry.
3. Protect adjacent stone and nonmasonry surfaces from contact with cleaner by covering
them with liquid strippable masking agent, polyethylene film or waterproof masking tape.
4. Wet wall surfaces with water before applying cleaners; remove cleaners promptly by rinsing
the surfaces thoroughly with clear water.
5. Clean brick by the bucket-and-brush hand-cleaning method described in BIA Technical
Notes No. 20, using job-mixed detergent solution.
6. Clean masonry with a proprietary acidic cleaner applied according to manufacturer's
written instructions.
7. Clean concrete masonry by cleaning method indicated in NCMA TEK 8-2 applicable to
type of stain on exposed surfaces.
on
3.8 MASONRY WASTE DISPOSAL
Aw
A. Recycling: Unless otherwise indicated, excess masonry materials are Contractor's property. At
completion of unit masonry work, remove from Project site.
on
Project No. 00058 04810 UNIT MASONRY ASSEMBLIES-9
Renovations to Parsons Annex
Smith College
Northampton, Massachusetts
C. For vertical alignment of exposed head joints, do not vary from plumb by more than 1/4 inch in
10 feet(6 mm in 3 m), nor 1/2 inch (12 mm) maximum.
WW
3.4 LAYING MASONRY WALLS
WW
A. Lay out walls in advance for accurate spacing of surface bond patterns with uniform joint
thicknesses and for accurate location of openings, movement-type joints, returns, and offsets.
Avoid using less-than-half-size units, particularly at corners, jambs, and, where possible, at other
locations.
B. Bond Pattern for Exposed Masonry: Lay exposed masonry in the following bond pattern; do not
use units with less than nominal 4-inch(100-mm) horizontal face dimensions at corners or jambs.
1. One-half running bond with vertical joint in each course centered on units in courses
above and below.
C. Lay concealed masonry with all units in a wythe in running bond or bonded by lapping not less
than 2 inches (50 mm). Bond and interlock each course of each wythe at corners. Do not use
units with less than nominal 4-inch (100-mm)horizontal face dimensions at corners or jambs.
D. Stopping and Resuming Work: In each course, rack back one-half-unit length for one-half
running bond or one-third-unit length for one-third running bond; do not tooth. Clean exposed
surfaces of set masonry, wet clay masonry units lightly if required, and remove loose masonry
units and mortar before laying fresh masonry.
E. Built-in Work: As construction progresses, build in items specified under this and other Sections
of the Specifications. Fill in solidly with masonry around built-in items.
3.5 MORTAR BEDDING AND JOINTING
A. Lay hollow masonry units as follows:
1. With full mortar coverage on horizontal and vertical face shells.
2. Bed webs in mortar in starting course on footings and in all courses of piers, columns, and
pilasters, and where adjacent to cells or cavities to be filled with grout.
3. For starting course on footings where cells are not grouted, spread out full mortar bed,
including areas under cells.
B. Lay solid brick-size masonry units with completely filled bed and head joints; butter ends with
sufficient mortar to fill head joints and shove into place. Do not deeply furrow bed joints or
slush head joints.
1. At cavity walls, bevel beds away from cavity, to minimize mortar protrusions into cavity. As
work progresses, trowel mortar fins protruding into cavity flat against the cavity face of the
brick.
C. Tool exposed joints slightly concave when thumbprint hard, using a jointer larger than the joint
thickness, unless otherwise indicated.
Project No. 00058 04810 UNIT MASONRY ASSEMBLIES-8
Renovations to Parsons Annex
Smith College
Northampton, Massachusetts
2. For carbon-black pigment and portland cement-lime mortar, not more than 2 percent.
PART 3 -EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
a. A. Examine conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation
tolerances and other conditions affecting performance.
1. Verify that foundations are within tolerances specified.
2. Verify that reinforcing dowels are properly placed.
3. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
B. Before installation, examine rough-in and built-in construction to verify actual locations of piping
connections.
40 3.2 INSTALLATION, GENERAL
A. Thickness: Build cavity and composite walls and other masonry construction to the full thickness
■w shown. Build single-wytbe walls to the actual widths of masonry units, using units of widths
indicated.
go B. Leave openings for equipment to be installed before completing masonry. After installing
equipment, complete masonry to match the construction immediately adjacent to the opening.
C. Cut masonry units with motor-driven saws to provide clean, sharp, unchipped edges. Cut units as
required to provide a continuous pattern and to fit adjoining construction. Where possible, use
full-size units without cutting. Allow units cut with water-cooled saws to dry before placing,
unless wetting of units is specified. Install cut units with cut surfaces and, where possible, cut
edges concealed.
D. Select and arrange units for exposed unit masonry to produce a uniform blend of colors and
textures.
E. Matching Existing Masonry: Match coursing,bonding, color, and texture of existing masonry.
we
F. Wetting of Brick: Wet brick before laying if the initial rate of absorption exceeds 30 g/30 sq. in.
(30 g/194 sq. cm) per minute when tested per ASTM C 67. Allow units to absorb water so they
W are damp but not wet at the time of laying.
3.3 CONSTRUCTION TOLERANCES
A. Comply with tolerances in ACI 530.1/ASCE 6/TMS 602 and the following:
B. For conspicuous vertical lines, such as external corners, door jambs, reveals, and expansion an
control joints, do not vary from plumb by more than 1/4 inch in 20 feet(6 mm in 6 m), nor 1/2
inch (12 mm) maximum.
OR
we
Project No. 00058 04810 UNIT MASONRY ASSEMBLIES-7
Renovations to Parsons Annex
Smith College
Northampton, Massachusetts
1. Copper: 10-oz./sq. ft. (3-kg/sq. m) weight or 0.0135 inch (0.34 mm) thick for fully
concealed flashing; 16-oz./sq. ft. (5-kg/sq. m) weight or 0.0216 inch (0.55 mm) thick
elsewhere.
2. Fabricate through-wall metal flashing embedded in masonry from sheet metal indicated
above and with ribs at 3-inch (75-mm) intervals along length of flashing to provide an
integral mortar bond.
B. Contractor's Option for Concealed Flashing: For flashing partly exposed to the exterior, use
metal flashing specified above. For flashing not exposed to the exterior, use [one of] the ..
following, unless otherwise indicated:
1. Copper-Laminated Flashing: Manufacturer's standard laminated flashing consisting of 7-
oz./sq. ft. (2-1(g/sq. m) sheet copper bonded with asphalt between 2 layers of glass-fiber
cloth. Use only where flashing is fully concealed in masonry.
2. Asphalt-Coated Copper Flashing: Manufacturer's standard product consisting of 7-oz./sq. .�
ft. (2-kg/sq. m) sheet copper coated with flexible asphalt. Use only where flashing is fully
concealed in masonry.
C. Solder and Sealants for Sheet Metal Flashings: As specified in Division 7 Section "Sheet Metal
Flashing and Trim."
D. Adhesives, Primers, and Seam Tapes for Flashings: Flashing manufacturer's standard products or
products recommended by the flashing manufacturer for bonding flashing sheets to each other
and to substrates.
2.9 MORTAR AND GROUT MIXES
A. General: Do not use admixtures, including pigments, air-entraining agents, accelerators,
retarders, water-repellent agents, antifreeze compounds, or other admixtures, unless otherwise
indicated. WM
1. Do not use calcium chloride in mortar or grout.
2. Add cold-weather admixture (if used) at the same rate for all mortar, regardless of weather
conditions, to ensure that mortar color is consistent.
B. Preblended, Dry Mortar Mix: Furnish dry mortar ingredients in the form of a preblended mix.
Measure quantities by weight to ensure accurate proportions, and thoroughly blend ingredients
before delivering to Project site.
C. Mortar for Unit Masonry: Comply with ASTM C 270, Proportion Specification.
D. Mortar for Unit Masonry: Comply with ASTM C 270, Property Specification.
1. Limit cementitious materials in mortar to portland cement, mortar cement, and lime. ■"
E. Pigmented Mortar: Select and proportion pigments with other ingredients to produce color to
match existing mortar. Limit pigments to the following percentages of cement content by weight: w.
1. For mineral-oxide pigments and portland cement-lime mortar, not more than 10 percent.
.W
Project No. 00058 04810 UNIT MASONRY ASSEMBLIES-6
Renovations to Parsons Annex
Smith College
Northampton, Massachusetts
A. General: Provide ties and anchors, specified in subsequent articles, made from materials that
comply with this Article, unless otherwise indicated.
B. Hot-Dip Galvanized Carbon-Steel Wire: ASTM A 82;with ASTM A 153, Class B-2 coating.
ew C. Galvanized Steel Sheet: ASTM A 653/A 653M, G60 (2180), commercial-quality, steel sheet zinc
coated by hot-dip process on continuous lines before fabrication.
D. Steel Plates, Shapes, and Bars: ASTM A 36/A 36M.
2.6 BENT WIRE TIES
A. General: Rectangular units with closed ends and not less than 4 inches(100 mm)wide. Z-shaped
ties with ends bent 90 degrees to provide hooks not less than 2 inches(50 mm)long may be used
for masonry constructed from solid units or hollow units laid with cells horizontal.
2.7 MISCELLANEOUS ANCHORS
A. Unit Type Inserts in Concrete: Cast-iron or malleable-iron inserts of type and size indicated.
B. Anchor Bolts: Steel bolts complying with ASTM A 307, Grade A (ASTM F 568, Property
Class 4.6); with ASTM A 563 (ASTM A 563M) hex nuts and, where indicated, flat washers; hot-
.n dip galvanized to comply with ASTM A 153, Class C; of diameter and length indicated and in the
following configurations:
1. Headed bolts.
C. Postinstalled Anchors: Anchors as described below, with capability to sustain, without failure,
load imposed within factors of safety indicated, as determined by testing per ASTM E 488,
conducted by a qualified independent testing agency.
1. Type: Chemical anchors.
2. Type: Expansion anchors.
3. Corrosion Protection: Stainless-steel components complying with ASTM F 593 and
ASTM F 594, Alloy Group 1 or 2 (ASTM F 738M and ASTM F 836M, Alloy Group 1 or
4) for bolts and nuts;ASTM A 666 or ASTM A 276,Type 304 or 316, for anchors.
4. For Postinstalled Anchors in Concrete: Capability to sustain, without failure, a load equal
to four times the loads imposed.
5. For Postinstalled Anchors in Grouted Masonry Units: Capability to sustain, without
failure, a load equal to six times the loads imposed.
2.8 EMBEDDED FLASHING MATERIALS
A. Metal Flashing: Fabricate from the following metal complying with requirements specified in
Division 7 Section"Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim" and below:
Project No. 00058 04810 UNIT MASONRY ASSEMBLIES-5
WW
Renovations to Parsons Annex
Smith College
Northampton, Massachusetts wo
D. Masonry Cement: ASTM C 91.
1. For pigmented mortar, use a colored cement formulation as required to produce the color
indicated or, if not indicated, as selected from manufacturer's standard formulations.
a. Pigments shall not exceed 10 percent of portland cement by weight for mineral •
oxides nor 2 percent for carbon black.
b. Pigments shall not exceed 5 percent of mortar cement or masonry cement by weight
for mineral oxides nor 1 percent for carbon black.
2. For colored-aggregate mortar, use natural color or white cement as necessary to produce
required mortar color.
E. Aggregate for Mortar: ASTM C 144; except for joints less than 1/4 inch (6.5 mm) thick, use
aggregate graded with 100 percent passing the No. 16 (1.18-mm)sieve.
F. Aggregate for Grout: ASTM C 404.
G. Mortar Pigments: Natural and synthetic iron oxides and chromium oxides, compounded for use
in mortar mixes. Use only pigments with a record of satisfactory performance in masonry mortar.
H. Water: Potable.
I. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:
1. Colored Portland Cement-Lime Mix:
a. Eaglebond; Blue Circle Cement.
b. Centurion Colorbond PL; Lafarge Corporation.
C. Lehigh Custom Color Portland/Lime; Lehigh Portland Cement Co.
2. Colored Masonry Cement: .w
a. Centurion Colorbond; Lafarge Corporation.
b. Lehigh Custom Color Masonry Cement; Lehigh Portland Cement Co.
3. Mortar Pigments:
a. Centurion Pigments; Lafarge Corporation.
w.
2.4 MASONRY JOINT REINFORCEMENT
A. General: ASTM A 951 and as follows:
1. Hot-dip galvanized, carbon-steel wire for exterior walls.
2. Wire Size for Side Rods: W1.7 or 0.148-inch (3.8-mm) diameter.
3. Wire Size for Cross Rods:W1.7 or 0.148-inch (3.8-mm) diameter.
2.5 TIES AND ANCHORS, GENERAL `
Project No. 00058 04810 UNIT MASONRY ASSEMBLIES-4
WE
Renovations to Parsons Annex
Smith College
"M Northampton, Massachusetts
1. When ambient temperature exceeds 100 deg F (38 deg C), or 90 deg F (32 deg C) with a
wind velocity greater than 8 mph (13 km/h), do not spread mortar beds more than
I" 48 inches (1200 mm) ahead of masonry. Set masonry units within one minute of
spreading mortar.
ws
PART 2-PRODUCTS
2.1 CONCRETE MASONRY UNITS
A. General: Provide shapes indicated and as follows:
B. Concrete Masonry Units: ASTM C 90 and as follows:
1. Weight Classification: Lightweight.
2. Provide Type I, moisture-controlled units.
3. Size (Width): Manufactured to the following dimensions:
a. 8 inches (203 mm) nominal; 7-5/8 inches (194 mm) actual.
4. Exposed Faces: Manufacturer's standard color and texture, unless otherwise indicated.
OR C. Concrete Building Brick: ASTM C 55 and as follows:
1. Provide Type I, moisture-controlled units.
2. Size: Manufactured to the following actual dimensions:
w
a. Modular: 3-5/8 inches (92 mm)wide by 2-1/4 inches (57 mm) high by 7-5/8 inches
(194 mm)long.
3. Exposed Faces: Manufacturer's standard color and texture, unless otherwise indicated.
"! 2.2 BRICK
A. General: Use salvage brick from demolition.
1. Where salvaged brick cannot be used, provide face brick matching color range, texture,
and size of existing adjacent brickwork.
w
2.3 MORTAR AND GROUT MATERIALS
A. Portland Cement: ASTM C 150, Type I or II, except Type III may be used for cold-weather
construction. Provide natural color or white cement as required to produce mortar color
indicated.
B. Hydrated Lime: ASTM C 207,Type S.
C. Portland Cement-Lime Mix: Packaged blend of portland cement complying with ASTM C 150,
Type I or Type III, and hydrated lime complying with ASTM C 207.
Project No. 00058 04810 UNIT MASONRY ASSEMBLIES-3
om
Renovations to Parsons Annex
Smith College
Northampton, Massachusetts RW
A. Source Limitations for Masonry Units: Obtain exposed masonry units of a uniform texture and
color, or a uniform blend within the ranges accepted for these characteristics, through one source
from a single manufacturer for each product required. Im
B. Source Limitations for Mortar Materials: Obtain mortar ingredients of a uniform quality,
including color for exposed masonry, from one manufacturer for each cementitious component ..
and from one source or producer for each aggregate.
1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE,AND HANDLING
A. Store masonry units on elevated platforms in a dry location. If units are not stored in an enclosed
location, cover tops and sides of stacks with waterproof sheeting, securely tied. If units become .�
wet, do not install until they are dry.
1. Protect Type I concrete masonry units from moisture absorption so that, at the time of
installation, the moisture content is not more than the maximum allowed at the time of
delivery.
B. Store cementitious materials on elevated platforms, under cover, and in a dry location. Do not
use cementitious materials that have become damp.
C. Store aggregates where grading and other required characteristics can be maintained and
contamination avoided.
D. Store masonry accessories, including metal items, to prevent corrosion and accumulation of dirt
and oil.
1.7 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Protection of Masonry: During construction, cover tops of walls, projections, and sills with .�
waterproof sheeting at end of each day's work. Cover partially completed masonry when
construction is not in progress.
B. Stain Prevention: Prevent grout, mortar, and soil from staining the face of masonry to be left
exposed or painted. Immediately remove grout, mortar, and soil that come in contact with such
masonry.
1. Protect base of walls from rain-splashed mud and from mortar splatter by coverings spread
on ground and over wall surface.
2. Protect sills,ledges, and projections from mortar droppings.
3. Protect surfaces of window and door frames, as well as similar products with painted and
integral finishes, from mortar droppings.
C. Hot-Weather Requirements: Protect unit masonry work when temperature and humidity
conditions produce excessive evaporation of water from mortar and grout. Provide artificial
shade and wind breaks and use cooled materials as required.
Project No. 00058 04810 UNIT MASONRY ASSEMBLIES-2
OR
Renovations to Parsons Annex
Smith College
W Northampton, Massachusetts
SECTION 04810-UNIT MASONRY ASSEMBLIES
PART 1 -GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
ON
1.2 SUMMARY
ON A. This Section includes unit masonry assemblies consisting of the following:
1. Concrete masonry units.
in 2. Concrete brick.
3. Face brick.
4. Building(common)brick.
W 5. Mortar and grout.
6. Reinforcing steel.
7. Masonry joint reinforcement.
�. 8. Ties and anchors.
9. Embedded flashing.
10. Miscellaneous masonry accessories.
11. Repointing existing brick chimneys and foundations.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
on
A. Reinforced Masonry: Masonry containing reinforcing steel in grouted cells.
go
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each different masonry unit, accessory, and other manufactured product
specified.
B. Samples for Initial Selection: For the following:
1. Colored mortar Samples showing the full range of colors available.
2. Full-size units for each different exposed masonry unit required, showing the full range of
exposed colors, textures, and dimensions to be expected in the completed construction.
3. Weep holes/vents in color to match mortar color.
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
on
Project No. 00058 04810 UNIT MASONRY ASSEMBLIES-1
Renovations to Parsons Annex
Smith College
W Northampton, Massachusetts
3. Curing Compound: Apply uniformly in continuous operation by power spray or roller
according to manufacturer's written instructions. Recoat areas subjected to heavy rainfall
W within three hours after initial application. Maintain continuity of coating and repair
damage during curing period.
on
3.10 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
"a A. Testing Agency: Engage a qualified independent testing and inspecting agency to sample
materials, perform tests, and submit test reports during concrete placement according to
requirements specified in this Article. Perform tests according to ACI 301.
1. Testing Frequency: Obtain one composite sample for each day's pour of each concrete mix
exceeding 5 cu. yd. (4 cu. m), but less than 25 cu. yd. (19 cu. m), plus one set for each
go
additional 50 cu.yd. (38 cu. m) or fraction thereof.
3.11 REPAIRS
A. Remove and replace concrete that does not comply with requirements in this Section.
END OF SECTION 03301
w■
we
an
Project No. 00058 03301 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE-7
4W
Renovations to Parsons Annex
Smith College
Northampton, Massachusetts
1. Do not further disturb surfaces before starting finishing operations.
C. Float Finish: Apply float finish to surfaces indicated, to surfaces to receive trowel finish, and to
floor and slab surfaces to be covered with fluid-applied or sheet waterproofing, built-up or
membrane roofing, or sand-bed terrazzo.
D. Trowel Finish: Apply a hard trowel finish to surfaces indicated and to floor and slab surfaces
exposed to view or to be covered with resilient flooring, carpet, ceramic or quarry tile set over a
cleavage membrane, paint, or another thin film-finish coating system. ...
E. Nonslip Broom Finish: Apply a nonslip broom finish to surfaces indicated and to exterior
concrete platforms, steps, and ramps. Immediately after float finishing, slightly roughen
trafficked surface by brooming with fiber-bristle broom perpendicular to main traffic route.
3.8 TOLERANCES
A. Comply with ACI 117, "Specifications for Tolerances for Concrete Construction and Materials."
3.9 CONCRETE PROTECTION AND CURING
A. General: Protect freshly placed concrete from premature drying and excessive cold or hot
temperatures. Comply with ACI 306.1 for cold-weather protection, and follow recommendations
in ACI 305R for hot-weather protection during curing.
B. Evaporation Retarder: Apply evaporation retarder to concrete surfaces if hot, dry, or windy
conditions cause moisture loss approaching 0.2 lb/sq. ft. x h (1 kg/sq. m x h) before and during
finishing operations. Apply according to manufacturer's written instructions after placing,
screeding, and bull floating or darbying concrete, but before float finishing.
C. Begin curing after finishing concrete, but not before free water has disappeared from concrete
surface.
D. Curing Methods: Cure formed and unformed concrete for at least seven days by moisture curing,
moisture-retaining-cover curing, curing compound, or a combination of these as follows:
1. Moisture Curing: Keep surfaces continuously moist for not less than seven days with the
following materials:
a. Water. ,
b. Continuous water-fog spray.
C. Absorptive cover, water saturated and kept continuously wet. Cover concrete
surfaces and edges with 12-inch (300-mm)lap over adjacent absorptive covers. ,
2. Moisture-Retaining-Cover Curing: Cover concrete surfaces with moisture-retaining cover
for curing concrete, placed in widest practicable width, with sides and ends lapped at least
12 inches (300 mm), and sealed by waterproof tape or adhesive. Immediately repair any
holes or tears during curing period using cover material and waterproof tape.
Project No. 00058 03301 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE-6
40
Renovations to Parsons Annex
Smith College
"' Northampton, Massachusetts
D. Contraction (Control) Joints in Slabs-on-Grade: Form weakened-plane contraction joints,
sectioning concrete into areas as indicated. Construct contraction joints for a depth equal to at
W least one-fourth of the concrete thickness, as follows:
1. Sawed Joints: Form contraction joints with power saws equipped with shatterproof
abrasive or diamond-rimmed blades. Cut 1/8-inch-(3-mm-)wide joints into concrete when
W cutting action will not tear, abrade, or otherwise damage surface and before concrete
develops random contraction cracks.
3.5 CONCRETE PLACEMENT
on A. Comply with recommendations in ACI 304R for measuring, mixing, transporting, and placing
concrete.
B. Do not add water to concrete during delivery, at Project site, or during placement.
C. Consolidate concrete with mechanical vibrating equipment.
we
3.6 FINISHING FORMED SURFACES
A. Rough-Formed Finish: As-cast concrete texture imparted by form-facing material with tie holes
and defective areas repaired and patched, and fins and other projections exceeding 1/4 inch (6
mm) in height rubbed down or chipped off.
1. Apply to concrete surfaces not exposed to public view.
B. Smooth-Formed Finish: As-cast concrete texture imparted by form-facing material, arranged in an
orderly and symmetrical manner with a minimum of seams. Repair and patch tie holes and
defective areas. Completely remove fins and other projections.
1. Apply to concrete surfaces exposed to public view or to be covered with a coating or
covering material applied directly to concrete, such as waterproofing, dampproofing,
veneer plaster, or painting.
2. Do not apply rubbed finish to smooth-formed finish.
C. Related Unformed Surfaces: At tops of walls, horizontal offsets, and similar unformed surfaces
W adjacent to formed surfaces, strike off smooth and finish with a texture matching adjacent formed
surfaces. Continue final surface treatment of formed surfaces uniformly across adjacent
unformed surfaces, unless otherwise indicated.
3.7 FINISHING UNFORMED SURFACES
A. General: Comply with ACI 302.1 R for screeding, restraightening, and finishing operations for
concrete surfaces. Do not wet concrete surfaces.
w�
B. Screed surfaces with a straightedge and strike off. Begin initial floating using bull floats or darbies
to form a uniform and open-textured surface plane before excess moisture or bleedwater appears
on the surface.
Project No. 00058 03301 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE-5
A.
Renovations to Parsons Annex
Smith College
Northampton, Massachusetts
1. For mixer capacity of 1 cu. yd. (0.76 cu. m) or smaller, continue mixing at least one and
one-half minutes, but not more than five minutes after ingredients are in mixer, before any
part of batch is released.
2. For mixer capacity larger than 1 cu. yd. (0.76 cu. m), increase mixing time by 15 seconds
for each additional 1 cu.yd. (0.76 cu. m).
PART 3-EXECUTION
3.1 FORMWORK
A. Design, construct, erect, shore, brace, and maintain formwork according to ACI 301.
3.2 VAPOR RETARDER
A. Install, protect, and repair vapor-retarder sheets according to ASTM E 1643; place sheets in
position with longest dimension parallel with direction of pour.
B. Lap joints 6 inches (150 mm) and seal with manufacturer's recommended tape.
1. Cover vapor retarder with fine-graded granular material, moisten, and compact with
mechanical equipment to elevation tolerances of plus 0 inch (0 mm)or minus 3/4 inch (19
mm).
3.3 STEEL REINFORCEMENT
A. Comply with CRSI's "Manual of Standard Practice" for fabricating, placing, and supporting
reinforcement.
1. Do not cut or puncture vapor retarder. Repair damage and reseal vapor retarder before
placing concrete.
WW
3.4 JOINTS
A. General: Construct joints true to line with faces perpendicular to surface plane of concrete.
B. Construction Joints: Locate and install so as not to impair strength or appearance of concrete, at
locations indicated or as approved by Architect. �.
C. Isolation Joints: Install joint-filler strips at junctions with slabs-on-grade and vertical surfaces,
such as column pedestals, foundation walls,grade beams, and other locations, as indicated.
1. Extend joint fillers full width and depth of joint, terminating flush with finished concrete
surface, unless otherwise indicated. .s
A
Project No. 00058 03301 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE4
WW
Renovations to Parsons Annex
Smith College
Northampton, Massachusetts
A. Vapor Retarder: Multi-ply reinforced polyethylene sheet, ASTM E 1745, Class C, not less than
7.8 mils (0.18 mm) thick; or polyethylene sheet, ASTM D 4397, not less than 10 mils (0.25 mm)
thick.
B. Fine-Graded Granular Material: Clean mixture of crushed stone, crushed gravel, and
+ manufactured or natural sand; ASTM D 448, Size 10, with 100 percent passing a No. 4 (4.75-
mm) sieve and 10 to 30 percent passing a No. 100 (0.15-mm) sieve; complying with deleterious
substance limits of ASTM C 33 for fine aggregates.
C. joint-Filler Strips: ASTM D 1751, asphalt-saturated cellulosic fiber, or ASTM D 1752, cork or
self-expanding cork.
2.6 CURING MATERIALS
A. Moisture-Retaining Cover: ASTM C 171, polyethylene film or white burlap-polyethylene sheet.
B. Water: Potable.
4W
C. Clear,Waterborne, Membrane-Forming Curing and Sealing Compound: ASTM C 1315,Type 1,
Class A.
2.7 CONCRETE MIXES
A. Comply with ACI 301 requirements for concrete mixtures.
B. Prepare design mixes, proportioned according to ACI 301, for normal-weight concrete
determined by either laboratory trial mix or field test data bases, as follows:
1. Compressive Strength(28 Days): 3000 psi(20.7 MPa).
2. Slump: 3 inches (75 mm).
C. Add air-entraining admixture at manufacturer's prescribed rate to result in concrete at point of
placement having an air content of 6.0 percent within a tolerance of plus 1.0 or minus 1.5
percent.
1. Air content of trowel-finished interior concrete floors shall not exceed 3.0 percent.
2.8 CONCRETE MIXING
A. Ready-Mixed Concrete: Comply with ASTM C 94.
1. When air temperature is between 85 and 90 deg F (30 and 32 deg C), reduce mixing and
delivery time from 1-1/2 hours to 75 minutes; when air temperature is above 90 deg F (32
deg C), reduce mixing and delivery time to 60 minutes.
on B. Project Site Mixing: Measure, batch, and mix concrete materials and concrete according to
ASTM C 94. Mix concrete materials in appropriate drum-type batch machine mixer.
go
Project No. 00058 03301 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE-3
Renovations to Parsons Annex
Smith College
Northampton, Massachusetts
3. Steel reinforcement and supports.
4. Concrete mixtures.
5. Handling, placing, and constructing concrete. u.s
PART 2-PRODUCTS
2.1 FORMWORK
A. Furnish formwork and form accessories according to ACI 301.
2.2 STEEL REINFORCEMENT
A. Reinforcing Bars: ASTM A 615/A 615M, Grade 60(Grade 420), deformed. �*!
B. Plain-Steel Wire: ASTM A 82, as drawn.
C. Plain-Steel Welded Wire Fabric: ASTM A 185, fabricated from as-drawn steel wire into flat
sheets.
D. Deformed-Steel Welded Wire Fabric: ASTM A 497, flat sheet.
2.3 CONCRETE MATERIALS
A. Portland Cement: ASTM C 150,Types I or II or Type I/II.
B. Normal-Weight Aggregate: ASTM C 33, uniformly graded, not exceeding 3/4-inch (18-mm)
nominal size.
C. Water: Potable and complying with ASTM C 94.
2.4 ADMIXTURES
A. General: Admixtures certified by manufacturer to contain not more than 0.1 percent water-
soluble chloride ions by mass of cement and to be compatible with other admixtures. Do not use
admixtures containing calcium chloride.
B. Air-Entraining Admixture: ASTM C 260.
C. Water-Reducing Admixture: ASTM C 494,Type A.
D. Water-Reducing and Retarding Admixture: ASTM C 494,Type D.
2.5 RELATED MATERIALS
Project No. 00058 03301 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE-2
OR
Renovations to Parsons Annex
Smith College
on Northampton, Massachusetts
SECTION 03301-CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
�s
PART 1 -GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section specifies cast-in-place concrete, including reinforcement, concrete materials, mix
design, placement procedures, and finishes.
W B. Related Sections include the following:
1. Division 2 Section"Earthwork" for drainage fill under slabs-on-grade.
W
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. General: In addition to the following, comply with submittal requirements in ACI 301.
B. Product Data: For each type of manufactured material and product indicated.
C. Design Mixes: For each concrete mix.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
an A. Installer Qualifications: An experienced installer who has completed concrete work similar in
material, design, and extent to that indicated for this Project and whose work has resulted in
construction with a record of successful in-service performance.
B. Manufacturer Qualifications: A firm experienced in manufacturing ready-mixed concrete
products complying with ASTM C 94 requirements for production facilities and equipment.
C. Source Limitations: Obtain each type of cement of the same brand from the same manufacturer's
plant, each aggregate from one source, and each admixture from the same manufacturer.
D. Comply with ACI 301, "Specification for Structural Concrete," including the following, unless
modified by the requirements of the Contract Documents.
W 1. General requirements, including submittals, quality assurance, acceptance of structure, and
protection of in-place concrete.
2. Formwork and form accessories.
Project No. 00058 03301 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE-1
Renovations to Parsons Annex
Smith College
on Northampton, Massachusetts
additional 50 cu.yd. (38 cu. m). One specimen shall be tested at 7 days and two specimens
at 28 days; one specimen shall be retained in reserve for later testing if required.
6. When total quantity of a given class of concrete is less than 10 cu. yd. (7 cu. m), Architect
may waive compressive-strength testing if adequate evidence of satisfactory strength is
provided.
7. Strength level of concrete will be considered satisfactory if averages of sets of three
consecutive compressive-strength test results equal or exceed specified compressive strength
and no individual compressive-strength test result falls below specified compressive
+■* strength by more than 500 psi(3.4 MPa).
C. Test results shall be reported in writing to Architect, concrete manufacturer, and Contractor
within 24 hours of testing. Reports of compressive-strength tests shall contain Project
identification name and number, date of concrete placement, name of concrete testing agency,
concrete type and class, location of concrete batch in pavement, design compressive strength at 28
days, concrete mix proportions and materials, compressive breaking strength, and type of break
for both 7-and 28-day tests.
D. Additional Tests: Testing agency shall make additional tests of the concrete when test results
indicate slump, air entrainment, concrete strengths, or other requirements have not been met, as
directed by Architect. Testing agency may conduct tests to determine adequacy of concrete by
cored cylinders complying with ASTM C 42, or by other methods as directed.
3.10 REPAIRS AND PROTECTION
A. Remove and replace concrete pavement that is broken, damaged, or defective, or does not meet
requirements in this Section.
B. Drill test cores where directed by Architect when necessary to determine magnitude of cracks or
defective areas. Fill drilled core holes in satisfactory pavement areas with portland cement
an concrete bonded to pavement with epoxy adhesive.
C. Protect concrete from damage. Exclude traffic from pavement for at least 14 days after
placement. When construction traffic is permitted, maintain pavement as clean as possible by
removing surface stains and spillage of materials as they occur.
on D. Maintain concrete pavement free of stains, discoloration, dirt, and other foreign material. Sweep
concrete pavement not more than two days before date scheduled for Substantial Completion
inspections.
w
END OF SECTION 02751
Project No. 00058 02751 CEMENT CONCRETE PAVEMENT-9
Renovations to Parsons Annex
Smith College
Northampton, Massachusetts
B. Begin curing after finishing concrete, but not before free water has disappeared from concrete
surface.
C. Curing Methods: Cure concrete by moisture curing, moisture-retaining-cover curing, curing
compound, or a combination of these as follows:
1. Moisture Curing: Keep surfaces continuously moist for not less than seven days with the
following materials:
W"
a. Water.
b. Continuous water-fog spray.
C. Absorptive cover, water saturated, and kept continuously wet. Cover concrete
surfaces and edges with 12-inch (300-mm)lap over adjacent absorptive covers.
3.8 PAVEMENT TOLERANCES
A. Comply with tolerances of ACI 117 and as follows:
1. Elevation: 1/4 inch(6 mm).
2. Thickness: Plus 3/8 inch(9 mm), minus 1/4 inch(6 mm).
3. Surface: Gap below 10-foot- (3 1m) long, unleveled straightedge not to exceed 1/4 inch (6 .w
mm).
4. Joint Spacing: 3 inches (75 mm).
5. Contraction Joint Depth: Plus 1/4 inch(6 mm), no minus.
6. Joint Width: Plus 1/8 inch (3 mm), no minus.
3.9 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Testing Agency: Engage a qualified independent testing and inspection agency to sample
materials, perform tests, and submit test reports during concrete placement according to
requirements specified in this Article.
B. Testing Services: Testing shall be performed according to the following requirements:
1. Sampling Fresh Concrete: Representative samples of fresh concrete shall be obtained
according to ASTM C 172, except modified for slump to comply with ASTM C 94.
2. Slump: ASTM C 143; one test at point of placement for each compressive-strength test,
but not less than one test for each day's pour of each type of concrete. Additional tests will
be required when concrete consistency changes.
3. Air Content: ASTM C 231, pressure method; one test for each compressive-strength test,
but not less than one test for each day's pour of each type of air-entrained concrete.
4. Concrete Temperature: ASTM C 1064; one test hourly when air temperature is 40 deg F ,.
(4.4 deg C) and below and when 80 deg F (27 deg C) and above, and one test for each set
of compressive-strength specimens.
5. Compressive-Strength Tests: ASTM C 39; one set for each day's pour of each concrete
class exceeding 5 cu. yd. (4 cu. m), but less than 25 cu. yd. (19 cu. m), plus one set for each
or
Project No. 00058 02751 CEMENT CONCRETE PAVEMENT-8
No
Renovations to Parsons Annex
Smith College
RX Northampton, Massachusetts
C. Comply with requirements and with recommendations in ACI 304R for measuring, mixing,
transporting, and placing concrete.
D. Do not add water to concrete during delivery, at Project site, or during placement.
E. Deposit and spread concrete in a continuous operation between transverse joints. Do not push
or drag concrete into place or use vibrators to move concrete into place.
A. F. Consolidate concrete by mechanical vibrating equipment supplemented by hand-spading,
rodding, or tamping. Use equipment and procedures to consolidate concrete according to
recommendations in ACI 309R.
W G. Screed pavement surfaces with a straightedge and strike off. Commence initial floating using bull
floats or darbies to form an open textured and uniform surface plane before excess moisture or
so bleed water appears on the surface. Do not further disturb concrete surfaces before beginning
finishing operations or spreading dry-shake surface treatments.
H. Hot-Weather Placement: Place concrete according to recommendations in ACI 305R and as
"" follows when hot-weather conditions exist:
1. Cool ingredients before mixing to maintain concrete temperature at time of placement
below 90 deg F (32 deg Q. Chilled mixing water or chopped ice may be used to control
temperature, provided water equivalent of ice is calculated to total amount of mixing water.
Using liquid nitrogen to cool concrete is Contractor's option.
2. Cover reinforcement steel with water-soaked burlap so steel temperature will not exceed
ambient air temperature immediately before embedding in concrete.
3. Fog-spray forms, reinforcement steel, and subgrade just before placing concrete. Keep
M subgrade moisture uniform without standing water, soft spots, or dry areas.
3.6 CONCRETE FINISHING
A. General: Wetting of concrete surfaces during spreeding, initial floating, or finishing operations is
prohibited.
B. Float Finish: Begin the second floating operation when bleed-water sheen has disappeared and
the concrete surface has stiffened sufficiently to permit operations. Float surface with power-
" " driven floats, or by hand floating if area is small or inaccessible to power units. Finish surfaces to
true planes. Cut down high spots, and fill low spots. Refloat surface immediately to uniform
granular texture.
1. Medium-to-Fine-Textured Broom Finish: Draw a soft bristle broom across float-finished
concrete surface perpendicular to line of traffic to provide a uniform, fine-line texture.
3.7 CONCRETE PROTECTION AND CURING
A. General: Protect freshly placed concrete from premature drying and excessive cold or hot
temperatures. Comply with ACI 306.1 for cold-weather protection and follow recommendations
in ACI 305R for hot-weather protection during curing.
go
Project No. 00058 02751 CEMENT CONCRETE PAVEMENT-7
w
Renovations to Parsons Annex
Smith College
Northampton, Massachusetts .�
2. Use a bonding agent at locations where fresh concrete is placed against hardened or
partially hardened concrete surfaces.
C. Isolation joints: Form isolation joints of preformed joint-filler strips abutting concrete curbs,
catch basins, manholes, inlets, structures,walks, other fixed objects, and where indicated.
1. Locate expansion joints at intervals of 20 feet(6 m),unless otherwise indicated.
2. Extend joint fillers full width and depth of joint.
3. Terminate joint filler less than 1/2 inch (12 mm) or more than 1 inch (25 mm) below .,
finished surface if joint sealant is indicated.
4. Place top of joint filler flush with finished concrete surface if joint sealant is not indicated.
5. Furnish joint fillers in one-piece lengths. Where more than one length is required, lace or
clip joint-filler sections together.
6. Protect top edge of joint filler during concrete placement with metal, plastic, or other
temporary preformed cap. Remove protective cap after concrete has been placed on both
sides of joint.
D. Install dowel bars and support assemblies at joints where indicated. Lubricate or asphalt-coat one-
half of dowel length to prevent concrete bonding to one side of joint.
E. Contraction joints: Form weakened-plane contraction joints, sectioning concrete into areas as
indicated. Construct contraction joints for a depth equal to at least one-fourth of the concrete
thickness, as follows:
1. Grooved joints: Form contraction joints after initial floating by grooving and finishing no
each edge of joint with groover tool to the following radius. Repeat grooving of
contraction joints after applying surface finishes. Eliminate groover marks on concrete
surfaces.
a. Radius: 1/4 inch (6 mm).
F. Edging: Tool edges of pavement, gutters, curbs, and joints in concrete after initial floating with
an edging tool to the following radius. Repeat tooling of edges after applying surface finishes.
Eliminate tool marks on concrete surfaces. rw
1. Radius: 1/4 inch(6 mm).
3.5 CONCRETE PLACEMENT
A. Inspection: Before placing concrete, inspect and complete formwork installation, reinforcement
steel, and items to be embedded or cast in. Notify other trades to permit installation of their
work.
B. Moisten subbase to provide a uniform dampened condition at the time concrete is placed. Do
not place concrete around manholes or other structures until they are at the required finish
elevation and alignment.
Project No. 00058 02751 CEMENT CONCRETE PAVEMENT-6
w
Renovations to Parsons Annex
Smith College
wo Northampton, Massachusetts
A. Proof-roll prepared subbase surface to check for unstable areas and verify need for additional
compaction. Proceed with pavement only after nonconforming conditions have been corrected
and subgrade is ready to receive pavement.
B. Remove loose material from compacted subbase surface immediately before placing concrete.
3.2 EDGE FORMS AND SCREED CONSTRUCTION
A. Set, brace, and secure edge forms, bulkheads, and intermediate screed guides for pavement to
required lines, grades, and elevations. Install forms to allow continuous progress of work and so
rew
forms can remain in place at least 24 hours after concrete placement.
B. Clean forms after each use and coat with form release agent to ensure separation from concrete
w
without damage.
3.3 STEEL REINFORCEMENT
w
A. General: Comply with CRSI's "Manual of Standard Practice" for fabricating reinforcement and
with recommendations in CRSI's "Placing Reinforcing Bars" for placing and supporting
ON reinforcement.
1. Apply epoxy repair coating to uncoated or damaged surfaces of epoxy-coated
reinforcement.
B. Clean reinforcement of loose rust and mill scale, earth, ice, or other bond-reducing materials.
C. Arrange, space, and securely tie bars and bar supports to hold reinforcement in position during
concrete placement. Maintain minimum cover to reinforcement.
in D. Install welded wire fabric in lengths as long as practicable. Lap adjoining pieces at least one full
mesh, and lace splices with wire. Offset laps of adjoining widths to prevent continuous laps in
either direction.
3.4 JOINTS
A. General: Construct construction, isolation, and contraction joints and tool edgings true to line
with faces perpendicular to surface plane of concrete. Construct transverse joints at right angles
to centerline, unless otherwise indicated.
1. When joining existing pavement, place transverse joints to align with previously placed
joints, unless otherwise indicated.
B. Construction Joints: Set construction joints at side and end terminations of pavement and at
locations where pavement operations are stopped for more than one-half hour, unless pavement
terminates at isolation joints.
1. Continue reinforcement across construction joints, unless otherwise indicated. Do not
continue reinforcement through sides of pavement strips, unless otherwise indicated.
Project No. 00058 02751 CEMENT CONCRETE PAVEMENT-5
..
Renovations to Parsons Annex
Smith College Im
Northampton, Massachusetts
2.6 RELATED MATERIALS
A. Expansion- and Isolation-Joint-Filler Strips: ASTM D 1751, asphalt-saturated cellulosic fiber, or so
ASTM D 1752, cork or self-expanding cork.
1W
2.7 CONCRETE MIXES
A. Prepare design mixes, proportioned according to ACI 211.1 and ACI 301, for each type and ,
strength of normal-weight concrete determined by either laboratory trial mixes or field experience.
B. Use a qualified independent testing agency for preparing and reporting proposed mix designs for
the trial batch method.
C. Proportion mixes to provide concrete with the following properties: am
1. Compressive Strength(28 Days): 4000 psi(27.6 MPa).
2. Maximum Water-Cementitious Materials Ratio: 0.45.
3. Slump Limit: 3 inches(75 mm).
D. Cementitious Materials: Limit percentage, by weight, of cementitious materials other than
portland cement according to ACI 301 requirements for concrete exposed to deicing chemicals.
E. Add air-entraining admixture at manufacturer's prescribed rate to result in concrete at point of
placement having an air content of 3.0 percent or less.
2.8 CONCRETE MIXING
A. Ready-Mixed Concrete: Comply with requirements and with ASTM C 94.
1. When air temperature is between 85 deg F (30 deg C) and 90 deg F (32 deg C), reduce
mixing and delivery time from 1-1/2 hours to 75 minutes; when air temperature is above
90 deg F (32 deg C), reduce mixing and delivery time to 60 minutes.
B. Project-Site Mixing: Comply with requirements and measure, batch, and mix concrete materials
and concrete according to ASTM C 94. Mix concrete materials in appropriate drum-type batch
machine mixer.
1. For mixers of 1 cu. yd. (0.76 cu. m) or smaller capacity, continue mixing at least one and
one-half minutes, but not more than five minutes after ingredients are in mixer, before any •�+
part of batch is released.
2. For mixers of capacity larger than 1 cu. yd. (0.76 cu. m), increase mixing time by 15
seconds for each additional 1 cu.yd. (0.76 cu. m).
PART 3 -EXECUTION
3.1 PREPARATION
Project No. 00058 02751 CEMENT CONCRETE PAVEMENT-4 ..
Renovations to Parsons Annex
Smith College
Northampton, Massachusetts
B. Reinforcement Bars: ASTM A 615/A 615M, Grade 60(Grade 420), deformed.
on C. Bar Supports: Bolsters, chairs, spacers, and other devices for spacing, supporting, and fastening
reinforcement bars,welded wire fabric, and dowels in place. Manufacture bar supports according
to CRSI's "Manual of Standard Practice" from steel wire, plastic, or precast concrete or fiber-
pa reinforced concrete of greater compressive strength than concrete, and as follows:
1. Equip wire bar supports with sand plates or horizontal runners where base material will
air not support chair legs.
2. For epoxy-coated reinforcement, use epoxy-coated or other dielectric-polymer coated wire
bar supports.
on
D. Epoxy Repair Coating: Liquid two-part epoxy repair coating, compatible with epoxy coating on
reinforcement.
2.3 CONCRETE MATERIALS
ow A. General: Use the same brand and type of cementitious material from the same manufacturer
throughout the Project.
B. Portland Cement: ASTM C 150,Type I or II.
C. Aggregate: ASTM C 33, uniformly graded, from a single source,with coarse aggregate as follows:
1. Maximum Aggregate Size: 1 inch(25 mm) nominal.
2. Do not use fine or coarse aggregates containing substances that cause spalling.
D. Water: ASTM C 94.
2.4 ADMIXTURES
A. General: Admixtures certified by manufacturer to contain not more than 0.1 percent water-
soluble chloride ions by mass of cement and to be compatible with other admixtures.
B. Air-Entraining Admixture: ASTM C 260.
C. Water-Reducing Admixture: ASTM C 494,Type A.
D. Water-Reducing and Retarding Admixture: ASTM C 494,Type D.
2.5 CURING MATERIALS
A. Absorptive Cover: AASHTO M 182, Class 2, burlap cloth made from jute or kenaf, weighing
approximately 9 oz./sq. yd. (305 g/sq. m) dry.
B. Moisture-Retaining Cover: ASTM C 171, polyethylene film or white burlap-polyethylene sheet.
C. Water: Potable.
Project No. 00058 02751 CEMENT CONCRETE PAVEMENT-3
Renovations to Parsons Annex
Smith College
Northampton, Massachusetts
5. Applied finish materials.
6. Bonding agent or adhesive.
7. Joint fillers.
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Installer Qualifications: An experienced installer who has completed pavement work similar in
material, design, and extent to that indicated for this Project and whose work has resulted in
construction with a record of successful in-service performance.
B. Testing Agency Qualifications: An independent testing agency, acceptable to authorities having
jurisdiction, qualified according to ASTM C 1077 and ASTM E 329 to conduct the testing
indicated, as documented according to ASTM E 548.
C. Source Limitations: Obtain each type or class of cementitious material of the same brand from
the same manufacturer's plant and each aggregate from one source.
D. ACI Publications: Comply with AC1301, "Specification for Structural Concrete," unless
modified by the requirements of the Contract Documents.
E. Concrete Testing Service: Engage a qualified independent testing agency to perform material
evaluation tests and to design concrete mixes.
1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Traffic Control: Maintain access for vehicular and pedestrian traffic as required for other
construction activities.
wwr
PART 2-PRODUCTS
2.1 FORMS
A. Form Materials: Plywood, metal, metal-framed plywood, or other approved panel-type materials
to provide full-depth, continuous, straight, smooth exposed surfaces.
1. Use flexible or curved forms for curves of a radius 100 feet(30.5 m) or less.
B. Form-Release Agent: Commercially formulated form-release agent that will not bond with, stain,
or adversely affect concrete surfaces and will not impair subsequent treatments of concrete
surfaces. ,
2.2 STEEL REINFORCEMENT
A. Epoxy-Coated Welded Wire Fabric: ASTM A 884/A 884M, Class A,plain steel.
Project No. 00058 02751 CEMENT CONCRETE PAVEMENT-2
Renovations to Parsons Annex
Smith College
"� Northampton, Massachusetts
SECTION 02751 -CEMENT CONCRETE PAVEMENT
an
PART 1 ,GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes exterior cement concrete pavement for the following:
1. Walkways.
„„ B. Related Sections include the following:
1. Division 2 Section"Earthwork" for subgrade preparation,grading, and subbase course.
;w 2. Division 3 Section"Cast-in-Place Concrete" for general building applications of concrete.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. Cementitious Materials: Portland cement alone or in combination with one or more of blended
hydraulic cement, expansive hydraulic cement, fly ash and other pozzolans, ground granulated
blast-furnace slag, and silica fume.
on 1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of manufactured material and product indicated.
sw
B. Design Mixes: For each concrete pavement mix. Include alternate mix designs when
characteristics of materials, project conditions, weather, test results, or other circumstances
warrant adjustments.
C. Material Test Reports: From a qualified testing agency indicating and interpreting test results for
compliance of the following with requirements indicated, based on comprehensive testing of
current materials:
D. Material Certificates: Signed by manufacturers certifying that each of the following materials
complies with requirements:
1. Cementitious materials and aggregates.
2. Steel reinforcement and reinforcement accessories.
3. Admixtures.
4. Curing compounds.
Project No. 00058 02751 CEMENT CONCRETE PAVEMENT-1
on
Renovations to Parsons Annex
Smith College
Northampton, Massachusetts .m
3.13 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Clear interior of piping and structures of dirt and superfluous material as work progresses.
Maintain swab or drag in piping, and pull past each joint as it is completed.
1. In large, accessible piping,brushes and brooms may be used for cleaning. .�►
2. Place plug in end of incomplete piping at end of day and when work stops.
3. Flush piping between manholes and other structures to remove collected debris, if required
by authorities having jurisdiction. **
B. Inspect interior of piping to determine whether line displacement or other damage has occurred.
Inspect after approximately 24 inches (600 mm) of backfill is in place, and again at completion of
Project.
1. Submit separate reports for each system inspection.
2. Defects requiring correction include the following:
a. Alignment: Less than full diameter of inside of pipe is visible between structures.
b. Deflection: Flexible piping with deflection that prevents passage of ball or cylinder
of size not less than 92.5 percent of piping diameter.
C. Crushed,broken, cracked, or otherwise damaged piping.
d. Infiltration: Water leakage into piping.
e. Exfiltration: Water leakage from or around piping.
3. Replace defective piping using new materials, and repeat inspections until defects are
within allowances specified.
4. Reinspect and repeat procedure until results are satisfactory.
C. Test new piping systems, and parts of existing systems that have been altered, extended, or
repaired, for leaks and defects.
1. Do not enclose, cover, or put into service before inspection and approval.
2. Replace leaking piping using new materials, and repeat testing until leakage is within
allowances specified.
END OF SECTION 02630
.W
W
Project No. 00058 02630 STORM DRAINAGE-8 NP
Renovations to Parsons Annex
Smith College
Northampton, Massachusetts
A. Construct catch basins to sizes and shapes indicated.
w B. Set frames and grates to elevations indicated.
3.7 CONCRETE PLACEMENT
A. Place cast-in-place concrete according to ACI 318 and ACI 350R.
3.8 DRAINAGE SYSTEM INSTALLATION
A. Assemble and install components according to manufacturer's written instructions.
3.9 DRAIN INSTALLATION
A. Install type of drains in locations indicated.
B. Embed drains in 4-inch (100-mm) minimum depth of concrete around bottom and sides.
C. Fasten grates to drains if indicated.
D. Set drain frames and covers with tops flush with pavement surface.
Im
3.10 STORMWATER DISPOSAL SYSTEM INSTALLATION
A. Excavate trenches of width and depth, and install system and backfill according to chamber
manufacturer's written instructions. Include storage and leaching chambers, filtering material,
and filter mat.
3.11 TAP CONNECTIONS
am
A. Make connections to existing piping and underground structures so finished Work complies as
nearly as practical with requirements specified for new Work.
B. Protect existing piping and structures to prevent concrete or debris from entering while making
tap connections. Remove debris or other extraneous material that may accumulate.
w
3.12 CLOSING ABANDONED STORM DRAINAGE SYSTEMS
no A. Abandoned Piping: Close open ends of abandoned underground piping indicated to remain in
place. Include closures strong enough to withstand hydrostatic and earth pressures that may
result after ends of abandoned piping have been closed. Use either procedure below:
1. Close open ends of piping with at least 8-inch-(200-mm-)thick, brick masonry bulkheads.
Project No. 00058 02630 STORM DRAINAGE-7
Renovations to Parsons Annex
Smith College
Northampton, Massachusetts
3.4 INSTALLATION, GENERAL
A. General Locations and Arrangements: Drawing plans and details indicate general location and
arrangement of underground storm drainage piping. Location and arrangement of piping layout
take design considerations into account. Install piping as indicated, to extent practical.
B. Install piping beginning at low point, true to grades and alignment indicated with unbroken
continuity of invert. Place bell ends of piping facing upstream. Install gaskets, seals, sleeves, and
couplings according to manufacturer's written instructions for use of lubricants, cements, and
other installation requirements. Maintain swab or drag in line, and pull past each joint as it is
completed.
C. Use manholes for changes in direction, unless fittings are indicated. Use fittings for branch
connections, unless direct tap into existing sewer is indicated.
D. Use proper size increasers, reducers, and couplings where different sizes or materials of pipes and
fittings are connected. Reducing size of piping in direction of flow is prohibited.
E. Install gravity-flow piping and connect to building's storm drains, of sizes and in locations
indicated. Terminate piping as indicated.
1. Install piping pitched down in direction of flow, at minimum slope of 1 percent, unless
otherwise indicated.
F. Extend storm drainage piping and connect to existing storm drains, of sizes and in locations
indicated. Terminate piping as indicated.
3.5 PIPE JOINT CONSTRUCTION AND INSTALLATION
A. General: Join and install pipe and fittings according to installations indicated.
B. ABS Pipe and Fittings: As follows:
1. Join pipe and gasketed fittings with gaskets according to ASTM D 2321.
2. Install according to ASTM D 2321.
C. PVC Sewer Pipe and Fittings: As follows:
1. Join pipe and gasketed fittings with gaskets according to ASTM D 2321.
2. Install according to ASTM D 2321.
D. System Piping Joints: Make joints using system manufacturer's couplings, unless otherwise
indicated.
E. Join piping made of different materials or dimensions with couplings made for this application.
Use couplings that are compatible with and that fit both systems' materials and dimensions.
3.6 CATCH-BASIN INSTALLATION
Project No. 00058 02630 STORM DRAINAGE-6
on
Renovations to Parsons Annex
go Smith College
Northampton, Massachusetts
2.8 DRAINS
OR A. Gray-Iron Area Drains: ASME A112.21.1M, round, gray-iron body with anchor flange and
round, secured, gray-iron grate. Include bottom outlet with inside calk or spigot connection, of
on sizes indicated. Use units with top-loading classifications according to the following applications:
1. Heavy Duty: In vehicle-traffic service areas.
4W PART 3-EXECUTION
No 3.1 EARTHWORK
A. Excavating, trenching, and backfilling are specified in Division 2 Section"Earthwork."
3.2 IDENTIFICATION
A. Materials and their installation are specified in Division 2 Section "Earthwork." Arrange for
installing green warning tapes directly over piping and at outside edges of underground
structures.
1. Use warning tape or detectable warning tape over ferrous piping.
2. Use detectable warning tape over nonferrous piping and over edges of underground
* structures.
3.3 PIPING APPLICATIONS
A. General: Include watertight, silttight, or soiltight joints, unless watertight or silttight joints are
indicated.
B. Refer to Part 2 of this Section for detailed specifications for pipe and fitting products listed below.
Use pipe, fittings, and joining methods according to applications indicated.
w
C. Gravity-Flow Piping: Use the following:
1. NPS 4 and NPS 6 (DN 100 and DN 150): ABS, SDR 35, sewer pipe and fittings; solvent-
cemented joints; or gaskets and gasketed joints.
2. NPS 8 to NPS 15 (DN200 to DN375): PVC sewer pipe and fittings, solvent-cemented
joints, or gaskets and gasketed joints.
D. Special Pipe Couplings: Use where required to join piping and no other appropriate method is
specified. Do not use instead of specified joining methods.
1. Use the following pipe couplings for nonpressure applications:
on a. Sleeve type to join piping, of same size, or with small difference in OD.
b. Increaser/reducer-pattern, sleeve type to join piping of different sizes.
C. Bushing type to join piping of different sizes where annular space between smaller
piping's OD and larger pipings ID permits installation.
Project No. 00058 02630 STORM DRAINAGE-5
Renovations to Parsons Annex
Smith College
Northampton, Massachusetts
3. Top Section: Eccentric-cone type, unless concentric-cone or flat-slab-top type is indicated.
Top of cone of size that matches grade rings.
4. Gaskets: ASTM C 443 (ASTM C 443M), rubber.
5. Grade Rings: Include two or three reinforced-concrete rings, of 6-to 9-inch (150- to 229-
mm) total thickness,that match 24-inch-(610-mm-)diameter frame and grate.
6. Steps: ASTM.C 478 (ASTM C 478M), individual steps or ladder. Omit steps for catch
basins less than 60 inches (1500 mm) deep.
7. Pipe Connectors: ASTM C 923 (ASTM C 923M), resilient, of size required, for each pipe
connecting to base section.
B. Frames and Grates: ASTM A 536, Grade 60-40-18, ductile iron designed for heavy-duty service.
Include flat grate with small square or short-slotted drainage openings.
1. Size: 24 by 24 inches (6 10 by 610 mm)minimum, unless otherwise indicated.
2. Grate Free Area: Approximately 50 percent, unless otherwise indicated. .�
2.6 STORMWATER INLETS
A. Curb Inlets: Made with vertical curb opening, of materials and dimensions according to utility
standards.
B. Frames and Grates: Heavy-duty frames and grates according to utility standards.
1. Material: ASTM A 48, Class 30 (ASTM A 48M, Class No. 200A) minimum, gray-iron
casting.
2. Grate Free Area: Approximately 50 percent, unless otherwise indicated.
2.7 CONCRETE
A. General: Cast-in-place concrete according to ACI 318,ACI 350R, and the following:
1. Cement: ASTM C 150,Type II.
2. Fine Aggregate: ASTM C 33, sand. .,
3. Coarse Aggregate: ASTM C 33, crushed gravel.
4. Water: Potable.
B. Portland Cement Design Mix: 4000 psi (27.6 MPa) minimum, with 0.45 maximum water- w
cementitious ratio.
1. Reinforcement Fabric: ASTM A 185, steel,welded wire fabric, plain.
2. Reinforcement Bars: ASTM A 615/A 615M, Grade 60(Grade 420), deformed steel.
C. Ballast and Pipe Supports: Portland cement design mix, 3000 psi (20.7 MPa) minimum, with
0.58 maximum water-cementitious ratio.
1. Reinforcement Fabric: ASTM A 185, steel,welded wire fabric, plain. •
2. Reinforcement Bars: ASTM A 615/A 615M, Grade 60(Grade 420), deformed steel.
Project No. 00058 02630 STORM DRAINAGE-4 .�
Renovations to Parsons Annex
Smith College
Northampton, Massachusetts
2.3 PIPES AND FITTINGS
W A. ABS Sewer Pipe and Fittings: ASTM D 2751, for solvent-cemented or gasketed joints.
1. Wall Thickness for NPS 3 to NPS 6 (DN80 to DN 150): SDR 35.
2. Wall Thickness for NPS 8 to NPS 12 (DN200 to DN300): SDR 42.
3. Gaskets: ASTM F 477, elastomeric seals.
B. Cellular-Core PVC Pipe: ASTM F 891, Sewer and Drain Series, PS 50 minimum stiffness, for
solvent-cemented joints.
1. Fittings: ASTM D 2729 or ASTM D 3034, PVC sewer pipe fittings.
C. PVC Sewer Pipe and Fittings: According to the following:
1. PVC Sewer Pipe and Fittings, NPS 15 (DN375) and Smaller: ASTM D 3034, SDR 35, for
solvent-cemented or gasketed joints.
' " a. Gaskets: ASTM F 477, elastomeric seals.
D. PVC, Ribbed Drain Pipe: AASHTO M 304M, bell and spigot, with smooth waterway for bell-
'" gasketed joints.
1. Fittings: AASHTO M 304M or ASTM F 794 for bell-gasketed joints.
2. Gaskets: ASTM F 477, elastomeric seals to form soiltight joints.
2.4 SPECIAL PIPE COUPLINGS AND FITTINGS
A. Sleeve-Type Pipe Couplings: ASTM C 1173, rubber or elastomeric sleeve and band assembly
fabricated to mate with OD of pipes to be joined, for nonpressure joints.
1. Sleeve Material for Concrete Pipe: ASTM C 443 (ASTM C 443M), rubber.
2. Sleeve Material for Cast-Iron Soil Pipe: ASTM C 564, rubber.
3. Sleeve Material for Plastic Pipe: ASTM F 477, elastomeric seal.
4. Sleeve Material for Dissimilar Pipe: Compatible with pipe materials being joined.
5. Bands: Stainless steel, at least one at each pipe insert.
IN
2.5 CATCH BASINS
A. Normal-Traffic, Precast Concrete Catch Basins: ASTM C 478 (ASTM C 478M), precast,
reinforced concrete, of depth indicated,with provision for rubber gasketed joints.
1. Base Section: 6-inch (150-mm) minimum thickness for floor slab and 4-inch (100-mm)
minimum thickness for walls and base riser section, and having separate base slab or base
section with integral floor.
2. Riser Sections: 4-inch (100-mm) minimum thickness, 48-inch (1220-mm) diameter, and
lengths to provide depth indicated.
Project No. 00058 02630 STORM DRAINAGE-3
Renovations to Parsons Annex
Smith College
Northampton, Massachusetts
1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE,AND HANDLING
A. Do not store plastic structures, pipe, and fittings in direct sunlight. "
B. Protect pipe, pipe fittings, and seals from dirt and damage.
C. Handle precast concrete manholes and other structures according to manufacturer's written
rigging instructions.
1.7 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Site Information: Perform site survey, research public utility records, and verify existing utility
locations.
B. Locate existing structures and piping to be closed and abandoned. �.
C. Existing Utilities: Do not interrupt utilities serving facilities occupied by Owner or others unless
permitted under the following conditions and then only after arranging to provide temporary
utility services according to requirements indicated:
1. Notify Architect not less than two days in advance of proposed utility interruptions.
2. Do not proceed with utility interruptions without Architect's written permission.
PART 2-PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering
products that may be incorporated into the Work include,but are not limited to, the following:
B. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
1. Stormwater Disposal Systems:
a. Advanced Drainage Systems, Inc.
b. Cultec, Inc.
C. Hancor, Inc.
d. Infiltrator Systems, Inc.
e. PSA, Inc.
2.2 PIPING MATERIALS
A. Refer to Part 3 "Piping Applications"Article for applications of pipe and fitting materials. `
Project No. 00058 02630 STORM DRAINAGE-2
Renovations to Parsons Annex
Smith College
Northampton, Massachusetts
SECTION 02630-STORM DRAINAGE
PART 1 -GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
w�
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes storm drainage outside the building.
B. Related Sections include the following:
1. Division 2 Section "Foundation Drainage Systems" for foundation drains connecting to
storm drainage.
on
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. ABS: Acrylonitrile-butadiene-styrene plastic.
B. EPDM: Ethylene-propylene-diene-monomer rubber.
w
C. PVC: Polyvinyl chloride plastic.
�u
1.4 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
Wo A. Gravity-Flow, Nonpressure-Piping Pressure Ratings: At least equal to system test pressure.
1.5 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For the following:
1. Stormwater disposal systems.
B. Shop Drawings: Include plans, elevations, details, and attachments for the following:
W 1. Precast concrete manholes and other structures, including frames, covers, and grates.
C. Design Mix Reports and Calculations: For each class of cast-in-place concrete.
W
D. Field Test Reports: Indicate and interpret test results for compliance with performance
requirements.
Project No. 00058 02630 STORM DRAINAGE-1
11 milli
Renovations to Parsons Annex
Smith College ,
Northampton, Massachusetts
1. Average Density: 96 percent of reference laboratory density according to ASTM D 1559,
but not less than 94 percent nor greater than 100 percent.
2. Average Density: 92 percent of reference maximum theoretical density according to
ASTM D 2041, but not less than 90 percent nor greater than 96 percent.
D. Finish Rolling: Finish roll paved surfaces to remove roller marks while hot-mix asphalt is still
warm.
E. Edge Shaping: While surface is being compacted and finished, trim edges of pavement to proper
alignment. Bevel edges while still hot, with back of rake or smooth iron. Compact thoroughly
using tamper or other satisfactory method.
w.
F. Repairs: Remove paved areas that are defective or contaminated with foreign materials. Remove
paving course over area affected and replace with fresh, hot-mix asphalt. Compact by rolling to
specified density and surface smoothness.
G. Protection: After final rolling, do not permit vehicular traffic on pavement until it has cooled
and hardened. ,
H. Erect barricades to protect paving from traffic until mixture has cooled enough not to become
marked.
3.7 INSTALLATION TOLERANCES
A. Thickness: Compact each course to produce the thickness indicated within the following
tolerances:
1. Base Course: Plus 1/2 inch(13 mm), no minus.
2. Surface Course: Plus 1/4 inch (6 mm), no minus.
B. Surface Smoothness: Compact each course to produce a surface smoothness within the following
tolerances as determined by using a 10-foot (3-m) straightedge applied transversely or
longitudinally to paved areas:
1. Base Course: 3/8 inch(9 mm).
2. Surface Course: 1/4 inch (6 mm).
END OF SECTION 02511
Project No. 00058 02511 HOT-MIX ASPHALT PAVING-6 ..
Renovations to Parsons Annex
Smith College
Northampton, Massachusetts
4. Begin applying mix along centerline of crown for crowned sections and on high side of
ON one-way slopes, unless otherwise indicated.
5. Regulate paver machine speed to obtain smooth, continuous surface free of pulls and tears
in asphalt-paving mat.
B. Place paving in consecutive strips not less than 10 feet (3 m)wide, except where infill edge strips
of a lesser width are required.
'® 1. After first strip has been placed and rolled, place succeeding strips and extend rolling to
overlap previous strips. Complete asphalt base course for a section before placing asphalt
surface course.
C. Promptly correct surface irregularities in paving course behind paver. Use suitable hand tools to
remove excess material forming high spots. Fill depressions with hot-mix asphalt to prevent
�.„ segregation of mix; use suitable hand tools to smooth surface.
go 3.5 JOINTS
A. Construct joints to ensure continuous bond between adjoining paving sections. Construct joints
ON free of depressions with same texture and smoothness as other sections of hot-mix asphalt course.
1. Clean contact surfaces and apply tack coat.
2. Offset longitudinal joints in successive courses a minimum of 6 inches (150 mm).
3. Offset transverse joints in successive courses a minimum of 24 inches (600 mm).
4. Construct transverse joints by bulkhead method or sawed vertical face method as described
in AI's "The Asphalt Handbook."
5. Compact joints as soon as hot-mix asphalt will bear roller weight without excessive
displacement.
6. Compact asphalt at joints to a density within 2 percent of specified course density.
.0
3.6 COMPACTION
w
A. General: Begin compaction as soon as placed hot-mix paving will bear roller weight without
excessive displacement. Compact hot-mix paving with hot, hand tampers or vibratory-plate
compactors in areas inaccessible to rollers.
1. Complete compaction before mix temperature cools to 185 deg F(85 deg Q.
B. Breakdown Rolling: Accomplish breakdown or initial rolling immediately after rolling joints and
outside edge. Examine surface immediately after breakdown rolling for indicated crown, grade,
and smoothness. Repair surfaces by loosening displaced material, filling with hot-mix asphalt,
and rerolling to required elevations.
C. Intermediate Rolling: Begin intermediate rolling immediately after breakdown rolling, while hot-
mix asphalt is still hot enough to achieve specified density. Continue rolling until hot-mix
asphalt course has been uniformly compacted to the following density:
Project No. 00058 02511 HOT-MIX ASPHALT PAVING-5
WW
Renovations to Parsons Annex
Smith College
Northampton, Massachusetts .W
A. Patching: Saw cut perimeter of patch and excavate existing pavement section to sound base.
Recompact new subgrade. Excavate rectangular or trapezoidal patches, extending 12 inches (300
mm) into adjacent sound pavement, unless otherwise indicated. Cut excavation faces vertically. ""
1. Tack coat faces of excavation and allow to cure before paving.
2. Fill excavation with dense-graded, hot-mix asphalt base mix and, while still hot, compact
flush with adjacent surface.
3. Partially fill excavation with dense-graded, hot-mix asphalt base mix and compact while still
hot. Cover asphalt base course with compacted, hot-mix surface layer finished flush with
adjacent surfaces.
B. Tack Coat: Apply uniformly to existing surfaces of previously constructed asphalt or portland
cement concrete paving and to surfaces abutting or projecting into new, hot mix asphalt
pavement. Apply at a uniform rate of 0.05 to 0.15 gal./sq.yd. (0.2 to 0.7 L/sq. m)of surface.
1. Allow tack coat to cure undisturbed before paving.
2. Avoid smearing or staining adjoining surfaces, appurtenances, and surroundings. Remove
spillages and clean affected surfaces.
3.3 SURFACE PREPARATION
A. General: Immediately before placing asphalt materials, remove loose and deleterious material
from substrate surfaces. Ensure that prepared subgrade is ready to receive paving.
1. Sweep loose granular particles from surface of unbound-aggregate base course. Do not
dislodge or disturb aggregate embedded in compacted surface of base course.
B. Prime Coat: Apply uniformly over surface of compacted-aggregate base at a rate of 0.15 to 0.50
gal./sq. yd. (0.7 to 2.3 L/sq. m). Apply enough material to penetrate and seal, but not flood,
surface. Allow prime coat to cure for 72 hours minimum.
1. If prime coat is not entirely absorbed within 24 hours after application, spread sand over
surface to blot excess asphalt. Use just enough sand to prevent pickup under traffic.
Remove loose sand by sweeping before pavement is placed and after volatiles have
evaporated.
2. Protect primed substrate from damage until ready to receive paving.
3.4 HOT-MIX ASPHALT PLACING
A. Machine place hot-mix asphalt mix on prepared surface, spread uniformly, and strike off. Place
asphalt mix by hand to areas inaccessible to equipment in a manner that prevents segregation of
mix. Place each course to required grade, cross section, and thickness,when compacted.
1. Place hot-mix asphalt base course in number of lifts and thicknesses indicated.
2. Place hot-mix asphalt surface course in single lift. .A
3. Spread mix at minimum temperature of 250 deg F(121 deg Q.
Project No. 00058 02511 HOT-MIX ASPHALT PAVING-4
Renovations to Parsons Annex
Im Smith College
Northampton, Massachusetts
2.2 ASPHALT MATERIALS
No A. Asphalt Cement: ASTM. D 3381 for viscosity-graded material; ASTM D 946 for penetration-
graded material.
B. Asphalt Cement: ASTM D 3381 for viscosity-graded material.
C. Undersealing Asphalt: ASTM D 3141, pumping consistency.
D. Prime Coat: ASTM D 2027; medium-curing cutback asphalt; MC-30, MC-70, or MC-250.
E. Tack Coat: ASTM D 977, emulsified asphalt or ASTM D 2397, cationic emulsified asphalt, slow
setting, factory diluted in water, of suitable grade and consistency for application.
F. Water: Potable.
�w
2.3 AUXILIARY MATERIALS
A. Sand: ASTM D 1073, Grade Nos. 2 or 3.
2.4 MIXES
A. Hot-Mix Asphalt: Provide dense, hot-laid, hot-mix asphalt plant mixes approved by authorities
having jurisdiction; designed according to procedures in AI's "Mix Design Methods for Asphalt
Concrete and Other Hot-Mix Types"; and complying with the following requirements:
am 1. Base Course: MAHD Class 1, Bituminous Concrete; Section M3.11.03, Table A, Dense
Binder Course.
2. Surface Course: MAHD Class 1, Bituminous Concrete; Section M3.11.03, Table A,
w
Dense Mix.
PART 3 -EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Verify that subgrade is dry and in suitable condition to support paving and imposed loads.
B. Proof-roll subbase using heavy, pneumatic-tired rollers to locate areas that are unstable or that
require further compaction.
C. Notify Architect in writing of any unsatisfactory conditions. Do not begin paving installation
until these conditions have been satisfactorily corrected.
** 3.2 PATCHING AND REPAIRS
Project No. 00058 02511 HOT-MIX ASPHALT PAVING-3
Renovations to Parsons Annex
Smith College aw
Northampton, Massachusetts
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Installer Qualifications: Engage an experienced installer who has completed hot-mix asphalt
paving similar in material, design, and extent to that indicated for this Project and with a record
of successful in-service performance.
B. Regulatory Requirements: Conform to applicable standards of Commonwealth of Massachusetts
Highway Department, "Standard Specifications for Highways and Bridges", latest edition and
Addenda.
1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE,AND HANDLING
A. Deliver pavement-marking materials to Project site in original packages with seals unbroken and
bearing manufacturer's labels containing brand name and type of material, date of manufacture,
and directions for storage.
1.7 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Environmental Limitations: Do not apply asphalt materials if substrate is wet or excessively damp
or if the following conditions are not met:
1. Prime and Tack Coats: Minimum surface temperature of 60 deg F(15.5 deg C).
2. Asphalt Base Course: Minimum surface temperature of 40 deg F (4 deg C) and rising at ..
time of placement.
3. Asphalt Surface Course: Minimum surface temperature of 60 deg F(15.5 deg C) at time of
placement. s
PART 2-PRODUCTS
2.1 AGGREGATES
A. General: Use materials and gradations that have performed satisfactorily in previous installations.
B. Coarse Aggregate: Sound; angular crushed stone; crushed gravel; or properly cured, crushed
blast-furnace slag; complying with ASTM D 692.
C. Fine Aggregate: Sharp-edged natural sand or sand prepared from stone; gravel, properly cured
blast-furnace slag, or combinations thereof; complying with ASTM D 1073.
1. For hot-mix asphalt, limit natural sand to a maximum of 20 percent by weight of the total .�
aggregate mass.
D. Mineral Filler: Rock or slag dust, hydraulic cement, or other inert material complying with
.ws
ASTM D 242.
Project No. 00058 02511 HOT-MIX ASPHALT PAVING-2
Renovations to Parsons Annex
on Smith College
Northampton, Massachusetts
SECTION 02511-HOT-MIX ASPHALT PAVING
W
PART 1 -GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
4M
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
40 A. This Section includes the following:
1. Hot-mix asphalt paving.
2. Hot-mix asphalt patching.
3. Hot-mix asphalt overlays.
4. Pavement-marking paint.
B. Related Sections include the following:
W 1. Division 2 Section "Earthwork" for aggregate subbase and base courses and aggregate
pavement shoulders.
1.3 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
A. Provide hot-mix asphalt pavement according to the materials, workmanship, and other applicable
requirements of the standard specifications of the state or of authorities having jurisdiction.
1. Standard Specification: As indicated.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each product specified. Include technical data and tested physical and
performance properties.
B. Job-Mix Designs: For each job mix proposed for the Work.
on C. Qualification Data: For firms and persons specified in the "Quality Assurance" Article to
demonstrate their capabilities and experience. Include lists of completed projects with project
names and addresses, names and addresses of architects and owners, and other information
specified.
Project No. 00058 02511 HOT-MIX ASPHALT PAVING-1
go
Renovations to Parsons Annex
Smith College
Northampton, Massachusetts
E. When testing agency reports that subgrades, fills, or backfills have not achieved degree of
compaction specified, scarify and moisten or aerate, or remove and replace soil to depth required;
recompact and retest until specified compaction is obtained.
on 3.20 PROTECTION
A. Protecting Graded Areas: Protect newly graded areas from traffic, freezing, and erosion. Keep
■„ free of trash and debris.
B. Repair and reestablish grades to specified tolerances where completed or partially completed
go surfaces become eroded, rutted, settled, or where they lose compaction due to subsequent
construction operations or weather conditions.
1. Scarify or remove and replace soil material to depth as directed by Architect; reshape and
recompact.
go C. Where settling occurs before Project correction period elapses, remove finished surfacing, backfill
with additional soil material, compact, and reconstruct surfacing.
1. Restore appearance, quality, and condition of finished surfacing to match adjacent work,
"' and eliminate evidence of restoration to the greatest extent possible.
on 3.21 DISPOSAL OF SURPLUS AND WASTE MATERIALS
A. Disposal: Remove surplus satisfactory soil and waste material, including unsatisfactory soil, trash,
No and debris, and legally dispose of it off Owner's property.
1. Remove waste material, including unsatisfactory soil, trash, and debris, and legally dispose
go of it off Owner's property.
END OF SECTION 02300
eew
4W
Project No. 00058 02300 EARTHWORK-11
..
Renovations to Parsons Annex
Smith College
Northampton, Massachusetts
1. Compact each course of filter material to 95 percent of maximum dry density according to
ASTM D 698.
3.18 SUBBASE AND BASE COURSES
A. Under pavements and walks,place subbase course on prepared subgrade and as follows:
1. Place base course material over subbase.
2. Compact subbase and base courses at optimum moisture content to required grades, lines,
cross sections, and thickness to not less than 95 percent of maximum dry unit weight
according to ASTM D 1557. .,.
3. Shape subbase and base to required crown elevations and cross-slope grades.
4. When thickness of compacted subbase or base course is 6 inches (150 mm) or less, place
materials in a single layer.
5. When thickness of compacted subbase or base course exceeds 6 inches (150 mm), place
materials in equal layers, with no layer more than 6 inches (150 mm) thick or less than 3
inches (75 mm) thick when compacted.
B. Pavement Shoulders: Place shoulders along edges of subbase and base course to prevent lateral
movement. Construct shoulders, at least 12 inches (300 mm)wide, of satisfactory soil materials
and compact simultaneously with each subbase and base layer to not less than 95 percent of
maximum dry unit weight according to ASTM D 1557.
3.19 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Testing Agency: Engage a qualified independent geotechnical engineering testing agency to
perform field quality-control testing.
B. Allow testing agency to inspect and test subgrades and each fill or backfill layer. Proceed with
subsequent earthwork only after test results for previously completed work comply with
requirements.
C. Footing Subgrade: At footing subgrades, at least one test of each soil stratum will be performed
to verify design bearing capacities. Subsequent verification and approval of other footing
subgrades may be based on a visual comparison of subgrade with tested subgrade when approved
by Architect.
D. Testing agency will test compaction of soils in place according to ASTM D 1556, ASTM D 2167,
ASTM D 2922, and ASTM D 2937, as applicable. Tests will be performed at the following
locations and frequencies:
1. Paved and Building Slab Areas: At subgrade and at each compacted fill and backfill layer,
at least one test for every 2000 sq. ft. (186 sq. m) or less of paved area or building slab, but
in no case fewer than three tests.
Project No. 00058 02300 EARTHWORK-10 �,
MR
Renovations to Parsons Annex
Smith College
om Northampton, Massachusetts
D. Compact soil to not less than the following percentages of maximum dry unit weight according to
ASTM D 698:
40
1. Under structures, building slabs, steps, and pavements, scarify and recompact top 12
inches (300 mm) of existing subgrade and each layer of backfill or fill material at 95
wr percent.
2. Under walkways, scarify and recompact top 6 inches (150 mm) below subgrade and
compact each layer of backfill or fill material at 92 percent.
3. Under lawn or unpaved areas, scarify and recompact top 6 inches (150 mm) below
subgrade and compact each layer of backfill or fill material at 85 percent.
3.16 GRADING
A. General: Uniformly grade areas to a smooth surface, free from irregular surface changes. Comply
Aw with compaction requirements and grade to cross sections, lines, and elevations indicated.
1. Provide a smooth transition between adjacent existing grades and new grades.
2. Cut out soft spots, fill low spots, and trim high spots to comply with required surface
tolerances.
B. Site Grading: Slope grades to direct water away from buildings and to prevent ponding. Finish
subgrades to required elevations within the following tolerances:
W 1. Lawn or Unpaved Areas: Plus or minus 1 inch(25 mm).
2. Walks: Plus or minus 1/2 inch (13 mm).
3. Pavements: Plus or minus 1/2 inch(13 mm).
w
C. Grading inside Building Lines: Finish subgrade to a tolerance of 1/2 inch (13 mm) when tested
with a 10-foot(3-m) straightedge.
3.17 SUBSURFACE DRAINAGE
A. Drainage Piping: Drainage pipe is specified in Division 2 Section "Foundation Drainage
Systems."
B. Subsurface Drain: Place a layer of drainage fabric around perimeter of drainage trench as
indicated. Place a 6-inch (150-mm) course of filter material on drainage fabric to support
drainage pipe. Encase drainage pipe in a minimum of 12 inches (300 mm) of filter material and
++ wrap in drainage fabric, overlapping sides and ends at least 6 inches(150 mm).
1. Compact each course of filter material to 95 percent of maximum dry unit weight
according to ASTM D 698.
C. Drainage Backfill: Place and compact filter material over subsurface drain, in width indicated, to
within 12 inches (300 mm)of final subgrade. Overlay drainage backfill with one layer of drainage
fabric, overlapping sides and ends at least 6 inches (150 mm).
Project No. 00058 02300 EARTHWORK-9
s
Renovations to Parsons Annex
Smith College
Northampton, Massachusetts
F. Fill voids with approved backfill materials while shoring and bracing, and as sheeting is removed.
G. Place and compact final backfill of satisfactory soil material to final subgrade.
H. Install warning tape directly above utilities, 12 inches (300 mm) below finished grade, except 6
inches (150 mm)below subgrade under pavements and slabs.
3.13 FILL .p
A. Preparation: Remove vegetation, topsoil, debris, unsatisfactory soil materials, obstructions, and
deleterious materials from ground surface before placing fills.
B. Plow, scarify, bench, or break up sloped surfaces steeper than 1 vertical to 4 horizontal so fill
material will bond with existing material.
C. Place and compact fill material in layers to required elevations as follows:
1. Under grass and planted areas, use satisfactory soil material.
2. Under walks and pavements, use sub-base material.
3. Under steps and ramps, use base fill.
4. Under building slabs, use base fill.
5. Under footings and foundations, use sub-base fill.
3.14 MOISTURE CONTROL
A. Uniformly moisten or aerate subgrade and each subsequent fill or backfill layer before
compaction to within 2 percent of optimum moisture content.
1. Do not place backfill or fill material on surfaces that are muddy, frozen, or contain frost or
ice.
2. Remove and replace, or scarify and air-dry, otherwise satisfactory soil material that exceeds
optimum moisture content by 2 percent and is too wet to compact to specified dry unit
weight.
3.15 COMPACTION OF BACKFILLS AND FILLS
A. Place backfill and fill materials in layers not more than 8 inches (200 mm) in loose depth for
material compacted by heavy compaction equipment, and not more than 4 inches (100 mm) in .W
loose depth for material compacted by hand-operated tampers.
B. Place backfill and fill materials evenly on all sides of structures to required elevations, and „p
uniformly along the full length of each structure.
C. Compact soil to not less than the following percentages of maximum dry unit weight according to
.R
ASTM D 1557:
Project No. 00058 02300 EARTHWORK-8
MR
Renovations to Parsons Annex
Smith College
Northampton, Massachusetts
1. Fill unauthorized excavations under other construction or utility pipe as directed by
Architect.
■w
3.10 STORAGE OF SOIL MATERIALS
40
A. Stockpile borrow materials and satisfactory excavated soil materials. Stockpile soil materials
without intermixing. Place, grade, and shape stockpiles to drain surface water. Cover to prevent
windblown dust.
1. Stockpile soil materials away from edge of excavations. Do not store within drip line of
remaining trees.
op
3.11 BACKFILL
A. Place and compact backfill in excavations promptly,but not before completing the following:
"' 1. Construction below finish grade including, where applicable, dampproofing,
waterproofing, and perimeter insulation.
2. Surveying locations of underground utilities for record documents.
W 3. Inspecting and testing underground utilities.
4. Removing concrete formwork.
5. Removing trash and debris.
aw 6. Removing temporary shoring and bracing, and sheeting.
7. Installing permanent or temporary horizontal bracing on horizontally supported walls.
go
3.12 UTILITY TRENCH BACKFILL
A. Place and compact bedding course on trench bottoms and where indicated. Shape bedding
course to provide continuous support for bells, joints, and barrels of pipes and for joints, fittings,
and bodies of conduits.
B. Backfill trenches excavated under footings and within 18 inches (450 mm) of bottom of footings;
fill with concrete to elevation of bottom of footings.
C. Provide 4-inch- (100-mm-) thick, concrete-base slab support for piping or conduit less than 30
inches (750 mm)below surface of roadways. After installing and testing, completely encase piping
or conduit in a minimum of 4 inches (100 mm) of concrete before backfilling or placing roadway
on subbase.
D. Place and compact initial backfill of subbase material, free of particles larger than 1 inch (25 mm),
W to a height of 12 inches (300 mm) over the utility pipe or conduit.
1. Carefully compact material under pipe haunches and bring backfill evenly up on both sides
,,. and along the full length of utility piping or conduit to avoid damage or displacement of
utility system.
no E. Coordinate backfilling with utilities testing.
Project No. 00058 02300 EARTHWORK-7
Renovations to Parsons Annex
Smith College
Northampton, Massachusetts
minus 1 inch (25 mm). Do not disturb bottom of excavations intended for bearing
surface.
3.6 EXCAVATION FOR WALKS AND PAVEMENTS
A. Excavate surfaces under walks and pavements to indicated cross sections, elevations, and grades.
3.7 EXCAVATION FOR UTILITY TRENCHES
A. Excavate trenches to indicated gradients, lines, depths, and elevations.
1. Beyond building perimeter, excavate trenches to allow installation of top of pipe below
frost line.
aw
B. Excavate trenches to uniform widths to provide a working clearance on each side of pipe or
conduit. Excavate trench walls vertically from trench bottom to 12 inches (300 mm) higher than
top of pipe or conduit, unless otherwise indicated.
1. Clearance: 12 inches(300 mm) on each side of pipe or conduit.
C. Trench Bottoms: Excavate trenches 4 inches (100 mm) deeper than bottom of pipe elevation to
allow for bedding course. Hand excavate for bell of pipe.
1. Excavate trenches 6 inches (150 mm) deeper than elevation required in rock or other
unyielding bearing material to allow for bedding course.
3.8 APPROVAL OF SUBGRADE
A. Notify Architect when excavations have reached required subgrade.
B. If Architect determines that unsatisfactory soil is present, continue excavation and replace with
compacted backfill or fill material as directed.
1. Additional excavation and replacement material will be paid for according to Contract
provisions for changes in the Work. *�
C. Reconstruct subgrades damaged by freezing temperatures, frost, rain, accumulated water, or
construction activities, as directed by Architect.
3.9 UNAUTHORIZED EXCAVATION
A. Fill unauthorized excavation under foundations or wall footings by extending bottom elevation of
concrete foundation or footing to excavation bottom, without altering top elevation. Lean
concrete fill may be used when approved by Architect.
Project No. 00058 02300 EARTHWORK-6 .r
Renovations to Parsons Annex
Smith College
Northampton, Massachusetts
3.2 DEWATERING
A. Prevent surface water and ground water from entering excavations, from ponding on prepared
subgrades, and from flooding Project site and surrounding area.
a�. B. Protect subgrades from softening, undermining, washout, and damage by rain or water
accumulation.
40 1. Reroute surface water runoff away from excavated areas. Do not allow water to accumulate
in excavations. Do not use excavated trenches as temporary drainage ditches.
2. Install a dewatering system to keep subgrades dry and convey ground water away from
no excavations. Maintain until dewatering is no longer required.
3.3 EXPLOSIVES
A. Explosives: Do not use explosives.
so
3.4 EXCAVATION, GENERAL
No A. Unclassified Excavation: Excavation to subgrade elevations regardless of the character of surface
and subsurface conditions encountered, including rock, soil materials, and obstructions.
1. If excavated materials intended for fill and backfill include unsatisfactory soil materials and
rock, replace with satisfactory soil materials.
go B. Classified Excavation: Excavation to subgrade elevations classified as earth and rock. Rock
excavation will be paid for by adjusting the Contract Sum.
1. Earth excavation includes excavating pavements and obstructions visible on surface;
underground structures, utilities, and other items indicated to be removed; together with
soil,boulders, and other materials not classified as rock or unauthorized excavation.
2. Rock excavation includes removal and disposal of rock.
a. Do not excavate rock until it has been classified and cross-sectioned by Architect.
3.5 EXCAVATION FOR STRUCTURES
A. Excavate to indicated elevations and dimensions within a tolerance of plus or minus 1 inch (25
mm). Extend excavations a sufficient distance from structures for placing and removing concrete
+4w
formwork, for installing services and other construction, and for inspections.
1. Excavations for Footings and Foundations: Do not disturb bottom of excavation.
Excavate by hand to final grade just before placing concrete reinforcement. Trim bottoms
to required lines and grades to leave solid base to receive other work.
2. Excavation for Underground Tanks, Basins, and Mechanical or Electrical Utility
Structures: Excavate to elevations and dimensions indicated within a tolerance of plus or
Project No. 00058 02300 EARTHWORM
Renovations to Parsons Annex
Smith College
Northampton, Massachusetts
H. Drainage Fill: Washed, narrowly graded mixture of crushed stone, or crushed or uncrushed
gravel; ASTM D 448; coarse-aggregate grading Size 57; with 100 percent passing a 1-1/2-inch (38-
mm) sieve and 0 to 5 percent passing a No. 8(2.36-mm)sieve. w
I. Filter Material: Narrowly graded mixture of natural or crushed gravel, or crushed stone and
natural sand; ASTM D 448; coarse-aggregate grading Size 67; with 100 percent passing a 1-inch
(25-mm)sieve and 0 to 5 percent passing a No. 4(4.75-mm)sieve.
J. Impervious Fill: Clayey gravel and sand mixture capable of compacting to a dense state.
2.2 ACCESSORIES
A. Warning Tape: Acid- and alkali-resistant polyethylene film warning tape manufactured for
marking and identifying underground utilities, 6 inches (150 mm) wide and 4 mils (0.1 mm) ..
thick, continuously inscribed with a description of the utility; colored as follows:
1. Red: Electric.
2. Yellow: Gas, oil, steam, and dangerous materials. e
3. Orange: Telephone and other communications.
4. Blue: Water systems.
5. Green: Sewer systems. "
B. Drainage Fabric: Nonwoven geotextile, specifically manufactured as a drainage geotextile; made
from polyolefins, polyesters, or polyamides; and with the following minimum properties
determined according to ASTM D 4759 and referenced standard test methods:
1. Grab Tensile Strength: 110 lbf(490 N);ASTM D 4632.
2. Tear Strength: 40 lbf(178 N);ASTM D 4533.
3. Puncture Resistance: 50 lbf(222 N);ASTM D 4833.
4. Water Flow Rate: 150 gpm per sq. ft. (100 L/s per sq. m);ASTM D 4491. .�
5. Apparent Opening Size: No. 50(0.3 mm);ASTM D 4751.
PART 3 -EXECUTION
3.1 PREPARATION
A. Protect structures, utilities, sidewalks, pavements, and other facilities from damage caused by
settlement, lateral movement, undermining, washout, and other hazards created by earthwork
operations.
B. Protect subgrades and foundation soils against freezing temperatures or frost. Provide protective .�
insulating materials as necessary.
C. Provide erosion-control measures to prevent erosion or displacement of soils and discharge of soil-
bearing water runoff or airborne dust to adjacent properties and walkways.
Project No. 00058 02300 EARTHWORK-4
an
Renovations to Parsons Annex
Smith College
Northampton, Massachusetts
A. Geotechnical Testing Agency Qualifications: An independent testing agency qualified according
to ASTM E 329 to conduct soil materials and rock-definition testing, as documented according to
ASTM D 3 740 and ASTM E 548.
1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Existing Utilities: Do not interrupt utilities serving facilities occupied by Owner or others unless
w permitted in writing by Architect and then only after arranging to provide temporary utility
services according to requirements indicated:
1. Notify Architect not less than two days in advance of proposed utility interruptions.
2. Do not proceed with utility interruptions without Architects written permission.
3. Contact utility-locator service for area where Project is located before excavating.
on
B. Demolish and completely remove from site existing underground utilities indicated to be
removed. Coordinate with utility companies to shut off services if lines are active.
PART 2-PRODUCTS
40
2.1 SOIL MATERIALS
40 A. General: Provide borrow soil materials when sufficient satisfactory soil materials are not available
from excavations.
W B. Satisfactory Soils: ASTM D 2487 soil classification groups GW, GP, GM, SW, SP, and SM, or a
combination of these group symbols; free of rock or gravel larger than 3 inches (75 mm) in any
dimension, debris,waste, frozen materials,vegetation, and other deleterious matter.
40 C. Unsatisfactory Soils: ASTM D 2487 soil classification groups GC, SC, ML, MH, CL, CH, OL,
OH, and PT, or a combination of these group symbols.
1. Unsatisfactory soils also include satisfactory soils not maintained within 2 percent of
optimum moisture content at time of compaction.
D. Backfill and Fill: Satisfactory soil materials.
E. Subbase: Naturally or artificially graded mixture of natural or crushed gravel, crushed stone, and
�sr natural or crushed sand; ASTM D 2940; with at least 90 percent passing a 1-1/2- inch (38-mm)
sieve and not more than 12 percent passing a No. 200(0.075-mm) sieve.
F. Base: Naturally or artificially graded mixture of natural or crushed gravel, crushed stone, and
natural or crushed sand; ASTM D 2940; with at least 95 percent passing a 1-1/2-inch (38-mm)
sieve and not more than 8 percent passing a No. 200(0.075-mm)sieve.
G. Bedding: Naturally or artificially graded mixture of natural or crushed gravel, crushed stone, and
natural or crushed sand; ASTM D 2940; except with 100 percent passing a 1-inch (25-mm) sieve
and not more than 8 percent passing a No. 200 (0.075-mm)sieve.
Project No. 00058 02300 EARTHWORK-3
Renovations to Parsons Annex
Smith College
Northampton, Massachusetts
F. Excavation: Removal of material encountered above subgrade elevations.
1. Additional Excavation: Excavation below subgrade elevations as directed by Architect. ..
Additional excavation and replacement material will be paid for according to Contract
provisions for changes in the Work.
2. Bulk Excavation: Excavations more than 10 feet(3 m) in width and pits more than 30 feet
(9 m)in either length or width.
3. Unauthorized Excavation: Excavation below subgrade elevations or beyond indicated
dimensions without direction by Architect. Unauthorized excavation, as well as remedial
work directed by Architect, shall be without additional compensation.
G. Fill: Soil materials used to raise existing grades.
H. Rock: Rock material in beds, ledges, unstratified masses, and conglomerate deposits and boulders
of rock material exceeding 1 cu. yd. (0.76 cu. m) for bulk excavation or 3/4 cu. yd. (0.57 cu. m)
for footing, trench, and pit excavation that cannot be removed without systematic drilling, ram
hammering, ripping, or blasting,when permitted:
I. Structures: Buildings, footings, foundations, retaining walls, slabs, tanks, curbs, mechanical and
electrical appurtenances, or other man-made stationary features constructed above or below the
ground surface.
J. Subbase Course: Layer placed between the subgrade and base course for asphalt paving, or layer
placed between the subgrade and a concrete pavement or walk.
K. Subgrade: Surface or elevation remaining after completing excavation, or top surface of a fill or
backfill immediately below subbase, drainage fill, or topsoil materials.
L. Utilities include on-site underground pipes, conduits, ducts, and cables, as well as underground
services within buildings.
■W
1.4 SUBMITTALS
or
A. Product Data: For the following:
1. Each type of plastic warning tape. Op
2. Drainage fabric.
B. Samples: For the following:
1. 12-by-12-inch (300-by-300-mm)sample of drainage fabric. OW
C. Material Test Reports: From a qualified testing agency indicating and interpreting test results for
compliance of the following with requirements indicated:
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
Project No. 00058 02300 EARTHWORK-2
Renovations to Parsons Annex
Smith College
Northampton, Massachusetts
SECTION 02300,EARTHWORK
PART 1 -GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
an A. This Section includes the following:
1. Preparing subgrades for slabs-on-grade,walks, pavements, lawns, and plantings.
an 2. Excavating and backfilling for buildings and structures.
3. Drainage course for slabs-on-grade.
4. Subbase course for concrete walks and pavements.
go 5. Base course for asphalt paving.
6. Subsurface drainage backfill for walls and trenches.
7. Excavating and backfilling trenches within building lines.
8. Excavating and backfilling trenches for buried mechanical and electrical utilities and pits
for buried utility structures.
B. Related Sections include the following:
1. Division 2 Section "Landscaping" for finish grading, including placing and preparing
topsoil for lawns and plantings.
2. Division 3 Section"Cast-in-Place Concrete" for granular course over vapor retarder.
3. Division 15 and 16 Sections for excavating and backfilling buried mechanical and electrical
utilities and buried utility structures.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
" * A. Backfill: Soil materials used to fill an excavation.
1. Initial Backfill: Backfill placed beside and over pipe in a trench, including haunches to
support sides of pipe.
2. Final Backfill: Backfill placed over initial backfill to fill a trench.
B. Base Course: Layer placed between the subbase course and asphalt paving.
C. Bedding Course: Layer placed over the excavated subgrade in a trench before laying pipe.
D. Borrow: Satisfactory soil imported from off-site for use as fill or backfill.
E. Drainage Course: Layer supporting slab-on-grade used to minimize capillary flow of pore water.
go s
Project No. 00058 02300 EARTHWORK-1
Renovations to Parsons Annex
Smith College
"a Northampton, Massachusetts
C. Comply with safety standards for cleaning. Do not burn waste materials. Do not bury debris or
excess materials on Owner's property. Do not discharge volatile, harmful, or dangerous materials
00 into drainage systems. Remove waste materials from Project site and dispose of lawfully.
W END OF SECTION 01770
w
�.r
�s
ass
4W
W
an
40
Project No. 00058 01770 CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES-7
Renovations to Parsons Annex
Smith College
Northampton, Massachusetts
1. Complete the following cleaning operations before requesting inspection for certification
of Substantial Completion for entire Project or for a portion of Project:
a. Clean Project site, yard, and grounds, in areas disturbed by construction activities,
including landscape development areas, of rubbish, waste material, litter, and other
foreign substances.
b. Sweep paved areas broom clean. Remove petrochemical spills, stains, and other
foreign deposits.
C. Rake grounds that are neither planted nor paved to a smooth, even-textured surface.
d. Remove tools, construction equipment, machinery, and surplus material from
Project site.
e. Clean exposed exterior and interior hard-surfaced finishes to a dirt-free condition,
free of stains, films, and similar foreign substances. Avoid disturbing natural
weathering of exterior surfaces. Restore reflective surfaces to their original
condition. or
f. Remove debris and surface dust from limited access spaces, including roofs,
plenums, shafts, trenches, equipment vaults, manholes, attics, and similar spaces.
g. Sweep concrete floors broom clean in unoccupied spaces. .�
h. Vacuum carpet and similar soft surfaces, removing debris and excess nap, shampoo
if visible soil or stains remain.
i. Clean transparent materials, including mirrors and glass in doors and windows.
Remove glazing compounds and other noticeable, vision-obscuring materials.
Replace chipped or broken glass and other damaged transparent materials. Polish
mirrors and glass, taking care not to scratch surfaces.
j. Remove labels that are not permanent.
k. Touch up and otherwise repair and restore marred, exposed finishes and surfaces.
Replace finishes and surfaces that cannot be satisfactorily repaired or restored or
that already show evidence of repair or restoration.
1) Do not paint over "UL" and similar labels, including mechanical and
electrical nameplates. "
1. Wipe surfaces of mechanical and electrical equipment, and similar equipment.
Remove excess lubrication, paint and mortar droppings, and other foreign
substances.
M. Replace parts subject to unusual operating conditions.
n. Clean plumbing fixtures to a sanitary condition, free of stains, including stains
resulting from water exposure.
o. Replace disposable air filters and clean permanent air filters. Clean exposed surfaces
of diffusers, registers, and grills.
P. Clean ducts, blowers, and coils if units were operated without filters during
construction.
q. Clean light fixtures, lamps, globes, and reflectors to function with full efficiency.
Replace burned-out bulbs, and those noticeably dimmed by hours of use, and
defective and noisy starters in fluorescent and mercury vapor fixtures to comply with
requirements for new fixtures.
r. Leave Project clean and ready for occupancy.
Project No. 00058 01770 CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES-6
OR
Renovations to Parsons Annex
Smith College
Northampton, Massachusetts
B. Organize operation and maintenance manuals into suitable sets of manageable size. Bind and
index data in heavy-duty, 3-ring, vinyl-covered, loose-leaf binders, in thickness necessary to
accommodate contents, with pocket inside the covers to receive folded oversized sheets. Identify
each binder on front and spine with the printed title "OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE
MANUAL," Project name, and subject matter of contents.
1.8 WARRANTIES
A. Submittal Time: Submit written warranties on request of Architect for designated portions of the
Work where commencement of warranties other than date of Substantial Completion is
indicated.
B. Organize warranty documents into an orderly sequence based on the table of contents of the
Project Manual.
1. Bind warranties and bonds in heavy-duty, 3-ring, vinyl-covered, loose-leaf binders, thickness
as necessary to accommodate contents, and sized to receive 8-1/2-by-1l-inch (115-by-280-
mm) paper.
C. Provide additional copies of each warranty to include in operation and maintenance manuals.
PART 2-PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS
a�w
A. Cleaning Agents: Use cleaning materials and agents recommended by manufacturer or fabricator
of the surface to be cleaned. Do not use cleaning agents that are potentially hazardous to health
or property or that might damage finished surfaces.
PART 3 -EXECUTION
3.1 DEMONSTRATION AND TRAINING
A. Instruction: Instruct Owner's personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain systems, subsystems,
and equipment not part of a system.
uw
3.2 FINAL CLEANING
A. General: Provide final cleaning. Conduct cleaning and waste-removal operations to comply with
local laws and ordinances and Federal and local environmental and antipollution regulations.
B. Cleaning: Employ experienced workers or professional cleaners for final cleaning. Clean each
surface or unit to condition expected in an average commercial building cleaning and
maintenance program. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions.
Project No. 00058 01770 CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES-5
Renovations to Parsons Annex
Smith College
Northampton, Massachusetts
4. Note Construction Change Directive numbers, Change Order numbers, alternate
numbers, and similar identification where applicable.
5. Identify and date each Record Drawing; include the designation "PROJECT RECORD
DRAWING" in a prominent location. Organize into manageable sets; bind each set with
durable paper cover sheets. Include identification on cover sheets.
C. Record Specifications: Submit one copy of Projects Specifications, including addenda and
contract modifications. Mark copy to indicate the actual product installation where installation
varies from that indicated in Specifications, addenda, and contract modifications.
1. Give particular attention to information on concealed products and installations that
cannot be readily identified and recorded later.
2. Mark copy with the proprietary name and model number of products, materials, and
equipment furnished, including substitutions and product options selected.
3. Note related Change Orders, Record Drawings, and Product Data,where applicable. W
D. Miscellaneous Record Submittals: Assemble miscellaneous records required by other
Specification Sections for miscellaneous record keeping and submittal in connection with actual
performance of the Work. Bind or file miscellaneous records and identify each, ready for
continued use and reference.
1.7 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS
A. Assemble a complete set of operation and maintenance data indicating the operation and w■
maintenance of each system, subsystem, and piece of equipment not part of a system. Include
operation and maintenance data required in individual Specification Sections and as follows:
1. Operation Data:
a. Emergency instructions and procedures.
b. System, subsystem, and equipment descriptions, including operating standards.
C. Operating procedures, including startup, shutdown, seasonal, and weekend
operations. ,
d. Description of controls and sequence of operations.
e. Piping diagrams.
2. Maintenance Data:
a. Manufacturer's information, including list of spare parts.
b. Name, address, and telephone number of Installer or supplier.
C. Maintenance procedures.
d. Maintenance and service schedules for preventive and routine maintenance.
e. Maintenance record forms.
f. Sources of spare parts and maintenance materials.
g. Copies of maintenance service agreements.
h. Copies of warranties and bonds.
Project No. 00058 01770 CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES4
Renovations to Parsons Annex
Smith College
Northampton, Massachusetts
1.5 LIST OF INCOMPLETE ITEMS (PUNCH LIST)
A. Preparation: Submit three copies of list. Include name and identification of each space and area
affected by construction operations for incomplete items and items needing correction including,
if necessary, areas disturbed by Contractor that are outside the limits of construction.
1. Organize list of spaces in sequential order, starting with exterior areas first and proceeding
from lowest floor to highest floor.
2. Organize items applying to each space by major element, including categories for ceiling,
individual walls, floors, equipment, and building systems.
3. Include the following information at the top of each page:
O
a. Project name.
b. Date.
C. Name of Architect.
d. Name of Contractor.
e. Page number.
1.6 PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS
A. General: Do not use Project Record Documents for construction purposes. Protect Project
Record Documents from deterioration and loss. Provide access to Project Record Documents for
Architect's reference during normal working hours.
B. Record Drawings: Maintain and submit one set of blue- or black-line white prints of Contract
Drawings and Shop Drawings on site at all times. Make notations as the work progresses.
Maintain record of changes, deviations or adjustments on site documents. Transcribe field notes
to clean blue-or black-line prints to form Record Drawings.
40 1. Mark Record Prints to show the actual installation where installation varies from that
shown originally. Require individual or entity who obtained record data, whether
individual or entity is Installer, subcontractor, or similar entity, to prepare the marked-up
Record Prints.
a. Give particular attention to information on concealed elements that cannot be
readily identified and recorded later.
b. Accurately record information in an understandable drawing technique.
C. Record data as soon as possible after obtaining it. Record and check the markup
before enclosing concealed installations.
d. Mark Contract Drawings or Shop Drawings, whichever is most capable of showing
actual physical conditions, completely and accurately. Where Shop Drawings are
marked, show cross-reference on Contract Drawings.
2. Mark record sets with erasable, red-colored pencil. Use other colors to distinguish between
changes for different categories of the Work at the same location.
3. Mark important additional information that was either shown schematically or omitted
from original Drawings.
on
Project No. 00058 01770 CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES-3
Renovations to Parsons Annex
Smith College
Northampton, Massachusetts
6. Deliver tools, spare parts, extra materials, and similar items to location designated by
Owner. Label with manufacturer's name and model number where applicable.
7. Make final changeover of permanent locks and deliver keys to Owner. Advise Owner's
personnel of changeover in security provisions.
8. Complete startup testing of systems.
9. Submit test/adjust/balance records. IM
10. Terminate and remove temporary facilities from Project site, along with mockups,
construction tools, and similar elements.
11. Submit changeover information related to Owner's occupancy, use, operation, and ow
maintenance.
12. Complete final cleaning requirements, including touchup painting.
13. Touch up and otherwise repair and restore marred exposed finishes to eliminate visual .�
defects.
B. Inspection: Submit a written request for inspection for Substantial Completion. On receipt of we
request, Architect will either proceed with inspection or notify Contractor of unfulfilled
requirements. Architect will prepare the Certificate of Substantial Completion after inspection
or will notify Contractor of items, either on Contractor's list or additional items identified by
Architect, that must be completed or corrected before certificate will be issued.
1. Reinspection: Request reinspection when the Work identified in previous inspections as
incomplete is completed or corrected.
2. Results of completed inspection will form the basis of requirements for Final Completion.
1.4 FINAL COMPLETION
A. Preliminary Procedures: Before requesting final inspection for determining date of Final
Completion, complete the following:
1. Submit a final Application for Payment according to Division 1 Section "Payment w.
Procedures."
2. Submit certified copy of Architects Substantial Completion inspection list of items to be
completed or corrected (punch list), endorsed and dated by Architect. The certified copy
of the list shall state that each item has been completed or otherwise resolved for
acceptance.
3. Submit evidence of final, continuing insurance coverage complying with insurance
requirements.
4. Submit pest-control final inspection report and warranty.
5. Instruct Owner's personnel in operation, adjustment, and maintenance of products,
equipment, and systems.
B. Inspection: Submit a written request for final inspection for acceptance. On receipt of request,
Architect will either proceed with inspection or notify Contractor of unfulfilled requirements. .�
Architect will prepare a final Certificate for Payment after inspection or will notify Contractor of
construction that must be completed or corrected before certificate will be issued.
1. Reinspection: Request reinspection when the Work identified in previous inspections as
incomplete is completed or corrected.
.'r
Project No. 00058 01770 CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES-2
Renovations to Parsons Annex
Smith College
Northampton, Massachusetts
SECTION 01770-CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES
PART 1 -GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and other Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
sw
1.2 SUMMARY
on A. This Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for contract closeout,
including, but not limited to, the following:
1. Inspection procedures.
2. Project Record Documents.
3. Operation and maintenance manuals.
W, 4. Warranties.
5. Instruction of Owner's personnel.
6. Final cleaning.
+w
B. Related Sections include the following:
1. Division 1 Section "Payment Procedures" for requirements for Applications for Payment
for Substantial and Final Completion.
2. Division 1 Section"Execution Requirements" for progress cleaning of Project site.
an 3. Divisions 2 through 16 Sections for specific closeout and special cleaning requirements for
products of those Sections.
1.3 SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION
A. Preliminary Procedures: Before requesting inspection for determining date of Substantial
Completion, complete the following. List items below that are incomplete in request.
1. Prepare a list of items to be completed and corrected (punch list), the value of items on the
list, and reasons why the Work is not complete.
2. Advise Owner of pending insurance changeover requirements.
3. Submit specific warranties, workmanship bonds, maintenance service agreements, final
certifications, and similar documents.
4. Obtain and submit releases permitting Owner unrestricted use of the Work and access to
services and utilities. Include occupancy permits, operating certificates, and similar
w
releases.
5. Prepare and submit Project Record Documents, operation and maintenance manuals,
Final Completion construction photographs, damage or settlement surveys, property
surveys, and similar final record information.
Project No. 00058 01770 CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES-1
Renovations to Parsons Annex
Smith College
Northampton, Massachusetts
d. Cupboards in Dining Room
C. The Contractor is encouraged to recycle building components such as doors, sash, window units
and metals by the following methods:
" a. Engage a salvage yard to receive components for re-use.
b. Provide containers for recyclable metals and other components.
C. Submit plan for recycling of components prior to commencement of demolition
nw operation.
END OF SECTION 01732
on
go Project No. 00058 01732 SELECTIVE DEMOLITION-9
Renovations to Parsons Annex
Smith College
Northampton, Massachusetts ..
1. Completely fill holes and depressions in existing masonry walls that are to remain with an
approved masonry patching material applied according to manufacturer's written
recommendations. ow
D. Finishes: Restore exposed finishes of patched areas and extend restoration into adjoining
construction in a manner that eliminates evidence of patching and refinishing.
E. Floors and Walls: Where walls or partitions that are demolished extend one finished area into
another, patch and repair floor and wall surfaces in the new space. Provide an even surface of s
uniform finish color,texture, and appearance.
1. Patch with durable seams that are as invisible as possible. Provide materials and comply
with installation requirements specified in other Sections of these Specifications.
2. Where patching occurs in a painted surface, apply primer and intermediate paint coats
over patch and apply final paint coat over entire unbroken surface containing patch.
Provide additional coats until patch blends with adjacent surfaces.
3. Where feasible, test and inspect patched areas after completion to demonstrate integrity of
installation.
F. Ceilings: Patch, repair, or rehang existing ceilings as necessary to provide an even-plane surface of
uniform appearance.
3.7 DISPOSAL OF DEMOLISHED MATERIALS
A. General: Promptly dispose of demolished materials. Do not allow demolished materials to
accumulate on-site.
B. Burning: Do not burn demolished materials.
C. Disposal: Transport demolished materials off Owner's property and legally dispose of them.
3.8 SELECTIVE DEMOLITION SCHEDULE
A. Existing Items to Be Removed and Salvaged:
a. Door hardware.
b. Window hardware.
C. Robe hooks and miscellaneous hardware.
d. Wood columns.
e. Metal Railings.
f. Stair components.
g. Lightning protection system.
h. See Divisions 15 and 16 for salvaged mechanical and electrical items.
B. Existing Items to Be Removed and Reinstalled:
a. Wood newels, columns. .�
b. Metal railings.
C. Stair components for re-use.
Project No. 00058 01732 SELECTIVE DEMOLITION-8
Renovations to Parsons Annex
Smith College
Northampton, Massachusetts
B. Removed and Salvaged Items: Comply with the following:
1. Clean salvaged items.
2. Pack or crate items after cleaning. Identify contents of containers.
3. Store items in a secure area until delivery to Owner.
W 4. Transport items to Owner's storage area.
5. Protect items from damage during transport and storage.
C. Removed and Reinstalled Items: Comply with the following:
1. Clean and repair items to functional condition adequate for intended reuse. Paint
W equipment to match new equipment.
2. Pack or crate items after cleaning and repairing. Identify contents of containers.
3. Protect items from damage during transport and storage.
4. Reinstall items in locations indicated. Comply with installation requirements for new
materials and equipment. Provide connections, supports, and miscellaneous materials
necessary to make item functional for use indicated.
D. Existing Items to Remain: Protect construction indicated to remain against damage and soiling
during selective demolition.
E. Concrete: Demolish in sections. Cut concrete full depth at junctures with construction to
remain and at regular intervals, using power-driven saw, then remove concrete between saw cuts.
F. Masonry: Demolish in small sections. Cut masonry at junctures with construction to remain,
using power-driven saw, then remove masonry between saw cuts.
G. Concrete Slabs-on-Grade: Saw-cut perimeter of area to be demolished, then break up and
remove.
H. Resilient Floor Coverings: Remove floor coverings and adhesive according to recommendations
in RFCI-WP and its Addendum.
1. Remove residual adhesive and prepare substrate for new floor coverings by one of the
methods recommended by RFCI.
I. Roofing: Remove no more existing roofing than can be covered in one day by new roofing.
Refer to applicable Division 7 Section for new roofing requirements.
3.6 PATCHING AND REPAIRS
A. General: Promptly repair damage to adjacent construction caused by selective demolition
operations.
B. Patching: Comply with Division 1 Section"Cutting and Patching."
�. C. Repairs: Where repairs to existing surfaces are required, patch to produce surfaces suitable for
new materials.
qX
Project No. 00058 01732 SELECTIVE DEMOLITION-7
Renovations to Parsons Annex
Smith College
Northampton, Massachusetts
A. Dust Control: Use water mist, temporary enclosures, and other suitable methods to limit spread
of dust and dirt. Comply with governing environmental-protection regulations.
1. Do not use water when it may damage existing construction or create hazardous or
objectionable conditions, such as ice, flooding, and pollution.
2. Wet mop floors to eliminate trackable dirt and wipe down walls and doors of demolition
enclosure. Vacuum carpeted areas.
B. Disposal: Remove and transport debris in a manner that will prevent spillage on adjacent *
surfaces and areas.
1. Remove debris from elevated portions of building by chute, hoist, or other device that will
convey debris to grade level in a controlled descent.
C. Cleaning: Clean adjacent structures and improvements of dust, dirt, and debris caused by
selective demolition operations. Return adjacent areas to condition existing before selective
demolition operations began.
3.5 SELECTIVE DEMOLITION
A. General: Demolish and remove existing construction only to the extent required by new
construction and as indicated. Use methods required to complete the Work within limitations of
governing regulations and as follows:
1. Proceed with selective demolition systematically, from higher to lower level. Complete
selective demolition operations above each floor or tier before disturbing supporting
members on the next lower level.
2. Neatly cut openings and holes plumb, square, and true to dimensions required. Use
cutting methods least likely to damage construction to remain or adjoining construction.
Use hand tools or small power tools designed for sawing or grinding, not hammering and
chopping, to minimize disturbance of adjacent surfaces. Temporarily cover openings to .■
remain.
3. Cut or drill from the exposed or finished side into concealed surfaces to avoid marring
existing finished surfaces.
4. Do not use cutting torches until work area is cleared of flammable materials. At concealed
spaces, such as duct and pipe interiors, verify condition and contents of hidden space
before starting flame-cutting operations. Maintain portable fire-suppression devices during
flame-cutting operations.
5. Maintain adequate ventilation when using cutting torches.
6. Remove decayed, vermin-infested, or otherwise dangerous or unsuitable materials and
promptly dispose of off-site.
7. Remove structural framing members and lower to ground by method suitable to avoid free
fall and to prevent ground impact or dust generation.
8. Locate selective demolition equipment and remove debris and materials so as not to
impose excessive loads on supporting walls, floors, or framing.
9. Dispose of demolished items and materials promptly.
10. Return elements of construction and surfaces that are to remain to condition existing
before selective demolition operations began.
Project No. 00058 01732 SELECTIVE DEMOLITION-6
Renovations to Parsons Annex
Smith College
Northampton, Massachusetts
B. Pest Control: Employ a certified, licensed exterminator to treat building and to control rodents
and vermin before and during selective demolition operations.
wn
C. Site Access and Temporary Controls: Conduct selective demolition and debris-removal
operations to ensure minimum interference with roads, streets, walks, walkways, and other
OR adjacent occupied and used facilities.
1. Do not close or obstruct streets, walks, walkways, or other adjacent occupied or used
facilities without permission from Owner and authorities having jurisdiction. Provide
alternate routes around closed or obstructed traffic ways if required by governing
regulations.
2. Erect temporary protection, such as walks, fences, railings, canopies, and covered
passageways,where required by authorities having jurisdiction.
3. Protect existing site improvements, appurtenances, and landscaping to remain.
„" 4. Erect a plainly visible fence around drip line of individual trees or around perimeter drip
line of groups of trees to remain.
No D. Temporary Facilities: Provide temporary barricades and other protection required to prevent
injury to people and damage to adjacent buildings and facilities to remain.
RX 1. Provide protection to ensure safe passage of people around selective demolition area and to
and from occupied portions of building.
2. Provide temporary weather protection, during interval between selective demolition of
existing construction on exterior surfaces and new construction, to prevent water leakage
"" and damage to structure and interior areas.
3. Protect walls, ceilings, floors, and other existing finish work that are to remain or that are
exposed during selective demolition operations.
4. Cover and protect furniture, furnishings, and equipment that have not been removed.
E. Temporary Enclosures: Provide temporary enclosures for protection of existing building and
construction, in progress and completed, from exposure, foul weather, other construction
operations, and similar activities. Provide temporary weathertight enclosure for building exterior.
1. Where heating or cooling is needed and permanent enclosure is not complete, provide
insulated temporary enclosures. Coordinate enclosure with ventilating and material drying
or curing requirements to avoid dangerous conditions and effects.
F. Temporary Partitions: Erect and maintain dustproof partitions and temporary enclosures to limit
dust and dirt migration and to separate areas from fumes and noise.
G. Temporary Shoring: Provide and maintain interior and exterior shoring, bracing, or structural
support to preserve stability and prevent movement, settlement, or collapse of construction to
remain, and to prevent unexpected or uncontrolled movement or collapse of construction being
demolished.
1. Strengthen or add new supports when required during progress of selective demolition.
w
3.4 POLLUTION CONTROLS
Project No. 00058 01732 SELECTIVE DEMOLITION-5
Renovations to Parsons Annex
Smith College
Northampton, Massachusetts
B. Comply with material and installation requirements specified in individual Specification
Sections.
PART 3 -EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Verify that utilities have been disconnected and capped.
B. Survey existing conditions and correlate with requirements indicated to determine extent of
selective demolition required.
C. Inventory and record the condition of items to be removed and reinstalled and items to be
removed and salvaged.
D. When unanticipated mechanical, electrical, or structural elements that conflict with intended
function or design are encountered, investigate and measure the nature and extent of conflict.
Promptly submit a written report to Architect.
E. Engage a professional engineer to survey condition of building to determine whether removing
any element might result in structural deficiency or unplanned collapse of any portion of
structure or adjacent structures during selective demolition operations.
F. Perform surveys as the Work progresses to detect hazards resulting from selective demolition
activities.
3.2 UTILITY SERVICES
A. Existing Utilities: Maintain services indicated to remain and protect them against damage during
selective demolition operations.
B. Utility Requirements: Locate, identify, disconnect, and seal or cap off indicated utilities serving .w
areas to be selectively demolished.
1. Arrange to shut off indicated utilities with utility companies.
2. If utility services are required to be removed, relocated, or abandoned, before proceeding
with selective demolition provide temporary utilities that bypass area of selective
demolition and that maintain continuity of service to other parts of building.
3. Cut off pipe or conduit in walls or partitions to be removed. Cap, valve, or plug and seal
remaining portion of pipe or conduit after bypassing.
C. Utility Requirements: Refer to Division 15 and 16 Sections for shutting off, disconnecting,
removing, and sealing or capping utilities. Do not start selective demolition work until utility
disconnecting and sealing have been completed and verified in writing. ■•
3.3 PREPARATION
OF
A. Dangerous Materials: Drain, purge, or otherwise remove, collect, and dispose of chemicals, gases,
explosives, acids, flammables, or other dangerous materials before proceeding with selective
demolition operations. „s
Project No. 00058 01732 SELECTIVE DEMOLITION-4
Renovations to Parsons Annex
Smith College
Northampton, Massachusetts
1.7 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Owner will occupy portions of building immediately adjacent to selective demolition area.
Conduct selective demolition so Owner's operations will not be disrupted.
!*� B. Maintain access to existing walkways,corridors, and other adjacent occupied or used facilities.
1. Do not close or obstruct walkways, corridors, or other occupied or used facilities without
written permission from authorities having jurisdiction.
C. Owner assumes no responsibility for condition of areas to be selectively demolished.
1. Conditions existing at time of inspection for bidding purpose will be maintained by Owner
as far as practical.
2. Before selective demolition, remove the following items:
a. Door Hardware
b. Window Hardware
C. Robe hooks and miscellaneous hardware.
d. Wood newels, columns.
e. Metal Railings
on f. Stair components, casework and trim for re-use.
D. Hazardous Materials: It is not expected that hazardous materials will be encountered in the
on Work.
1. Hazardous materials will be removed by Owner before start of the Work in that portion of
on the building concurrent with Work in other portions of the building.
2. If materials suspected of containing hazardous materials are encountered, do not disturb;
immediately notify Architect and Owner. Hazardous materials will be removed by Owner
under a separate contract.
3. Do not disturb hazardous materials or items suspected of containing hazardous materials
except under procedures specified elsewhere in the Contract Documents.
E. Storage or sale of removed items or materials on-site will not be permitted.
w
F. Utility Service: Maintain existing utilities indicated to remain in service and protect them against
damage during selective demolition operations.
1. Maintain fire-protection facilities in service during selective demolition operations.
PART 2-PRODUCTS
2.1 REPAIR MATERIALS
A. Use repair materials identical to existing materials.
1. If identical materials are unavailable or cannot be used for exposed surfaces, use materials
that visually match existing adjacent surfaces to the fullest extent possible.
2. Use materials whose installed performance equals or surpasses that of existing materials.
Project No. 00058 01732 SELECTIVE DEMOLITION-3
Renovations to Parsons Annex
Smith College
Northampton, Massachusetts
B. Historic items, relics, and similar objects including, but not limited to, commemorative plaques
and tablets, antiques, and other items of interest or value to Owner that may be encountered
during selective demolition remain Owner's property. Carefully remove and salvage each item or
object in a manner to prevent damage and deliver promptly to Owner.
1.5 SUBMITTALS
A. Qualification Data: For firms and persons specified in "Quality Assurance" Article to
demonstrate their capabilities and experience. Include lists of completed projects with project �*
names and addresses, names and addresses of architects and owners, and other information
specified.
B. Proposed Dust-Control Measures: Submit statement or drawing that indicates the measures
proposed for use, proposed locations, and proposed time frame for their operation. Identify
options if proposed measures are later determined to be inadequate.
C. Schedule of Selective Demolition Activities: Indicate the following:
1. Detailed sequence of selective demolition and removal work, with starting and ending
dates for each activity.
2. Interruption of utility services.
3. Coordination for shutoff, capping, and continuation of utility services.
4. Locations of temporary partitions and means of egress.
5. Coordination of Owner's continuing occupancy of portions of existing building and of
Owner's partial occupancy of completed Work.
D. Inventory: After selective demolition is complete, submit a list of items that have been removed
and salvaged.
1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with governing EPA notification regulations before beginning
selective demolition. Comply with hauling and disposal regulations of authorities having
jurisdiction.
B. Standards: Comply with ANSI A10.6 and NFPA 241.
C. Predemolition Conference: Conduct conference at Project site to comply with requirements in WP
Division 1 Section "Project Management and Coordination." Review methods and procedures
related to selective demolition including,but not limited to,the following:
1. Inspect and discuss condition of construction to be selectively demolished.
2. Review salvage operations for components to be protected and preserved during selective
demolition operations.
3. Review and finalize selective demolition schedule and verify availability of materials,
demolition personnel, equipment, and facilities needed to make progress and avoid delays.
4. Review requirements of work performed by other trades that rely on substrates exposed by
selective demolition operations.
Project No. 00058 01732 SELECTIVE DEMOLITION-2
Renovations to Parsons Annex
Smith College
Northampton, Massachusetts
SECTION 01732-SELECTIVE DEMOLITION
PART 1 -GENERAL
go 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and other Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the following:
1. Demolition and removal of selected portions of a building or structure.
2. Demolition and removal of selected site elements.
3. Repair procedures for selective demolition operations.
B. Related Sections include the following:
1. Division 1 Section"Summary" for use of the premises and phasing requirements.
W 2. Division 1 Section "Construction Progress Documentation" for preconstruction
photographs taken before selective demolition.
3. Division 1 Section "Temporary Facilities and Controls" for temporary construction and
ON environmental-protection measures for selective demolition operations.
4. Division 1 Section"Cutting and Patching" for cutting and patching procedures for selective
demolition operations.
W 5. Division 15 Sections for demolishing, cutting, patching, or relocating mechanical items.
6. Division 16 Sections for demolishing, cutting, patching, or relocating electrical items.
W 1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. Remove: Detach items from existing construction and legally dispose of them off-site, unless
indicated to be removed and salvaged or removed and reinstalled.
B. Remove and Salvage: Detach items from existing construction and deliver them to Owner.
C. Remove and Reinstall: Detach items from existing construction, prepare them for reuse, and
reinstall them where indicated.
w D. Existing to Remain: Existing items of construction that are not to be removed and that are not
otherwise indicated to be removed, removed and salvaged, or removed and reinstalled.
1.4 MATERIALS OWNERSHIP
A. Except for items or materials indicated to be reused, salvaged, reinstalled, or otherwise indicated
to remain Owner's property, demolished materials shall become Contractor's property and shall
be removed from Project site.
Project No. 00058 01732 SELECTIVE DEMOLITION-1
Renovations to Parsons Annex
Smith College
Northampton, Massachusetts
4. Ceilings: Patch, repair, or rehang existing ceilings as necessary to provide an even-plane
surface of uniform appearance.
5. Exterior Building Enclosure: Patch components in a manner that restores enclosure to a
weathertight condition.
END OF SECTION 01731
Project No. 00058 01731 CUTTING AND PATCHING-4
ao
Renovations to Parsons Annex
Smith College
'W Northampton, Massachusetts
3.3 PERFORMANCE
IN A. General: Employ skilled workers to perform cutting and patching. Proceed with cutting and
patching at the earliest feasible time, and complete without delay.
1. Cut existing construction to provide for installation of other components or performance
of other construction, and subsequently patch as required to restore surfaces to their
original condition.
B. Cutting: Cut existing construction by sawing, drilling, breaking, chipping, grinding, and similar
operations, including excavation, using methods least likely to damage elements retained or
adjoining construction. If possible, review proposed procedures with original Installer; comply
with original Installer's written recommendations.
1. In general, use hand or small power tools designed for sawing and grinding, not
e hammering and chopping. Cut holes and slots as small as possible, neatly to size required,
and with minimum disturbance of adjacent surfaces. Temporarily cover openings when
not in use.
OF 2. Existing Finished Surfaces: Cut or drill from the exposed or finished side into concealed
surfaces.
3. Concrete: Cut using a cutting machine, such as an abrasive saw or a diamond-core drill.
W 4. Excavating and Backfilling: Comply with requirements in applicable Division 2 Sections
where required by cutting and patching operations.
5. Mechanical and Electrical Services: Cut off pipe or conduit in walls or partitions to be
removed. Cap, valve, or plug and seal remaining portion of pipe or conduit to prevent
entrance of moisture or other foreign matter after cutting.
6. Proceed with patching after construction operations requiring cutting are complete.
XN
C. Patching: Patch construction by filling, repairing, refinishing, closing up, and similar operations
following performance of other Work. Patch with durable seams that are as invisible as possible.
Provide materials and comply with installation requirements specified in other Sections of these
Specifications.
1. Inspection: Where feasible, test and inspect patched areas after completion to demonstrate
integrity of installation.
2. Exposed Finishes: Restore exposed finishes of patched areas and extend finish restoration
into retained adjoining construction in a manner that will eliminate evidence of patching
and refinishing.
3. Floors and Walls: Where walls or partitions that are removed extend one finished area
into another, patch and repair floor and wall surfaces in the new space. Provide an even
surface of uniform finish, color, texture, and appearance. Remove existing floor and wall
coverings and replace with new materials, if necessary, to achieve uniform color and
appearance.
a. Where patching occurs in a painted surface, apply primer and intermediate paint
coats over the patch and apply final paint coat over entire unbroken surface
containing the patch. Provide additional coats until patch blends with adjacent
surfaces.
Project No. 00058 01731 CUTTING AND PATCHING-3
ow
Renovations to Parsons Annex
Smith College
Northampton, Massachusetts go
C. Cutting and Patching Conference: Before proceeding, meet at Project site with parties involved
in cutting and patching, including mechanical and electrical trades. Review areas of potential
interference and conflict. Coordinate procedures and resolve potential conflicts before
proceeding.
..
PART 2-PRODUCTS
ON
2.1 MATERIALS
A. General: Comply with requirements specified in other Sections of these Specifications. .a
B. Existing Materials: Use materials identical to existing materials. For exposed surfaces, use
materials that visually match existing adjacent surfaces to the fullest extent possible.
or
1. If identical materials are unavailable or cannot be used, use materials that, when installed,
will match the visual and functional performance of existing materials.
aw
PART 3 - EXECUTION
w
3.1 EXAMINATION
MW
A. Examine surfaces to be cut and patched and conditions under which cutting and patching are to
be performed.
1. Compatibility: Before patching, verify compatibility with and suitability of substrates,
including compatibility with existing finishes or primers.
2. Proceed with installation only after unsafe or unsatisfactory conditions have been
corrected.
3.2 PREPARATION ■
A. Temporary Support: Provide temporary support of Work to be cut.
B. Protection: Protect existing construction during cutting and patching to prevent damage.
Provide protection from adverse weather conditions for portions of Project that might be exposed
during cutting and patching operations.
C. Adjoining Areas: Avoid interference with use of adjoining areas or interruption of free passage to
adjoining areas.
D. Existing Services: Where existing services are required to be removed, relocated, or abandoned,
bypass such services before cutting to [minimize] [avoid] interruption of services to occupied
areas.
Project No. 00058 01731 CUTTING AND PATCHING-2
an
Renovations to Parsons Annex
Smith College
Northampton, Massachusetts
SECTION 0 1731 -CUTTING AND PATCHING
PART 1 -GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
w A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and other Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
ww
1.2 SUMMARY
+ u A. This Section includes procedural requirements for cutting and patching.
B. Related Sections include the following:
1. Division 1 Section "Selective Demolition" for demolition of selected portions of the
building for alterations.
2. Divisions 2 through 16 Sections for specific requirements and limitations applicable to
cutting and patching individual parts of the Work.
a. Requirements in this Section apply to mechanical and electrical installations. Refer
' to Divisions 15 and 16 Sections for other requirements and limitations applicable to
cutting and patching mechanical and electrical installations.
4W
1.3 DEFINITIONS
g• A. Cutting: Removal of existing construction necessary to permit installation or performance of
other Work.
ON B. Patching: Fitting and repair work required to restore surfaces to original conditions after
installation of other Work.
on
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Structural Elements: Do not cut and patch structural elements in a manner that could change
their load-carrying capacity or load-deflection ratio.
B. Visual Requirements: Do not cut and patch construction in a manner that results in visual
evidence of cutting and patching. Do not cut and patch construction exposed on the exterior or
in occupied spaces in a manner that would, in Architects opinion, reduce the building's aesthetic
qualities. Remove and replace construction that has been cut and patched in a visually
on unsatisfactory manner.
Project No. 00058 01731 CUTTING AND PATCHING-1
Renovations to Parsons Annex
Smith College
Northampton, Massachusetts
B. Adjust operating components for proper operation without binding. Adjust equipment for
proper operation.
C. Test each piece of equipment to verify proper operation. Test and adjust controls and safeties.
Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls and equipment.
D. Manufacturer's Field Service: If a factory-authorized service representative is required to inspect
field-assembled components and equipment installation, comply with qualification requirements
in Division 1 Section"Quality Requirements." ..�
3.8 PROTECTION OF INSTALLED CONSTRUCTION .�
A. Provide final protection and maintain conditions that ensure installed Work is without damage
or deterioration at time of Substantial Completion.
ww
B. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for temperature and relative humidity.
3.9 CORRECTION OF THE WORK
A. Repair or remove and replace defective construction. Restore damaged substrates and finishes. W
Comply with requirements in Division 1 Section"Cutting and Patching."
1. Repairing includes replacing defective parts, refinishing damaged surfaces, touching up
with matching materials, and properly adjusting operating equipment.
B. Restore permanent facilities used during construction to their specified condition.
C. Remove and replace damaged surfaces that are exposed to view if surfaces cannot be repaired
without visible evidence of repair.
D. Repair components that do not operate properly. Remove and replace operating components
that cannot be repaired.
E. Remove and replace chipped, scratched, and broken glass or reflective surfaces.
■
END OF SECTION 01700
..
V.
Project No. 00058 01700 EXECUTION REQUIREMENTS-6
MR
�t
Renovations to Parsons Annex
Smith College
Northampton, Massachusetts
2. Do not hold materials more than 7 days during normal weather or 3 days if the
temperature is expected to rise above 80 deg F(27 deg Q.
3. Containerize hazardous and unsanitary waste materials separately from other waste. Mark
containers appropriately and dispose of legally, according to regulations.
W B. Site: Maintain Project site free of waste materials and debris.
C. Work Areas: Clean areas where work is in progress to the level of cleanliness necessary for proper
execution of the Work.
1. Remove liquid spills promptly.
2. Where dust would impair proper execution of the Work, broom-clean or vacuum the
entire work area, as appropriate.
■
D. Installed Work: Keep installed work clean. Clean installed surfaces according to written
instructions of manufacturer or fabricator of product installed, using only cleaning materials
specifically recommended. If specific cleaning materials are not recommended, use cleaning
materials that are not hazardous to health or property and that will not damage exposed surfaces.
E. Concealed Spaces: Remove debris from concealed spaces before enclosing the space.
F. Exposed Surfaces: Clean exposed surfaces and protect as necessary to ensure freedom from
damage and deterioration at time of Substantial Completion.
on G. Cutting and Patching: Clean areas and spaces where cutting and patching are performed.
Completely remove paint, mortar, oils, putty, and similar materials.
on 1. Thoroughly clean piping, conduit, and similar features before applying paint or other
finishing materials. Restore damaged pipe covering to its original condition.
on H. Waste Disposal: Burying or burning waste materials on-site will not be permitted. Washing waste
materials down sewers or into waterways will not be permitted.
I. During handling and installation, clean and protect construction in progress and adjoining
materials already in place. Apply protective covering where required to ensure protection from
damage or deterioration at Substantial Completion.
J. Clean and provide maintenance on completed construction as frequently as necessary through
the remainder of the construction period. Adjust and lubricate operable components to ensure
operability without damaging effects.
K. Limiting Exposures: Supervise construction operations to assure that no part of the construction,
completed or in progress, is subject to harmful, dangerous, damaging, or otherwise deleterious
++ exposure during the construction period.
3.7 STARTING AND ADJUSTING
A. Start equipment and operating components to confirm proper operation. Remove
malfunctioning units, replace with new units, and retest.
Project No. 00058 01700 EXECUTION REQUIREMENTS-5
Renovations to Parsons Annex
Smith College
Northampton, Massachusetts
promptly. Report the need to relocate permanent benchmarks or control points to
Architect before proceeding.
2. Replace lost or destroyed permanent benchmarks and control points promptly. Base
replacements on the original survey control points.
3.5 INSTALLATION
A. General: Locate the Work and components of the Work accurately, in correct alignment and
elevation, as indicated.
1. Make vertical work plumb and make horizontal work level. .�
2. Where space is limited, install components to maximize space available for maintenance
and ease of removal for replacement.
3. Conceal pipes, ducts, and wiring in finished areas, unless otherwise indicated.
B. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions and recommendations for installing products in
applications indicated.
C. Install products at the time and under conditions that will ensure the best possible results.
Maintain conditions required for product performance until Substantial Completion.
D. Conduct construction operations so no part of the Work is subjected to damaging operations or
loading in excess of that expected during normal conditions of occupancy.
E. Tools and Equipment: Do not use tools or equipment that produce harmful noise levels.
F. Anchors and Fasteners: Provide anchors and fasteners as required to anchor each component
securely in place, accurately located and aligned with other portions of the Work.
1. Mounting Heights: Where mounting heights are not indicated, mount components at ..
heights directed by Architect.
2. Allow for building movement, including thermal expansion and contraction.
G. Joints: Make joints of uniform width. Where joint locations in exposed work are not indicated,
arrange joints for the best visual effect. Fit exposed connections together to form hairline joints.
H. Hazardous Materials: Use products, cleaners, and installation materials that are not considered
hazardous.
3.6 PROGRESS CLEANING
A. General: Clean Project site and work areas daily, including common areas. Coordinate progress
cleaning for joint-use areas where more than one installer has worked. Enforce requirements
strictly. Dispose of materials lawfully.
op
1. Comply with requirements in NFPA 241 for removal of combustible waste materials and
debris.
Project No. 00058 01700 EXECUTION REQUIREMENTS-4
Renovations to Parsons Annex
Smith College
on Northampton, Massachusetts
2. Do not proceed with utility interruptions without Owner's permission.
W C. Field Measurements: Take field measurements as required to fit the Work properly. Recheck
measurements before installing each product. Where portions of the Work are indicated to fit to
other construction, verify dimensions of other construction by field measurements before
fabrication. Coordinate fabrication schedule with construction progress to avoid delaying the
Work.
D. Space Requirements: Verify space requirements and dimensions of items shown
diagrammatically on Drawings.
E. Review of Contract Documents and Field Conditions: Immediately on discovery of the need for
clarification of the Contract Documents, submit a request for information to Architect. Include
a detailed description of problem encountered, together with recommendations for changing the
Contract Documents.
3.3 CONSTRUCTION LAYOUT
A. Verification: Before proceeding to lay out the Work, verify layout information shown on
Drawings, in relation to the property survey and existing benchmarks. If discrepancies are
'on discovered, notify Architect promptly.
B. General: Lay out the Work using accepted surveying practices.
am
1. Establish benchmarks and control points to set lines and levels at each story of
construction and elsewhere as needed to locate each element of Project.
2. Establish dimensions within tolerances indicated. Do not scale Drawings to obtain
required dimensions.
3. Inform installers of lines and levels to which they must comply.
4. Check the location, level and plumb, of every major element as the Work progresses.
5. Notify Architect when deviations from required lines and levels exceed allowable
tolerances.
6. Close site surveys with an error of closure equal to or less than the standard established by
authorities having jurisdiction.
C. Site Improvements: Locate and lay out site improvements, including pavements, grading, fill and
topsoil placement, utility slopes, and invert elevations.
*� 3.4 FIELD ENGINEERING
A. Identification: Owner will identify existing benchmarks, control points, and property corners.
B. Reference Points: Locate existing permanent benchmarks, control points, and similar reference
points before beginning the Work. Preserve and protect permanent benchmarks and control
points during construction operations.
1. Do not change or relocate existing benchmarks or control points without prior written
approval of Architect. Report lost or destroyed permanent benchmarks or control points
Project No. 00058 01700 EXECUTION REQUIREMENTS-3
Renovations to Parsons Annex
Smith College
Northampton, Massachusetts w.
verify the existence and location of mechanical and electrical systems and other construction
affecting the Work.
1. Before construction,verify the location and points of connection of utility services.
B. Existing Utilities: The existence and location of underground and other utilities and
construction indicated as existing are not guaranteed. Before beginning sitework, investigate and
verify the existence and location of underground utilities and other construction affecting the
Work.
1. Before construction, verify the location and invert elevation at points of connection of
sanitary sewer, storm sewer, and water-service piping; and underground electrical services.
2. Furnish location data for work related to Project that must be performed by public utilities
serving Project site.
so
C. Acceptance of Conditions: Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer or
Applicator present where indicated, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances
and other conditions affecting performance. Record observations. ow
1. Written Report: Where a written report listing conditions detrimental to performance of
the Work is required by other Sections, include the following:
a. Description of the Work.
b. List of detrimental conditions, including substrates.
C. List of unacceptable installation tolerances.
d. Recommended corrections.
2. Verify compatibility with and suitability of substrates, including compatibility with existing
finishes or primers.
3. Examine roughing-in for mechanical and electrical systems to verify actual locations of
connections before equipment and fixture installation. ..
4. Examine walls, floors, and roofs for suitable conditions where products and systems are to
be installed.
5. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
Proceeding with the Work indicates acceptance of surfaces and conditions.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Existing Utility Information: Furnish information to local utility or Owner that it is necessary to
adjust, move, or relocate existing utility structures, utility poles, lines, services, or other utility
appurtenances located in or affected by construction. Coordinate with authorities having
jurisdiction.
w
B. Existing Utility Interruptions: Do not interrupt utilities serving facilities occupied by Owner or
others unless permitted under the following conditions and then only after arranging to provide
temporary utility services according to requirements indicated:
1. Notify Owner not less than 24 hours in advance of proposed utility interruptions.
Project No. 00058 01700 EXECUTION REQUIREMENTS-2
Renovations to Parsons Annex
Smith College
qW Northampton, Massachusetts
SECTION 01700-EXECUTION REQUIREMENTS
RM
PART 1 -GENERAL
40
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and other Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
*0 A. This Section includes general procedural requirements governing execution of the Work
including, but not limited to, the following:
w 1. Construction layout.
2. Field engineering and surveying.
3. General installation of products.
,w 4. Coordination of Owner-installed products.
5. Progress cleaning.
6. Starting and adjusting.
on 7. Protection of installed construction.
8. Correction of the Work.
B. Related Sections include the following:
1. Division 1 Section "Project Management and Coordination" for procedures for
coordinating field engineering with other construction activities.
2. Division 1 Section"Submittal Procedures" for submitting surveys.
3. Division 1 Section "Cutting and Patching" for procedural requirements for cutting and
patching necessary for the installation or performance of other components of the Work.
No 4. Division 1 Section "Closeout Procedures" for submitting final property survey with Project
Record Documents, recording of Owner-accepted deviations from indicated lines and
levels, and final cleaning.
PART 2-PRODUCTS(Not Used)
PART 3 -EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Existing Conditions: The existence and location of site improvements, utilities, and other
construction indicated as existing are not guaranteed. Before beginning work, investigate and
Project No. 00058 01700 EXECUTION REQUIREMENTS-1
Renovations to Parsons Annex
Smith College
Northampton, Massachusetts
A. Conditions: Architect will consider Contractor's request for substitution when the following
conditions are satisfied. If the following conditions are not satisfied, Architect will return
requests without action, except to record noncompliance with these requirements:
1. Requested substitution offers Owner a substantial advantage in cost, time, energy
conservation, or other considerations, after deducting additional responsibilities Owner
must assume. Owner's additional responsibilities may include compensation to Architect
for redesign and evaluation services, increased cost of other construction by Owner, and
similar considerations.
2. Requested substitution does not require extensive revisions to the Contract Documents.
3. Requested substitution is consistent with the Contract Documents and will produce
indicated results. ,
4. Substitution request is fully documented and properly submitted.
5. Requested substitution will not adversely affect Contractor's Construction Schedule.
6. Requested substitution has received necessary approvals of authorities having jurisdiction.
7. Requested substitution is compatible with other portions of the Work.
8. Requested substitution has been coordinated with other portions of the Work.
9. Requested substitution provides specified warranty.
10. If requested substitution involves more than one contractor, requested substitution has
been coordinated with other portions of the Work, is uniform and consistent, is
compatible with other products, and is acceptable to all contractors involved.
2.3 COMPARABLE PRODUCTS
A. Where products or manufacturers are specified by name, submit the following, in addition to
other required submittals, to obtain approval of an unnamed product:
1. Evidence that the proposed product does not require extensive revisions to the Contract
Documents, that it is consistent with the Contract Documents and will produce the
indicated results, and that it is compatible with other portions of the Work. OF
2. Detailed comparison of significant qualities of proposed product with those named in the
Specifications. Significant qualities include attributes such as performance, weight, size,
durability,visual effect, and specific features and requirements indicated. ow
3. Evidence that proposed product provides specified warranty.
4. List of similar installations for completed projects with project names and addresses and
names and addresses of architects and owners, if requested.
5. Samples, if requested.
PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Used)
END OF SECTION 01600
Project No. 00058 01600 PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS-6
Renovations to Parsons Annex
Smith College
Northampton, Massachusetts
1. Products: Where Specification paragraphs or subparagraphs titled "Products" introduce a
list of names of both products and manufacturers, provide one of the products listed that
complies with requirements.
a. Substitutions may be considered, unless otherwise indicated.
2. Manufacturers: Where Specification paragraphs or subparagraphs titled "Manufacturers"
introduce a list of manufacturers' names, provide a product by one of the manufacturers
listed that complies with requirements.
a. Substitutions may be considered,unless otherwise indicated.
3. Available Products: Where Specification paragraphs or subparagraphs titled "Available
Products" introduce a list of names of both products and manufacturers, provide one of
the products listed or another product that complies with requirements. Comply with
provisions in "Comparable Products" Article to obtain approval for use of an unnamed
product.
4. Available Manufacturers: Where Specification paragraphs or subparagraphs titled
go "Available Manufacturers" introduce a list of manufacturers' names, provide a product by
one of the manufacturers listed or another manufacturer that complies with requirements.
Comply with provisions in"Comparable Products"Article to obtain approval for use of an
no unnamed product.
5. Visual Matching Specification: Where Specifications require matching an established
Sample, select a product(and manufacturer) that complies with requirements and matches
Architect's sample. Architects decision will be final on whether a proposed product
matches satisfactorily.
a. If no product available within specified category matches satisfactorily and complies
with other specified requirements, comply with provisions of the Contract
Documents on"substitutions" for selection of a matching product.
6. Visual Selection Specification: Where Specifications include the phrase "as selected from
on manufacturer's colors, patterns, textures" or a similar phrase, select a product (and
manufacturer) that complies with other specified requirements.
a. Standard Range: Where Specifications include the phrase"standard range of colors,
patterns, textures" or similar phrase, Architect will select color, pattern, or texture
from manufacturer's product line that does not include premium items.
b. Full Range: Where Specifications include the phrase "full range of colors, patterns,
40 textures" or similar phrase, Architect will select color, pattern, or texture from
manufacturer's product line that includes both standard and premium items.
7. Allowances: Refer to individual Specification Sections and "Allowance" provisions in
Division 1 for allowances that control product selection and for procedures required for
processing such selections.
mo
2.2 PRODUCT SUBSTITUTIONS
ME
Project No. 00058 01600 PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS-5
Renovations to Parsons Annex
Smith College
Northampton, Massachusetts
B. Storage: Provide a secure location and enclosure at Project site for storage of materials and
equipment by Owner's construction forces. Coordinate location with Owner.
1.7 PRODUCT WARRANTIES
A. Warranties specified in other Sections shall be in addition to, and run concurrent with, other
warranties required by the Contract Documents. Manufacturer's disclaimers and limitations on
product warranties do not relieve Contractor of obligations under requirements of the Contract
Documents.
B. Special Warranties: Prepare a written document that contains appropriate terms and
identification, ready for execution. Submit a draft for approval before final execution.
1. Manufacturer's Standard Form: Modified to include Project-specific information and
properly executed.
2. Specified Form: Forms are included with the Specifications. Prepare a written document
using appropriate form properly executed.
3. Refer to Divisions 2 through 16 Sections for specific content requirements and particular
requirements for submitting special warranties.
C. Submittal Time: Comply with requirements in Division 1 Section"Closeout Procedures."
PART 2- PRODUCTS •�•
2.1 PRODUCT OPTIONS
A. General Product Requirements: Provide products that comply with the Contract Documents,
that are undamaged, and unless otherwise indicated, that are new at time of installation.
1. Provide products complete with accessories, trim, finish, fasteners, and other items needed
for a complete installation and indicated use and effect.
2. Standard Products: If available, and unless custom products or nonstandard options are
specified, provide standard products of types that have been produced and used
successfully in similar situations on other projects.
3. Owner reserves the right to limit selection to products with warranties not in conflict with ow
requirements of the Contract Documents.
4. Where products are accompanied by the term"as selected,"Architect will make selection.
5. Where products are accompanied by the term "match sample," sample to be matched is ap
Architect's.
6. Descriptive, performance, and reference standard requirements in the Specifications
establish"salient characteristics" of products. '
7. Or Equal: Where products are specified by name and accompanied by the term "or equal"
or "or approved equal" or"or approved," comply with provisions in "Comparable Products"
Article to obtain approval for use of an unnamed product.
B. Product Selection Procedures: Procedures for product selection include the following:
Project No. 00058 01600 PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS-4
Renovations to Parsons Annex
Smith College
Northampton, Massachusetts
j. Cost information, including a proposal of change, if any, in the Contract Sum.
k. Contractor's certification that proposed substitution complies with requirements in
the Contract Documents and is appropriate for applications indicated.
1. Contractor's waiver of rights to additional payment or time that may subsequently
become necessary because of failure of proposed substitution to produce indicated
Im results.
2. Architect's Action: If necessary, Architect will request additional information or
uAe documentation for evaluation within one week of receipt of a request for substitution.
Architect will notify Contractor of acceptance orr rejection of proposed substitution within
15 days of receipt of request, or 7 days of receipt of additional information or
W documentation,whichever is later.
a. Form of Acceptance: Change Order.
b. Use product specified if Architect cannot make a decision on use of a proposed
substitution within time allocated.
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Compatibility of Options: If Contractor is given option of selecting between two or more
products for use on Project, product selected shall be compatible with products previously
selected, even if previously selected products were also options.
on
1.6 PRODUCT DELIVERY,STORAGE,AND HANDLING
A. Deliver, store, and handle products using means and methods that will prevent damage,
deterioration, and loss, including theft. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions.
1. Schedule delivery to minimize long-term storage at Project site and to prevent overcrowding
of construction spaces.
2. Coordinate delivery with installation time to ensure minimum holding time for items that
are flammable, hazardous, easily damaged, or sensitive to deterioration, theft, and other
losses.
3. Deliver products to Project site in an undamaged condition in manufacturer's original
sealed container or other packaging system, complete with labels and instructions for
handling, storing, unpacking, protecting, and installing.
4. Inspect products on delivery to ensure compliance with the Contract Documents and to
ensure that products are undamaged and properly protected.
W 5. Store products to allow for inspection and measurement of quantity or counting of units.
6. Store materials in a manner that will not endanger Project structure.
7. Store products that are subject to damage by the elements, under cover in a weathertight
an enclosure above ground,with ventilation adequate to prevent condensation.
8. Comply with product manufacturer's written instructions for temperature, humidity,
ventilation, and weather-protection requirements for storage.
9. Protect stored products from damage.
Project No. 00058 01600 PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS-3
Renovations to Parsons Annex
Smith College
Northampton, Massachusetts
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Product List: Submit a list, in tabular from, showing specified products. Include generic names
of products required. Include manufacturer's name and proprietary product names for each
product.
1. Coordinate product list with Contractors Construction Schedule and the Submittals
Schedule.
2. Form: Tabulate information for each product under the following column headings: ..
a. Specification Section number and title.
b. Generic name used in the Contract Documents.
C. Proprietary name, model number, and similar designations.
d. Manufacturer's name and address.
e. Supplier's name and address.
f. Installer's name and address.
g. Projected delivery date or time span of delivery period.
h. Identification of items that require early submittal approval for scheduled delivery
date.
B. Substitution Requests: Submit three copies of each request for consideration. Identify product
or fabrication or installation method to be replaced. Include Specification Section number and
title and Drawing numbers and titles.
1. Documentation: Show compliance with requirements for substitutions and the following,
as applicable:
a. Statement indicating why specified material or product cannot be provided.
b. Coordination information, including a list of changes or modifications needed to !"
other parts of the Work and to construction performed by Owner and separate
contractors, that will be necessary to accommodate proposed substitution.
C. Detailed comparison of significant qualities of proposed substitution with those of
the Work specified. Significant qualities may include attributes such as
performance, weight, size, durability, visual effect, and specific features and
requirements indicated.
d. Product Data, including drawings and descriptions of products and fabrication and
installation procedures.
e. Samples,where applicable or requested.
f. List of similar installations for completed projects with project names and addresses
and names and addresses of architects and owners.
g. Material test reports from a qualified testing agency indicating and interpreting test .�
results for compliance with requirements indicated.
h. Research/evaluation reports evidencing compliance with building code in effect for
Project, from a model code organization acceptable to authorities having .�
jurisdiction.
i. Detailed comparison of Contractor's Construction Schedule using proposed
substitution with products specified for the Work, including effect on the overall
Contract Time. If specified product or method of construction cannot be provided
within the Contract Time, include letter from manufacturer, on manufacturer's
letterhead, stating lack of availability or delays in delivery.
Project No. 00058 01600 PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS-2
Renovations to Parsons Annex
Smith College
Northampton, Massachusetts
SECTION 01600-PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS
PART 1 -GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and other Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the following administrative and procedural requirements: selection of
products for use in Project; product delivery, storage, and handling; manufacturers' standard
warranties on products; special warranties; product substitutions; and comparable products.
B. Related Sections include the following:
1. Division 1 Section"Alternates" for products selected under an alternate.
2. Division 1 Section"Closeout Procedures" for submitting warranties for contract closeout.
3. Divisions 2 through 16 Sections for specific requirements for warranties on products and
installations specified to be warranted.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. Products: Items purchased for incorporating into the Work, whether purchased for Project or
taken from previously purchased stock. The term "product' includes the terms "material,"
"equipment," "system," and terms of similar intent.
1. Named Products: Items identified by manufacturer's product name, including make or
model number or other designation, shown or listed in manufacturer's published product
literature,that is current as of date of the Contract Documents.
2. Comparable Product: Product that is demonstrated and approved through submittal
process, or where indicated as a product substitution, to have the indicated qualities
related to type, function, dimension, in-service performance, physical properties,
appearance, and other characteristics that equal or exceed those of specified product.
B. Substitutions: Changes in products, materials, equipment, and methods of construction from
those required by the Contract Documents and proposed by Contractor.
C. Manufacturer's Warranty: Preprinted written warranty published by individual manufacturer for
a particular product and specifically endorsed by manufacturer to Owner.
D. Special Warranty: Written warranty required by or incorporated into the Contract Documents,
either to extend time limit provided by manufacturer's warranty or to provide more rights for
Owner.
Project No. 00058 01600 PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS-1
to
Renovations to Parsons Annex
Smith College
W, Northampton, Massachusetts
2. Remove temporary paving not intended for or acceptable for integration into permanent
paving. Where area is intended for landscape development, remove soil and aggregate fill
M that do not comply with requirements for fill or subsoil. Remove materials contaminated
with road oil, asphalt and other petrochemical compounds, and other substances that
might impair growth of plant materials or lawns. Repair or replace street paving, curbs,
and sidewalks at temporary entrances, as required by authorities having jurisdiction.
3. At Substantial Completion, clean and renovate permanent facilities used during
construction period. Comply with final cleaning requirements in Division 1 Section
"Closeout Procedures."
No
END OF SECTION 01500
go
40
M
Project No. 00058 01500 TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS-1 I
Renovations to Parsons Annex
Smith College
Northampton, Massachusetts
H. Temporary Fire Protection: Until fire-protection needs are supplied by permanent facilities,
install and maintain temporary fire-protection facilities of types needed to protect against
reasonably predictable and controllable fire losses. Comply with NFPA 241.
1. Provide fire extinguishers, installed on walls on mounting brackets, visible and accessible
from space being served,with sign mounted above.
a. Locate fire extinguishers where convenient and effective for their intended purpose;
provide not less than one extinguisher on each floor at or near each usable stairwell.
2. Store combustible materials in containers in fire-safe locations.
3. Maintain unobstructed access to fire extinguishers, fire hydrants, temporary fire-protection
facilities, stairways, and other access routes for firefighting. Prohibit smoking in hazardous
fire-exposure areas.
4. Supervise welding operations, combustion-type temporary heating units, and similar
sources of fire ignition.
5. Permanent Fire Protection: At earliest feasible date in each area of Project, complete .�
installation of permanent fire-protection facility, including connected services, and place
into operation and use. Instruct key personnel on use of facilities.
6. Develop and supervise an overall fire-prevention and first-aid fire-protection program for .�
personnel at Project site. Review needs with local fire department and establish procedures
to be followed. Instruct personnel in methods and procedures. Post warnings and
information.
3.5 OPERATION, TERMINATION,AND REMOVAL .�
A. Supervision: Enforce strict discipline in use of temporary facilities. To minimize waste and
abuse, limit availability of temporary facilities to essential and intended uses. •
B. Maintenance: Maintain facilities in good operating condition until removal. Protect from
damage caused by freezing temperatures and similar elements.
1. Maintain operation of temporary enclosures, heating, cooling, humidity control,
ventilation, and similar facilities on a 24-hour basis where required to achieve indicated ,
results and to avoid possibility of damage.
2. Maintain markers for underground lines. Protect from damage during excavation
operations.
C. Temporary Facility Changeover: Except for using permanent fire protection as soon as available,
do not change over from using temporary security and protection facilities to permanent facilities
until Substantial Completion.
D. Termination and Removal: Remove each temporary facility when need for its service has ended,
when it has been replaced by authorized use of a permanent facility, or no later than Substantial
Completion. Complete or, if necessary, restore permanent construction that may have been
delayed because of interference with temporary facility. Repair damaged Work, clean exposed
surfaces, and replace construction that cannot be satisfactorily repaired.
1. Materials and facilities that constitute temporary facilities are the property of Contractor.
Project No. 00058 01500 TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS-10
Renovations to Parsons Annex
Smith College
Northampton, Massachusetts
A. Environmental Protection: Provide protection, operate temporary facilities, and conduct
construction in ways and by methods that comply with environmental regulations and that
W minimize possible air, waterway, and subsoil contamination or pollution or other undesirable
effects. Avoid using tools and equipment that produce harmful noise. Restrict use of
noisemaking tools and equipment to hours that will minimize complaints from persons or firms
near Project site.
B. Stormwater Control: Provide earthen embankments and similar barriers in and around
excavations and subgrade construction, sufficient to prevent flooding by runoff of Stormwater
from heavy rains.
C. Tree and Plant Protection: Engage designated arborist to install temporary fencing located as
indicated or outside the drip line of trees to protect vegetation from construction damage.
Protect tree root systems from damage, flooding, and erosion.
D. Security Enclosure and Lockup: Install substantial temporary enclosure around partially
completed areas of construction. Provide lockable entrances to prevent unauthorized entrance,
vandalism, theft, and similar violations of security.
E. Barricades, Warning Signs, and Lights: Comply with standards and code requirements for
erecting structurally adequate barricades. Paint with appropriate colors, graphics, and warning
signs to inform personnel and public of possible hazard. Where appropriate and needed, provide
lighting, including flashing red or amber lights.
1. For safety barriers, sidewalk bridges, and similar uses, provide minimum 5/8-inch- (16-mm-
) thick exterior plywood.
no F. Temporary Enclosures: Provide temporary enclosures for protection of construction, in progress
and completed, from exposure, foul weather, other construction operations, and similar activities.
Provide temporary weathertight enclosure for building exterior.
no 1. Where heating or cooling is needed and permanent enclosure is not complete, provide
insulated temporary enclosures. Coordinate enclosure with ventilating and material drying
me or curing requirements to avoid dangerous conditions and effects.
2. Vertical Openings: Close openings of 25 sq. ft. (2.3 sq. m) or less with plywood or similar
materials.
on 3. Horizontal Openings: Close openings in floor or roof decks and horizontal surfaces with
load-bearing,wood-framed construction.
4. Install tarpaulins securely using fire-retardant-treated wood framing and other materials.
G. Temporary Partitions: Erect and maintain dustproof partitions and temporary enclosures to limit
dust and dirt migration and to separate areas from fumes and noise.
1. Construct dustproof, floor-to-ceiling baffles with Ix 4-inch battens, 2 layers of 3-mil (0.07-
mm) polyethylene sheets, lapped 18" onto walls of temporary enclosure. Cover floor with
2 layers of 3-mil (0.07-mm) polyethylene sheets, extending sheets 18 inches (460 mm) up
the side walls. Overlap and tape full length of joints. Cover floor with 3/4-inch (19-mm)
plywood.
Project No. 00058 01500 TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS-9
Renovations to Parsons Annex
Smith College
Northampton, Massachusetts
1. If required by authorities having jurisdiction, provide separate containers, clearly labeled,
for each type of waste material to be deposited.
2. Develop a waste management plan for Work performed on Project. Indicate types of waste
materials Project will produce and estimate quantities of each type. Provide detailed
information for on-site waste storage and separation of recyclable materials. Provide
information on destination of each type of waste material and means to be used to dispose
of all waste materials.
G. Janitorial Services: Provide janitorial services on a daily basis for temporary offices, first-aid
stations, toilets,wash facilities, lunchrooms, and similar areas.
H. Common-Use Field Office: Provide a field office for use as a common facility by all personnel ..
engaged in construction activities; of sufficient size to accommodate required office personnel at
Project site. Keep office clean and orderly.
1. Furnish and equip offices as follows:
a. Desk and two chairs, four-drawer file cabinet, a plan table, a plan rack, and
bookcase.
I. Storage and Fabrication Sheds: Provide sheds sized, furnished, and equipped to accommodate
materials and equipment involved, including temporary utility services. Sheds may be open
shelters or fully enclosed spaces within building or elsewhere on-site.
1. Construct framing, sheathing, and siding using fire-retardant-treated lumber and plywood
or of non-combustible materials.
2. Paint exposed lumber and plywood with exterior-grade acrylic-latex emulsion over exterior
primer.
J. Lifts and Hoists: Provide facilities for hoisting materials and personnel. Truck cranes and similar
devices used for hoisting materials are considered "tools and equipment' and not temporary w.
facilities.
K. Temporary Stairs: Until permanent stairs are available, provide temporary stairs where ladders
are not adequate. Cover finished, permanent stairs with protective covering of plywood or similar
material so finishes will be undamaged at time of acceptance.
L. Existing Stair Usage: Use of Owner's existing stairs will be permitted, as long as stairs are cleaned
and maintained in a condition acceptable to Owner. At Substantial Completion, restore stairs to
condition existing before initial use.
1. Provide protective coverings, barriers, devices, signs, or other procedures to protect stairs
and to maintain means of egress. If, despite such protection, stairs become damaged,
restore damaged areas so no evidence remains of correction work.
3.4 SECURITY AND PROTECTION FACILITIES INSTALLATION
Project No. 00058 01500 TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS-8
Renovations to Parsons Annex
Smith College
Northampton, Massachusetts
A. General: Comply with the following:
" 1. Locate field offices, storage sheds, sanitary facilities, and other temporary construction and
support facilities for easy access.
2. Provide incombustible construction for offices, shops, and sheds located within
construction area or within 30 feet(9 m)of building lines. Comply with NFPA 241.
3. Maintain support facilities until near Substantial Completion. Remove before Substantial
Completion. Personnel remaining after Substantial Completion will be permitted to use
permanent facilities, under conditions acceptable to Owner.
B. Temporary Roads and Paved Areas: Construct and maintain temporary roads and paved areas
adequate to support loads and to withstand exposure to traffic during construction period.
I. Provide a reasonably level, graded, well-drained subgrade of satisfactory soil material,
compacted to not less than 95 percent of maximum dry density in the top 6 inches (150
w�
mm).
2. Provide dust-control treatment that is nonpolluting and nontracking. Reapply treatment
as required to minimize dust.
C. Traffic Controls: Provide temporary traffic controls at junction of temporary roads with public
roads. Include warning signs for public traffic and for entrance onto public roads. Comply with
requirements of authorities having jurisdiction.
D. Dewatering Facilities and Drains: Comply with requirements in applicable Division 2 Sections
for temporary drainage and dewatering facilities. Maintain Project site, excavations, and
construction free of water.
1. Dispose of rainwater in a lawful manner that will not result in flooding Project or
adjoining property nor endanger permanent Work or temporary facilities.
2. Before connection and operation of permanent drainage piping system, provide temporary
drainage where roofing or similar waterproof deck construction is completed.
E. Temporary Signs: Provide Project signs as indicated. Install signs to inform public and persons
seeking entrance to Project. Do not permit installation of unauthorized signs.
1. Prepare temporary signs to provide directional information to construction personnel and
visitors.
2. Prepare temporary signs to indicate `Authorized Personnel Only- Hard Hat Required'.
3. Prepare temporary signs to reserve driveway for `Deliveries and Visitor Parking Only'.
4. Construct signs of exterior-type Grade B-B high-density concrete form overlay plywood in
sizes and thicknesses indicated. Support on posts or framing of preservative-treated wood
or steel.
5. Paint sign panel and applied graphics with exterior-grade alkyd gloss enamel over exterior
primer.
F. Waste Disposal Facilities: Provide waste-collection containers in sizes adequate to handle waste
from construction operations. Containerize and clearly label hazardous, dangerous, or unsanitary
waste materials separately from other waste. Comply with Division 1 Section "Execution
Requirements" for progress cleaning requirements.
aye
Project No. 00058 01500 TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS-7
Renovations to Parsons Annex
Smith College
Northampton, Massachusetts
1. Provide waterproof connectors to connect separate lengths of electrical power cords if
single lengths will not reach areas where construction activities are in progress. Do not
exceed safe length-voltage ratio.
2. Provide warning signs at power outlets other than 110 to 120 V.
3. Provide metal conduit, tubing, or metallic cable for wiring exposed to possible damage.
Provide rigid steel conduits for wiring exposed on grades, floors, decks, or other traffic
areas.
4. Provide metal conduit enclosures or boxes for wiring devices.
5. Provide 4-gang outlets, spaced so 100-foot (30-m) extension cord can reach each area for
power hand tools and task lighting. Provide a separate 125-V ac, 20-A circuit for each
outlet.
J. Lighting: Provide temporary lighting with local switching that provides adequate illumination for
construction operations and traffic conditions.
w
1. Install and operate temporary lighting that fulfills security and protection requirements
without operating entire system.
2. Provide one 100-W incandescent lamp every 50 feet(15 m) in traffic areas. w�
3. Provide one 100-W incandescent lamp per story in stairways and ladder runs, located to
illuminate each landing and flight.
K. Telephone Service: Provide temporary telephone service throughout construction period for .�
common-use facilities used by all personnel engaged in construction activities. Owner will
provide dedicated numbers for use during construction period.
I. Provide additional telephone lines for the following:
a. In field office with more than two occupants, install a telephone for each additional
occupant or pair of occupants.
b. Provide a dedicated telephone line for each facsimile machine and computer with
modem in each field office.
2. At each telephone, post a list of important telephone numbers.
a. Police and fire departments.
b. Ambulance service.
C. Contractor's home office.
d. Architects office.
e. Engineers' offices.
f. Owner's office.
g. Principal subcontractors' field and home offices.
3. Provide answering machine on superintendent's telephone.
4. Furnish superintendent with paging device for use when away from field office.
5. Provide a portable cellular telephone for superintendents use in making and receiving
telephone calls when away from field office.
3.3 SUPPORT FACILITIES INSTALLATION
Project No. 00058 01500 TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS-6
Renovations to Parsons Annex
Smith College
Northampton, Massachusetts
1. Filter out excessive soil, construction debris, chemicals, oils, and similar contaminants that
might clog sewers or pollute waterways before discharge.
2. Maintain temporary sewers and drainage facilities in a clean, sanitary condition. After
heavy use, restore normal conditions promptly.
a C. Water Service: Install water service and distribution piping in sizes and pressures adequate for
construction until permanent water service is in use. Sterilize temporary water piping before use.
wo D. Water Service: Use of Owner's existing water service facilities will be permitted, as long as
facilities are cleaned and maintained in a condition acceptable to Owner. At Substantial
Completion, restore these facilities to condition existing before initial use.
No
1. Provide rubber hoses as necessary to serve Project site.
E. Sanitary Facilities: Provide temporary toilets,wash facilities, and drinking-water fixtures. Comply
with regulations and health codes for type, number, location, operation, and maintenance of
fixtures and facilities.
1. Disposable Supplies: Provide toilet tissue, paper towels, paper cups, and similar disposable
materials for each facility. Maintain adequate supply. Provide covered waste containers for
disposal of used material.
2. Toilets: Install self-contained toilet units. Shield toilets to ensure privacy. Provide
separate facilities for male and female personnel.
3. Drinking-Water Facilities: Provide bottled-water, drinking-water units.
w
4. Locate toilets and drinking-water fixtures so personnel need not walk more than two stories
vertically 100 feet horizontally to facilities.
F. Heating and Cooling: Provide temporary heating and cooling required by construction activities
for curing or drying of completed installations or for protecting installed construction from
adverse effects of low temperatures or high humidity. Select equipment from that specified that
will not have a harmful effect on completed installations or elements being installed.
1. Maintain a minimum temperature of 50 deg F (10 deg C) in permanently enclosed
portions of building for normal construction activities, and 65 deg F (18.3 deg Q for
finishing activities and areas where finished Work has been installed.
G. Ventilation and Humidity Control: Provide temporary ventilation required by construction
activities for curing or drying of completed installations or for protecting installed construction
from adverse effects of high humidity. Select equipment from that specified that will not have a
harmful effect on completed installations or elements being installed. Coordinate ventilation
requirements to produce ambient condition required and minimize energy consumption.
H. Electric Power Service: Use of Owner's existing electric power service will be permitted, as long as
equipment is maintained in a condition acceptable to Owner.
I. Electric Distribution: Provide receptacle outlets adequate for connection of power tools and
equipment.
Project No. 00058 01500 TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS-5
Renovations to Parsons Annex
Smith College
Northampton, Massachusetts
C. Self-Contained Toilet Units: Single-occupant units of chemical, aerated recirculation, or
combustion type; vented; fully enclosed with a glass-fiber-reinforced polyester shell or similar
nonabsorbent material.
D. Drinking-Water Fixtures: Containerized, tap-dispenser, bottled-water drinking-water units,
including paper cup supply.
E. Electrical Outlets: Properly configured, NEMA-polarized outlets to prevent insertion of 110- to
120-V plugs into higher-voltage outlets; equipped with ground-fault circuit interrupters, reset
button, and pilot light.
F. Power Distribution System Circuits: Where permitted and overhead and exposed for
surveillance, wiring circuits, not exceeding 125-V ac, 20-A rating, and lighting circuits may be
nonmetallic sheathed cable.
PART 3 -EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION, GENERAL
A. Locate facilities where they will serve Project adequately and result in minimum interference with
performance of the Work. Relocate and modify facilities as required.
B. Provide each facility ready for use when needed to avoid delay. Maintain and modify as required.
Do not remove until facilities are no longer needed or are replaced by authorized use of
completed permanent facilities.
3.2 TEMPORARY UTILITY INSTALLATION
A. General: Engage appropriate local utility company to install temporary service or connect to
existing service. Where utility company provides only part of the service, provide the remainder
with matching, compatible materials and equipment. Comply with utility company
recommendations.
1. Arrange with utility company, Owner, and existing users for time when service can be
interrupted, if necessary, to make connections for temporary services.
2. Provide adequate capacity at each stage of construction. Before temporary utility is
available, provide trucked-in services.
3. Obtain easements to bring temporary utilities to Project site where Owner's easements
cannot be used for that purpose.
B. Sewers and Drainage: If sewers are available, provide temporary connections to remove effluent
that can be discharged lawfully. If sewers are not available or cannot be used, provide drainage
ditches, dry wells, and similar facilities. If neither sewers nor drainage facilities can be lawfully
used for discharge of effluent, provide containers to remove and dispose of effluent off-site in a
lawful manner.
Project No. 00058 01500 TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS-4
Mp
Renovations to Parsons Annex
Smith College
4W Northampton, Massachusetts
1. Trade Jurisdictions: Assigned responsibilities for installation and operation of temporary
utilities are not intended to interfere with trade regulations and union jurisdictions.
ON 2. Electric Service: Comply with NECA, NEMA, and UL standards and regulations for
temporary electric service. Install service to comply with NFPA 70.
w B. Tests and Inspections: Arrange for authorities having jurisdiction to test and inspect each
temporary utility before use. Obtain required certifications and permits.
1.7 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Temporary Utilities: At earliest feasible time,when acceptable to Owner, change over from use of
temporary service to use of permanent service.
1. Temporary Use of Permanent Facilities: Installer of each permanent service shall assume
responsibility for operation, maintenance, and protection of each permanent service
during its use as a construction facility before Owner's acceptance, regardless of previously
assigned responsibilities.
B. Conditions of Use: The following conditions apply to use of temporary services and facilities by
all parties engaged in the Work:
1. Keep temporary services and facilities clean and neat.
2. Relocate temporary services and facilities as required by progress of the Work.
PART 2-PRODUCTS
4M
2.1 MATERIALS
A. General: Provide new materials. Undamaged, previously used materials in serviceable condition
may be used if approved by Architect. Provide materials suitable for use intended.
B. Tarpaulins: Fire-resistive labeled with flame-spread rating of 15 or less.
C. Water: Potable.
2.2 EQUIPMENT
A. General: Provide equipment suitable for use intended.
B. Fire Extinguishers: Hand carried, portable, UL rated. Provide class and extinguishing agent as
indicated or a combination of extinguishers of NFPA-recommended classes for exposures.
1. Comply with NFPA 10 and NFPA 241 for classification, extinguishing agent, and size
required by location and class of fire exposure.
Project No. 00058 01500 TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS-3
ow
Renovations to Parsons Annex
Smith College
Northampton, Massachusetts
8. Temporary enclosures.
9. Temporary partitions.
10. Fire protection. **
E. Related Sections include the following:
1. Division 1 Section "Submittal Procedures" for procedures for submitting copies of
implementation and termination schedule and utility reports.
2. Division 2 Section "Hot-Mix Asphalt Paving" for construction and maintenance of asphalt
paving for temporary roads and paved areas.
3. Divisions 2 through 16 for temporary heat, ventilation, and humidity requirements for
products in those Sections.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. Permanent Enclosure: As determined by Architect, permanent or temporary roofing is complete,
insulated, and weathertight; exterior walls are insulated and weathertight; and all openings are
closed with permanent construction or substantial temporary closures.
1.4 USE CHARGES
A. General: Cost or use charges for temporary facilities are not chargeable to Owner or Architect
and shall be included in the Contract Sum. Allow other entities to use temporary services and
facilities without cost, including, but not limited to, the following:
1. Owner's construction forces.
2. Architect.
3. Testing agencies.
4. Personnel of authorities having jurisdiction.
B. Water Service: Use water from Owner's existing water system without metering and without
payment of use charges.
C. Electric Power Service: Use electric power from Owner's existing system without metering and
without payment of use charges.
1.5 SUBMITTALS
A. Implementation and Termination Schedule: Within 15 days of date established for submittal of
Contractor's Construction Schedule, submit a schedule indicating implementation and
termination of each temporary utility.
1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Standards: Comply with ANSI A10.6, NECA's"Temporary Electrical Facilities," and NFPA 241.
Project No. 00058 01500 TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS-2
Renovations to Parsons Annex
Smith College
w Northampton, Massachusetts
SECTION 01500-TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS
W
PART 1 -GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and other Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
w A. This Section includes requirements for temporary facilities and controls, including temporary
utilities, support facilities, and security and protection facilities.
.w B. Temporary utilities include, but are not limited to, the following:
1. Sewers and drainage.
2. Water service and distribution.
3. Sanitary facilities, including toilets,wash facilities, and drinking-water facilities.
4. Heating and cooling facilities.
5. Ventilation.
6. Electric power service.
7. Lighting.
8. Telephone service.
C. Support facilities include, but are not limited to, the following:
w� 1. Temporary roads and paving.
2. Dewatering facilities and drains.
3. Project identification and temporary signs.
4. Waste disposal facilities.
5. Field offices.
6. Storage and fabrication sheds.
7. Lifts and hoists.
8. Temporary stairs.
9. Construction aids and miscellaneous services and facilities.
D. Security and protection facilities include,but are not limited to, the following:
1. Environmental protection.
2. Stormwater control.
3. Tree and plant protection.
4. Pest control.
5. Site enclosure fence.
6. Security enclosure and lockup.
7. Barricades,warning signs, and lights.
Project No. 00058 01500 TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS-1
Renovations to Parsons Annex
Smith College
Northampton, Massachusetts
1. Access to the Work.
2. Incidental labor and facilities necessary to facilitate tests and inspections.
4" 3. Adequate quantities of representative samples of materials that require testing and
inspecting. Assist agency in obtaining samples.
4. Facilities for storage and field-curing of test samples.
5. Delivery of samples to testing agencies.
6. Preliminary design mix proposed for use for material mixes that require control by testing
agency.
7. Security and protection for samples and for testing and inspecting equipment at Project
site.
G. Coordination: Coordinate sequence of activities to accommodate required quality-assurance and
quality-control services with a minimum of delay and to avoid necessity of removing and replacing
construction to accommodate testing and inspecting.
1. Schedule times for tests, inspections, obtaining samples, and similar activities.
H. Schedule of Tests and Inspections: Prepare a schedule of tests, inspections, and similar quality-
' control services required by the Contract Documents. Submit schedule within twenty-one days of
date established for commencement of the Work.
1. Distribution: Distribute schedule to Owner, Architect, testing agencies, and each party
involved in performance of portions of the Work where tests and inspections are required.
PART 2-PRODUCTS (Not Used)
PART 3 -EXECUTION
3.1 REPAIR AND PROTECTION
A. General: On completion of testing, inspecting, sample taking, and similar services, repair
damaged construction and restore substrates and finishes.
1. Provide materials and comply with installation requirements specified in other Sections of
no these Specifications. Restore patched areas and extend restoration into adjoining areas in a
manner that eliminates evidence of patching.
B. Protect construction exposed by or for quality-control service activities.
C. Repair and protection are Contractor's responsibility, regardless of the assignment of
responsibility for quality-control services.
END OF SECTION 01400
w�
Project No. 00058 01400 QUALITY REQUIREMENTS-5
ow
Renovations to Parsons Annex
Smith College
Northampton, Massachusetts
1. Owner will furnish Contractor with names, addresses, and telephone numbers of testing
agencies engaged and a description of the types of testing and inspecting they are engaged
to perform.
2. Costs for retesting and reinspecting construction that replaces or is necessitated by work
that failed to comply with the Contract Documents will be charged to Contractor.
B. Contractor Responsibilities: Unless otherwise indicated, provide quality-control services specified
and required by authorities having jurisdiction.
1. Where services are indicated as Contractors responsibility, engage a qualified testing
agency to perform these quality-control services.
a. Contractor shall not employ the same entity engaged by Owner, unless agreed to in
writing by Owner.
2. Notify testing agencies at least 24 hours in advance of time when Work that requires w
testing or inspecting will be performed.
3. Where quality-control services are indicated as Contractor's responsibility, submit a
certified written report, in duplicate, of each quality-control service. "
4. Testing and inspecting requested by Contractor and not required by the Contract
Documents are Contractor's responsibility.
5. Submit additional copies of each written report directly to authorities having jurisdiction,
when they so direct.
C. Manufacturer's Field Services: Where indicated, engage a factory-authorized service representative
to inspect field-assembled components and equipment installation, including service connections.
Report results in writing.
D. Retesting/Reinspecting: Regardless of whether original tests or inspections were Contractor's
responsibility, provide quality-control services, including retesting and reinspecting, for
construction that revised or replaced Work that failed to comply with requirements established by
the Contract Documents.
E. Testing Agency Responsibilities: Cooperate with Architect and Contractor in performance of ,
duties. Provide qualified personnel to perform required tests and inspections.
1. Notify Architect and Contractor promptly of irregularities or deficiencies observed in the
Work during performance of its services. .�
2. Interpret tests and inspections and state in each report whether tested and inspected work
complies with or deviates from requirements.
3. Submit a certified written report, in duplicate, of each test, inspection, and similar quality-
control service through Contractor.
4. Do not release, revoke, alter, or increase requirements of the Contract Documents or
approve or accept any portion of the Work.
5. Do not perform any duties of Contractor.
F. Associated Services: Cooperate with agencies performing required tests, inspections, and similar
quality-control services, and provide reasonable auxiliary services as requested. Notify agency
sufficiently in advance of operations to permit assignment of personnel. Provide the following:
Project No. 00058 01400 QUALITY REQUIREMENTS-4
40
Renovations to Parsons Annex
Smith College
Northampton, Massachusetts
6. Description of the Work and test and inspection method.
7. Identification of product and Specification Section.
+iw 8. Complete test or inspection data.
9. Test and inspection results and an interpretation of test results.
10. Ambient conditions at time of sample taking and testing and inspecting.
11. Comments or professional opinion on whether tested or inspected Work complies with
the Contract Document requirements.
12. Name and signature of laboratory inspector.
13. Recommendations on retesting and reinspecting.
E. Permits, Licenses, and Certificates: For Owner's records, submit copies of permits, licenses,
certifications, inspection reports, releases, jurisdictional settlements, notices, receipts for fee
payments, judgments, correspondence, records, and similar documents, established for
compliance with standards and regulations bearing on performance of the Work.
w
1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Fabricator Qualifications: A firm experienced in producing products similar to those indicated
for this Project and with a record of successful in-service performance, as well as sufficient
production capacity to produce required units.
B. Factory-Authorized Service Representative Qualifications: An authorized representative of
manufacturer who is trained and approved by manufacturer to inspect installation of
40 manufacturer's products that are similar in material, design, and extent to those indicated for this
Project.
C. Installer Qualifications: A firm or individual experienced in installing, erecting, or assembling
work similar in material, design, and extent to that indicated for this Project, whose work has
resulted in construction with a record of successful in-service performance.
D. Manufacturer Qualifications: A firm experienced in manufacturing products or systems similar to
those indicated for this Project and with a record of successful in-service performance.
E. Professional Engineer Qualifications: A professional engineer who is legally qualified to practice
in jurisdiction where Project is located and who is experienced in providing engineering services
of the kind indicated. Engineering services are defined as those performed for installations of the
system, assembly, or product that are similar to those indicated for this Project in material, design,
and extent.
F. Testing Agency Qualifications: An agency with the experience and capability to conduct testing
and inspecting indicated, as documented by ASTM E 548, and that specializes in types of tests
and inspections to be performed.
1.7 QUALITY CONTROL
A. Owner Responsibilities: Where quality-control services are indicated as Owner's responsibility,
Owner will engage a qualified testing agency to perform these services.
Project No. 00058 01400 QUALITY REQUIREMENTS-3
Renovations to Parsons Annex
Smith College
Northampton, Massachusetts
where indicated, qualities of materials and execution, and to review construction, coordination,
testing, or operation; they are not Samples.
D. Testing Agency: An entity engaged to perform specific tests, inspections, or both. Testing
laboratory shall mean the same as testing agency.
1.4 DELEGATED DESIGN
A. Performance and Design Criteria: Where professional design services or certifications by a design
professional are specifically required of Contractor by the Contract Documents, provide products
and systems complying with specific performance and design criteria indicated.
1. If criteria indicated are not sufficient to perform services or certification required, submit a
written request for additional information to Architect.
1.5 SUBMITTALS
Op
A. Qualification Data: For testing agencies specified in "Quality Assurance" Article to demonstrate
their capabilities and experience. Include proof of qualifications in the form of a recent report on
the inspection of the testing agency by a recognized authority.
B. Delegated-Design Submittal: In addition to Shop Drawings, Product Data, and other required
submittals, submit a statement, signed and sealed by the responsible design professional, for each
product and system specifically assigned to Contractor to be designed or certified by a design
professional, indicating that the products and systems are in compliance with performance and
design criteria indicated. Include list of codes, loads, and other factors used in performing these
services.
C. Schedule of Tests and Inspections: Prepare in tabular form and include the following:
1. Specification Section number and title.
2. Description of test and inspection.
3. Identification of applicable standards.
4. Identification of test and inspection methods.
5. Number of tests and inspections required.
6. Time schedule or time span for tests and inspections.
7. Entity responsible for performing tests and inspections.
8. Requirements for obtaining samples.
9. Unique characteristics of each quality-control service.
D. Reports: Prepare and submit certified written reports that include the following:
1. Date of issue.
2. Project title and number.
3. Name, address, and telephone number of testing agency.
4. Dates and locations of samples and tests or inspections.
5. Names of individuals making tests and inspections.
Project No. 00058 01400 QUALITY REQUIREMENTS-2
Renovations to Parsons Annex
Smith College
Northampton, Massachusetts
SECTION 01400-QUALITY REQUIREMENTS
PART 1 -GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and other Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
■W
1.2 SUMMARY
in A. This Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for quality assurance and
quality control.
W B. Testing and inspecting services are required to verify compliance with requirements specified or
indicated. These services do not relieve Contractor of responsibility for compliance with the
Contract Document requirements.
1. Specific quality-control requirements for individual construction activities are specified in
the Sections that specify those activities. Requirements in those Sections may also cover
.w production of standard products.
2. Specified tests, inspections, and related actions do not limit Contractor's quality-control
procedures that facilitate compliance with the Contract Document requirements.
3. Requirements for Contractor to provide quality-control services required by Architect,
Owner, or authorities having jurisdiction are not limited by provisions of this Section.
C. Related Sections include the following:
1. Division 1 Section "Construction Progress Documentation" for developing a schedule of
required tests and inspections.
2. Division 1 Section "Cutting and Patching" for repair and restoration of construction
an disturbed by testing and inspecting activities.
3. Divisions 2 through 16 Sections for specific test and inspection requirements.
W
1.3 DEFINITIONS
,, A. Quality-Assurance Services: Activities, actions, and procedures performed before and during
execution of the Work to guard against defects and deficiencies and ensure that proposed
construction complies with requirements.
B. Quality-Control Services: Tests, inspections, procedures, and related actions during and after
execution of the Work to evaluate that completed construction complies with requirements.
Services do not include contract enforcement activities performed by Architect.
C. Mockups: Full-size, physical example assemblies to illustrate finishes and materials. Mockups are
used to verify selections made under Sample submittals, to demonstrate aesthetic effects and,
Project No. 00058 01400 QUALITY REQUIREMENTS-1
Renovations to Parsons Annex
Smith College
Northampton, Massachusetts
1. No Exceptions Taken: Submittal is consistent with requirements of Contract Documents.
o 2. Make Corrections Noted: Submittal is consistent with requirements of Contract
Documents with notations as indicated.
,A 3. Not Approved: Submittal is not consistent with requirements of Contract Documents.
4. Revise & Resubmit: Make corrections noted and/or provide submittal consistent with
Contract Documents.
D. Informational Submittals: Architect will review each submittal and will not return it, or will
reject and return it if it does not comply with requirements. Architect will forward each submittal
to appropriate party.
E. Submittals not required by the Contract Documents will not be reviewed and may be discarded.
END OF SECTION 01330
�r
go
go
Project No. 00058 01330 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES-9
Renovations to Parsons Annex
Smith College
Northampton, Massachusetts
O. Manufacturer's Field Reports: Prepare written information documenting factory-authorized
service representative's tests and inspections. Include the following, as applicable:
1. Name, address, and telephone number of factory-authorized service representative making
report.
2. Statement on condition of substrates and their acceptability for installation of product. + !
3. Statement that products at Project site comply with requirements.
4. Summary of installation procedures being followed, whether they comply with
requirements and, if not,what corrective action was taken.
5. Results of operational and other tests and a statement of whether observed performance
complies with requirements.
6. Statement whether conditions, products, and installation will affect warranty.
7. Other required items indicated in individual Specification Sections.
P. Insurance Certificates and Bonds: Prepare written information indicating current status of ..�
insurance or bonding coverage. Include name of entity covered by insurance or bond, limits of
coverage, amounts of deductibles, if any, and term of the coverage.
Q. Construction Photographs: Comply with requirements in Division 1 Section "Construction
Progress Documentation."
R. Material Safety Data Sheets: Submit information directly to Owner. If submitted to Architect, '
Architect will not review this information but will return it with no action taken.
PART 3-EXECUTION
3.1 CONTRACTOR'S REVIEW .�
A. Review each submittal and check for compliance with the Contract Documents. Note corrections aw
and field dimensions. Mark with approval stamp before submitting to Architect.
B. Approval Stamp: Stamp each submittal with a uniform, approval stamp. Include Project name
and location, submittal number, Specification Section title and number, name of reviewer, date p
of Contractor's approval, and statement certifying that submittal has been reviewed, checked, and
approved for compliance with the Contract Documents.
Im
3.2 ARCHITECT'S ACTION
am
A. General: Architect will not review submittals that do not bear Contractor's approval stamp and
will return them without action.
B. Review and action by Architect does not release Contractor from requirements of Contract ow
Documents.
C. Action Submittals: Architect will review each submittal, make marks to indicate corrections or r
modifications required, and return it. Architect will stamp each submittal with an action stamp
and will mark stamp appropriately to indicate action taken, as follows:
Project No. 00058 01330 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES-8
go
Renovations to Parsons Annex
Smith College
*m Northampton, Massachusetts
E. Welding Certificates: Prepare written certification that welding procedures and personnel comply
with requirements. Submit record of Welding Procedure Specification (WPS) and Procedure
Qualification Record(PQR)on AWS forms. Include names of firms and personnel certified.
F. Installer Certificates: Prepare written statements on manufacturer's letterhead certifying that
w Installer complies with requirements and,where required, is authorized for this specific Project.
G. Manufacturer Certificates: Prepare written statements on manufacturer's letterhead certifying
® that manufacturer complies with requirements. Include evidence of manufacturing experience
where required.
H. Material Certificates: Prepare written statements on manufacturer's letterhead certifying that
material complies with requirements.
I. Material Test Reports: Prepare reports written by a qualified testing agency, on testing agency's
standard form, indicating and interpreting test results of material for compliance with
requirements.
so J. Field Test Reports: Prepare reports written by a qualified testing agency, on testing agency's
standard form, indicating and interpreting results of field tests performed either during
installation of product or after product is installed in its final location, for compliance with
requirements.
K. Product Test Reports: Prepare written reports indicating current product produced by
aw manufacturer complies with requirements. Base reports on evaluation of tests performed by
manufacturer and witnessed by a qualified testing agency, or on comprehensive tests performed
by a qualified testing agency.
No L. Maintenance Data: Prepare written and graphic instructions and procedures for operation and
normal maintenance of products and equipment. Comply with requirements in Division 1
Section"Closeout Procedures."
M. Design Data: Prepare written and graphic information, including, but not limited to,
performance and design criteria, list of applicable codes and regulations, and calculations.
Include list of assumptions and other performance and design criteria and a summary of loads.
Include load diagrams if applicable. Provide name and version of software, if any, used for
calculations. Include page numbers.
N. Manufacturer's Instructions: Prepare written or published information that documents
manufacturer's recommendations, guidelines, and procedures for installing or operating a
product or equipment. Include name of product and name, address, and telephone number of
manufacturer. Include the following, as applicable:
*�*! 1. Preparation of substrates.
2. Required substrate tolerances.
3. Sequence of installation or erection.
4. Required installation tolerances.
5. Required adjustments.
6. Recommendations for cleaning and protection.
w
Project No. 00058 01330 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES-7
go
Renovations to Parsons Annex
Smith College
Northampton, Massachusetts
7. Disposition: Maintain sets of approved Samples at Project site, available for quality-control
comparisons throughout the course of construction activity. Sample sets may be used to
determine final acceptance of construction associated with each set.
a. Samples that may be incorporated into the Work are indicated in individual
Specification Sections. Such Samples must be in an undamaged condition at time "
of use.
b. Samples not incorporated into the Work, or otherwise designated as Owner's
property, are the property of Contractor. e
F. Product Schedule or List: Prepare a written summary indicating types of products required for
the Work and their intended location. Include the following information in tabular form: ,.
1. Type of product. Include unique identifier for each product.
2. Number and name of room or space.
3. Location within room or space.
G. Contractor's Construction Schedule: Comply with requirements in Division 1 Section
"Construction Progress Documentation" for Construction Manager's action.
H. Submittals Schedule: Comply with requirements in Division 1 Section "Construction Progress
Documentation."
I. Application for Payment: Comply with requirements in Division 1 Section "Payment
Procedures."
J. Schedule of Values: Comply with requirements in Division 1 Section"Payment Procedures."
2.2 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A. General: Prepare and submit Informational Submittals required by other Specification Sections. w
1. Number of Copies: Submit two copies of each submittal, retain one copy with record
documents unless otherwise indicated. Architect will not return copies.
2. Certificates and Certifications: Provide a notarized statement that includes signature of
entity responsible for preparing certification. Certificates and certifications shall be signed
by an officer or other individual authorized to sign documents on behalf of that entity.
3. Test and Inspection Reports: Comply with requirements in Division 1 Section "Quality
Requirements."
B. Contractor's Construction Schedule: Comply with requirements in Division 1 Section
"Construction Progress Documentation."
C. Qualification Data: Prepare written information that demonstrates capabilities and experience of
firm or person. Include lists of completed projects with project names and addresses, names and
addresses of architects and owners, and other information specified.
D. Product Certificates: Prepare written statements on manufacturer's letterhead certifying that
product complies with requirements.
Project No. 00058 01330 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES-6
Renovations to Parsons Annex
Smith College
Northampton, Massachusetts
3. Sheet Size: Except for templates, patterns, and similar full-size drawings, submit Shop
Drawings on sheets at least 8.1/2 by 11 inches (215 by 280 mm) but no larger than 24 by
36 inches (600 by 900 mm).
4. Number of Copies: Submit copies of each submittal, as follows:
a. Initial Submittal: Submit two blue- or black-line prints. Architect will return one
print.
b. Final Submittal: Submit five blue- or black-line prints. Architect will retain two
prints; remainder will be returned. Retain one returned print as a Project Record
Drawing.
D. Coordination Drawings: Comply with requirements in Division 1 Section "Project Management
and Coordination."
as E. Samples: Prepare physical units of materials or products, including the following:
1. Comply with requirements in Division 1 Section"Quality Requirements" for mockups.
2. Samples for Initial Selection: Submit two manufacturer's color charts consisting of units or
an sections of units showing the full range of colors, textures, and patterns available.
3. Preparation: Mount, display, or package Samples in manner specified to facilitate review of
qualities indicated. Prepare Samples to match Architect's sample where so indicated.
"M Attach label on unexposed side that includes the following:
a. Generic description of Sample.
* b. Product name or name of manufacturer.
C. Sample source.
W 4. Additional Information: On an attached separate sheet, prepared on Contractor's
letterhead, provide the following:
so a. Size limitations.
b. Compliance with recognized standards.
C. Availability.
r® d. Delivery time.
5. Submit Samples for review of kind, color, pattern, and texture for a final check of these
characteristics with other elements and for a comparison of these characteristics between
■
final submittal and actual component as delivered and installed.
a. If variation in color, pattern, texture, or other characteristic is inherent in the
product represented by a Sample, submit at least three sets of paired units that show
approximate limits of the variations.
b. Refer to individual Specification Sections for requirements for Samples that
illustrate workmanship, fabrication techniques, details of assembly, connections,
operation, and similar construction characteristics.
6. Number of Samples for Initial Selection: Submit two full sets of available choices where
color, pattern, texture, or similar characteristics are required to be selected from
manufacturer's product line. Architect will return one submittal with options selected.
Project No. 00058 01330 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES-5
Renovations to Parsons Annex
Smith College
Northampton, Massachusetts
1. Number of Copies: Submit five copies of each submittal, unless otherwise indicated.
Architect will return three copies. Mark up and retain one returned copy as a Project
Record Document. Deliver with project manuals to Owner upon Project Close-out. 1p""
B. Product Data: Collect information into a single submittal for each element of construction and
type of product or equipment.
1. If information must be specially prepared for submittal because standard printed data are
not suitable for use, submit as Shop Drawings, not as Product Data.
2. Mark each copy of each submittal to show which products and options are applicable.
3. Include the following information, as applicable:
a. Manufacturer's written recommendations.
b. Manufacturer's product specifications.
C. Manufacturer's installation instructions.
d. Standard color charts. '
e. Manufacturer's catalog cuts.
f. Wiring diagrams showing factory-installed wiring.
g. Printed performance curves.
h. Operational range diagrams.
i. Mill reports.
j. Standard product operating and maintenance manuals.
k. Compliance with recognized trade association standards.
1. Compliance with recognized testing agency standards.
M. Application of testing agency labels and seals.
n. Notation of coordination requirements.
C. Shop Drawings: Prepare Project-specific information, drawn accurately to scale. Do not base '
Shop Drawings on reproductions of the Contract Documents or standard printed data.
1. Preparation: Include the following information, as applicable:
a. Dimensions.
b. Identification of products. ..
C. Fabrication and installation drawings.
d. Roughing-in and setting diagrams.
e. Wiring diagrams showing field-installed wiring, including power, signal, and control
wiring.
f. Shopwork manufacturing instructions.
g. Templates and patterns.
h. Schedules. "
i. Design calculations.
j. Compliance with specified standards.
k. Notation of coordination requirements. aw
1. Notation of dimensions established by field measurement.
2. Wiring Diagrams: Differentiate between manufacturer-installed and field-installed wiring. "°
ow
Project No. 00058 01330 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES-4
ow
Renovations to Parsons Annex
Smith College
Northampton, Massachusetts
F. Deviations: Highlight, encircle, or otherwise identify deviations from the Contract Documents
on submittals.
no
G. Additional Copies: Unless additional copies are required for final submittal, and unless
Architect observes noncompliance with provisions of the Contract Documents, initial submittal
„„ may serve as final submittal.
1. Submit one copy of submittal to Architect in addition to specified number of copies to
concurrent reviewer.
H. Transmittal: Package each submittal individually and appropriately for transmittal and handling.
Transmit each submittal using a transmittal form. Architect will return submittals, without
review, received from sources other than Contractor.
1. On an attached separate sheet, prepared on Contractor's letterhead, record relevant
information, requests for data, revisions other than those requested by Architect on
previous submittals, and deviations from requirements of the Contract Documents,
including minor variations and limitations. Include the same label information as the
related submittal.
2. Include Contractor's certification stating that information submitted complies with
requirements of the Contract Documents.
3. Transmittal Form: Provide locations on form for the following information:
a. Project name.
b. Date.
C. Destination(To:).
d. Source(From:).
4W e. Names of subcontractor, manufacturer, and supplier.
f. Specification Section and type of submittal.
g. Submittal purpose and description.
# h. Submittal and transmittal distribution record.
i. Remarks.
j. Signature of transmitter.
NO
I. Distribution: Furnish copies of final submittals to manufacturers, subcontractors, suppliers,
fabricators, installers, authorities having jurisdiction, and others as necessary for performance of
construction activities. Show distribution on transmittal forms.
J. Use for Construction: Use only final submittals with mark indicating action taken by Architect
in connection with construction.
PART 2-PRODUCTS
2.1 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. General: Prepare and submit Action Submittals required by individual Specification Sections.
Project No. 00058 01330 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES-3
Renovations to Parsons Annex
Smith College
Northampton, Massachusetts
1. Coordinate each submittal with fabrication, purchasing, testing, delivery, other submittals,
and related activities that require sequential activity.
2. Coordinate transmittal of different types of submittals for related parts of the Work so
processing will not be delayed because of need to review submittals concurrently for
coordination.
a. Architect reserves the right to withhold action on a submittal requiring coordination
with other submittals until related submittals are received.
C. Submittals Schedule: Comply with requirements in Division 1 Section "Construction Progress
Documentation" for list of submittals and time requirements for scheduled performance of
related construction activities.
D. Processing Time: Allow enough time for submittal review, including time for resubmittals, as
follows. Time for review shall commence on Architect's receipt of submittal.
1. Initial Review: Allow 14 days for initial review of each submittal. Allow additional time if
processing must be delayed to permit coordination with subsequent submittals. Architect
will advise Contractor when a submittal being processed must be delayed for coordination.
2. Concurrent Review: Where concurrent review of submittals by Architect's consultants,
Owner, or other parties is required, allow 14 days for initial review of each submittal.
3. Direct Transmittal to Consultant: Where the Contract Documents indicate that
submittals may be transmitted directly to Architect's consultants, provide duplicate copy of
transmittal and submittal to Architect. Submittal will be returned to Architect before
being returned to Contractor.
4. If intermediate submittal is necessary, process it in same manner as initial submittal. *■
5. Allow seven days for processing each resubmittal.
6. No extension of the Contract Time will be authorized because of failure to transmit
submittals enough in advance of the Work to permit processing.
E. Identification: Place a permanent label or title block on each submittal for identification.
1. Indicate name of firm or entity that prepared each submittal on label or title block.
2. Provide a space approximately 4 by 5 inches (100 by 125 mm) on label or beside title block
to record Contractor's review and approval markings and action taken by Architect.
3. Include the following information on label for processing and recording action taken: w�
a. Project name.
b. Date.
C. Name and address of Architect.
d. Name and address of Contractor.
e. Name and address of subcontractor.
f. Name and address of supplier.
g. Name of manufacturer.
h. Number and title of appropriate Specification Section.
i. Drawing number and detail references, as appropriate.
j. Other necessary identification.
Project No. 00058 01330 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES-2
40
Renovations to Parsons Annex
Smith College
A Northampton, Massachusetts
SECTION 01330-SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES
No
PART 1 -GENERAL
on
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and other Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for submitting Shop Drawings,
Product Data, Samples, and other miscellaneous submittals.
B. Related Sections include the following:
1. Division 1 Section"Payment Procedures" for submitting Applications for Payment.
on 2. Division 1 Section "Project Management and Coordination" for submitting Coordination
Drawings.
3. Division 1 Section "Construction Progress Documentation" for submitting schedules and
No reports, including Contractors Construction Schedule and the Submittals Schedule and
construction photographs.
4. Division 1 Section"Quality Requirements" for submitting test and inspection reports.
5. Division 1 Section "Closeout Procedures" for submitting warranties Project Record
on
Documents and operation and maintenance manuals.
6. Division 1 Section "Project Record Documents" for submitting Record Drawings, Record
Specifications, and Record Product Data.
7. Division 1 Section "Operation and Maintenance Data" for operation and maintenance
manual requirements.
qW
1.3 DEFINITIONS
�w A. Action Submittals: Written and graphic information that requires Architect's responsive action.
B. Informational Submittals: Written information that does not require Architects approval.
Submittals may be rejected for not complying with requirements.
w
1.4 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES
A. General: Electronic copies of CAD Drawings of the Contract Drawings will not be provided by
Architect for Contractor's use in preparing submittals.
w
B. Coordination: Coordinate preparation and processing of submittals with performance of
construction activities.
Project No. 00058 01330 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES-1
MW
Renovations to Parsons Annex
Smith College
Northampton, Massachusetts ow
A. Date Stamp: Unless otherwise indicated, date and time stamp each photograph as it is being
taken so stamp is integral to photograph.
B. Periodic Construction Photographs: Take color photographs weekly. Select vantage points to
best show status of construction and progress since last photographs were taken.
1. Field Office Prints: Retain one set of prints of periodic photographs in field office at
Project site, available at all times for reference. Identify photographs the same as for those
submitted to Architect and Owner.
2. Document changes in scope, concealed conditions and progress of the Work.
END OF SECTION 01320
Project No. 00058 01320 CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION-8
Renovations to Parsons Annex
Smith College
Northampton, Massachusetts
E. Schedule Updating: Concurrent with making revisions to schedule, prepare tabulated reports
showing the following:
1. Identification of activities that have changed.
2. Changes in early and late start dates.
+fir 3. Changes in early and late finish dates.
4. Changes in activity durations in workdays.
5. Changes in the critical path.
6. Changes in total float or slack time.
7. Changes in the Contract Time.
2.5 REPORTS
A. Field Condition Reports: Immediately on discovery of a difference between field conditions and
the Contract Documents, notify Architect and photograph conditions. Submit a request for
information. Include a detailed description of the differing conditions, together with
recommendations for changing the Contract Documents.
on
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 CONTRACTOR'S CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE
A. Contractor's Construction Schedule Updating: At monthly intervals, update schedule to reflect
W,
actual construction progress and activities. Issue schedule at regularly scheduled progress
meeting.
1. Revise schedule immediately after each meeting or other activity where revisions have been
recognized or made. Issue updated schedule concurrently with the report of each such
meeting.
2. Include a report with updated schedule that indicates every change, including, but not
limited to, changes in logic, durations, actual starts and finishes, and activity durations.
3. As the Work progresses, indicate Actual Completion percentage for each activity.
B. Distribution: Distribute copies of approved schedule to Architect, Owner, separate contractors,
testing and inspecting agencies, and other parties identified by Contractor with a need-to-know
40 schedule responsibility.
1. Post copies in Project meeting rooms and temporary field offices.
40 2. When revisions are made, distribute updated schedules to the same parties and post in the
same locations. Delete parties from distribution when they have completed their assigned
portion of the Work and are no longer involved in performance of construction activities.
3.2 CONSTRUCTION PHOTOGRAPHS
Project No. 00058 01320 CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION-7
Renovations to Parsons Annex
Smith College
Northampton, Massachusetts
B. Preparation: Indicate each significant construction activity separately. Identify first workday of
each week with a continuous vertical line. Outline significant construction activities for the
duration of construction. Include skeleton diagram for the remainder of the Work and a cash
requirement prediction based on indicated activities.
2.4 CONTRACTOR'S CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE(CPM SCHEDULE)
A. General: Prepare network diagrams using AON (activity-on-node)format.
B. CPM Schedule: Prepare Contractor's Construction Schedule using a CPM. network analysis
diagram.
1. Establish procedures for monitoring and updating CPM schedule and for reporting ..
progress. Coordinate procedures with progress meeting and payment request dates.
2. Use"one workday" as the unit of time.
C. CPM Schedule Preparation: Prepare a list of all activities required to complete the Work. Using
the preliminary network diagram, prepare a skeleton network to identify probable critical paths.
1. Activities: Indicate the estimated time duration, sequence requirements, and relationship
of each activity in relation to other activities. Include estimated time frames for the
following activities: .■
a. Preparation and processing of submittals.
b. Purchase of materials.
C. Delivery.
d. Fabrication.
e. Installation.
2. Format: Mark the critical path. Locate the critical path near center of network; locate
paths with most float near the edges.
a. Subnetworks on separate sheets are permissible for activities clearly off the critical
path.
D. Initial Issue of Schedule: Prepare initial network diagram from a list of straight "early start-total ..
float" sort. Identify critical activities. Prepare tabulated reports showing the following:
1. Contractor or subcontractor and the Work or activity.
2. Description of activity.
3. Principal events of activity.
4. Immediate preceding and succeeding activities.
5. Early and late start dates.
6. Early and late finish dates.
7. Activity duration in workdays. �^
8. Total float or slack time.
9. Average size of workforce.
10. Dollar value of activity(coordinated with the Schedule of Values). .�
Project No. 00058 01320 CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION-6
OR
Renovations to Parsons Annex
Smith College
W Northampton, Massachusetts
3. Owner-Furnished Products: Include a separate activity for each product. Include delivery
date indicated in Division 1 Section "Summary." Delivery dates indicated stipulate the
'!® earliest possible delivery date.
4. Work Restrictions: Show the effect of the following items on the schedule:
w a. Coordination with existing construction.
b. Uninterruptible services.
C. Partial occupancy before Substantial Completion.
on d. Use of premises restrictions.
e. Environmental control.
,w 5. Work Stages: Indicate important stages of construction for each major portion of the
Work, including, but not limited to, the following:
a. Submittals.
b. Purchases.
C. Mockups.
d. Fabrication.
e. Sample testing.
f. Deliveries.
g. Installation.
h. Tests and inspections.
i. Adjusting.
j. Curing.
k. Startup and placement into final use and operation.
6. Area Separations: Identify each major area of construction for each major portion of the
Work. Indicate where each construction activity within a major area must be sequenced or
integrated with other construction activities to provide for the following:
a. Structural completion.
W b. Permanent space enclosure.
C. Completion of mechanical installation.
d. Completion of electrical installation.
e. Substantial Completion.
E. Milestones: Include milestones indicated in the Contract Documents in schedule, including, but
not limited to,the Notice to Proceed, Substantial Completion, and Final Completion.
F. Contract Modifications: For each proposed contract modification and concurrent with its
submission, prepare a time-impact analysis using fragnets to demonstrate the effect of the
proposed change on the overall project schedule.
2.3 PRELIMINARY CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE
A. Bar-Chart Schedule: Submit preliminary horizontal bar-chart-type construction schedule within
seven days of date established for the Notice to Proceed.
Project No. 00058 01320 CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION-5
go
Renovations to Parsons Annex
Smith College
Northampton, Massachusetts
PART 2-PRODUCTS
2.1 SUBMITTALS SCHEDULE
A. Preparation: Submit a schedule of submittals, arranged in chronological order by dates required �.
by construction schedule. Include time required for review, resubmittal, ordering,
manufacturing, fabrication, and delivery when establishing dates.
1. Coordinate Submittals Schedule with list of subcontracts, the Schedule of Values, and
Contractors Construction Schedule.
2.2 CONTRACTOR'S CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE, GENERAL
A. Procedures: Comply with procedures contained in AGC's "Construction Planning & "
Scheduling."
B. Time Frame: Extend schedule from date established for commencement of the Work to date of ■""
Substantial Completion.
1. Contract completion date shall not be changed by submission of a schedule that shows an �.
early completion date, unless specifically authorized by Change Order.
C. Activities: Treat each separate area as a separate numbered activity for each principal element of
the Work. Comply with the following:
1. Activity Duration: Define activities so no activity is longer than 10 days, unless specifically
allowed by Architect. '"
2. Procurement Activities: Include procurement process activities for long lead items and
major items, requiring a cycle of more than 30 days, as separate activities in schedule.
Procurement cycle activities include, but are not limited to, submittals, approvals,
purchasing, fabrication, and delivery.
3. Submittal Review Time: Include review and resubmittal times indicated in Division 1 7A°
Section "Submittal Procedures" in schedule. Coordinate submittal review times in
Contractor's Construction Schedule with Submittals Schedule.
4. Startup and Testing Time: Include not less than seven days for startup and testing.
5. Substantial Completion: Indicate completion in advance of date established for
Substantial Completion, and allow time for Architect's administrative procedures necessary
for certification of Substantial Completion. ..e
D. Constraints: Include constraints and work restrictions indicated in the Contract Documents and
as follows in schedule, and show how the sequence of the Work is affected. ..�
1. Work by Owner: Include a separate activity for each portion of the Work performed by
Owner.
2. Products Ordered in Advance: Include a separate activity for each product. Include
delivery date indicated in Division 1 Section "Summary." Delivery dates indicated stipulate
the earliest possible delivery date.
Project No. 00058 01320 CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION-4
Renovations to Parsons Annex
Smith College
Northampton, Massachusetts
1. Format: 4-by-6-inch smooth-surface matte prints on single-weight commercial-grade stock,
enclosed back to back in clear plastic sleeves that are punched for standard 3-ring binder.
.w 2. Identification: On back of each print, provide an applied label or rubber-stamped
impression with the following information:
a. Name of Project.
b. Name and address of photographer.
C. Name of Architect.
d. Name of Contractor.
e. Date photograph was taken.
f. Description of vantage point, indicating location, direction (by compass point), and
elevation or story of construction.
G. Field Condition Reports: Submit two copies at time of discovery of differing conditions.
W
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
W A. Prescheduling Conference: Conduct conference at Project site to comply with requirements in
Division 1 Section "Project Management and Coordination. Review methods and procedures
related to the Preliminary Construction Schedule and Contractor's Construction Schedule,
including,but not limited to, the following:
1. Discuss constraints, including work stages, area separations, interim milestones and Owner
occupancy.
so 2. Review schedule for work of Owner's separate contracts.
3. Review time required for review of submittals and resubmittals.
4. Review requirements for tests and inspections by independent testing and inspecting
no agencies.
5. Review time required for completion and startup procedures.
6. Review and finalize list of construction activities to be included in schedule.
W 7. Review submittal requirements and procedures.
8. Review procedures for updating schedule.
1.6 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate preparation and processing of schedules and reports with performance of
construction activities and with scheduling and reporting of separate contractors.
B. Coordinate Contractor's Construction Schedule with the Schedule of Values, list of subcontracts,
Submittals Schedule, progress reports, payment requests, and other required schedules and
reports.
1. Secure time commitments for performing critical elements of the Work from parties
involved.
2. Coordinate each construction activity in the network with other activities and schedule
wi them in proper sequence.
w
Project No. 00058 01320 CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION-3
Renovations to Parsons Annex
Smith College
Northampton, Massachusetts
C. Critical Path: The longest continuous chain of activities through the network schedule that
establishes the minimum overall Project duration and contains no float.
D. Event: The starting or ending point of an activity.
E. Float: The measure of leeway in starting and completing an activity.
1. Free float is the amount of time an activity can be delayed without adversely affecting the
early start of the following activity.
2. Total float is the measure of leeway in starting or completing an activity without adversely .►
affecting the planned Project completion date.
F. Fragnet: A partial or fragmentary network that breaks down activities into smaller activities for
greater detail.
G. Major Area: A story of construction, a separate building, or a similar significant construction .�
element.
H. Milestone: A key or critical point in time for reference or measurement.
I. Network Diagram: A graphic diagram of a network schedule, showing activities and activity
relationships.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Qualification Data: For firms and persons specified in "Quality Assurance" Article to
demonstrate their capabilities and experience. Include schedule of sub-contactors from approved
list attached and sub-contactors proposed by Contractor where Owner's list has no preferences. .,
B. Submittals Schedule: Submit 3 copies of schedule. Arrange the following information in a
tabular format:
1. Scheduled date for first submittal.
2. Specification Section number and title.
3. Submittal category(action or informational).
4. Name of subcontractor.
5. Description of the Work covered.
6. Scheduled date for Architect's final release or approval.
C. Preliminary Construction Schedule: Submit two printed copies.
D. Preliminary Network Diagram: Submit two printed copies; one a single sheet of reproducible
media, and one a print; large enough to show entire network for entire construction period.
E. Contractor's Construction Schedule: Submit two printed copies of initial schedule, large enough
to show entire schedule for entire construction period.
F. Construction Photographs: Submit two prints of each photographic view within seven days of
taking photographs. Document progress of the work and any concealed conditions or changes in
scope due to field conditions.
Project No. 00058 01320 CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION-2
Renovations to Parsons Annex
Smith College
*" Northampton, Massachusetts
SECTION 01320-CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION
w�
PART 1 -GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and other Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
"a A. This Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for documenting the progress
of construction during performance of the Work, including the following:
1. Preliminary Construction Schedule.
2. Contractors Construction Schedule.
3. Submittals Schedule.
No 4. Daily construction reports.
5. Field condition reports.
6. Construction photographs.
B. Related Sections include the following:
1. Division 1 Section"Payment Procedures" for submitting the Schedule of Values.
2. Division 1 Section "Project Management and Coordination" for submitting and
distributing meeting and conference minutes.
3. Division 1 Section"Submittal Procedures" for submitting schedules and reports.
4. Division 1 Section "Quality Requirements" for submitting a schedule of tests and
inspections.
5. Division 1 Section "Closeout Procedures" for submitting photographic negatives as Project
Record Documents at Project closeout.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. Activity: A discrete part of a project that can be identified for planning, scheduling, monitoring,
and controlling the construction project. Activities included in a construction schedule consume
time and resources.
1. Critical activities are activities on the critical path. They must start and finish on the
planned early start and finish times.
2. Predecessor activity is an activity that must be completed before a given activity can be
started.
B. CPM: Critical path method, which is a method of planning and scheduling a construction
project where activities are arranged based on activity relationships. Network calculations
determine when activities can be performed and the critical path of Project.
.w
Project No. 00058 01320 CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION-1
Renovations to Parsons Annex
Smith College
Northampton, Massachusetts
2. This application shall reflect Certificates of Partial Substantial Completion issued
previously for Owner occupancy of designated portions of the Work.
I. Final Payment Application: Submit final Application for Payment with releases and supporting
documentation not previously submitted and accepted, including, but not limited, to the
following:
1. Evidence of completion of Project closeout requirements.
2. Insurance certificates for products and completed operations where required and proof .
that taxes, fees, and similar obligations were paid.
3. Updated final statement, accounting for final changes to the Contract Sum.
4. AIA Document G706, "Contractor's Affidavit of Payment of Debts and Claims." w.
5. AIA Document G706A, "Contractor's Affidavit of Release of Liens."
6. Evidence that claims have been settled.
PART 2-PRODUCTS (Not Used)
PART 3-EXECUTION(Not Used)
END OF SECTION 01290
w.
Project No. 00058 01290 PAYMENT PROCEDURES-4
Renovations to Parsons Annex
Smith College
4M Northampton, Massachusetts
1. Initial Application for Payment, Application for Payment at time of Substantial
Completion, and final Application for Payment involve additional requirements.
10
B. Payment Application Times: The date for each progress payment is indicated in the Agreement
between Owner and Contractor. The period of construction Work covered by each Application
an for Payment is the period indicated in the Agreement.
C. Payment Application Forms: Use AIA Document G702 and AIA Document G703 Continuation
Sheets as form for Applications for Payment.
D. Review copy: Submit proposed application for review by Architect and Owner one week prior to
submitting notorized application.
E. Application Preparation: Complete every entry on form. Notarize and execute by a person
authorized to sign legal documents on behalf of Contractor. Architect will return incomplete
wA
applications without action.
1. Entries shall match data on the Schedule of Values and Contractor's Construction
Schedule. Use updated schedules if revisions were made.
2. Include amounts of Change Orders and Construction Change Directives issued before last
day of construction period covered by application.
F. Transmittal: Submit 3 signed and notarized original copies of each Application for Payment to
Architect by a method ensuring receipt within 24 hours. One copy shall include waivers of lien
and similar attachments if required.
1. Transmit each copy with a transmittal form listing attachments and recording appropriate
in information about application.
G. Initial Application for Payment: Administrative actions and submittals that must precede or
coincide with submittal of first Application for Payment include the following:
1. List of subcontractors.
2. Schedule of Values.
'w 3. Contractor's Construction Schedule (preliminary if not final).
4. Submittals Schedule(preliminary if not final).
5. List of Contractor's staff assignments.
6. List of Contractor's principal consultants.
7. Copies of building permits.
8. Certificates of insurance and insurance policies.
9. Data needed to acquire Owner's insurance.
H. Application for Payment at Substantial Completion: After issuing the Certificate of Substantial
Completion, submit an Application for Payment showing 100 percent completion for portion of
the Work claimed as substantially complete.
1. Include documentation supporting claim that the Work is substantially complete and a
statement showing an accounting of changes to the Contract Sum.
Project No. 00058 01290 PAYMENT PROCEDURES-3
Renovations to Parsons Annex
Smith College
Northampton, Massachusetts
1. Identification: Include the following Project identification on the Schedule of Values:
a. Project name and location.
b. Name of Architect.
C. Architects project number.
d. Contractor's name and address. •
e. Date of submittal.
2. Arrange the Schedule of Values in tabular form with separate columns to indicate the
following for each item listed:
a. Related Specification Section or Division.
b. Change Orders (numbers)that affect value.
C. Dollar value.
1) Percentage of the Contract Sum to nearest one-hundredth percent, adjusted
to total 100 percent.
3. Provide a breakdown of the Contract Sum in enough detail to facilitate continued
evaluation of Applications for Payment and progress reports. Coordinate with the Project
Manual table of contents. Provide several line items for principal subcontract amounts,
where appropriate. .we
4. Round amounts to nearest whole dollar; total shall equal the Contract Sum.
5. Provide a separate line item in the Schedule of Values for each part of the Work where
Applications for Payment may include materials or equipment purchased or fabricated and
stored, but not yet installed.
a. Differentiate between items stored on-site and items stored off-site. Include
evidence of insurance or bonded warehousing if required.
6. Provide separate line items in the Schedule of Values for initial cost of materials, for each w
subsequent stage of completion, and for total installed value of that part of the Work.
7. Each item in the Schedule of Values and Applications for Payment shall be complete.
Include total cost and proportionate share of general overhead and profit for each item.
a. Temporary facilities and other major cost items that are not direct cost of actual
work-in-place may be shown either as separate line items in the Schedule of Values
or distributed as general overhead expense, at Contractor's option.
8. Schedule Updating: Update and resubmit the Schedule of Values before the next
Applications for Payment when Change Orders or Construction Change Directives result
in a change in the Contract Sum.
1.5 APPLICATIONS FOR PAYMENT
A. Each Application for Payment shall be consistent with previous applications and payments as
certified by Architect and paid for by Owner.
of
Project No. 00058 01290 PAYMENT PROCEDURES-2
so
Renovations to Parsons Annex
Smith College
Northampton, Massachusetts
SECTION 01290-PAYMENT PROCEDURES
PART 1 -GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
W
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and other Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
4 W A. This Section specifies administrative and procedural requirements necessary to prepare and
process Applications for Payment.
on B. Related Sections include the following:
1. Division 1 Section "Contract Modification Procedures" for administrative procedures for
handling changes to the Contract.
go 2. Division 1 Section "Construction Progress Documentation" for administrative
requirements governing preparation and submittal of Contractor's Construction Schedule
and Submittals Schedule.
.w
1.3 DEFINITIONS
W A. Schedule of Values: A statement furnished by Contractor allocating portions of the Contract
Sum to various portions of the Work and used as the basis for reviewing Contractor's
Applications for Payment.
s
1.4 SCHEDULE OF VALUES
A. Coordination: Coordinate preparation of the Schedule of Values with preparation of
Contractors Construction Schedule.
1. Correlate line items in the Schedule of Values with other required administrative forms
and schedules, including the following:
a. Application for Payment forms with Continuation Sheets.
b. Submittals Schedule.
2. Submit the Schedule of Values to Architect at earliest possible date but no later than seven
(7) days before the date scheduled for submittal of initial Applications for Payment.
B. Format and Content: Use the Project Manual table of contents as a guide to establish line items
for the Schedule of Values. Provide at least one line item for each Specification Section.
Project No. 00058 01290 PAYMENT PROCEDURES-1
an
Renovations to Parsons Annex
Smith College
Northampton, Massachusetts No
PART 2-PRODUCTS (Not Used)
am
PART 3-EXECUTION
3.1 SCHEDULE OF ALTERNATES or
A. Alternate No. 1: Delete replacing existing sash with new replacement windows. ..
B. Alternate No. 2: Delete removal and replacement of existing slate, metal and membrane roofing
systems.
C. Alternate No. 3: Delete exterior painting of existing work not impacted by renovations.
D. Alternate No. 4: Delete sheet vinyl and multi-ply underlayment in student rooms.
E. Alternate No. 5: Add installation and finishing of hardwood floors in student rooms,
F. Alternate No. 6: Add make-up air ventilation system.
G. Alternate No. 7: Add expanded scope of existing sprinkler system piping replacement. W
END OF SECTION 01230
an
WP
so
Project No. 00058 01230 ALTERNATES-2
Renovations to Parsons Annex
Smith College
Northampton, Massachusetts
SECTION 01230-ALTERNATES
PART 1 -GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and other Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
"a A. This Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for alternates.
ow 1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. Alternate: An amount proposed by bidders and stated on the Bid Form for certain work defined
in the Bidding Requirements that may be added to or deducted from the Base Bid amount if
an Owner decides to accept a corresponding change either in the amount of construction to be
completed or in the products, materials, equipment, systems, or installation methods described in
the Contract Documents.
1. The cost or credit for each alternate is the net addition to or deduction from the Contract
Sum to incorporate alternate into the Work. No other adjustments are made to the
Contract Sum.
as, 1.4 PROCEDURES
A. Coordination: Modify or adjust affected adjacent work as necessary to completely integrate work
of the alternate into Project.
1. Include as part of each alternate, miscellaneous devices, accessory objects, and similar items
Wo incidental to or required for a complete installation whether or not indicated as part of
alternate.
B. Notification: Immediately following award of the Contract, notify each party involved, in writing,
of the status of each alternate. Indicate if alternates have been accepted, rejected, or deferred for
later consideration. Include a complete description of negotiated modifications to alternates.
C. Execute accepted alternates under the same conditions as other work of the Contract.
D. Schedule: A Schedule of Alternates is included at the end of this Section. Specification Sections
referenced in schedule contain requirements for materials necessary to achieve the work described
under each alternate.
,w.
Project No. 00058 01230 ALTERNATES-1
Renovations to Parsons Annex
Smith College
Northampton, Massachusetts
4. On occupancy, Owner will assume responsibility for maintenance and custodial service for
occupied portions of building.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS(Not Used)
PART 3 -EXECUTION (Not Used)
END OF SECTION 01140
wu
.err
Project No. 00058 01140 WORK RESTRICTIONS-2
w
Renovations to Parsons Annex
Smith College
4s Northampton, Massachusetts
SECTION 01140-WORK RESTRICTIONS
PART 1 -GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and other Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 USE OF PREMISES
A. Use of Site: Limit use of premises to work in areas indicated. Do not disturb portions of site
beyond areas in which the Work is indicated.
1. Limits: Confine constructions operations to established Contract Limit lines.
2. Owner Occupancy: Allow for Owner access to the site.
3. Driveways and Entrances: Site is very restricted and parking on site is not possible.
a. Schedule deliveries to minimize use of driveways and entrances.
b. Maintain driveway clear and reserve for parking by Owner's representatives
including Architect and Engineers.
C. Schedule deliveries to minimize space and time requirements for storage of materials
and equipment on-site.
ws
B. Use of Existing Building: Maintain existing building in a weathertight condition throughout
construction period. Repair damage caused by construction operations. Protect building during
W construction period.
on 1.3 OCCUPANCY REQUIREMENTS
A. Partial Owner Occupancy: Owner reserves the right to occupy and to place and install equipment
No in completed areas of building, before Substantial Completion, provided such occupancy does
not interfere with completion of the Work. Such placement of equipment and partial occupancy
shall not constitute acceptance of the total Work.
40 1. Architect will prepare a Certificate of Substantial Completion for each specific portion of
the Work to be occupied before Owner occupancy.
2. Obtain a Certificate of Occupancy from authorities having jurisdiction before Owner
occupancy.
3. Before partial Owner occupancy, mechanical and electrical systems shall be fully
operational, and required tests and inspections shall be successfully completed. On
occupancy, Owner will provide, operate, and maintain mechanical and electrical systems
serving occupied portions of building.
Project No. 00058 01140 WORK RESTRICTIONS-1
Renovations to Parsons Annex
Smith College
Northampton, Massachusetts
clarity to describe responsibilities that must be fulfilled indirectly by Contractor or by
others when so noted.
a. The words "shall," "shall be," or "shall comply with," depending on the context, are
implied where a colon(:) is used within a sentence or phrase.
PART 2-PRODUCTS (Not Used)
PART 3-EXECUTION
3.1 CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE
A. Construction Dates:
1. The Work may begin after noon on May 21, 2001.
2. The date for Substantial Completion is August 24, 2001.
B. Pre-construction Activities:
1. Submittals and Schedules: Immediately upon receipt of the Notice of Award, begin
processing submittals for approval to assure timely delivery of items required by the Work.
uw
C. Working Hours: Construction shall take place between the hours of lam and 5pm. Monday thru
Saturday, unless otherwise approved by the Owner.
D. Overtime: It is expected that the Contractor will exercise due diligence and take whatever means
necessary to complete the Work within the scheduled dates for the Project. Claims for extras due
to overtime will not be considered, unless it is due to circumstances beyond the control of the
Contractor and authorized by the Owner.
E. Extensions of Contract Time: Changes, additions or alterations in the scope of the Work shall
no not extend the date for Substantial Completion or date for Occupancy by the Owner.
END OF SECTION 01100
Project No. 00058 01100 SUMMARY-3
go
Renovations to Parsons Annex
Smith College
Northampton, Massachusetts
1.5 WORK UNDER OTHER CONTRACTS
A. Separate Contract: Owner will award a separate contract for performance of certain pre-
construction operations at Project site. Portions of those operations are scheduled to be
substantially complete before work under this Contract begins. Some work may be conducted
simultaneously with work under this contract. The separate contract the following: .w
1. Abatement work.
2. Interior furnishings and window treatments in Rooms 100P and 100S. .�
B. Cooperate fully with separate contractors so work on those contracts may be carried out
smoothly,without interfering with or delaying work under this Contract.
1.6 PRODUCTS ORDERED IN ADVANCE
A. General: Owner has negotiated Purchase Orders with suppliers of material and equipment to be
incorporated into the Work. Owner has assigned these Purchase Orders to Contractor. Costs
for receiving, handling, storage if required, and installation of material and equipment are
included in the Contract Sum.
1. Products Ordered in Advance is include door hardware and closet door mirrors.
1.7 SPECIFICATION FORMATS AND CONVENTIONS
A. Specification Format: The Specifications are organized into Divisions and Sections using the 16-
division format and CSI/CSC's "MasterFormat" numbering system.
1. Section Identification: The Specifications use section numbers and titles to help cross- wo
referencing in the Contract Documents. Sections in the Project Manual are in numeric
sequence; however, the sequence is incomplete. Consult the table of contents at the
beginning of the Project Manual to determine numbers and names of sections in the ""
Contract Documents.
B. Specification Content: The Specifications use certain conventions for the style of language and
the intended meaning of certain terms, words, and phrases when used in particular situations.
These conventions are as follows:
1. Abbreviated Language: Language used in the Specifications and other Contract .�
Documents is abbreviated. Words and meanings shall be interpreted as appropriate.
Words implied, but not stated, shall be inferred as the sense requires. Singular words shall ,.
be interpreted as plural, and plural words shall be interpreted as singular where applicable
as the context of the Contract Documents indicates.
2. Imperative mood and streamlined language are generally used in the Specifications.
Requirements expressed in the imperative mood are to be performed by Contractor. .®
Occasionally, the indicative or subjunctive mood may be used in the Section Text for
40
Project No. 00058 01100 SUMMARY-2
No
4M
Renovations to Parsons Annex
Smith College
4W Northampton, Massachusetts
SECTION 01100-SUMMARY
MW
PART 1 -GENERAL
on
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
4w A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and other Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 WORK COVERED BY CONTRACT DOCUMENTS
�w A. Project Identification: Project consists of Renovations to Parson's Annex.
1. Project Location: Round Hill Road, Northampton, MA.
2. Owner: Smith College
B. Architect Identification: The Contract Documents, dated March 19, 2001, were prepared for
Project by Kuhn Riddle Architects.
C. Project Manager: Ken Packard has been appointed by Owner to serve as Project Manager.
d1" D. The Work consists of renovations, modifications, additions and refurbishment of a turn of the
century wood frame residential dormitory including a new accessible entrance.
1. The Work includes site improvements, limited demolition, concrete and masonry work,
miscellaneous metal supports and fabrications, general and finish carpentry, architectural
woodwork, general building insulation, new roofing, repairs to existing roofing systems,
+! new doors, installation of door hardware, finishes including veneer plaster, flooring, wall
coverings, interior and exterior painting and acoustical ceilings, toilet partitions,
accessories, kitchen equipment, a wheel chair lift, and plumbing, mechanical, fire
4. protection and electrical upgrades. Alternates include roofing replacement, window
replacement and scope changes to mechanical and sprinkler work.
an
1.3 CONTRACT
A. Project will be constructed under general construction a contract.
1.4 USE OF PREMISES
no
A. General: Contractor shall have full use of premises for construction operations, including use of
Project site, during construction period. Contractor's use of premises is limited only by Owner's
right to perform work or to retain other contractors on portions of Project.
no
Project No. 00058 01100 SUMMARY-1
4"
Renovations to Parsons Annex
Smith College
Northampton, Massachusetts
an rights as they may have to proceeds of such insurance held by the Owner as
fiduciary.
ARTICLE 13,MISCELLANEOUS PROVISIONS
13.5 Tests and Inspections is supplemented in Division One - General Requirements.
Particular attention is directed to Section 01400 and specific Sections of the Work.
END OF SUPPLEMENTARY GENERAL CONDITIONS
so
.W
w
on
s
Project No. 00058 SUPPLEMENTARY GEN'L CONDITIONS-7
Renovations to Parsons Annex
Smith College
Northampton, Massachusetts
f. Medical Expense(any one person): $5,000
3. Business Automobile Liability (including owned, non-owned and
hired vehicles):
a. Bodily Injury: $500,000 per person
$1,000,000 per accident +�+
b. Property Damage: $500,000
C. Medical Payments $5,000
4. Umbrella Excess Liability
a. Each Occurrence: $2,000,000
b. Aggregate: $2,000,000
C. Retention(max.) $10,000
11.1.3 Insert the following sentence after the second sentence:
`The Contractor, at the Owners request, may be required to file a copy of
each policy with the Owner before an exposure to loss may occur or at any
time during the construction period.'
11.4.1.1 The following is added to the end of the Article:
Notwithstanding the definition of the "Work" in Article 1.1.3, and foregoing
wording in this Article 11.4.1, the Contractor assumes all responsibility for the
safety and keeping of all tools and equipment and any materials or products used
to complete or perform the Work, and which do not form a permanent part of
the work. The Contractor waives all rights against the Owner and Architect,
Architect's consultants, and their employees and agents for any loss or damage to
such tools, equipment or any materials or products used to complete or perform
the Work, and which do not form a permanent part of the work. The Contractor
shall require similar waivers in favor of the Owner,Architect,Architect's
consultants, and their employers and agents from all Subcontractors and sub-
subcontractors, agents and employees of any of them.
11.4.1.2 Revise the sentence to read:
If the property insurance requires deductibles, the Owner shall pay costs not
covered because of deductibles, except for those losses caused by the Contractor,
Subcontractor or Sub-subcontractors, as per Article 10.2.5., in which case the
deductible amount shall be fully paid by the responsible party. ,.
11.4.6 The following sentence is added to the clause, following the first sentence:
The Owner shall have the option of filing certificates of insurance on each policy,
in lieu of copies of the policies.
11.4.7 The first sentence is amended to read:
...for damages caused by fire or other perils to the extent covered by property
insurance applicable to the Work, except for deductible amounts which the Contractor, ,e*
his Subcontractors and Sub-subcontractors is responsible per Article 10.1, and except such
Project No. 00058 SUPPLEMENTARY GEN'L CONDITIONS-6
go
Renovations to Parsons Annex
Smith College
Northampton, Massachusetts
' appear. The certificates of insurance shall indicate the additional insured status, using the
following wording in the "Special Items" box:
`The Trustees of Smith College, and any present or former trustee, director,
officer, administrator, employee,volunteer worker or agent is added as an additional
insured to the General Liability,Auto Employers liability and Excess Policies, as their
interests may appear.
Or by attaching a copy of the endorsement adding the additional insured status to the
certificate.
Add following Subparagraph 11.1.1.9 to 11.1.1:
"11.1.1.9 Liability insurance shall include all major divisions of coverage, and be
on a comprehensive basis including:
1. Premises and operations (including XCU as applicable).
2. Independent contractor's protective.
3. Products and completed operations.
4. Contractual, including specified provision for Contractor's
obligation under Paragraph 3.18.
5. Owned, non-owned, and hired motor vehicles.
6. Broad form property damage, including completed operations."
Add following Subparagraph 11.1.2.1 to 11.1.2:
no "11.1.2.1 Insurance required by Sub-paragraph 11.1.1 shall be written for not less than
following, or greater if required by law. Coverage shall be written on a "per
occurrence" basis, and shall be maintained without interruption from the date of
commencement of the Work until date of final payment and termination of any
coverage required to be maintained after final payment:
+0 1. Worker's Compensation and Employer's Liability:
a. Statutory - PART A
b. Employers Liability - PART B
e. Each Accident $500,000
Disease Policy Limit $1,000,000
Disease Each Employee $500,000
VM
2. Comprehensive General Liability, including broad form
endorsement:
a. General Aggregate: $2,000,000
b. Products/Completed Operations Aggregate: $1,000,000
C. Personal and Advertising Injury: $1,000,000
ON d. Each Occurrence: $1,000,000
e. Fire Damage(any one fire): $50,000
Project No. 00058 SUPPLEMENTARY GEN'L CONDITIONS-5
Renovations to Parsons Annex
Smith College
Northampton, Massachusetts
Add following Sub-sub-paragraph to Sub-paragraph 9.5.1:
"9.5.1.8 Persistent failure to maintain project record documents specified in Division One."
9.7.1 Delete this sub-paragraph and substitute the following:
"9.7.1 If the Architect does not issue a Certificate of Payment, through no fault of the
Contractor,within fourteen days after receipt of the Contractor's Application for
Payment, or if the Owner does not pay the Contractor within fourteen days after
the date established in the Contract Documents the amount certified by the
Architect or awarded by arbitration, then the Contractor may, upon fourteen
additional days'written notice to the Owner and Architect, stop the Work until
payment of the amount owing has been received. The Contract Time shall be
extended appropriately and the Contract Sum shall be increased by the amount of
the Contractor's reasonable costs of shut-down, delay and start-up, plus interest as
provided for in the Contract Documents."
ARTICLE 10, PROTECTION OF PERSONS AND PROPERTY
Article 10 is supplemented in Division One - General Requirements. Particular attention is
directed to Section 01500.
10.2.5 The article is amended to read:
The Contractor shall promptly remedy damage and loss (including damage or loss insured under
property insurance required by the Contract Documents)to property referred to in Clauses
10.2.1.2 and 10.2.1.3 caused in whole or in part by any act or failure to actby the Contractor,
Sub-Contractor....and are not the fault or negligence of the Contractor. The fore going obligations
of the Contractor are in addition to the Contractor's obligations under Paragraph 3.18. However, if
the damage or loss is insured under property insurance required
g p p y q by the Contract Documents, the Contractor is
responsible to remedy the damage or loss, notwithstanding any part of Clause 11.4, up to and including the
amount of the policy deductible.
ARTICLE 11, INSURANCE
11.1 Contractor's Liability Insurance
Insurance Companies providing insurance to Contractors, Subcontractors or Sub-
subcontractors shall be rated not less than A-,XI by Best's.
The Contractor, Subcontractor and Sub-subcontractors shall add Smith College, its
trustees, employees,volunteer workers and agents as additional insureds to the General
Liability, Auto Liability, Employers Liability and Excess Liability policies as their interests
Project No. 00058 SUPPLEMENTARY GENT CONDITIONS-4
go
Renovations to Parsons Annex
Smith College
ON Northampton, Massachusetts
+eR
3.14 Cutting and Patching is supplemented in Division One-General Requirements.
Particular attention is directed to Section 01731 and 01732.
3.15 Cleaning Up is supplemented in Division One-General Requirements. Particular
attention is directed to Section 01770.
3.18.1 Change the first sentence to read; "...the Contactor shall hold indemnify and hold
harmless the Owner, and their present or former trustees, directors, officers, administrators, employees,
volunteer workers and agents, the Architect,...".
use
ARTICLE 4,ADMINISTRATION OF THE CONTRACT
4.2 Architect's Administration of the Contract
4.2.7 This subparagraph is supplemented in Division One - General Requirements. Particular
attention is directed to Sections 01330, 01400and 01770.
4.2.8 This subparagraph is supplemented in Division One - General Requirements. Particular
attention is directed to Section 01250.
4.2.9 This subparagraph is supplemented in Division One - General Requirements. Particular
attention is directed to Sections 0 17 70, 01781 and 01782.
NO ARTICLE 7, CHANGES IN THE WORK
Article 7 is supplemented in Division One - General Requirements. Particular attention is
XM directed to Section 01250.
ARTICLE 8 TIME
8.1.1 Add the following sub-paragraph 8.1.1.1 to subparagraph 8.1.1:
4W "8.1.1.1 Contract Time for this project is defined in Division One - General
Requirements, Section 01100. Particular attention is directed to provisions for
Liquidated Damages in Section 01100. "
ARTICLE 9, PAYMENTS AND COMPLETION
Article 9 is supplemented in Division One - General Requirements. Particular attention is
directed to Sections 01250, 01770, 01781 and 01782.
9.5 Decisions to Withhold Certification
w
Project No. 00058 SUPPLEMENTARY GEN'L CONDITIONS-3
Renovations to Parsons Annex
Smith College
Northampton, Massachusetts aw
general warranty); advise Architect of any other objections Contractor may have to ..
specified procedures; and propose alternative procedures."
3.4 Labor and Materials is supplemented in Division One-General Requirements. Particular
attention is directed to Sections 01300, 01400, 01500 and 01600.
3.4.2 Add the following sentence to the end of 3.4.2:
"For purposes of product substitutions, the terms `equal' and `equivalent' are
defined in Division One, Section 01600.
3.5 Warranty is supplemented in Division One-General Requirements. Particular attention
is directed to Sections 01400 and 01600. '
3.6 Taxes
wo
3.6.1 Add the following sentence to 3.6.l:
"Exception: Owner is exempt from Massachusetts Sales Tax, and will furnish
documentation and tax-exempt number to Contractor accordingly."
3.7 Permits and Fees
3.7.1 Delete Sub-paragraph 3.7.1 and substitute following:
"Unless otherwise provided in the Contract Documents, the Contractor shall
secure and pay for the building permit; all plumbing, fire protection, mechanical
and electrical permits and inspections; all sanitary,water and electrical tie-in go
permits and fees; and all other permits and governmental fees, licenses and
inspections necessary for proper execution and completion of the Work which are
customarily secured after execution of the Contract and which are legally required ..
when bids are received or negotiations concluded.
3.10 Contractor's Construction Schedules is supplemented in Division One-General r�
Requirements. Particular attention is directed to Section 01310 &010330.
3.11 Documents and Samples at the Site are supplemented in Division One-General
Requirements. Particular attention is directed to Sections 01300, 01400 and 01600.
3.12 Shop Drawings,Product Data and Samples, is supplemented in Division One-General .w
Requirements. Particular attention is directed to Sections 01330 and 01400.
3.13 Use of Site is supplemented in Division One-General Requirements. Particular attention .w
is directed to Section 01140 and 01500.
Project No. 00058 SUPPLEMENTARY GEN'L CONDITIONS-2 wo
wo
Renovations to Parsons Annex
Smith College
Northampton, Massachusetts
W SUPPLEMENTARY GENERAL CONDITIONS
gw ARTICLE 1, GENERAL PROVISIONS
1.1.1 Add the additional items to the list of Contract Documents given in Sub-paragraph 1.1.1:
Add new sub-paragraph 1.1.5.1 as follows:
".1 The Drawings of this Contract shall be as listed on the Cover Sheet.
1.2 Correlation and Intent of the Contract Documents
1.2.1 Delete second sentence and replace with following:
"In event of conflicts or discrepancies among Contract Documents,
interpretations will be based on following priorities:
1. Agreement
2. Addenda,with those of later date having precedence over those of
earlier date
3. Supplementary General Conditions
4. General Conditions of the Contract for Construction.
5. Drawings and Specifications
In case of an inconsistency between Drawings and Specifications, or within either
Document not clarified by addendum,the better quality or greater quantity of
Work shall be provided, in accordance with the Architect's interpretation.
Performance by the Contractor shall be required only to the extent consistent with
the Contract Documents as interpreted in the previous paragraph, and reasonably
inferable from them as being necessary to produce the indicated results."
3.3 Supervision and Construction Procedures is supplemented in Division One-General
Requirements. Particular attention is directed to Sections 01100 and 01300.
3.3.1 Add the following sentence to the end of 3.3.1:
"Contractor shall review specified construction or installation procedures
(including those recommended by manufacturers or national standard-setting
®o organizations); advise Architect if following any specified procedures deviates from
good construction practice, or will affect any warranties (including Contractor's
Project No. 00058 SUPPLEMENTARY GEN'L CONDITIONS-1
ON
Renovations to Parson's Annex
Smith College
Northampton, Massachusetts
Date
(Printed Name of General Bidder)
Signed:
(Printed Name of Person Signing Bid)
(Title of Person Signing Bid)
(Business Address)
(City, State, Zip Code)
Federal Employees Identification Number "
Telephone Number
Fax Number
FORM FOR GENERAL BID -p. 2
Renovations to Parson's Annex
Smith College
Northampton, Massachusetts
FORM FOR GENERAL BID
Name of Bidder:
• To the Trustees, Smith College,Northampton, Massachusetts
A. The Undersigned proposes to furnish all labor and materials required for
RENOVATIONS TO PARSON'S ANNEX
Smith College,Amherst, Massachusetts
on in accordance with the accompanying plans and specifications prepared by Kuhn Riddle
Architects, Inc., for the contract price specified below:
B. This bid includes addenda numbered
C. The proposed contract price FOR THE BASE BID is
dollars, ($ )•
1. The proposed contract price FOR ALTERNATES are as follows:
i. The proposed DEDUCT for ALTERNATE 1 is
dollars, ($ )
ii. The proposed DEDUCT for ALTERNATE 2 is
dollars, ($ )
iii. The proposed DEDUCT for ALTERNATE 3 is
dollars, ($ )
iv. The proposed DEDUCT for ALTERNATE 4 is
dollars, ($ )
v. The proposed ADD for ALTERNATE 5 is
dollars, ($ )
r vi. The proposed ADD for ALTERNATE 6 is
dollars, ($ )
vii. The proposed ADD for ALTERNATE 7 is
dollars, ($ )•
00 D. The undersigned agrees that, if(s)he is selected as contractor, (s)he will within five days,
Saturdays, Sundays and legal holidays excluded, after presentation thereof by the Owner, execute a
contract in accordance with the terms of this bid.
The undersigned hereby certifies that(s)he is able to furnish labor that can work in harmony
with all other elements of labor employed or to be employed on the work.
FORM FOR GENERAL BID -p. 1
ON
Renovations to Parsons Annex
Smith College
Northampton, Massachusetts •*
akt
OFFER ACCEPTANCE/REJECTION
so
6.01 DURATION OF OFFER
A. Bids shall remain open to acceptance and shall be irrevocable for a period of sixty(60) days after "a
the bid closing date.
6.02 ACCEPTANCE OF OFFER ++�
A. Owner reserves the right to accept or reject any or all offers.
r�
B. Owner will award the contract and issue notice-to-proceed (or notify of no award)within twenty-
one (2 1) calendar days after the date of bid.
END OF INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS 4
Project No. 00058 00200 INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS 6
.a�
Renovations to Parsons Annex
Smith College
Northampton, Massachusetts
10 4.02 BID INELIGIBILITY
A. Bids that are unsigned, improperly signed or sealed, conditional, illegible, obscure, contain
arithmetical errors, erasures, alterations, or irregularities of any kind, may at the discretion of the
Owner, be declared unacceptable.
B. Bids are by invitation, only from selected bidders. Bids from unsolicited bidders will be
returned.
BID ENCLOSURES/REQUIREMENTS
5.01 BID FORM REQUIREMENTS
A. Complete all requested information in the Bid Form and Appendices.
B. Attach a list of proposed sub-contractors for each portion of the work not being executed by the
General Contractor.
C. Taxes: Owner is a tax-exempt organization, and will supply tax exemption forms and tax-
exemption number.
5.02 BID FORM SIGNATURE
A. The Bid Form shall be signed by the bidder, as follows:
1. Sole Proprietorship: Signature of sole proprietor in the presence of a witness who will also
sign. Insert the words "Sole Proprietor' under the signature. Affix seal.
2. Partnership: Signature of all partners in the presence of a witness who will also sign. Insert
*a the word "Partner" under each signature. Affix seal to each signature.
3. Corporation: Signature of a duly authorized signing officer(s) in their normal signatures.
Insert the officer's capacity in which the signing officer acts, under each signature. Affix the
' corporate seal. If the bid is signed by officials other than the president and secretary of the
company, or the president/secretary/treasurer of the company, a copy of the by-law
resolution of their board of directors authorizing them to do so, must also be submitted with
the Bid Form in the bid envelope.
Project No. 00058 00200 INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS 5
r
I,
Renovations to Parsons Annex
Smith College
Northampton, Massachusetts a
documents be incomplete.
wM
C. Immediately notify Architect upon finding discrepancies or omissions in the Bid Documents.
3.05 INQUIRIES/ADDENDA !
A. Direct questions to the Architect, telephone(413)259-1630; FAX(413)259-1621.
B. Addenda may be issued during the bidding period. All Addenda become part of the Contract
Documents. Include resultant costs in the Bid Amount. Addenda will be sent to the F.W.
Dodge Plan Room, and to all who received plans from the Architect. Architect will endeavor to
distribute addenda completely and in a timely fasion, but accepts no responsibility therefor.
Responsibility for obtaining all addenda is exclusively that of the bidders.
C. Verbal answers are not binding on any party.
D. Clarifications requested by bidders must be in writing not less than 3 working days before date
set for receipt of bids. The reply will be in the form of an Addendum. .
3.06 SITE EXAMINATION AND PREBID CONFERENCE
A. A required Pre-Bid Conference and Site Examination has been arranged for bidders at 1:00PM,
on March 27, 2001, at Smith College Physical Plan Department, 126 West St., Northampton, ..
MA.
BID SUBMISSION
4.01 SUBMISSION PROCEDURE
A. Bidders shall be solely responsible for the delivery of their bids in the manner and time
prescribed.
B. Submit one copy of the executed offer on the Bid Forms provided, signed in a closed opaque
envelope, clearly identified with bidder's name, project name and Owner's name on the outside.
C. The Owner reserves the right not to share the bid amounts with the bidders.
D. Bids amounts shall be rounded to whole dollars. a*
Project No. 00058 00200 INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS 4
PP
Renovations to Parsons Annex
Smith College
Northampton, Massachusetts
A. Bid Documents: Contract Documents supplemented with Instructions to Bidders, and Bid
Form .
B. Contract Documents: Defined in AIA A201 Article 1 including issued Addenda.
3.02 CONTRACT DOCUMENTS IDENTIFICATION
A. The Contract Documents are identified as the Project Manual and the Drawings. The contents
of the Project Manual are delineated in the table of Contents therein. The Drawings are
delineated on the cover sheet of the set.
3.03 AVAILABILITY
A. Bid Documents may be obtained at the office of Kuhn Riddle Architects, Inc. located at 7 North
Pleasant Street,Amherst, MA 01002. Deposit checks and handling fees shall be made payable to
Kuhn Riddle Architects.
B. Three sets of Bid Documents can be obtained by general contract bidders free of charge upon
receipt of a refundable deposit, by certified check or company check in the amount of$200 for
three sets.
C. One set of Bid Documents can be obtained by sub-contract bidders or suppliers free of charge,
upon receipt of a refundable deposit by certified check or company check, in the amount of$75.
a. Documents may be mailed for a non-refundable handling fee of$50 by certified check or
company check.
D. Deposits will be refunded if Bid Documents are returned complete, undamaged, unmarked and
reusable,within 21 days of bid submission. Failure to comply will result in forfeiture of deposit.
E. Bid Documents are made available only for the purpose of obtaining offers for this project.
Their use does not grant a license for other purposes.
3.04 EXAMINATION
A. Bid Documents may be viewed at Smith College Physical Plant Department, 126 West Street,
Northampton, MA, at the F.W. Dodge Plan Room at 181 Park Ave W. Springfield, MA 01089
and at the office of the Architect.
B. Upon receipt of Bid Documents verify that documents are complete. Notify Architect should the
Project No. 00058 00200 INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS 3
Renovations to Parsons Annex
Smith College
Northampton, Massachusetts %W
aw
B. General Conditions and Supplementary General Conditions:
1. Tax exempt procedures.
C. Section 01100-Summary: Phases and Contract Time
INVITATION
2.01 BID SUBMISSION
A. Bid Documents will be available at noon, on March 21, 2001, at the office of the Architect.
B. Bids signed, executed, and dated will be received by the Owner located at Smith College Physical
Plant Department, 126 West Street, Northampton, MA 01060 before 2:00 pm local standard
time on the 11th day of April, 2001.
C. Offers submitted after the above time shall be returned to the bidder unopened.
D. Offers will be opened privately after the time for receipt of bids.
2.02 WORK IDENTIFIED IN THE CONTRACT DOCUMENTS
Wo
A. Work of this proposed Contract comprises building construction, including general
construction, structural, mechanical, electrical, and site development Work.
B. Location: Parsons Annex, Smith College located on Round Hill Road, Northampton,
Massachusetts.
2.03 CONTRACT TIME
A. Timeframe for Owner occupancy and construction are defined in Section 01100, Summary in
the Project Manual.
BID DOCUMENTS AND CONTRACT DOCUMENTS
3.01 DEFINITIONS
Project No. 00058 00200 INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS 2
Renovations to Parsons Annex
Smith College
VM Northampton, Massachusetts
INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS
SUMMARY
1.01 DOCUMENT INCLUDES
A. Invitation
1. Bid Submission
2. Intent
3. Work Identified in the Contract Documents
4. Contract Time
B. Bid Documents and Contract Documents
1. Definitions
2, Contract Documents Identification
3. Availability
4. Examination
5, Inquiries/Addenda
6. Product/Assembly/System Substitutions
C. Site Assessment
1. Site Examination
2. Prebid Conference
D. Bid Submission
1, Bid Depository
2. Submission Procedure
E. Bid Enclosures/Requirements
1. Bid Form Requirements
F. Offer Acceptance/Rejection
1. Duration of Offer.
2. Acceptance of Offer,
1.02 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Bid Form.
Project No. 00058 00200 INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS 1
Renovations to Parsons Annex
Smith College
Northampton, Massachusetts
12494......... Roller Shades........................................................................................................................ 4
DIVISION 13 -SPECIAL CONSTRUCTION
DIVISION 14-CONVEYING SYSTEMS
14420.........Wheelchair Lifts................................................................................................................... 5
DIVISION 15 -MECHANICAL
15300......... Fire Protection......................................................................................................................26
15400......... Plumbing...............................................................................................................................59
15600......... HVAC...................................................................................................................................
DIVISION 16 -ELECTRICAL
16100......... Electrical...............................................................................................................................2
3
low
Renovations to Parsons Annex
Smith College
Northampton, Massachusetts ?
06100......... Rough Carpentry.................................................................................................................. 12
06200......... Finish Carpentry.................................................................................................................. 8
06401......... Exterior Architectural Woodwork....................................................................................... 5 '
06402......... Interior Architectural Woodwork........................................................................................ 12
DIVISION 7-THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION
07141......... Cold Fluid-applied Waterproofing...................................................................................... 5
07210......... Building Insulation............................................................................................................... 6
07315.........Slate Shingles........................................................................................................................ 5
07531......... Epdm Single-ply Membrane Roofing.................................................................................. 9
07610.........Sheet Metal Roofing............................................................................................................. 10
07720......... Roof Accessories................................................................................................................... 4
07920.........Joint Sealants........................................................................................................................ 9
DIVISION 8-DOORS AND WINDOWS
08110.........Steel Doors And Frames...................................................................................................... 5
08211......... Flush Wood Doors............................................................................................................... 4
08212.........Stile And Rail Wood Doors................................................................................................. 4
08550.........Wood Windows ................................................................................................................... 7
08711......... Door Hardware (scheduled By Naming Products).............................................................. 14
08814.........Mirrored Glass...................................................................................................................... 5
DIVISION 9 - FINISHES
09000......... Color Schedule............................
09215......... Gypsum Veneer Plaster........................................................................................................ 7
09511.........Acoustical Panel Ceilings..................................................................................................... 6
09640.........Wood Flooring .......................................................................................... 4 aow
09652.........Sheet Vinyl Floor Coverings................................................................................................ 5
09653......... Resilient Wall Base And Accessories................................................................................... 5
09654......... Linoleum Floor Coverings................................................................................................... 6 ""
09680......... Carpet................................................................................................................................... 5
09900......... Painting................................................................................................................................. 14
09950.........Wall Coverings..................................................................................................................... 4
09950.........Wall Coverings..................................................................................................................... 3
DIVISION 10-SPECIALTIES
10155.........Toilet Compartments........................................................................................................... 4
10801.........Toilet And Bath Accessories................................................................................................ 7
DIVISION 11 ,EQUIPMENT
11451......... Residential Appliances......................................................................................................... 3
DIVISION 12-FURNISHINGS
12484......... Floor Mats And Frames....................................................................................................... 3
2 �,
Renovations to Parsons Annex
Smith College
Northampton, Massachusetts
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Division.....Section Title..........................................................................................................................Pages
DIVISION 0 BIDDING REQUIREMENTS AND CONTRACT FORMS
00200.........Instructions To Bidders....................................................................................................... 5
Formfor General Bid............................................................................................................................... 2
AIA A201 General Conditions 1997 Edition......................................................................................... 44
SupplementaryGeneral Conditions........................................................................................................7
DIVISION 1 -GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
01100.........Summary............................................................................................................................... 3
01140.........Work Restrictions ................................................................................................................ 2
01230.........Alternates.............................................................................................................................. 2
01290......... Payment Procedures............................................................................................................. 4
01320.........Construction Progress Documentation............................................................................... 8
01330.........Submittal Procedures.............................................. 9
...............................................
01400......... Quality Requirements.......................................................................................................... 5
01500.........Temporary Facilities And Controls..................................................................................... 11
01600......... Product Requirements
r 01700......... Execution Requirements...................................................................................................... 6
01731.........Cutting And Patching.......................................................................................................... 4
01732.........Selective Demolition............................................................................................................ 9
01770......... Closeout Procedures............................................................................................................. 7
DIVISION 2-SITE CONSTRUCTION
02300.........Earthwork............................................................................................................................. 11
02511......... Hot-mix Asphalt Paving....................................................................................................... 6
02630.........Storm Drainage..................................................................................................................... 8
02751......... Cement Concrete Pavement................................................................................................ 9
DIVISION 3 -CONCRETE
03301......... Cast-in-place Concrete(limited Applications).................................................................... 7
UMi DIVISION 4-MASONRY
04810.........Unit Masonry Assemblies.................................................................................................... 10
DIVISION 5 -METALS
05500.........Metal Fabrications................................................................................................................ 9
05511.........Metal Stairs........................................................................................................................... 6
05700.........Ornamental Metal................................................................................................................ 8
DIVISION 6-WOOD AND PLASTICS
1
w
PROJECT MANUAL
RENOVATIONS TO PARSONS ANNEX
SMITH COLLEGE
NORTHAMPTON, MASSACHUSETTS
March 19, 2001
Kuhn Riddle Architects, Inc.
7 North Pleasant Street
Amherst,MA 01002
(413) 259.1630
fax(413) 259.1621
Mechanical and Electrical Engineers
Lindgren&Sharples
96 Industry Avenue
Springfield, MA 01104
(413) 732-4336
(413) 731-0786
Appendix B.7
Smith College Project
Monthly Contract Accident Summary
Contract:
Contractor:
Report Period:
Ttllx Manth Y±eraraat+ *r �e tc D :
mrrtldd,tea ir�imldd} I imntldd ict I Ilnrt ... {mmldci#t�mmtdd)
as tc
Hours Worked
First Aid Cases
OSHA
Recordables
Lost Time Cases
Days Lost
Comments/ Explanations: (Any OSHA Recordables this month should be listed in this section with worker name,
employer, date of accident, and nature of injury. Attach separate sheet as needed.)
Prepared by: Date:
Contractor Superintendent: Date:
Mail or Fax to the OCIP Administrator by the 5h day of each month.
Smith College
Project Construction Master Safety
Program Guidelines Manual 7
(Appendix B.6)
Smith College Project
OCIP Notification / Contact List Summary
Smith College Project Representative:
The Contractor Representative:
Contractor Project Manager:
Contractor Safety Representative:
Acordia Safety Auditor:
Acordia OCIP Administrator:
Smith College
Project Construction Master Safety
Program Guidelines Manual 6
e
(Appendix B.5)
OSHA 200 Log — Summary of Occupational Injuries and Illnesses
Each Contractor is required to maintain an OSHA 200 Form - The OSHA Log.
The form can be obtained at a local OSHA office or from the Acordia Safety Auditor.
Smith College
Project Construction Master Safety
Program Guidelines Manual 5
(Appendix B.4)
Contractor First Aid Log
All First-Aid Treatment should be logged by the care provider.
The form should be maintained on site for the duration of the Contract.
Date Injured Worker Treatment Provider Signature
Additional copies of this form should be made as necessary.
Note,all injuries to non-workers should be reported to the Contractor Safety Representative.
Smith College
Project Construction Master Safety
Program Guidelines Manual 4
(Appendix B.3)
Weekly Toolbox Meeting
Attendance Roster
Name (print) Signature Craft
Signatures should be continued on back page and/or additional page(s).
Smith College
Project Construction Master Safety
Program Guidelines Manual 3
(Appendix B.3)
Weekly Toolbox Meeting Agenda
Smith College Project
Date Contract
Contractor
Topics Discussed:
1. Upcoming work, safety hazards, safety controls.
2. Safety related Incidents since last meeting.
3. Observed Safety non-compliance issues.
4. Actions Taken/Planned as a result of this meeting.
Foreman's Signature
Safety Representative's Signature.
Copies of completed forms, with attendees signatures should be forwarded to the Safety Auditor
Smith College
Project Construction Master Safety
Program Guidelines Manual 2
(Appendix B.2)
Contractor Safety Survey Checklist
A Contract Safety Checklist will be available from the Acordia Safety Auditor.
Smith College
Project Construction Master Safety
Program Guidelines Manual 1
(Appendix B.1)
Sm>Ith Ct�tlge ICtjeC Super�isars P►CC>Edrjt tnvesfigttcn! �#
Contract: Date of Report:
Contractor:
Incident date/time: Weather Conditions:
Incident Location (specific):
Incident Type (Circle): Worker injury Non-worker injury Near miss incident Property damage
Fire Explosion Other
Describe Injury (Injury/Illness type, body parts affected):
Injured Person/Property Owner:
Address/Phone:
Description of Incident: (Brief factual description of incident. Use Separate sheetifnecessary.):
Incident Causes: (Immediate, Contributory, Root)
Corrective Action(s):
Witnesses (Name, Address, Phone):
Police Report filed? Y / N Photos taken? Y / N OSHA or other Agency involved?:
Foreman / Supervisor: Date:
Project Manager/ Superintendent: Date:
The entire form should be completed and additional paper used as necessary.
Smith College
Project Construction Master Safety
Program Guidelines Manual 1
specialized equipment, or jackhammers be utilized? Will explosives be stored on
site, or transported on the site? Will licensed blasters be used? What is the
company and blasters' experience? Explain how the public will be warned and
informed that blasting will be conducted in the area.
When blasting operations are being conducted, consideration should be given to
damage created by flyrock, vibration, or air blast. Precautions taken to lessen the
possibility of damage due to these causes should be commented upon in description.
Explain the extent to which these precautions are to be taken. If pre-construction
surveys are being conducted, explain the detail that will be involved. Will an
outside blasting consultant be used?
Smith College
Project Construction Master Safety
Program Guidelines Manual 23
safeguards to be taken. If any specialized equipment is to be installed, describe this
equipment and the operations required putting it into place.
Hazards involved with plumbing and mechanical type work come from various
operations; such as, welding and cutting, heavy material handling, work in tight or
close quarters, and work with high pressures involved with testing and startup of
plumbing or mechanical systems.
Steam Fitting:
Steam fitting operations have hazards similar to plumbing operations with the
difference being that the piping will carry steam. Pressures and temperatures within
this piping can be quite high and, therefore, safeguards should be taken to protect
workers from these hazards. When commenting upon steam fitting operations,
describe the operations to be conducted and the safeguards to be used.
Painting:
Painting operations can create a number of hazards and/or exposures on a job. Over
spray from painting operations should be controlled to present damage to adjacent
exposures (cars, buildings, pedestrians) and adjacent work areas. Paint fumes
should be properly exhausted and/or the workers should wear proper respiratory
protection when paints contain chemicals, which can be dangerous when inhaled.
This is particularly important when working with lead based paints as on bridge
painting operations. Paint flammability should be considered so that appropriate
safeguards and fire prevention measures can be taken. Be sure to describe any on-
site storage of any flammable paints. Describe work at heights and fall protection
concerns and controls.
Drywall/Plastering:
Explain how materials will be brought to the site (crane, material hoist, manually).
Plaster may be pumped and sprayed on. Can floors be overloaded with construction
materials? For powder actuated tools, have workers been trained and certified?
(Documentation should be on site) Will employees use eye, hearing, and
respiratory protection? Explain any unusual scaffolds required.
Street & Highway:
This may cover excavation, drainage operations, or bridgework as well as paving.
Street and highway operations pose a variety of hazards and exposures. Areas,
which should be emphasized, are traffic control procedures, incidental bridgework,
underground utilities, and adjacent exposures. If traffic will be rerouted, explain
signing, barricades, after hours warning lights, and maintenance of traffic control
devices. Review equipment security procedures to be used to control theft and
vandalism.
Blasting: OSHA 1926.900-914
Give an estimate of the volume of rock, in cubic years, to be blasted. Also describe
adjacent structures. Can alternate methods of rock removal such as ripping, use of
Smith College
Project Construction Master Safety
Program Guidelines Manual 22
Roofing: OSHA 1926.500
Describe the type of roofing system to be installed. Tell what precautions will be
used to safeguard roofing operations. Hazards normally associated with roofing
operations include falls from heights, burns from hot materials (hot asphalt), fumes
from coal tar pitch, and fire potential from asphalt heating equipment. Describe
safeguards. Workers should be properly clothed for work on roofs, particularly
during summer months.
Roofing operations can create injury and property damage from windblown or
dropped debris, water leakage, or splatter from roofing materials. Describe the
safeguards to be taken in these areas.
Determine method for lifting materials to roof level. If membrane roof, determine
types of solvent, cleaners, and cements to be used. Describe controls of hazards
associated with these items.
Electrical: OSHA 1926.400-405
Explain what electrical work will be taking place, who will be performing this
work, and what safeguards will be taken. Tell if any "hot work" will be performed
or if tie-ins will be made to existing systems.
Comment upon any work, which may be conducted on or around electrical utilities.
Describe the work to be performed and the safeguards to be taken. Will a utilities
locator service be used (i.e., DIGSAFE)be notified?
If temporary wiring is involved, another area to consider is the type of grounding
program to be utilized on the project. Describe how if ground fault protection will
be implemented on site. What type of inspection/testing of GFI's and installations
will be conducted? What testing will be done of installations, and what records will
be maintained?
Describe energizing procedures of buildings and/or processes. What controls will
be in place to protect workers from the release of hazardous energy?
(Lockout/Tagout)
HVAC (Heating, Ventilating, Air Conditioning):
Work of this nature normally involved work with sheet metal duct sections which
can be quite large at times. Fiberglass ductwork is also used. Many hazards are
involved with this type of work but the most prevalent are cuts from sharp edges;
material handling; problems due to heavy and bulky materials; and foreign body in
eye accidents from metal shavings created by cutting, drilling, or screwing into duct
sections. What testing will be done of installations and what records will be
maintained? Will hoisting units to the roof involve special rigging considerations?
Plumbing:
Describe any plumbing or mechanical work which will be performed and the
Smith College
Project Construction Master Safety
Program Guidelines Manual 21
stripping of forms. Explain how forming materials will be stored before and after
use. Tell if any form releasing agents are being used and what precautions are
being taken to reduce splatter or ignition of combustible agents. Often, concrete
forming operations have a history of poor housekeeping. This is caused by the
presence of scrap lumber, nails, fasteners, excess concrete splatter, and other
materials. How will these issues be controlled. Describe fire prevention/protection
and fall protection issues.
Concrete Placement: OSHA 1926.700 702
Describe how the concrete will be placed (bucket, pump, conveyor, buggy). Tell of
precautions to be used to reduce concrete splatter. This is particularly important on
high rise construction. Describe safeguards to be taken to protect workers who are
placing concrete. For columns, piers, and building perimeters, how will fall
exposure be controlled? Explain temporary heating methods and controls for cold
weather pouring operations.
Carpentry:
Explain the type of carpentry work to be performed. Tell of any unusual carpentry
operations to be conducted, and operations which may present a serious hazard to
workers; (e.g., working at heights). Explain proposed safeguards to protect workers
from these hazards.
Major hazards associated with carpentry operations include housekeeping
machinery, and material handling. Areas where work is being performed and
carpentry shop areas should be kept clear of scrap lumber, sawdust, and debris.
Debris should be removed on a scheduled basis.
Masonry:
Tell type of masonry to be used (HCB, brick). Consider access of scaffolds, hoists,
and material handling equipment at working levels above ground level. Describe
overhead protection for areas below where work is being performed. Tell how free
standing masonry walls will be braced against winds.
Hazards normally associated with masonry operations are falling debris and
collapse of unbraced walls during construction.
Structural Steel: OSHA 1926.750-752, 1926.550
Outline work to be done, and describe hoisting equipment to be used and method to
bring steel to site. Will there be any offsite storage of materials? Describe how
workers will be protected from falls during steel erection. Tell what protective
measures will be taken to protect surrounding exposures from hazards associated
with steel erection; (e.g., planking to protect surrounding buildings/persons from
accidentally dropped members/tools/materials). What precautions will be taken to
contain sparks and slag from welding operations.
Smith College
Project Construction Master Safety
Program Guidelines Manual 20
Contractor/Subcontractor knows what they are drilling into.
When shoring is used, will movement (horizontal, vertical, or rotational) of the
shoring system be monitored. This is particularly important when there are adjacent
exposures that could be affected by soil movement. If ground water may build up
behind shoring, has the shoring been designed for this load?
Pile Driving: OSHA 1926.603
Describe the type of piles and either the number of piles or the linear feet of piles to
be driven. Describe the method in which they will be driven. How will piles be
brought to the site? Will there be a designated lay-down area?
State the depth to which they will be driven. What is the distance to nearby
structures? Describe measures to be used to control impact of vibration on
surrounding exposures and effect of noise on workers. Are pre-construction
surveys required?
Underpinning:
Explain the type of structure to be supported and the method by which it is
supported normally. Explain the type of underpinning to be used and its method of
installation. Describe any problems anticipated. Who designed the underpinning
and what is their experience? Are confined space issues expected?
Grading:
Grading is normally considered to be the light (relatively) movement of soil around
a given site. Cuts and fills may only be a couple of feet in depth. For greater
depths, the work would be classified as excavation. Hauling of any quantity of soil
or rock on to or away from the site would also make the work fall into the
excavation category. A lawn or parking area might be graded while a basement
would be excavated. Will structures and/or adjacent vehicles be at risk of damage?
How will the public be kept from work areas during operations?
Caissons: OSHA 1926.801
Will these be vertical shafts that are hand dug or drilled, or will these be of the
pneumatic type used on large bridge foundations? To what depth will the caisson
go? Any potential for explosive or toxic gases? Will personnel or inspectors have
to go into the caissons? If shaft caissons have to be belled out at the bottoms, will it
be done mechanically or by hand? Explain how workers will be protected from soil
collapse. Describe air monitoring plans and planned rescue procedures. Also
describe perimeter fall protection. If the caissons involve compressed air, give
details.
Concrete Form Work: OSHA 1926.700-702
Describe the type of forming system to be used; such as, built in place, flying
forms, pre-engineered panel forms, slip forms, or pan forms. Determine the
schedule for forming, placement of reinforcing steel, concrete pouring, and
Smith College
Project Construction Master Safety
Program Guidelines Manual 19
Work From Heights: OSHA 1926.500
Describe work and areas from which workers will be exposed to fall hazards.
Identify methods of fall protection including planned controlled access zones and
Fall Protection Plans. Any work requiring documented Fall Protection Plans
(OSHA 1926.502) should not commence without submittal of the Plan to Safety
Auditor for review. Also discuss specific training as required in OSHA 1926.503.
Body belts will not be an acceptable means of fall protection on the Smith
College Project.
Scaffolding: OSHA 1926.450
Describe scaffolding to be used on the project. Who will erect/dismantle and what
type of fall protection will be used. Is the scaffolding owned by the Contractor, a
Subcontractor, or rented/leased? Who will inspect and maintain the scaffolding at
what intervals? Who will be allowed to use the scaffolding?
Excavation: OSHA 1926.650-653
Explain the excavation work involved, including depth of excavation and type of
material to be excavated. Will a utilities locator service be used (ie, DIGSAFE) be
notified? Explain how the material will be excavated. Will material be hauled off
site or brought in from off site? If de-watering is to be performed, explain method
or system to be used and planned safeguards.
Will support of excavation be specially designed? By whom? Who will maintain
responsibility of the competent person? Will excavations be covered during off-
hours. What are the expected fall hazards associated with the excavations? Will
areas have perimeter protection? Do you expect environmental hazards such as
hazardous materials and/or air quality issues? How will these be addressed?
Another item to consider during excavation is the surrounding exposures.
Buildings, structures and utilities may all be subject to vibration from excavation
operations or to soil subsidence due to de-watering or soil slope failure. If the
possibility of these hazards exists, pre-construction surveys should be considered.
If shoring or de-watering will be involved, a program for monitoring movement of
the shoring system of surrounding buildings should be implemented.
Another area to consider is silt and mud runoff from the project. Identify measures
taken (silt settling ponds, woven plastic fabric fences, etc.) used to contain silt
runoff.
Excavation Shoring: OSHA 1926.650-653
Describe the method of shoring to be utilized. Who designed it? State whether
there will be any wales, cross bracing, rakers, or tie backs. (A simple sketch may
be helpful.) If tie backs are used, describe the material into which they are being
anchored. One caution regarding tie backs, check to be sure the
Smith College
Project Construction Master Safety
Program Guidelines Manual 18
C. Specific Operations Planning
For each of the following operations, identify which will be self-performed by the
Contractor, and which will be subcontracted. In addition describe, the methods,
anticipated safety and health concerns (hazards), and controls to be used when
performing the operations. In areas where specific information is unknown,
describe when the expected information will become available and plans to be
followed in forwarding the information to the Safety Auditor prior to initiation of
the involved phase(s).
For topics listed below that are not applicable to the Contract, the topic should be
listed with an N/A designation.
To assist in determining related OSHA requirements, some general section
reference numbers have been given under listed operations. ANSI, state, local, and
manufacturers (equipment, materials) should also be consulted for appropriate
hazard control methods also.
Land Clearing: OSHA 1926.604
Involves the removal of trees and brush. Grubbing also includes removal of
stumps. Describe the size of the area to be cleared, site conditions, and methods
which will be used to clear and dispose of materials. No open fires will be
permitted without specific approval from the local Fire Department, other agencies
having jurisdiction, and the Safety Auditor . How will materials be removed from
the site and how often?
Wrecking/Demolition: OSHA 1926.850-860
Describe any wrecking/demolition operations which may be performed. Describe
the type of demolition to be done (salvage, use of heavy equipment, wrecking ball
or blasting). Remember that wrecking/demolition is a very hazardous operation.
Hazards such as collapse, falling objects, poor housekeeping, sharp objects, and
possible use of explosives can all exist at one time.
Demolition should be well planned before operations begin. This planning should
include procedures for searching the structure prior to beginning demolition to clear
the area of vagrants, children, or other unauthorized personnel. One particular area
of concern is the demolition of pre-stressed or post-tensioned concrete structures.
When demolishing structures of this type, special attention should be given to
tendons or steel stands under stress. Remember that wrecking/demolition
operations not only occur during the demolition of an entire structure but also
during renovation, remodeling, and addition work. The method for transporting
rubble from the site should be described. Where is the debris disposed of? Will
asbestos lead abatement be involved? Describe fire prevention/protection plans.
Has the wrecking plan been reviewed by a qualified person, and the necessary
regulatory officials, if required, to evaluate the collapse exposure.
Smith College
Project Construction Master Safety
Program Guidelines Manual 17
Appendix A
Contract Safety Planning Guide
In developing a site specific construction safety and health plan, it is important that
a systematic approach be taken to identify and evaluate potential hazards with each
phase of the construction process. With potential hazards identified, plans can be
developed to control expected hazards, and sometimes eliminate them altogether.
As described in Section 1.2.2 of the Guidelines, Contractors are required to identify
operations to be performed under the Contract. The following outline shall be used
as a template by the Contractor in organizing the site-specific description of
Contract operations, expected hazards, and planned controls on the Smith College
Project. Each phase of the work should be described in detail with special attention
given to expected hazards and controls. All applicable topics should be discussed
in brief narrative form. Non-applicable topics should be listed and noted with
"NA".
A. General Contract Information
I. Give contract price, start date, completion date, and overall scope of the
Contract, and the expected level of workforce that is anticipated. Attach a job
progress schedule illustrating a rough sequence of the primary phases and
operations of the contract
H. Describe any significant known structural or unusual hazards as well as any
pre-construction surveys that have been or will be conducted . Is groundwater
expected to be a concern?
III. What site security precautions will be taken for the term of the contract.
Will the site have perimeter fencing? How will the public be separated from the
work area? How will equipment and materials be protected from use by
trespassers? Will alarms/guards be used? Include any on-shift and off-shift
activity. Are multiple work shifts anticipated? Be sure to discuss weekend night
security and protection.
B. Pre-Construction Surveys
Pre-construction surveys are a method used to document the conditions of adjacent
facilities prior to construction so that, in the event of a liability claim for damaged
facilities, it will be possible to determine if damage has occurred and the extent of
it. Typical construction operations that may lead to losses include blasting, pile-
driving, excavating, de-watering adjacent to structures, operation of heavy
equipment, and underpinning. Will any pre-construction surveys be conducted for
this contract? Describe.
Smith College
Project Construction Master Safety
Program Guidelines Manual 16
7.5 Doctor/Lost Time Cases
When a Contractor or Subcontractor employee is referred to a physician or medical
facility for treatment of an occupational injury/illness, the following forms should
be completed and copies forwarded to the OCIP Coordinator :
Worker's Compensation Form (First Report of Iniury) - This form should be
forwarded immediately to the OCIP Administrator and must be completely filled
out. Instructions for completing necessary insurance forms will be provided by the
OCIP Coordinator .
Supervisor's Incident Investigation Report - This form shall be completed by the
injured/ill employee's Supervisor immediately upon report of an occupational
injury/illness that requires treatment by a physician.
Worker's Description of Incident - This should be completed by the worker in
his/her handwriting, describing the circumstances and events leading to and
including the cause of, the injury or illness. This document must be signed and
dated by the employee.
7.6 OSHA 200 Log- Summary of Occupational Injuries and Illnesses
OSHA requires that each employer maintain records of occupational injuries and
illnesses. This log and summary shall be maintained by each Contractor and
Subcontractor at their work sites and shall be provided to the Safety Auditor upon
request. In addition, OSHA requires that these forms be posted, in an area available
to employees, for the month of February each year.
7.7 Monthly Contract Accident Summary
The Contractor shall complete and submit the Smith College Monthly Contract
Accident Summary as shown in Appendix B.7. Data on the report should include
information for the Contractor and all Subcontractors. The report shall be
submitted to the Safety Auditor no later than 5 days after the month summarized.
For months with no accidents, a completed report with zeros in the appropriate
columns is required. Assistance in completing this report is available from the
Safety Auditor.
7.8 Inspections by Regulatory Agencies
In addition to audits conducted by the Safety Auditor and Insurance
Representatives, Contractor activities are subject to periodic inspection by OSHA
and other safety and health regulatory agencies. Upon notification of an on- site
inspection, the inspector should be directed to the Safety Representative to discuss
the purpose and objectives of the visit. The Safety Representative should
immediately notify the Owner, Construction Manager, and the Safety Auditor to
determine if their presence is necessary. The Safety Representative shall document
all inspection activities from inception to completion and will take photos where
appropriate. The Contractor will forward, to the Safety Auditor copies of any and
all inspection reports and/or citations by regulatory agencies.
Smith College
Project Construction Master Safety
Program Guidelines Manual 15
documentation of all adverse safety and health incidents resulting from activities
that occur on the work site.
7.2 Notification
The following incidents require notification to the Owner and the
Safety Auditor by the most rapid means available:
• Fatalities
• OSHA Recordable Injuries (Includes all lost time injuries)
• General public injuries requiring medical attention
• Property Damage over $1000
• All fires and explosions
7.3 Investigation
Investigation of workplace incidents, including injury, illness, property damage, and
significant near-misses, is a key to improving safety and health programs.
Investigation is different from reporting in that it is an effort to determine incident
causes through analysis of conditions, witness accounts, and other facts surrounding
specific happenings.
Investigation of the following shall be conducted to determine immediate,
contributing, and root causes. The Plan should specify a system for preventing
recurrence of investigated incidents. All investigations must be conducted by
appropriate supervisory personnel and must be documented on the Contractor's
Incident Investigation Report (Appendix B.1) or similar document (approved by
Safety Auditor).
• All incidents other than non-OSHA recordable injuries/illnesses and property
damage under $1000 shall be investigated thoroughly to determine the
circumstances, nature, and extent of injuries, illnesses, or property damage.
• All incidents involving medical attention to the general public shall also be
thoroughly investigated to determine the circumstances, nature, and extent of
injuries, illnesses, or property damage.
• All other potentially serious incidents, including near misses, shall be investigated
to identify their circumstances, causes, and corrective actions.
7.4 Documentation and Reporting
All incidents requiring investigation will require a preliminary written report to the
Safety Auditor by the end of the following work day and a final report within 5
working days. Documentation of all other incidents, including first-aid, will be
maintained on file at the Contractor's office and be available for review by the
Safety Auditor at any time. All completed "First Report of Injury" forms will be
sent to the OCIP Coordinator by the end of the following day of notification of
injury.
Smith College
Project Construction Master Safety
Program Guidelines Manual 14
personnel should be encouraged to be current first aid and CPR card holders.
6.3 Reporting
All on-site workers, whether employed by the Contractor or any of its
Subcontractors, shall be instructed to report all injuries, no matter how minor, to
their supervisor. The supervisor shall then notify the Safety Representative.
Treatment shall be rendered by qualified persons and the incident recorded on the
Contractor's First Aid Log. A monthly summary of First Aid incidents is required
as described in section 7.7 of the Guidelines.
6.4 Transportation
The Contractor shall provide transportation for employees needing medical
treatment for work-related injury or illness on their initial visit to the doctor/medical
facility. The Plan shall indicate what doctor or medical facility the Contractor plans
to utilize.
For emergency transportation, the local ambulance service should be used for the
emergency transportation of injured or ill employees. The Plan shall designate who
will be responsible for notifying the ambulance and providing information
describing the exact location of the injured employee. The Plan shall also provide a
system for assigning responsibility for emergency notification in the absence of
designated persons.
6.5 Local Emergency Telephone Numbers
The Plan shall identify the following telephone numbers which shall be
conspicuously posted at the work site and provided in the Contractor's site
telephone book. In addition active phone service or equal communication system
must be in place at all times during the operations.
• Ambulance
• Fire Department
• Police
• Hospitals (Emergency Room)
• Poison Control Center
• Pollution, Toxic Chemical and Oil Spill Response
• Owner
• Safety Auditor
The list shall be reviewed at least quarterly and updated as necessary.
7. Incident Investigation, Reporting, and Record Keeping
7.1 Purpose and Scope
The Plan shall establish procedures for notification, investigation, report, and
Smith College
Project Construction Master Safety
Program Guidelines Manual 13
hazard warnings.
- A training program regarding hazards of substances that are used in the
workplace and the protective measures that must be taken by the employee or any
other persons potentially exposed to the hazardous substances.
5.4 Hazard Communication Training
The Contractor shall ensure that each employee prior to working with, or being
potentially exposed to, hazardous substances receives initial training on the HCP
and the safe use of these hazardous substances. Additional training must be
provided to employees whenever new substances are introduced to the workplace.
In addition, the training program must include the following:
- Methods that can be used to detect the presence or release of a hazardous
substance in the work area. These methods include: monitoring, automatic alarms,
visual appearance or odor of hazardous substances when being released, etc.
- The physical and health hazards of the substances in the work area.
- Examples of protective measures, including specific procedures the Contractor
has implemented to protect employees from exposure to hazardous substances (e.g.,
appropriate work practices, emergency procedures, and personal protective
equipment) to be used.
- The details of the HCP developed by the employer shall include an explanation of
the labeling system and how to use the MSDS for exposure prevention and
emergency response.
5.5 Record Keeping
Permanent records shall be maintained by the Contractor, describing all HCP
training sessions. Persons conducting the training shall verify attendance by
circulating an attendance sheet.
6. First Aid and Medical Services
6.1 Purpose and Scope
The Plan shall include written procedures for providing first aid treatment, medical
services, and transportation of workers who incur occupational injuries or illnesses
at the work sites.
6.2 Staffing
The Plan shall describe how the Contractor will ensure that first-aid is readily
available to all Contractor and Subcontractor employees during all work shifts.
Names and qualifications of designated First-Aid/CPR responders shall be included
in the Plan and posted on site to facilitate quick response. All supervisory
Smith College
Project Construction Master Safety
Program Guidelines Manual 12
• Safe Work Areas
• Safe Work Practices
• Emergency Response
• Accident Investigation
• Safety Inspection
• Safety Training
• Fire Prevention and Protection
• Enforcement
• Equipment Safety
• Safety Equipment Use and Maintenance
4.2.6 Documentation Retention
All safety meeting and training shall be documented with records maintained by the
Contractor and retained on-site for the duration of the Contract.
5. Hazard Communication
5.1 Purpose and Scope
In order to protect workers who may use or be exposed to hazardous substances, the
Plan shall include a written Hazard Communication Program.
5.2 Responsibilities
The Contractor shall ensure that each worker is informed of the Hazard
Communication Program including the required list of hazardous substances, and
the associated Material Safety Data Sheets (MSDS). In addition, the Contractor
shall ensure that hazardous substances and/or their containers in the workplace are
marked with the identity of their contents. The means of identification must
provide warnings appropriate for employee protection.
The Contractor shall develop, implement, and maintain a system that will ensure
that employees of any other contractors, visitors or vendors who are exposed to its
hazardous substances are informed of the hazards of those substances.
5.3 Hazard Communication Program ("HCP")
The Contractor shall ensure that a written HCP is developed and that it contains the
following elements:
• The name of the program coordinator.
• A formal written system that ensures that MSDSs are obtained and made readily
accessible to all employees, including lower tier Subcontractor personnel, on each
shift. In the event of an emergency, MSDSs shall be made available on an
immediate basis.
• A labeling program that ensures that containers of hazardous substances in the
workplace are properly labeled with the name of the substance and any applicable
Smith College
Project Construction Master Safety
Program Guidelines Manual 11
prevention of unsafe acts and conditions. All plans shall be site specific.
4.2 Training Elements
The Plan shall include, but not be limited to, the following elements:
4.2.1 Contract Safety Orientation
Prior to entering the work area for the first time, each on-site employee of the
Contractor and any Subcontractor shall receive a safety and health orientation,
which shall provide basic information regarding the Plan, OSHA Standards,
emergency procedures, and applicable Contract rules and procedures.
Additional safety and health instructions shall be required for the performance of
hazardous or unfamiliar tasks. Documentation of this and all training shall be kept
on site for the duration of the Contract.
4.2.2 Weekly Tool Box Safety Meetings
The Contractor is required to ensure each on-site worker, whether employed by the
Contractor or any of its Subcontractors, attends a weekly "Tool Box Safety
Meeting". Subject material will be furnished by the Contractor and shall follow the
"Weekly Toolbox Meeting Agenda" and be documented. A member of the
Contractor's supervisory staff, above the level of the foreman, should attend each
Tool Box Safety Meeting and attendance documentation shall be recorded on copies
of the "Weekly Toolbox Meeting Agenda" form. Copies of completed forms
should be sent to the Safety Auditor each week.
4.2.3 Contractor Safety Meetings
Contractor Safety Meetings shall be conducted at least weekly and may be in
conjunction with other meetings. The Contractor and Subcontractor supervisory
personnel and the Safety.Representative will be required to attend. A written
agenda shall be provided and minutes kept on actions taken. An attendance sheet
should be signed by those present and retained by the Contractor.
4.2.4 Hazard Communication Training
Hazard Communication Training shall be conducted prior to employees being
subjected to an exposure to, or use of, a known hazardous substance. Specific
requirements of this training are described in section 5.4 of these Guidelines.
4.2.5 Safety Orientation for Supervisors
Contractor shall design and implement a program to orient supervisors on their
roles in the safety program. This orientation, which shall be documented, will
outline his/her duties and responsibilities for safety and health in daily work
activities. At a minimum, this orientation will address their responsibilities and
procedures for the following:
• Construction Master Safety Program Guidelines
• Contractor Safety and Health Plan
Smith College
Project Construction Master Safety
Program Guidelines Manual 10
soils tracking, and other debris associated with the Construction operations. The
Plan should also describe methods of control for the identified hazards, including
vehicle wheel-washes, wet-down methods, debris nets, covered debris containers,
and rodent control methods.
3. Emergency Procedures
3.1 Purpose and Scope
The Plan shall include emergency procedures for the protection of all persons on
site (including the general public, vendors, visitors, and employees of other
contractors), equipment, structures, and materials on the Project.
3.2 Site Specific Procedures
Site- specific emergency procedures shall be developed and implemented for, but
not limited to, the following:
• Fire
• General evacuation of the worksite.
• Confined space rescue.
• Personal injury.
• Workplace violence.
• Explosion.
• Bomb threats.
• Release of hazardous substances.
• Severe weather.
• Public demonstrations.
• Interruption of public utilities.
The Plan should discuss what procedures are in place for emergency situations and
how the procedures are continually communicated to workers. The Plan should
discuss methods of communication and documentation of emergency events as well
as responsibility chains of command. The Plan should identify responsible
personnel by name and title where possible.
All emergency phone numbers should be conspicuously posted at the work site and
employees should be aware in their responsibilities. Should a serious accident or
emergency occur, the Contractor shall contact the Owner immediately upon
securing the required emergency assistance. If an emergency requires the presence
of an ambulance, the Fire Department or Police, the Contractor shall secure the
appropriate service and then notify the Owner, and the Safety Auditor .
4. Safety and Health Training
4.1 Purpose and Scope
The Plan shall establish and implement programs for the education and training of
employees, Subcontractors, visitors, and vendors in the recognition, avoidance, and
Smith College
Project Construction Master Safety
Program Guidelines Manual 9
Respiratory Protection - when respirators are necessary, the Contractor shall have a
respiratory program that complies with OSHA 1926.103 (Revised 1998).
Employees shall be fitted for and instructed in the proper use of respirators that will
afford them the maximum protection for the environmental hazard in which they
are working. Copies of this program shall be given to the Safety Auditor.
The program shall contain the reason for and the conditions under which such
equipment shall be worn and discuss methods of enforcement and disciplinary
actions for non-compliant workers.
2.8 Special Hazardous Work Procedures
The Plan shall include effective controls to prevent workplace injury, illness, and
property damage in special hazardous work environments. Specific procedures shall
address supervisory control over hazard recognition, isolation, testing, evacuation,
and monitoring. Detailed emergency procedures shall identify available emergency
equipment and personnel responsible for rescue operations.
The Plan shall also provide for the development and implementation of hazardous
work permit procedures. These special permits shall be issued by the Contractor
and retained at the project site for the duration of the contract. They will include
written Job Hazard Analysis (JHA) to be completed and approved prior to the
issuance of permits. The Safety Auditor may request a written Job Hazard
Analysis, any time during the Contract, for operations expected to, or shown to
involve hazardous operations.
Examples of Special Hazardous work environments include, but are not limited to:
• Confined Spaces
• Maintenance of Energized Equipment (Lockout/Tagout)
• Critical Crane/Hoist Lifts
• Burning, Welding, Grinding
• Excavations
• Work from Heights
• Hazardous Materials Handling
• Building Demolition
The Safety Auditor is available for assistance in the development of Special
Hazardous Work Procedures during the course of the contract.
2.9 University Community Public Protection
The Plan should specifically identify hazards to be anticipated by visitors, vendors,
trespassers, and the general public and describe actions planned to control these
hazards.
2.10 Dust/Debris Control Plan
The Plan should outline hazards/concerns to be expected through creation of dust,
Smith College
Project Construction Master Safety
Program Guidelines Manual 8
Project or to use, possess, conceal, transport, promote or sell any of the above
substances will be grounds for disciplinary action, up to and including termination
from employment on said project.
In support of this policy, the Contractor and its Subcontractors are required to
maintain an effective employee substance abuse program. The Contractor is also
responsible for reporting to the Owner, via the Safety Auditor, any incidents in
violation of the substance abuse program and the disposition of the violation.
The Contractor shall submit to periodic audits by the Owner or its Designee of the
Contractor's substance abuse program.
2.5 Weapons and Controlled Items
The Owner prohibits the use, possession, concealment, transportation, promotion or
sale of the following controlled items at the jobsite:
• Firearms, weapons, and ammunition - except when authorized for security
reasons.
• Unauthorized explosives including fireworks.
• Stolen property or contraband.
2.6 Disciplinary Sanctions
The Plan shall include procedures for enforcement of safety rules.
The Safety Representative shall continually monitor the construction safety
performance of the Contractor and all Subcontractors. Should the Contractor or a
Subcontractor continually be in non-compliance with Safety and Health
requirements of their Plan, work operations should be ordered to be stopped by the
Safety Representative (at the Contractor's expense), until all concerns are abated.
Persistent non-compliance may result in termination of the Contract.
2.7 Personal Protective Equipment
The Plan shall include a written personal protective equipment program. The
program shall address, but is not limited to the following:
Hard Hats- mandatory at all work sites, at all times.
Hearing Protection - mandatory in all operations creating noise above 85 DB&
Eye Protection - mandatory in all situations where potential eye injury exists.
Specifically required when welding/burning/cutting, performing tasks near activity
producing flying debris (including dusts) and when handling chemicals;
Safety Harnesses - shall meet ANSI Standards and be worn by employees who are
exposed to any fall exposure six feet (6) or more in height that cannot be properly
guarded with rails or other means, body belts will not be an acceptable method of
fall protection;
Footwear- shall be sturdy and made of leather;
Shirts - only those with sleeves are allowed, no tank tops or mesh shirts;
Smith College
Project Construction Master Safety
Program Guidelines Manual 7
NOTE: No requested advice from the representatives of the OCIP Administrator, the
Safety Auditor, Project Architects, Engineers, the Owner, or Insurance Carrier shall
in any way relieve, alter, change or amend any of the Contractor's expressed, implied
or inherent legal and/or contractual obligations. Furthermore, the authority vested in
the Owner and its designated representatives, including the OCIP Administrator and
the Safety Auditor, to act on, or notify the Contractor with respect to, safety matters,
shall not in any way reduce the Contractor's responsibility for safety and accident
prevention
2. Hazard Control
2.1 Purpose and Scope
The Contractor shall establish controls for the recognition and elimination of unsafe
practices by employees, Subcontractors, visitors, and vendors, and shall maintain
safe physical conditions for all persons at the work site.
2.2 Supervisory Control
Continued safety monitoring of each Contract work area will be accomplished by
the Contractor's supervisors and Safety Representative. The Contractor's
supervisors shall conduct daily surveys of operations to detect any potential sources
of injury or property damage. A written record of the daily surveys shall be kept
and shall include corrective actions for corrected deficiencies. Systems shall be in
place for developing, implementing, and tracking corrective actions.
2.3 Employee Involvement in Hazard Identification
A system shall be in place by which Contractor's employees are able to notify their
supervisors and the Safety Representative immediately of the existence of any
hazards at the worksite. This system shall include provisions for timely corrective
actions and for providing feedback to employees.
2.4 Substance Abuse Policy
A policy shall be in place for the establishment and maintenance of a safe and
efficient work environment for all personnel, free from the effects of alcohol, illegal
drugs, and other controlled substances.
The Contractor's policy shall specifically prohibit the use, possession, concealment,
transportation, promotion, or sale of any of the following:
• Alcoholic beverages.
• Marijuana and other illegal drugs, look-alikes and designer drugs.
• Drug paraphernalia.
• Controlled substances such as medications when usage is abused or when the
substance is possessed without proper prescription labeling.
To be under the influence of any of the above substances while working on the
Smith College
Project Construction Master Safety
Program Guidelines Manual 6
duties, the Owner reserves the right to request additional site safety management
assistance, including the appointment of another full-time, site dedicated, qualified
safety professional. The Safety Representative's duties shall include, but are not
limited to:
• Conducting and documenting at least daily, safety and health inspections of the
Contractor's site.
• Ensuring Subcontractor compliance to all applicable safety and health
requirements of the Guidelines and the Plan.
• Verifying and documenting safety and health orientations for employees, visitors,
and vendors.
• Monitoring employee compliance with applicable safety and health requirements.
• Coordinating workplace injury, illness, and property damage reports.
• Training and advising personnel on safety and health regulations, inspections, and
activities.
• Providing information to employees regarding emergency response duties and
procedures.
• Attending and participating in project safety and toolbox meetings.
• Verifying and documenting safety and health meetings.
• Maintaining the Contractor's Safety Bulletin Board.
• Posting safety notices, bulletins, and emergency telephone numbers in designated
areas.
• Interpreting safety and health requirements for the Contractor.
1.2.5 Safety Auditor
The Safety Auditor, hired by the OCIP Administrator to assist the Owner in
assuring that the Contractor implements its safety program, will monitor
compliance with applicable safety and health regulations including Federal, State,
and local standards and the Plan. The Safety Auditor's duties shall include:
• Reviewing the submitted Plan for compliance to the Guidelines.
• Reporting unsafe working conditions, or safety hazard exposures, when
observed, to the Safety Representative or Contractor management.
• When deemed necessary, notifying the Contractor of non-compliance with
requirements of the Plan. Notification shall be in writing with copies to the
Owner.
• Reviewing incident reporting and claim information submitted by the Safety
Representatives for completeness.
• Evaluating accident frequency and severity data, and recommend appropriate
corrective action as necessary.
• Providing quarterly reports to the Owner, containing an evaluation of the status of
the program and of accident frequency and severity.
• Assisting the Contractor with investigation of safety related incidents.
• Participating and assisting in Contractor's training efforts, including occasional
safety meetings and "Tool Box" meetings.
• Providing assistance with OSHA Construction Safety Requirement interpretations.
Smith College
Project Construction Master Safety
Program Guidelines Manual 5
Subcontractors, vendors, and visitors. In this regard, supervisors have the highest
level of management responsibility for ensuring workers conduct their work in a
safe and efficient manner. The supervisory responsibility for safe performance
requires that supervisors be trained in hazard recognition and safe work practices,
and have the skills to convey these elements to the worker.
The Plan must address safety and health responsibilities at all levels of supervision.
These responsibilities shall include, but not be limited to the following:
• Providing safety supervision during all work shifts.
• Providing an effective administrative and managerial structure to administer the
Plan.
• Implementing hazard prevention in all aspects of job planning.
• Instructing employees in the recognition and avoidance of hazards on the
worksite.
• Verifying that the employees are trained in the recognition and avoidance of
hazards on the worksite.
• Enforcing the requirements of the Plan.
• Encouraging the active participation of employees in safety meetings.
• Developing and implementing procedures for proper treatment, investigation,
documentation, and reporting of all employee injuries and illnesses.
• Taking appropriate corrective action when unsafe acts or conditions are identified.
• Maintaining open lines to communicate management and employee safety
concerns effectively.
• Maintaining all equipment in safe condition.
• Issuing appropriate personal protective equipment and training employees in its
use.
• Performing or assisting in the investigation of all incidents.
• Cooperating fully with the Safety Auditor .
• Monitoring employee safety and health.
1.2.4 Designation of Safety Representative
The Contractor shall propose, in writing, a member of its organization to serve as
Safety Representative, who will be responsible for enforcing the Contractor's safety
and health obligations and its Plan. The Safety Representative shall be an on-site,
full-time member of the Contract supervisory staff. This person's name and
qualification shall be submitted to the Safety Auditor by the Contractor. In
addition, each Subcontractor shall also be required by the Contractor to designate a
responsible supervisory representative to assist the Safety Representative in the
performance of duties described below.
The Safety Representative shall have authority to correct immediately unsafe
conditions and/or unsafe acts throughout all phases of the contract, including those
involving Contractors, Subcontractors, employees, visitors, vendors, and the general
public. The Safety Representative shall be involved in the construction planning
process. In the event of substandard performance by the Safety representative in its
Smith College
Project Construction Master Safety
Program Guidelines Manual 4
1. Administration & Organization
1.1 Purpose and Scope
The Contractor shall develop and implement a written, site-specific, safety and
health plan (the "Plan") for its work under the Project. The Contractor shall
establish an administrative and organizational structure for implementing its Plan.
1.2 Duties and Responsibilities
1.2.1 Contractor Requirements
The Contractor shall comply with all applicable Federal, State, and local safety
requirements and its Plan. Upon receipt of a notice by the Owner or the Safety
Auditor of non-compliance under its Plan, the Contractor shall initiate corrective
actions as soon as possible.
1.2.2 Contractor's Safety and Health Plan
The Contractor shall submit its Plan to the Safety Auditor for review within fifteen
(15) days of selection and conditional designation for Contract award. The Plan,
which shall include details commensurate with the work to be performed, must
clearly describe the Contractor's commitments for meeting its obligations to provide
a safe and healthy work environment for its employees and Subcontractor
employees, and its obligations to protect vendors, visitors, and members of the
general public. The Plan shall reference Federal OSHA standards, and any other
rules or regulations applicable to the Smith College Construction Project, including
state and local requirements.
In fulfilling its obligation to develop and implement the Plan, the Contractor is
required to follow the Guidelines. The Plan shall specifically describe operations to
be conducted, and whether this work will be self-performed or subcontracted. A
brief description of the expected hazards of each task should be given, followed by
steps to control these hazards. The Contract Safety Planning Guide (Appendix
A) should be used as a template in identifying and describing construction
operations, expected hazards, and planned safety controls for all activities
under the Contract. The Safety Auditor is available for assistance in all phases of
Plan development and implementation.
The Contractor's contractual safety and health requirements and these Guidelines
will be highlighted during the Pre-Construction Conference. The Plan shall be
revised by the Contractor on an as-needed basis and will be submitted to the Safety
Auditor immediately for review.
1.2.3 Contractor Management Responsibilities
The Contractor is responsible for providing safety supervision of its employees,
Smith College
Project Construction Master Safety
Program Guidelines Manual 3
be responsible for thorough safety and loss control training and instruction of its
employees.
The objective of this policy is to establish, throughout the entire Project, that the
prevention of accidents and protection of property is paramount and, shall,
therefore, be made top priority and obtain the active support and participation by
Contractors and Subcontractors.
PROJECT OBJECTIVES
The Guidelines have been created to coordinate the elimination or reduction of
hazards and risks associated with the construction project, prevent accidents, reduce
employees' injuries, prevent damage to property, promote maximum efficiency, and
effect savings by the reduction of unplanned business interruption.
Active participation by the Owner, The Contractor, Contractor management,
supervisory staff and employees will make the Project not only effective, but also
successful by coordinating the participants' efforts in performing the following
tasks:
• Provide a safe environment for employees to perform high quality work.
• Use safety planning as a tool to reduce bodily injury and property damage.
• Provide inspections to locate and abate unsafe conditions and practices.
• Protect the public and property immediately adjacent to all construction sites.
• Educate and train employees through:
i. New hire orientation;
ii. Safety meetings,
iii Safety training (i.e., Hazard Communication, Fall Protection,
Lockout/Tagout, Etc.);
IV. Mandatory personal protective equipment programs;
V. Injury reporting and record keeping to maintain up-to-date accident
experience information, trend analysis, etc.
vi. Using accident investigation information to abate deficiencies and
eliminate any additional losses.
Smith College
Project Construction Master Safety
Program Guidelines Manual 2
Project Construction Master Safety Program Guidelines
FOREWORD
Smith College Construction Safety Program Guidelines (the "Guidelines") have
been compiled to set forth safety and health requirements to be utilized by
Contractors performing work under the Smith College Project, (the "Project"). The
Guidelines specifically include required elements of a site-specific safety and health
plan which must be developed by Contractors working on the Projects included in
the Owner Controlled Insurance Program("OCIP") established by Smith College.
The information and standards summarized in these Guidelines were compiled from
sources believed to be reliable. It cannot be assumed that this material includes
every loss potential, code violation or exception to good practice and, therefore, is
not guaranteed.
It is solely the Contractor's responsibility to ensure that its site-specific safety and
health plan is in conformance with the provisions of the Guidelines and standards
set forth under the Williams-Steiger Occupational Safety and Health Act of 1970 as
amended, and any other federal, state and local safety and health standards as they
apply. The Contractor shall ensure that each of its Subcontractors complies with
the requirements of these Guidelines.
It should also be emphasized that, as with all other aspects of the work, the
Contractor's selection of means and methods is his own, and that any and all
suggestions contained in these Guidelines are only representative of the types of
techniques and practices which the Contractor may choose to employ on this
project.
Smith College Project Policy Statement
The principles of safety and loss control included in the Guidelines reflect a
determination by Smith College (the "Owner") to prevent injuries to the general
public and workers, as well as to prevent damage to property and equipment.
The Owner considers no phase of construction or administration of greater
importance than accident prevention, and asserts that accidents which result in
personal injury and damage to property and equipment represent needless waste and
loss. It shall be the policy of the Owner to conduct all operations safely and thereby
prevent injuries to persons and damage to property.
Planning for safety shall start with the design and continue through purchasing,
fabrication and construction in all phases of the Project. All practical steps shall be
taken to maintain a safe place to work. The Contractor must accept the
responsibility for the prevention of accidents on work under its direction and shall
Smith College
Project Construction Master Safety
Program Guidelines Manual 1
5. Hazard Communication
5.1 Purpose and Scope
5.2 Responsibilities
5.3 Hazard Communication Program (HCP)
5.4 Hazard Communication Training
5.5 Record Keeping
6. First Aid and Medical Services
6.1 Purpose and Scope
6.2 Staffing
6.3 Reporting
6.4 Transportation
6.5 Local Emergency Telephone Numbers
7. Incident Investigation, Reporting, and Record Keeping
7.1 Purpose and Scope
7.2 Notification
7.3 Investigation
7.4 Documentation and Reporting
7.5 Doctor/Lost Time Cases
7.6 OSHA 200 Log
7.7 Monthly Accident Summary
7.8 Inspections by Regulatory Agencies
Appendix
A. Contractor Safety Planning Guide
B. Project Forms
B.1 Contractor Incident Investigation Form
B.2 Contractor Safety Survey Checklist
B.3 Weekly Toolbox Meeting Sign-In Sheet
B.4 Contract First Aid Log
B.5 OSHA 200 Log - Summary of Occupational Injuries and Illnesses
B.6 Safety Program Notification /Contact List
B.7 Monthly Contract Accident Summary
Smith College
Project Construction Master Safety
Program Guidelines
Table of Contents
i. Forward
ii. Policy Statement
iii. Program Objectives
1. Administration and Organization
1.1 Purpose and Scope
1.2 Duties and Responsibilities
1.2.1 Contractor Requirements
1.2.2 Contractor Site Specific Safety and Health Plan
1.2.3 Contractor Management Responsibilities
1.2.4 Designation of Contractor Safety Representative
1.2.5 Safety Auditor
2. Hazard Control
2.1 Purpose and Scope
2.2 Supervisory Control
2.3 Employee Involvement in Hazard Identification
2.4 Substance Abuse Policy
2.5 Weapons and Controlled Items
2.6 Disciplinary Sanctions
2.7 Personal Protective Equipment (PPE)
2.8 Special Hazardous Work Procedures and Job Hazard Analysis
2.9 Community Public Protection
2.10 Dust/Debris Control Plan
3. Emergency Work Procedures
3.1 Purpose and Scope
3.2 Site Specific Procedures
4. Safety and Health Training
4.1 Purpose and Scope
4.2 Training Elements
4.2.1 Contract Safety Orientation
4.2.2 Weekly Toolbox Safety Meetings
4.2.3 Contractor Safety Meetings
4.2.4 Hazard Communication Training
4.2.5 Safety Orientation for Supervisors
4.2.6 Documentation Retention
Smith College
Project Construction Master Safety
Program Guidelines
s
w
Project Construction Master Safety
Program Guidelines
Smith College
Owner Controlled Insurance Program
Note: All Contractors are responsible for providing a
copy of this manual to their subcontractors.
Owner: Smith College
OCIP Administrator: Acordia
A. Workers' Compensation Premium:
Class Code Description Straight Time WC Rate WC Premium
On site Payroll
Deviation(if applicable)
Increased Employers Liability
WC Experience Modification(Attach Copy)
Construction Class Credit(Attach Copy)
Standard Premium
ARAP(if applicable)
Less other discounts(Describe)
Total Discounted WC Premium
DIA Assessment
Total WC Cost
B. General Liability limit currently purchased = $ Million
Payroll/Revenue(circle one) X Rate = GL Premium
Amount: X =
C. Umbrella Liability limit currently purchased = $ Million
Payroll/Revenue(circle one) X Rate = Umbrella Premium
X =
Note: If Umbrella limit and cost noted above is less than$2,000,000,indicate cost to raise your
limit to$2,000,000 ADDITIONAL COST $
Person providing this information: Name: Phone:
The Deductive Alternative for the provision of the OCIP is offered as follows:
Workers' Compensation($1,000,000 Employers Liability)$.
General Liability($1,000,000 limit) $_
Products/Completed Operations
(3 Yr. After Substantial Completion) $_
Umbrella/Excess Liability($2,000,000 limit) $.
TOTAL INSURANCE COST: $.
Overhead&Profit on Insurance Premium: $
TOTAL INSURANCE DEDUCTION: $.
SIGNED BY: TITLE:
PRINT NAME: DATE:
***NOTE: It is recommended this form be completed by the Contractor's/Subcontractor's insurance broker/agent,or copies
be furnished to such party for review and/or information.
Contractor's/Subcontractor's Insurance Broker/Agent:
Company Name: Telephone#:
Contact Person: Date Prepared:
21
T:5 Colleges/Smith/Contract/2/2/01
A -
Owner Controlled Insurance Program
Insurance Information Form
Contractor Name: Phone#:
Address: Fax#:
Payroll Contact: Phone#:
Insurance Contact: Fax#:
Subcontractor To:
Project Name: Contract#:
Regular Workers' Compensation Insurer:
Experience Rating Date&Policy Effective Date):
Interstate Bureau ID#:
Federal Employer ID# (If Applicable)
AGREEMENT
Contractor/Subcontractor hereby assigns,transfers and sets over absolutely unto the Owner its right, title and interest to
any and all returns of premium, dividends, discounts, or other adjustments to any Owner Controlled Insurance Program.
This assignment shall pertain to the policies as now written and as subsequently modified, rewritten or replaced in the
Owner's insurance company, including any additional amount or coverages as a result thereof The
Contractor/Subcontractor also assigns,its right of cancellation of all insurance policies provided to the
Contractor/Subcontractor by the Owner. This assignment is only valid for insurance policies whose premiums have been
paid by the Owner on behalf of such Contractor/Subcontractor.
The Contractor and Subcontractor(s)are required to provide information about their insurance rates and coverage's to
enable the Owner to estimate and document the projected insurance costs for all work related to the performance of their
contract. Special Note: This is an initial estimate only. The final insurance cost will be subject to review and
audit of actual insurance policy(ies) rate information, actual audited payrolls and revenues for the initial award
plus any additive amendments/Change Orders. At final or interim audit any additional insurance deductions will
be collected from the Contractor, or Subcontractors of any and all tiers via change order. If an audit warrants,
additional insurance credits will be paid to the Contractor or Subcontractors of any and all tiers via change
order.
INSURANCE COST VERIFICATION FORM
20
T:5 Colleges/Smith/Contract/2/2/01
(a) In any emergency affecting the safety of persons or property,or in the event of a claimed
violation of any federal or state safety or health law or regulation,arising out of or in any way
connected with the work or its performance,the Contractor shall act immediately to prevent
threatened damage, injury or loss and to remedy said violation.Failing such action the Owner or
its designee may immediately take whatever steps it deems necessary including,but not limited
to, suspending the work as provided in the General Conditions of the Contract for Construction.
(b) The Owner or its designee may offset any and all costs or expenses of whatever nature, including
attorneys'fees, paid or incurred by the Owner or its designee(whether such fees are for in-house
counsel or counsel retained by the Owner), in taking the steps authorized by Section 3.3 above
against any sums then or thereafter due to the Contractor. The Contractor shall defend,
indemnify and hold the Owner, its officers,agents, employees and the O.C.I.P. Administrator
harmless against any and all costs or expenses pursuant to this Section 3.3,by whomsoever
incurred. If the Contractor shall be entitled to any additional compensation or extension of time
claimed on account of emergency work not due to the fault or neglect of the Contractor or its
Subcontractors or Sub-subcontractors, it shall be handled as a claim as provided for in the
General Conditions of the Contract for Construction.
Section 3.4 OWNER'S STANDARDS:
(a) The Owner and its designee reserves the right,but assumes no duty,to establish and enforce
guidelines and to make the appropriate changes in the Construction Master Safety Program
Guidelines,for the protection of persons and property and to review the efficiency of all
protective measures taken by the Contractor. The Contractor shall comply with all guidelines
and changes made by the Owner or its designee. The issuance of any such guidelines or changes
by the Owner or its designee shall not relieve the Contractor of its duties and responsibilities
under this Contract,and the Owner or its designee shall not thereby assume, nor be deemed to
have assumed, any such duties or responsibilities of the Contractor.
19
T:5 Colleges/Smith/Contract/2/2/01
In any and all claims against those indemnified hereunder by any employee of the Contractor,
any Subcontractor of any tier or anyone directly or indirectly employed by any of them or anyone
for whose acts any of them may be liable,the indemnification obligation under this 3.1.6 shall
not be limited in any way as to the amount or type of damages,compensation or benefits payable
by or for the Contractor or any Subcontractor of any tier under any workers'compensation act,
disability benefit or other employee benefit acts.
11.7 PRE-QUALIFICATION CRITERIA FOR GENERAL CONTRACTORS AND SUBCONTRACTORS
(a) Any General Contractor or sub-contractor regardless as to tier with a Workers' Compensation
Experience Modification factor as promulgated by the Workers' Compensation Rating Bureau of
105%or less will be eligible to participate in the OCIP and the project. If a General Contractor
or sub-contractor, regardless as to tier, has a modification over 106%the Owner may include
such General Contractor or sub-contractor in the OCIP and the project provided that the General
Contractor or sub-contractor is approved by the Owner or its designee. The Owner or its
designee will evaluate the General Contractor's or sub-contractor's adverse modification to
determine any mitigating circumstances, such as but not limited to, a single loss causing a high
modification, etc.
3.1.8 ALTERNATIVE/LIGHT DUTY WORK AVAILABILITY
(a) Contractor shall endeavor to provide alternative work or light duty for injured employees with
temporary physical restrictions.
Section 3.2 PROTECTION OF WORK AND PROPERTY/RESPONSIBILITY FOR LOSS:
3.2.1 CONTRACTOR'S PROTECTION OF WORK
(a) The Contractor shall,throughout the performance of the work, maintain adequate and continuous
protection of all work and temporary facilities against loss or damage from whatever cause, shall
protect the property of the Owner and third parties from loss or damage from whatever cause
arising out of the performance of the work, and shall comply with the requirements of the Owner
or its designee and its insurance carriers,and with all applicable laws, codes, rules and
regulations,with respect to the prevention of loss or damage to property as a result of fire or
other hazards.
The Owner or its designee may,but shall not be required to, make periodic inspections of the
Project site. In such event, however, the Contractor shall not be relieved of its aforesaid
responsibilities and the Owner or its designee shall not assume, nor shall it be deemed to have
assumed, any responsibility otherwise imposed upon the Contractor by this Contract.
3.2.2 SURFACE OR SUBSURFACE WATER
(a) Surface or subsurface water or other fluid shall not be permitted to accumulate in excavations or
under the structures except where required by the Contract Documents for the Project. Should
such conditions develop or be encountered,the water or other fluid shall be controlled and
suitably disposed of by means of temporary pumps,piping,drainage lines, ditches,dams or other
methods approved by the Owner or its designee in writing,and in accordance with all regulatory
requirements. The proposed location and coordination of temporary channels and conduits
diverting accumulated water from the Project site shall be submitted to the Owner or its designee
for its prior written approval. All such work shall be done as a reimbursable cost of the work.
Section 3.3 EMERGENCIES:
18
T:5 Colleges/Smith/Contract/2/2/01
3.1.3 CONTRACTOR'S DESIGNATION OF SAFETY REPRESENTATIVE.
(a) In accordance with the requirements of the Construction Master Safety Program Guidelines, the
Contractor shall designate a qualified member of its organization at the Project site,whose duties
shall be to enforce the Contractor's safety programs, to assure compliance with this Article 3 and
to prevent accidents. This person's name and qualifications shall be submitted to the Owner or
its designee in writing by the Contractor for approval. The Contractor shall further cause each
of its Subcontractors of any tier to designate a responsible supervisory representative to assist the
Contractor's representative in the performance of its duties as described above.
3.1.4 SUSPENSION OF CONTRACTOR'S WORK
(a) Should the Contractor fail to provide a safe area for the performance of the Work or any portion
thereof, the Owner or its designee shall have the right,but not the obligation, to suspend work in
the unsafe area. All costs of any nature(including,without limitation, overtime pay, liquidated
damages or other costs arising out of delays)resulting from the suspension,by whomsoever
incurred, shall be borne by the Contractor.
3.1.5 CONTRACTOR'S ASSURANCE OF SAFETY EQUIPMENT.
(a) The Contractor and each subcontractor of every tier shall provide to each worker on the Project
site the proper safety equipment for the duties being performed by that worker and will not
permit any worker on the Project site who fails or refuses to use the same. The Owner or its
designee shall have the right,but not the obligation,to order the Contractor to send a worker
home for the day, or to discharge a worker,for his/her failure to comply with safe practices or
anti-substance abuse policies, and the Contractor shall promptly comply with all such orders.
3.1.6 CONTRACTOR'S INDEMNITY OF THE OWNER FOR CONTRACTOR'S NON-COMPLIANCE
WITH SAFETY PROGRAM.
(a) Contractor recognizes that it has sole responsibility to assure its Safety Program is implemented
and to assure its construction services are safely provided. The Contractor shall indemnify,
defend and hold the Owner and its designee harmless,from and against any and all liability
(whether public or private),penalties(contractual or otherwise), losses, damages, costs, attorneys'
fees,expenses,causes of action,claims or judgments resulting,either in whole or in part,from
any failure of the Contractor,its Subcontractors of any tier or anyone directly or indirectly
employed by any of them or for whose acts any of them may be liable,to comply with the
provisions of this Article 3. The Contractor shall not be relieved of its responsibilities under this
Article 3 should the Owner or its designee act or fail to act pursuant to its rights hereunder. The
Owner and the OCIP Administrator shall not assume, nor be deemed to have assumed, any
responsibilities otherwise imposed upon the Contractor by this Contract,by virtue of providing
the Project Construction Master Safety Program Guidelines.
Contractor shall not raise as a defense to its obligation to indemnify under this 3.1.6 any failure
of those indemnified hereunder to assure Contractor operates safely, it being understood and
agreed that no such failure shall relieve the Contractor from its obligation to assure safe
operations or from its obligation to so indemnify. The Contractor also hereby waives any rights
it may have to seek contribution,either directly or indirectly,from those indemnified hereunder.
17
T:5 Colleges/Smith/Contract/2/2/01
ARTICLE 3.
CONTRACTOR'S SAFETY PROGRAM TO ENSURE PROTECTION OF
PERSONS AND PROPERTY
Section 3.1 CONTRACTOR'S SAFETY PROGRAM:
3.1.1 CONTRACTOR'S RESPONSIBILITIES.
(a) The Contractor shall be responsible for initiating, maintaining and supervising safety,property
loss prevention and anti-substance abuse precautions and programs in connection with the work.
Contractor shall provide all protection to prevent injury to all persons involved in any way in the
work and all other persons,including,without limitation,the employees,agents, guests,visitors,
invitees and licensees of the Owner who may visit the job site or be affected by the work. These
precautions shall include,but in no event be limited to: (1)those set forth in the most current
provisions of the Project Construction Master Safety Program Guidelines,which is incorporated
by reference as a Contract Document and which the Owner will have on file before bid opening,
and which will be provided to the successful bidder after award; (2)the posting of danger signs
and personal notification to all affected persons of the existence of a hazard of whatever nature;
(3)the furnishing and maintaining of necessary traffic control barricades and flagman services;
(4)the use, storage, removal or disposal of required explosives or other hazardous materials only
under the supervision of qualified personnel and after first obtaining permission of all applicable
governmental authorities; (5)and the maintenance of adequate quantities of both hose and
operable fire extinguishers at the Project site. The Contractor shall set forth in writing its safety,
property loss prevention and anti-substance abuse precautions,programs, and action plans in
connection with the work and submit the same to the Owner or its designee for review. The
Contractor shall not be permitted on the Project Site for the performance of work until these
precautions,programs and plans have been reviewed by the Owner or its designee. The Owner
or its designee may,but shall not be obligated to,make suggestions and recommendations to the
Contractor with respect thereto.
3.1.2 COMPLIANCE OF WORK, EQUIPMENT, AND PROCEDURES WITH ALL LAWS.
(a) All work,whether performed by the Contractor or its Subcontractors of any tier, or anyone
directly or indirectly employed by any of them, and all equipment, appliances, machinery,
materials,tools and like items incorporated or used in the work, shall be in compliance with and
conform to: (a)all applicable laws,ordinances, rules,regulations and orders of any public,
quasi-public or other governmental authority relating to the safety of persons and their protection
against injury, specifically including,but in no event limited to,the Federal Occupational Safety
and Health Act of 1970, as amended, and all rules and regulations now or hereafter in effect
pursuant to said Act; and(b)all rules, regulations and requirements of the Owner or its designee
and its insurance carriers relating thereto. In the event of conflicting requirements,the more
stringent shall govern.
16
T:5 Colleges/Smith/Contract/2/2/01
Section 2.16 SUBROGATION AND WAIVER:
(a) Contractor shall require all policies of insurance that are in any way related to the Work and that
are secured and maintained by Contractor and all tiers of Subcontractors,to include clauses
providing that each underwriter and carrier shall waive all of its rights of recovery,under
subrogation or otherwise, against the Owner,the O.C.I.P. Administrator,their officers,agents
and employees, the Contractor,and all tiers of Subcontractors.
(b) Contractor waives all rights of recovery against the Owner,the O.C.I.P. Administrator,their
officers, agents and employees, and all Subcontractors regardless of tier which Contractor may
have or acquire because of deductible clauses in or the inadequacy of limits of any policies of
insurance that are in any way related to the Work and that are secured and maintained by
Contractor.
(c) Each Contractor shall require all tiers of Subcontractors to waive the rights of recovery in the
same manner(as waived in the preceding paragraph by Contractor)against the Owner, the
O.C.I.P. Administrator,their officers, agents and employees, Contractors,and other
Subcontractors regardless of tier.
Section 2.17 COVERAGE DETERMINED BY POLICY:
(a) The coverages referred to above are set forth in full in the respective policy forms, and the
foregoing descriptions of such policies are not intended to be complete,or to alter or amend any
provision of the actual policies, and in matters,if any, in which the said description may be
conflicting with such instruments,the provisions of the policies of the insurance shall govern.
Section 2.18 MISCELLANEOUS:
2.18.1 CONTRACTOR'S OTHER CONTRACT OBLIGATIONS.
(a) Nothing contained in Article 2 or 3 of this"Attachment to Construction Specification" shall
relieve the Contractor,and its Subcontractors of any tier,of their respective obligations to
exercise due care in the performance of their duties in connection with the Work or to complete
the Work in strict compliance with the Contract.
2.18.2 FURTHER O.C.I.P. INFORMATION.
(a) At the time of pre-bid conference,the Owner will make its O.C.I.P. Administrator available to
bidders so that they may resolve any questions they may have about the O.C.I.P. The Owner will
also have on file prior to bid opening, a more detailed description of the O.C.I.P. as set forth in a
booklet listing the Contractor's Insurance Guidelines. The successful bidder will be provided a
copy of and must satisfy these guidelines.
15
T:5 Colleges/Smith/Contract/2/2/01
(b) For insurance purposes, each Contractor agrees, and will require each Subcontractor to agree: (1)
to keep and maintain an accurate and classified record of its payroll, (2)to furnish to
Administrator and to the insurance company or companies full and accurate payroll data and
information in accordance with the requirements of the insurance company or companies,and(3)
to permit its books and records to be examined and audited periodically by the insurance
company or companies or Administrator and their respective representatives.
(c) Prior to the respective parties'commencement of the Work, Contractor shall furnish and cause
each Subcontractor at any tier to furnish to Administrator or their designees, in a form
satisfactory to them,an estimate of labor cost(listed by Standard Workers'Compensation
Insurance classification)to be incurred in connection with the Work at the Project site by each
Subcontractor, and the total price due each Subcontractor under its contract.
(d) Contractor shall furnish each bidding and negotiating Subcontractor,vendor, supplier, material
dealer or other party a copy of this Article 2 describing the insurance requirements for the
Contractor and Subcontractors of all tiers under the O.C.I.P.,and shall require each to impose
the same requirement with respect to their subcontracting and procurement procedures.
Section 2.15 NOTICES,COSTS,AND LOSSES:
(a) All policies of insurance that either Contractor(s), Subcontractors, or the Owner is required to
secure and maintain under the terms of this Agreement shall be endorsed to provide that the
insurance company shall notify the Owner, Contractor, and the Named Insured, at least thirty
(30)days prior to the effective date of any cancellation or modification of such policies.
(b) The Contractor and its subcontractors shall not be permitted on the Project site for the
performance of work until the OCIP Administrator issues appropriate certificates of insurance.
Prior to the date on which Contractor or any Subcontractor, regardless of tier, commences
performance of its part of the Work, Contractor shall cause to be furnished to the Owner
certificates of insurance maintained by Contractor and each such Subcontractor in connection
with the performance of the Work. As and when the Owner may direct, copies of the actual
insurance policies, or renewals or replacements thereof, shall be submitted to the Owner and
shall be in form and content acceptable to the Owner.
(c) The cost of the premiums for the insurance specified above to be obtained by the Owner will be
paid for by the Owner,and the Owner shall receive and pay, as the case may be, all adjustments
in such costs,whether by way of dividends or otherwise. Each Contractor shall execute such
instruments of assignment as may be necessary to permit Owner's receipt of such adjustments and
shall cause all Subcontractors covered by such insurance to do the same.
(d) The cost of any losses sustained because of clauses that specify Contractor deductible amounts in
any of the insurance policies furnished by the Owner shall be paid by the Owner. If the Owner-
provided O.C.I.P. policies described in Subsections 2.1.2 and 2.1.3 have deductible amounts
above the Contractor deductible amounts, such excess amounts shall be paid by the Owner
provided that Contractor shall be responsible for losses greater than policy limits.
(e) Payments by the insurer for all losses covered under the All Risk Builder's Risk policy,as
specified in Section 2.1.3,will be made to The Owner. The Owner will make monies from the
Builder's Risk policy available to the contractor for rebuilding work damaged by covered perils.
14
T:5 Colleges/Smith/Contract/2/2/01
performed by ontractor,shall likewise.be imposed upon,assumed and performed by each of its
Subcontractors.
13
T:5 Colleges/Smith/Contract/2/2/01
2.12.5 UMBRELLA LIABILITY:
Insurance for operations AWAY FROM THE PROJECT SITE, and to cover such liability
arising when on the project site but explicitly not covered by Owner provided insurance pursuant
to Section 2.1 (c) (iii)through(vi),by the Contractor or Subcontractor of any tier as referenced in
Subsections 2.12.3 and 2.12.4 and for all operations referenced in Subsection 2.12.1. Total limits
of$2,000,000 each occurrence.
Section 2.13 CONTRACTOR RESPONSIBILITY TO ASSURE VENDORS TO JOBSITE HAVE
INSURANCE:
(a) The Contractor, or its Subcontractor of any tier, shall require their respective vendors, suppliers,
material dealers, truckers(whether owners or operators) and others who merely transport,pick-
up, deliver or carry materials,personnel,parts or equipment or any other items or persons to or
from the Project site to maintain the following insurance:
(i) Workers'Compensation Insurance providing coverage for Statutory Limits of the
Workers'Compensation Laws of the applicable jurisdiction,with Coverage B -
Employer's Liability,to limits of not less than One-Million Dollars($1,000,000),
insuring operations of the party required to furnish same performed in connection with
the Work at the Project site.
(ii) Automobile Liability Insurance covering all owned, non-owned and hired automobiles,
trucks and trailers of the respective parties required to provide and maintain this
insurance. Such insurance shall provide coverage not less than that of the Standard
Comprehensive Automobile Liability policy in limits not less than One Million Dollars
($1,000,000) Combined Single Limit each occurrence for bodily injury and property
damage.
(iii) General Liability Insurance for all operations(including products liability for any
product manufactured, assembled or otherwise worked upon away from the Project site
unless such manufacturing or assembly is called for in the Contract Documents)in a
form providing coverage not less than that of the Standard Commercial General
Liability insurance policy form("Occurrence Form")for operations of the party required
to furnish same, including hazards of operations(including explosion,collapse and
underground coverage), elevators, independent contractors,products and completed
operations,with contractual liability coverage(for any contracts related to the Work)for
claims arising out of the Work hereunder for personal injury,bodily injury and property
damage in a policy or policies of insurance such that the total available limits combined
shall not be less than One-Million Dollars($1,000,000)combined single limit.
(iv) Other. Owner reserves the right to add or subtract coverages required by the Contractor.
If such additions or deletions are made, an equitable adjustment to the contract amount
shall be made by change order.
(v) The Contractor shall require its subcontractor's compliance with the foregoing
requirements.
Section 2.14 CONTRACTOR OBLIGATIONS:
(a) The Contractor shall not violate, or knowingly permit to be violated, any conditions of the
policies of insurance provided by the Owner under the terms of the contract issued pursuant to
this specification,and shall at all times satisfy the requirements of the insurance companies
issuing the same. All requirements imposed by the policies referred to above which are to be
12
T:5 Colleges/Smith/Contract/2/2/01
(b) The insurance may be provided in a policy or policies,primary and excess, including the so-
called umbrella or catastrophe form. As and when the Owner may direct copies of the actual
insurance policies or renewals or replacements thereof shall be submitted to the O.C.I.P.
Administrator in form and content acceptable to the O.C.I.P. Administrator. Liability covered
shall be as stated below,unless,prior to commencement of any work,written approval is granted
by the Owner, acting through its Administrator,for variance from those limits.
2.12.1 AUTOMOBILE LIABILITY INSURANCE:
(a) Insurance covering all owned, non-owned and hired automobiles,trucks and trailers of the
respective parties required to provide and maintain automobile liability coverage. Such
insurance shall provide coverage not less than that furnished under the Standard Comprehensive
Automobile Liability policy form and in limits not less than, as respects Contractor and all tiers
of Subcontractors, One-Million Dollars($1,000,000) Combined Single Limit each occurrence for
bodily injury and property damage. Such insurance shall cover occurrences both at and away
from the Project site.
2.12.2 AIRCRAFT LIABILITY:
(a) If aircraft of any kind is used by the Contractor, any tier of Subcontractor or by anyone else on
their behalf,the Contractor or Subcontractor shall maintain, or cause the operator of the aircraft
to maintain, aircraft public liability insurance insuring passengers and the general public against
personal injury,bodily injury or property damage arising from aircraft owned,used, operated or
hired in connection with the Work by the Contractor, Subcontractor or anyone else, in limits of
Ten-Million Dollars($10,000,000)Combined Single limit for any one occurrence,each aircraft.
2.12.3 GENERAL LIABILITY:
Insurance for operations AWAY FROM THE PROJECT SITE, and to cover such liability
arising when on the project site but explicitly not covered by Owner provided insurance pursuant
to Section 2.1(c) (iii)through(vi),by the Contractor,or any tier of Subcontractor(including
products liability for any product manufactured, assembled or otherwise worked upon away from
the Project site unless such manufacturing, assembly or otherwise is called for by the Contract
Documents between the Owner and Contractor),under a form providing coverage not less than
that of the Standard Commercial General Liability insurance policy form("Occurrence Form")
for operations of the party required to furnish same, including hazards of operations(including
explosion, collapse and underground coverage), elevators,independent contractors,products and
completed operations,for claims arising out of the Work hereunder for personal injury,bodily
injury and property damage in policy or policies of insurance such that the total available limits
combined shall not be less than One-Million Dollars($1,000,000)per occurrence.
2.12.4 WORKERS' COMPENSATION:
(a) Insurance in Statutory Limits of the Workers' Compensation Laws of the applicable jurisdiction,
with Coverage B--Employer's Liability,to limits of not less than One Million Dollars
($1,000,000), covering operations AWAY FROM THE PROJECT SITE, and to cover such
liability arising when on the project site but explicitly not covered by Owner provided insurance
pursuant to Section 2.1 (c) (iii)through(vi), of the Contractor or any tier of Subcontractor.
11
T:5 Colleges/Smith/Contract/2/2/01
(b) If the Contractor or any of its Subcontractors of any tier should fail to comply with their
respective obligations,under this specification, the Owner may withhold any payments due the
Contractor until such time as the Contractor and its Subcontractors of any tier shall have
performed their obligations to the Owner's reasonable satisfaction.
Section 2.12 CONTRACTOR-PROVIDED INSURANCE NECESSARY FOR THE WORK,BUT
OUTSIDE THE O.C.I.P.:
(a) Each Contractor shall, at all times during the period in which the contract award pursuant to this
specification is in force and effect,provide and maintain insurance, and shall require all
Subcontractors of any tier to provide and maintain insurance, of the type and in limits as set forth
below in Subsections 2.12.1 to 2.12.4. Except as otherwise provided in Subsection 2.12.1, this
insurance is intended to cover employee injury,personal injury,bodily injury and property
damage liability for Project Work performed away from the Project site and to cover such
liability arising when on the Project site but explicitly not covered by Owner-Provided insurance
pursuant to Section 2.1(c) (iii)through(vi). Such insurance shall name the parties required to
secure same as insureds and shall be in a form and issued by companies acceptable to the Owner.
Such insurance shall contain a defense of suits provision. The submitted policy shall contain
provisions, either in the original policy or by endorsement, substantially as follows:
"(i) Notwithstanding any inconsistent statement in the policy to which this
endorsement is attached,or any endorsement or certificate now or hereafter attached
hereto, it is agreed that the Owner,the O.C.I.P. Administrator,their officers, agents and
employees, (and such other persons or interests as the Owner may specifically designate)
are additional insureds hereunder, and that coverage is provided for all operations,uses,
occupation, acts and activities of the insured under the Contract for Construction and
under any amendments, modifications,extensions or renewals of said Contract for
Construction, regardless of whether liability is attributable to the insured or a
combination of the insured and an additional insured. The requirements of this
paragraph do not apply to Subsection 2.12.4.
(ii) The policy to which this endorsement is attached shall not be canceled or reduced in
coverage until the Owner has been given thirty(30)days prior written notice by
registered mail addressed to the Owner;
(iii) The coverage provided by the policy to which this endorsement is attached is
primary coverage and any other insurance carried by the Owner is excess coverage;
(iv) In the event one of the named or additional insureds incurs liability to any other
named or additional insured, this policy shall provide protection for each named or
additional insured against whom a claim is or may be made, in the same manner as if
separate policies had been issued to each named or additional insured. Nothing
contained herein shall operate to increase the company's limit of liability. The
requirements of this paragraph do not apply to Subsection 2.12.4.
(v) Notice of occurrences or claims under the policy shall be made to the person
designated by the Owner."
10
T:5 Colleges/Smith/Contract/2/2/01
Section 2.9 ALTERNATIVE INSURANCE:
(a) In the event the Owner for any reason is unable to furnish,or after commencement of work elects
not to furnish or to continue to furnish, the insurance as specified in this Article,and upon thirty
(30)days written notice from the Owner, the following shall be required:
(i)Contractor shall secure at Owner's cost and thereafter maintain during the
performance of this Agreement all or any part of the insurance described in this Article
2 as specified by Owner, and the Owner shall no longer be obligated to furnish that
part of the insurance specified.
(ii)AII insurance secured by Contractor or its Subcontractors pursuant to the Owner's
requirement under the provisions of this Section 2.9 shall be in policies subject to the
Owner's approval, (acting through its OCIP Administrator)as to form,content, limits of
liability, cost and issuing company.
Section 2.10 PROCEDURES AND SERVICES:
(a) The Owner shall formulate and publish its statement of procedures and services relating to the
insurance coverages to be provided pursuant to this Article. The Contractor shall fully comply
with, and shall require its Subcontractors of any tier to fully comply with,all of said plans,
procedures and services, including but not limited to, completion of all necessary applications for
coverage,prompt and full compliance with all audit requests and claim reporting procedures, and
full compliance with the safety,loss prevention and loss control programs implemented by, or at
the request of,the Owner.
Section 2.11 COOPERATION:
(a) The Contractor and each of its Subcontractors of any tier for whom insurance is provided by the
Owner pursuant to this Article shall:
(i)Fumish to the OCIP Administrator,its designees or the insurance carriers all
information and documentation which the OCIP Administrator may reasonably require
from time to time in connection with the issuance of any policies,pursuant to this
agreement, in such form and substance as the Administrator may prescribe;
(ii)Furnish to the OCIP Administrator, its designees or the insurance carriers certified
payroll and accident summary reports as required once a month on the forms provided
by the OCIP Administrator and any payroll records required to assist the carriers in any
audits. The Contractor will be required under this subsection to segregate its respective
reports relating to the Project from records relating to any other work which it may be
performing and for which insurance is not provided by the Owner pursuant to this
specification;
(iii)Promptly comply with the recommendations of the insurance carriers so that said
insurance carriers will continue to provide the coverage to be maintained by the Owner
pursuant to this Article at a reasonable premium.
9
T:5 Colleges/Smith/Contract/2/2/01
Section 2.5 OWNER'S RIGHT TO AUDIT:
(a) The Contractor hereby warrants to the Owner the accuracy of the information provided on the
"O.C.I.P. Insurance Information Form" and agrees that the Owner, its insurance carriers and/or
the O.C.I.P. Administrator may audit the records of the Contractor and its subcontractors to
confirm the accuracy of all insurance information provided, including,without limitation,any
affect on insurance resulting from changes in the Work. If an audit warrants, additional
insurance deductions will be collected from the Contractor, or Subcontractors of any and all tiers.
If an audit warrants,additional insurance credits will be paid to the Contractor or Subcontractors
of any and all tiers. The Contractor further warrants and agrees that the Owner is entitled to all
credits in O.C.I.P. insurance premiums which accrue from the audit of Contractor's records
related to the Owner provided coverage. Contractor acknowledges that even if the Project
described in this specification is included under the O.C.I.P., Contractor will be required to
provide those insurance coverages described in Section 2.12 below. Contractor agrees that the
Owner may audit all records related to such policies
Section 2.6 ASSIGNMENT:
(b) The Contractor,and each of its Subcontractors of every tier, shall assign to the Owner all return
premiums,premium refunds, dividends and other monies due or to become due in connection
with the insurance which the Owner provides or the Contractor provides pursuant to Section
2.12 below, to the extent such monies result from Contractor's inaccurate assumptions or from
changes in the Work, all of which shall inure to the benefit of the Owner. The Contractor and
said Subcontractors of any tier shall execute such other further documentation as may be required
by the Owner to effectuate this assignment.
Section 2.7 O.C.I.P. CLAIMS:
(a) The Contractor and its Subcontractors of any tier shall assist and cooperate in every manner
reasonably necessary in connection with the adjustment of all claims arising out of the operations
conducted under,or in connection with,the Project,and shall cooperate with the insurance
carrier or carriers of the Owner,the Contractor and its Subcontractors in all litigated claims and
demands which arise out of said operations which the insurance carrier or carriers are called
upon to adjust or resist.
Section 2.8 O.C.LP. COVERAGES:
(a) Although the scope of coverages afforded under this program may provide coverage beyond the
scope required in the Contractor's agreement awarded pursuant to this specification,the Owner
makes no warranty or representation that such broad coverage will remain in effect throughout
the duration of the work. The Owner further does not warrantor represent that the O.C.I.P.
coverages constitute an insurance portfolio which adequately addresses all the risk faced by the
Contractor or its Subcontractor(s). The Contractor and Subcontractors of every tier shall satisfy
themselves as to the existence, extent and adequacy of the O.C.I.P. coverages prior to the
commencement of work on the Project under any contract.
8
T:5 Colleges/Smith Contract/2/2/01
Section III: Excess/Umbrella Liability
Use the current rates applicable to on-site project operations as outlined in your
current policy. To determine the premium, multiply the rate by the amount of
exposure for this project. The exposure will normally be"per$100 of payroll"or
"per$1,000 of sales." Please see your policy for verification. Excess/Umbrella
Liability Insurance limits of$2,000,000 per occurrence must be provided.
This$2,000,000 limit requirement may be lowered as applicable to subcontractors of
all tiers upon agreement between Contractor and OCIP Administrator. OCIP
Administrator's agreement will not be unreasonably withheld.
Section IV: Completed Operations(3 Years)
Use the current rates applicable to on-site project operations as outlined in your
current policy. To determine the premium, multiply the rate by the amount of
exposure for this project. The exposure will normally be "per$100 of payroll" or
"per$1,000 of sales." Completed Operations extension of three(3)years must be
provided.
Section V: Lower-Tier Contractor Premiums and Allocated Losses(excluding Automobile)
If lower-tier contractors are included in your bid,please provide them with a set of
these forms and instructions. Attach the lower-tier contractors'forms to your
submission. The aggregate premiums must equal the amount report in this section.
NOTE: Please see section 2.1(c)to determine which entities are not eligible for
coverage under the OCIP. If lower tier contractors have a deductible or retention
level within their insurance program,they must also include allocated losses,
which they would expect within that deductible/retention on this project.
Section VI: Total Premiums
Sum sections I, II,III,IV and V.
Section VII: Overhead&Profit on Insurance Premiums
Please enter the overhead and profit your firm adds to the insurance premiums.
Section VIII: Total Amount Excluded from Bid
This represents the amount of insurance being excluded from the bid price due to the
coverages being provided under the Owner Controlled Insurance Program. This
amount also represents the amount added to the Contract Sum in the event the
Owner elects not to include this project in its OCIP.
(e) It is recommended that this form be referred to your agent/broker if your estimating staff is
unfamiliar with this method of premium computation. Carefully review the"AGREEMENT"
portion of this form because it allows for bid adjustments if major variances exist between the
estimated and audited payrolls.
7
T:5 Colleges/Smith/Contract/2/2/01
Section 2.3 CONTRACTOR RESPONSIBILITY TO REPAIR DEFECTIVE OR DAMAGED WORK:
(a) Until final acceptance of the Work by the Owner pursuant to this specification, the Contractor shall have
full and complete charge and care of, and shall bear all risk of loss, injury or damage to,the Work or any
portion thereof(specifically including Owner-furnished supplies, equipment or other items to be utilized
in connection with, or incorporated in,the work)from any cause whatsoever.
(b) The Contractor shall rebuild, repair, restore and make good all losses, injuries or damages to the Work or
any portion thereof(specifically including Owner-furnished supplies,equipment or other items to be
utilized in connection with,or incorporated in, the Work)before final acceptance of the Work. Such
rebuilding, repair or restoration shall be at the Contractor's sole cost and expense provided, however, the
Owner shall make available the monies from the Builder's Risk policy(ies)which the Owner carries for
reconstruction.
Section 2.4 NAMED INSUREDS AND INFORMATION TO BE PROVIDED BY BIDDERS:
(a) The Named Insureds on the Owner-provided O.C.I.P. policies shall include the Owner,the O.C.I.P.
Administrator,their officers,agents and employees, Contractors and Subcontractors of any tier(but
excluding suppliers,vendors, materialmen,truckers or haulers)for whom the Owner has agreed to furnish
an O.C.I.P.
(b) Coverage shall be limited to the Project site and any locations incidental thereto.
(c) Bidders shall complete and include with their bid the Owner-Controlled Insurance Program Insurance
Information Form set forth in Exhibit A hereto to provide estimated payroll, premium data and such
other information as the OCIP Administrator deems necessary. The form is provided with the bid
documents so that bidders can contact their carriers immediately and raise any questions at the pre-bid
meeting which Contractors or their carriers may have.
(d) Specific Instructions for completing the Contractor's "Insurance Information Form":
Section I: Workers' Compensation
A. For project site operations only, reports the classifications, codes, experience
modifier and rates used in your current workers compensation policy. Provide
the name of your regular workers'compensation carrier,along with your policy
effective dates and Federal Employer ID#.
B. If your regular W.C. program includes a deductible or retention level,
include allocated losses you would expect within that deductible retention
on this project.
Section II: General Liability
A. Use the current rates applicable to on-site project operations as outlined in your
current policy. To determine the premium, multiply the rate by the amount of
exposure for this project. The exposure will normally be "per$100 of payroll"
or"per$1,000 of sales." Please see your policy for verification. General
Liability Insurance limits of$1 Million per occurrence must be provided.
B. If your regular G.L. program includes a deductible or retention level,
include allocated losses you would expect within that deductible retention
on this project.
6
T:5 Colleges/Smith/Contract/2/2/01
(b) Coverage will include all materials, supplies and equipment that are intended for specific installation in
the project,while such materials, suppliers and equipment are located at the Project Site,in Transit or
while temporarily located away from the Project Site for the purpose of repair,adjustment or storage at the
risk of one of the insured parties.
(c) This insurance will not include coverage for any tools or clothing of workmen or any tools,equipment,
protective fencing, scaffolding,temporary structures,forms and equipment owned, rented or used by the
Contractor or Subcontractors or any tier and used in the performance of the Work,unless such items are
specifically identified in the Contract Documents between The Owner and Contractor and their value is
included in the cost of the work.
(d) The Owner, its OCIP Administrator,their officers, agents and employees, and Consultant shall not be
liable or responsible for any loss or damage whatever to the items excluded in the above paragraph and
the Contractor shall indemnify and hold harmless The Owner,their officers,agents and employees,and
Consultant, other Contractors and Subcontractors from any claims or causes of action brought by any
person or parties as a result of loss or damage to such excluded items.
(e) The Builder's Risk policy will be endorsed(a)waiving the carrier's rights of recovery under subrogation
against the Owner, its OCIP Administrator,their officers, agents and employees, and Consultant,
Contractor and Subcontractors whose interest is insured under such policy,and(b) so as to provide that
the insurance company will not cancel such insurance without giving at least ninety(90)days prior
written notice to The Owner and any additional insureds as their interests may appear.
(f) Contractors shall be liable for a deductible of$5,000 each loss for fire,extended coverages and vandalism
and malicious mischief and$5,000 each loss for all other perils unless the Contract Documents provide
differently.
Section 2.2 CONTRACTOR RETAINS VARIOUS OBLIGATIONS:
(a) The furnishing of said insurance by the Owner shall in no way relieve, or limit, or be construed to relieve
or limit,the Contractor or Subcontractors of any tier of any responsibility or obligation whatsoever
otherwise imposed by this Contract. Nothing contained in this Article 2 of the"Attachment to
Construction Specification" shall be construed as: (1)limiting in any way the extent to which the
Contractor may be held legally responsible for damages to persons or property,or(2)limiting the
indemnity obligations which Contractor has to Owner pursuant to other sections of the Contract for the
Work awarded under this specification. The intent of the O.C.I.P. is simply to assure that Contractor has
been provided the insurance coverage indicated up to the limits and with the contractor deductible
indicated.
5
T:5 Colleges/Smith/Contract/2/2/01
(e) Owner assumes no obligation to provide insurance other than that evidenced by the policies referred to in
Subsections 2.1.1, 2.1.2, 2.1.3, and 2.1.4. The Owner, however, reserves the right to furnish insurance
coverage of various types and limits, provided that such coverage shall not be less than that specified
above (so long as such insurance and limits are reasonably available in the insurance market)and
provided that the costs of such insurance shall be borne by the Owner.
2.1.1 WORKERS' COMPENSATION INSURANCE.
(a) Providing coverage for the statutory limits required by the Workers'Compensation Laws of the applicable
jurisdiction, including coverage for the benefits provided under the United States Longshoremen and
Harbor Workers'Act,the Jones Act and other extensions,with Coverage B -Employer's Liability,
including Maritime, to limits of not less than One Million Dollars($1,000,000),which will cover
operations of the Owner, the O.C.I.P. Administrator, Contractor and Subcontractors of all tiers performed
in connection with the Work at the Project site. Coverage under the Broad Form All States extension is
also included. This insurance is primary for all occurrences at the Project site.
2.1.2 LIABILITY INSURANCE (EXCLUDING AUTOMOBILE AND PROFESSIONAL LIABILITY).
(a) Under a form providing coverage not less than that available under a Commercial General Liability
insurance policy, and insuring the Owner,the O.C.I.P. Administrator,the Contractor, Subcontractors of
all tiers and such other persons or interests as the Owner may designate, in connection with the
performance of the Work; including coverage for hazards of operations(including explosion, collapse
and underground coverage),elevators, independent contractors,employees as additional insureds,
completed operations for three years after substantial completion of the Work,contractual liability
coverage(for contracts related to the work)and personal injury liability coverage for claims arising out
of the Project hereunder, and for personal injury,bodily injury and property damage, in a policy or
policies of insurance such that the total available limits to all insureds combined will not be less than
Fifty Million Dollars($50,000,000), combined single limits;provided that the Owner, in its sole
discretion, may decide the size of any deductible so long as Contractor will not be liable to pay more than
the first Two Thousand Five Hundred Dollars($2,500)of the deductible for each occurrence.
(b) Contractor may be liable, at its expense, to a maximum of Two Thousand Five Hundred Dollars($2,500)
each occurrence to the extent losses payable are attributable to its intentional acts or omissions, or the
intentional acts or omissions of its Subcontractors of any tier or any other entity or person for whom it
may be responsible. The Contractor's deductible shall encompass the costs of defense, including court
costs and attorney's fees.
(c) The insurance provided under the O.C.I.P. will not extend coverage for products liability to any insured
party,vendor, supplier, material dealer or others for any product manufactured, assembled or otherwise
worked upon away from the Project site,unless such manufacturing or assembly is required by the
contract between the Owner and its Contractors.
2.1.3 ALL RISK BUILDER'S RISK,INCLUDING TRANSIT.
(a) Insuring the interest of The Owner, Contractor and Subcontractors of all tiers, including coverage on an
"All Risk"basis, including,but not limited to, coverage against fire, lightning,wind damage, hail,
explosion, riot or civil commotion,aircraft, and other vehicles,collapse and coverage available under the
so-called Builders Risk. The polic(ies)for such insurance shall be secured and maintained by the Owner
in a form and amount not less than the full replacement value of the new and existing building(s)included
in the Project. Contractor is aware that insurance companies providing"All Risk" Builder's Risk
insurance usually excludes several classes of unusual risk. Contractor agrees that the term of the Builder's
Risk policy shall define any exclusion,which may exist.
4
T:5 Colleges/SmitivContract/2/2/01
ARTICLE 2.
INSURANCE OBLIGATIONS OF OWNER AND CONTRACTOR,
IF THE OWNER AWARDS A CONTRACT AND PROVIDES O.C.I.P. INSURANCE
Section 2.1 INSURANCE PROVIDED BY THE OWNER:
(a) Prior to commencement of the Work,the Owner, at its sole option and cost, shall have the right to secure
and thereafter maintain, except as otherwise provided herein, the insurance coverages described in
Subsections 2.1.1, 2.1.2and 2.1.3 at all times specified in this Article 2, covering as insured parties the
Owner, Contractor,its Subcontractors of all tiers and such other persons or interests as the Owner may
designate in connection with the performance of the Work, and with limits not less than those specified
for each coverage.
(b) Contractor agrees to furnish as a reimbursable cost of the Work the insurance described in the Contract
Documents specifically Article 8 of the Agreement and Article 11 of the General Conditions and
Supplementary General Conditions.
(c) No insurance coverage provided by the Owner shall extend to the activities or products of the following:
(i) Any person and/or organization that fabricates and/or manufactures products, materials and/or
supplies away from the project site(s),unless such manufacturing or assembly is required by the
contract between the Owner and its Contractors.
(ii) Any architect, engineer or surveyor and their consultants except where required by Contract
Documents.
(iii) Truckers, materialmen,vendors, suppliers,and owner/operators(independent contractors),
whose
Operation(s)and/or employee(s)is/are engaged solely in the loading, hauling and/or unloading
of material, supplies and/or equipment to or from the project-site(s).
(iv) Any employee(s)of an enrolled or non-enrolled Contractor or Subcontractor of any tier,
including
Employee(s)of truckers, materialmen,vendors, suppliers,and owner/operators(independent
contractors),which is/are engaged solely in the loading, hauling and/or unloading of material,
supplies and/or equipment to or from the project-site(s).
(v) Any employee(s)of an enrolled Contractor and Subcontractor of any tier, that does not work
and/or generate payroll at the project site(s).
(vi) Any employee(s)of an enrolled Contractor and Subcontractor of any tier,that occasionally visits
the project site(s)to make deliveries,pick up supplies and/or personnel,to perform supervisory
and/or progress inspections,or for any other reason.
(d) Unless herein otherwise specifically indicated,the policies set forth in Subsections 2.1.1, 2.1.2 and 2.1.3
below shall cover only those operations of the insured parties performed at the Project site or sites
incidental to the Work called for in the contract between the Owner and the Contractor.
3
T:5 Colleges/Smith/Contract/2/2/01
ARTICLE 1.
DEFINITIONS
1.1 "Owner"means the Owner,Financier or Sponsor of the Project.
1.2 "OCIP Administrator" means the administrator retained by the Owner to implement and administer the
O.C.I.P. In part, the administrator will assure that Contractor implement and effectively manages a
Contractor Safety Program and assure that Contractor and insurance carriers effectively manage claims
resulting from construction of the Project. The O.C.I.P. Adminstrator designated for this project is
Acordia Northeast.
1.3 "Contractor" means the person or entity awarded the contract for the Project described in this
specification. Contractor understands that all Contractors obligations set forth in the Owner's O.C.I.P.,
whether performed directly by Contractor or indirectly by its Subcontractors,are the responsibility of
Contractor. Contractor shall assure that all Subcontractors of all tiers satisfy all safety program,claim
management and applicable insurance requirements. Whenever this specification establishes obligations
for Contractor, it shall also be deemed to establish obligations for Subcontractors. For emphasis, this
specification sometimes expressly refers to both Contractor and Subcontractors. The term "Contractor"
refers to the entity awarded the contract pursuant to this specification. Vendors, suppliers,fabricators,
material dealers,drivers and others who merely transport,pick up, deliver or carry materials,personnel,
parts or equipment or any other items or persons to or from the Project site shall not be considered
Contractor(s), or Subcontractors of any tier for the purpose of insurance coverage.
1.4 "Construction Manager" means the engineering/design firm hired by the Owner to manage the process
of construction.
1.5 "Owner-Controlled Insurance Program" ("O.C.I.P.")means an insurance delivery method that
assures the Contractor all Subcontractors of any tier, and all other contractors on the construction Project,
are insured for Statutory Workers'Compensation,Employers Liability and Commercial General Liability,
and such other coverages as the Owner may in writing specifically add or delete for the construction
Project. The O.C.I.P. for the construction Project for which this contract is awarded is more fully
described in Articles 2 and 3 below.
1.6 "Project" means the construction of the particular improvement set forth in this specification.
1.7 "Safety Manager" means the Safety Manager hired by the Administrator to assist the Owner in assuring
that Contractor implements its safety program.
1.8 "Subcontractor" means a person or entity furnishing labor and/or material to the Project pursuant to a
contract either directly with the Contractor as that party is defined in Section 1.3 hereinabove or as a sub-
subcontractor of any tier.
2
T:5 Colleges/Smith/Contract/2/2/01
ATTACHMENT TO CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATIONS
SUMMARY OF THE OWNER-CONTROLLED INSURANCE PROGRAM
SETTING FORTH
CONTRACTOR INSURANCE REQUIREMENTS AND
CONTRACTOR SAFETY PROGRAM OBLIGATIONS
This attachment shall apply only if the Owner,Prior to executing a construction contract,states in
writing that this project shall be included in its owner controlled insurance program. If this project
is included in the owner controlled insurance program,this attachment shall supplement the terms
and conditions applicable to the Contractor which are set forth in the Contract Documents.
INTRODUCTION
The Owner is implementing an Owner-Controlled Insurance Program("O.C.I.P." or"Program")for many
of its construction projects,which will be bid during the term of the O.C.I.P. In an O.C.I.P., the Owner
purchases most of the insurance to cover the Worker's Compensation losses, and General Liability losses,
(and possibly other coverages for other risks)associated with construction of the projects. This insurance
covers the Owner, Contractor and Subcontractors of all tiers,but not vendors coming onto the
construction site. An O.C.I.P. allows the Owner to obtain a lower project cost,an effective contractor
safety program, and efficient management of claims resulting from the Project. Depending on the
insurance market, Contractor expertise, type of project,and other factors, Contractors can sometimes
provide insurance for a construction project at a price competitive to the Owner's expected O.C.I.P. cost.
Even under an O.C.1.P., the Contractor still provides some coverage as described more particularly below.
For the above reasons, the Owner has selected this Project as a candidate for its O.C.I.P. Bidders are
required to provide a base bid representing the bidder's total cost assuming that the Owner provides those
Project insurance coverages set forth in more detail in Article 2 below. To be responsive to the bid
specification,bidders must also include a bid for the cost of the insurance coverages described in the
General Conditions. The successful bidder must provide said insurance coverage if, and only if,the
Owner decides not to include this Project in its O.C.I.P. at time of award.
By bidding on the Work set forth in this specification and accepting a contract for such work,bidder
agrees to(1)accept the Owner's O.C.I.P. if the Owner includes this Project in the O.C.I.P. and awards a
contract based on the base bid,or(2)construct the Project and provide all insurance necessary if the
Owner decides not to include this Project in its O.C.I.P. Bidder recognizes that the O.C.I.P.benefits the
successful bidder and the Owner by reducing overall costs. Bidder recognizes that a critical element in
the success of the O.C.I.P. is the successful bidder's obligation to protect persons and property on the
construction and related sites so that claims may be avoided and quickly and effectively managed if they
occur. Accordingly,bidder agrees that it has fully reviewed and agrees to the Safety Program obligations
set forth in Article 3. Bidder also specifically agrees to all the covenants and conditions set forth in
Articles 2 and 3 if the Owner includes this Project in the O.C.I.P.
1
T:5 Colleges/Smith/Contract/2/2/01
12:14 1*137310786 LIMGREN SHARPLES PC PAGE 03
21 v ME
21 v Rim
R-IOA P-9
W-90 DUN
DMRRPP law ReWAnM TO
FMNZ- (40) 732-43H rAx: (40)721-oved cmCKM DM PARSOM ANNEX SK
Renovations to Parsons Annex
Smith College
Northampton, Massachusetts
such as use of respirators and similar OSHA requirements must be strictly adhered to
during demolition of plaster. Disposal may be by conventional methods.
C. Lead Paint: Testing of painted surface on the interior and exterior reveal lead contents
in several materials. Work practices, disposal methods and compliance with regulatory
requirements are mandatory.
Section 01700: Insert "Project Construction Master Safety Program Guidelines" attached
herewith.
Section 06200: page 3: Insert the following after 2.2.1): Tongue and groove decking: 5/4x4 VG
fir; premium or select grade.
Section 08550: page 3: Item 2.1.A.b, change to read "Marvin Windows, Clad Ultimate Series.
Section 09640: page 3: Change paragraph 2.2 A to read: Finish new and existing floors after
sanding with paste filler and one coat high gloss polyurethane, touch sanded followed with one
coat satin polyurethane varnish.
Section 09952: Change footer in this section to read 09952 PVC WALL COVERINGS.
Section 10801: page 5: Change the first sentence of item E to read: "Sanitary Napkin Disposal:
Provide one unit for each watercloset(4 total) complying with the following:"
Section 10801: page 5: delete item F. Mirror unit.
Section 10801: page 6: Change the first sentence of item K to read: "Mop and Broom: Provide
mop and broom holder at all service sinks complying with the following:"
Project No. 00058 April 10, 2001 ADDENDUM No.1.4
Renovations to Parsons Annex
Smith College
Northampton, Massachusetts
P1.2 Refer to sketch SK-PI for new floor drain, standpipe,vents and underslab piping.
P1.2 Add the following note to the water service entrance: Relocate existing meter and connect
new 2" domestic water line to 2 inch tee provided by Sprinkler Sub-Contractor.
E2.1 Add the following note: Furnish and install 10 additional duplex outlets and branch
circuit wiring on the first floor to be located in the field by the Owner.
E2.2 Add the following note: Where existing duplex outlets occur in wood baseboards, locate
new duplex outlets in same location.
E2.2 Add the following note: Furnish and install 6 additional duplex outlets and branch circuit
wiring on the second floor to be located in student rooms by the Owner.
E2.3 Add the following note: Where existing duplex outlets occur in wood baseboards, locate
new duplex outlets in same location.
E2.3 Add the following note: Furnish and install 8 additional duplex outlets and branch circuit
wiring on the third floor to be located in student rooms by the Owner.
SPECIFICATIONS:
Supplementary General Conditions, Page 4: Delete ARTICLE 11, INSURANCE in its entirety
and insert SUMMARY OF THE OWNER-CONTROLLED INSURANCE PROGRAM attached
herewith.
Section 01100: page 2; add subparagraph 1.5.A.2.a as follows: Asbestos abatement is required for
pipe insulation in the attic, third floor and for pipe risers on the first and second floor. In
addition, flooring on the first floor and rear stair to the second floor requires abatement.
Contractor will coordinate access to these areas with abatement contractor.
Section 01100: page 3; add paragraph 3.2 SPECIAL PROJECT CONDITIONS as follows:
A. Material Hazards: The Owner has tested materials on the site for hazardous materials.
Where abatement is required a separate contract will be awarded and proceed
concurrent with the Work under this Contract. In addition, certain materials not
required to be abated under controlled conditions exist. The successful low bidder will
work with the Owner to develop a plan for handling and disposal of these materials.
Any additional cost due will be negotiated prior to commencing with the Work based
upon the regulatory requirements that apply. A copy of the materials testing report is
available for review upon request.
B. Existing Plaster: Testing of existing plaster revealed asbestos content in the brown coat
less than required for abatement, however, the dust containment, safety precautions
Project No. 00058 April 10, 2001 ADDENDUM No.1-3
Renovations to Parsons Annex
Smith College
Northampton, Massachusetts
A3.1 Section B3: Add the following note: Typical Footing: 10" deep x 18"wide w/2#5 bars
continuous.
A3.1 Section B3: Add the following note: Typical Foundation Wall Reinforcing: 2-#5 bars Top
and Bottom. See A1.4 for wall thicknesses.
A3.2 Details C3, D3 and D4 add the following note: Typical Slab Reinforcing: 6x6 W2.OxW2.0
WWF; add#4 nosing bar at stairs.
A4.1 Kitchen Elevations: Remove NIC from notes on appliances. See Section 11451 of the
specifications for appliance data.
A4.1 Elevations Tub Room 100B: Change `Fiberglass tub/shower unit' note on Elevation A to
read: PVC wall finish at tub surround.
A4.1 Elevations Tub Room 100B: Change `Fiberglass tub/shower unit' note on Elevation C to
read: New flat trim at wood transom.
A4.1 Elevations Laundry 100L: Change tag reference in Elevation D to read B3/A6.3.
A4.1 Elevations Laundry TOOL: Dimension in Elevation D is for shelf height, not wainscot as
indicated.
A6.1 Delete Room 100HK2 from finish schedule.
A6.1 Add the following note: Prepare rough plaster in third floor student rooms and hallways
for vinyl wall covering by hand grinding, skim coating with plaster and priming.
A6.1 Add the following note to Door F: 6"xl/2" MDF panel shop applied to door by
Architectural Woodwork fabricator one side only.
A6.1 Add the following general note: Provide window shades at all student rooms, 1001- and
100K.
A6.1 Add the following general note: At the first floor, remove electrical boxes in wood
baseboard and patch holes (12 locations).
FP 1.2 Add the following note to the sprinkler service entrance: Provide capped 2" tee ahead of
the backflow preventor for new domestic water service.
FP 1.7 Add the following note to the Dry Pipe Alarm Valve Detail: Pipe all alarm valve drains to
new 3" standpipe provided by the Plumbing Sub-Contractor.
Project No. 00058 April 10, 2001 ADDENDUM No.1-2
I e
Renovations to Parsons Annex
Smith College
Northampton, Massachusetts
ADDENDUM No.1
KUHN RIDDLE ARCHTECTS, INC.
AMHERST,MA 01002
This addendum consists of 4 pages and 1 sketch and two attachments that modify the Drawings
and Specifications and form part of the Contract Documents.
INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS
2.01.B Change the date for receiving bids to read the 19'day of April, 2001.
DRAWINGS
Ll.l Change the following reference tags: Change plan D2 to D5; Change Ramp Detail C2 to
B2; Change details keyed in plan D5 clockwise as follows B5 to C2, B5 to D2 and B5 to D2.
D1.1 Add the following note to the basement plan: Saw-cut and remove existing concrete slab
for new footings, thickened slabs and new underslab piping. See SK Pl for piping locations.
D1.1 Add the following general note: Remove existing carpet in corridors, stairs, student rooms
10 land 102, and public rooms on first floor.
D2.1 Add the following note to the West Elevation: Existing archtop and fixed sidelight
windows to remain.
D2.1 Change the note `Existing Achhtop To Remain' on the North Elevation to read: Existing
archtop and fixed sidelights to remain.
ALL Add the following note between closets 102CL1 and 102CL2: Fixed transom with frosted
glass at top of partition similar to transom in 100T. See A4.1 for size.
A2.1 South and East Elevations: Revise the note for basement replacement windows to read:
New Clad Awning windows in existing opening or modified opening
A3.1 Add tag reference B2/A6.3 to open railings shown in Sections D5, D3 and B5 at the first
floor and new entry.
A3.1 Section D3: Note that the turned down slab is similar to detail D2 on L1.1.
A3.1 Section D3: The stairs from the Basement to New Entry are metal pan stairs clip-angled to
the turned down slab noted above.
Project No. 00058 April 10, 2001 ADDENDUM No.1-1
31 B ' /
t"s PROJECT MANUAL
RENOVATIONS TO PARSONS ANNEX
SMITH COLLEGE
NORTHAMPTON, MASSACHUSETTS
March 19, 2001